Dodge - Durango 2wd - Workshop Manual - 2007 - 2007

Factory Workshop Manual Make Dodge Model Durango 2wd Engine and year V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Accessory Delay Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 Accessory Delay Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 212 Component : RELAY-ACCESSORY DELAY Connector: Name : RELAY-ACCESSORY DELAY Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 85 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 86 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 87 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT INTERNAL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 13 Alarm Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 19 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 22 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 27 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 31 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 32 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 35 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 36 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 37 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Component ID: 179 Component : MODULE-PARK ASSIST Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 2 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY X777 20LG/GY 3-4 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL D777 20WT/GY 5-6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7-8-9-10 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND X772 20LB/TN 11 GROUND Z177 20DG/BK 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 41 Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C2 Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB 4 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 42 5 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY 6 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 7-8-Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 43 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 179 Component : MODULE-PARK ASSIST Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 2 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY X777 20LG/GY 3-4 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL D777 20WT/GY 5-6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7-8-9-10 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND X772 20LB/TN 11 GROUND Z177 20DG/BK 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 44 Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C2 Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB 4 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 45 5 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY 6 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 7-8-Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Park Assist Module (3) is secured with three push-in plastic fasteners through three mounting tabs (2) integral to the module housing to the left inner quarter panel above the left rear wheel housing. The module is concealed beneath the quarter inner trim panel. Concealed within the molded plastic park assist module housing is a microprocessor and the other electronic circuitry of the module. The module housing is sealed to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry. The module software is flash programmable. Two connector receptacles (1) containing terminal pins are integral to the rearward-facing side of the housing. The module is connected to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors of the body wire harness. The park assist module cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 48 Parking Assist Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the park assist module contains the park assist system logic circuits. The module uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is also used for park assist system diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. The module provides voltage to the four park assist sensors located behind the rear bumper fascia and to the park assist display located in the headliner just forward of the liftgate opening header. The module then monitors return inputs from each of the sensors and the display on dedicated hard wired data communication circuits. The sensor inputs allow the module to determine when an obstacle is in the rear path of the vehicle and enables the module to calculate the relative location of the obstacle, and whether the distance to that obstacle is increasing or decreasing. Pre-programmed decision algorithms and calibrations allow the module microprocessor to determine the appropriate park assist system outputs based upon the inputs received from the park assist sensors and electronic messages received from other modules in the vehicle over the CAN data bus. When the programmed conditions are met the module sends electronic messages to the park assist displays over a dedicated serial bus to obtain the proper park assist system visual and audible outputs. The module also broadcasts electronic messages over the CAN data bus to enable the other electronic features of the park assist system. The park assist module microprocessor continuously monitors all of the park assist system electrical circuits and components to determine the system readiness. If the module detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends the appropriate electronic messages to the instrument cluster over the CAN data bus to control operation of certain park assist system audible warnings and textual messages displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). The park assist module receives battery current on a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB). The module receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the body wire harness. These connections allow the module to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist module may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist module or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist module or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist module operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the trim from the left quarter inner panel to access the park assist module (5), which is located behind the power liftgate module (3) to the rear of the C-pillar (2) and above the left rear wheel housing. 3. Disconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) from the park assist module connector receptacles. 4. Remove the three plastic push-in fasteners (4) that secure the module to the left quarter inner panel. 5. Remove the module from the left quarter inner panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 51 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the park assist module (5) to the left quarter inner panel, behind the power liftgate module (3) to the rear of the C-pillar (2) and above the left rear wheel housing. 2. Secure the module to the left quarter inner panel using three plastic push-in fasteners (4). 3. Reconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) to the module connector receptacles. 4. Reinstall the trim onto the left quarter inner panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations Voice Activation Module: Locations Component ID: 175 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 2-3-4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) X722 20LB/TN 6-7-- 8 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (+) X716 20GY/TN 9 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (-) X776 20TN/GY 10 COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT X795 20DG 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 15 VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL X730 20GY/YL 16 MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) X712 20DB/RD 17 MICROPHONE IN (-) X792 20DB/YL 18 HANDS FREE MICROPHONE SHIELD X735 20BK/YL 19 - 20 MICROPHONE FEED X793 20TN/YL 21 SENSOR GROUND X835 20OR/GY 22 GROUND Z939 18BK Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 56 Voice Activation Module: Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 2-3-4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) X722 20LB/TN 6-7-- 8 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (+) X716 20GY/TN 9 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (-) X776 20TN/GY 10 COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT X795 20DG 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 15 VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL X730 20GY/YL 16 MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) X712 20DB/RD 17 MICROPHONE IN (-) X792 20DB/YL 18 HANDS FREE MICROPHONE SHIELD X735 20BK/YL 19 - 20 MICROPHONE FEED X793 20TN/YL 21 SENSOR GROUND X835 20OR/GY 22 GROUND Z939 18BK Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 57 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 62 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 63 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 64 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 67 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 68 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 71 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 72 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 73 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 82 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 83 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 89 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 90 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 91 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 92 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 93 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 94 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 95 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 96 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 97 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 98 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 99 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 100 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 101 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 102 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 103 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 104 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Memory Mirror Description DESCRIPTION There are two Memory Mirror Modules (these are sometimes referred to as Driver Door Modules (DDM) and Passenger Door Modules (PDM) within the memory system. One located in the driver door and one in the passenger door, just behind the door trim panel. The modules send a bus message to the power mirrors to adjust them to a preset position when a memory recall request has been made. The memory mirror modules also act as an interface in each door for electrical functions (door lock switches and door ajar switches). The Memory System makes available for immediate recall personalized preferences of the following: - Automatic temperature control settings. - Outside mirror positions. - Power adjustable brake and accelerator pedal position. - Power seat horizontal, vertical, recliner, and easy entry positions. - Radio push button station selections. The major components of the Memory System are: - Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel. - Driver Memory Mirror Module (DMMM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel. - Passenger Memory Mirror Module (PMMM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel. - Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder. - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key. - Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals. - Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack. - Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack. The memory recall is available at the press of a button on the drivers door trim panel or, by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter if it is programmed to trigger the recall. Radio settings include up to 20 push button presets (10 AM and 10 FM), and the last station selection, even if it is not one of the 20 preset selections. Operation OPERATION The memory mirror module receives input from the door lock switches and sends that message to the cluster for door lock operation (vehicles equipped with memory system only). It also controls the mirror adjustment by receiving input from the mirror switch on the door trim panel. Sensors in the mirrors act as inputs to the memory mirror module in order to position the mirrors to presets by the driver(s). The power supply to the mirrors is supplied by the mirror memory modules. On vehicles equipped with a memory system, the front door ajar switches are inputs to the memory mirror module. The modules use this information for door lock inhibit etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 107 A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linke" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the seat belt is latched. Both driver and passenger modules provide active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) to aid in diagnosis. Both modules are identical in appearance with the exception of an extra ground wire on the driver side memory mirror module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 108 Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Seat Memory Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The scan tool standardization process must be performed on the Memory Seat Module (MSM) any time a new module is installed or the existing module is reflashed. The Memory Seat Module (MSM) is located underneath the driver seat, towards the front and on the outboard side. It is used in conjunction with the other modules in the memory system to recall the seat to one of two preset seat functional adjustments (horizontal, vertical, and recliner). The switch for the memory seat programming and selection mounts on the driver door trim panel. The MSM also controls the adjustable pedals, both for the memory and manual functionality. The adjustable accelerator and brake pedals are available on SLT and Limited models. On Limited, their positioning can be stored for recall by the memory system, allowing for two drivers to have unique, pre-programmed settings. Operation OPERATION POWER/MEMORY SEAT The memory seat module receives input from the 8-way power seat switch, the driver seat position sensors, adjustable pedal control circuits (switch, sensor, and motor), and the data bus circuit. The memory switch, is wired to the memory mirror module which sends the message over the data bus. The memory seat module performs the following functions: - Positions the driver seat (vertical, horizontal, and recliner positions) and adjustable pedals. - Sends the memory save or recall (#1 or #2) command over the data bus circuit to the memory mirror modules, HVAC, and radio. - Provides for "linking" the key FOBs to memory. - Provides for the easy entry/exit feature. - Provides the tilt mirrors in reverse feature When a memory button is pressed (#1 or #2) on the memory switch, the driver door memory mirror module sends a recall message to the memory seat module (MSM). Then the MSM will position the driver seat and adjustable pedals to its preprogrammed location/setting. When the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter button is pressed, depending on which transmitter (#1 or #2), the SKREEM (RKE Receiver) sends the recall request and FOB number (#1 or #2) data message. This RKE transmitter function depends on if the MSM is programmed to trigger the recall (linked FOBs). A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linked" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in any position other than park or the seat belt is latched. A key FOB is "linked" to a memory setting by pressing the "set" button and then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the set button, then by pressing the "lock" button on the selected key FOB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 109 The memory system "Easy Entry and /Exit" feature provides the driver with more room to enter or exit the vehicle. The Easy Entry and Exit feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. The seat will return to the memory position when the driver turns the vehicle's ignition switch out of the LOCK position. The memory system "learns" the seat and adjustable pedal motor maximum end positions when the motor reaches the limit of travel in any direction and stalls. Subsequently, movement will stop just short of that position to avoid extra stress on the motors and mechanisms. If the system learned a maximum position as a result of an obstruction, as for instance if a large object was placed on the floor behind the seat, the system can relearn the "true" maximum position through manually operating the power seat after the obstruction is removed. NOTE: It is normal for the power accessories contained in the memory system to stop at the maximum "learned" position and then continue to the "true" maximum position when the control switch is released and then applied in the same direction a second time. Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information are needed. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature provides for tilting the sideview (outside) mirrors down a predetermined angle, providing a better view of the ground next to the rear portion of the vehicle. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. Operation of the tilt mirrors is as follows: - Sideview mirrors will tilt down when the vehicle transmission is shifted into Reverse. - Sideview mirrors will return to the original position when the vehicle transmission is shifted out of Reverse. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The pedals swing on a large arc, the radius and angle of which were selected on the basis of ergonomic studies, that puts them in the proper position for use by the smaller driver - higher and angled upward as well as rearward. Powered by the small electric motor driving a gear train at each pedal, adjustment is precise, quiet, and smooth throughout the range. A paddle-type switch on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column actuates the electric motor-driven mechanism through the memory seat module (MSM). Pushing up the paddle brings the pedals closer and vice versa. Movement stops when the switch is released. MSM logic prevents pedal adjustment when the automatic speed control (cruise control) is set (controlling speed), and when the transmission is in reverse. This feature protects against a loss of reference position when neither foot is on the pedal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Memory Mirror MEMORY MIRROR MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory mirror module should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 112 Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Seat Memory MEMORY SEAT MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory seat system/module should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Memory Mirror Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from module (1). 4. Remove fasteners (2) and module (1) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position module (1) on door and install fasteners (2). 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to module (1). 3. Install the door trim panel. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 115 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Seat Memory Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 3. Unsnap the memory seat module (4) from the side brackets. 4. Pivot the module upward and disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 5. Pull the module rearward to remove it from the front of the seat frame (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place the module (4) into position making sure the front snaps into the seat frame (3). 2. Connect the memory seat module harness connectors (1). 3. Pivot the module (4) downward and snap it into place in the side brackets. 4. Install the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Using an appropriate scan tool go to the MSM miscellaneous functions and perform the standardization routine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 116 7. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Relay > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Relay: Locations Adjustable Pedals Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 120 Pedal Positioning Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : RELAY-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : RELAY-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A902 18RD 85 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 86 FUSED B(+) A902 18RD 87 - 87A ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations Component ID: 180 Component : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 2 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 3-4 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 5 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 6 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 7 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 124 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C2 Color : # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 5 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 125 6 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 7 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL 8-9-10 - 11 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 12 - 13 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 14 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN 15 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 19 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG 20 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 21 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 22 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY Component Location - 44 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C3 Color : # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 126 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z125 12BK/OR 2 FUSED B(+) A115 12YL/RD Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 127 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 180 Component : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 2 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 3-4 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 5 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 6 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 7 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 128 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C2 Color : # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 5 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 129 6 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 7 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL 8-9-10 - 11 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 12 - 13 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 14 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN 15 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 19 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG 20 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 21 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 22 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY Component Location - 44 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C3 Color : # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 130 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z125 12BK/OR 2 FUSED B(+) A115 12YL/RD Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate system utilize a power liftgate control module (4). This module is located on the left side of the vehicle behind the C-pillar below the quarter glass The power liftgate control module receives and monitors logic inputs from all the power liftgate system switches. This module also contains the software technology to detect liftgate obstructions and stop or reverse the door accordingly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 133 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power liftgate control module contains the electronic circuitry and software used to control the sequence of events for the power liftgate system. This module communicates on the Controller Area Network (CAN) to monitor many different inputs and outputs such as door lock status, transmission gear selector position and vehicle speed. The power liftgate open/close command can be initiated by either one press of the power liftgate overhead console switch or two presses of the key fob power liftgate switch. The overhead switch is hardwired to the power liftgate control module. The key fob, sends a signal out on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. This signal is detected at the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met before applying power to the power liftgate drive unit to start a power cycle. During a power liftgate open or close cycle, if the power liftgate control module detects sufficient resistance to liftgate travel, such as an obstruction in the liftgate's path. The control module will immediately stop liftgate movement and reverse the direction of travel to the full open or closed position. The power liftgate control module has the ability to relearn. After 8 miles have been recorded on the odometer, anytime the liftgate is fully opened and fully closed using the automatic system, the module will learn from its cycle. If a replacement power liftgate component is installed or a liftgate adjustment is made, the module will relearn the effort and time required to open or close the liftgate. This learn cycle can be performed with a Diagnostic Scan Tool or with a complete cycle of the liftgate, using either one of the command switches. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 134 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Testing and Inspection POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL MODULE Any diagnosis of the Power Liftgate System should begin with the use of a diagnostic scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures Information. Inspect the related wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information. Before any testing of the power liftgate system is attempted, the battery should be fully-charged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the left quarter trim panel from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connectors (2) from the power liftgate control module (4). 4. Using molding remover C-4829-A gently pry the clip (1) out of the retaining hole holding the power liftgate control module (4) to the quarter panel. 5. Tilt the top of the module (4) away from the quarter panel and lift upward to disengage the mounting tab from the locating slot (3). 6. Remove the power liftgate control module (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 137 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power liftgate control module (4) into the vehicle. 2. Insert the mounting tab into the locating slot (3) on the quarter panel. 3. Tilt the top of the module (4) toward the quarter panel and firmly press the clip (1) into the retaining hole on the quarter panel. 4. Connect the wire harness connectors (2) to the power liftgate control module (4). 5. Install the left quarter trim panel. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 8. Perform the power liftgate learn cycle. 9. Verify power liftgate system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Component ID: 176 Component : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Connector: Name : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z387 20BK 2 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 3 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 4 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18BR/VT 5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 141 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 142 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 176 Component : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Connector: Name : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z387 20BK 2 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 3 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 4 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18BR/VT 5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 143 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Heated Seat Seat Heater Control Module: Description and Operation Module-Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION The heated seat module (2) is located behind the right rear D-pillar trim (1). The heated seat module has a single electrical connector (3). The heated seat module is an microprocessor designed to use CAN bus messages from the cluster Cabin Compartment Node (CCN) to operate the heated seat elements in both front seats. Operation OPERATION The heated seat module operates on fused battery current received from the ignition switch. The module is grounded at all times through a ground lug on the right rear D-pillar. Inputs to the module include CAN bus messages and standard hardwired 12volt power and ground. In response to those inputs the heated seat module controls the battery current to the heated seat elements. When a heated seat switch CAN bus signal is received by the heated seat module, the module energizes the selected heated seat element. The Low heat set point is about 38° C (100.4° F), and the High heat set point is about 42° C (107.6° F). If the heated seat module detects a heated seat element OPEN or SHORT circuit, it will record and store an diagnostic trouble code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Heated Seat > Page 146 Seat Heater Control Module: Description and Operation Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules (2) mounted in the front face of the second row center floor console (3) operate the heated second row seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated second row seat system. If any of the heated second row seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated second row seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after thirty minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue for another thirty minutes and the system will then be automatically turned off. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 147 Seat Heater Control Module: Testing and Inspection HEATED SEAT MODULE 1. Test the appropriate heated seat element. 2. Test the appropriate heated seat switch. 3. Using a voltmeter, backprobe the heated seat module connector, do not disconnect. Check for voltage at the appropriate pin cavities. 12v should be present. If OK go to STEP 4, if Not, repair the open or shorted voltage supply circuit as required. 4. Using a ohmmeter, backprobe the appropriate heated seat module connector, do not disconnect. Check for proper continuity to ground on the ground pin cavities. Continuity should be present. If OK test the Cabin compartment Node (CCN) cluster using a scan tool for proper heated seat system function. If Not OK, Repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Module-Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the liftgate and remove the upper D-pillar trim from the vehicle. 3. Remove the lower D-pillar trim from the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the heated seat module (2). 5. Unsnap the heated seat module (2) from the D-pillar (1). 6. Remove the heated seat module (2) from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the heated seat module on the D-pillar (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 150 2. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the heated seat module (2). 3. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Check for proper heated seat system operation. 5. Install the upper and lower D-pillar trim to the vehicle. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 151 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules (2) from the rear center floor console (3) by gently prying up from the edge of the switch/module bezel (1). Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 152 1. Align the tabs (1) of the switch/module (2) to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel (1) into the mounting hole in the center console (3) until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 158 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 167 Component : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) (PUMP) A107 12TN/RD 2-3-4-5-6 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT 7-- 8-9 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG 10 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 11 - 12 - 13 GROUND Z107 12BK/DG 14 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 19 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 20DG/LB 20 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 20DG/YL 21 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 22 - 23 - 24 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 25 FUSED B(+) (VALVE) A111 18DG/RD 26 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 27 - 28 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 29 - 30 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 31 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 20VT/WT 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 33 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 20LG/GY 34 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN 35 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 163 36 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B401 20DG 37 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 38 GROUND Z923 12BK Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 164 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 167 Component : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) (PUMP) A107 12TN/RD 2-3-4-5-6 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT 7-- 8-9 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG 10 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 11 - 12 - 13 GROUND Z107 12BK/DG 14 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 19 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 20DG/LB 20 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 20DG/YL 21 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 22 - 23 - 24 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 25 FUSED B(+) (VALVE) A111 18DG/RD 26 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 27 - 28 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 29 - 30 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 31 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 20VT/WT 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 33 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 20LG/GY 34 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN 35 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 165 36 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B401 20DG 37 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 38 GROUND Z923 12BK Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor which handles testing, monitoring and controlling the ABS brake system operation. The ABM is mounted on the top of the hydraulic control unit (HCU). The ABM operates the ABS system and is separate from other vehicle electrical circuits. ABM voltage source is through CKT A111 (fused B+). NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, Perform the ABS verification using a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 168 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation ABS Unit ABS UNIT SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor (CAN C BUS) - G-Sensor (4X4) ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp ESP Unit - (Electronic Stability Program) ESP UNIT - (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM) SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS and ESP warning lights when a ABS system fault is detected. If only the ESP light is illuminated ESP system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. System faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor (CAN C BUS) - Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) (CAN C BUS) - Dynamic Sensor - ESP Off Switch Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 169 - Vacuum Sensor ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp - ESP Warning Lamp - ESP Function Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: ABM module can be removed without removing the HCU unit. 1. Remove the left front tire and wheel assembly. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ABM module. 3. Remove the module mounting screws (2). 4. Remove the module from the HCU (1) on ESP vehicles be careful not to damage the pressure sensor or not to touch the sensor terminals on the HCU side or the contact pads on the ABM side when removing the ABM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 172 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the module on the HCU on ESP vehicles be careful not to damage the pressure sensor or not to touch the sensor terminals on the HCU side or the contact pads on the ABM side when installing the ABM. 2. Install the mounting screws (2) and tighten to 2.5 Nm (22 in. lbs). 3. Perform the ABS verification test with a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 176 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 177 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 178 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Radiator Fan High and Low Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Radiator Fan High Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Radiator Fan High Component ID: 221 Component : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN HIGH Connector: Name : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN HIGH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 85 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 87 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Radiator Fan High > Page 185 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Radiator Fan Low Component ID: 222 Component : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 85 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 87 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Relay Blower Motor Relay: Locations Front Blower Motor Relay Front Blower Motor Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Relay > Page 191 Blower Motor Relay: Locations Rear Blower Motor Relay Accessory Delay Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Blower Motor-Front Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Blower Motor-Front Component ID: 215 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A927 12RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A927 12RD/BR 87 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Blower Motor-Front > Page 194 Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Blower Motor-Rear Component ID: 216 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 85 GROUND Z911 20BK 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 87 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Controls - Front Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the standard front heating-A/C system is a International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The front blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) directly to the front blower motor when equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) system, or the blower motor power module when equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) system. The front blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground circuit through the integrated power module. The front blower motor relay is located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Refer to the PDC label for front blower motor relay identification and location. Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard front blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the battery to control the high current output to the front blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the front blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The front blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the front blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives battery current through a fuse in the PDC at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground circuit through the integrated power module. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current through a fuse in the PDC at all times. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the front blower motor when equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) system, or the blower motor power module when equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) system only when the front blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the front blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The front blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 197 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Controls - Rear Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the rear heating-A/C system is a International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The rear blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the junction block directly to the rear blower motor. The rear blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a voltage signal by the ignition switch. The rear blower motor relay is located in the junction block (JB) in the passenger compartment. Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard rear blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the ignition switch to control the high current output to the rear blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The rear blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the junction block (JB). The inputs and outputs of the rear blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a ground at all times. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current from a fuse in the junction block (JB) through an ignition switch output (run) circuit only when the ignition switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the rear blower motor through the rear blower motor relay output circuit only when the rear blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the rear blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The rear blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Controls - Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the power distribution center (PDC) (1). 3. Open the PDC cover (2). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the inner surface of the PDC cover for rear blower motor relay identification and location. 4. Remove the rear blower motor relay (3) from the PDC. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the inner surface of the PDC cover for rear blower motor relay identification and location. 1. Position the rear blower motor relay (3) into the proper receptacle of the PDC (1). 2. Align the rear blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the PDC cover (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 200 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 201 Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Controls - Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the junction block (JB) (1) on the left side of the passenger compartment behind the cowl side trim panel. 3. Remove the rear blower motor relay (2) from the JB. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the rear blower motor relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the junction block (JB) (1). 2. Align the rear blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the JB receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Reinstall the cowl side trim panel. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations A/C Clutch Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 205 Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 211 Component : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Connector: Name : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A916 20OR/WT 85 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 87 A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT C3 20DB/GY 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C clutch relay (1) is a International Standards Organization (ISO) micro-relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The ISO micro-relay terminal functions are the same as a conventional ISO relay. However, the ISO micro-relay terminal pattern (or footprint) is different, the current capacity is lower, and the physical dimensions are smaller than those of the conventional ISO relay. The A/C clutch relay is located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 208 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard A/C clutch micro-relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) to control the high current output to the A/C clutch field coil. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the A/C clutch field coil. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The A/C clutch relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the A/C clutch relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground input from the PCM through the A/C clutch relay control circuit only when the PCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through a ignition switch output (run-start) circuit only when the ignition switch is in the On or Start positions. - The normally open terminal (87) provides a battery current output to the A/C clutch coil through the A/C clutch relay output circuit only when the compressor clutch relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the A/C clutch relay coil is de-energized. The A/C clutch relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the power distribution center (PDC) (1). 3. Open the PDC cover (2). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the PDC cover for A/C clutch relay location. 4. Remove the A/C clutch relay (3) from the PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 211 Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the PDC cover for A/C clutch relay location. 1. Position the A/C clutch relay (3) into the proper receptacle of the PDC (1). 2. Align the A/C clutch relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the PDC cover (2). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Control Module HVAC: Locations Component ID: 181 Component : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C1 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z961 10BK 3 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 4 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 215 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C2 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 216 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 217 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 181 Component : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C1 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z961 10BK 3 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 4 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 218 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C2 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 219 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description DESCRIPTION A blower motor power module is used on this model when it is equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) heating-A/C system. Models equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) heating-A/C system use a blower motor resistor block, instead of the blower motor power module. The blower motor power module is mounted to the rear of the HVAC housing, directly behind the glove box. The blower motor power module consists of a molded plastic mounting plate with two integral connector receptacles (1). Concealed behind the mounting plate is the power module electronic circuitry and a large finned heat sink (2). The blower motor power module is accessed for service from beneath the right side of the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description > Page 222 Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Front Blower Motor Power Module - Operation OPERATION The blower motor power module is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. A second connector receptacle receives the wire harness connector from the blower motor. The blower motor power module allows the microprocessor-based automatic temperature control (ATC) A/C-heater control to calculate and provide infinitely variable blower motor speeds based upon either manual blower switch input or the ATC programming using a pulse width modulated (PWM) circuit strategy. The PWM voltage is applied to a comparator circuit which compares the PWM signal voltage to the blower motor feedback voltage. The resulting output drives the power module circuitry, which provides a linear output voltage to change or maintain the desired blower speed. The blower motor power module is diagnosed using a scan tool. The blower motor power module cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The heat sink for the blower motor power module may get very hot during normal operation. If the blower motor was turned on prior to servicing the blower motor power module, wait five minutes to allow the heat sink to cool before performing diagnosis or service. Failure to take this precaution can result in possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. If equipped with a trim cover (2), remove the two screws (1) that secure the trim cover over the blower motor power module (3) located below the right side of the instrument panel and remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the two wire harness connectors (1) from the blower motor power module (2). 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor power module to the front HVAC housing (4). 5. Remove the blower motor power module from the front HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal > Page 225 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Front Blower Motor Power Module - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor power module (2) into the front HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor power module to the front HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the two wire harness connectors (1) to the blower motor power module. 4. If equipped with a trim cover (2), install the trim cover over the blower motor power module (3) and install the two retaining screws (1). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit Brake Lamp Relay: Diagrams Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit Component ID: 227 Component : RELAY-STOP LAMP INHIBIT Connector: Name : RELAY-STOP LAMP INHIBIT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY FEED L950 18WT/LG 85 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B45 20DG/LB 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 87 87A BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit > Page 231 Brake Lamp Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper Rear Component ID: 233 Component : RELAY-WIPER REAR Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER REAR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 85 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A44 18RD/OR 87 FUSED B(+) A44 18RD/OR 87A GROUND Z901 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Fog Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 235 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 217 Component : RELAY-FOG LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FOG LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A39 18RD/LG 85 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 86 FUSED B(+) A39 18RD/LG 87 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The front fog lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The front fog lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The front fog lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 238 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The front fog lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the front fog lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the front fog lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a fog lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls front fog lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the front fog lamps through a fog lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the front fog lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The front fog lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Horn Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 242 Horn Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 219 Component : RELAY-HORN Connector: Name : RELAY-HORN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A950 18RD 85 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 86 FUSED B(+) A950 18RD 87 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Park Lamp Relay Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Park Lamp Relay Park Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Park Lamp Relay > Page 247 Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Stop Lamp Inhibit Relay Stop Lamp Inhibit Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 248 Parking Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 220 Component : RELAY-PARK LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-PARK LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A913 6RD 85 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 86 PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT A914 6RD 87 PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT A914 6RD 87A GROUND Z385 20BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The park lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The park lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 251 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the park lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the park lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a park lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls park lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the park lamps through a park lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the park lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The park lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 257 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have two trailer tow relays, one for the trailer right turn and brake lamps and the other for the trailer left turn and brake lamps. The trailer tow relays are conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relays. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. Each relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The trailer tow relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. A trailer tow relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 260 Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The trailer tow relays are electromechanical switches that use a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to trailer brake and turn signal lamps. Within each relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the trailer tow relays include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a right or left trailer tow turn relay control circuit. The FCM controls trailer brake and turn lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the trailer lamps through a right or left trailer tow turn relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the right or left trailer brake and turn lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The trailer tow relays as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relays may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 266 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 267 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 268 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 269 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 270 Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 271 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 272 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 273 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 274 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 275 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 276 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 277 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 278 Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 279 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-110V Inverter Component ID: 166 Component : MODULE-110V INVERTER Connector: Name : MODULE-110V INVERTER Color : # of pins : 9 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A957 16RD 2 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 3 110 VOLT AC LINE 1 P801 20LG 4 GROUND Z920 16BK 4 GROUND Z920 20BK 5 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 6-- 7-8 110 VOLT AC LINE 2 P802 20LG/BK 9-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 282 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 283 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 284 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 285 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 286 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 287 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 288 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 289 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 290 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 291 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 292 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 293 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 294 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 295 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 296 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Integrated Power Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The IPM is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. The power distribution center mates directly with the (FCM) to form the IPM. The (PDC) is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power > Page 299 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Front Control Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The front control module mates to the power distribution center to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the CAN bus circuit. Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the CAN bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing - Air conditioning condenser cooling fan The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It provides a illuminated approach feature that turns the headlamps on when the vehicle is unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, RKE and Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to RKE and VTSS inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It turns off the windshield washer motor after 10 seconds of continuous operation to protect the motor. - It minimizes voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger, and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a link between the CAN bus network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the network for body and interior modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Integrated Power Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. 2. Unsnap cover and remove the B+ terminal nut from the integrated power module (IPM). Remove the B+ cable. 3. Remove the IPM from the retaining bracket (1). 4. Disconnect the connectors from the (IPM). 5. Remove the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) retaining screws. 6. Disconnect the front control module by pulling it straight off the integrated power module. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) to the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 302 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the IPM (1). 3. Install the IPM to the retaining bracket. 4. Install the B+ cable and nut on the IPM B+ terminal. Snap the cover in place. 5. Connect the negative and positive battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 303 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Front Control Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the positive and negative battery cables from the battery. 2. Partially remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment. 3. Remove the front control module retaining screws. 4. Pull the front control module straight from the IPM. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Press the Front Control Module (FCM) onto the Integrated Power Module (IPM). 2. Install the mounting fasteners. 3. Install the IPM. 4. Connect the positive and negative battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay Relay Box: Locations Remote Run Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 308 Relay Box: Locations Run/Start Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 309 Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 310 Relay Box: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 311 Relay Box: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run Remote Component ID: 224 Component : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 314 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 225 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 85 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 86 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 315 Relay Box: Diagrams Junction Block Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 316 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 317 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 318 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 319 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 320 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 321 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 322 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 323 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 324 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 325 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 326 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 327 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 328 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 329 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 330 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 331 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 332 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 333 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 336 Relay Box: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 337 Relay Box: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Relay Box: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 340 Relay Box: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 343 Relay Box: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 350 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 351 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 352 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 353 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 354 Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 355 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 356 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 359 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 360 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 361 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 362 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 363 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 364 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 365 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 366 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 367 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 368 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 369 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 370 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 371 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 372 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 373 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 374 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 375 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 376 Body Control Module: Connector Views Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 377 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 378 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 379 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 380 Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 381 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 382 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 383 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 392 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 397 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 402 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 403 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 404 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 405 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 411 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 416 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 421 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 422 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 423 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 424 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 429 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 430 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 431 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 437 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 438 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 439 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 440 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 441 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 442 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 443 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 444 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 445 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 446 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 447 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 448 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 449 5-- 6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 450 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 451 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 454 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 455 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 456 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 457 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 458 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 459 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 460 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 461 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 462 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 463 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 464 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 465 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 466 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 467 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 468 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 469 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 470 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 471 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 472 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 473 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 474 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 475 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 476 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 477 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 478 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 479 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 480 5-- 6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 481 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 482 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 485 - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 486 - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 487 PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Battery voltage is supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the Run or Start position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 488 Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Signal Ground SIGNAL GROUND Signal ground provides a low noise ground to the data link connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 489 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 490 - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (if equipped with an RE automatic transmission). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 493 SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 494 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen, Select "ECU View" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 495 b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New Fil". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Select "Close"after the download is complete, then select "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller" Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK" l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 10. 9. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "PCM Replaced" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 11. 10. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard" Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 11. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 12. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select ECU View. b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start". f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 13. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 496 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates" 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates." screen: a. Select "Enter part number" Enter the "Part Number"recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration" Select "Next" c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "Flash Download" then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Too" c. When the download is complete, select "Close"and "Back" 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 497 a. Select "ECU View" b. Select More Options" c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller" Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK" g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Functio". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finis" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU Vie" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function" d. Highlight "Learn ETC" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU Vie" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove both wiper arms. 3. Remove wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 4. Remove wiper cowl support (three bolts). 5. Remove air intake tube (four nuts). 6. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (3) from PCM. 7. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4), and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 500 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (2) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (4). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (3) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 5. Install the four 38-way connectors (3) to PCM. 6. Install air intake tube (four nuts). 7. Install wiper cowl support (three bolts). 8. Install wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 9. Install both wiper arms. 10. Connect negative battery cable. 11. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 504 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 507 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 510 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 515 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 218 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A921 18OR/PK 85 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 87 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 518 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 secondsunless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 521 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 525 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 528 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 531 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 537 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 540 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 178 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54B 20WT 5-6-7-- 8-9 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 10 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT 11 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 12 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 18 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG 19 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 20 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 21 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 22 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 23 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 24 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 545 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 546 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB 3 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR 4 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 547 6-7-8-9 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL 10 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 11 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 12 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 18 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 19 - 20 GROUND Z104 20BK/LG 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 26 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE R263 20LB/VT 27 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 28 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 29 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 30 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 31 - 32 - Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 548 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 549 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 178 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54B 20WT 5-6-7-- 8-9 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 10 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT 11 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 12 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 18 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG 19 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 20 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 21 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 22 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 23 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 24 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 550 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 551 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB 3 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR 4 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 552 6-7-8-9 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL 10 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 11 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 12 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 18 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 19 - 20 GROUND Z104 20BK/LG 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 26 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE R263 20LB/VT 27 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 28 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 29 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 30 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 31 - 32 - Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 553 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is secured with three screws to a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel just behind the front seat crossmember and beneath the center floor console in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with four screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (3) printed on the label (2) on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges on three corners. The mounting flange to the right of the connector receptacle has an integral locating pin on its lower surface. Both right side flanges have round mounting holes, while the flange on the left side has a slotted mounting hole. A molded plastic electrical connector (4) with 2 receptacles, one containing 24 terminal pins and the other containing 32 terminal pins, exits the forward facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors of the body wire harness. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 556 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the supplemental restraint system logic circuits and controls all of the supplemental restraint system components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for supplemental restraint system diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the supplemental restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the JB. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw near the center of the instrument panel structural support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the supplemental restraint components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup supplemental restraint system protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. The ORC also monitors inputs from an internal rollover sensor and six additional remote impact sensors located on the left and right front door beams, the inner C-pillars and inner D-pillars to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a supplemental restraint deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. A second safing sensor within the ORC provides confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require supplemental restraint system protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the front seat belt tensioners and either side curtain airbag unit. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any occupant restraint controller diagnosis or service. The occupant restraint controller contains a rollover sensor, which enables the system to deploy the side curtains in the event of a vehicle rollover event. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally rolled during service while still connected to battery power, the side curtain airbags will deploy. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the occupant restraint controller, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The occupant restraint controller contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the supplemental restraints. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the center console from the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 3. Disconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) connector receptacles located on the forward facing side of the module. To disconnect the wire harness connectors from the ORC, depress the release tab and lift the lever arm on each connector. 4. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the ORC to the ORC bracket (4) that is welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Remove the ORC from the floor panel transmission tunnel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 559 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any occupant restraint controller diagnosis or service. The occupant restraint controller contains a rollover sensor, which enables the system to deploy the side curtains in the event of a vehicle rollover event. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally rolled during service while still connected to battery power, the side curtain airbags will deploy. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the occupant restraint controller, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The occupant restraint controller contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the supplemental restraints. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Carefully position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) to the ORC bracket (4) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle and the locating pin on the bottom of the right ORC mounting flange will be engaged into the locating hole in the ORC bracket. 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the ORC to the ORC bracket that is welded onto the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the screws to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). CAUTION: The lever arms of the wire harness connectors for the ORC MUST be in the unlatched position before they are inserted into their connector receptacles on the ORC or they may become damaged. 3. Reconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) to the ORC connector receptacles located on the forward facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches on both connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the center console onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starter Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 564 Starter Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 226 Component : RELAY-STARTER MOTOR Connector: Name : RELAY-STARTER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A923 14RD/OR 85 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)F924 20PK/YL 87 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT T750 14GY/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Starter Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The starter relay is an electromechanical device that switches battery current to the pull-in coil of the starter solenoid when the ignition switch is turned to the Start position. The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. See the PDC cover for relay identification and location. The starter relay is a International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. The starter relay cannot be repaired or adjusted. If faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 567 Starter Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one movable) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed) relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts (normally closed) by spring pressure. When electromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable contact away from normally closed fixed contact, and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed contact. When electromagnetic coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns movable contact to normally closed position. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with electromagnetic coil within relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes produced when coil is de-energized. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Starter Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove cover from Power Distribution Center (PDC) for relay identification and location. 3. Remove starter relay from PDC. 4. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 5. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 570 Starter Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Push down firmly on starter relay until terminals are fully seated into PDC receptacle. 2. Install PDC cover. 3. Connect battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description - Premium System DESCRIPTION - PREMIUM SYSTEM A transponder is located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System > Page 577 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation - Premium System OPERATION - PREMIUM SYSTEM Transponders located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle provide the Wireless Control Module (WCM) commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Removal Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover (2). 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 580 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 581 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Installation Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 582 1. Install the transponder (4) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4) 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM is located on the right inner fender. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 589 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 590 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 591 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 592 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 596 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 230 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A104 18YL/RD 85 GROUND Z915 20BK 86 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20VT/YL 87 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18YL/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 599 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Window Defogger Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 604 Heated Glass Element Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 223 Component : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Connector: Name : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR 85 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 87 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is an International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current through a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) to the rear window defogger grid and to the outside mirror heating grids. The EBL relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the rear window defogger relay control in the front control module (FCM). The EBL relay is located in the junction block (JB) in the passenger compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 607 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard rear window defogger (EBL) relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the front control module (FCM) to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the junction block (JB). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground through the EBL relay control circuit only when the front control module (FCM) electronically pulls the circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through an ignition switch output circuit only when the ignition switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines through the EBL relay output circuit only when the EBL relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized. The EBL relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete rear window defogger (EBL) wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trim cover from the cowl (2) on the driver side of the vehicle. 3. Locate the junction block (JB) (1). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the JB cover for EBL relay location. 4. Remove the EBL relay from the JB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 610 Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the junction block (JB) cover for EBL relay location. 1. Position the EBL relay into the proper receptacle of the JB (1). 2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the JB receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Install the trim cover onto the driver side cowl (2). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Rear Wiper, High/Low, and On/Off Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper High/Low Component ID: 231 Component : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A951 14RD 85 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 87A FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 617 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper On/Off Component ID: 232 Component : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A951 14RD 85 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87A GROUND Z902 14BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 618 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper-Rear Rear Wiper Relay Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper High/Low Description DESCRIPTION The wiper high/low relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper high/low relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper high/low relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper high/low relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the front wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper high/low relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper high/low relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the output of the wiper on/off relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper high/low relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to the high speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay high speed output circuit, and is connected to the high speed brush whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to the low speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay low speed output circuit, and is connected to the low speed brush whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper high/low relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 621 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper On/Off Description DESCRIPTION The wiper on/off relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper on/off relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper on/off relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper on/off relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper on/off relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper on/off relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the common feed terminal of the wiper high/low relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper on/off relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit, and provides battery current to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to ground at all times through a take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness with an eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a screw to the front end sheet metal, and is connected to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper on/off relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 622 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper-Rear Description DESCRIPTION The rear wiper relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The rear wiper relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The rear wiper relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The rear wiper relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the rear wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The rear wiper relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the rear wiper relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the rear wiper motor through the rear wiper motor control circuit. When the rear wiper relay is de-energized, the common feed terminal is connected to ground. When the rear wiper relay is energized, the common feed terminal of the relay is connected to battery current from a fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) through a fused B(+) circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to the relay control output of the FCM through the rear wiper relay control circuit. The FCM controls the ground path for this circuit internally to energize or de-energize the rear wiper relay based upon its programming, rear wiper and washer request messages received from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the rear wiper motor park switch. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) is connected to battery current from a fuse in the PDC through a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to battery current from a fuse in the PDC through a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to ground at all times. The rear wiper relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 628 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 629 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 630 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 631 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 632 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped metal inner left fender mounting flange within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 635 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting hole, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Removal Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the hood ajar switch striker (2) toward the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage it. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Switch SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left front fender inner shield, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (1) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (2). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 638 receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 639 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Installation Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) into the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the striker upward into the small end of the mounting hole in the inner hood panel reinforcement until it is fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Switch SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (1) near the mounting hole (2) in the left front fender inner shield. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 640 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Component ID: 380 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 645 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 646 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 11 Component ID: 381 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 647 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 648 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 9 Component ID: 383 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 649 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Component ID: 380 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 652 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 653 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 11 Component ID: 381 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 654 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 655 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 8 Component ID: 382 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 8 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 8 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 656 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 9 Component ID: 383 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 657 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the park assist system have four park assist sensors (1) installed on the rear bumper fascia. Only the membrane (3) of each sensor is visible through a hole in the outer vertical surface of the fascia. The remainder of each sensor including the sensor mounting bracket, the sensor spacer and the sensor wiring connection is concealed behind the fascia. A sensor wire harness behind the fascia connects the sensors to the vehicle electrical system. Each of the four sensors is identical in construction and is interchangeable. The electronic circuitry and a communication chip for each sensor is enclosed and protected within the molded black plastic sensor housing. The housing includes an integral connector receptacle (4) and two integral latch tabs (2). The sensor membrane extends from the surface of the sensor housing, and is finished to match or contrast with the outer surface of the fascia. A resilient O-ring spacer around the circumference of each of the four sensor membranes (2) isolates the membrane from the openings in the fascia (1). Each sensor is snapped into its own dedicated molded plastic mounting bracket. Each mounting bracket is heat-staked to the back side of the rear fascia. The park assist sensors cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged they must be replaced. The sensors and the spacers are each available for individual service replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 660 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park assist sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the park assist module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. The sensors each receive battery current and ground in parallel from the module, but are each connected to individual dedicated serial bus communication circuits to the module. Each sensor membrane is oscillated, then quieted by the module in a pulsing fashion. While the sensor membrane oscillates, it emits an ultrasonic signal. This signal will bounce or echo off of objects in the path of the vehicle. While quieted, each membrane receives the echoes of the ultrasonic signals it and the other sensors have transmitted. The sensors then communicate this echo data over the serial bus lines back to the module. The microprocessor in the module uses the intervals between the ultrasonic transmission and reception data from the sensors to calculate the distance to any obstacles identified by the ultrasonic echoes. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist sensors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist sensors or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The park assist sensors (3) and the sensor spacers (O-rings) are each available for separate service replacement. The sensor brackets (5) are bonded to and integral to the back side of the rear bumper fascia (2). 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. NOTE: The two outboard rear park assist sensors can be accessed for service with the rear bumper fascia installed on the vehicle. 2. For the two inboard rear park assist sensors only, remove the bumper fascia from the rear of the vehicle. 3. From the back of the fascia (2), disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the park assist sensor (3) connector receptacle. 4. Carefully pry the sensor bracket (5) latch features (1) away from the top and bottom latch tabs of the sensor far enough to disengage the sensor from the bracket. 5. Disengage the O-ring spacer from around the circumference of the sensor membrane protrusion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 663 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The park assist sensors (3) and the sensor spacers (O-rings) are each available for separate service replacement. The sensor brackets (5) are bonded to and integral to the back side of the rear bumper fascia (2). 1. Engage the O-ring spacer around the circumference of the sensor membrane protrusion. NOTE: Production and all service replacement O-ring spacers are tapered. The wide side (base) of the O-ring should be seated against the sensor housing and the narrow side should be oriented toward the outer surface of the sensor membrane and the rear fascia. 2. Align and insert the sensor (3) into the sensor bracket (5) on the back of the rear bumper fascia (2) until the bracket latch features (1) are fully engaged over the top and bottom latch tabs of the sensor. Be certain that the sensor membrane is flush with the outer surface of the fascia. NOTE: Be certain that each sensor membrane is properly centered in the openings of the rear fascia and that the O-ring spacers are not pinched. Improper centering or pinched O-rings can be detrimental to proper park assist sensor operation. 3. From the back of the fascia, reconnect the wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. For the two inboard rear park assist sensors only, reinstall the bumper fascia onto the rear of the vehicle. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Sensor: Locations Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 667 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 668 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 669 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 673 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 674 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 675 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Remove the switch from the lower drivers side bezel by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 678 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (1) to the lower drivers side bezel by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (2) to the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 440 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 683 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 684 Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 441 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 685 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 440 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 688 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 689 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 441 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 690 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches are mounted in the sides of the rear (instrument panel side) steering wheel trim cover. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player or CD player. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 693 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Instrument cluster through the clockspring. The instrument cluster sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the instrument cluster senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the radio. The electronic circuitry within the radio is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 694 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Remove the remote radio switch(es) (1) and (2) from the steering wheel. 2. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch test table. If the remote radio switch resistances are not as indicated, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver side airbag (5) from the steering wheel (1). 3. Remove the speed control switch (3) or (6) located on the same side of the steering wheel as the remote radio switch that is being serviced. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector from the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 5. Disengage the four remote radio switch latches that secure the switch to the inside of the mounting hole in the steering wheel rear trim cover. 6. From the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover, remove the remote radio switch (2) from the trim cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 697 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the remote radio switch to the mounting hole on the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover. Be certain that the connector receptacle is oriented toward the bottom of the switch and pointed toward the center of the steering wheel. 2. Press firmly and evenly on the remote radio switch until each of the switch latches is fully engaged in the mounting hole of the steering wheel rear trim cover. 3. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector to the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 4. Install the speed control switch onto the steering wheel. 5. Install the driver side airbag to the steering wheel. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 703 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 704 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 705 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 706 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 707 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped metal inner left fender mounting flange within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 710 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting hole, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Removal Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the hood ajar switch striker (2) toward the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage it. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Switch SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left front fender inner shield, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (1) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (2). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 713 receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 714 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Installation Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) into the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the striker upward into the small end of the mounting hole in the inner hood panel reinforcement until it is fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Switch SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (1) near the mounting hole (2) in the left front fender inner shield. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 715 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Sensor: Locations Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 719 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 720 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 721 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 725 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 726 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 727 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Remove the switch from the lower drivers side bezel by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 730 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (1) to the lower drivers side bezel by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (2) to the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 735 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 736 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 737 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 738 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 739 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 740 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Liftgate Release PLG Component ID: 432 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE PLG Color : # of pins : 4 A-B LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN C GROUND Z957 20BK D-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 743 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 744 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 745 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 746 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 747 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 748 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 749 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 752 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 753 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch power window and power lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the door module is inoperative, replace the faulty door module. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty window/lock switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty window/lock switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 754 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 757 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component ID: 434 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : GRAY # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P76 20TN/LB 3 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 4 GROUND Z13 20BK/WT 4 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 5 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 6 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 6 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 7 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 8 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVERP74 20TN/OR 8 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 9 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 9 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 10 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 761 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 762 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 434 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : GRAY # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P76 20TN/LB 3 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 4 GROUND Z13 20BK/WT 4 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 5 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 6 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 6 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 7 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 8 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVERP74 20TN/OR 8 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 9 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 9 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 10 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 763 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power mirror switch includes the following: - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 766 Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. In vehicles without Memory Mirrors the power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. In vehicles with Memory Mirrors the mirror switch connects to the driver power mirror module. The driver memory mirror module uses the mirror switch inputs to control the battery current and ground feeds to driver mirror motor and sends a CAN Bus message to the passenger mirror module. The passenger mirror module controls the battery current and ground feeds to passenger mirror motors based on the CAN bus message from the driver memory module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 767 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER MIRROR SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power mirror switch. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch. 3. Remove the power mirror switch from the window/lock switch assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 770 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install power mirror switch to window/lock switch assembly. 2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches. 3. Install window/lock switch assembly. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger Power Seat Switch: Locations Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID: 444 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH DOWN P42 16LG/GY 2-3 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH UP P44 16LG/DG 4 PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P16 14LG/BR 5-6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD 7 GROUND Z975 14BK 8 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P14 14VT 9-10 - 11 - Component Location - 41 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 775 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 776 Power Seat Switch: Locations Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID: 443 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2-3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 5 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN 6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 7 GROUND Z971 16BK 8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT 9 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR 10 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 777 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID: 443 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2-3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 5 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN 6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 7 GROUND Z971 16BK 8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT 9 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR 10 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 780 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 781 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID: 444 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH DOWN P42 16LG/GY 2-3 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH UP P44 16LG/DG 4 PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P16 14LG/BR 5-6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD 7 GROUND Z975 14BK 8 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P14 14VT 9-10 - 11 - Component Location - 41 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 782 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The driver power seat can be adjusted in eight different ways using the power seat switch. The passenger power seat can be adjusted in four different ways. The power seat switch is located on the lower outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield on all models. The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 785 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat adjuster or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. On vehicles equipped with memory system, a resistance signal is sent to the Memory Seat Module (MSM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, when the driver memory seat switch control knob is actuated. The MSM is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster motor. The adjuster motor operates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker may result in motor damage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 786 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. PASSENGER SEAT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 787 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switch. Refer to PASSENGER POWER SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. DRIVER WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the resistance of the power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 788 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the seat cushion side panel from the seat and disconnect the electrical harness connector. 3. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the four mounting tabs that secure the power seat switch and separate switch from trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 791 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power seat switch on the seat cushion side panel. Gently apply pressure to the switch until the four mounting tabs that secure the switch snap into place. 2. Connect the power seat switch electrical connector. 3. Install the seat cushion side panel on the seat. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Component ID: 370 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 796 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 797 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Sensor-Liftgate Pinch-Left Component ID: 371 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 798 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Component ID: 370 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 801 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 802 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Liftgate Pinch-Left Component ID: 371 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 803 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Pinch sensors (2) are located on each side of the liftgate (1). These sensors look like weather-strips, however they consist of pieces of electrically conductive rubber (tapeswitch), wires, resistor, double sided tape, and a plastic carrier. They are used to indicate an obstruction during a power liftgate close cycle. The right side pinch sensor contains a thermistor that is integral to the pinch sensor assembly. The thermistor is a temperature sensor used by the power liftgate control module to enable proper liftgate operation in extreme climate conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 806 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION During a power liftgate "close" cycle, if either of the two conductive rubber strips (tapeswitch) of the pinch sensor come in contact with an obstacle, the pinch sensor circuit is completed. This tells the power liftgate control module that a obstruction is felt. The control module will stop the liftgate immediately and return it to the full open position. The thermistor portion of the right pinch sensor provides the temperature signal to the power liftgate control module (temperature is provided when the pinch sensor is in an unpinched condition; when pinched, temperature is unavailable because the thermistor is shorted). As the outside temperature increases, the resistance reading decreases. As temperature decreases, the resistance reading increases. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 807 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Testing and Inspection RIGHT PINCH SENSOR/THERMISTOR The thermistor portion of the right pinch sensor provides the temperature signal to the power liftgate control module (temperature is provided when the pinch sensor is in an unpinched condition; when pinched, temperature is unavailable because the thermistor is shorted). Refer to the RIGHT PINCH SENSOR/THERMISTOR DIAGNOSTIC TABLE to test the thermistor resistance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove trim panel from liftgate. 3. Disconnect the pinch sensor wire harness connector (4). 4. Remove the clips/assembly holding the pinch sensor (2) to liftgate (1). 5. Feed the pinch sensor wire harness (5) out of the liftgate (1) and remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 810 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Use extreme caution when testing pinch sensor operation. 1. Route the pinch sensor wire harness (5) through the hole in the liftgate (1). Push the wire harness grommet into place until fully seated. 2. Position the pinch sensor (2) to the liftgate (1) and align the holes to the fastening clips. 3. Install the four clips holding the sensor to the liftgate. 4. Connect the pinch sensor wire harness connector (4). 5. Install the trim panel on the liftgate. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes related to the pinch sensor. 8. Verify power liftgate system and pinch sensor operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, during the final close cycle press the pinch sensor to verify the power liftgate detects an obstruction and returns to the full open position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 423 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : RED # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P81 20TN/OR 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z968 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 DRIVER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P83 20TN/WT 6 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P7 20LG/YL Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 815 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 816 Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 425 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P82 20TN/LB 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z978 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P84 20TN/DG 6 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P8 20LG/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 817 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear Component ID: 424 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z964 16BK 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P177 18LG/RD 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 5-6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 820 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Right Rear Component ID: 426 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z964 16BK 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P178 18LG/BR 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 5-6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 821 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 423 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : RED # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P81 20TN/OR 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z968 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 DRIVER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P83 20TN/WT 6 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P7 20LG/YL Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 822 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 823 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 425 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P82 20TN/LB 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z978 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P84 20TN/DG 6 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P8 20LG/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 824 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Switch-Heated Seat Description HEATED SEAT SWITCH The heated seat switches are both mounted in the instrument panel. The two switches are snapped into mounting holes in the instrument panel center bezel (1). The two heated seat switches (2) and (3) are identical in appearance and construction, except for the location of a keyway in the connector receptacle on the back of each switch. The instrument panel wire harness connectors for the heated seat switches are keyed to match the connector receptacles so that the two heated seat switches can only be connected to the proper heated seat. Each momentary, bidirectional rocker-type heated seat switch provides a resistor-multiplexed signal to the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). Each switch has a center neutral position and momentary Low and High positions so that the driver and the front seat passenger can select a preferred seat heating level. Each heated seat switch has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Each switch also has one indicator lamp for back lighting of the switch when the ignition switch is in the Run position. The five LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch is faulty or damaged the individual heated seat switch assembly must be replaced. Operation HEATED SEAT SWITCH The heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. Depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary High or Low position provides a hard-wired resistor multiplexed signal to the Cabin Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat > Page 827 Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN is responsible for supplying the CAN bus message to the heated seat module, signaling the module to power the heated seat element of the selected seat and maintain the temperature setting. If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position (Low or High) than the currently selected state, the CCN will go through the process again to change the temperature setting. If a heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state, the CCN and heated seat module interprets the second input as a request to turn the seat heater OFF. The CCN will then signal the heated seat module to turn the heated seat elements for that seat off. The backlighting LED's in each of the heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The ground side of the indicator lamp is divided by a separate lamp driver circuit in the CCN. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat > Page 828 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules (2) mounted in the front face of the second row center floor console (3) operate the heated second row seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated second row seat system. If any of the heated second row seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated second row seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after thirty minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue for another thirty minutes and the system will then be automatically turned off. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 829 Seat Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection HEATED SEAT SWITCH Refer to the Wiring for complete heated seat system wiring diagrams. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. If the problem being diagnosed involves inoperative heated seat switch back lighting and the heated seat elements do heat, disconnect the inoperative switch and check for continuity between the ground pin at the heated seat switch connector and ground. If there is no continuity, repair an open wire between ground and the heated seat switch connector. If there is continuity, replace the inoperative heated seat switch. If the problem being diagnosed involves a heated seat switch indicator lamp that remains illuminated after the heated seat has been turned Off. Also refer to the Body Diagnostic Information for additional diagnosis and testing procedures. 2. Check the fused ignition switch output (run) fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run) fuse in the PDC. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition switch output (run) circuit to the ignition switch as required. 4. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the connector receptacle on the back of the heated seat switch to be tested. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run) circuit cavity of the heated seat switch. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition switch output (run) circuit to the PDC fuse as required. 5. Check the continuity and resistance values of the heated seat switch in the Neutral, Low and High positions as shown in the Heated Seat Switch Continuity chart below. If OK, refer to Heated Seats testing. If not OK, replace the faulty heated seat switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Front Seats Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the heated seat switch bezel and both switches from the center bezel as a unit. 4. From the back of the heated seat switch bezel (2), gently pry the switch free and push the heated seat switch out through the rear of the bezel. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 832 NOTE: When installing the heated seat switches, be certain they are installed in the proper mounting holes of the heated seat switch bezel (2). The heated seat switches are identified by a keyway in the connector receptacle on the back of each switch. 1. From the back of the heated seat switch bezel, gently push the heated seat switch in through the rear of the bezel. 2. Install the center bezel on the instrument panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 833 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules (2) from the rear center floor console (3) by gently prying up from the edge of the switch/module bezel (1). Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 834 1. Align the tabs (1) of the switch/module (2) to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel (1) into the mounting hole in the center console (3) until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 838 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 839 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 840 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof Component ID: 448 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL B GROUND Z957 20BK C SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN D SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 845 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 846 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 847 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof Component ID: 448 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL B GROUND Z957 20BK C SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN D SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 850 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 851 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 852 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Separate the overhead console from the headliner, by carefully pulling down on the front portion, toward the windshield, to release the retaining clips. 3. Release the sunroof switch retaining tab (2), disconnect the electrical connector (1) and remove the switch from the console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 855 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the switch (2) against the overhead console (1) and push the switch to seat properly in retaining clip (3). 2. Install the overhead console and seat the retaining clips (4) fully. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Customer Interest Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 864 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 870 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Overhead Console Liftgate Switch Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Description and Operation Overhead Console Liftgate Switch Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The overhead console shown contains a combination power liftgate/power sunroof switch. Vehicles equipped with the power liftgate and no sunroof contain a single power liftgate switch only. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with both a power sunroof and power liftgate the overhead console switches are serviced together as one assembly. NOTE: Durango overhead console with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) shown. Aspen overhead console similar. The power liftgate switch (3) is mounted in the overhead console assembly (1) between the reading lamps (2). The switch is snapped into mounting slots in the overhead console assembly. The momentary, push button-type power liftgate switch, provides a hardwired signal to the Power Liftgate Control Module. If the switch is inoperative or damaged the power liftgate/power sunroof switch assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Battery voltage is supplied to the power liftgate system through a fuse, located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) assembly. When the power liftgate switch is pushed, a hardwired signal is sent to the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met before applying power to the power liftgate drive unit to start a power cycle. During a power liftgate open or close cycle, if the power liftgate control module detects sufficient resistance to liftgate travel, such as an obstruction in the liftgate's path. The control module will immediately stop liftgate movement and reverse the direction of travel to the full open or closed position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Overhead Console Liftgate Switch > Page 875 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Description and Operation Exterior Handle Switch Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with a power liftgate exterior handle switch. The switch is integral to the power liftgate latch assembly. It is activated by the exterior handle, located in the license plate light bar, through a mechanical link rod attaching the two together. The power liftgate exterior handle switch is primarily used for manual opening of the liftgate. Activation of the switch during a automatic power "close" cycle will cause the liftgate to reverse direction. Activation of the switch during a power "open" cycle will cause the power liftgate to disengage, allowing full manual operation. The exterior handle cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged it must be replaced. The power liftgate exterior handle switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged or inoperative the complete power liftgate latch assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION When the exterior liftgate handle is pulled, a mechanical linkage inside the liftgate depresses the power liftgate exterior handle switch in the power liftgate latch assembly. A hard-wired signal is then detected by the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then looks at the vehicle lock status on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the vehicle is not locked and the operating conditions are met, the power liftgate control module then applies power to the latch mounted motor, which moves the liftgate from the primary closed and latched position to the open and movable position. If the liftgate is not pulled open within seven seconds, once the latch releases, the latch will automatically cinch closed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 876 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection OVERHEAD CONSOLE LIFTGATE SWITCH Diagnostic resistors are present inside the overhead console liftgate switch. These resistors are used by the power liftgate control module to determine if the switch is stuck, disconnected, shorted or otherwise damaged. Refer to the OVERHEAD CONSOLE LIFTGATE SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TABLE to test the switch resistance. NOTE: Test table readings are ±2%. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL DURANGO 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console assembly (3). 3. Using trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, pry the back edge of the power liftgate switch (1) up until the two retaining tabs (2) are fully released. 4. Tilt the power liftgate switch (1) up away from the overhead console assembly (3) until the mounting tab on the opposite side of the switch releases. 5. Remove the switch from the vehicle. ASPEN 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console assembly (3). 3. Using trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, pry the side edges (4) of the overhead console assembly out until the two retaining tabs on the power liftgate switch (5) are fully released. 4. Push the switch (5) out through the back of the overhead console (3). 5. Remove the switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 879 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION DURANGO 1. Position the power liftgate switch into the overhead console assembly so that the large retaining tab (2) is aligned with the large slot between the reading lamps. 2. Gently press the power liftgate switch (1) into the overhead console assembly (3) until the two small mounting tabs (2) have snapped securely into place. 3. Install the overhead console assembly (3). 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 6. Verify power liftgate system operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, this will allow the power liftgate control module to relearn its cycle with the new components. ASPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 880 1. Position the power liftgate switch (5) into the overhead console assembly (3). 2. Gently press the power liftgate switch (5) into the overhead console assembly (3) until the mounting tabs have snapped securely into place (4). 3. Install the overhead console assembly (3). 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 6. Verify power liftgate system operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, this will allow the power liftgate control module to relearn its cycle with the new components. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Vacuum sensor measures the available vacuum in the brake booster. In the event of a Booster failure, the ESP system offers additional brake force to the driver. Utilizing the hydraulic system of ESP, the brake line pressure is increased to achieve a higher deceleration with low pedal force Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the vacuum sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Remove vacuum sensor (1) from the master cylinder. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 887 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install vacuum sensor (1) to the master cylinder. 2. Connect wiring harness (1) connector to vacuum sensor. 3. Perform Verification Test and clear any faults. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 355 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z420 20BK/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 891 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 892 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 355 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z420 20BK/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 893 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Lateral Accelerometer: Locations Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 897 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 898 Lateral Accelerometer: Diagrams Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 899 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation Sensor-Dynamics DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor (2). The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor (2) must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics > Page 902 Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation Sensor-G DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located only inside the ABS controller 4x4 only. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the antilock brake module (ABM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (3) from the dynamics sensor (2). 3. Remove the two nuts (1) securing the sensor to the floor. 4. Remove the sensor (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 905 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor (2) on the studs (4) to the vehicle. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is facing toward the rear of the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the sensor (2). 3. Install the two retaining nuts (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). 4. Install the floor console. 5. Perform the ABS verification test with the scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 909 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 910 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 911 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 914 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 915 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 918 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Component ID: 391 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : # of pins : 4 A CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD B GROUND Z455 20BK/LB C CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB D FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 922 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 923 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 391 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : # of pins : 4 A CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD B GROUND Z455 20BK/LB C CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB D FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 924 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 925 Steering Angle Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. The steering angle sensor is used to measure the driver intended path in the ESP system. Based on the deviation between steering wheel input and the Yaw Rate signal from the dynamic sensor, ESP can be activated. The SAS should be mounted correctly to ensure that the system functions properly and there are not inadvertent activations. Any replacement of the steering angle sensor requires that the ABS verification test be performed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. 1. For removal of the steering angle sensor Refer to CLOCKSPRING - REMOVAL. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 928 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. 1. For installation of the steering angle sensor Refer to CLOCKSPRING - INSTALLATION). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Component ID: 451 Component : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE B27 20DG/WT 2 GROUND Z427 20BK/WT Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 932 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 933 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 451 Component : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE B27 20DG/WT 2 GROUND Z427 20BK/WT Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 397 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 2 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 939 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 940 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 18LG/GY 2 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 18DG/YL Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 941 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 942 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 2 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 943 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 944 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 18DG/LB 2 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 18DG/DB Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 945 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 397 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 2 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 948 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 949 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 18LG/GY 2 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 18DG/YL Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 950 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 951 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 2 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 952 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 953 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 18DG/LB 2 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 18DG/DB Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 954 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 955 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The sensors convert wheel speed into a digital signal. The ABM sends 12 volts to the sensors. The sensor has an internal hall sensor that alters the voltage and amperage of the signal circuit. This voltage and amperage is changed by magnetic induction when the toothed tone wheel passes the wheel speed sensor. This digital signal is sent to the ABM. The ABM measures the voltage and amperage of the digital signal for each wheel. The signal strength is affected by the distance between the Sensor and the tone ring. If the "Air Gap" between the WSS and the tone ring/wheel is too large, the WSS signal can drop out at low speed, (below 40 mph) and can cause an ABS activation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front rotor. 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front > Page 958 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (3). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (1) from the sensor (4). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the brake caliper adapter (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the wheel speed sensor (4) in the brake caliper adapter (2). 2. Install the sensor mounting bolt (1) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical wiring connector (3) to the sensor (4). 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 962 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 963 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 964 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Dynamics DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor (2). The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor (2) must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics > Page 967 Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-G DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located only inside the ABS controller 4x4 only. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the antilock brake module (ABM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (3) from the dynamics sensor (2). 3. Remove the two nuts (1) securing the sensor to the floor. 4. Remove the sensor (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 970 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor (2) on the studs (4) to the vehicle. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is facing toward the rear of the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the sensor (2). 3. Install the two retaining nuts (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). 4. Install the floor console. 5. Perform the ABS verification test with the scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 976 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 977 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 978 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 979 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 980 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 981 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 982 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 983 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 984 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 985 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 986 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 987 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 988 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 445 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 994 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 995 Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 446 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 996 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 445 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 999 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 1000 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 446 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 1001 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two separate switch pods operate the speed control system. The steering-wheel-mounted switches use multiplexed circuits to provide inputs to the PCM for ON, OFF, RESUME, ACCELERATE, SET, DECEL and CANCEL modes. Refer to the Owner's Manual on speed control switch functions and setting procedures. The individual switches cannot be repaired. If one switch fails, the entire switch module must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1004 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When speed control is selected by depressing the ON, OFF switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between approximately 35 (56.2kph) and 85 mph (136.8kph). In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector be indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral. The speed control can be disengaged manually by: - Stepping on the brake pedal - Depressing the OFF switch - Depressing the CANCEL switch. The speed control can be disengaged also by any of the following conditions: - An indication of Park or Neutral (auto. trans.) - The VSS signal increases at a rate of 10 mph (16 kph) per second (indicates that the co-efficient of friction between the road surface and tires is extremely low) - Depressing the clutch pedal (manual trans.). - Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear) - The VSS signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph (16 kph) per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated at an extremely high rate) - If the actual speed is not within 20 mph (32.1 kph) of the set speed The previous disengagement conditions are programmed for added safety. Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the ACCEL switch restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM's RAM NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch will erase the set speed stored in the PCM's RAM. If, while the speed control is engaged, the driver wishes to increase vehicle speed, the PCM is programmed for an acceleration feature. With the ACCEL switch held closed, the vehicle accelerates slowly to the desired speed. The new target speed is stored in the PCM's RAM when the ACCEL switch is released. The PCM also has a "tap-up" feature in which vehicle speed increases at a rate of approximately 2 mph (3.2 kph) for each momentary switch activation of the ACCEL switch. The PCM also provides a means to decelerate without disengaging speed control. To decelerate from an existing recorded target speed, depress and hold the COAST switch until the desired speed is reached. Then release the switch. The ON, OFF switch operates two components: the PCM's ON, OFF input, and the battery voltage to the brake switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Before attempting to diagnose, remove or install any airbag system or related steering wheel and steering column components you must first disconnect and isolate the negative (ground) battery cable. Wait 2 minutes for system capacitor to discharge before further system service. Failure to do so could result in accidental deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable from battery. 2. Remove airbag module. 3. Unplug electrical connector. 4. Remove speed control switch mounting screw (1) and remove switch from steering wheel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1007 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position switch to steering wheel. 2. Install switch mounting screw and tighten to 15 in. lbs. (1.7 Nm). 3. Plug electrical connector into switch. 4. Install airbag module. 5. Connect negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1012 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1013 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1014 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1015 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1016 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1017 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1018 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1022 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1023 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1024 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 360 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 1028 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 1029 Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 360 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 1030 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID: 354 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 2 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1035 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1036 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 354 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 2 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1037 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heating and Air Conditioning Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Heating and Air Conditioning Description DESCRIPTION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that monitors the air temperature outside of the vehicle. The ambient air temperature sensor is mounted onto the inside of the front bumper beam and its data is used by the heating-A/C system to maintain optimum cabin temperature levels. Operation OPERATION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit sent by the front control module (FCM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The ambient air temperature sensor changes its internal resistance in response to changes in the outside air temperature, which either increases or decreases the reference signal voltage read by the FCM. The FCM converts and broadcasts the sensor data over the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the A/C-heater control and other various vehicle control modules. The ambient air temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The ambient air temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 1040 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Overhead Module Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the right side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. For complete circuit diagrams refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent to it by the A/C-heater control. The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the A/C-heater control. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the A/C-heater control senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit, which it is programmed to correspond to a specific temperature. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Heating and Air Conditioning Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the push pin (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor (1) to the inside of the front bumper beam. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the ambient air temperature sensor and remove the sensor from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the ambient air temperature sensor (1). 2. Position the ambient air temperature sensor to the inside of the front bumper beam. 3. Install the push pin (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 1043 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Overhead Module Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the ambient temperature sensor (1), on the right side of the radiator yoke (2) behind the grille. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the ambient temperature sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the one screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor bracket to the radiator yoke. 5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the radiator yoke. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient temperature sensor (1) onto the radiator yoke (2). 2. Install the screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor to the radiator yoke. Tighten the screw to 5.6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 1044 3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the ambient temperature sensor (1). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 1053 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 1054 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 1060 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 1061 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 1070 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 1076 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1077 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 361 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/LG 2 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1078 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1079 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 361 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/LG 2 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1080 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. NOTE: Cutaway of typical HVAC housing shown for clarity in illustration. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1083 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the surface temperature of A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the resistance reading as an indication that conditions are correct to broadcast an A/C request message on the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the front control module (FCM). The FCM then requests the powertrain control module (PCM) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary over the CAN C bus. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel assembly. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1086 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 456 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 3 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 4-Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1090 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1091 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 456 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 3 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 4-Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 1092 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C discharge line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C discharge line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the discharge line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1095 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the discharge line. The A/C pressure transducer will change its internal resistance in response to the pressures it monitors. A Schrader-type valve in the discharge line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The front control module (FCM) provides a five volt reference signal to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the A/C pressure transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The FCM broadcasts a refrigerant pressure message to the PCM, which is programmed to respond to the A/C pressure transducer and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch and the radiator cooling fan to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3275 kPa (475 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). If the refrigerant pressure rises above 1655 kPa (240 psi), the PCM will actuate the cooling fan. The A/C pressure transducer message to the PCM will also prevent the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 4.5° C (40° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. Refer to the Electric A/C Condenser Cooling Fan Switch Point chart for condenser cooling fan on/off pressures. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C discharge line (3). 4. Remove the O-ring seal (4) from the discharge line fitting and discard. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1098 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the discharge line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the discharge line fitting. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared Solar Sensor: Locations Sensor-Infrared Component ID: 364 Component : SENSOR-INFRARED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INFRARED Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 2-3 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG 4 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 1103 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 1104 Solar Sensor: Locations Sensor-Sun Component ID: 392 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 2 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 3 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 4 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 4 SUN SENSOR RETURN G939 20VT/DB Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 1105 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared Solar Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Infrared Component ID: 364 Component : SENSOR-INFRARED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INFRARED Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 2-3 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG 4 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 1108 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 1109 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Sun Component ID: 392 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 2 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 3 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 4 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 4 SUN SENSOR RETURN G939 20VT/DB Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 1110 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Solar Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The infrared sensor consists of an infrared transducer (1) located in the overhead console. The infrared sensor is used only on models equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) heater-A/C system. The infrared transducer is contained within a black molded plastic housing (2) with an integral wire connector receptacle (3). The integral mounting tab (4) allows the infrared sensor to be secured with one screw to the overhead console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1113 Solar Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The infrared sensor detects thermal radiation emitted by the front seat occupants and surroundings and converts its data into a linear pulse width modulated (PWM) output signal, which is sent to the compass temperature module (EOM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The EOM sends a message over the controller area network (CAN) B bus where it is read by the automatic temperature control (ATC) A/C-heater control. The ATC A/C-heater control uses the infrared sensor data as one of the inputs necessary to automatically control the interior cabin temperature level. By using thermal radiation (surface temperature) measurement, rather than an air temperature measurement, the ATC heating-A/C system is able to adjust itself to the comfort level as perceived by the occupants. This allows the ATC system to compensate for other ambient conditions affecting comfort levels, such as solar heat gain or evaporative heat loss. The ATC system logic responds to the infrared sensor message from the EOM by calculating and adjusting the air flow temperature and air flow rate needed to properly obtain and maintain the selected comfort level temperature of the occupants. The EOM continually monitors the infrared sensor circuits, and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problem it detects. The infrared sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The infrared sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Typical overhead console shown. Infrared sensor location may vary. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (2) and place it on a workbench. 3. Remove the screw (3) that secures the infrared sensor (1) to the overhead console. 4. Remove the infrared sensor from the overhead console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1116 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical overhead console shown. Infrared sensor location may vary. 1. Position the infrared sensor (1) onto the overhead console (2). 2. Install the screw (3) that secures the infrared sensor to the overhead console. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs). 3. Install the overhead console. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1121 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1122 Door Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1123 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description Door DOOR This vehicle has four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Liftgate LIFTGATE A liftgate ajar switch is standard equipment on this vehicle. The switch is concealed within and integral to the liftgate latch unit. The switch is a momentary leaf contact-type unit that is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanisms. An integral connector receptacle on the liftgate latch connects the liftgate ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through the liftgate wire harness. The liftgate ajar switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the liftgate latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1126 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation Door DOOR The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The rear door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles not equipped with the optional memory system, the front door ajar switches are also hard wired in series between ground and the EMIC. On vehicles equipped with the optional memory system each front door ajar switch is hard wired in series between ground and its respective driver or passenger Memory Mirror Module (MMM) located in the front door. The MMM then sends electronic door ajar switch status messages to the EMIC over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Both the EMIC and the MMM read the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then use these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Liftgate LIFTGATE The liftgate ajar switch is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanism. When the liftgate is closed and properly latched, its liftgate ajar switch is an open circuit. When the liftgate is open or only partially latched, the liftgate ajar switch is a closed circuit. The liftgate ajar switch is hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired liftgate ajar switch input through an internal pull-up, then uses this input to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The liftgate ajar switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1130 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1131 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit and the Integrated Power Module (IPM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 55° C (131° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below -40° C (-40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - -° C (- -° F) will be displayed on the EVIC. The ambient temperature sensor and circuit can also be diagnosed using the following Sensor Test, and Temperature System Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, further testing of the CAN data bus, IPM and base EVIC system is necessary. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read - -° C (- -° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read 60 ° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. NOTE: If the EVIC display does not show the ambient temperature in step 4, the vehicle may need to be driven several miles at a speed greater than 32 km/h (20 mph) for the temperature to update. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Remove the jumper wire. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and wait until the EVIC display again reads - -° C (- -° F). Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Reconnect the ambient temperature sensor. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read the ambient temperature. If OK, the problem is intermittent. Perform further diagnosis while manipulating the related wire harnesses and components. If not OK, go to STEP 5 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the CAN data bus circuit, the IPM and the ambient temperature sensor (refer to the SENSOR TEST). SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 kilohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) system. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient temperature sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1138 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1139 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1140 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1143 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1144 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1147 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Vehicles with an electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. Refer to the service and diagnostic information for the automatic transmission type installed in the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID: 447 Component : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 2 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL L50 18WT/TN 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 5 GROUND Z429 20BK/OR 6 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1155 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1156 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1157 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 447 Component : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 2 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL L50 18WT/TN 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 5 GROUND Z429 20BK/OR 6 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1158 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1159 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1162 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1163 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (1) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (3). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4). 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1166 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4) on the lower steering column (3). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (1) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (2) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (5) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 435 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUXG194 20VT/RD 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX L12 20WT/DB 4 FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX W52 20BR/YL Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1170 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1171 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 435 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUXG194 20VT/RD 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX L12 20WT/DB 4 FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX W52 20BR/YL Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1172 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Front Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary front WASH position for front washer system operation. Front Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous front wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and an intermittent front wipe mode with five delay interval positions. - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1175 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control front washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control front wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Front Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the front WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the front washer mode until the control knob is released or for 10 continuous seconds, whichever occurs first. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic front washer switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the front washer mode. - Front Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous front wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the front wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic front wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) for front wiper system control. - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1176 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1177 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1180 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1181 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. Be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1182 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel (1) onto the steering column. 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1186 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1187 Door Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1188 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description Door DOOR This vehicle has four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Liftgate LIFTGATE A liftgate ajar switch is standard equipment on this vehicle. The switch is concealed within and integral to the liftgate latch unit. The switch is a momentary leaf contact-type unit that is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanisms. An integral connector receptacle on the liftgate latch connects the liftgate ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through the liftgate wire harness. The liftgate ajar switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the liftgate latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1191 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation Door DOOR The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The rear door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles not equipped with the optional memory system, the front door ajar switches are also hard wired in series between ground and the EMIC. On vehicles equipped with the optional memory system each front door ajar switch is hard wired in series between ground and its respective driver or passenger Memory Mirror Module (MMM) located in the front door. The MMM then sends electronic door ajar switch status messages to the EMIC over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Both the EMIC and the MMM read the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then use these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Liftgate LIFTGATE The liftgate ajar switch is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanism. When the liftgate is closed and properly latched, its liftgate ajar switch is an open circuit. When the liftgate is open or only partially latched, the liftgate ajar switch is a closed circuit. The liftgate ajar switch is hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired liftgate ajar switch input through an internal pull-up, then uses this input to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The liftgate ajar switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 422 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX L307 20PK/RD 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E2 20OR/BR 3 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN L900 20WT/YL 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z942 20BK 6-7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1195 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1196 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 422 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX L307 20PK/RD 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E2 20OR/BR 3 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN L900 20WT/YL 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z942 20BK 6-7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1197 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Three different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control and a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control. An optional switch has a momentary push button (3) added for front fog lamp control. A second optional switch has the same thumbwheel and momentary push button, but has a fourth position added to the rotary knob for selecting the optional automatic headlamps feature. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. The optional front fog lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1200 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, and on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the fog lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamp relay in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp relay in the PDC and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The FCM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected using the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. If the vehicle is equipped with optional automatic headlamps and the A (Automatic) position is selected, the EMIC also monitors an input from a sun load sensor on the instrument panel and, based upon the monitored ambient light levels, responds by automatically sending appropriate messages to the FCM to turn the exterior lighting ON or OFF while the ignition switch is in the ON position. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1201 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel and the headlamp switch from the instrument panel as a unit. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1202 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch (2). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1205 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (2) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Component ID: 428 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2-Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1209 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1210 Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 428 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2-Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1211 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1212 Horn Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The horn switch is molded into the driver airbag cover. The horn switch can not be serviced separately. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1213 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection HORN SWITCH The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1219 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1220 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1224 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1228 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1229 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1230 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1231 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1232 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1233 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1234 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1237 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1240 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1244 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1245 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1246 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1247 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1248 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1249 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1250 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1251 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1252 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1253 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1254 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1255 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1256 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1260 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1261 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1262 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1263 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1264 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1265 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1266 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1267 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1268 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1269 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1270 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1271 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1272 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1273 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1274 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1275 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1276 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1277 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1278 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1281 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1284 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1288 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1289 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1293 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 366 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1294 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1295 Fig. 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The 2-wire Intake Manifold Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is installed in the intake manifold with the sensor element extending into the air stream. The IAT sensor is a two-wire Negative Thermal Coefficient (NTC) sensor. Meaning, as intake manifold temperature increases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor decreases. As temperature decreases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor increases. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 1298 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from intake manifold at sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1301 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor O-ring. 2. Clean sensor mounting hole in intake manifold (1). 3. Position sensor (2) into intake manifold and rotate clockwise until past release tab. 4. Install electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1306 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1307 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1308 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1309 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1310 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1313 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1314 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1315 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1316 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1317 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1320 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1323 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 1328 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 1329 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 1330 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 1331 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 1332 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 1335 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 1336 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 1337 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 1338 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 1339 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1342 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (1) is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Disconnect electrical connector at sensor by sliding release lock out (1). Press down on lock tab (2) for removal. 2. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 3. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1345 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor O-ring seal for cuts or tears. 3. Position sensor into manifold. 4. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn clockwise for installation. 5. Connect electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1349 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1350 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1351 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1356 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1357 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1358 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 376 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1361 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1362 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1363 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1364 Component Location - 11 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1365 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1366 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1367 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 377 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1368 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1369 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1370 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1371 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1372 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1373 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1374 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1375 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1376 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 378 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1377 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1378 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1379 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1380 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1381 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1382 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1383 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 379 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1384 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1385 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1386 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1387 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1388 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 1389 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1390 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1391 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1394 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal. DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor and tighten to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1399 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1402 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1407 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1408 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1409 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1410 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1413 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1414 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1415 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1416 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1419 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1422 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1427 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1428 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1429 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1430 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1431 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1432 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1433 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1434 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1435 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1436 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1437 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1438 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1439 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1440 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1441 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1442 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1443 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1448 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1449 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1450 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1453 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1458 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1461 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1466 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1467 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1468 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1469 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1470 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1471 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1472 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1475 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1478 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1482 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1483 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1484 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1485 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1486 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1487 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1488 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1489 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1490 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1491 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1492 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1493 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1494 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1495 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1496 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1497 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1498 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1499 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1500 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1503 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1506 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover. 3. Remove the tilt lever handle. 4. Remove the lower shroud (2) from steering column. 5. Place shifter in PARK position. The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 6. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key (2) to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin with a small punch (3), while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1512 7. Remove the key (2) and key cylinder (1) from the column (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1513 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder (1) into the housing (3) using care to align the end of the key cylinder with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (1) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the lower shroud. 4. Install the tilt lever handle. 5. Install the steering column opening cover. 6. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1518 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1519 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1520 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1521 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1522 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1525 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1526 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1527 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1528 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1529 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1532 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1535 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1541 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1542 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1543 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1544 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1545 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1546 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1547 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1548 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1549 Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1550 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1551 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1552 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1553 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 3 Component ID: 387 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1554 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 3-4-Component Location - 44 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 388 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1555 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1556 Component ID: 389 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1557 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 3 Component ID: 390 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1558 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 3-4-Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1561 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1562 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1563 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1564 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1565 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1566 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1567 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1568 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1569 Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1570 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1571 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1572 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1573 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 3 Component ID: 387 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1574 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 3-4-Component Location - 44 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 388 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1575 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1576 Component ID: 389 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1577 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 3 Component ID: 390 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1578 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 3-4-Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with a screw to the backs of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Six side impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle to support the standard side curtain airbags, three each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1581 These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with a screw to the right or left front door beam, C-pillar or D-pillar within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1582 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through the same left or right sensor plus and minus circuits in a series arrangement from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the right or left front impact sensor (1) to the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (2). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side - Front Door SIDE - FRONT DOOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1585 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the trim from the inside of the right or left front door. 3. Reach through the large access hole in the inner door panel to access and remove the screw (3) that secures the side impact sensor (4) to the door beam (1). 4. Disconnect the door wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from within the front door. Side - C-Pillar SIDE - C-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower C-pillar. 3. Remove the screw (2) that secures the side impact sensor (3) to the C-pillar (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1586 4. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from the C-pillar. Side - D-Pillar SIDE - D-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower D-pillar. 3. Remove the screw (5) that secures the side impact sensor (4) to the inner quarter panel forward of the D-pillar (3). 4. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from the inner quarter panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1587 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Position the sensor onto the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (2). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the lower clearance hole of the radiator support. 4. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the sensor to the back of the support vertical member. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - Front Door SIDE - FRONT DOOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1588 1. Reach through the large access hole in the inner door panel to position the side impact sensor (4) within the door. 2. Reconnect the door wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Position the sensor onto the door beam (1) within the door. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole of the door beam. 4. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the sensor to the door beam. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the trim onto the inside of the front door. 6. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - C-Pillar SIDE - C-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut used to secure the side impact sensor (3) is properly installed in the inner C-pillar (5), and that it is in good condition. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1589 2. Position the side impact sensor near the inner C-pillar. 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Position the sensor onto the inner C-pillar. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole (4) of the C-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the sensor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower C-pillar. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - D-Pillar SIDE - D-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut used to secure the side impact sensor (4) is properly installed in the inner quarter panel forward of the C-pillar (3), and that it is in good condition. 2. Position the side impact sensor near the inner quarter panel. 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Position the sensor onto the inner quarter panel. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole (1) of the quarter panel. 5. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the sensor to the inner quarter panel. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower D-pillar. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 442 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND R59 20LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z930 20BK/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE R57 20LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1593 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1594 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 442 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND R59 20LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z930 20BK/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE R57 20LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1595 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt switch (4) is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, plunger (3) actuated, momentary switch. One seat belt switch is installed on the seat belt retractor frame (2) over the retractor spool (1) for the driver side front seat. The seat belt switch includes an integral connector that is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the body wire harness. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1598 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The seat belt switch plunger is actuated by the seat belt webbing wound onto the seat belt retractor spool. When the seat belt tip-half webbing is pulled out of the retractor far enough to engage the seat belt buckle-half, the switch plunger is extended and closes the seat belt switch sense circuit to ground. Conversely, when the seat belt tip-half webbing is wound onto the retractor spool the switch plunger is depressed, opening the ground path. The EMIC monitors the seat belt switch status, then controls the illumination of the seatbelt indicator and the generation of audible electronic chime tones based upon that input. The seat belt switch receives ground through its connection to the body wire harness from another take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on that ground take out is secured under a ground screw. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the EMIC. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sensor housing has two integral snap features (3) and snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the inboard side of one of the seat adjuster tracks on each front seat. A molded connector receptacle (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector and take out of the driver or passenger seat wire harness beneath the front seat cushion frame. The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire sensor must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1603 Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) indicating whether the driver side front seat is in a full forward or a not full forward position. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to be used when deploying the multistage driver side front airbag. The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the ORC. The sensor communicates the seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the ORC on a sensor data circuit. The ORC also monitors the condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected, and sends messages over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to illuminate the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired circuits between the seat track position sensor and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication related to seat track position sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Reach under the front seat cushion to access the seat track position sensor (4) in a bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 3. Disconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. 4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap feature (2) and pull the connector end of the sensor out of the bracket. 5. Remove the sensor from under the front seat. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1606 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the front seat cushion to position the seat track position sensor (4) to the open end of the bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the snap feature (2) locks into place. 3. Reconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. Be certain that the latch on the connector is fully engaged. 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 384 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGER263 20LB/VT Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1610 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1611 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 384 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGER263 20LB/VT Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1612 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover. 3. Remove the tilt lever handle. 4. Remove the lower shroud (2) from steering column. 5. Place shifter in PARK position. The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 6. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key (2) to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin with a small punch (3), while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1619 7. Remove the key (2) and key cylinder (1) from the column (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1620 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder (1) into the housing (3) using care to align the end of the key cylinder with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (1) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the lower shroud. 4. Install the tilt lever handle. 5. Install the steering column opening cover. 6. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the "WCM/Wireless Control Module" menu item as appropriate.Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a black sensor body, with (an oval insignia) (1) and a grey valve cap (2). The Export TPM system operates on a 433 MHz radio frequency. The 433 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a gray sensor body (with an oval insignia) and a black valve cap (2). CAUTION: Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct sensor is being used. NOTE: Sensors may be identified by valve stem cap color. From the factory, 315 MHz sensors have a gray valve stem cap while 433 MHz sensors have a black valve stem cap. Otherwise, once mounted inside a tire and wheel assembly you are not able to visually tell the difference between a 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensor. The tire must be dismounted allowing visual inspection of the sensor body. NOTE: If aftermarket wheels are installed and do not contain tire pressure sensors, the system will not function properly and the driver will be continuously notified of a system malfunction. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1628 The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: NOTE: Any time a sensor is installed on a wheel, a new Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) must be installed to ensure proper sealing. - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1629 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the wireless control module (WCM), commonly referred to as the sentry key remote entry module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor's operating mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: - Sleep Mode - This is the operating mode of a new TPM sensor. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 1 PSI. Driving the vehicle continuously at this speed for more then 4 minutes, and then stopping the vehicle will change the sensor state into Park Mode. If the vehicle is equipped with a full size matching spare tire and the spare tire sensor has been replaced, The sensor must be changed to Park Mode to conserve battery life. Either use a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or swap the spare tire with a road tire. - Park Mode - This is the correct operating mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 1 PSI delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure - 0ff / 30 Block - If the vehicle has been stopped for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's operating mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from Park Mode to 30 Block Mode once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After about 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensor's mode will change to Drive Mode - Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph, the sensor will revert back to Park Mode. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h), unless the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced, The vehicle must be stationary for more than 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1630 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 14 to 41 kPa (2 to 6 psi) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. Check the tire pressure yellow telltale in the instrument cluster. If the yellow telltale is illuminating continuously, proceed as listed below. If the yellow telltale is flashing on/off for 60 seconds, once every ten minutes, there is a system fault detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire, allow approximately two minutes for the message or yellow telltale to go out. If air pressure in any tire is low, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for a leak around the tire assembly and sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1633 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacing the spare tire pressure sensor, take the time now to write down the tire pressure sensor ID. NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1634 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Rotating Wheel Tire Changers - Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1635 Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. SPARE TIRE SENSOR REPLACEMENT NOTE: When the spare tire sensor is replaced on vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and a full-sized matching spare tire and wheel assembly, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the (WCM) Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is available, put the new spare tire pressure sensor into "Park" mode. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is not available, rotate the spare tire with one of the road tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1642 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1643 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1644 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1645 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1646 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1647 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1650 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1651 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1652 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1653 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1654 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1655 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1658 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1661 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1665 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1666 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1667 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tow/haul overdrive OFF (control) switch is located in the shift lever arm. The switch is a momentary contact device that signals the PCM to toggle current status of the overdrive function. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1670 Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION At key-on, overdrive operation is allowed. Pressing the switch once causes the tow/haul overdrive OFF mode to be entered and the Tow/Haul lamp to be illuminated. Pressing the switch a second time causes normal overdrive operation to be restored and the tow/haul lamp to be turned off. The tow/haul overdrive OFF mode defaults to ON after the ignition switch is cycled OFF and ON. The normal position for the control switch is the ON position. The switch must be in this position to energize the solenoid and allow a 3-4 upshift. The control switch indicator light illuminates only when the tow/haul overdrive switch is turned to the OFF position, or when illuminated by the transmission control module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1673 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1678 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1683 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1684 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1685 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1686 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1689 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1690 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1691 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1692 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1695 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1698 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1703 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1704 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1705 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1706 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1707 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1708 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1709 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1710 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1713 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1714 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1715 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1716 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1717 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1718 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1719 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1720 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1723 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1726 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (2) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (1) located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is activated, the timing circuit integral to the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. An amber indicator (3) in the rear window defogger switch will illuminate to indicate when the EBL system is turned on. When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to the rear window defogger grid lines and when equipped, to the heated outside rear view mirrors. The grid lines heat the window and mirror glass to help clear the surfaces of fog or frost. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1732 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator in the rear window defogger switch will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated, the A/C-heater control requests the front control module (FCM) to operated the rear window defogger (EBL) relay via the controller area network (CAN) B bus. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the heating grid of the rear window and when equipped, the heated outside rear view mirrors. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after approximately 15 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last approximately 10 minutes. The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about 15 minutes as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 10 minutes. The EBL system will also turn off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN or by manually pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch and indicator lamp cannot be adjusted or repaired and the A/C-heater control must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 438 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/OR 2 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG 3 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1737 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1738 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 439 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 2 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG 3 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1739 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1740 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1741 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1742 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1743 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1744 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 438 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/OR 2 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG 3 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1747 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1748 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 439 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 2 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG 3 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1749 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1750 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1751 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1752 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1753 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1754 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Window Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1757 Power Window Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch-Power Window POWER WINDOW SWITCH The front door power window switches are included in the window/lock switch. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window switch knobs receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in the power window switch and the power windows are inoperative, refer to Power Window testing. See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Testing and Inspection If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) must be replaced. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Check the fuse and the circuit breaker. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch from the door trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity chart to determine if the continuity is correct in the Neutral, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, Power Window testing. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window > Page 1760 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch-Window/Door Lock WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch power window and power lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the door module is inoperative, replace the faulty door module. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty window/lock switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty window/lock switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window > Page 1761 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Switch-Power Window Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Switch-Power Window Removal REMOVAL The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove switch from door trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. 1. Install the switch to the door trim panel. 2. Install the door trim panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Switch-Power Window > Page 1764 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Switch-Window/Door Lock Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Component ID: 396 Component : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1769 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1770 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 396 Component : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1771 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer fluid level switch is a single pole, single throw reed-type switch mounted just above the sump area near the bottom of the washer reservoir. Only the molded plastic switch mounting flange and the integral connector receptacle are visible when the switch is installed in the reservoir. A short nipple formation extends from the inner surface of the switch mounting flange, and a barb on the nipple near the switch mounting flange is pressed through a rubber grommet seal installed in the mounting hole of the reservoir. A molded plastic float rides saddle-like over a molded plastic beam that extends axially from the switch mounting flange. A small permanent magnet is secured in a receptacle on the top of the float, and the reed switch is concealed within the beam. A diagnostic resistor is connected between the two switch terminals within the switch mounting flange. The washer fluid level switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1774 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid level switch uses a float to monitor the level of the washer fluid in the washer reservoir. The float contains a small magnet. When the float moves, the proximity of this magnet to a stationary reed switch within the beam formation of the switch changes. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir is at or above the float level, the float rises and the influence of the float magnetic field is removed from the reed switch causing the normally open reed switch contacts to open. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir falls below the level of the float, the float falls and the influence of the float magnetic field is applied to the reed switch, causing the contacts of the normally open reed switch to close. The washer fluid level switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The switch is connected in series between ground and the washer fluid switch sense input to the Front Control Module (FCM) located in the engine compartment near the battery. The FCM monitors the switch return signal and is programmed to respond to three consecutive open switch readings by sending an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC responds to this message by illuminating the washer fluid indicator and by sounding an audible chime tone warning. The washer fluid level switch and the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls and communication related to washer fluid level switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach between the front of the left front wheel house splash shield and the front bumper support to access the rearward facing lower surface of the washer reservoir (1). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the washer fluid level switch (5) connector receptacle. 4. Disconnect the front washer hose from the inboard outlet nipple (3) of the washer pump/motor unit (2) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 5. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. 6. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 7. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1777 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (1). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the washer fluid level switch (5) through the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be oriented downward. 4. Reconnect the wire harness connector to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the front washer hose to the inboard outlet nipple (3) of the washer pump/motor unit (2). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications ALIGNMENT NOTE: All alignment specifications are in degrees. Wheel Alignment Specifications Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Alignment: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Suspension components with rubber/urethane bushings should be tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is important to have the springs supporting the weight of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle ride comfort could be affected and premature bushing wear may occur. Wheel alignment involves the correct positioning of the wheels in relation to the vehicle. The positioning is accomplished through suspension and steering linkage adjustments. An alignment is considered essential for efficient steering, good directional stability and to minimize tire wear. The most important measurements of an alignment are caster, camber and toe. CAUTION: Never attempt to modify suspension or steering components by heating or bending. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1785 Alignment: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION - CASTER (1) is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering knuckle from vertical. Tilting the top of the knuckle forward provides less positive caster. Tilting the top of the knuckle rearward provides more positive caster. Positive caster promotes directional stability. This angle enables the front wheels to return to a straight ahead position after turns. - CAMBER (2) is the inward or outward tilt of the wheel relative to the center of the vehicle. Tilting the top of the wheel inward provides negative camber. Tilting the top of the wheel outward provides positive camber. Incorrect camber will cause wear on the inside or outside edge of the tire. - TOE (4) is the difference between the leading inside edges and trailing inside edges of the front tires. Wheel toe position out of specification cause's unstable steering, uneven tire wear and steering wheel off- center. The wheel toe position is the final front wheel alignment adjustment. THRUST ANGLE (3) is the angle of the rear axle relative to the centerline of the vehicle. Incorrect thrust angle can cause off-center steering and excessive tire wear. This angle is not adjustable, damaged component(s) must be replaced to correct the thrust angle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1786 Alignment: Testing and Inspection PRE-ALIGNMENT INSPECTION Before starting wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary corrections must be completed. Refer to Suspension and Steering System Diagnosis Chart. NOTE: Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel prior to measuring and adjusting alignment. 1. Inspect tires for size, air pressure and tread wear. 2. Inspect front wheel bearings for wear. 3. Inspect front wheels for excessive radial or lateral runout and balance. 4. Inspect ball studs, linkage pivot points and steering gear for looseness, roughness or binding. 5. Inspect suspension components for wear and noise. 6. Check suspension ride height. 7. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1787 Suspension And Steering System Diagnosis (Part 1) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1788 Suspension And Steering System Diagnosis (Part 2) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement Alignment: Service and Repair Height Measurement HEIGHT MEASUREMENT The vehicle suspension height MUST be measured and adjusted before performing wheel alignment procedure. Also when front suspension components have been replaced. This measure must be performed with the vehicle supporting it's own weight and taken on both sides of the vehicle. NOTE: Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel prior to measuring and adjusting alignment. FRONT RIDE HEIGHT MEASUREMENT 1. Inspect tires and set to correct pressure. 2. Jounce the front of the vehicle. 3. With vehicle on level ground or hoist, make the following measurements: a. Front wheel spindle (center) to ground vertical distance. b. Center of the front face of bolt on the rear leg of Lower control arm to ground vertical distance. c. Difference between spindle and control arm bolt to ground distances should be 81mm+/-3.2mm Note that the control arm bolt is lower than the spindle. 4. If adjustment is required, turn the torsion bar adjuster bolts- if lowering ride height, unscrew Torsion bar adjuster bolt beyond desired point so as to set height when screwing-in adjuster bolt. 5. After making any ride height adjustment, roll vehicle preferably jouncing it also, to relieve camber Effects and then re-measure Lower control arm bolt to ground height. 6. Repeat the previous steps until the ride height is within specifications. REAR RIDE HEIGHT MEASUREMENT 1. Inspect tires and set to correct pressure. 2. Jounce the front of the vehicle. 3. With vehicle on level ground or hoist, make the following measurements: a. Distance from the landing pad of the jounce bumper on the axle side to the jounce bumper cup lip of the frame side. b. The difference between the jounce bumper landing pad and the jounce bumper cup lip. The reading should be 148 mm +/-10 mm for 9.25" axle, 154 mm +/-10 mm for 8.25" axle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement > Page 1791 Alignment: Service and Repair Height Adjustment HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT The vehicle suspension height MUST be measured and adjusted before performing wheel alignment procedure. Also when front suspension components have been replaced. This measurement must be performed with the vehicle supporting it's own weight and taken on both sides of the vehicle. To adjust the vehicle height turn the torsion bar adjustment bolt CLOCKWISE to raise the vehicle and COUNTER CLOCKWISE to lower the vehicle. CAUTION: ALWAYS raise the vehicle to the correct suspension height, NEVER lower the vehicle to obtain the correct suspension height. If the vehicle suspension height is too high, lower the vehicle below the height specification. Then raise the vehicle to the correct suspension height specification. This will insure the vehicle maintains the proper suspension height. NOTE: If a height adjustment has been made, perform height measurement again on both sides of the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement > Page 1792 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber, Caster And Toe Adjustment CAMBER, CASTER AND TOE ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Suspension height measurement must be performed before an alignment. Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm with the slots in the frame brackets to move the lower control arm inwards or outwards for proper adjustment. This can be achieved by using a long pry bar with a curved tip and inserting the pry bar into the lower control arm frame brackets and prying inwards or outwards. NOTE: Camber and caster adjustments must be made at the lower control arm. Do not use the upper control arm for Camber and Caster adjustments. NOTE: When the lower control arm pivot bolts are loosened the lower control arm will normally go outwards automatically with the weight of the vehicle. CASTER Moving the rear position of the lower control arm at the frame in or out, will change the caster angle significantly and camber angle only slightly. To maintain the camber angle while adjusting caster, move the rear of the lower control arm in or out. Then move the front of the lower control arm slightly in the opposite direction. CAMBER Move both the front and rear of the lower control arm together in or out. This will change the camber angle significantly and caster angle slightly. After adjustment is made tighten the lower control arm bolt & nuts to 244 Nm (180 ft. lbs.). TOE ADJUSTMENT The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (3). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (4) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement > Page 1793 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment TOE ADJUSTMENT SUSPENSION HEIGHT MEASUREMENT MUST BE PERFORMED BEFORE AN ALIGNMENT. The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (3). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (4) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE The correct fuel pressure for this vehicle is 58 psi ± 2 psi Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1798 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1799 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1800 - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16 inch) or #6631(3/8 inch) fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1801 Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Idle Speed: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The IAC stepper motor is mounted to the throttle body, and regulates the amount of air bypassing the control of the throttle plate. As engine loads and ambient temperatures change, engine rpm changes. A pintle on the IAC stepper motor protrudes into a passage in the throttle body, controlling air flow through the passage. The IAC is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the target engine idle speed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1807 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. At idle, engine speed can be increased by retracting the IAC motor pintle and allowing more air to pass through the port, or it can be decreased by restricting the passage with the pintle and diminishing the amount of air bypassing the throttle plate. The IAC is called a stepper motor because it is moved (rotated) in steps, or increments. Opening the IAC opens an air passage around the throttle blade which increases RPM. The PCM uses the IAC motor to control idle speed (along with timing) and to reach a desired MAP during decel (keep engine from stalling). The IAC motor has 4 wires with 4 circuits. Two of the wires are for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to the motor windings to operate the stepper motor in one direction. The other 2 wires are also for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to operate the stepper motor in the opposite direction. To make the IAC go in the opposite direction, the PCM just reverses polarity on both windings. If only 1 wire is open, the IAC can only be moved 1 step (increment) in either direction. To keep the IAC motor in position when no movement is needed, the PCM will energize both windings at the same time. This locks the IAC motor in place. In the IAC motor system, the PCM will count every step that the motor is moved. This allows the PCM to determine the motor pintle position. If the memory is cleared, the PCM no longer knows the position of the pintle. So at the first key ON, the PCM drives the IAC motor closed, regardless of where it was before. This zeros the counter. From this point the PCM will back out the IAC motor and keep track of its position again. When engine rpm is above idle speed, the IAC is used for the following: - Off-idle dashpot (throttle blade will close quickly but idle speed will not stop quickly) - Deceleration air flow control - A/C compressor load control (also opens the passage slightly before the compressor is engaged so that the engine rpm does not dip down when the compressor engages) - Power steering load control The PCM can control polarity of the circuit to control direction of the stepper motor. IAC Stepper Motor Program: The PCM is also equipped with a memory program that records the number of steps the IAC stepper motor most recently advanced to during a certain set of parameters. For example: The PCM was attempting to maintain a 1000 rpm target during a cold start-up cycle. The last recorded number of steps for that may have been 125. That value would be recorded in the memory cell so that the next time the PCM recognizes the identical conditions, the PCM recalls that 125 steps were required to maintain the target. This program allows for greater customer satisfaction due to greater control of engine idle. Another function of the memory program, which occurs when the power steering switch (if equipped), or the A/C request circuit, requires that the IAC stepper motor control engine rpm, is the recording of the last targeted steps into the memory cell. The PCM can anticipate A/C compressor loads. This is accomplished by delaying compressor operation for approximately 0.5 seconds until the PCM moves the IAC stepper motor to the recorded steps that were loaded into the memory cell. Using this program helps eliminate idle-quality changes as loads change. Finally, the PCM incorporates a "No-Load" engine speed limiter of approximately 1800 - 2000 rpm, when it recognizes that the TPS is indicating an idle signal and IAC motor cannot maintain engine idle. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the IAC motor through the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Pull the air inlet hose straight (1) upward to disengage it from the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). 2. Disengage the three retaining clamps (3) that secure the air cleaner housing cover (4) to air cleaner housing (6). 3. Lift and pull the air cleaner housing cover toward the engine to disengage the cover locating tabs (5) from the air cleaner housing and position the cover out of the way. 4. Remove the air cleaner element (1) from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1813 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean any dirt or foreign matter from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). 2. Install the air cleaner element (1) into air cleaner housing. Make sure the element is properly seated in the housing. 3. Position the air cleaner housing cover (4) to the air cleaner housing (6) and engage the cover locating tabs (5). Make sure the tabs are fully engaged. 4. Fully install the air cleaner housing cover to the air cleaner housing and engage the three retaining clamps (3). Make sure the clamps are fully engaged. 5. Engage air inlet hose (1) to the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications DESCRIPTION The 5.7L engine (345 CID) eight-cylinder engine is a 90° V-Type lightweight, deep skirt cast iron block, aluminum heads, single cam, overhead valve engine with hydraulic roller tappets. The heads incorporate splayed valves with a hemispherical style combustion chamber and dual spark plugs. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear; 1, 3, 5, 7 on the left bank and 2, 4, 6, 8 on the right bank. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 1822 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications FIRING ORDER - 5.7L These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any of the available engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1829 Spark Plug: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Resistor type spark plugs are used on all engines. Sixteen spark plugs (2 per cylinder) are used with 5.7L engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Spark Plug: Procedures CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT The plugs may be cleaned using commercially available spark plug cleaning equipment. After cleaning, file center electrode flat with a small point file or jewelers file before adjusting gap. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. Adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1832 Spark Plug: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL Each individual spark plug is located under each ignition coil. Each individual ignition coil must be removed to gain access to each spark plug. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing at throttle body. 2. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. 4. Remove spark plug from cylinder head using a quality socket with a rubber or foam insert. Also check condition of ignition coil O-ring and replace as necessary. 5. Inspect spark plug condition. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The 4.7L is equipped with copper core ground electrode spark plugs. They must be replaced with the same type/number spark plug as the original. If another spark plug is substituted, pre-ignition will result. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap or a cracked porcelain insulator. 1. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. 2. Tighten spark plugs to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 3.7L & 4.7L. 3. The 5.7L is equipped with torque critical design spark plugs. Do not exceed 15 ft. lbs. torque. Tighten spark plugs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). NOTE: 5.7L does not use an O-ring 4. Before installing ignition coil(s), check condition of coil O-ring and replace as necessary. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone to coil O-ring. 5. Install ignition coil(s). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Maximum Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................................................................... 25 percent Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1836 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. Refer to ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS for the correct engine compression pressures. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations CAUTION: The timing chain must be installed with the single plated link aligned with the dot and or paint marking on the camshaft sprocket. The crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the dot and or paint marking on the sprocket between two plated timing chain links. CAUTION: The camshaft pin and the slot in the cam sprocket must be clocked at 12:00. The crankshaft keyway must be clocked at 2:00. The crankshaft sprocket must be installed so that the dots and or paint marking is at 6:00. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation Drive Belt: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The accessory drive belt is a serpentine type belt. Satisfactory performance of these belts depends on belt condition and proper belt tension. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1843 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT VISUAL DIAGNOSIS When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART for further belt diagnosis. NOISE DIAGNOSIS Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1844 ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART (Part 1) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1845 ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART (Part 2) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive Belt: Procedures CLEANING Clean all foreign debris from belt pulley grooves. The belt pulleys must be free of oil, grease, and coolants before installing the drive belt. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1848 Drive Belt: Removal and Replacement Accessory Drive Belt - Removal REMOVAL - 5.7L 5.7L Engine 1. Remove the air intake tube between the intake manifold and air filter assembly. 2. Insert a suitable square drive ratchet into the square hole on the belt tensioner arm (6). 3. Release the belt tension by rotating the tensioner (6) clockwise. Rotate the belt tensioner until the accessory drive belt (7) can be removed from the pulleys. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt (7). 5. Gently release the tensioner (6). Accessory Drive Belt - Installation INSTALLATION - 5.7L 5.7L Engine 1. Position the accessory drive belt (7) over all pulleys except for the water pump pulley (2). 2. Rotate the tensioner (6) clockwise and slip the accessory drive belt over the water pump pulley (2). 3. Gently release the tensioner (6). 4. Install the air intake tube between the intake manifold and air filter assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Pull the air inlet hose straight (1) upward to disengage it from the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). 2. Disengage the three retaining clamps (3) that secure the air cleaner housing cover (4) to air cleaner housing (6). 3. Lift and pull the air cleaner housing cover toward the engine to disengage the cover locating tabs (5) from the air cleaner housing and position the cover out of the way. 4. Remove the air cleaner element (1) from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1855 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean any dirt or foreign matter from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). 2. Install the air cleaner element (1) into air cleaner housing. Make sure the element is properly seated in the housing. 3. Position the air cleaner housing cover (4) to the air cleaner housing (6) and engage the cover locating tabs (5). Make sure the tabs are fully engaged. 4. Fully install the air cleaner housing cover to the air cleaner housing and engage the three retaining clamps (3). Make sure the clamps are fully engaged. 5. Engage air inlet hose (1) to the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 1864 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 1865 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 1871 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 1872 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the diagnosis. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1876 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with a suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer, or other suitable tool). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1884 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Filter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL All engines are equipped with a high quality full-flow, disposable type oil filter. DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends a Mopar(R) or equivalent oil filter be used. 1. Position a drain pan under the oil filter. 2. Using a suitable oil filter wrench loosen filter. 3. Rotate the oil filter counterclockwise to remove it from the cylinder block oil filter boss. 4. When filter separates from cylinder block oil filter boss, tip gasket end upward to minimize oil spill. Remove filter from vehicle. NOTE: Make sure filter gasket was removed with filter. 5. With a wiping cloth, clean the gasket sealing surface of oil and grime. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1889 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lightly lubricate oil filter gasket with engine oil. 2. Thread filter onto adapter nipple. When gasket makes contact with sealing surface, hand tighten filter one half turn, or 180°,do not over tighten. 3. Add oil, verify crankcase oil level and start engine. Inspect for oil leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Partially drain cooling system. 3. Remove upper radiator hose clamp and hose at radiator. 4. Unplug wiring harness from A/C compressor. 5. Remove air cleaner assembly. 6. Remove accessory drive belt. 7. Remove bracket-to-intake manifold bolts. 8. The drive belt idler pulley must be removed to gain access to one of A/C compressor/generator bracket mounting bolts (3). Remove idler pulley bolt and remove idler pulley. 9. Remove oil dipstick tube mounting bolt (3) at side of A/C-generator mounting bracket. 10. Disconnect throttle body cables. 11. Remove heater hose clamp and heater hose from heater hose coolant return tube. 12. Remove heater hose coolant return tube mounting bolt and remove tube (4) from engine. Discard the old tube O-ring. 13. Remove six bracket bolts. 14. Lift and position generator and A/C compressor (along with their common mounting bracket) to gain access to bypass hose. A block of wood may be used to hold assembly in position. 15. Loosen and position both hose clamps to center of bypass hose. Remove hose from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1895 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position bypass hose clamps to center of hose. 2. Install bypass hose to engine. 3. Secure both hose clamps. 4. Install generator-A/C mounting bracket assembly to engine. Tighten bolts (number 1 and 2) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten bolts (number 3) to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Install a new O-ring to the heater hose coolant return tube. Coat the new O-ring with antifreeze before installation. 6. Install coolant return tube and its mounting bolt to engine. 7. Connect throttle body control cables. 8. Install oil dipstick mounting bolt. 9. Install idler pulley. Tighten bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 10. Install drive belt. 11. Install air cleaner assembly. 12. Install upper radiator hose to radiator. 13. Connect wiring harness to A/C compressor. 14. Connect battery negative cable. 15. Fill cooling system. 16. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Warning Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions Warning WARNING WARNING: The A/C system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Repairs should only be performed by qualified service personnel. Serious or fatal injury may result from improper service procedures. WARNING: Avoid breathing the refrigerant and refrigerant oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and/or throat. Wear eye protection when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Serious eye injury can result from direct contact with the refrigerant. If eye contact occurs, seek medical attention immediately. WARNING: Do not expose the refrigerant to open flame. Poisonous gas is created when refrigerant is burned. An electronic leak detector is recommended. Serious or fatal injury may result from improper service procedures. WARNING: If accidental A/C system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Large amounts of refrigerant released in a closed work area will displace the oxygen and cause suffocation and serious or fatal injury. WARNING: The evaporation rate of R-134a refrigerant at average temperature and altitude is extremely high. As a result, anything that comes in contact with the refrigerant will freeze. Always protect the skin or delicate objects from direct contact with the refrigerant. WARNING: The R-134a service equipment or the vehicle refrigerant system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Some mixtures of air and R-134a have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous, and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage and serious or fatal injury. WARNING: The engine cooling system is designed to develop internal pressures up to 145 kilopascals (21 pounds per square inch). Do not remove or loosen the coolant pressure cap, cylinder block drain plugs, radiator drain, radiator hoses, heater hoses, or hose clamps while the engine cooling system is hot and under pressure. Allow the vehicle to cool for a minimum of 15 minutes before opening the cooling system for service. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious burns from the heated engine coolant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Warning > Page 1900 Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions Caution CAUTION CAUTION: Never add R-12 to a refrigerant system designed to use R-134a. Do not use R-12 equipment or parts on an R-134a A/C system. These refrigerants are not compatible and damage to the A/C system will result. CAUTION: Never use R-12 refrigerant oil in an A/C system designed to use R-134a refrigerant oil. These refrigerant oils are not compatible and damage to the A/C system will result. CAUTION: The use of A/C system sealers may result in damage to A/C refrigerant recovery/evacuation/recharging equipment and/or A/C system. Many federal, state/provincial and local regulations prohibit the recharge of A/C systems with known leaks. DaimlerChrysler recommends the detection of A/C system leaks through the use of approved leak detectors and fluorescent leak detection dyes. Vehicles found with A/C system sealers should be treated as contaminated and replacement of the entire A/C refrigerant system is recommended. A/C systems found to be contaminated with A/C system sealers, A/C stop-leak products or seal conditioners voids the warranty for the A/C system. CAUTION: Recover the refrigerant before opening any fitting or connection. Open the fittings with caution, even after the system has been discharged. Never open or loosen a connection before recovering the refrigerant. CAUTION: If equipped, do not remove the secondary retention clip from any spring-lock coupler connection while the refrigerant system is under pressure. Recover the refrigerant before removing the secondary retention clip. Open the fittings with caution, even after the system has been discharged. Never open or loosen a connection before recovering the refrigerant. CAUTION: The internal parts of the A/C system will remain stable as long as moisture-free refrigerant and refrigerant oil is used. Abnormal amounts of dirt, moisture or air can upset the chemical stability. This may cause operational troubles or even serious damage if present in more than very small quantities. Before disconnecting a component, clean the outside of the fittings thoroughly to prevent contamination from entering the refrigerant system. Keep service tools and the work area clean. Do not open the refrigerant system or uncap a replacement component until you are ready to service the system. Immediately after disconnecting a component from the refrigerant system, seal the open fittings with a cap or plug. This will prevent contamination from entering the A/C system. CAUTION: Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left uncapped. Do not open a container of refrigerant oil until you are ready to use it. Replace the cap on the oil container immediately after using. Store refrigerant oil only in a clean, airtight, and moisture-free container. CAUTION: Do not overcharge the refrigerant system. Overcharging will cause excessive compressor head pressure and can cause compressor noise and A/C system failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Plumbing - Front Description DESCRIPTION The A/C refrigerant lines and hoses are used to carry the refrigerant between the various A/C system components. The refrigerant lines and hoses for the R-134a A/C system consist of a barrier-hose design with a nylon tube sandwiched between rubber layers. The nylon tube helps to contain the R-134a refrigerant, which has a small molecular structure. The ends of the refrigerant lines are made from lightweight aluminum and braze-less fittings. Any kinks or sharp bends in the refrigerant lines and hoses will reduce the capacity of the entire A/C system and can reduce the flow of refrigerant within the system. Operation OPERATION High pressures are produced in the refrigerant system when the A/C compressor is operating. Extreme care must be exercised to make sure that each of the refrigerant system connections is pressure-tight and leak free. It is a good practice to inspect all flexible hose refrigerant lines at least once a year to make sure they are in good condition and properly routed. Depending on vehicle, model and market application, refrigerant lines are connected to each other or other A/C system components with block-type or quick-connect type fittings. To ensure the integrity of the refrigerant system, flat gaskets and O-rings are used to seal the refrigerant system connections. The refrigerant lines and hoses cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Discharge DESCRIPTION The A/C discharge line (1) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C compressor to the A/C condenser (2) and is secured to the condenser fan shroud (4) by a plastic retainer (3). The A/C discharge line has an integral fitting for the A/C pressure transducer (5). NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is disconnected. The A/C discharge line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Liquid DESCRIPTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 1903 The A/C liquid line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the A/C evaporator. The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section of the liquid line (1) connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier (2). The rear section of the liquid line (3) connects between the A/C receiver/drier and the A/C expansion valve (7) and includes the high side service port (5) and a tapping plate (8) that secures the suction line (9) to the A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals, high-side service port valve, cap and retainer clip (4). The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the liquid line is disconnected. The A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Suction DESCRIPTION The A/C suction line (9) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C evaporator to the A/C compressor. The A/C suction line includes the low side service port (6) and is secured to the A/C expansion valve (7) by the liquid line tapping plate (8). On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the A/C suction line also includes an extension tube that connects the suction line to the underbody lines. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals, low-side service port valve and cap. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is disconnected. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 1904 The A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 1905 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Plumbing - Rear Description DESCRIPTION Spring-lock type refrigerant line couplers (6) are used to connect the liquid line (1) and the suction line (3) to the underbody refrigerant lines for the rear heating-A/C system. Secondary retaining clips (2 and 7) are installed over the connected couplers for added protection. The spring-lock refrigerant line couplers require special disconnect tools for disengaging the two coupler halves. Operation OPERATION The spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler is held together by a garter spring (6) inside a circular cage (7) on the male half of the fitting (1). When the two coupler halves are connected, the flared end of the female fitting (2) slips behind the garter spring inside the cage on the male fitting. The garter spring and cage prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the cage. Some applications use a connection indicator ring (4) to help indicate when the two coupler halves are fully connected. O-rings (8) are used to seal the coupler connections. These O-rings are compatible with R-134a refrigerant and must be replaced with O-rings made of the same material. A secondary retaining clip (3) is installed over the connected coupler (5) for added protection. Line-A/C Liquid DESCRIPTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 1906 The rear A/C liquid line (1) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the rear A/C evaporator. The rear A/C liquid line serviced in two sections and includes a tapping plate (4) that retains the A/C suction line (3). Models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system include an extension tube (8) that connects the liquid line to the underbody line by use of a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler (6) and a secondary retaining clip (7). NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The rear A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C liquid line is disconnected. The rear A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Suction DESCRIPTION The rear A/C suction line (3) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the rear A/C evaporator to the A/C compressor. The rear A/c suction line is retained into the liquid line tapping block (4) by a plastic retainer. Models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system include an extension tube (5) that connects the suction line to the underbody line by use of a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler (6) and a secondary retaining clip (2). NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The rear A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is disconnected. The rear A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Lines-Underbody Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 1907 DESCRIPTION Models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system use metal lines (1) attached to the vehicle underbody (2) to carry refrigerant and engine coolant to/and from the rear A/C evaporator and heater core. The underbody A/C lines are connected to the front A/C suction and liquid lines by spring-lock type couplers and secondary retaining clips and to the rear HVAC housing (3) by a tapping plate (4) and nut (5). The metal underbody heater lines have rubber hose ends that are connected to the front heater hoses and the rear HVAC housing by use of spring-clamp type heater hose clamps. The underbody lines are retained by plastic mounting brackets (6) and screws (7) and can be repaired (depending on the amount of damage) by using A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A or equivalent. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The underbody lines can only be removed by lifting the body off of the frame and have no serviceable parts except for the refrigerant line rubber O-ring seals and the mounting brackets. The O-ring seals used on the refrigerant line connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the underbody refrigerant lines are disconnected. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Hose/Line HVAC: Procedures UNDERBODY LINE REPAIR WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. WARNING: This procedure is intended for underbody line repair only. Use of the connector fittings and A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A on any other type of vehicle tubing could cause tube failure resulting in possible personal injury or death. 1. If repairing an underbody refrigerant line, recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. If repairing an underbody coolant line, drain the engine cooling system. 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. 5. Remove the underbody mounting brackets as necessary to gain access to the underbody line(s) needing repair. 6. Mark the cut location(s) on the underbody line(s) needing repair. Check the Tube Length chart for the minimum amount of straight tube required (dimension A) for proper connector fitting installation. 7. Using a small pipe cutter or another suitable tool, carefully cut the underbody line(s) needing repair at the location(s) previously marked. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1910 8. Size a replacement line, same size diameter and length as the portion of the line(s) removed. NOTE: A minimum of 28.5 mm (3/4 in) of the line end must be cleaned in order for the connector fitting to properly seal the repair area. 9. Clean the ends of the line(s) a minimum of 28.5 mm (3/4 in) (dimension A) using the Scotch-Bright pad provided with A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A. Clean the line end(s) with a rotational motion around the line to avoid longitudinal scratches in the line. 10. Select the proper connector fitting (1) for the size of the underbody line being repaired. Refer to the Connector Fitting chart. 11. Apply one drop of Lokprep sealing compound provided with A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A onto each line end (2). 12. Insert the line ends into the selected connector fitting and rotate the connector fitting a complete turn to evenly distribute the sealing compound. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1911 13. Select the proper size jaws (1) for the line being repaired from the A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A. Refer to the Jaw Size chart. 14. Assemble the jaws into the tool body (Special Tool 8456-3 in Kit 8456-A) (2). a. For standard installation, install the jaws with the rubber gripping pads (3) facing outward. Refer to Tube Length chart. b. For reversed installation, remove the rubber gripping pads and install the jaws with the rubber gripping pad area facing inward. Refer to Tube Length chart. NOTE: The connector fitting ends must be positioned into the counterbore of the jaws in order for the connector fitting to properly seal the repair area. 15. Install the connector fitting (1) and the line ends (4) into the counterbore of the jaws (5). 16. Hold the tool body (Special Tool 8456-3 in Kit 8456-A) (2) with a 3/8 inch breaker bar and turn the forcing screw (3) clockwise. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1912 NOTE: The lines must be kept fully inserted into the connector fitting to obtain a leak free joint. 17. Turn the forcing screw (1) clockwise until both connector fitting collars (2) have bottomed out on the center shoulder of the connector (3). 18. Loosen the forcing screw and remove the tool body (Special Tool 8456-3 in Kit 8456-A) (4) and the jaws (5) from the repaired line(s). 19. Install the underbody mounting brackets as necessary. 20. Lower the vehicle. 21. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 22. If repairing an underbody coolant line, refill the engine cooling system. 23. If repairing an underbody refrigerant line, evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1913 Hose/Line HVAC: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (6) from the A/C pressure transducer (5). 4. If required, remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C discharge line (1). 5. Remove the nut (7) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser (2). 6. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C condenser and the retainer (3) located on the condenser fan shroud (4). 7. Remove the O-ring seal and gasket from the discharge line fitting and discard. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the discharge line fitting and condenser port. 9. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line (3) to the A/C compressor (4). 10. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 11. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fitting and the compressor port. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1914 12. Remove the A/C discharge line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Position the A/C discharge line into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fitting and the compressor port. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C discharge (3) line onto the A/C compressor (4). 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fitting (1) and the condenser port (2). 7. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1915 O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Install the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser and the retainer (3) located on the condenser fan shroud. 9. Install the nut (7) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 10. If removed, install the A/C pressure transducer (5) onto the A/C discharge line. 11. Connect the wire harness connector (6) to the A/C pressure transducer. 12. Connect the negative battery cable. 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 14. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 15. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. FRONT SECTION 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing (1) from the right side of the engine compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1916 4. Remove the bolt (1) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier (3). 5. Disconnect the front section of the A/C liquid line from the receiver/drier and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fitting and receiver/drier port. 7. Remove the nut (1) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the A/C condenser (3). 8. Disconnect the A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fitting and condenser port. 10. Remove the front section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. REAR SECTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1917 11. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 12. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 13. Remove the air cleaner housing (1) from the right side of the engine compartment. 14. Remove the rear section of the A/C liquid line (2) from the plastic retainer (3) located on the right inner fender (4). 15. Remove the bolt (1) that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier (3). 16. Disconnect the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the receiver/drier and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 17. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fitting and the receiver/drier port. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1918 18. Raise and support the vehicle. 19. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 20. Remove the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line (2) to the liquid line tapping block (4). 21. Remove the nut (3) that secures the liquid line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve (5). 22. Disconnect the A/C suction line and the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the A/C expansion valve and remove and discard the O-ring seals and gaskets. 23. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fittings and the expansion valve ports. 24. Separate the A/C suction line from the liquid line tapping block. 25. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, disconnect the underbody liquid line from the liquid line tapping block. 26. Remove the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. FRONT SECTION 1. Position the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the liquid line fitting and the condenser port. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1919 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the tape or plugs from the liquid line fitting and the receiver/drier (3). 7. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier. 9. Install the bolt (1) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line to the receiver/drier. Tighten the bolt to 13.5 Nm (120 in. lbs.). 10. Install the air cleaner housing (1) to the right side of the engine compartment. 11. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 12. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 13. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 14. Charge the refrigerant system. REAR SECTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1920 15. Position the rear section of the A/C liquid line into the engine compartment. 16. Install the A/C suction line (2) into the liquid line tapping block (4). 17. Install the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the liquid line tapping block. 18. Remove the tape or plugs from the suction and liquid line fittings and the A/C expansion valve (5). 19. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and a new gasket onto the A/C expansion valve. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 20. Connect the A/C suction line and the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the A/C expansion valve. 21. Install the nut (3) that secures the refrigerant line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 22. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, connect the underbody liquid line to the liquid line tapping block. 23. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 24. Lower the vehicle. 25. Remove the tape or plugs from the liquid line fitting and the receiver/drier (3). 26. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 27. Connect the rear section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier. 28. Install the bolt (1) that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the receiver/drier. Tighten the bolt to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1921 29. Install the rear section of the liquid line (2) into the plastic retainer (3) located on the right inner fender (4). 30. Install the air cleaner housing (1) to the right side of the engine compartment. 31. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 32. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 33. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 34. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Remove the nut (1) that secure the A/C suction line (2) to the A/C compressor (4). 4. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 5. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened suction line fitting and the compressor port. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1922 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 8. Remove the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line (2) to the liquid line tapping block (4). 9. Remove the nut (3) that secures the liquid line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve (5). 10. Disconnect the A/C suction line and the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the A/C expansion valve and remove and discard the O-ring seals and gaskets. 11. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fittings and the expansion valve ports. 12. Separate the A/C suction line from the liquid line tapping block. 13. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, disconnect the underbody refrigerant line from the A/C suction line. 14. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1923 1. Position the A/C suction line (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Install the A/C suction line into the liquid line tapping block (4). 3. Install the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the liquid line tapping block. 4. Remove the tape or plugs from the suction and liquid line fittings and the A/C expansion valve (5). 5. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and a new gasket onto the suction and liquid line fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 6. Connect the A/C suction line and A/C liquid line to the A/C expansion valve. 7. Install the nut (3) that secures the refrigerant line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 8. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, connect the underbody refrigerant line to the A/C suction line. 9. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fitting and the compressor port. 12. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the suction line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 13. Install the A/C suction line (2) onto the A/C compressor (4). 14. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1924 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 17. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 18. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. Remove the secondary retaining clip from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 3. Fit the proper size A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) over the coupler cage (1). 4. Close the two halves of the A/C line disconnect tool around the coupler (2). NOTE: The garter spring may not release if the A/C line disconnect tool is cocked while pushing it into the coupler cage opening. 5. Push the A/C line disconnect tool into the open side of the coupler cage to expand the garter spring (3). Once the garter spring is expanded, pull on the refrigerant line attached to the female half of the coupler until the flange on the female fitting is separated from the garter spring and cage on the male fitting. 6. Open and remove the A/C line disconnect tool from the refrigerant line coupler (4). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1925 1. Clean any dirt or foreign material from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 2. Check to make sure that the garter spring (6) is located within the cage (7) of the male half of the refrigerant line coupler (1), and that the garter spring is not damaged. a. If the garter spring is missing, install a new spring by pushing it into the coupler cage opening. b. If the garter spring is damaged, remove it from the coupler cage with a small hook (DO NOT use a screwdriver) and install a new garter spring. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals is required anytime a refrigerant coupler is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals could result in a refrigerant system leak. 3. Install new O-rings (8) on the male half of the refrigerant line coupler. 4. Lubricate the O-rings, and the inside of the female half of the refrigerant line coupler (2) with clean R-134a refrigerant oil. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Position the female half of the coupler over the male half of the coupler. 6. Push together firmly on the two halves of the refrigerant line coupler until the garter spring in the cage on the male half of the coupler snaps over the flanged end on the female half of the coupler. 7. Make sure that the refrigerant line coupler is fully engaged by firmly pulling the refrigerant lines away from each other on both sides of the coupler. 8. Install the secondary retaining clip (3) over connected coupler cage (5). 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 10. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1926 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Disconnect the A/C liquid line (1) from the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. 4. Remove the secondary retaining clip (7) from the refrigerant line coupler (6) on the liquid line extension tube (8) 5. Disconnect the underbody liquid line from the liquid line extension tube using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the refrigerant line coupler and the underbody liquid line. 7. Remove the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1927 1. Install the A/C liquid line (1) to the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the refrigerant line coupler (6) and the underbody liquid line. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the refrigerant line coupler. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the underbody liquid line to liquid line extension tube (8). 5. Install the secondary retaining clip (7) onto the refrigerant line coupler. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 8. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 9. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C suction line connects between the A/C evaporator and the A/C compressor. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the A/C suction line also includes an extension tube that connects the suction line to the underbody lines. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1928 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Disconnect the A/C suction line (3) from the A/C compressor and the front A/C expansion valve. 4. Remove the secondary retaining clip (2) from the refrigerant line coupler (6) on the suction line extension tube (5) 5. Disconnect the underbody suction line from the suction line extension tube using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the refrigerant line coupler and the underbody suction line. 7. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C suction line connects between the A/C evaporator and the A/C compressor. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the A/C suction line also includes an extension tube that connects the suction line to the underbody lines. 1. Install the A/C suction line (3) to the A/C compressor and the front A/C expansion valve. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the refrigerant line coupler (6) and the underbody suction line. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the refrigerant line coupler. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the underbody suction line to the suction line extension tube (5). 5. Install the secondary retaining clip (2) onto the refrigerant line coupler. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 8. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 9. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1929 Underbody Line Assembly UNDERBODY LINE ASSEMBLY WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Drain the engine cooling system. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. 5. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 6. Remove the secondary retaining clips (2 and 7) from the refrigerant line couplers (6) located on the suction line extension tube (5) and the liquid line extension tube (8). 7. Disconnect the underbody liquid and suction lines from the liquid line extension tube and the suction line extension tube using the proper A/C line disconnect tools (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the refrigerant line couplers and the underbody refrigerant lines. 9. Disconnect the underbody heater hoses from the front heater hoses. 10. Remove the nut (1) that secures the rear suction line (2) and the rear liquid line (3) to the rear evaporator line tapping plate that extends through the rear floor panel (4) behind the right rear wheel housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1930 11. Disconnect the rear suction line and liquid line from the rear evaporator line tapping plate and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 12. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant lines and tapping plate ports. 13. Disconnect the rear heater hoses (5) from the rear heater core tubes that extend through the rear floor panel behind the right rear wheel housing. 14. Remove all body mount bolts on the passenger side of the vehicle and loosen the body mount bolts on the drivers side. 15. Place a jackstand at the front and rear of the vehicle on the passenger side so that the stands will safely support the body. 16. Remove the five screws (7) that secure the underbody lines (1) to the vehicle underbody (2). 17. Carefully lower the hoist until the right side of the body (supported by the stands) is approximately 76-101 mm (3-4 in.) above the frame. This will gain access to remove the underbody line assembly. 18. Remove the underbody line assembly from the underneath of the vehicle body. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1931 1. Position the underbody line assembly underneath the vehicle body. 2. Carefully raise the hoist until the frame and body mounts line up together. 3. Install the five screws that secure the underbody lines (1) to the vehicle underbody (2). 4. Install all body mount bolts to the passenger side of the vehicle. Tighten all passenger and driver side mount bolts securely. 5. Raise the hoist and remove the jack stands from under the vehicle. 6. Connect the rear heater hoses (5) to the rear heater core tubes that extend through the rear floor panel (4) behind the right rear wheel housing and install the heater hose clamps. 7. Remove the tape or plugs from fittings on the rear suction line (2) and the rear liquid line (3) and the rear evaporator extension line tapping plate ports. 8. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the rear suction and liquid line fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Connect the rear suction and liquid line fittings to the rear evaporator line tapping plate. 10. Install the nut (1) that secures the rear refrigerant lines to the rear evaporator line tapping plate. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1932 11. Connect the underbody heater hoses to the front heater hoses and install the heater hose clamps. 12. Remove the tape or plugs from the refrigerant line couplers (6) and the underbody refrigerant lines. 13. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line couplers. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 14. Connect the underbody liquid and suction lines to the liquid line extension tube (8) and the suction line extension tube (5). 15. Install the secondary retaining clips (2 and 7) onto the refrigerant line couplers. 16. Install passenger side tires. 17. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 18. Lower the vehicle. 19. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 20. Fill the engine cooling system. 21. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 22. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 23. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Removal Return Hose RETURN HOSE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1937 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1938 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Installation Return Hose RETURN HOSE 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the cooler (5). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the gear (2). Tighten the hose to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the return hose to the crossmember and secure. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system. Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Install the pressure hose (3) to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (3) at the pump (1). Tighten the hose to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) to the gear (2). Tighten the hose to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 4. Reconnect the pressure hose (3) at the gear (2). Tighten the hose to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the pressure hose (3) to the crossmember retainer. 6. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 7. Refill the power steering system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1944 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1945 Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1946 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1947 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts. Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid. To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers, there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid. If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brakes hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1948 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Always clean the master cylinder reservoir (1) and cap (2) before checking fluid level. If not cleaned, dirt could enter the fluid. The fluid fill level is indicated on the side of the master cylinder reservoir (1). The correct fluid level is to the MAX indicator on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add fluid to the proper level. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Clutch Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1953 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1958 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Capacity With Rear Heat .................................................................................................................................................. 16.6 qts. (15.8L) Note: Includes 2.1 qts (2L) for coolant bottle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1961 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) P/N 5022764AB or equivalent. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant DESCRIPTION WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. ETHYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/160.000 km (100,000 Mile) Formula (ethylene-glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT, for Hybrid Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37° C (-35° F). The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water mixture depends upon the climate and vehicle operating conditions. The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower than 44 percent, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation, and cooling system components may be severely damaged by corrosion. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68% antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7° C (-90° F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because the specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. Use of 100 percent ethylene-glycol will cause formation of additive deposits in the system, as the corrosion inhibitive additives in ethylene-glycol require the presence of water to dissolve. The deposits act as insulation, causing temperatures to rise to as high as 149° C (300° F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at 22° C (-8° F). PROPYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES It's overall effective temperature range is smaller than that of ethylene-glycol. The freeze point of 50/50 propylene-glycol and water is -32° C (-26° F). 5° C higher than ethylene-glycol's freeze point. The boiling point (protection against summer boil-over) of propylene-glycol is 125° C (257° F) at 96.5 kPa (14 psi), compared to 128° C (263° F) for ethylene-glycol. Use of propylene-glycol can result in boil-over or freeze-up on a cooling system designed for ethylene-glycol. Propylene- glycol also has poorer heat transfer characteristics than ethylene-glycol. This can increase cylinder head temperatures under certain conditions. Propylene-glycol/ethylene-glycol Mixtures can cause the destabilization of various corrosion inhibitors, causing damage to the various cooling system components. Also, once ethylene-glycol and propylene-glycol based coolants are mixed in the vehicle, conventional methods of determining freeze point will not be accurate. Both the refractive index and specific gravity differ between ethylene glycol and propylene-glycol. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant > Page 1964 Coolant: Description and Operation Description HOAT COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/160.935 KM, (5 Year/100,000 Mile) Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37° C (-35° F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT), may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water - Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149° C (300° F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22° C (-8° F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37° C (-34° F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7° C (-90° F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. COOLANT SELECTION AND ADDITIVES The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year 160,935 km (5 Year/100,000 Mile) Formula (glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37° C (-35° F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Do not use coolant additives that are claimed to improve engine cooling. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant > Page 1965 Coolant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Coolant flows through the engine block, cylinder head, absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. On the 6.7L diesel engine, coolant also flows through the EGR cooler and turbocharger actuator. During cold weather the ethylene-glycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Coolant Concentration Testing Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Concentration Testing COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain, flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to a freeze point of -37° C (-34° F) to -46° C (-50° F). The use of a hydrometer or Tool 8266, refractometer can be used to test coolant concentration. A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection (up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol). A Refractometer Tool 8286 will test the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid. Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and corrosion protection and is not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Coolant Concentration Testing > Page 1968 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Level Check COOLANT LEVEL CHECK NOTE: Do not remove radiator cap for routine coolant level inspections. The coolant level can be checked at coolant recovery bottle (2). The coolant reserve/overflow system (5) provides a quick method for determining coolant level without removing radiator pressure cap. With engine not running, open the coolant recovery bottle cap and remove coolant level indicator dipstick to observe coolant level in coolant recovery bottle. The coolant level should be between ADD and FULL marks. If the coolant level is at or below the ADD mark, fill the recovery bottle with a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water ONE QUART AT A TIME. Repeat this procedure until the coolant level is at the FULL mark. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1973 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1978 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1983 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1988 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1993 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1994 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF + 4 Fluid Usage NUMBER: 21-014-07 GROUP: Transmission DATE: October 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-010-06, DATED APRIL 14, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES THE ADDITION OF THE ASIAN WARNER (AW4) TRANSMISSION AND ADDITIONAL MODELS AND YEARS. SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Fluid Usage ATF+4 (Type M59602) MODELS: 1989 - 1995 (AA) Spirit/Acclaim/Lebaron Sedan 1989 - 2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1989 - 1993 (AC) Dynasty/New Yorker/New Yorker Salon 1989 - 1993 (AD) Ram Truck 1989 - 1994 (AG) Daytona 1989 (AH) Lancer/Lebaron GTS 1989 - 1995 (AJ) Lebaron Coupe/Lebaron Convertible 1989 - 1990 (AK) Aries/Reliant 1989 - 1990 (AL) Horizon/Omni 1989 (AM) Diplomat/Gran Fury/New Yorker fifth Avenue 1989 - 2004 (AN) Dakota 1989 - 1994 (AP) Shadow/Sundance 1990 - 1991 (AQ) Maserati 1990 - 1993 (AY) Imperial/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1994 - 2003 (BR/BE) Ram Truck 2004 - **2008** (CS) Pacifica 1998-2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - **2008** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2007 - **2008** (DC) Ram 3500 Cab Chassis 1995 - 2000 (FJ) Sebring/Avenger/Talon 1996 - 2000 (GS) Chrysler Voyager (International Market) 2004 - **2008** (HB) Durango **2008 (HG) Aspen** 1995 - 2000 (JA) Cirrus/Stratus/Breeze Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1995 2007 - **2008** (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - **2008** (JS) Avenger/Sebring/Sebring Convertible 1996 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty **2008 (KK) Liberty** **2008 (L2) 300C (China)** 1993 - 2004 (LH) Concorde/Intrepid/Vision/LHS/New Yorker /300M 2005 - **2008** (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 1996 - 2000 (NS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon 2002 - 2003 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2001 - **2008** (PT) PT Cruiser 1997 - 2002 (PR) Prowler 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager **2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. & International Markets)** 1997-2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2001 - 2004 (WG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) Vehicles equipped with Gas engines 1999 - 2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2008** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2008** (XK/XH) Commander 1989 - 1995 (YJ) Wrangler **1989 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee** **1989 - 1993 (MJ) Comanche** 1996 - 1998 (ZG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 1994 - 1998 (ZJ) Grand Cherokee/Grand Wagoneer NOTE: **AWA (Asian Warner) transmission are now included in this Service Bulletin. ATF+4(R) is recommended for AW-4 (Asian Warner) transmissions** NOTE: This Service Bulletin DOES NOT apply to Sprinter transmissions, Crossfire transmissions, MK/PM vehicles equipped with Continuously Variable Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1996 Transmission (CVT) and WG vehicles equipped with a diesel engine (sales code ENF) and a W5J400 or NAG1 transmission (sales code DGJ). DISCUSSION: ATF+4(R) - (Type 9602) is being used as factory fill for Chrysler Group automatic transmissions. ATF+4(R) is recommended for all vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group automatic transmissions EXCEPT FOR THOSE LISTED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE: ATF+4(R) must always be used in vehicles that were originally filled with ATF+4(R). DO NOT USE ANY OTHER FLUID. NOTE: ATF+4(R) is backward compatible with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+. Additionally, ATF+4(R) can be used to top off vehicles that used ATF+3, ATF+2, or ATF+. NOTE: If ATF+4® is used to service models originally filled with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+ the fluid maintenance schedules listed for that model does not change. The service interval currently in effect for a given model should continue to be followed. Refer to the Service or Owners manual for maintenance schedule directions. In general terms, If ATF+, ATF+2 or ATF+3 was the recommended fluid, it is now recommended to use ATF+4® BENEFITS ^ Better anti-wear properties ^ Improved rust/corrosion prevention ^ Controls oxidation ^ Eliminates deposits ^ Controls friction ^ Retains anti-foaming properties ^ Superior properties for low temperature operation FLUID COLOR Mopar ATF+4(R) has exceptional durability. However, the red dye used in ATF+4(R) is not permanent; as the fluid ages it may become darker or appear brown in color. ATF+4(R) also has a unique odor that may change with age. With ATF+4(R) fluid, color and odor are no longer indicators of fluid condition and do not necessarily support a fluid change. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1997 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF+4 Fluid Usage/Applications NUMBER: 21-010-06 GROUP: Transmission DATE: April 14, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-004-04, DATED MARCH 16, 2004, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Fluid Usage ATF+4 (Type M59602) MODELS: 1989 - 1995 (AA) Spirit/Acclaim/Lebaron Sedan 1989 - 2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1989 - 1993 (AC) Dynasty/New Yorker/New Yorker Salon 1989 - 1993 (AD) Ram Truck 1989 - 1994 (AG) Daytona 1989 (AH) Lancer/Lebaron GTS 1989 - 1995 (AJ) Lebaron Coupe/Lebaron Convertible 1989 - 1990 (AK) Aries/Reliant 1989 - 1990 (AL) Horizon/Omni 1989 (AM) Diplomat/Gran Fury/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1989 - 2004 (AN) Dakota 1989 - 1994 (AP) Shadow/Sundance 1990 - 1991 (AQ) Maserati 1990 - 1993 (AY) Imperial/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1994 - 2003 (BR/BE) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 1998 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2007 (DC) Ram 3500 Cab Chassis 1995 - 2000 (FJ) Sebring/Avenger/Talon 1996 - 2000 (CS) Chrysler Voyager (International Market) 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 1995 - 2000 (JA) Cirrus/Stratus/Breeze 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1998 2007 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 1996 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1993 - 2004 (LH) Concorde/Intrepid/Vision/LHS/New Yorker /300M 2005 - 2007 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 1996 - 2000 (NS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon 2002 - 2003 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (PT) PT Cruiser 1997 - 2002 (PR) Prowler 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1997 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2001 - 2004 (WG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) Vehicles equipped with Gas engines 1999 - 2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK/XH) Commander 1989 - 1995 (YJ) Wrangler 1996 - 1998 (ZG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 1994 - 1998 (ZJ) Grand Cherokee/Grand Wagoneer NOTE: This Service Bulletin DOES NOT apply to AW-4 transmissions, Sprinter transmissions, Crossfire transmissions, MK/PM vehicles equipped with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) and WG vehicles equipped with a diesel engine (sales code ENF) and a W5J400 or NAG1 transmission (sales code DGJ). DISCUSSION: ATF+4(R) - (Type 9602) is being used as factory fill for Chrysler Group automatic transmissions. ATF+4(R) is recommended for all vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group automatic transmissions EXCEPT FOR THOSE NOTED ABOVE. NOTE: ATF+4(R) must always be used in vehicles that were originally filled with ATF+4(R). DO NOT USE ANY OTHER FLUID. NOTE: ATF+4(R) is backward compatible with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+. Additionally, ATF+4 can be used to top off vehicles that used ATF+3, ATF+2, or ATF+. NOTE: If ATF+4(R) is used to service models originally filled with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+ the fluid maintenance schedules listed for that model does not change. The service interval currently in effect for a given model should continue to be followed. Refer to the Service or Owners manual for maintenance schedule directions. In general terms, If ATF+, ATF+2 or ATF+3 was the recommended fluid, it is now recommended to use ATF+4. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1999 BENEFITS ^ Better anti-wear properties ^ Improved rust/corrosion prevention ^ Controls oxidation ^ Eliminates deposits ^ Controls friction ^ Retains anti-foaming properties ^ Superior properties for low temperature operation FLUID COLOR Mopar ATF+4(R) has exceptional durability. However, the red dye used in ATF+4(R) is not permanent; as the fluid ages it may become darker or appear brown in color. ATF+4(R) also has a unique odor that may change with age. With ATF+4(R) fluid, color and odor are no longer indicators of fluid condition and do not necessarily support a fluid change. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity 42RLE -Service Fill .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................. 3.8Liters (4.0 Qt) -Overhaul Fill ........................................ .................................................................................................................................................... 8.3Liters (17.6 Pt) 545RFE -Service Fill ............................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... 5.2Liters (11 Pt) -Overhaul Fill ...................................... .................................................................................................................................................. 13.33Liters (28.0 Pt) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2002 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................. .......................................................... Mopar ATF +4 NOTE: Dextron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 2005 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 2006 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid. - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level. - engine coolant entering the fluid. - internal failure that generates debris. - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown). - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair. The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Level Check - 545RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 2009 transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 2010 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the diagnosis. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 2011 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with a suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer, or other suitable tool). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 2012 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid and adjust as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2017 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2022 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2027 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2028 Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Differential - Fluid Level Inspection Procedure NUMBER: 03-003-06 GROUP: Axle DATE: October 20, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 03-001-04 REV. A, DATED MAY 11, 2004, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODEL YEARS. SUBJECT: Axle Fluid Level MODELS: 2004 (AN) Dakota **2004 - 2007** (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck **2004 - 2007** (HB/HG) Durango / Aspen **2005 - 2007** (ND) Dakota DISCUSSION: The axle fill holes on some Dodge Truck vehicle axles may be located considerably higher than the actual fluid level. Filling the axle until the fluid comes out of the fill hole will over fill the axle, which may cause fluid foaming. When checking fluid level or filling a rear axle with fluid, you must measure the distance from the bottom of the fill hole to the top of the actual fluid level. This can easily be accomplished using a pipe cleaner or piece of wire. Make a 90 degree bend in the wire 2 inches from the end. The wire can then be inserted into the axle fill hole to use as a dipstick. Measure the distance from the bend to the oil level. The fluid levels for the axles are shown in the table below. CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR DURANGO / ASPEN: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2029 The Trac-Lok feature is not available on Durango rear axles. Traction control is provided electronically through the ABS system. Trac-Lok additives or friction modifiers are not required. CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR RAM TRUCK 1500: CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR RAM TRUCK 2500 -3500: CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR DAKOTA: NOTE: The Trac-Lok feature is available on Dakota rear axles. Trac-Lok additives are required on axles equipped with Trac Lok. POLICY: Information Only. Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications 8 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 70 oz (2.07L) 9 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 72 oz (2.13L) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2032 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications 8 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant 75W-140 9 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant 75W-140 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2037 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2042 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil (with filter) .......................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 6.6Liters (7.0 Qt) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2045 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... SAE 5W-20 API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equivalent Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2046 Engine Oil: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator is located at the left hand of the engine on the 5.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about ten minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately five minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. Torque to 34 Nm ( 25 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2051 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2052 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Mopar ATF +4 Automatic Transmission Fluid is required in the power steering system. Substitute fluids can induce power steering system failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2053 Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The recommended fluid for the power steering system is Mopar(R) ATF +4. Mopar(R) ATF+4, when new is red in color. The ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition, As the vehicle is driven, the ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2054 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL CHECKING WARNING: FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH THE ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY FROM MOVING PARTS. CAUTION: MOPAR(R) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, and do not overfill. The power steering fluid level can be viewed on the dipstick attached to the filler cap. There are two ranges listed on the dipstick, COLD and HOT. Before opening power steering system, wipe the reservoir filler cap free of dirt and debris. Remove the cap and check the fluid level on its dipstick. When the fluid is at normal ambient temperature, approximately 21° C to 27° C (70° F to 80° F), the fluid level should read between the minimum and maximum area of the cold range. When the fluid is hot, fluid level is allowed to read up to the highest end of the HOT range. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4 Do not overfill the power steering system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2055 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair POWER STEERING SYSTEM BLEEDING WARNING: The fluid level should be checked with engine off to prevent injury from moving components. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Power Steering Fluid + 4 or Mopar(R) ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid is to be used in the power steering system. Both Fluids have the same material standard specifications (MS-9602). No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if another fluid is used. Do not overfill the system. CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, pump failure could result. NOTE: Be sure the vacuum tool used in the following procedure is clean and free of any fluids. 1. Check the fluid level. As measured on the side of the reservoir, the level should indicate between MAX and MIN when the fluid is at normal ambient temperature. Adjust the fluid level as necessary. 2. Tightly insert Power Steering Cap Adapter (4), Special Tool 9688, into the mouth of the reservoir (3). CAUTION: Failure to use a the vacuum pump reservoir (1) may allow power steering fluid to be sucked into the hand vacuum pump. 3. Attach Hand Vacuum Pump (2), Special Tool C-4207 or equivalent, with reservoir (1) attached, to the Power Steering Cap Adapter (4). CAUTION: Do not run the engine while vacuum is applied to the power steering system. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. NOTE: When performing the following step make sure the vacuum level is maintained during the entire time period. 4. Using Hand Vacuum Pump (2), apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in. Hg) of vacuum to the system for a minimum of three minutes. 5. Slowly release the vacuum and remove the special tools. 6. Adjust the fluid level as necessary. Refer to STEP 1. 7. Repeat STEP 1 through STEP 6 until the fluid no longer drops when vacuum is applied. 8. Start the engine and cycle the steering wheel lock-to-lock three times. NOTE: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops. 9. Stop the engine and check for leaks at all connections. 10. Check for any signs of air in the reservoir and check the fluid level. If air is present, repeat the procedure as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications Refrigerant: Specifications REFRIGERANT CHARGE LEVEL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear, and colorless liquefied gas. Even though R-134a does not contain chlorine, it must be reclaimed and recycled just like CFC-type refrigerants. This is because R-134a is a greenhouse gas and can contribute to global warming. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2061 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge or poor A/C system performance. In addition, the polyalkylene glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oils used in an R-134a refrigerant system are not compatible with the mineral-based refrigerant oils used in an R-12 refrigerant system. R-134a refrigerant system service ports, service tool couplers and refrigerant dispensing bottles have all been designed with unique fittings to ensure that an R-134a refrigerant system is not accidentally contaminated with the wrong refrigerant (R-12). There are also labels posted in the engine compartment of the vehicle and on the A/C compressor to identify that the A/C system is equipped with R-134a refrigerant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Recovery REFRIGERANT SYSTEM RECOVERY WARNING: Review safety precautions and warnings before performing this procedure. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: If equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, use a heat gun to heat the underbody lines to help remove any trapped refrigerant from the rear A/C system. An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used to recover the refrigerant from the R-134a refrigerant system. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for the proper care and use of this equipment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 2064 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Evacuate REFRIGERANT SYSTEM EVACUATE NOTE: Special effort must be used to prevent moisture from entering the A/C system oil. Moisture in the oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the compressor. If a compressor designed to use R-134a refrigerant is left open to the atmosphere for an extended period of time. It is recommended that the refrigerant oil be drained and replaced with new oil or a new A/C compressor be used. This will eliminate the possibility of contaminating the refrigerant system. If the refrigerant system has been open to the atmosphere, it must be evacuated before the system can be filled. Moisture and air mixed with the refrigerant will raise the compressor head pressure above acceptable operating levels. This will reduce the performance of the A/C system and damage the A/C compressor. Moisture will boil at near room temperature when exposed to vacuum. To evacuate the refrigerant system: NOTE: When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection. 1. Recover the refrigerant system. 2. Connect a suitable charging station, refrigerant recovery machine or a manifold gauge set with vacuum pump and refrigerant recovery equipment. 3. Open the suction and discharge valves and start the vacuum pump. The vacuum pump should run a minimum of 45 minutes prior to charge to eliminate all moisture in system. When the suction gauge reads -88 kPa (-26 in. Hg) vacuum or greater for 30 minutes, close all valves and turn off vacuum pump. If the system fails to reach specified vacuum, the refrigerant system likely has a leak that must be corrected. If the refrigerant system maintains specified vacuum for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump, open the suction and discharge valves. Then allow the system to evacuate an additional 10 minutes. 4. Close all valves. Turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump. 5. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 2065 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Charge REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE WARNING: Review safety precautions and warnings before performing this procedure. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: The Underhood HVAC Specification Label contains the refrigerant fill specification of the vehicle being serviced. After all refrigerant system leaks have been repaired and the refrigerant system has been evacuated, a refrigerant charge can be injected into the system. A R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE Standard J2210 must be used to charge the refrigerant system with R-134a refrigerant. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. CHARGING PROCEDURE CAUTION: A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the A/C system each time the refrigerant system is recovered and evacuated. Before charging the A/C system, you MUST replenish any oil lost during the recovery process. Refer the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 2. A manifold gauge set and an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 should be connected to the refrigerant system. 3. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52° C (125° F) with the charging station. See the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper use of this equipment. 4. Open both the suction and discharge valves, then open the charge valve to allow the heated refrigerant to flow into the system. 5. When the transfer of refrigerant has stopped, close both the suction and discharge valves. 6. If all of the refrigerant charge did not transfer from the dispensing device, open all of the windows in the vehicle and set the heating-A/C system controls so that the A/C compressor is engaged and the blower motor is operating at its lowest speed setting. Run the engine at a steady high idle (about 1400 rpm). If the A/C compressor does not engage, test the compressor clutch control circuit and repair as required. 7. Open the low-side valve to allow the remaining refrigerant to transfer to the refrigerant system. WARNING: Take care not to open the discharge (high pressure) valve at this time. Failure to follow this warning could result in possible personal injury or death. 8. Disconnect the charging station and manifold gauge set from the refrigerant system service ports. 9. Reinstall the caps onto the refrigerant system service ports. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2066 Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE EQUIPMENT WARNING: Eye protection must be worn when servicing an A/C refrigerant system. Turn all valves off (rotate clockwise) on the equipment being used before connecting or disconnecting service equipment from the refrigerant system. Failure to observe these warnings may result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. When servicing the A/C system, a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used (1). Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging equipment. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. A manifold gauge set (1) may be needed with some recovery/recycling/charging equipment. The manifold gauge set should have manual shut-off valves (2 and 6), or automatic back-flow valves located at the service port connector end of the manifold gauge set hoses (4 and 5). This will prevent refrigerant from being released into the atmosphere. MANIFOLD GAUGE SET CONNECTIONS CAUTION: Do not use an R-12 manifold gauge set on an R-134a system. The refrigerants are not compatible and system damage will result. RECOVERY/RECYCLING/EVACUATION/CHARGING HOSE The center manifold hose (Yellow, or White, with Black stripe) (3) is used to Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2067 recover, evacuate, and charge the refrigerant system. When the low or high pressure valves on the manifold gauge set are opened, the refrigerant in the system will escape through this hose. HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE The high pressure hose (Red with Black stripe) (4) attaches to the high side service port. This service port is located on the liquid line near the receiver/drier outlet. On this model, an A/C pressure transducer is installed on the discharge line. A/C high-side pressures can be read using a scan tool. LOW PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE The low pressure hose (Blue with Black stripe) (5) attaches to the low side service port. This service port is located on the suction line near the A/C compressor inlet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant oil used in R-134a refrigerant systems is a synthetic-based, polyalkylene glycol (PAG), wax-free lubricant. Mineral-based R-12 refrigerant oils are not compatible with PAG oils, and should never be introduced to an R-134a refrigerant system. There are different PAG oils available, and each contains a different additive package. The Denso 10S20 A/C compressor used in this vehicle is designed to use ND-8 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil in the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2073 Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION After performing any refrigerant recovery or recycling operation, always replenish the refrigerant system with the same amount of the recommended refrigerant oil as was removed. Too little refrigerant oil can cause A/C compressor damage, and too much can reduce A/C system performance. PAG refrigerant oil is more hygroscopic than mineral oil, and will absorb any moisture it comes into contact with, even moisture in the air. The PAG oil container should always be kept tightly capped until it is ready to be used. After use, recap the oil container immediately to prevent moisture contamination. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2074 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The A/C receiver/drier, A/C evaporator, A/C condenser and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The oil used in the Denso 10S20 A/C compressor is ND-8 PAG R-134a refrigerant oil. Only refrigerant oil of the same type should be used to service the A/C system. Do not use any other refrigerant oil. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. Refer to the reclaim/recycling equipment manufacturers instructions. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C condenser, A/C receiver/drier or A/C evaporator is replaced (refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart). The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation. COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2075 the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 2080 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 2081 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 2082 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of the scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding.. 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time. 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 2087 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 2088 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component ID: 53 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F981 12PK/YL 2 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse: > 22-002-06 > Jul > 06 > Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set Fuse: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set NUMBER: 22-002-06 GROUP: Tires & Wheels DATE: July 02, 2006 SUBJECT: Tire Pressure Monitor DIG's Due To The IOD Fuse Not Being Installed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves erroneous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) that are caused when the vehicle is driven without the IOD fuse installed. MODELS: 2007 HB/HG Durango/Aspen 2007 WK/WH Grand Cherokee 2007 XK/XH Commander DISCUSSION: The driver may notice that the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. Whether a premium or base system, the tire pressure monitor warning light in the instrument cluster may be flashing indicating a TPM SYSTEM problem. On premium TPM systems, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) may display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. And when stepping through the EVIC to the tire pressure display, all of the tire pressure readings may display as dashes "- -" rather than actual tire pressure values. Investigation by the technician may find the presence of all four TPM related DTC's: C1501 - Tire Pressure Sensor 1 (L.F.) Internal C1502 - Tire Pressure Sensor 2 (R.F.) Internal C1503 - Tire Pressure Sensor 3 (R.R.) Internal C1504 - Tire Pressure Sensor 4 (L.R.) Internal The above condition is most likely caused by driving the vehicle without the IOD fuse installed. If the vehicle is driven at speeds greater than 32 kph (20 mph) for more than approximately ten (10) minutes without the IOD fuse installed, then the TPM system will log the above four DTC's. This sceneno is most likely to occur when the vehicle is driven while in dealer inventory. Without the IOD fuse installed part of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), the receiver circuit, is not operational (not powered). Though the 1PM tire sensors are powered and transmitting correct tire pressure signals, the WCM receiver is not receiving those signals. The portion of the WCM circuitry that is powered, by the ignition on/run feed, sends a CAN message to the Cabin Control Node (CCN) in the instrument cluster indicating that the TPM tire pressure signals are not available. On base and premium TPM systems the CCN will flash the tire pressure monitor warning light, and the powered portion of the WCM will log all four of the above TPM DTC's as faults with the TPM system. On premium 1PM systems the CCN will also cause the EVIC to display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. For the TPM system to operate correctly the IOD fuse must be installed. A scan tool (StarSCAN(R) / StarMOBILE(TM) will be required to erase the four TPM DTC's. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 22-002-06 > Jul > 06 > Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set NUMBER: 22-002-06 GROUP: Tires & Wheels DATE: July 02, 2006 SUBJECT: Tire Pressure Monitor DIG's Due To The IOD Fuse Not Being Installed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves erroneous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) that are caused when the vehicle is driven without the IOD fuse installed. MODELS: 2007 HB/HG Durango/Aspen 2007 WK/WH Grand Cherokee 2007 XK/XH Commander DISCUSSION: The driver may notice that the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. Whether a premium or base system, the tire pressure monitor warning light in the instrument cluster may be flashing indicating a TPM SYSTEM problem. On premium TPM systems, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) may display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. And when stepping through the EVIC to the tire pressure display, all of the tire pressure readings may display as dashes "- -" rather than actual tire pressure values. Investigation by the technician may find the presence of all four TPM related DTC's: C1501 - Tire Pressure Sensor 1 (L.F.) Internal C1502 - Tire Pressure Sensor 2 (R.F.) Internal C1503 - Tire Pressure Sensor 3 (R.R.) Internal C1504 - Tire Pressure Sensor 4 (L.R.) Internal The above condition is most likely caused by driving the vehicle without the IOD fuse installed. If the vehicle is driven at speeds greater than 32 kph (20 mph) for more than approximately ten (10) minutes without the IOD fuse installed, then the TPM system will log the above four DTC's. This sceneno is most likely to occur when the vehicle is driven while in dealer inventory. Without the IOD fuse installed part of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), the receiver circuit, is not operational (not powered). Though the 1PM tire sensors are powered and transmitting correct tire pressure signals, the WCM receiver is not receiving those signals. The portion of the WCM circuitry that is powered, by the ignition on/run feed, sends a CAN message to the Cabin Control Node (CCN) in the instrument cluster indicating that the TPM tire pressure signals are not available. On base and premium TPM systems the CCN will flash the tire pressure monitor warning light, and the powered portion of the WCM will log all four of the above TPM DTC's as faults with the TPM system. On premium 1PM systems the CCN will also cause the EVIC to display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. For the TPM system to operate correctly the IOD fuse must be installed. A scan tool (StarSCAN(R) / StarMOBILE(TM) will be required to erase the four TPM DTC's. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module Fuse: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 2108 Fuse: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 2109 Fuse: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2112 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2113 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2114 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2115 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2116 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2117 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2118 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2119 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2120 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2121 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2122 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2123 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2124 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2125 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2126 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2127 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2128 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2129 Fuse: Connector Views Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2130 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2131 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2132 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2133 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2134 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2135 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2136 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2137 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2138 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2139 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2140 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2141 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2142 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2143 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2144 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2145 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2146 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2147 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Fuse: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 2150 Fuse: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 2151 Fuse: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module Fuse Block: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 2156 Fuse Block: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 2157 Fuse Block: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2160 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2161 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2162 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2163 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2164 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2165 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2166 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2167 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2168 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2169 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2170 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2171 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2172 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2173 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2174 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2175 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2176 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2177 Fuse Block: Connector Views Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2178 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2179 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2180 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2181 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2182 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2183 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2184 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2185 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2186 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2187 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2188 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2189 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2190 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2191 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2192 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2193 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2194 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2195 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Fuse Block: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 2198 Fuse Block: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 2199 Fuse Block: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Description and Operation > Junction Block Fuse Block: Description and Operation Junction Block Description DESCRIPTION An electrical Junction Block (JB) (1) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. The JB combines the functions previously provided by a separate fuseblock module and relay center, serves to simplify and centralize numerous electrical components, and to distribute electrical current to many of the accessory systems in the vehicle. It also eliminates the need for numerous splice connections and serves in place of a bulkhead connector between many of the engine compartment, instrument panel, and body wire harnesses. The molded plastic JB housing has integral mounting brackets that are secured with two screws to the left instrument panel end bracket. The left end of the instrument panel cover has a snap-fit fuse access panel that can be removed for service of the JB. A fuse puller and spare fuse holders are located on the back of the fuse access cover, as well as a fuse layout to help ensure proper fuse identification. The JB unit cannot be repaired and is only serviced as an assembly. If any internal circuit or the JB housing is faulty or damaged, the entire JB unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION All of the circuits entering and leaving the JB do so through wire harness connectors, which are connected to the JB through integral connector receptacles molded into the JB housing. Internal connection of all of the JB circuits is accomplished by an intricate combination of hard wiring and bus bars. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Description and Operation > Junction Block > Page 2202 Fuse Block: Description and Operation Power Distribution Center Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block Fuse Block: Service and Repair Junction Block Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cowl trim cover. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners (3). 4. Disconnect the electrical harness connectors and remove Junction Block (1). 5. Transfer components as necessary. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect wire harness connectors to the Junction Block (JB) (1). 2. Position JB and install mounting fasteners (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block > Page 2205 3. Install cowl trim cover. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block > Page 2206 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Power Distribution Center Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay Relay Box: Locations Remote Run Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 2211 Relay Box: Locations Run/Start Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 2212 Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 2213 Relay Box: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 2214 Relay Box: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run Remote Component ID: 224 Component : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2217 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 225 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 85 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 86 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2218 Relay Box: Diagrams Junction Block Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2219 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2220 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2221 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2222 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2223 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2224 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2225 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2226 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2227 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2228 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2229 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2230 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2231 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2232 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2233 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2234 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2235 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 2236 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 2239 Relay Box: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 2240 Relay Box: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Relay Box: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2243 Relay Box: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2246 Relay Box: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Chrysler provides no information regarding a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2255 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED. If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Chrysler provides no information regarding a Oil Change Reminder Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description - Premium System DESCRIPTION - PREMIUM SYSTEM A transponder is located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System > Page 2265 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation - Premium System OPERATION - PREMIUM SYSTEM Transponders located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle provide the Wireless Control Module (WCM) commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Removal Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover (2). 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2268 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2269 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Installation Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2270 1. Install the transponder (4) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4) 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the "WCM/Wireless Control Module" menu item as appropriate.Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a black sensor body, with (an oval insignia) (1) and a grey valve cap (2). The Export TPM system operates on a 433 MHz radio frequency. The 433 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a gray sensor body (with an oval insignia) and a black valve cap (2). CAUTION: Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct sensor is being used. NOTE: Sensors may be identified by valve stem cap color. From the factory, 315 MHz sensors have a gray valve stem cap while 433 MHz sensors have a black valve stem cap. Otherwise, once mounted inside a tire and wheel assembly you are not able to visually tell the difference between a 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensor. The tire must be dismounted allowing visual inspection of the sensor body. NOTE: If aftermarket wheels are installed and do not contain tire pressure sensors, the system will not function properly and the driver will be continuously notified of a system malfunction. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2277 The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: NOTE: Any time a sensor is installed on a wheel, a new Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) must be installed to ensure proper sealing. - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2278 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the wireless control module (WCM), commonly referred to as the sentry key remote entry module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor's operating mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: - Sleep Mode - This is the operating mode of a new TPM sensor. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 1 PSI. Driving the vehicle continuously at this speed for more then 4 minutes, and then stopping the vehicle will change the sensor state into Park Mode. If the vehicle is equipped with a full size matching spare tire and the spare tire sensor has been replaced, The sensor must be changed to Park Mode to conserve battery life. Either use a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or swap the spare tire with a road tire. - Park Mode - This is the correct operating mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 1 PSI delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure - 0ff / 30 Block - If the vehicle has been stopped for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's operating mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from Park Mode to 30 Block Mode once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After about 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensor's mode will change to Drive Mode - Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph, the sensor will revert back to Park Mode. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h), unless the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced, The vehicle must be stationary for more than 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2279 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 14 to 41 kPa (2 to 6 psi) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. Check the tire pressure yellow telltale in the instrument cluster. If the yellow telltale is illuminating continuously, proceed as listed below. If the yellow telltale is flashing on/off for 60 seconds, once every ten minutes, there is a system fault detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire, allow approximately two minutes for the message or yellow telltale to go out. If air pressure in any tire is low, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for a leak around the tire assembly and sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2282 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacing the spare tire pressure sensor, take the time now to write down the tire pressure sensor ID. NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2283 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Rotating Wheel Tire Changers - Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2284 Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. SPARE TIRE SENSOR REPLACEMENT NOTE: When the spare tire sensor is replaced on vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and a full-sized matching spare tire and wheel assembly, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the (WCM) Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is available, put the new spare tire pressure sensor into "Park" mode. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is not available, rotate the spare tire with one of the road tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description - Premium System DESCRIPTION - PREMIUM SYSTEM A transponder is located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System > Page 2290 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation - Premium System OPERATION - PREMIUM SYSTEM Transponders located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle provide the Wireless Control Module (WCM) commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Removal Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover (2). 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2293 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2294 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Installation Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2295 1. Install the transponder (4) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4) 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the "WCM/Wireless Control Module" menu item as appropriate.Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a black sensor body, with (an oval insignia) (1) and a grey valve cap (2). The Export TPM system operates on a 433 MHz radio frequency. The 433 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a gray sensor body (with an oval insignia) and a black valve cap (2). CAUTION: Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct sensor is being used. NOTE: Sensors may be identified by valve stem cap color. From the factory, 315 MHz sensors have a gray valve stem cap while 433 MHz sensors have a black valve stem cap. Otherwise, once mounted inside a tire and wheel assembly you are not able to visually tell the difference between a 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensor. The tire must be dismounted allowing visual inspection of the sensor body. NOTE: If aftermarket wheels are installed and do not contain tire pressure sensors, the system will not function properly and the driver will be continuously notified of a system malfunction. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2301 The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: NOTE: Any time a sensor is installed on a wheel, a new Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) must be installed to ensure proper sealing. - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2302 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the wireless control module (WCM), commonly referred to as the sentry key remote entry module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor's operating mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: - Sleep Mode - This is the operating mode of a new TPM sensor. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 1 PSI. Driving the vehicle continuously at this speed for more then 4 minutes, and then stopping the vehicle will change the sensor state into Park Mode. If the vehicle is equipped with a full size matching spare tire and the spare tire sensor has been replaced, The sensor must be changed to Park Mode to conserve battery life. Either use a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or swap the spare tire with a road tire. - Park Mode - This is the correct operating mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 1 PSI delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure - 0ff / 30 Block - If the vehicle has been stopped for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's operating mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from Park Mode to 30 Block Mode once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After about 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensor's mode will change to Drive Mode - Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph, the sensor will revert back to Park Mode. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h), unless the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced, The vehicle must be stationary for more than 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2303 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 14 to 41 kPa (2 to 6 psi) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. Check the tire pressure yellow telltale in the instrument cluster. If the yellow telltale is illuminating continuously, proceed as listed below. If the yellow telltale is flashing on/off for 60 seconds, once every ten minutes, there is a system fault detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire, allow approximately two minutes for the message or yellow telltale to go out. If air pressure in any tire is low, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for a leak around the tire assembly and sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2306 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacing the spare tire pressure sensor, take the time now to write down the tire pressure sensor ID. NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2307 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Rotating Wheel Tire Changers - Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2308 Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. SPARE TIRE SENSOR REPLACEMENT NOTE: When the spare tire sensor is replaced on vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and a full-sized matching spare tire and wheel assembly, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the (WCM) Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is available, put the new spare tire pressure sensor into "Park" mode. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is not available, rotate the spare tire with one of the road tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires Tires: Description and Operation Tires Tires TIRES Tires are designed and engineered for each specific vehicle. They provide the best overall performance for normal operation. The ride and handling characteristics match the vehicle's requirements. With proper care they will give excellent reliability, traction, skid resistance, and tread life. Driving habits have more effect on tire life than any other factor. Careful drivers will obtain in most cases, much greater mileage than severe use or careless drivers. A few of the driving habits which will shorten the life of any tire are: - Rapid acceleration - Severe brake applications - High speed driving - Excessive speeds on turns - Striking curbs and other obstacles Radial-ply tires are more prone to irregular tread wear. It is important to follow the tire rotation interval. This will help to achieve a greater tread life. TIRE IDENTIFICATION Tire type, size, aspect ratio and speed rating are encoded in the letters and numbers imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Refer to the chart to decipher the tire identification code. Performance tires have a speed rating letter after the aspect ratio number. The speed rating is not always printed on the tire sidewall. These ratings are: - Q up to 100 mph - S up to 112 mph - T up to 118 mph - U up to 124 mph - H up to 130 mph - V up to 149 mph - W (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) - Z more than 149 mph (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) An All Season type tire will have either M + S, M & S or M-S (indicating mud and snow traction) imprinted on the side wall. TIRE CHAINS Tire snow chains may be used on certain models. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information. Radial-Ply Tires RADIAL-PLY TIRES Radial-ply tires improve handling, tread life and ride quality, and decrease rolling resistance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires > Page 2313 Radial-ply tires must always be used in sets of four. Under no circumstances should they be used on the front only. They may be mixed with temporary spare tires when necessary. A maximum speed of 80 KPH (50 MPH) is recommended while a temporary spare is in use. Radial-ply tires have the same load-carrying capacity as other types of tires of the same size. They also use the same recommended inflation pressures. The use of oversized tires, either in the front or rear of the vehicle, can cause vehicle drive train failure. This could also cause inaccurate wheel speed signals when the vehicle is equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. The use of tires from different manufactures on the same vehicle is NOT recommended. The proper tire pressure should be maintained on all four tires. Tire Inflation Pressures TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES WARNING: Over or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and tread wear. This may cause the tire to fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Under inflation will cause rapid shoulder wear (1), tire flexing, and possible tire failure. Over inflation will cause rapid center wear (1) reduction in the tire's ability to cushion shocks. Improper inflation can cause: - Uneven wear patterns Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires > Page 2314 - Reduced tread life - Reduced fuel economy - Unsatisfactory ride - Vehicle drift For proper tire pressure specification refer to the vehicles Owners Manual. Tire Pressure For High Speed TIRE PRESSURE FOR HIGH SPEED Refer to the Vehicles Owners Manual package. Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KPH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Refer to Owner's Manual for complete details. Full Size, Spare Wheel With Matching Tire FULL SIZE, SPARE WHEEL WITH MATCHING TIRE The spare is a full usage wheel with a matching tire. It can be used within the (posted legal) speed limits or distance limitations as of the rest of the vehicles four tires. Refer to Owner's Manual for complete details. Replacement Tires REPLACEMENT TIRES The original equipment tires provide a proper balance of many characteristics such as: - Ride - Noise - Handling - Durability - Tread life - Traction - Rolling resistance - Speed capability It is recommended that tires equivalent to the original equipment tires be used when replacement is needed. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. The use of oversize tires may cause interference with vehicle components. Under extremes of suspension and steering travel, interference with vehicle components may cause tire damage. WARNING: Failure to equip the vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires > Page 2315 Tires: Description and Operation Pressure Gauges PRESSURE GAUGES A quality air pressure gauge is recommended to check tire pressure. After checking the air pressure, replace valve cap finger tight. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire / Vehicle Lead TIRE/VEHICLE LEAD Use the following Vehicle Lead Diagnosis And Correction Chart to diagnose and correct a vehicle lead or drift problem. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead > Page 2318 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Noise Or Vibration TIRE NOISE OR VIBRATION Radial-ply tires are sensitive to force impulses caused by improper mounting, vibration, wheel defects, or possibly tire imbalance. To find out if tires are causing the noise or vibration, drive the vehicle over a smooth road at varying speeds. Note the noise level during acceleration and deceleration. The engine, differential and exhaust noises will change as speed varies, while the tire noise will usually remain constant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead > Page 2319 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Tread wear indicators (3) are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. When tread depth is 1.6 mm (1/16 in.), the tread wear indicators (3) will appear as a 13 mm (1/2 in.) band. Tire replacement is necessary when indicators appear in two or more grooves or if localized balding occurs. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead > Page 2320 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Wear Patterns TIRE WEAR PATTERNS Under inflation will cause wear on the shoulders of tire. Over inflation will cause wear at the center of tire. Excessive camber causes the tire to run at an angle to the road. One side of tread is then worn more than the other. Excessive toe-in or toe-out causes wear on the tread edges and a feathered effect across the tread. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures TIRES Remove the protective coating on the tires before delivery of a vehicle. This coating may cause deterioration of the tires. To remove the protective coating, apply warm water and let it soak for a few minutes. Afterwards, scrub the coating away with a soft bristle brush. Steam cleaning may also be used to remove the coating. NOTE: DO NOT use gasoline, mineral oil, oil-based solvent or a wire brush for cleaning. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2323 Tires: Removal and Replacement TIRE REPAIR AREA For proper repairing, a radial tire must be removed from the wheel. Repairs should only be made if the defect, or puncture, is in the tread area (1). The tire should be replaced if the puncture is located in the sidewall. Deflate tire completely before removing the tire from the wheel. Use lubrication such as a mild soap solution when dismounting or mounting tire. Use tools free of burrs or sharp edges which could damage the tire or wheel rim. Before mounting tire on wheel, make sure all rust is removed from the rim bead and repaint if necessary. Install wheel on vehicle, and tighten to proper torque specification. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information NUMBER: 22-002-09 GROUP: Wheels/Tires DATE: July 29, 2009 SUBJECT: Chrome Clad Wheel Adapters For Proper Balancing OVERVIEW: This bulletin describes the use of proper wheel adapters when mounting Chrome Clad wheels to wheel balancing equipment. MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2007 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2004 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2009-2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2008 - 2010 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2010 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2007-2010 (KA) Nitro 2002-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005-2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2001 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information > Page 2328 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander NOTE: This information applies to any model equipped with Chrome Clad Wheels. DISCUSSION: Models equipped with Chrome Clad wheels require specific piloting on balance equipment to properly center the wheel and prevent damage to the chrome clad surface. The chrome cladding is not removable or replaceable and has cladding tabs that extend into the wheel bore. Traditional high-taper cones will come into contact with the cladding tabs rather than properly seat on the hub bore chamfer. Many modern aluminum wheel designs cannot be mounted with traditional cones. Direct-Fit Collets should be used to properly mount clad wheels on balance equipment (Fig 1). SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: NOTE: This kit includes the adapters for all Dodge, Chrysler & Jeep models with clad wheels. Individual adapters for specific wheel sizes can be ordered separately. To order a kit or individual adapters, contact Pentastar Service Equipment @ 1-800-223-5623. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2329 Wheels: Description and Operation WHEEL DESIGN The rim size is on the vehicle safety certification label located on the drivers door shut face. Original equipment wheels/rims are designed for operation up to the specified maximum vehicle capacity. All models use stamped steel, cast aluminum or forged aluminum wheels. Every wheel has raised sections between the rim flanges (1) and rim drop well (3) called safety humps. Initial inflation of the tire forces the bead over these raised sections. In case of rapid loss of air pressure, the raised sections help hold the tire on the wheel. The wheel studs and nuts are designed for specific applications. All aluminum and some steel wheels have wheel stud nuts with an enlarged nose. This enlarged nose is necessary to ensure proper retention of the wheels. Do not use replacement studs or nuts with a different design or lesser quality. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2330 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL INSPECTION Inspect wheels for: - Excessive runout - Dents, cracks or irregular bends - Damaged wheel stud (lug) holes - Air Leaks NOTE: Do not attempt to repair a wheel by hammering, heating or welding. If a wheel is damaged, an original equipment replacement wheel should be used. When obtaining replacement wheels, they must be equivalent in load carrying capacity. The diameter, width, offset, pilot hole and bolt circle of the wheel should be the same as the original wheel. WARNING: Failure to use equivalent replacement wheels may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. WARNING: Replacement with used wheels is not recommended. The service history of the wheel may have included severe treatment or very high mileage. The rim could fail without warning. WARNING: DaimlerChrysler Corporation does not recommend that customers use "reconditioned" wheels (wheels that have been damaged and repaired) because they can result in a sudden catastrophic wheel failure which could cause loss of control and result in injury or death. For clarification: - Cosmetic refinishing for the purpose of repairing a superficial flaw is an acceptable procedure providing it is limited to paint or clear coat only, the wheel is not modified in any way, and there is no exposure to paint curing heat over 200 degrees Fahrenheit. - Damaged wheels are those which have been bent, broken, cracked or sustained some other physical damage which may have compromised the wheel structure. - Repaired indicates that the wheel has been modified through bending, welding, heating, straightening, or material removal to rectify damage. - Re-plating of chrome plated wheels is not an acceptable procedure nor is chrome plating of original equipment painted or polished wheels, as this may alter mechanical properties and affect fatigue life. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle using puller 8677 (1). 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) using puller 8677 (2). 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the half shaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2336 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts (5) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (4) if equipped. 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Half Shaft Nut Tighten to ..................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 251Nm (185 Ft.Lbs) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHROME PLATED LUG NUTS WITH CHROME PLATED WHEELS. Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Wheel Lug Nut All wheel nuts should then be tightened just snug. Gradually tighten them in sequence to the proper torque specification. Tighten to ...................................................................... ...................................................................................................... 183 ± 10 Nm (135 ± 10 Ft. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, caliper adapter and rotor. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the hub. 5. Press the stud from the hub using remover C-4150A (1). 6. Remove the stud (2) from the hub (1) through the backing plate access hole (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2346 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new stud (2) into the hub flange (1). 2. Install three proper sized washers onto the stud, then install lug nut with the flat side of the nut against the washers. 3. Tighten the lug nut until the stud is pulled into the hub flange. Verify that the stud is properly seated into the flange. 4. Remove the lug nut and washers. 5. Install the brake rotor, caliper adapter, and caliper. 6. Install the wheel speed sensor. 7. Install the wheel and tire assembly, use new lug nut on the stud or studs that were replaced. 8. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 Component ID: 404 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 1 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 18BR/WT 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 > Page 2354 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 4 Component ID: 405 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 4 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 18BR/LB 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 > Page 2355 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 6 Component ID: 406 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 6 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 18BR/DG 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 > Page 2356 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 7 Component ID: 407 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 7 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 18BR/OR 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Multi Displacement System selectively deactivates cylinders 1, 4, 6 and 7 to improve fuel economy. It has two modes of operation: - 8 cylinders for acceleration and heavy loads. - 4 cylinders for cruising and city traffic. The main components of the Multi Displacement System are: - Unique MDS camshaft. - Deactivating roller tappets. - 4 control valves/solenoids. - control valve/solenoid wiring harness. - oil temp sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2359 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Cylinder Deactivation - Trap an exhaust charge from a normal combustion event - Normal combustion event - Don't open the exhaust valve - Don't open the intake valve - Piston is an air spring - Cylinders deactivated in firing sequence Cylinder Reactivation - Open the exhaust valve - Empty the cylinder - Open the intake valve - Normal combustion event - Cylinders reactivated in firing sequence Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2360 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING The Multi Displacement System has the following detectible issues: - Solenoid circuit - Fail to deactivate a cylinder(s) - Fail to reactivate a cylinder(s) - Low oil pressure DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid-MDS Removal MULTIPLE DISPLACEMENT SOLENOID Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the intake manifold. See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair 3. Remove foam insulator pad (1). 4. Remove wiring harness connectors (1) from the MDS solenoid(s) (2) that require removal. 5. Remove hold down bolt (3) from MDS solenoid(s) (2). Caution: Do not try to pry the solenoid out. This could lead to breakage and contamination of the lubrication system. 6. Lightly tap on solenoid with a rubber mallet. Wiggle solenoid from side to side. 7. Remove MDS solenoid(s). Installation Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS > Page 2363 1. Verify that MDS bores are free of debris, before solenoid installation. 2. Install MDS solenoid(s) (3) fully into block. 3. Install hold down bolt (2) and tighten to 11 Nm (97 in.lbs). 4. Reconnect the MDS wiring harness to the solenoid(s). 5. Install foam insulator pad (1) if removed. 6. Install the intake manifold. See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS > Page 2364 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Service and Repair MDS Solenoid Removal MULTIPLE DISPLACEMENT SOLENOID Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the intake manifold. See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair 3. Remove foam insulator pad (1). 4. Remove wiring harness connectors (1) from the MDS solenoid(s) (2) that require removal. 5. Remove hold down bolt (3) from MDS solenoid(s) (2). Caution: Do not try to pry the solenoid out. This could lead to breakage and contamination of the lubrication system. 6. Lightly tap on solenoid with a rubber mallet. Wiggle solenoid from side to side. 7. Remove MDS solenoid(s). Installation Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS > Page 2365 1. Verify that MDS bores are free of debris, before solenoid installation. 2. Install MDS solenoid(s) (3) fully into block. 3. Install hold down bolt (2) and tighten to 11 Nm (97 in.lbs). 4. Reconnect the MDS wiring harness to the solenoid(s). 5. Install foam insulator pad (1) if removed. 6. Install the intake manifold. See: Intake Manifold/Service and Repair Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Maximum Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................................................................... 25 percent Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2369 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. Refer to ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS for the correct engine compression pressures. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Camshaft: Procedures INSPECTION 1. The cam bearings are not serviceable. Do not attempt to replace cam bearings for any reason. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2375 Camshaft: Removal and Replacement Camshaft - Removal REMOVAL - CAMSHAFT 1. Remove the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Drain coolant. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Remove the generator. 6. Remove the A/C compressor, and set aside. 7. Remove the radiator. 8. Remove intake manifold. 9. Remove cylinder head covers. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2376 10. Remove both left and right cylinder heads (4). 11. Remove the oil pan. 12. Remove timing case cover (1). 13. Remove the oil pick up tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2377 14. Remove the oil pump. 15. Remove timing chain (2). 16. Remove camshaft tensioner/thrust plate assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2378 NOTE: Identify lifters to ensure installation in original location. 17. Remove the tappets (2) and retainer (1) assembly. 18. Install a long bolt into front of camshaft to aid in removal of the camshaft. Remove camshaft, being careful not to damage cam bearings with the cam lobes. Camshaft - Installation INSTALLATION - CAMSHAFT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2379 CAUTION: 5.7L engines equipped with MDS uses a unique camshaft for use with the Multi Displacement System. When installing a new camshaft, the replacement camshaft must be compatible with the Multi Displacement System. 1. Lubricate camshaft lobes and camshaft bearing journals and insert the camshaft (figure1). 2. Install camshaft Tensioner plate assembly. Tighten bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Install timing chain and sprockets. 4. Measure camshaft end play. If not within limits install a new thrust plate. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2380 5. Install the oil pump (figure 2). 6. Install the oil pick up tube. 7. Each tappet reused must be installed in the same position from which it was removed. When camshaft is replaced, all of the tappets must be replaced. CAUTION: 5.7L engines equipped with MDS uses both standard roller tappets and deactivating roller tappets, for use with the Multi Displacement System. The deactivating roller tappets must be used in cylinders 1, 4, 6, 7. The deactivating tappets can be identified by the two holes in the side of the tappet body, for the latching pins. 8. Install tappets (2) and retaining yoke assembly (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2381 9. Install both left and right cylinder heads (4). 10. Install pushrods. 11. Install rocker arms. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2382 12. Install timing case cover (figure 4). 13. Install the oil pan. 14. Install cylinder head covers. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2383 15. Install intake manifold. 16. Install the A/C compressor (2). 17. Install the generator (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2384 18. Install the accessory drive belt. 19. Install the radiator. 20. Install the air cleaner assembly. 21. Install the battery negative cable. 22. Refill coolant. 23. Refill engine oil. 24. Start engine and check for leaks. Camshaft Core Hole Plug - Removal REMOVAL - CAMSHAFT CORE HOLE PLUG CAUTION: Do not damage the rear surface of the camshaft or the core plug sealing surface, when removing the core plug. 1. Remove the rear cam bearing core plug. Camshaft Core Hole Plug - Installation CAMSHAFT CORE HOLE PLUG 1. Clean core hole in block. NOTE: Do not apply adhesive to the new core hole plug. A new plug will have adhesive pre-applied. 2. Install a new core hole plug at the rear of camshaft, using suitable flat faced tool. The plug must be fully seated on the cylinder block shoulder. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection HYDRAULIC TAPPETS Before disassembling any part of the engine to correct tappet noise, check the oil pressure. If vehicle has no oil pressure gauge, install a reliable gauge at the pressure sending-unit. The pressure should be between 207-552 kPa (30-70 psi) at 3,000 RPM. Check the oil level after the engine reaches normal operating temperature. Allow 5 minutes to stabilize oil level, check dipstick. The oil level in the pan should never be above the FULL mark or below the ADD OIL mark on dipstick. Either of these two conditions could be responsible for noisy tappets. OIL LEVEL HIGH If oil level is above the FULL mark, it is possible for the connecting rods to dip into the oil. With the engine running, this condition could create foam in the oil pan. Foam in oil pan would be fed to the hydraulic tappets by the oil pump causing them to lose length and allow valves to seat noisily. LOW Low oil level may allow oil pump to take in air. When air is fed to the tappets, they lose length, which allows valves to seat noisily. Any leaks on intake side of oil pump through which air can be drawn will create the same tappet action. Check the lubrication system from the intake strainer to the pump cover, including the relief valve retainer cap. When tappet noise is due to aeration, it may be intermittent or constant, and usually more than one tappet will be noisy. When oil level and leaks have been corrected, operate the engine at fast idle. Run engine for a sufficient time to allow all of the air inside the tappets to be bled out. TAPPET NOISE DIAGNOSIS 1. To determine source of tappet noise, crank over engine with cylinder head covers removed. 2. Feel each valve spring or rocker arm to detect noisy tappet. The noisy tappet will cause the affected spring and/or rocker arm to vibrate or feel rough in operation. NOTE: Worn valve guides or cocked springs are sometimes mistaken for noisy tappets. If such is the case, noise may be dampened by applying side thrust on the valve spring. If noise is not appreciably reduced, it can be assumed the noise is in the tappet. Inspect the rocker arm push rod sockets and push rod ends for wear. 3. Valve tappet noise ranges from light noise to a heavy click. A light noise is usually caused by excessive leak-down around the unit plunger, or by the plunger partially sticking in the tappet body cylinder. The tappet should be replaced. A heavy click is caused by a tappet check valve not seating, or by foreign particles wedged between the plunger and the tappet body. This will cause the plunger to stick in the down position. This heavy click will be accompanied by excessive clearance between the valve stem and rocker arm as valve closes. In either case, tappet assembly should be removed for inspection and cleaning. 4. The valve train generates a noise very much like a light tappet noise during normal operation. Care must be taken to ensure that tappets are making the noise. If more than one tappet seems to be noisy, it's probably not the tappets. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Remove intake manifold. 4. Remove cylinder head cover. 5. Remove rocker arm assembly and push rods. Identify push rods to ensure installation in original location. 6. Remove the cylinder head. 7. Remove bolt from tappet retainer (1). 8. Remove tappet retainer (1). 9. Pull tappet out of bore with a twisting motion. If all tappets are to be removed and reused, identify tappets to ensure installation in original location. 10. Check camshaft lobes for abnormal wear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2390 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate tappets. CAUTION: 5.7L engines equipped with MDS uses both standard roller tappets and deactivating roller tappets, for use with the Multi Displacement System. The deactivating roller tappets must be used in cylinders 1, 4, 6, 7. The deactivating tappets can be identified by the two holes in the side of the tappet body, for the latching pins. 2. Install tappets in their original positions. 3. Install tappet retainer (1). Install the tappet retainer bolt and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install cylinder head. 5. Install pushrods and rocker arm assembly. 6. Install cylinder head cover. 7. Install intake manifold. 8. Install the air cleaner. 9. Connect the negative cable to the battery. CAUTION: To prevent damage to valve mechanism, engine must not be run above fast idle until all hydraulic tappets have filled with oil and have become quiet. 10. Road test vehicle and check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove cylinder head cover. 2. Install pushrod retaining plate (1)special tool 9070. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2395 3. Loosen the rocker shafts using the sequence provided. CAUTION: The rocker shaft assemblies are not interchangeable between intake and exhaust. The intake rocker arms are marked with an "I". 4. Remove the rocker shafts. Note location for reassembly. CAUTION: The longer push rods are for the exhaust side, and the shorter push rods are for intake side. 5. Remove the pushrods. Note pushrod location for reassembly. CAUTION: Do not remove the retainers from the rocker shaft. The assembly tangs (1) at the bottom of the retainers (2) can be damaged, causing the assembly tangs to break off, and get into the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2396 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The longer push rods are for the exhaust side, and the shorter push rods are for intake side. 1. Install the push rods in the same order as removed. 2. Install the pushrod retaining plate (1) special tool 9070. CAUTION: Ensure that retainers (2) and rocker arms (4) are not overlapped when torquing bolts. CAUTION: Verify that pushrod is installed into rocker arm (4) and tappet correctly while installing rocker shaft assembly. Recheck after rocker shaft has been torqued to specification. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2397 CAUTION: The rocker shaft assemblies are not interchangeable between intake and exhaust. The intake rocker arms are marked with the letter "I". 3. Install rocker shaft assemblies in the same order as removed. 4. Tighten the rocker shaft bolts to 22 Nm (195 in. lbs.) torque,using the sequence provided. CAUTION: DO NOT rotate or crank the engine during or immediately after rocker arm installation. Allow the hydraulic roller tappets adequate time to bleed down (about 5 minutes). 5. Remove pushrod retaining plate (1) special tool 9070. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2398 6. Install cylinder head cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rods Connecting Rods Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rods Connecting Rods Connecting Rod Cap-Bolts ........................................................................................................................ 21 Nm plus 90° Turn (15 ft. lbs.) plus 90° Turn Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2406 Connecting Rod: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not use a metal stamp to mark connecting rods as damage may result, instead use ink or a scratch awl. The pistons are made of a high strength aluminum alloy. Piston skirts are coated with a solid lubricant (Molykote) to reduce friction and provide scuff resistance. The piston top ring groove and land is anodized. The connecting rods are made of forged powdered metal, with a "fractured cap" design. A pressed fit piston pin is used to attach the piston and connecting rod. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Connecting Rod: Procedures Piston and Connecting Rod - Cleaning CLEANING CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire wheel or other abrasive cleaning devise to clean the pistons or connecting rods. The pistons have a Moly coating, this coating must not be damaged. 1. Using a suitable cleaning solvent clean the pistons in warm water and towel dry. 2. Use a wood or plastic scraper to clean the ring land grooves. CAUTION: DO NOT remove the piston pin from the piston and connecting rod assembly. Piston and Connecting Rod - Inspection INSPECTION Check the connecting rod journal for excessive wear, taper and scoring. Check the connecting rod for signs of twist or bending. Check the piston for taper and elliptical shape before it is fitted into the cylinder bore. Check the piston for scoring, or scraping marks in the piston skirts. Check the ring lands for cracks and/or deterioration. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2409 Connecting Rod: Removal and Replacement Piston and Connecting Rod - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the following components: - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. - Cylinder head covers. - Timing chain cover. - Cylinder head(s). 3. If necessary, remove top ridge of cylinder bores with a reliable ridge reamer before removing pistons from cylinder block. Be sure to keep tops of pistons covered during this operation. Pistons and connecting rods must be removed from top of cylinder block. When removing piston and connecting rod assemblies from the engine, rotate crankshaft so the each connecting rod is centered in cylinder bore. CAUTION: DO NOT use a number stamp or a punch to mark connecting rods or caps, as damage to connecting rods could occur NOTE: Connecting rods and bearing caps are not interchangeable and should be marked before removing to ensure correct reassembly. 4. Mark connecting rod and bearing cap positions using a permanent ink marker or scribe tool. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the fractured rod and cap joint face surfaces, as engine damage may occur. 5. Remove connecting rod cap. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into the connecting rod being removed. Remove piston from Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2410 cylinder bore. Repeat this procedure for each piston being removed. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to nick crankshaft journals, as engine damage may occur 6. Immediately after piston and connecting rod removal, install bearing cap on the mating connecting rod to prevent damage to the fractured cap and rod surfaces. 7. Carefully remove piston rings from piston(s), starting from the top ring down. Piston and Connecting Rod - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before installing piston and connecting rod assemblies into the bore, install the piston rings. 2. Immerse the piston head and rings in clean engine oil. Position a ring compressor over the piston and rings. Tighten ring compressor. Ensure position of rings do not change during this operation. 3. Position bearing onto connecting rod. Lubricate bearing surface with clean engine oil. 4. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into connecting rod bolt threads. 5. The pistons are marked on the piston pin bore surface with an raised "F" or arrow on top of piston indicating installation position. This mark must be pointing toward the front of engine on both cylinder banks. 6. Wipe cylinder bore clean and lubricate with engine oil. 7. Rotate crankshaft until connecting rod journal is on the center of cylinder bore. Insert rod and piston into cylinder bore and carefully position connecting rod guides over crankshaft journal. 8. Tap piston down in cylinder bore using a hammer handle. While at the same time, guide connecting rod into position on rod journal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2411 CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Lubricate rod bolts and bearing surfaces with engine oil. Install connecting rod cap and bearing. Tighten bolts to 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) plus a 90° turn. 10. Install the following components: - Cylinder head(s). - Cylinder head covers. - Install the intake manifold. - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. 11. Fill crankcase with proper engine oil to correct level. 12. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Crankshaft Main Bearing Cap-Bolts and Double Ended Hex M-12 ....................................................................................................................... 28 Nm plus 90° Turn Crossbolts M-8 .................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................ 31 Nm Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING - FITTING MAIN BEARING JOURNAL DIAMETER (CRANKSHAFT REMOVED) Crankshaft removed from the cylinder block. Clean the oil off the main bearing journal. Determine the maximum diameter of the journal with a micrometer. Measure at two locations 90° apart at each end of the journal. The maximum allowable taper is 0.008 mm (0.0004 inch.) and maximum out of round is 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch). Compare the measured diameter with the journal diameter specification (Main Bearing Fitting Chart). Select inserts required to obtain the specified bearing-to-journal clearance. CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING SELECTION The main bearings are "select fit" to achieve proper oil clearances. For main bearing selection, the crankshaft counterweight has grade identification marks stamped into it. These marks are read from left to right, corresponding with journal number 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. NOTE: Service main bearings are coded. These codes identify what size (grade) the bearing is. Main Bearing Selection Chart - 5.7L Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting > Page 2417 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Inspection INSPECTION Wipe the inserts clean and inspect for abnormal wear patterns and for metal or other foreign material imbedded in the lining. Normal main bearing insert wear patterns are illustrated. NOTE: If any of the crankshaft journals are scored, the crankshaft must be repaired or replaced. Inspect the back of the inserts for fractures, scrapings or irregular wear patterns. Inspect the upper insert locking tabs for damage. Replace all damaged or worn bearing inserts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Seal Retainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Retainer - Removal Crankshaft Seal Retainer: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Retainer - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. Remove the drive plate / flywheel. 4. Remove the oil pan. 5. Remove the rear oil seal retainer mounting bolts. 6. Carefully remove the retainer from the engine block. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Seal Retainer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Retainer - Removal > Page 2422 Crankshaft Seal Retainer: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Retainer - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Throughly clean all gasket residue from the engine block. 2. Use extreme care and clean all gasket residue from the retainer. 3. Position the gasket onto the retainer. 4. Position the retainer onto the engine block. 5. Install the retainer mounting bolts. Tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (132 in. lbs.) using the procedure shown. 6. Install the oil pan. 7. Install the drive plate / flywheel. 8. Install the transmission. 9. Check and verify engine oil level. 10. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Crankshaft Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the vibration damper (1). 2. Remove the rear oil seal retainer. 3. Remove the oil pan. 4. Remove the oil pump pickup. 5. Remove the windage tray/oil pan gasket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2428 6. Remove the timing chain cover. 7. Remove the oil pump. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2429 8. Remove the timing drive (2). 9. Identify rod bearing caps before removal. Remove rod bearing caps with bearings. 10. Identify main bearing caps (1) before removal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2430 11. Remove main bearing caps (1) and bearings one at a time. 12. Remove the thrust washers. 13. Remove the crankshaft out of the block. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2431 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select the proper main bearings Refer to ENGINE/ENGINE BLOCK/CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS. 2. Install main bearings in block and caps, and lubricate bearings. 3. Position the crankshaft into the cylinder block. 4. Install the thrust washers (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2432 NOTE: The main cap crossbolts are torqued after final torque of the main cap bolts. Always use a new washer/seal on crossbolts. 5. Clean and oil all cap bolts. Install all main bearing caps (1). Install all cap bolts and alternately tighten in two steps using the following sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2433 6. Step 1 - 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) torque. 7. Step 2 - Turn main cap bolts an additional 90°. 8. Install the crossbolts with new washer/gasket. Starting with crossbolt A torque each crossbolt to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 9. Repeat crossbolt torque procedure. 10. Measure crankshaft end play. 11. Position the connecting rods onto the crankshaft and install the rod bearing caps. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2434 12. Install timing drive (2). 13. Install oil pump. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft - Removal > Page 2435 14. Install the timing chain cover (1). 15. Install the rear main seal and retainer. 16. Install the windage tray/oil pan gasket. 17. Install the oil pick up tube. 18. Install the oil pan. 19. Install the vibration damper. 20. Install the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Block Heater - Description Engine Block Heater: Description and Operation Engine Block Heater - Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE UNLESS BLOCK HEATER CORD HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SOURCE AND SECURED IN PLACE. THE POWER CORD MUST BE SECURED IN ITS RETAINING CLIPS AND ROUTED AWAY FROM EXHAUST MANIFOLDS AND MOVING PARTS. An optional engine block heater is available on all models. The heater is equipped with a power cord. The heater is mounted in a core hole of the engine cylinder block (1) (in place of a freeze plug) with the heating element immersed in engine coolant. The cord is attached to an engine compartment component with tie-straps. The 5.7L engine has the block heater located on the left side of the engine below the exhaust manifold in the rear of the engine (1) and is not immersed in engine coolant but makes direct contact with the block. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Block Heater - Description > Page 2440 Engine Block Heater: Description and Operation Engine Block Heater - Operation OPERATION The heater warms the engine coolant providing easier engine starting and faster warm-up in low temperatures. Connecting the power cord to a grounded 110-120 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord provides the electricity needed to heat the element. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2441 Engine Block Heater: Testing and Inspection ENGINE BLOCK HEATER If the unit does not operate, possible causes can be either the power cord or the heater element. Test the power cord for continuity with a 110-volt voltmeter or 110-volt test light. Test heater element continuity with an ohmmeter or a 12-volt test light. CAUTION: To prevent damage, the power cord must be secured in its retainer clips and away from any components that may cause abrasion or damage, such as linkages, exhaust components, etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Block Heater - Removal Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Engine Block Heater - Removal 5.7L ENGINE 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove power cord from block heater (1). 3. Remove bolt (2) on block heater (1). Remove heater assembly (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Block Heater - Removal > Page 2444 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Engine Block Heater - Installation 5.7L ENGINE 1. Thoroughly clean cylinder block core hole and block heater seat. 2. Insert block heater assembly (1) into the block. 3. With block heater fully seated, tighten bolt (1) to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Vibration Damper-Bolt ......................................................................................................................... ................................................ 176 Nm (129 ft. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper - Removal Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Vibration Damper - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove accessory drive belt. 3. Drain cooling system. 4. Remove radiator upper hose. 5. Remove fan shroud. 6. Remove crankshaft damper bolt. 7. Remove damper using Special Tools 8513A Insert and 1023 Three Jaw Puller. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper - Removal > Page 2450 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Vibration Damper - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: To prevent severe damage to the Crankshaft, Damper or Special Tool 8512-A, thoroughly clean the damper bore and the crankshaft nose before installing Damper. 1. Slide damper onto crankshaft slightly. CAUTION: Special Tool 8512-A, is assembled in a specific sequence. Failure to assemble this tool in this sequence can result in tool failure and severe damage to either the tool or the crankshaft. 2. Assemble Special Tool 8512-A as follows, The nut is threaded onto the shaft first. Then the roller bearing is placed onto the threaded rod (The hardened bearing surface of the bearing MUST face the nut). Then the hardened washer slides onto the threaded rod. Once assembled coat the threaded rod's threads with Mopar(R) Nickel Anti-Seize or (Loctite No. 771). 3. Using Special Tool 8512-A, press damper onto crankshaft. 4. Install then tighten crankshaft damper bolt to 176 Nm (129 ft. lbs.). 5. Install cooling fan. 6. Install radiator upper shroud and tighten fasteners to 11 Nm (95 in. lbs.). 7. Install radiator upper hose. 8. Install accessory drive belt. 9. Refill cooling system. 10. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Pistons Pistons Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2454 Piston: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not use a metal stamp to mark connecting rods as damage may result, instead use ink or a scratch awl. The pistons are made of a high strength aluminum alloy. Piston skirts are coated with a solid lubricant (Molykote) to reduce friction and provide scuff resistance. The piston top ring groove and land is anodized. The connecting rods are made of forged powdered metal, with a "fractured cap" design. A pressed fit piston pin is used to attach the piston and connecting rod. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Piston: Procedures Piston and Connecting Rod - Cleaning CLEANING CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire wheel or other abrasive cleaning devise to clean the pistons or connecting rods. The pistons have a Moly coating, this coating must not be damaged. 1. Using a suitable cleaning solvent clean the pistons in warm water and towel dry. 2. Use a wood or plastic scraper to clean the ring land grooves. CAUTION: DO NOT remove the piston pin from the piston and connecting rod assembly. Piston and Connecting Rod - Inspection INSPECTION Check the connecting rod journal for excessive wear, taper and scoring. Check the connecting rod for signs of twist or bending. Check the piston for taper and elliptical shape before it is fitted into the cylinder bore. Check the piston for scoring, or scraping marks in the piston skirts. Check the ring lands for cracks and/or deterioration. Piston Fitting STANDARD PROCEDURE - PISTON FITTING 1. To correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore gauge, capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) INCREMENTS is required. If a bore gauge is not available, do not use an inside micrometer. 2. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder bore at a point 38.0 mm (1.5 inches) below top of bore. Start perpendicular (across or at 90 degrees) to the axis of the crankshaft at point A and then take an additional bore reading 90 degrees to that at point B. 3. The coated pistons will be serviced with the piston pin and connecting rod pre-assembled. The piston-rod assembly is specific for the left cylinder bank ( odd numbered) and the right cylinder bank ( even numbered) and must not be interchanged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2457 4. The coating material is applied to the piston after the final piston machining process. Measuring the outside diameter of a coated piston will not provide accurate results. Therefore measuring the inside diameter of the cylinder bore with a dial Bore Gauge is MANDATORY. To correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore gauge capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) increments is required. 5. Piston installation into the cylinder bore requires slightly more pressure than that required for non-coated pistons. The bonded coating on the piston will give the appearance of a line-to-line fit with the cylinder bore. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2458 Piston: Removal and Replacement Piston and Connecting Rod - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the following components: ^ Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. ^ Cylinder head covers. ^ Timing chain cover. ^ Cylinder head(s). 3. If necessary, remove top ridge of cylinder bores with a reliable ridge reamer before removing pistons from cylinder block. Be sure to keep tops of pistons covered during this operation. Pistons and connecting rods must be removed from top of cylinder block. When removing piston and connecting rod assemblies from the engine, rotate crankshaft so the each connecting rod is centered in cylinder bore. CAUTION: DO NOT use a number stamp or a punch to mark connecting rods or caps, as damage to connecting rods could occur NOTE: Connecting rods and bearing caps are not interchangeable and should be marked before removing to ensure correct reassembly. 4. Mark connecting rod and bearing cap positions using a permanent ink marker or scribe tool. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the fractured rod and cap joint face surfaces, as engine damage may occur. 5. Remove connecting rod cap. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into the connecting rod being removed. Remove piston from Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2459 cylinder bore. Repeat this procedure for each piston being removed. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to nick crankshaft journals, as engine damage may occur 6. Immediately after piston and connecting rod removal, install bearing cap on the mating connecting rod to prevent damage to the fractured cap and rod surfaces. 7. Carefully remove piston rings from piston(s), starting from the top ring down. Piston and Connecting Rod - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before installing piston and connecting rod assemblies into the bore, install the piston rings. 2. Immerse the piston head and rings in clean engine oil. Position a ring compressor over the piston and rings. Tighten ring compressor. Ensure position of rings do not change during this operation. 3. Position bearing onto connecting rod. Lubricate bearing surface with clean engine oil. 4. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into connecting rod bolt threads. 5. The pistons are marked on the piston pin bore surface with an raised "F" or arrow on top of piston indicating installation position. This mark must be pointing toward the front of engine on both cylinder banks. 6. Wipe cylinder bore clean and lubricate with engine oil. 7. Rotate crankshaft until connecting rod journal is on the center of cylinder bore. Insert rod and piston into cylinder bore and carefully position connecting rod guides over crankshaft journal. 8. Tap piston down in cylinder bore using a hammer handle. While at the same time, guide connecting rod into position on rod journal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2460 CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Lubricate rod bolts and bearing surfaces with engine oil. Install connecting rod cap and bearing. Tighten bolts to 21 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) plus a 90° turn. 10. Install the following components: ^ Cylinder head(s). ^ Cylinder head covers. ^ Install the intake manifold. ^ Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. 11. Fill crankcase with proper engine oil to correct level. 12. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Pin, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Pin: Specifications Piston Pins Piston Pins Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Rings Piston Rings Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2467 Piston Ring: Service and Repair PISTON RING FITTING Before reinstalling used rings or installing new rings, the ring clearances must be checked. 1. Wipe the cylinder bore clean. 2. Insert the ring in the cylinder bore. NOTE: The ring gap measurement must be made with the ring positioned at least 12mm (0.50 inch.) from bottom of cylinder bore. 3. Using a piston, to ensure that the ring is squared in the cylinder bore, slide the ring downward into the cylinder. 4. Using a feeler gauge check the ring end gap. Replace any rings not within specification. PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE NOTE: Make sure the piston ring grooves are clean and free of nicks and burrs. 5. Measure the ring side clearance as shown make sure the feeler gauge fits snugly between the ring land and the ring. Replace any ring not within specification. 6. Rotate the ring around the piston, the ring must rotate in the groove with out binding. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2468 Piston Ring Specification Chart 7. The No. 1 and No. 2 piston rings have a different cross section. Ensure No. 2 ring is installed with manufacturers I.D. mark (Dot) facing up, towards top of the piston. NOTE: Piston rings are installed in the following order: - Oil ring expander. - Lower oil ring side rail. - Upper oil ring side rail. - No. 2 Intermediate piston ring. - No. 1 Upper piston ring. 8. Install the oil ring expander. 9. Install upper side rail by placing one end between the piston ring groove and the expander ring. Hold end firmly and press down the portion to be installed until side rail is in position. Repeat this step for the lower side rail. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2469 10. Install No. 2 intermediate piston ring using a piston ring installer. 11. Install No. 1 upper piston ring using a piston ring installer. 12. Position piston ring end gaps as shown in. It is important that expander ring gap is at least 45° from the side rail gaps, but not on the piston pin center or on the thrust direction. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove cylinder head cover. 2. Install pushrod retaining plate (1)special tool 9070. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2478 3. Loosen the rocker shafts using the sequence provided. CAUTION: The rocker shaft assemblies are not interchangeable between intake and exhaust. The intake rocker arms are marked with an "I". 4. Remove the rocker shafts. Note location for reassembly. CAUTION: The longer push rods are for the exhaust side, and the shorter push rods are for intake side. 5. Remove the pushrods. Note pushrod location for reassembly. CAUTION: Do not remove the retainers from the rocker shaft. The assembly tangs (1) at the bottom of the retainers (2) can be damaged, causing the assembly tangs to break off, and get into the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2479 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The longer push rods are for the exhaust side, and the shorter push rods are for intake side. 1. Install the push rods in the same order as removed. 2. Install the pushrod retaining plate (1) special tool 9070. CAUTION: Ensure that retainers (2) and rocker arms (4) are not overlapped when torquing bolts. CAUTION: Verify that pushrod is installed into rocker arm (4) and tappet correctly while installing rocker shaft assembly. Recheck after rocker shaft has been torqued to specification. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2480 CAUTION: The rocker shaft assemblies are not interchangeable between intake and exhaust. The intake rocker arms are marked with the letter "I". 3. Install rocker shaft assemblies in the same order as removed. 4. Tighten the rocker shaft bolts to 22 Nm (195 in. lbs.) torque,using the sequence provided. CAUTION: DO NOT rotate or crank the engine during or immediately after rocker arm installation. Allow the hydraulic roller tappets adequate time to bleed down (about 5 minutes). 5. Remove pushrod retaining plate (1) special tool 9070. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2481 6. Install cylinder head cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Valve Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Disconnect ignition coil connector (1). 3. Remove ignition coil retaining bolts (3). 4. Remove ignition coil (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2486 5. Remove cylinder head cover retaining bolts. 6. Remove cylinder head cover (1). NOTE: The gasket (2) may be used again, provided no cuts, tears, or deformation has occurred. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2487 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not use harsh cleaners to clean the cylinder head covers. Severe damage to covers may occur. CAUTION: DO NOT allow other components including the wire harness to rest on or against the engine cylinder head cover. Prolonged contact with other objects may wear a hole in the cylinder head cover. 1. Clean cylinder head cover (1) and both sealing surfaces (1, 4). Inspect and replace gasket (2) as necessary. 2. Install cylinder head cover and hand start all fasteners. Verify that all double ended studs (3) are in the correct location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2488 3. Tighten cylinder head cover bolts and double ended studs to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs). Begin torque sequence in the middle of head cover and torque bolts moving outward in a crisscross pattern from top to bottom. 4. Before installing coil(s), apply dielectric grease to inside of spark plug boots (1). 5. Install ignition coils. 6. Torque fasteners (3) to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs). 7. Connect, ignition coil electrical connectors (1). 8. Install PCV hose. 9. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Seat: Procedures REFACING NOTE: Valve seats that are worn or burned can be reworked, provided that correct angle and seat width are maintained. Otherwise the cylinder head must be replaced. NOTE: When refacing valves and valve seats, it is important that the correct size valve guide pilot be used for reseating stones. A true and complete surface must be obtained. 1. Using a suitable dial indicator measure the center of the valve seat Total run out must not exceed 0.051 mm (0.002 in). 2. Apply a small amount of Prussian blue to the valve seat, insert the valve into the cylinder head, while applying light pressure on the valve rotate the valve. Remove the valve and examine the valve face. If the blue is transferred below the top edge of the valve face, lower the valve seat using a 15 degree stone. If the blue is transferred to the bottom edge of the valve face, raise the valve seat using a 65 degreestone. 3. When the seat is properly positioned the width of the intake seat must be 1.18 - 1.62 mm (0.0464 - 0.0637 in.) and the exhaust seat must be 1.48 1.92 mm (0.058 - 0.075 in.). 4. Check the valve spring installed height after refacing the valve and seat. The installed height for both intake and exhaust valve springs must not exceed 46.0 mm (1.81 in.). Valve Face And Valve Seat Angle Chart Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2493 5. The valve seat must maintain an angle of 44.5 - 45.0 degrees angle. 6. The valve face must maintain a face angle of 45.0 - 45.5 degrees angle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2494 Valve Seat: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the cylinder head. 2. Compress valve springs using Valve Spring Compressor Tool special tool #C-3422 and adapter 8464. 3. Remove valve retaining locks, valve spring retainers, valve stem seals and valve springs. 4. Before removing valves, remove any burrs from valve stem lock grooves to prevent damage to the valve guides. Identify valves to ensure installation in original location. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean valves thoroughly. Discard burned, warped and cracked valves. 2. Remove carbon and varnish deposits from inside of valve guides with a reliable guide cleaner. 3. Measure valve stems for wear. If wear exceeds 0.051 mm (0.002 inch), replace the valve. 4. Coat valve stems with lubrication oil and insert them in cylinder head. 5. If valves or seats are reground, check valve stem height. If valve is too long, replace cylinder head. 6. Install new seals on all valve guides. Install valve springs and valve retainers. 7. Compress valve springs with Valve Spring Compressor Tool special tool #C- 3422 and adapter 8464, install locks and release tool. If valves and/or seats are ground, measure the installed height of springs. Make sure the measurement is taken from bottom of spring seat in cylinder head to the bottom surface of spring retainer. 8. Install cylinder head. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Valve Spring: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove air intake resonator. 4. Remove ignition coil connector (1). 5. Remove ignition coils (2). 6. Remove one spark plug. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2499 7. Remove cylinder head cover (1) using the sequence shown. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2500 CAUTION: The piston must be at TDC, and both valves closed on the cylinder to be serviced. NOTE: If removing intake valve spring, install special tool #9070, pushrod retaining plate (1), to retain the intake pushrods (2). 8. Remove exhaust/intake rocker arm shafts using the sequence shown. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2501 9. Install rocker arm shaft (1) special tool #9065. 10. Install spring compressor (1, 3), special tool #9065, and exhaust adapter arm (1) tool #9065if needed. NOTE: All valve springs and seals are removed in the same manner. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2502 11. Insert air hose (1) into spark plug hole and charge cylinder with air. NOTE: Tap the top of the valve spring retainer to loosen the spring retainers locks. 12. Compress valve spring with valve spring compressor (3) tool #9065 and remove valve retainer locks. 13. Release spring compressor (3) and remove valve spring. NOTE: The valve springs are interchangeable between intake and exhaust. 14. Remove valve seal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2503 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2504 1. Install valve seal. 2. Install valve spring. 3. Using special tool #9065 (1, 3), compress valve spring and install valve spring retainer and locks. 4. Release air charge in cylinder (1). 5. Remove spring compressor tool #9065 (3). CAUTION: Verify that the pushrods are fully seated into lifter and rocker arm. Recheck after rocker arm shaft has been torqued to specification. 6. Install rocker arm shaft and pushrods. 7. Tighten the rocker shaft bolts to 22 Nm (195 in. lbs.) torque, using the rocker shaft torque sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2505 8. Remove special tool #9070, pushrod retaining plate (1), if used. 9. Install cylinder head cover (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2506 10. Tighten cylinder head cover bolts and double ended studs. 11. Install spark plugs. 12. Install ignition coil on plug (2), and torque fasteners (3) to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs) 13. Install ignition coil connectors (4). 14. Install air intake resonator. 15. Install air cleaner assembly. 16. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Valve Guides Valve: Description and Operation Description - Valve Guides DESCRIPTION - VALVE GUIDES The valve guides are made of powdered metal and are pressed into the cylinder head. The guides are not replaceable or serviceable, and valve guide reaming is not recommended. If the guides are worn beyond acceptable limits, replace the cylinder heads. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Valve Guides > Page 2511 Valve: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Both the intake and exhaust valves are made of steel. The intake valve is 50.93 mm (2.00 inches) in diameter and the exhaust valve is 39.53 mm (1.55 inches) in diameter. All valves use three bead lock keepers to retain the springs and promote valve rotation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve: Procedures REFACING NOTE: Valve seats that are worn or burned can be reworked, provided that correct angle and seat width are maintained. Otherwise the cylinder head must be replaced. NOTE: When refacing valves and valve seats, it is important that the correct size valve guide pilot be used for reseating stones. A true and complete surface must be obtained. 1. Using a suitable dial indicator measure the center of the valve seat Total run out must not exceed 0.051 mm (0.002 in). 2. Apply a small amount of Prussian blue to the valve seat, insert the valve into the cylinder head, while applying light pressure on the valve rotate the valve. Remove the valve and examine the valve face. If the blue is transferred below the top edge of the valve face, lower the valve seat using a 15 degree stone. If the blue is transferred to the bottom edge of the valve face, raise the valve seat using a 65 degreestone. 3. When the seat is properly positioned the width of the intake seat must be 1.18 - 1.62 mm (0.0464 - 0.0637 in.) and the exhaust seat must be 1.48 1.92 mm (0.058 - 0.075 in.). 4. Check the valve spring installed height after refacing the valve and seat. The installed height for both intake and exhaust valve springs must not exceed 46.0 mm (1.81 in.). Valve Face And Valve Seat Angle Chart Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2514 5. The valve seat must maintain an angle of 44.5 - 45.0 degrees angle. 6. The valve face must maintain a face angle of 45.0 - 45.5 degrees angle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2515 Valve: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the cylinder head. 2. Compress valve springs using Valve Spring Compressor Tool special tool #C-3422 and adapter 8464. 3. Remove valve retaining locks, valve spring retainers, valve stem seals and valve springs. 4. Before removing valves, remove any burrs from valve stem lock grooves to prevent damage to the valve guides. Identify valves to ensure installation in original location. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean valves thoroughly. Discard burned, warped and cracked valves. 2. Remove carbon and varnish deposits from inside of valve guides with a reliable guide cleaner. 3. Measure valve stems for wear. If wear exceeds 0.051 mm (0.002 inch), replace the valve. 4. Coat valve stems with lubrication oil and insert them in cylinder head. 5. If valves or seats are reground, check valve stem height. If valve is too long, replace cylinder head. 6. Install new seals on all valve guides. Install valve springs and valve retainers. 7. Compress valve springs with Valve Spring Compressor Tool special tool #C- 3422 and adapter 8464, install locks and release tool. If valves and/or seats are ground, measure the installed height of springs. Make sure the measurement is taken from bottom of spring seat in cylinder head to the bottom surface of spring retainer. 8. Install cylinder head. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation Drive Belt: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The accessory drive belt is a serpentine type belt. Satisfactory performance of these belts depends on belt condition and proper belt tension. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2520 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT VISUAL DIAGNOSIS When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART for further belt diagnosis. NOISE DIAGNOSIS Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2521 ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART (Part 1) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2522 ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART (Part 2) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive Belt: Procedures CLEANING Clean all foreign debris from belt pulley grooves. The belt pulleys must be free of oil, grease, and coolants before installing the drive belt. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2525 Drive Belt: Removal and Replacement Accessory Drive Belt - Removal REMOVAL - 5.7L 5.7L Engine 1. Remove the air intake tube between the intake manifold and air filter assembly. 2. Insert a suitable square drive ratchet into the square hole on the belt tensioner arm (6). 3. Release the belt tension by rotating the tensioner (6) clockwise. Rotate the belt tensioner until the accessory drive belt (7) can be removed from the pulleys. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt (7). 5. Gently release the tensioner (6). Accessory Drive Belt - Installation INSTALLATION - 5.7L 5.7L Engine 1. Position the accessory drive belt (7) over all pulleys except for the water pump pulley (2). 2. Rotate the tensioner (6) clockwise and slip the accessory drive belt over the water pump pulley (2). 3. Gently release the tensioner (6). 4. Install the air intake tube between the intake manifold and air filter assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Correct drive belt tension is required to ensure optimum performance of the belt driven engine accessories. If specified tension is not maintained, belt slippage may cause; engine overheating, lack of power steering assist, loss of air conditioning capacity, reduced generator output rate, and greatly reduced belt life. It is not necessary to adjust belt tension on the 3/7L/4.7L or 5.7L engines. These engines are equipped with an automatic belt tensioner (1). The tensioner maintains correct belt tension at all times. Due to use of this belt tensioner, do not attempt to use a belt tension gauge on these engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2530 Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The automatic belt tensioner maintains belt tension by using internal spring pressure, a pivoting arm and pulley to press against the drive belt. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L ENGINE 1. Remove accessory drive belt. 2. Remove tensioner and mounting bracket. 3. Remove the tensioner assembly from the mounting bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2533 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L ENGINE 1. Install tensioner on to the mounting bracket. Tighten bolt to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 2. Install tensioner and bracket assembly 3. Install accessory drive belt. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mount - Engine Front Engine Mount: Service and Repair Mount - Engine Front Removal REMOVAL 2WD 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Remove engine mount through bolts. 4. Raise engine using engine support fixture (1) special tool # 8534. 5. Remove engine mount to insulator bolts. 6. Remove insulator from engine. 4WD 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Remove the skid plate. 4. Remove the front crossmember. 5. Remove the engine oil filter. 6. Support the engine using engine support fixture (1) special tool # 8534. 7. Support the front axle with a suitable jack. 8. Remove the (4) bolts that attach the engine mounts to the front axle. 9. Remove the (3) bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 10. Lower the front axle. 11. Remove the (6) through bolts Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mount - Engine Front > Page 2538 12. Raise the engine far enough to be able to remove the left and right engine mounts. 13. Remove the engine mounts. Installation INSTALLATION 2WD 1. Install mount on the engine. NOTE: For mount to engine block and left engine bracket to front axle bolts, apply Mopar(R) Lock and Seal Adhesive, Medium Strength Threadlocker. 2. Install upper and lower mount mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 3. Lower the engine using engine support fixture (1) special tool #8534. 4. Install mount thru bolts. 5. Tighten through bolts on both sides to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Connect negative battery cable. 4WD NOTE: For mount to engine block and left engine bracket to front axle bolts, apply Mopar(R) Lock and Seal Adhesive, Medium Strength Threadlocker. 1. Install the right and left side engine mounts to the front axle. Torque nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 2. Raise the front axle into the frame and install the left and right side through bolts. Torque nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 3. Insert the two upper through bolts into the right and left side engine mounts and loose assemble the two nuts onto the through bolts. 4. Lower the engine using engine support fixture (1) special tool #8534, until the left and right side engine brackets rest on the thru bolts, and the lower engine bracket through holes align with the engine mounts, and the left engine bracket holes align with the front axle slots. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mount - Engine Front > Page 2539 5. Loose assemble the (3) bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 6. Loose assemble the lower thru bolts. 7. Torque the nuts for the (4) thru bolts to 101 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 8. Torque the (3) bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket to 101 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the engine oil filter, if removed. 10. Install the front crossmember. 11. Install the skid plate. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Mount - Engine Front > Page 2540 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Mount - Engine Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Using a suitable jack, support transmission. 3. Remove the nuts from the transmission mount. 4. Remove the bolts that attach the transmission mount to the engine bracket. 5. Raise the transmission enough to remove the mount from the crossmember. 6. Remove the mount. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Threadlocking compound must be applied to the bolts before installation. 1. Install the two bolts that attach the transmission mount to the transmission bracket. 2. Torque the bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft.lbs.) torque. 3. Lower the transmission so the transmission mount rests on the crossmember, and the studs of the transmission mount are aligned in the slots in the crossmember. 4. Install the nuts onto the transmission mount studs through the crossmember access slot. 5. Torque the nuts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure Oil Pressure Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2545 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - CHECKING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 1. Remove oil pressure sending unit and install gauge assembly C-3292. 2. Run engine until thermostat opens. 3. Oil Pressure: - Curb Idle - 25 kPa (4 psi) minimum - 3000 rpm - 170 - 758 kPa (25 - 110 psi) 4. If oil pressure is 0 at idle, shut off engine. Check for a clogged oil pick-up screen or a pressure relief valve stuck open. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2550 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil (with filter) .......................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 6.6Liters (7.0 Qt) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2553 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... SAE 5W-20 API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 or equivalent Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2554 Engine Oil: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator is located at the left hand of the engine on the 5.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about ten minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately five minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. Torque to 34 Nm ( 25 ft. lbs.). 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Filter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL All engines are equipped with a high quality full-flow, disposable type oil filter. DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends a Mopar(R) or equivalent oil filter be used. 1. Position a drain pan under the oil filter. 2. Using a suitable oil filter wrench loosen filter. 3. Rotate the oil filter counterclockwise to remove it from the cylinder block oil filter boss. 4. When filter separates from cylinder block oil filter boss, tip gasket end upward to minimize oil spill. Remove filter from vehicle. NOTE: Make sure filter gasket was removed with filter. 5. With a wiping cloth, clean the gasket sealing surface of oil and grime. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2559 Oil Filter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lightly lubricate oil filter gasket with engine oil. 2. Thread filter onto adapter nipple. When gasket makes contact with sealing surface, hand tighten filter one half turn, or 180°,do not over tighten. 3. Add oil, verify crankcase oil level and start engine. Inspect for oil leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil pan Bolts ........................................................................................................................................ .................................................. 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 4X2 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Loosen both left and right side engine mount through bolts. Do not remove bolts. 3. Install engine support fixture (1) special tool #8534. Do not raise engine at this time. 4. Remove the structural dust cover. 5. Remove fan and fan shroud. 6. Drain engine oil. 7. Remove the front crossmember. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2565 8. Raise engine using special tool (1) #8534 to provide clearance to remove oil pan. NOTE: Do not pry on oil pan or oil pan gasket. Gasket is integral to engine windage tray and does not come out with oil pan. NOTE: If more clearance is needed to remove oil pan, the transmission mount can be removed, and the transmission raised to gain clearance. NOTE: The double ended oil pan studs must be installed in the same location that they were removed from. 9. Remove the oil pan mounting bolts using the sequence provided. 10. Unbolt oil pump pickup tube and remove tube. NOTE: When the oil pan is removed, a new integral windage tray and gasket assembly must be installed. The old gasket cannot be reused. 11. Discard the integral windage tray and gasket and replace. 4X4 1. Follow all steps for 4X2 removal. 2. Unbolt and lower the steering rack, without disconnecting the lines. NOTE: The front axle must be lowered to remove the oil pan on 4X4 vehicles. 3. Remove the front driveshaft at the axle. Mark for reassembly. 4. Support the front axle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2566 5. Remove the right and left axle to mount, bolts. 6. Lower axle. 7. Remove the oil pan mounting bolts and oil pan. 8. Unbolt oil pump pickup tube and remove tube. NOTE: When the oil pan is removed, a new integral windage tray and gasket assembly must be installed. The old gasket cannot be reused. 9. Discard the integral windage tray and gasket and replace. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2567 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean the oil pan gasket mating surface of the block and oil pan. NOTE: Mopar(R) Engine RTV must be applied to the 4 T-joints (1, 2), (area where front cover, rear retainer, block, and oil pan gasket meet). The bead of RTV should cover the bottom of the gasket. This area is approximately 4.5 mm x 25 mm in each of the 4 T-joint locations. 2. Apply Mopar(R) Engine RTV at the 4 T-joints. NOTE: When the oil pan is removed, a new integral windage tray and gasket assembly must be installed. The old gasket cannot be reused. 3. Install a new integral windage tray and gasket. 4. Reinstall the oil pump pickup tube with new o-ring. Tighten tube to pump fasteners to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2568 NOTE: The double ended oil pan studs must be installed in the same location that they were removed from. 5. Position the oil pan and install the mounting bolts and studs. Tighten the mounting bolts to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 6. Install the structural cover. 7. Lower the engine into mounts using special tool #8534 (1). 8. Install both the left and right side engine mount through bolts. Tighten the nuts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). 9. Reinstall the front axle, if removed. 10. Install the steering rack, if removed. 11. Install the rear transmission mount, if removed. 12. Remove special tool #8534 (1). 13. Install the front crossmember. 14. Install the fan shroud and fan. 15. Fill engine oil. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2569 16. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 17. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2573 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2574 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2575 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2576 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2577 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2578 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2579 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2583 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2584 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2585 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2590 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electromechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure Oil Pressure Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2595 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - CHECKING ENGINE OIL PRESSURE 1. Remove oil pressure sending unit and install gauge assembly C-3292. 2. Run engine until thermostat opens. 3. Oil Pressure: - Curb Idle - 25 kPa (4 psi) minimum - 3000 rpm - 170 - 758 kPa (25 - 110 psi) 4. If oil pressure is 0 at idle, shut off engine. Check for a clogged oil pick-up screen or a pressure relief valve stuck open. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 360 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 2599 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 2600 Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 360 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 2601 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Install intake manifold retaining bolts, and tighten in sequence from the middle bolts towards the outside in a crisscross pattern. Torque fasteners to ............................................................................................................................. .............................................. 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). Throttle Body-Bolts .............................................................................................................................. ................................................. 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2605 Intake Manifold: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The intake manifold is made of a composite material and features long runners which maximizes low end torque. The intake manifold uses single plane sealing which consist of eight individual press in place port gaskets to prevent leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2606 Intake Manifold: Testing and Inspection INTAKE MANIFOLD LEAKAGE An intake manifold air leak is characterized by lower than normal manifold vacuum. Also, one or more cylinders may not be functioning. WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR THE FAN. DO NOT WEAR LOOSE CLOTHING. 1. Start the engine. 2. Spray a small stream of water at the suspected leak area. 3. If a change in RPM is observed the area of the suspected leak has been found. 4. Repair as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Intake Manifold: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING NOTE: There is NO approved repair procedure for the intake manifold. If severe damage is found during inspection, the intake manifold must be replaced. Before installing the intake manifold thoroughly clean the mating surfaces. Use a suitable cleaning solvent, then air dry. Inspection INSPECTION 1. Inspect the intake sealing surface for cracks, nicks and distortion. 2. Inspect the intake manifold vacuum hose fittings for looseness or blockage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2609 Intake Manifold: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the wiper module. 3. Remove resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 4. Disconnect electrical connectors for the following components: - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor - Throttle Position (TPS) Sensor - Coolant Temperature (CTS) Sensor 5. Disconnect brake booster hose and positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 6. Remove generator and set aside. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove lines or remove freon from A/C compressor. 7. Remove air conditioning compressor and set aside. 8. Bleed fuel system. 9. Remove intake manifold retaining fasteners in a crisscross pattern starting from the outside bolts and ending at the middle bolts. 10. Remove intake manifold and IAFM as an assembly. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install intake manifold seals. 2. Position intake manifold and IAFM. 3. Install intake manifold retaining bolts, and tighten in sequence from the middle bolts towards the outside in a crisscross pattern. Torque fasteners to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Connect electrical connectors for the following components: - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor - Throttle Position (TPS) Sensor - Coolant Temperature (CTS) Sensor - Idle Air Control (IAC) Motor 5. Install generator. 6. Install A/C compressor. 7. Connect Brake booster hose and Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 8. Install the wiper module. 9. Install resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 10. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2615 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electromechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - REAR SEAL AREA LEAKS Since it is sometimes difficult to determine the source of an oil leak in the rear seal area of the engine, a more involved inspection is necessary. The following steps should be followed to help pinpoint the source of the leak. If the leakage occurs at the crankshaft rear oil seal area: 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Remove torque converter or clutch housing cover and inspect rear of block for evidence of oil. Use a black light to check for the oil leak: a. Circular spray pattern generally indicates seal leakage or crankshaft damage. b. Where leakage tends to run straight down, possible causes are a porous block, camshaft bore cup plugs, oil galley pipe plugs, oil filter runoff, and main bearing cap to cylinder block mating surfaces. 4. If no leaks are detected, pressurize the crankcase as outlined, Inspection (Engine oil Leaks in general) CAUTION: Do not exceed 20.6 kPa (3 psi). 5. If the leak is not detected, very slowly turn the crankshaft and watch for leakage. If a leak is detected between the crankshaft and seal while slowly turning the crankshaft, it is possible the crankshaft seal surface is damaged. The seal area on the crankshaft could have minor nicks or scratches that can be polished out with emery cloth. CAUTION: Use extreme caution when crankshaft polishing is necessary to remove minor nicks or scratches. The crankshaft seal flange is specially machined to complement the function of the rear oil seal. 6. For bubbles that remain steady with shaft rotation, no further inspection can be done until disassembled. Refer to ENGINE TESTING, under the Oil Leak row, for components inspections on possible causes and corrections. 7. After the oil leak root cause and appropriate corrective action have been identified, Refer to CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL REAR REMOVAL. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: This procedure can be performed in vehicle. 1. If being performed in vehicle, remove the transmission. 2. Remove the flexplate. NOTE: The crankshaft oil seal CAN NOT be reused after removal. NOTE: The crankshaft rear oil seal remover Special Tool 8506 must be installed deeply into the seal. Continue to tighten the removal tool into the seal until the tool can not be turned farther. Failure to install tool correctly the first time will cause tool to pull free of seal without removing seal from engine. 3. Using Special Tool 8506 (1), remove the crankshaft rear oil seal (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2622 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The rear seal must be installed dry for proper operation. Do not lubricate the seal lip or outer edge. 1. Position the plastic seal guide (2) onto the crankshaft rear face. Then position the crankshaft rear oil seal (3) onto the guide. 2. Using Special Tools 8349 Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Installer (1) and C-4171 Driver Handle, with a hammer, tap the seal (3) into place. Continue to tap on the driver handle until the seal installer seats against the cylinder block crankshaft bore. 3. Install the flexplate. 4. Install the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove accessory drive belt. 3. Drain cooling system. 4. Remove upper radiator hose. 5. Remove radiator shroud attaching fasteners. 6. Remove radiator cooling fan and shroud. 7. Remove crankshaft damper bolt. 8. Remove damper using Special Tools 8513A Insert (2) and 1023 Three Jaw Puller (1). 9. Using Special Tool 9071 (1), remove crankshaft front seal (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2627 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The front crankshaft seal must be installed dry. Do not apply lubricant to sealing lip or to outer edge. 1. Using Special Tool 9072 and 8512A, install crankshaft front seal. CAUTION: To prevent severe damage to the Crankshaft or Damper, thoroughly clean the damper bore and the crankshaft nose before installing Damper. 2. Install vibration damper. 3. Install radiator cooling fan and shroud. 4. Install upper radiator hose. 5. Install accessory drive belt refer. 6. Refill cooling system. 7. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Guide Seal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The valve guide seals are made of rubber and incorporate an integral steel valve spring seat. The integral garter spring maintains consistent lubrication control to the valve stems. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2635 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2636 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2637 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2638 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2639 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2640 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2641 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2645 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2646 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2647 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 360 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 2651 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 2652 Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 360 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Locations > Page 2653 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service Precautions Timing Chain: Service Precautions Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Timing Chain: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Drain cooling system. 3. Remove Timing Chain Cover (1). 4. Re-install the vibration damper bolt finger tight. Using a suitable socket and breaker bar, rotate the crankshaft to align timing chain sprockets and keyways as shown. CAUTION: The camshaft pin and the slot in the cam sprocket must be clocked at 12:00 (2). The crankshaft keyway must be clocked at 2:00 (3). The crankshaft sprocket must be installed so that the dots and or paint marking is at 6:00. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2660 5. Remove oil pump. 6. Retract tensioner shoe (1) until hole in shoe lines up with hole in bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2661 7. Slide a suitable pin (1) into the holes. 8. Remove camshaft sprocket attaching bolt and remove timing chain with crankshaft and camshaft sprockets (2). 9. If tensioner assembly is to be replaced, remove the tensioner to block bolts and remove tensioner assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2662 Timing Chain: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If tensioner (1) assembly is being replaced, install tensioner and mounting bolts. Torque bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 2. Retract tensioner (2) if required. CAUTION: The timing chain must be installed with the single plated link aligned with the dot and or paint marking on the camshaft sprocket. The crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the dot and or paint marking on the sprocket between two plated timing chain links. CAUTION: The camshaft pin and the slot in the cam sprocket must be clocked at 12:00. The crankshaft keyway must be clocked at 2:00. The crankshaft sprocket must be installed so that the dots and or paint marking is at 6:00. 3. Place both camshaft sprocket and crankshaft sprocket on the bench with timing marks on exact imaginary center line through both camshaft and crankshaft bores. 4. Place timing chain around both sprockets. 5. Lift sprockets and chain (keep sprockets tight against the chain in position as shown). 6. Slide both sprockets (2, 3) evenly over their respective shafts and check alignment of timing marks. 7. Install the camshaft bolt. Tighten the bolt to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.) torque. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2663 8. Remove tensioner pin. (1) Again, verify alignment of timing marks. 9. Install the oil pump. 10. Install the oil pan and pick up. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2664 11. Install the timing chain cover. 12. Refill engine oil. 13. Fill cooling system. 14. Connect battery negative cable. 15. Start engine and check for oil and coolant leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner If tensioner (1) assembly is being replaced, install tensioner and mounting bolts. Torque bolts to ................................................. 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Timing Chain Tensioner: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The timing chain tensioner is a stamped steel constant tension mechanical design. It is mounted to the front of the engine, behind the timing chain drive. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2670 Timing Chain Tensioner: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The timing chain tension is maintained by routing the timing chain through the tensioner assembly. A nylon covered spring steel arm presses on the timing chain maintaining the correct chain tension. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Component Alignment Marks > Component Information > Locations Timing Component Alignment Marks: Locations CAUTION: The timing chain must be installed with the single plated link aligned with the dot and or paint marking on the camshaft sprocket. The crankshaft sprocket is aligned with the dot and or paint marking on the sprocket between two plated timing chain links. CAUTION: The camshaft pin and the slot in the cam sprocket must be clocked at 12:00. The crankshaft keyway must be clocked at 2:00. The crankshaft sprocket must be installed so that the dots and or paint marking is at 6:00. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Chain Case Cover-Bolts ............................................................................................................................................................ 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) Lifting Stud ........................................................................................................................................... ................................................ 55 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Timing Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the engine cover (1). 3. Remove air cleaner assembly. 4. Drain cooling system. 5. Remove accessory drive belt. 6. Remove fan and fan drive assembly. 7. Remove coolant bottle and washer bottle. 8. Remove fan shroud. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect A/C lines or discharge freon. 9. Remove A/C compressor and set aside. 10. Remove the generator. 11. Remove upper radiator hose. 12. Disconnect both heater hoses at timing cover. 13. Disconnect lower radiator hose at engine. 14. Remove accessory drive belt tensioner and both idler pulleys. 15. Remove crankshaft damper (2). NOTE: Do not remove the hoses from the power steering pump. 16. Remove power steering pump and set aside. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2679 17. Remove the dipstick support bolt. 18. Drain the engine oil. 19. Remove the oil pan and pick up tube. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove water pump for timing cover removal. 20. Remove timing cover bolts and remove cover. 21. Verify that timing cover slide bushings (1) are located in timing cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2680 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean timing chain cover and block surface. NOTE: Always install a new gasket on timing cover. 2. Verify that the slide bushings (1) are installed in timing cover. 3. Install cover and new gasket. Tighten fasteners to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). NOTE: The large lifting stud is torqued to 55 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the oil pan and pick up tube. 5. Install the A/C compressor. 6. Install the generator. 7. Install power steering pump. 8. Install the dipstick support bolt. 9. Install the thermostat housing. 10. Install crankshaft damper. 11. Install accessory drive belt tensioner assembly and both idler pulleys. 12. Install radiator lower hose. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2681 13. Install both heater hoses. 14. Install radiator fan shroud. 15. Install the fan and fan drive assembly 16. Install the accessory drive belt. 17. Install the coolant bottle and washer bottle. 18. Install the upper radiator hose. 19. Install the air cleaner assembly. 20. Fill cooling system. 21. Refill engine oil. 22. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE The correct fuel pressure for this vehicle is 58 psi ± 2 psi Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2686 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2687 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2688 - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16 inch) or #6631(3/8 inch) fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2689 Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Idle Speed: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The IAC stepper motor is mounted to the throttle body, and regulates the amount of air bypassing the control of the throttle plate. As engine loads and ambient temperatures change, engine rpm changes. A pintle on the IAC stepper motor protrudes into a passage in the throttle body, controlling air flow through the passage. The IAC is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the target engine idle speed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2695 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. At idle, engine speed can be increased by retracting the IAC motor pintle and allowing more air to pass through the port, or it can be decreased by restricting the passage with the pintle and diminishing the amount of air bypassing the throttle plate. The IAC is called a stepper motor because it is moved (rotated) in steps, or increments. Opening the IAC opens an air passage around the throttle blade which increases RPM. The PCM uses the IAC motor to control idle speed (along with timing) and to reach a desired MAP during decel (keep engine from stalling). The IAC motor has 4 wires with 4 circuits. Two of the wires are for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to the motor windings to operate the stepper motor in one direction. The other 2 wires are also for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to operate the stepper motor in the opposite direction. To make the IAC go in the opposite direction, the PCM just reverses polarity on both windings. If only 1 wire is open, the IAC can only be moved 1 step (increment) in either direction. To keep the IAC motor in position when no movement is needed, the PCM will energize both windings at the same time. This locks the IAC motor in place. In the IAC motor system, the PCM will count every step that the motor is moved. This allows the PCM to determine the motor pintle position. If the memory is cleared, the PCM no longer knows the position of the pintle. So at the first key ON, the PCM drives the IAC motor closed, regardless of where it was before. This zeros the counter. From this point the PCM will back out the IAC motor and keep track of its position again. When engine rpm is above idle speed, the IAC is used for the following: - Off-idle dashpot (throttle blade will close quickly but idle speed will not stop quickly) - Deceleration air flow control - A/C compressor load control (also opens the passage slightly before the compressor is engaged so that the engine rpm does not dip down when the compressor engages) - Power steering load control The PCM can control polarity of the circuit to control direction of the stepper motor. IAC Stepper Motor Program: The PCM is also equipped with a memory program that records the number of steps the IAC stepper motor most recently advanced to during a certain set of parameters. For example: The PCM was attempting to maintain a 1000 rpm target during a cold start-up cycle. The last recorded number of steps for that may have been 125. That value would be recorded in the memory cell so that the next time the PCM recognizes the identical conditions, the PCM recalls that 125 steps were required to maintain the target. This program allows for greater customer satisfaction due to greater control of engine idle. Another function of the memory program, which occurs when the power steering switch (if equipped), or the A/C request circuit, requires that the IAC stepper motor control engine rpm, is the recording of the last targeted steps into the memory cell. The PCM can anticipate A/C compressor loads. This is accomplished by delaying compressor operation for approximately 0.5 seconds until the PCM moves the IAC stepper motor to the recorded steps that were loaded into the memory cell. Using this program helps eliminate idle-quality changes as loads change. Finally, the PCM incorporates a "No-Load" engine speed limiter of approximately 1800 - 2000 rpm, when it recognizes that the TPS is indicating an idle signal and IAC motor cannot maintain engine idle. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the IAC motor through the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Pull the air inlet hose straight (1) upward to disengage it from the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). 2. Disengage the three retaining clamps (3) that secure the air cleaner housing cover (4) to air cleaner housing (6). 3. Lift and pull the air cleaner housing cover toward the engine to disengage the cover locating tabs (5) from the air cleaner housing and position the cover out of the way. 4. Remove the air cleaner element (1) from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2701 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean any dirt or foreign matter from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). 2. Install the air cleaner element (1) into air cleaner housing. Make sure the element is properly seated in the housing. 3. Position the air cleaner housing cover (4) to the air cleaner housing (6) and engage the cover locating tabs (5). Make sure the tabs are fully engaged. 4. Fully install the air cleaner housing cover to the air cleaner housing and engage the three retaining clamps (3). Make sure the clamps are fully engaged. 5. Engage air inlet hose (1) to the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications DESCRIPTION The 5.7L engine (345 CID) eight-cylinder engine is a 90° V-Type lightweight, deep skirt cast iron block, aluminum heads, single cam, overhead valve engine with hydraulic roller tappets. The heads incorporate splayed valves with a hemispherical style combustion chamber and dual spark plugs. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear; 1, 3, 5, 7 on the left bank and 2, 4, 6, 8 on the right bank. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2710 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications FIRING ORDER - 5.7L These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any of the available engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2717 Spark Plug: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Resistor type spark plugs are used on all engines. Sixteen spark plugs (2 per cylinder) are used with 5.7L engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Spark Plug: Procedures CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT The plugs may be cleaned using commercially available spark plug cleaning equipment. After cleaning, file center electrode flat with a small point file or jewelers file before adjusting gap. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. Adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2720 Spark Plug: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL Each individual spark plug is located under each ignition coil. Each individual ignition coil must be removed to gain access to each spark plug. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing at throttle body. 2. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. 4. Remove spark plug from cylinder head using a quality socket with a rubber or foam insert. Also check condition of ignition coil O-ring and replace as necessary. 5. Inspect spark plug condition. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The 4.7L is equipped with copper core ground electrode spark plugs. They must be replaced with the same type/number spark plug as the original. If another spark plug is substituted, pre-ignition will result. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap or a cracked porcelain insulator. 1. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. 2. Tighten spark plugs to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 3.7L & 4.7L. 3. The 5.7L is equipped with torque critical design spark plugs. Do not exceed 15 ft. lbs. torque. Tighten spark plugs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). NOTE: 5.7L does not use an O-ring 4. Before installing ignition coil(s), check condition of coil O-ring and replace as necessary. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone to coil O-ring. 5. Install ignition coil(s). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Maximum Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................................................................... 25 percent Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2724 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. Refer to ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS for the correct engine compression pressures. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolts Tighten mounting bolts to .................................................................................................................... ............................................... 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Water Pump: Description and Operation Description WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump (1) circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core. The pump is driven from the engine crankshaft by a single serpentine drive belt that drives the water pump pulley (1). The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the housing. The housing has two small holes to allow seepage to escape. The water pump seals are lubricated by the antifreeze in the coolant mixture. No additional lubrication is necessary. Both heater hoses are connected to fittings on the timing chain front cover. The water pump is also mounted directly to the timing chain cover and is equipped with a non serviceable integral pulley. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2730 Water Pump: Description and Operation Operation WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core, this coolant absorbs the heat generated when the engine is running. The pump is driven by the engine crankshaft via a drive belt. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Water Pump: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the gasket mating surface. Use caution not to damage the gasket sealing surface. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the water pump assembly for cracks in the housing, water leaks from shaft seal, worn bearing or impeller rubbing either the pump body or timing chain case/cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2733 Water Pump: Removal and Replacement Removal 5.7L ENGINE 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Drain cooling system. 3. Remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from water pump. Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle at this time. 4. If water pump is being replaced, do not unbolt fan blade assembly from thermal viscous fan drive. 5. Remove two fan shroud-to-radiator screws. Disconnect the coolant overflow hose, windshield washer fluid hose and washer pump electrical connector. 6. Remove fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle. 7. Remove A/C compressor and generator brace. 8. Remove idler pulleys. 9. Remove belt tensioner assembly. 10. Remove upper and lower radiator hoses. 11. Remove heater hoses. 12. Remove water pump mounting bolts and remove pump. Installation 5.7L ENGINE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2734 1. Install water pump and mounting bolts. Tighten mounting bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Install heater hoses. 3. Install upper and lower radiator hoses. 4. Install belt tensioner assembly. 5. Install idler pulleys. 6. Install A/C compressor and alternator brace. Tighten bolt and nuts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 7. Install fan shroud assembly and two fan shroud mounting screws. 8. Install the fan/viscous drive assembly. 9. Be sure of at least 25 mm (1.0 inches) between tips of fan blades and fan shroud. 10. Install accessory drive belt. 11. Connect negative battery cable. 12. Fill coolant. 13. Pressure test coolant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Water Pump: Locations Component ID: 207 Component : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Connector: Name : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 2 GROUND Z931 18BK Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 2739 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 2740 Auxiliary Water Pump: Diagrams Component ID: 207 Component : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Connector: Name : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 2 GROUND Z931 18BK Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 2741 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2746 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Cooling System Capacity With Rear Heat .................................................................................................................................................. 16.6 qts. (15.8L) Note: Includes 2.1 qts (2L) for coolant bottle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2749 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) P/N 5022764AB or equivalent. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant DESCRIPTION WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. ETHYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/160.000 km (100,000 Mile) Formula (ethylene-glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT, for Hybrid Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37° C (-35° F). The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water mixture depends upon the climate and vehicle operating conditions. The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower than 44 percent, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation, and cooling system components may be severely damaged by corrosion. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68% antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7° C (-90° F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because the specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. Use of 100 percent ethylene-glycol will cause formation of additive deposits in the system, as the corrosion inhibitive additives in ethylene-glycol require the presence of water to dissolve. The deposits act as insulation, causing temperatures to rise to as high as 149° C (300° F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at 22° C (-8° F). PROPYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES It's overall effective temperature range is smaller than that of ethylene-glycol. The freeze point of 50/50 propylene-glycol and water is -32° C (-26° F). 5° C higher than ethylene-glycol's freeze point. The boiling point (protection against summer boil-over) of propylene-glycol is 125° C (257° F) at 96.5 kPa (14 psi), compared to 128° C (263° F) for ethylene-glycol. Use of propylene-glycol can result in boil-over or freeze-up on a cooling system designed for ethylene-glycol. Propylene- glycol also has poorer heat transfer characteristics than ethylene-glycol. This can increase cylinder head temperatures under certain conditions. Propylene-glycol/ethylene-glycol Mixtures can cause the destabilization of various corrosion inhibitors, causing damage to the various cooling system components. Also, once ethylene-glycol and propylene-glycol based coolants are mixed in the vehicle, conventional methods of determining freeze point will not be accurate. Both the refractive index and specific gravity differ between ethylene glycol and propylene-glycol. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant > Page 2752 Coolant: Description and Operation Description HOAT COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol base coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/160.935 KM, (5 Year/100,000 Mile) Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37° C (-35° F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT), may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water - Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149° C (300° F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The increased temperature can result in engine detonation. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22° C (-8° F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37° C (-34° F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7° C (-90° F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. COOLANT SELECTION AND ADDITIVES The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Only Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year 160,935 km (5 Year/100,000 Mile) Formula (glycol base coolant with corrosion inhibitors called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37° C (-35° F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Do not use coolant additives that are claimed to improve engine cooling. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant > Page 2753 Coolant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Coolant flows through the engine block, cylinder head, absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. On the 6.7L diesel engine, coolant also flows through the EGR cooler and turbocharger actuator. During cold weather the ethylene-glycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Coolant Concentration Testing Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Concentration Testing COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain, flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to a freeze point of -37° C (-34° F) to -46° C (-50° F). The use of a hydrometer or Tool 8266, refractometer can be used to test coolant concentration. A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection (up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol). A Refractometer Tool 8286 will test the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid. Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and corrosion protection and is not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Coolant Concentration Testing > Page 2756 Coolant: Testing and Inspection Coolant Level Check COOLANT LEVEL CHECK NOTE: Do not remove radiator cap for routine coolant level inspections. The coolant level can be checked at coolant recovery bottle (2). The coolant reserve/overflow system (5) provides a quick method for determining coolant level without removing radiator pressure cap. With engine not running, open the coolant recovery bottle cap and remove coolant level indicator dipstick to observe coolant level in coolant recovery bottle. The coolant level should be between ADD and FULL marks. If the coolant level is at or below the ADD mark, fill the recovery bottle with a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water ONE QUART AT A TIME. Repeat this procedure until the coolant level is at the FULL mark. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Partially drain cooling system. 3. Remove upper radiator hose clamp and hose at radiator. 4. Unplug wiring harness from A/C compressor. 5. Remove air cleaner assembly. 6. Remove accessory drive belt. 7. Remove bracket-to-intake manifold bolts. 8. The drive belt idler pulley must be removed to gain access to one of A/C compressor/generator bracket mounting bolts (3). Remove idler pulley bolt and remove idler pulley. 9. Remove oil dipstick tube mounting bolt (3) at side of A/C-generator mounting bracket. 10. Disconnect throttle body cables. 11. Remove heater hose clamp and heater hose from heater hose coolant return tube. 12. Remove heater hose coolant return tube mounting bolt and remove tube (4) from engine. Discard the old tube O-ring. 13. Remove six bracket bolts. 14. Lift and position generator and A/C compressor (along with their common mounting bracket) to gain access to bypass hose. A block of wood may be used to hold assembly in position. 15. Loosen and position both hose clamps to center of bypass hose. Remove hose from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2761 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position bypass hose clamps to center of hose. 2. Install bypass hose to engine. 3. Secure both hose clamps. 4. Install generator-A/C mounting bracket assembly to engine. Tighten bolts (number 1 and 2) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten bolts (number 3) to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Install a new O-ring to the heater hose coolant return tube. Coat the new O-ring with antifreeze before installation. 6. Install coolant return tube and its mounting bolt to engine. 7. Connect throttle body control cables. 8. Install oil dipstick mounting bolt. 9. Install idler pulley. Tighten bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 10. Install drive belt. 11. Install air cleaner assembly. 12. Install upper radiator hose to radiator. 13. Connect wiring harness to A/C compressor. 14. Connect battery negative cable. 15. Fill cooling system. 16. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Coolant Reservoir: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The coolant recovery container is integral to the upper fan shroud assembly and is made of high temperature plastic. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2766 Coolant Reservoir: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The coolant recovery container works in conjunction with the radiator pressure cap. It utilizes thermal expansion and contraction of coolant to keep coolant free of trapped air. It provides a volume for expansion and contraction of coolant. It also provides a convenient and safe method for checking coolant level and adjusting level at atmospheric pressure. This is done without removing the radiator pressure cap. The system also provides some reserve coolant to the radiator to cover minor leaks and evaporation or boiling losses. As the engine cools, a vacuum is formed in the cooling system of both the radiator and engine. Coolant will then be drawn from the coolant tank and returned to a proper level in the radiator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2772 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2773 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2774 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2775 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2776 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2777 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2778 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2779 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2780 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2781 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2782 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2783 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2784 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2785 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2786 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2787 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2788 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Radiator Fan High and Low Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Radiator Fan High Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Radiator Fan High Component ID: 221 Component : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN HIGH Connector: Name : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN HIGH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 85 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 87 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Radiator Fan High > Page 2794 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Radiator Fan Low Component ID: 222 Component : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 85 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 87 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Locations Component ID: 236 Component : RESISTOR-RADIATOR FAN Connector: Name : RESISTOR-RADIATOR FAN Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N24 12DG/DB 2 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2798 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2799 Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Diagrams Component ID: 236 Component : RESISTOR-RADIATOR FAN Connector: Name : RESISTOR-RADIATOR FAN Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N24 12DG/DB 2 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2800 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2805 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2806 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2807 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2808 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2809 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2810 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2811 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2812 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2813 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2814 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2815 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2816 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2817 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description Heater Core: Description and Operation Front Heater Core - Description DESCRIPTION The heater core (1) for the front heating-A/C system is located in the front HVAC housing, behind the instrument panel. It is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes and fins. The heater core is secured to the HVAC housing by a plastic retaining bracket and screws. The heater core tubes (2) are attached to the top of the heater core by metal retaining clips (3) and O-ring seals. The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle to service the heater core. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description > Page 2822 Heater Core: Description and Operation Front Heater Core - Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through the heater hoses to the heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat is removed from the engine and is transferred to the heater core tubes and fins. Air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the heater core fins. The blend-air door(s) allows control of the heater output air temperature by regulating the amount of air flowing through the heater core. The blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the HVAC housing. The heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if restricted, leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description > Page 2823 Heater Core: Description and Operation Rear Heater Core - Description DESCRIPTION The rear heater core (1) is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes and fins. The rear heater core is located in the rear HVAC housing behind the right interior quarter trim panel and is retained in the housing by a plastic mounting bracket and a screw. The heater core tubes (3) are attached to the heater core by metal retaining clamps (2) and rubber O-ring seals and are secured to the rear HVAC housing by a plastic flange. The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the rear heater core. The rear HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle to service the rear heater core. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description > Page 2824 Heater Core: Description and Operation Rear Heater Core - Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through heater hoses and tubes to the rear heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat removed from the engine is transferred to the heater core fins and the air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the fins. The rear blend air door allows control of the rear heater output air temperature by controlling the amount of air flowing through or around the rear heater core. The rear blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the rear heater-A/C housing. The rear heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be inoperative, leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal Heater Core: Service and Repair Front Heater Core - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Remove the front HVAC housing (1) and place it on a workbench. 2. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (2) from the recirculation door actuator (3). 3. Remove the screws (4) that secure the air inlet housing (5) to the HVAC housing. 4. Remove the air inlet housing from the HVAC housing. 5. Carefully remove the foam seal (1) from the flange on the HVAC housing (2). If the seal is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 6. Remove the screw (3) that secures the heater core tube retaining bracket (4) to the top of the HVAC housing. 7. Remove the heater core tube retaining bracket from the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 2827 8. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the HVAC housing retaining bracket (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the bracket. 9. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the heater core retaining bracket (5) to the top of the HVAC housing and remove the bracket. 10. Carefully remove the heater core (6) and heater core tubes as an assembly from the top of the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 2828 Heater Core: Service and Repair Front Heater Core - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Carefully install the heater core (6) into the top of the HVAC housing (3). Make sure that the heater core insulator is properly positioned. 2. Install the two screws (4) that secure the heater core retaining bracket (5) to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the HVAC housing bracket (2) to the top of HVAC housing. 4. Install the two screws (1) that secure the HVAC housing bracket to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. Install the heater core tube retaining bracket (4) to the top of the HVAC housing (2). 6. Install the screw (3) that secures the heater core tube retaining bracket to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screw to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Install the foam seal (1) to the flange on the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 2829 8. Install the air inlet housing (5) onto the top of the HVAC housing (1). 9. Install the screws (4) that secure the air inlet housing to the HVAC housing. Make sure the HVAC wire harness retainer is properly installed. 10. Connect the HVAC wire harness (2) to the recirculation door actuator (3). 11. Install the front HVAC housing. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 13. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. 14. Refill the engine cooling system. 15. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 16. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 2830 Heater Core: Service and Repair Rear Heater Core - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the rear heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the rear heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear HVAC housing. 3. Remove the rear blend door actuator. 4. Carefully remove the foam seal (1) from the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange (3). If the seal is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 5. Remove the screws (2) that secure the two halves of the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange together and remove the outer half of the flange. 6. Remove the screw (1) that secures the rear heater core tube retaining bracket (2) to the rear HVAC housing (3) and remove the bracket. 7. Carefully pull the rear heater core (4) out of the side of the rear HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 2831 Heater Core: Service and Repair Rear Heater Core - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the rear heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the rear heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Install the rear heater core (4) into the side of the rear HVAC housing (3). Make sure that the insulator is properly installed. 2. Install the rear heater core retaining bracket (2). 3. Install the screw (1) that secures the rear heater core retaining bracket to the rear HVAC housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 4. Install the outer half of the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange (3). 5. Install the screws (2) that secure the two halves of the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange together. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 6. Install the foam seal (1) to the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange. 7. Install the rear blend door actuator. 8. Install the rear HVAC housing. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. If the rear heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 2832 11. Refill the engine cooling system. 12. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 13. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the fuel gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the bottom end of the scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2838 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54° C (130° F)] and the high end of normal [about 122° C (252° F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. - Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54° C (130° F)], the gauge needle is held at the C increment at the low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is above about 54° C (130° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122° C (252° F), the gauge needle is moved to the red zone at the high end of the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 122° C (252° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electromechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine temperature indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The engine temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2843 Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the engine temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the engine temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122° C (252° F), the engine temperature indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 119° C (246° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF, then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electro Mechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radiator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The radiator is a aluminum vertical-flow design with vertical tubes through the radiator core and plastic top and bottom tanks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2848 Radiator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The radiator supplies sufficient heat transfer using the cooling fins interlaced between the horizontal tubes in the radiator core to cool the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2849 Radiator: Testing and Inspection RADIATOR COOLANT FLOW Use the following procedure to determine if coolant is flowing through cooling system. 1. Idle engine until operating temperature is reached. If upper radiator hose is warm to the touch, thermostat is opening and coolant is flowing to radiator. WARNING: HOT, PRESSURIZED COOLANT CAN CAUSE INJURY BY SCALDING. USING A RAG TO COVER RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP, OPEN RADIATOR CAP SLOWLY TO FIRST STOP. ALLOW ANY BUILT-UP PRESSURE TO VENT TO THE RESERVE/OVERFLOW TANK. AFTER PRESSURE BUILD-UP HAS BEEN RELEASED, REMOVE CAP FROM FILLER NECK. 2. Drain a small amount of coolant from radiator until ends of radiator tubes are visible through filler neck. Idle engine at normal operating temperature. If coolant is flowing past exposed tubes, coolant is circulating. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Radiator: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean radiator fins with the engine cold, apply cold water and compressed air to the back (engine side) of the radiator to flush the radiator and/or A/C condenser of debris. Inspection INSPECTION The radiator cooling fins should be checked for damage or deterioration. Inspect cooling fins to make sure they are not bent or crushed, these areas result in reduced heat exchange causing the cooling system to operate at higher temperatures. Inspect the plastic end tanks for cracks, damage or leaks. Inspect the radiator neck for damage or distortion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2852 Radiator: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Drain cooling system 3. Remove pushpins (1) and the upper condenser/radiator seal (2). 4. Remove air filer housing assembly. 5. Remove upper radiator hose (1). 6. Remove overflow tube (2). 7. Remove radiator fan shroud (4) from the radiator and position over the radiator fan. 8. Remove the upper radiator support (3). 9. Raise vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2853 10. Disconnect the power steering cooler lines (2). 11. Disconnect the transmission cooler lines (1). 12. Remove the lower radiator hose (2). 13. Lower vehicle. 14. Remove upper radiator mount. 15. Remove LH and RH radiator side seals. 16. Remove radiator. 17. Remove power steering cooler from the radiator, if necessary. 18. Remove transmission cooler from radiator, if necessary. Installation INSTALLATION The radiator has two isolator pins on bottom of both tanks. These fit into alignment holes in radiator lower support. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2854 1. Install power steering cooler, if removed. 2. Install transmission oil cooler if removed. 3. Install the upper radiator mount 4. Position isolator pins into alignment holes in radiator lower support. 5. Install upper radiator support. Tighten bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.) 6. Install LH and RH radiator side seals. 7. Install upper radiator hose. 8. Install overflow tube. 9. Install radiator shroud. 10. Raise vehicle. 11. Install power steering cooler lines. 12. Install transmission cooler lines. 13. Install lower radiator hose. 14. Lower vehicle. 15. Install air filter housing assembly. 16. Fill radiator. 17. Connect battery negative cable. 18. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radiator Cap: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All cooling systems are equipped with a pressure cap on the radiator. This cap releases pressure at some point within a range of 131-to-158 kPa (19-to-23 psi). The pressure relief point (in pounds) is engraved on top of the cap (3). The cooling system will operate at pressures slightly above atmospheric pressure. This results in a higher coolant boiling point allowing increased radiator cooling capacity. The cap contains a spring-loaded pressure relief valve (4). This valve opens when system pressure reaches the release range of 131-to-158 kPa (19-to-23 psi). A rubber gasket (2) seals the radiator filler neck. This is done to maintain vacuum during coolant cool-down and to prevent leakage when system is under pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2859 Radiator Cap: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A vent valve in the center of the cap will remain shut as long as the cooling system is pressurized. As the coolant cools, it contracts and creates a vacuum in cooling system. This causes the vacuum valve to open and coolant in reserve/overflow tank to be drawn through connecting hose into radiator. If the vacuum valve is stuck shut, or overflow hose is kinked, radiator hoses will collapse on cool-down. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Radiator Cap Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap RADIATOR CAP Remove cap (1) from radiator. Be sure that sealing surfaces are clean. Moisten rubber gasket with water and install cap (1) on pressure tester 7700 (2) or an equivalent. Operate tester pump to bring pressure to 138 kPa (20 psi) on gauge. If pressure cap (1) fails to hold pressure of at least 131 kPa (19 psi) replace cap. Refer to the following CAUTION. The pressure cap may test properly while positioned on tool 7700 (or equivalent). It may not hold pressure or vacuum when installed on radiator. If so, inspect radiator filler neck and cap's top gasket for damage. Also inspect for dirt or distortion that may prevent cap from sealing properly. CAUTION: Radiator pressure testing tools are very sensitive to small air leaks, which will not cause cooling system problems. A pressure cap that does not have a history of coolant loss should not be replaced just because it leaks slowly when tested with this tool. Add water to tool. Turn tool upside down and recheck pressure cap to confirm that cap needs replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Radiator Cap > Page 2862 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap To Filler Neck Seal RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL The pressure cap upper gasket (seal) pressure relief can be tested by removing overflow hose from radiator filler neck nipple. Attach hose of pressure tester tool 7700 (or equivalent) to nipple. It will be necessary to disconnect hose from its adapter for filler neck. Pump air into radiator. The pressure cap upper gasket should relieve at 131 kPa (21 psi) and hold pressure at a minimum of 130 kPa (18.8 psi). WARNING: THE WARNING WORDS "DO NOT OPEN HOT" ON RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP, ARE A SAFETY PRECAUTION. WHEN HOT, PRESSURE BUILDS UP IN COOLING SYSTEM. TO PREVENT SCALDING OR INJURY, RADIATOR CAP SHOULD NOT BE REMOVED WHILE SYSTEM IS HOT AND/OR UNDER PRESSURE. Do not remove radiator cap at any time except for the following purposes: 1. Check and adjust antifreeze freeze point. 2. Refill system with new antifreeze. 3. Conducting service procedures. 4. Checking for vacuum leaks. WARNING: IF VEHICLE HAS BEEN RUN RECENTLY, WAIT AT LEAST 15 MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING RADIATOR CAP. WITH A RAG, SQUEEZE RADIATOR UPPER HOSE TO CHECK IF SYSTEM IS UNDER PRESSURE. PLACE A RAG OVER CAP AND WITHOUT PUSHING CAP DOWN, ROTATE IT COUNTER-CLOCKWISE TO FIRST STOP. ALLOW FLUID TO ESCAPE THROUGH THE COOLANT RESERVE/OVERFLOW HOSE INTO RESERVE/OVERFLOW TANK. SQUEEZE RADIATOR UPPER HOSE TO DETERMINE WHEN PRESSURE HAS BEEN RELEASED. WHEN COOLANT AND STEAM STOP BEING PUSHED INTO TANK AND SYSTEM PRESSURE DROPS, REMOVE RADIATOR CAP COMPLETELY. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cleaning Radiator Cap: Service and Repair Cleaning CLEANING Use only a mild soap and water to clean the radiator cap. Using any type solvent may cause damage to the seal in the radiator cap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cleaning > Page 2865 Radiator Cap: Service and Repair Inspection INSPECTION Hold cap at eye level, right side up. The vent valve at bottom of cap should open. If rubber gasket has swollen and prevents vent valve from opening, replace cap. Hold cap at eye level, upside down. If any light can be seen between vent valve and rubber gasket, replace cap. Do not use a replacement cap that has a spring to hold vent shut. A replacement cap must be the type designed for a coolant reserve/overflow system with a completely sealed diaphragm spring and a rubber gasket. This gasket is used to seal to radiator filler neck top surface. Use of proper cap will allow coolant return to radiator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Radiator Fan High and Low Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Radiator Fan High Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Radiator Fan High Component ID: 221 Component : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN HIGH Connector: Name : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN HIGH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 85 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 87 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Radiator Fan High > Page 2872 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Radiator Fan Low Component ID: 222 Component : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-RADIATOR FAN LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 85 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A16 12RD/BR 87 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2878 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2879 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2880 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2881 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2882 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2883 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2884 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2885 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2886 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2887 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2888 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2889 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2890 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the fuel gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the bottom end of the scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2895 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54° C (130° F)] and the high end of normal [about 122° C (252° F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. - Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54° C (130° F)], the gauge needle is held at the C increment at the low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is above about 54° C (130° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122° C (252° F), the gauge needle is moved to the red zone at the high end of the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 122° C (252° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electromechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine temperature indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The engine temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2900 Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the engine temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the engine temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122° C (252° F), the engine temperature indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 119° C (246° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF, then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electro Mechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Thermostat: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not operate an engine without a thermostat, except for servicing or testing. The thermostat on the 5.7L gas powered engine is located beneath the thermostat housing (1) at the front of the intake manifold. On the 3.7L/4.7L engine the thermostat (4) is designed to block the flow of the coolant bypass journal by 50% instead of completely blocking the flow. The thermostat is a wax pellet driven, reverse poppet choke type. Coolant leakage into the pellet container will cause the thermostat to fail in the open position. Thermostats very rarely stick. Do not attempt to free a thermostat with a prying device. The same thermostat is used for winter and summer seasons. An engine should not be operated without a thermostat, except for servicing or testing. Operating without a thermostat causes longer engine warm-up time, unreliable warm-up performance, increased exhaust emissions and crankcase Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2905 condensation that can result in sludge formation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2906 Thermostat: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wax pellet is located in a sealed container at the spring end of the thermostat. When heated, the pellet expands, overcoming closing spring tension and water pump pressure to force the valve to open. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2907 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection THERMOSTAT ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS All gasoline powered models are equipped with On-Board Diagnostics for certain cooling system components. Refer to On-Board Diagnostics (OBD). If the powertrain control module (PCM) detects low engine coolant temperature, it will record a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the PCM memory. Do not change a thermostat for lack of heat as indicated by the instrument panel gauge or by poor heater performance unless a DTC is present. See: Testing and Inspection/On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) The DTC can also be accessed through the DRB scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Thermostat: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L ENGINE If the thermostat is being replaced, be sure that the replacement is the specified thermostat for the vehicle model and engine type. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Drain the cooling system until the coolant level is below the thermostat. 3. Air Conditioned vehicles: Remove the support bracket (generator mounting bracket-to-intake manifold) (2) located near the rear of the generator. NOTE: On air conditioning equipped vehicles, the generator must be partially removed. 4. Remove the accessory drive belt. 5. Remove the generator mounting bolts. Do not remove any of the wiring at the generator. If equipped with 4WD, unplug the 4WD indicator lamp wiring harness (located near rear of generator). 6. Remove the generator. Position the generator to gain access for the thermostat gasket removal. 7. Remove the radiator upper hose clamp and upper hose at the thermostat housing. 8. Position the wiring harness (behind thermostat housing) to gain access to the thermostat housing. 9. Remove the thermostat housing mounting bolts, thermostat housing (1), gasket (2) and thermostat (3). Discard old gasket (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2910 Thermostat: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L ENGINE 1. Clean the mating areas of the intake manifold and thermostat housing (1). 2. Install the thermostat (4) (spring side down) into the recessed machined groove on the intake manifold. 3. Install the gasket on the intake manifold and over the thermostat. 4. Position the thermostat housing (1) to the intake manifold. Note: The word FRONT stamped on housing. For adequate clearance, this must be placed towards the front of the vehicle. The housing is slightly angled forward after the installation to the intake manifold. 5. Install the housing-to-intake manifold bolts. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 6. Install the radiator upper hose to the thermostat housing. 7. Air Conditioned vehicles; Install the generator. Tighten the bolts to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the support bracket (generator mounting bracket-to-intake manifold). Tighten the bolts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 9. Install the accessory drive belt. 10. Fill the cooling system. 11. Connect battery negative cable. 12. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Water Pump Bolts Tighten mounting bolts to .................................................................................................................... ............................................... 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Water Pump: Description and Operation Description WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump (1) circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core. The pump is driven from the engine crankshaft by a single serpentine drive belt that drives the water pump pulley (1). The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the housing. The housing has two small holes to allow seepage to escape. The water pump seals are lubricated by the antifreeze in the coolant mixture. No additional lubrication is necessary. Both heater hoses are connected to fittings on the timing chain front cover. The water pump is also mounted directly to the timing chain cover and is equipped with a non serviceable integral pulley. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2916 Water Pump: Description and Operation Operation WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core, this coolant absorbs the heat generated when the engine is running. The pump is driven by the engine crankshaft via a drive belt. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Water Pump: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the gasket mating surface. Use caution not to damage the gasket sealing surface. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the water pump assembly for cracks in the housing, water leaks from shaft seal, worn bearing or impeller rubbing either the pump body or timing chain case/cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2919 Water Pump: Removal and Replacement Removal 5.7L ENGINE 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Drain cooling system. 3. Remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from water pump. Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle at this time. 4. If water pump is being replaced, do not unbolt fan blade assembly from thermal viscous fan drive. 5. Remove two fan shroud-to-radiator screws. Disconnect the coolant overflow hose, windshield washer fluid hose and washer pump electrical connector. 6. Remove fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle. 7. Remove A/C compressor and generator brace. 8. Remove idler pulleys. 9. Remove belt tensioner assembly. 10. Remove upper and lower radiator hoses. 11. Remove heater hoses. 12. Remove water pump mounting bolts and remove pump. Installation 5.7L ENGINE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2920 1. Install water pump and mounting bolts. Tighten mounting bolts to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 2. Install heater hoses. 3. Install upper and lower radiator hoses. 4. Install belt tensioner assembly. 5. Install idler pulleys. 6. Install A/C compressor and alternator brace. Tighten bolt and nuts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 7. Install fan shroud assembly and two fan shroud mounting screws. 8. Install the fan/viscous drive assembly. 9. Be sure of at least 25 mm (1.0 inches) between tips of fan blades and fan shroud. 10. Install accessory drive belt. 11. Connect negative battery cable. 12. Fill coolant. 13. Pressure test coolant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles incorporate toeboard catalytic converters into the exhaust system. These catalytic converters are made of stainless steel designed to operate at extremely high temperatures. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2926 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The catalytic converter captures and burns any unburned fuel mixture exiting the combustion chambers during the exhaust stroke of the engine. This process aids in reducing emissions output. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Engine 5.7L ENGINE CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate all exhaust bolts and nuts with Mopar(R) Rust Penetrant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Remove the clamp (3) holding the LH catalytic converter (4) to the RH catalytic converter (2). 4. If present, grind any tack welds. 5. Remove the catalytic converter-to-manifold bolts (1). 6. Remove the LH catalytic converter (4) from the RH catalytic converter (2). 7. Remove the clamp holding the RH catalytic converter (2) to the exhaust pipe(s). 8. If present, grind tack weld. 9. Remove the RH catalytic converter (2) from the extension pipe. 10. You may have to loosen up other sections of the exhaust system. Inspection INSPECTION Look at the stainless steel body of the converter, inspect for bulging or other distortion that could be a result of overheating. If the converter has a heat shield attached make sure it is not bent or loose. If you suspect internal damage to the catalyst, tapping the bottom of the catalyst with a rubber mallet may indicate a damaged core. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2929 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L ENGINE NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, the must be replaced. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove any burrs from the RH (2) and LH (4) catalytic converter. 3. Position new RH catalytic converter-to-exhaust pipe clamp on exhaust pipe. Insert the RH (2) catalytic converter into the exhaust pipe. Do not tighten clamp at this time. 4. Make sure the alignment tang is seated in the alignment slot. 5. Position new RH catalytic converter-to-LH catalytic converter clamp on RH catalytic converter. Insert the LH catalytic converter (4) into the RH catalytic converter (2). Do not tighten clamp at this time. 6. Make sure the alignment tang is seated in the alignment slot. 7. Install the LH and RH catalytic converters (2 and 4) to the exhaust manifold. Install bolts. Do not tighten at this time. 8. Connect the oxygen sensor electrical connectors. 9. Make sure the catalytic converter assembly (2 and 4) are correctly positioned and the properly aligned. The minimum clearance between components is 25 mm (1 inch). Ensure that the exhaust crossover has at least 15 mm (.59 in.) clearance at transmission crossmember. Ensure that muffler isolators are not stretched. Measurement between insulator rods is approximately 42 mm (1.65 in.). Make the necessary adjustments, if necessary. 10. Tighten manifold flange bolts to 34 Nm (24 lbs. ft.). Tighten the new exhaust clamps to 61 Nm (45 lbs. ft). 11. If other sections of the exhaust system where loosened in removal, refer to that information for the tightening procedures. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Start the engine, inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold to Cylinder Head ....................................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (220 in. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Exhaust Manifold: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The exhaust manifolds are log style with a patented flow enhancing design to maximize performance. The exhaust manifolds are made of high silicon molybdenum cast iron. A multi-layer stainless steel exhaust manifold gasket is used to improve sealing to the cylinder head. The exhaust manifolds are covered by a three layer laminated heat shield for thermal protection and noise reduction. The heat shields are fastened with a torque prevailing nut that is backed off slightly to allow for the thermal expansion of the exhaust manifold, with the exception of the nut, which also secures the oil dipstick tube bracket. That nut should not be backed off. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2935 Exhaust Manifold: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The exhaust manifolds collect the engine exhaust exiting the combustion chambers, then channels the exhaust gases to the exhaust pipes attached to the manifolds. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Exhaust Manifold: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean mating surfaces on cylinder head and manifold. Wash with solvent and blow dry with compressed air. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect manifold for cracks. Inspect mating surfaces of manifold for flatness with a straight edge. Gasket surfaces must be flat within 0.2 mm per 300 mm (0.008 inch per foot). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2938 Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Remove exhaust pipe to manifold bolts. 4. Remove engine mount thru bolts. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Install engine support fixture special tool #8534. 7. Raise engine enough to remove manifolds. CAUTION: Do not damage engine harness while raising the engine. 8. Remove heat shield. 9. Remove manifold bolts. 10. Remove manifold and gasket. Installation INSTALLATION EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Install manifold gasket and manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2939 2. Install manifold bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 3. Install heat shield and tighten nuts to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 4. Lower engine. CAUTION: Do not damage engine harness while lowering the engine. 5. Remove engine support fixture from engine. 6. Raise vehicle. 7. Install and tighten right and left side engine mount through bolts. 8. Install exhaust flange to pipe bolts. 9. Lower vehicle. 10. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Exhaust Pipe: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tailpipe is made of stainless steel and attaches to the muffler. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2944 Exhaust Pipe: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tailpipe channels the exhaust out of the muffler and out from under the vehicle to control noise and prevent exhaust gas fumes from entering the passenger compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Exhaust Pipe: Procedures INSPECTION Discard rusted clamps, broken or worn supports and attaching parts. Replace a component with original equipment parts, or equivalent. This will assure proper alignment with other parts in the system and provide acceptable exhaust noise levels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2947 Exhaust Pipe: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL WARNING: IF TORCHES ARE USED WHEN WORKING ON THE EXHAUST SYSTEM, WEAR PROTECTIVE EYE COVERING AND DO NOT ALLOW THE FLAME NEAR THE FUEL LINES. CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, be sure to disconnect all oxygen sensor connectors. Allowing the exhaust system to hang by the harness will damage the wiring and/or sensor. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate the bolts and nuts with Mopar(R) Rust Penetrant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Remove the exhaust pipe-to-muffler clamp (3). 4. Grind any tack weld, if present. 5. Remove the exhaust pipe insulators (1). 6. Remove the rear muffler insulators (5) if necessary. 7. If necessary, heat connection with an oxygen/acetylene torch and twist tailpipe out of muffler. 8. Remove the exhaust pipe (2) from the muffler (4). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, they must be replaced. 1. Remove any burrs from the exhaust pipe (2). 2. Connect the exhaust pipe (2) to the muffler (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2948 3. Make sure that the alignment tang is seated in the alignment slot. 4. Install the muffler-to-exhaust pipe clamp. Do not tighten at this time. 5. Install the rear muffler insulators (5), if removed. 6. Install the tail pipe insulators (1) 7. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. Make the necessary adjustments, if necessary. 8. Tighten muffler-to-exhaust pipe clamp to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Start the engine, inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heat Shield: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION There are two types of heat shields (1) used. One is stamped steel the other is molded foil sheets. The shields attach to the vehicle around the exhaust system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2953 Heat Shield: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The heat shields prevent heat from the exhaust system from entering the passenger area and other areas where the heat can cause damage to other components. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heat Shield: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect oxygen sensor electrical connectors. 3. Remove the screws and nuts holding the heat shields (1) to the frame and floor pan. 4. Slide the heat shield (1) out around the exhaust system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2956 Heat Shield: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the heat shields to the floor pan or the frame and install the screws and nuts. 2. Tighten the screws/nuts to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.) torque. 3. Connect oxygen sensor electrical connectors. 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Muffler: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All engines use a stainless steel muffler (5) to control exhaust noise levels and exhaust back pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2961 Muffler: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The muffler is designed to muffle the sound of the exhaust as it leaves the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Muffler: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove the tail pipe. 3. Remove the muffler-to-catalytic converter clamp (3). 4. Remove the muffler isolators (1 and 4). 5. Remove the muffler (5) from the catalytic converter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2964 Muffler: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, they must be replaced. 1. Install muffler to the catalytic converter or exhaust pipe. 2. Make sure the alignment tang seats in the alignment slot. 3. Install new exhaust clamps. Do not tighten at this time. 4. Install muffler isolators. Ensure muffler isolators are not stretched. The measurement between hanger ros should be 42 mm (1.65 in.). 5. Align muffler and exhaust pipe. Tighten exhaust clamp nuts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 6. Check the exhaust system for contact with body panels. Make the necessary adjustments, if necessary. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Start engine and check for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 2972 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 2973 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 2974 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 2975 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 2976 Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 2977 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 2978 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2981 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2982 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2983 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2984 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2985 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2986 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2987 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2988 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2989 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2990 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2991 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2992 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2993 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2994 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2995 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2996 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2997 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2998 Body Control Module: Connector Views Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2999 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3000 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3001 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3002 Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3003 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3004 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3005 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 3014 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 3019 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3024 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3025 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3026 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3027 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 3033 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 3038 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3043 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3044 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3045 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3046 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3051 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3052 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3053 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3059 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3060 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3061 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3062 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3063 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3064 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3065 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3066 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3067 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3068 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3069 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3070 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3071 5-- 6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3072 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3073 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3076 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3077 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3078 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3079 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3080 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3081 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3082 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3083 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3084 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3085 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3086 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3087 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3088 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3089 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3090 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3091 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3092 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3093 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3094 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3095 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3096 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3097 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3098 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3099 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3100 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3101 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3102 5-- 6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3103 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3104 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3107 - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3108 - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3109 PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Battery voltage is supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the Run or Start position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3110 Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Signal Ground SIGNAL GROUND Signal ground provides a low noise ground to the data link connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3111 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3112 - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (if equipped with an RE automatic transmission). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3115 SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3116 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen, Select "ECU View" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3117 b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New Fil". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Select "Close"after the download is complete, then select "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller" Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK" l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 10. 9. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "PCM Replaced" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 11. 10. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard" Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 11. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 12. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select ECU View. b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start". f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 13. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3118 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates" 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates." screen: a. Select "Enter part number" Enter the "Part Number"recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration" Select "Next" c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "Flash Download" then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Too" c. When the download is complete, select "Close"and "Back" 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3119 a. Select "ECU View" b. Select More Options" c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller" Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK" g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Functio". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finis" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU Vie" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function" d. Highlight "Learn ETC" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU Vie" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove both wiper arms. 3. Remove wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 4. Remove wiper cowl support (three bolts). 5. Remove air intake tube (four nuts). 6. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (3) from PCM. 7. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4), and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3122 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (2) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (4). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (3) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 5. Install the four 38-way connectors (3) to PCM. 6. Install air intake tube (four nuts). 7. Install wiper cowl support (three bolts). 8. Install wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 9. Install both wiper arms. 10. Connect negative battery cable. 11. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3126 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3129 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3132 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3137 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 218 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A921 18OR/PK 85 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 87 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3140 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 secondsunless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3143 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3147 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3150 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3153 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3159 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3162 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3168 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3169 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3170 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3173 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3177 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3178 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3179 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3180 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3181 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3182 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3183 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3186 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3189 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3193 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3194 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3195 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3196 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3197 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3198 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3199 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3200 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3201 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3202 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3203 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3204 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3205 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3209 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3210 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3211 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3212 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3213 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3214 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3215 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3216 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3217 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3218 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3219 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3220 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3221 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3222 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3223 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3224 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3225 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3226 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3227 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3230 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3233 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3237 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3238 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3242 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 366 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3243 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3244 Fig. 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The 2-wire Intake Manifold Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is installed in the intake manifold with the sensor element extending into the air stream. The IAT sensor is a two-wire Negative Thermal Coefficient (NTC) sensor. Meaning, as intake manifold temperature increases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor decreases. As temperature decreases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor increases. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 3247 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from intake manifold at sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3250 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor O-ring. 2. Clean sensor mounting hole in intake manifold (1). 3. Position sensor (2) into intake manifold and rotate clockwise until past release tab. 4. Install electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3255 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3256 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3257 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3258 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3259 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3262 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3263 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3264 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3265 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3266 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3269 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3272 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3277 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3278 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3279 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3280 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3281 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3284 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3285 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3286 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3287 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3288 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3291 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (1) is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Disconnect electrical connector at sensor by sliding release lock out (1). Press down on lock tab (2) for removal. 2. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 3. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3294 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor O-ring seal for cuts or tears. 3. Position sensor into manifold. 4. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn clockwise for installation. 5. Connect electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3298 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3299 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3300 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3305 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3306 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3307 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 376 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3310 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3311 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3312 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3313 Component Location - 11 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3314 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3315 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3316 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 377 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3317 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3318 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3319 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3320 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3321 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3322 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3323 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3324 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3325 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 378 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3326 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3327 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3328 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3329 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3330 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3331 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3332 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 379 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3333 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3334 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3335 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3336 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3337 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3338 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3339 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3340 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3343 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal. DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor and tighten to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3348 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3351 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3356 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3357 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3358 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3359 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3362 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3363 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3364 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3365 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3368 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3371 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3376 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3377 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3378 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3379 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3380 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3381 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3382 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3383 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3384 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3385 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3386 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3387 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3388 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3389 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3390 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3391 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3392 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3397 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3398 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3399 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3402 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3407 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3410 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3415 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3416 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3417 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3418 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3419 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3420 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3421 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3424 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3427 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3431 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3432 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3433 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3434 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3435 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3436 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3437 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3438 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3439 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3440 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3441 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3442 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3443 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3444 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3445 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3446 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3447 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3448 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3449 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3452 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3455 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover. 3. Remove the tilt lever handle. 4. Remove the lower shroud (2) from steering column. 5. Place shifter in PARK position. The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 6. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key (2) to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin with a small punch (3), while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3461 7. Remove the key (2) and key cylinder (1) from the column (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3462 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder (1) into the housing (3) using care to align the end of the key cylinder with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (1) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the lower shroud. 4. Install the tilt lever handle. 5. Install the steering column opening cover. 6. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3467 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3468 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3469 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3470 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3471 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3474 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3475 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3476 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3477 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3478 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3481 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3484 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE The correct fuel pressure for this vehicle is 58 psi ± 2 psi Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3489 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3490 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3491 - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16 inch) or #6631(3/8 inch) fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 3492 Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Idle Speed: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The IAC stepper motor is mounted to the throttle body, and regulates the amount of air bypassing the control of the throttle plate. As engine loads and ambient temperatures change, engine rpm changes. A pintle on the IAC stepper motor protrudes into a passage in the throttle body, controlling air flow through the passage. The IAC is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the target engine idle speed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3498 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. At idle, engine speed can be increased by retracting the IAC motor pintle and allowing more air to pass through the port, or it can be decreased by restricting the passage with the pintle and diminishing the amount of air bypassing the throttle plate. The IAC is called a stepper motor because it is moved (rotated) in steps, or increments. Opening the IAC opens an air passage around the throttle blade which increases RPM. The PCM uses the IAC motor to control idle speed (along with timing) and to reach a desired MAP during decel (keep engine from stalling). The IAC motor has 4 wires with 4 circuits. Two of the wires are for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to the motor windings to operate the stepper motor in one direction. The other 2 wires are also for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to operate the stepper motor in the opposite direction. To make the IAC go in the opposite direction, the PCM just reverses polarity on both windings. If only 1 wire is open, the IAC can only be moved 1 step (increment) in either direction. To keep the IAC motor in position when no movement is needed, the PCM will energize both windings at the same time. This locks the IAC motor in place. In the IAC motor system, the PCM will count every step that the motor is moved. This allows the PCM to determine the motor pintle position. If the memory is cleared, the PCM no longer knows the position of the pintle. So at the first key ON, the PCM drives the IAC motor closed, regardless of where it was before. This zeros the counter. From this point the PCM will back out the IAC motor and keep track of its position again. When engine rpm is above idle speed, the IAC is used for the following: - Off-idle dashpot (throttle blade will close quickly but idle speed will not stop quickly) - Deceleration air flow control - A/C compressor load control (also opens the passage slightly before the compressor is engaged so that the engine rpm does not dip down when the compressor engages) - Power steering load control The PCM can control polarity of the circuit to control direction of the stepper motor. IAC Stepper Motor Program: The PCM is also equipped with a memory program that records the number of steps the IAC stepper motor most recently advanced to during a certain set of parameters. For example: The PCM was attempting to maintain a 1000 rpm target during a cold start-up cycle. The last recorded number of steps for that may have been 125. That value would be recorded in the memory cell so that the next time the PCM recognizes the identical conditions, the PCM recalls that 125 steps were required to maintain the target. This program allows for greater customer satisfaction due to greater control of engine idle. Another function of the memory program, which occurs when the power steering switch (if equipped), or the A/C request circuit, requires that the IAC stepper motor control engine rpm, is the recording of the last targeted steps into the memory cell. The PCM can anticipate A/C compressor loads. This is accomplished by delaying compressor operation for approximately 0.5 seconds until the PCM moves the IAC stepper motor to the recorded steps that were loaded into the memory cell. Using this program helps eliminate idle-quality changes as loads change. Finally, the PCM incorporates a "No-Load" engine speed limiter of approximately 1800 - 2000 rpm, when it recognizes that the TPS is indicating an idle signal and IAC motor cannot maintain engine idle. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the IAC motor through the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Pull the air inlet hose straight (1) upward to disengage it from the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). 2. Disengage the three retaining clamps (3) that secure the air cleaner housing cover (4) to air cleaner housing (6). 3. Lift and pull the air cleaner housing cover toward the engine to disengage the cover locating tabs (5) from the air cleaner housing and position the cover out of the way. 4. Remove the air cleaner element (1) from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3504 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean any dirt or foreign matter from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). 2. Install the air cleaner element (1) into air cleaner housing. Make sure the element is properly seated in the housing. 3. Position the air cleaner housing cover (4) to the air cleaner housing (6) and engage the cover locating tabs (5). Make sure the tabs are fully engaged. 4. Fully install the air cleaner housing cover to the air cleaner housing and engage the three retaining clamps (3). Make sure the clamps are fully engaged. 5. Engage air inlet hose (1) to the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications DESCRIPTION The 5.7L engine (345 CID) eight-cylinder engine is a 90° V-Type lightweight, deep skirt cast iron block, aluminum heads, single cam, overhead valve engine with hydraulic roller tappets. The heads incorporate splayed valves with a hemispherical style combustion chamber and dual spark plugs. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear; 1, 3, 5, 7 on the left bank and 2, 4, 6, 8 on the right bank. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3513 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications FIRING ORDER - 5.7L These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any of the available engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3520 Spark Plug: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Resistor type spark plugs are used on all engines. Sixteen spark plugs (2 per cylinder) are used with 5.7L engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Spark Plug: Procedures CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT The plugs may be cleaned using commercially available spark plug cleaning equipment. After cleaning, file center electrode flat with a small point file or jewelers file before adjusting gap. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. Adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3523 Spark Plug: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL Each individual spark plug is located under each ignition coil. Each individual ignition coil must be removed to gain access to each spark plug. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing at throttle body. 2. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. 4. Remove spark plug from cylinder head using a quality socket with a rubber or foam insert. Also check condition of ignition coil O-ring and replace as necessary. 5. Inspect spark plug condition. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The 4.7L is equipped with copper core ground electrode spark plugs. They must be replaced with the same type/number spark plug as the original. If another spark plug is substituted, pre-ignition will result. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap or a cracked porcelain insulator. 1. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. 2. Tighten spark plugs to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 3.7L & 4.7L. 3. The 5.7L is equipped with torque critical design spark plugs. Do not exceed 15 ft. lbs. torque. Tighten spark plugs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). NOTE: 5.7L does not use an O-ring 4. Before installing ignition coil(s), check condition of coil O-ring and replace as necessary. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone to coil O-ring. 5. Install ignition coil(s). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Pressure Maximum Variation Between Cylinders ........................................................................................................................................................... 25 percent Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 3527 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. Refer to ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS for the correct engine compression pressures. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3532 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3533 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3534 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3537 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3541 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 366 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3542 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3543 Fig. 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The 2-wire Intake Manifold Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is installed in the intake manifold with the sensor element extending into the air stream. The IAT sensor is a two-wire Negative Thermal Coefficient (NTC) sensor. Meaning, as intake manifold temperature increases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor decreases. As temperature decreases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor increases. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 3546 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from intake manifold at sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3549 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor O-ring. 2. Clean sensor mounting hole in intake manifold (1). 3. Position sensor (2) into intake manifold and rotate clockwise until past release tab. 4. Install electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3554 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3555 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3556 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3557 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3558 Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3559 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3560 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3563 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3564 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3565 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3566 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3567 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3568 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3569 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3570 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3571 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3572 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3573 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3574 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3575 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3576 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3577 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3578 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3579 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3580 Body Control Module: Connector Views Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3581 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3582 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3583 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3584 Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3585 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3586 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3587 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3591 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3592 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3593 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3594 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3595 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3596 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3597 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3600 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3603 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3607 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3608 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3609 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3610 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3611 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3612 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3613 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3614 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3615 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3616 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3617 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3618 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3619 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3623 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3624 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3625 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3626 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3627 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3628 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3629 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3630 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3631 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3632 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3633 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3634 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3635 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3636 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3637 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3638 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3639 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3640 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3641 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3644 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3647 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations Component ID: 67 Component : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Connector: Name : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 GROUND Z11 18BK/LG 5 GROUND Z111 18BK/WT 6 DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) D52 20WT/PK 7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) D51 20PK/RD 15 - 16 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3651 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 3652 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3655 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3656 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3657 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3658 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3659 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3660 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3661 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3662 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3663 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3664 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3665 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3666 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3667 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3668 Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3669 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3670 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3671 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3672 Data Link Connector: Connector Views Component ID: 67 Component : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Connector: Name : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 GROUND Z11 18BK/LG 5 GROUND Z111 18BK/WT 6 DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) D52 20WT/PK 7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) D51 20PK/RD 15 - 16 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3673 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3674 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Data Link Connector (DLC) (2) is a 16-way molded plastic connector insulator on a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This connector is located at the lower edge of the instrument panel, outboard of the steering column. The connector insulator is retained by integral snap features within a rectangular cutout in the lower instrument panel reinforcement, just below the park brake release handle (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3677 Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Data Link Connector (DLC) is an industry-standard 16-way connector that permits the connection of a diagnostic scan tool to the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus for interfacing with, configuring, and retrieving Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data from the electronic modules that reside on the data bus network of the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with ETC, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The ETC indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Electronic Throttle Control in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ETC indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3682 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The ETC indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ETC indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - ETC Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ETC indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM, the ETC indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about 12 seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service. The indicator will be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for three consecutive seconds, the ETC indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM. The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the PCM sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction or that the ETC system is ineffective. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the PCM will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the ETC system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ETC indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 3691 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 3696 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3701 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3702 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3703 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3704 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 3710 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 3715 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3720 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3721 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3722 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 3723 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3728 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3729 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3730 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3736 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3737 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 3738 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3739 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3740 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3741 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3742 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3743 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3744 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3745 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3746 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3747 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3748 5-6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3749 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3750 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3753 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3754 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3755 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3756 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3757 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3758 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3759 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3760 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3761 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3762 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3763 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3764 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3765 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3766 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3767 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3768 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3769 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3770 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3771 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3772 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3773 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3774 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3775 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3776 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3777 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3778 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3779 5-6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3780 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3781 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3784 - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3785 - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3786 PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Battery voltage is supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the Run or Start position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3787 Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Signal Ground SIGNAL GROUND Signal ground provides a low noise ground to the data link connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3788 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3789 - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (if equipped with an RE automatic transmission). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3792 SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3793 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen, Select "ECU View" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3794 b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New Fil". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Select "Close"after the download is complete, then select "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller" Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK" l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 10. 9. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "PCM Replaced" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 11. 10. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard" Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 11. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 12. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select ECU View. b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start". f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 13. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3795 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates" 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates." screen: a. Select "Enter part number" Enter the "Part Number"recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration" Select "Next" c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "Flash Download" then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Too" c. When the download is complete, select "Close"and "Back" 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 3796 a. Select "ECU View" b. Select More Options" c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller" Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK" g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Functio". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finis" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU Vie" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function" d. Highlight "Learn ETC" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU Vie" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove both wiper arms. 3. Remove wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 4. Remove wiper cowl support (three bolts). 5. Remove air intake tube (four nuts). 6. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (3) from PCM. 7. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4), and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3799 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (2) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (4). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (3) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 5. Install the four 38-way connectors (3) to PCM. 6. Install air intake tube (four nuts). 7. Install wiper cowl support (three bolts). 8. Install wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 9. Install both wiper arms. 10. Connect negative battery cable. 11. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3803 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3804 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : MOTOR-IAC Connector: Name : MOTOR-IAC Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 2 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3808 Fig. 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The IAC stepper motor is mounted to the throttle body, and regulates the amount of air bypassing the control of the throttle plate. As engine loads and ambient temperatures change, engine rpm changes. A pintle on the IAC stepper motor protrudes into a passage in the throttle body, controlling air flow through the passage. The IAC is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the target engine idle speed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3811 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. At idle, engine speed can be increased by retracting the IAC motor pintle and allowing more air to pass through the port, or it can be decreased by restricting the passage with the pintle and diminishing the amount of air bypassing the throttle plate. The IAC is called a stepper motor because it is moved (rotated) in steps, or increments. Opening the IAC opens an air passage around the throttle blade which increases RPM. The PCM uses the IAC motor to control idle speed (along with timing) and to reach a desired MAP during decel (keep engine from stalling). The IAC motor has 4 wires with 4 circuits. Two of the wires are for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to the motor windings to operate the stepper motor in one direction. The other 2 wires are also for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to operate the stepper motor in the opposite direction. To make the IAC go in the opposite direction, the PCM just reverses polarity on both windings. If only 1 wire is open, the IAC can only be moved 1 step (increment) in either direction. To keep the IAC motor in position when no movement is needed, the PCM will energize both windings at the same time. This locks the IAC motor in place. In the IAC motor system, the PCM will count every step that the motor is moved. This allows the PCM to determine the motor pintle position. If the memory is cleared, the PCM no longer knows the position of the pintle. So at the first key ON, the PCM drives the IAC motor closed, regardless of where it was before. This zeros the counter. From this point the PCM will back out the IAC motor and keep track of its position again. When engine rpm is above idle speed, the IAC is used for the following: - Off-idle dashpot (throttle blade will close quickly but idle speed will not stop quickly) - Deceleration air flow control - A/C compressor load control (also opens the passage slightly before the compressor is engaged so that the engine rpm does not dip down when the compressor engages) - Power steering load control The PCM can control polarity of the circuit to control direction of the stepper motor. IAC Stepper Motor Program: The PCM is also equipped with a memory program that records the number of steps the IAC stepper motor most recently advanced to during a certain set of parameters. For example: The PCM was attempting to maintain a 1000 rpm target during a cold start-up cycle. The last recorded number of steps for that may have been 125. That value would be recorded in the memory cell so that the next time the PCM recognizes the identical conditions, the PCM recalls that 125 steps were required to maintain the target. This program allows for greater customer satisfaction due to greater control of engine idle. Another function of the memory program, which occurs when the power steering switch (if equipped), or the A/C request circuit, requires that the IAC stepper motor control engine rpm, is the recording of the last targeted steps into the memory cell. The PCM can anticipate A/C compressor loads. This is accomplished by delaying compressor operation for approximately 0.5 seconds until the PCM moves the IAC stepper motor to the recorded steps that were loaded into the memory cell. Using this program helps eliminate idle-quality changes as loads change. Finally, the PCM incorporates a "No-Load" engine speed limiter of approximately 1800 - 2000 rpm, when it recognizes that the TPS is indicating an idle signal and IAC motor cannot maintain engine idle. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the IAC motor through the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The IAC motor is not serviceable on the 5.7L V-8 engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3814 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The IAC motor is not serviceable on the 5.7L V-8 engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3819 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3820 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3821 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3822 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3823 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3824 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3825 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3826 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3827 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3828 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3829 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3830 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3831 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3832 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3833 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3834 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3835 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3836 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-18-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3837 8w-18-03 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3838 8w-18-04 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3839 8w-18-05 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3840 8w-18-06 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3841 8w-18-07 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3846 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3847 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3848 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3849 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3850 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3853 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3854 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3855 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3856 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3857 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3860 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3863 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3867 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3870 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3873 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3878 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED. If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3883 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3884 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3885 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3886 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3887 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3890 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3891 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3892 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3893 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 3894 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3897 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (1) is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Disconnect electrical connector at sensor by sliding release lock out (1). Press down on lock tab (2) for removal. 2. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 3. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3900 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor O-ring seal for cuts or tears. 3. Position sensor into manifold. 4. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn clockwise for installation. 5. Connect electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3904 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3905 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3906 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3911 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3912 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3913 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 376 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3916 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3917 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3918 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3919 Component Location - 11 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3920 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3921 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3922 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 377 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3923 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3924 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3925 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3926 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3927 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3928 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3929 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3930 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3931 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 378 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3932 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3933 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3934 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3935 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3936 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3937 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3938 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 379 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3939 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3940 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3941 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3942 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3943 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3944 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3945 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3946 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3949 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal. DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor and tighten to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3955 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3956 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3957 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3958 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3959 Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3960 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 3961 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3964 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3965 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3966 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3967 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3968 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3969 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3970 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3971 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3972 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3973 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3974 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3975 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3976 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3977 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3978 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3979 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3980 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3981 Body Control Module: Connector Views Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3982 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3983 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3984 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3985 Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3986 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3987 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3988 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 3997 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 4002 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4007 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4008 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4009 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4010 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 4016 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 4021 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4026 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4027 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4028 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 4029 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 4034 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 4035 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 4036 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure NUMBER: 08-030-06 REV. A GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 25, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETINS 08-030-06, DATED JULY 12, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES REVISED CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER INITIALIZATION PROCEDURES. SUBJECT: Powertrain Control Module Initialization MODELS: 2001-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2001 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 1999 - 2000 (JA) Breeze/Cirrus/Stratus 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 1998 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2007 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1999 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/Intrepid/LHS 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2005-2007 (ND) Dakota 2000 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX2.0 2007 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser Convertible 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 4042 1998 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2004 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 -2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 1999 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2006 (ZB) Viper 2004 - 2006 (ZH) Crossfire Coupe/Crossfire Roadster NOTE: The model years and vehicles above must be equipped (optional) with Sentry Key Theft Deterrent System (sales code GXX) for this bulletin to apply. DISCUSSION: ALL LISTED VEHICLES EXCEPT SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST), CROSSFIRE, AND SPRINTER. When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is replaced on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key(TM) Theft Deterrent System, it must be initialized to properly function with the anti-theft module. This is accomplished at a Chrysler Group Dealer by using the DRBIII(R) or StarSCAN(TM) Scan Tool to enter a PIN number. When the PIN number is not available from the vehicle owner or a Chrysler Group Scan Tool(s) is not available this can be accomplished by writing the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) into the PCM using an after-market scan tool with a "VIN Write Function". More information is available from the scan tool manufacturer or the Equipment & Tool Institute. NOTE: After performing this procedure with an after-market scan tool on vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group's Next Generation Controller (NGC), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) "P0633 - SKIM SECRET KEY DATA NOT STORED IN PCM" will be set. This DTC will not effect vehicle or system performance and cannot be erased. SEBRING COUPE/STRATUS COUPE (ST) Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), J1962 MMC Cable (Special Tool CH7010), and the BLUE 5T22 PCMCIA Diagnostic Card (Special Tool CH8425). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. CROSSFIRE AND SPRINTER. Initializing the PCM on these vehicles requires the use of a DaimlerChrysler scan tool (DRBIII(R)), Multiplexer cable box (Special Tool CH 9043), and the ORANGE Crossfire PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9044) or the GREEN Sprinter PCMCIA card (Special Tool CH9087). This equipment is available for lease from DaimlerChrysler for short periods of time. A credit card deposit will be required. The DRBIII(R) will be shipped within 24 hours to your location by an overnight delivery service. When the DRBIII(R) is returned, your credit card will be charged the lease price. 2007 GRAND CHEROKEE W/ 3.0L TD/2005 - 2007 LIBERTY w/2.8L TD/2007 RAM TRUCK/RAM CAB CHASSIS w 6.7L TD AND 2004-2006 SPRINTER w 2.7L TD ENGINES. For the above models equipped with Turbo Diesel Engines, the fuel injector "Quantity Values" must be physically read from each injector and the values written to the ECU with an appropriate scan tool. **PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE CROSSFIRE/SPRINTER**: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 4043 Depending on the situation, there are two methods for initializing the PCM/ECM. Either Automatic Replacement or Service Replacement must be performed. Automatic Replacement uploads the data from the old controller and downloads data to the new controller when the part numbers are identical between the replacement and replaced controller. Service Replacement is used when part numbers are not identical or when the part number is not recognized by the DRBIII(R). Automatic Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" NOTE: For Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 7. "1. Module Auto Replacement" 8. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. Module Service Replacement 1. **Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 2. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 3. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 4. "1. System Select" 5. "1. Engine" 6. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 7. "7. Read PCM Coding for Crossfire" OR "6 Read ECM Coding for Sprinter" and record all data. NOTE: Record all information shown on the PCM/ECM screen for future use. Additionally, for Sprinter only, injector classification must be recorded. Under Miscellaneous Functions, select "5. Injector Classification" then "2. Injector Modification" on the DRBIII(R) and record the information for all 5 cylinders. 8. Install new controller using the procedures found in TechCONNECT. 9. Using the DRBIII(R), repeat above steps 1 through 6 and select "2. Module Service Replacement". 10. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until "Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. 11. Was the message "Module Replacement Successful" received? a. Yes >> No Further Action is Required, Module has been successfully replaced. b. No >> proceed to the next Step # 12. 12. Open TechAUTHORITY. TechAUTHORITY is available on the internet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 08-030-06A > Aug > 06 > Engine Control - PCM Initialization Procedure > Page 4044 13. At the "Home" page, open the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. 14. Open the "Coding String Calculator for Sprinter & Crossfire Vehicles" link. 15. Open the "Select Module" pull down menu and select "PCM". 16. Select the appropriate "Transmission Type" button (Manual or Automatic). 17. Carefully enter the 17 character VIN. 18. Carefully enter the PCM pin located on the new PCM. 19. Select the "Calculate" button at the bottom of the window. NOTE: TechAUTHORITY will automatically populate the "Coding String", "SCN", and "CheckSum" information. 20. Print the information from the technician's PC or accurately record the information. 21. Using the DRBIII(R) select: "1. DRBIII(R) Standalone" 22. "1.1998 - 2007 Diagnostics" 23. Make the appropriate selection: "5. 2004 - 2006 Crossfire" or "6. 2002 - 2006 Sprinter" 24. "1. System Select" 25. "1. Engine" 26. "9. Miscellaneous Functions" 27. "2. Module Service Replacement" 28. Follow the on screen instructions and carefully enter the "Coding String", "SCN" "CheckSum" and VIN information into the DRBIII(R)** NOTE: If one or more errors were made entering the data in step 28, the DRBIII(R) will display an error and ask that the data be checked and re-input as necessary. 29. Follow the DRBIII(R) "On Screen" prompts until 'Module Replacement Successful" message is displayed. PCM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE SEBRING COUPE/STRAUS COUPE (ST): 1. Perform the "Registration Procedure" described in service bulletin 08-036-04. This service bulletin, including the password, is available on the internet under the "Powertrain Control Module Initialization" link. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4045 Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4046 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4047 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4048 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4049 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4050 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4051 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4052 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4053 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4054 5-- 6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4055 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4056 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4059 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4060 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4061 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4062 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4063 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4064 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4065 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4066 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4067 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4068 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4069 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4070 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4071 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4072 Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4073 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4074 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4075 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4076 Engine Control Module: Connector Views Component ID: 182 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2-3 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 6-7-- 8-9 GROUND Z913 16BK 10 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 11 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 12 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 GROUND Z937 16BK 19 - 20 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 GEN SENSE A803 18GY 25 - 26 - 27 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 28 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 20BR/LB 29 FUSED B(+) A919 16OR/GY 30 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 31 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG 32 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 33 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR 34 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 35 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4077 36 - 37 - 38 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 4 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4078 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 3 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 4 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 5 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4079 6 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 7 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 8 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD 9 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 10 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 11 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 12 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 13 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 14 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 15 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 16 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 20 BR/DG 17 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 18 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 19 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 20 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 21 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 22 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 23 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 24 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG 25 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 26 - 27 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 28 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 28 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 29 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 30 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 31 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB 32 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 33 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD 34 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 35 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 36 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 37 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD 38 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 38 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4080 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4081 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 4-5 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4082 5 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 20BR/OR 6 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 20BR/WT 7 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 8-9 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 10 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 11 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 12 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 13 - 14 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 15 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 16 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 17 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 20 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT 21 TRS (T41) SENSE (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 22 - 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 24 - 25 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 26 - 27 - 28 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 29 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL G24 20VT/BR 34 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 35 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT 36 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 37 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 38 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4083 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4084 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3-4 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4085 5-- 6 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 6 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 7-8 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 9-10 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 11 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 12 GROUND Z908 16BK 13 GROUND Z977 16BK 14 GROUND Z904 16BK 15 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 16 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 17 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL T6 20LB/LG 18 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20LG/VT 19 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 20 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 21 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 22 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 TRS T2 SENSE T4 20BR/PK 27 - 28 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T16 18BR/DB 29 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 30 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 30 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 31 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 32 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 33 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 34 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT 35 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 36 - 37 TRS T42 SENSE T42 20DG/YL 38 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4086 Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4087 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. Modes Of Operation MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4090 - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4091 - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4092 PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Two different Powertrain Control Module (PCM) five volt supply circuits are used; primary and secondary. Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE This circuit ties the ignition switch to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Battery voltage is supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the Run or Start position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Power Grounds POWER GROUNDS The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has 2 main grounds. Both of these grounds are referred to as power grounds. All of the high-current, noisy, electrical devices are connected to these grounds as well as all of the sensor returns. The sensor return comes into the sensor return circuit, passes through noise suppression, and is then connected to the power ground. The power ground is used to control ground circuits for the following PCM loads: - Generator field winding - Fuel injectors - Ignition coil(s) - Certain relays/solenoids - Certain sensors Sensor Return SENSOR RETURN The Sensor Return circuits are internal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4093 Sensor Return provides a low-noise ground reference for all engine control system sensors. Signal Ground SIGNAL GROUND Signal ground provides a low noise ground to the data link connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4094 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Operation Powertrain Control Module (PCM) POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4095 - A/C clutch relay - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid 5 Volt Supplies 5 VOLT SUPPLIES Primary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor. - supplies a reference voltage for the Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) sensor. Secondary 5-volt supply: - supplies the required 5 volt power source to the oil pressure sensor. - supplies the required 5 volt power source for the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) (if equipped). - supplies the 5 volt power source to the transmission pressure sensor (if equipped with an RE automatic transmission). Ignition Circuit Sense IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE The ignition circuit sense input tells the PCM the ignition switch has energized the ignition circuit. Battery voltage is also supplied to the PCM through the ignition switch when the ignition is in the RUN or START position. This is referred to as the "ignition sense" circuit and is used to "wake up" the PCM. Voltage on the ignition input can be as low as 6 volts and the PCM will still function. Voltage is supplied to this circuit to power the PCM's 8-volt regulator and to allow the PCM to perform fuel, ignition and emissions control functions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4098 SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4099 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING MODULE REPROGRAMING Replacement PCM's will require programming utilizing the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. The PCM will not operate the engine until it is programmed. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set "not programmed". CAUTION: Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The module can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT OR EQUIVALENT REQUIRED: **REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) or equivalent for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 6. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 7. Program the PCM as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen, Select "ECU View" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4100 b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New Fil". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 5. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Select "Close"after the download is complete, then select "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller" Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK" l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 8. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 9. b. No >> go to STEP 10. 9. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). a. Highlight the WCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "PCM Replaced" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. When complete proceed to STEP 11. 10. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard" Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish"after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 11. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 13. b. No >> go to STEP 12. 12. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select ECU View. b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select Misc. Function. d. Highlight "Learn ETC". e. Select "Start". f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select Next after each step. Select Finish after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the Home screen select System View. Then select All DTCs. Press Clear All Stored DTCs if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 13. Type the necessary information on the Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4101 REPAIR PROCEDURE USING SOFTWARE UPDATE CD TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. NOTE: For detailed information on the operation of the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent, refer to the Quick Reference documentation provided in the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent documentation kit. 1. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger timer to maintain the charging voltage for the duration of the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) or equivalent vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent and the vehicle. 3. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Option" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PC" screen for later reference. 5. Replace the PCM with the appropriate Generic PCM. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 8-Electrical, Electronic Control Module, Powertrain Control Module, Removal. 6. Insert the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD into the TechCONNECT or equivalent PC. The StarSCAN(R) or equivalent Software Update CD will start automatically. Select "Download Flash Updates" 7. At the "Select a method for looking up controller flash updates." screen: a. Select "Enter part number" Enter the "Part Number"recorded in STEP 4 when prompted to do so. b. Using the mouse highlight the appropriate "Calibration" Select "Next" c. Follow the on screen instructions. d. When completed, proceed to STEP 8. 8. With the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent powered OFF, connect the USB Key and Gender Changer to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent USB port. 9. Connect the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent to the vehicle (if not already connected). 10. Power ON the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. 11. Download the flash file from the USB key to the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "Flash Download" then select "Retrieve files from the USB storage device" b. Highlight the appropriate calibration. Select "Download to Scan Too" c. When the download is complete, select "Close"and "Back" 12. Reprogram the ECU. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 4102 a. Select "ECU View" b. Select More Options" c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Highlight the appropriate calibration. e. Select "Update Controller" Follow the on screen instructions. f. When the update is complete, select "OK" g. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM"screen has updated to the new part number. 13. Is "WCM - Wireless Control Module"displayed in the "ECU Overview"screen list of modules? a. Yes >> go to STEP 14. b. No >> go to STEP 15. 14. Program the PCM to the Wireless Control Module (WCM). Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home"screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the WCM. c. Select "Misc. Functio". d. Highlight "PCM Replaced" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Next" after each step. Select "Finis" after completing the last step. g. When complete proceed to STEP 16. 15. Program the VIN into the PCM. a. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. b. Select "Misc. Function" c. Highlight "Check PCM VIN" d. Select "Start" e. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. When the window appears with 17 boxes, select "Show Keyboard". Place the cursor to the right of the last box and then backspace to delete the boxes from the window. Enter the VIN. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. f. Unplug the scan tool from the Data Link Connector. g. At the "Vehicle Disconnected"screen, press "OK" h. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector and verify that the VIN is visible at the top of the "Home"screen. 16. Is the vehicle equipped with a 3.7L or 4.7L engine? a. Yes >> go to STEP 18. b. No >> go to STEP 17. 17. Using the StarSCAN(R) or equivalent at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU Vie" b. Scroll through the list of controllers and highlight the PCM. c. Select "Misc. Function" d. Highlight "Learn ETC" e. Select "Start" f. Follow the on screen instructions. Select "Nex" after each step. Select "Finish" after completing the last step. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "ECU Vie" from the Home screen, record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law. 18. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. ** Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (2) is attached to the right-front inner fender (1) located in the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove both wiper arms. 3. Remove wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 4. Remove wiper cowl support (three bolts). 5. Remove air intake tube (four nuts). 6. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (3) from PCM. 7. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (4), and remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4105 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using the scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use the scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (2) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (4). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (3) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. 5. Install the four 38-way connectors (3) to PCM. 6. Install air intake tube (four nuts). 7. Install wiper cowl support (three bolts). 8. Install wiper cowl (two screws, four pins). 9. Install both wiper arms. 10. Connect negative battery cable. 11. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4109 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 4112 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4115 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4120 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4121 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4122 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4125 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4129 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4130 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4131 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4132 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4133 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4134 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4135 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4138 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4141 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4145 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4146 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4147 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4148 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4149 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4150 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4151 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 359 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4152 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4153 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4154 Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ECT SIGNAL K2 20LB/RD 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4155 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4156 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4157 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4161 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4162 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4163 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4164 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4165 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4166 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4167 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4168 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4169 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4170 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4171 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4172 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4173 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4174 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4175 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4176 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4177 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4178 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4179 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4182 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4185 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4189 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4190 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4194 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 366 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 IAT SIGNAL K21 20BR/WT 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4195 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4196 Fig. 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The 2-wire Intake Manifold Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is installed in the intake manifold with the sensor element extending into the air stream. The IAT sensor is a two-wire Negative Thermal Coefficient (NTC) sensor. Meaning, as intake manifold temperature increases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor decreases. As temperature decreases, resistance (voltage) in the sensor increases. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Intake Air Temperature Sensor - Description > Page 4199 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature Sensor Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor is installed into the front of the intake manifold air box plenum (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from intake manifold at sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4202 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor O-ring. 2. Clean sensor mounting hole in intake manifold (1). 3. Position sensor (2) into intake manifold and rotate clockwise until past release tab. 4. Install electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4207 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4208 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4209 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4210 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4211 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4214 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4215 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4216 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4217 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 4218 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4221 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4224 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 4229 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 4230 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 4231 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 4232 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 4233 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-MAP Component ID: 373 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 MAP SIGNAL K1 20VT/BR 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 4236 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 4237 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 4238 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 4239 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Vacuum Pressure Component ID: 395 Component : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-VACUUM PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 2 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 3 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-MAP > Page 4240 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4243 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (1) is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Disconnect electrical connector at sensor by sliding release lock out (1). Press down on lock tab (2) for removal. 2. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn counterclockwise for removal. 3. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4246 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor is mounted to the front of the intake manifold air plenum box. 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor O-ring seal for cuts or tears. 3. Position sensor into manifold. 4. Rotate sensor 1/4 turn clockwise for installation. 5. Connect electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sensor: Locations Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4250 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4251 Oil Pressure Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 374 Component : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-OIL PRESSURE Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4252 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4257 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4258 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4259 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Federal Emission Packages : Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). The upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). The right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 376 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4262 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4263 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4264 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL K99 20LB/WT 2 GROUND Z43 20BK/LB 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 1/1 SIGNAL K41 20DB/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4265 Component Location - 11 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4266 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4267 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4268 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 377 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4269 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4270 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4271 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4272 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL K299 20DG/RD 2 GROUND Z42 20BK/LG 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 1/2 SIGNAL K141 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4273 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4274 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4275 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4276 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4277 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 378 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4278 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4279 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4280 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL K199 20GY/LB 2 GROUND Z934 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) K902 20BR/DG 4 O2 2/1 SIGNAL K43 20LB/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4281 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4282 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4283 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4284 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 379 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4285 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4286 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4287 Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL K399 20TN/WT 2 GROUND Z992 20BK 3 O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) K904 20DB/DG 4 O2 2/2 SIGNAL K243 20BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4288 Component Location - 14 Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4289 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 4290 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4291 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4292 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4295 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal. DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor and tighten to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4300 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4303 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4308 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4309 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4310 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4311 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4314 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4315 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4316 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4317 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4320 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4323 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4328 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4329 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4330 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4331 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4332 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4333 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4334 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4335 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4336 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4337 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4338 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4339 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4340 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4341 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4342 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4343 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4344 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4349 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4352 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4357 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4358 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4359 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4360 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4363 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4364 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4365 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4366 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4369 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4372 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 Component ID: 404 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 1 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 1 K451 18BR/WT 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 > Page 4377 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 4 Component ID: 405 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 4 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 4 K452 18BR/LB 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 > Page 4378 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 6 Component ID: 406 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 6 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 6 K453 18BR/DG 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Diagrams > Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 1 > Page 4379 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Diagrams Solenoid-Multi Displacement System Cyl 7 Component ID: 407 Component : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 7 Connector: Name : SOLENOID-MULTI DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM CYL 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (5.7L MDS) Pin Description Circuit 1 MDS SOL CONTROL NO. 7 K454 18BR/OR 2 GROUND Z903 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Multi Displacement System selectively deactivates cylinders 1, 4, 6 and 7 to improve fuel economy. It has two modes of operation: - 8 cylinders for acceleration and heavy loads. - 4 cylinders for cruising and city traffic. The main components of the Multi Displacement System are: - Unique MDS camshaft. - Deactivating roller tappets. - 4 control valves/solenoids. - control valve/solenoid wiring harness. - oil temp sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4382 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Cylinder Deactivation - Trap an exhaust charge from a normal combustion event - Normal combustion event - Don't open the exhaust valve - Don't open the intake valve - Piston is an air spring - Cylinders deactivated in firing sequence Cylinder Reactivation - Open the exhaust valve - Empty the cylinder - Open the intake valve - Normal combustion event - Cylinders reactivated in firing sequence Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4383 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING The Multi Displacement System has the following detectible issues: - Solenoid circuit - Fail to deactivate a cylinder(s) - Fail to reactivate a cylinder(s) - Low oil pressure DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid-MDS Removal MULTIPLE DISPLACEMENT SOLENOID Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the intake manifold. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair 3. Remove foam insulator pad (1). 4. Remove wiring harness connectors (1) from the MDS solenoid(s) (2) that require removal. 5. Remove hold down bolt (3) from MDS solenoid(s) (2). Caution: Do not try to pry the solenoid out. This could lead to breakage and contamination of the lubrication system. 6. Lightly tap on solenoid with a rubber mallet. Wiggle solenoid from side to side. 7. Remove MDS solenoid(s). Installation Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS > Page 4386 1. Verify that MDS bores are free of debris, before solenoid installation. 2. Install MDS solenoid(s) (3) fully into block. 3. Install hold down bolt (2) and tighten to 11 Nm (97 in.lbs). 4. Reconnect the MDS wiring harness to the solenoid(s). 5. Install foam insulator pad (1) if removed. 6. Install the intake manifold. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS > Page 4387 Valve Deactivation Solenoid: Service and Repair MDS Solenoid Removal MULTIPLE DISPLACEMENT SOLENOID Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the intake manifold. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair 3. Remove foam insulator pad (1). 4. Remove wiring harness connectors (1) from the MDS solenoid(s) (2) that require removal. 5. Remove hold down bolt (3) from MDS solenoid(s) (2). Caution: Do not try to pry the solenoid out. This could lead to breakage and contamination of the lubrication system. 6. Lightly tap on solenoid with a rubber mallet. Wiggle solenoid from side to side. 7. Remove MDS solenoid(s). Installation Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Valve Deactivation Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid-MDS > Page 4388 1. Verify that MDS bores are free of debris, before solenoid installation. 2. Install MDS solenoid(s) (3) fully into block. 3. Install hold down bolt (2) and tighten to 11 Nm (97 in.lbs). 4. Reconnect the MDS wiring harness to the solenoid(s). 5. Install foam insulator pad (1) if removed. 6. Install the intake manifold. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4393 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4394 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4395 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4396 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4397 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4398 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4399 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4400 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4401 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4402 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4403 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4404 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4405 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4406 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4407 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4408 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4409 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles incorporate toeboard catalytic converters into the exhaust system. These catalytic converters are made of stainless steel designed to operate at extremely high temperatures. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4415 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The catalytic converter captures and burns any unburned fuel mixture exiting the combustion chambers during the exhaust stroke of the engine. This process aids in reducing emissions output. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Engine 5.7L ENGINE CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate all exhaust bolts and nuts with Mopar(R) Rust Penetrant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Remove the clamp (3) holding the LH catalytic converter (4) to the RH catalytic converter (2). 4. If present, grind any tack welds. 5. Remove the catalytic converter-to-manifold bolts (1). 6. Remove the LH catalytic converter (4) from the RH catalytic converter (2). 7. Remove the clamp holding the RH catalytic converter (2) to the exhaust pipe(s). 8. If present, grind tack weld. 9. Remove the RH catalytic converter (2) from the extension pipe. 10. You may have to loosen up other sections of the exhaust system. Inspection INSPECTION Look at the stainless steel body of the converter, inspect for bulging or other distortion that could be a result of overheating. If the converter has a heat shield attached make sure it is not bent or loose. If you suspect internal damage to the catalyst, tapping the bottom of the catalyst with a rubber mallet may indicate a damaged core. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4418 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L ENGINE NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, the must be replaced. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove any burrs from the RH (2) and LH (4) catalytic converter. 3. Position new RH catalytic converter-to-exhaust pipe clamp on exhaust pipe. Insert the RH (2) catalytic converter into the exhaust pipe. Do not tighten clamp at this time. 4. Make sure the alignment tang is seated in the alignment slot. 5. Position new RH catalytic converter-to-LH catalytic converter clamp on RH catalytic converter. Insert the LH catalytic converter (4) into the RH catalytic converter (2). Do not tighten clamp at this time. 6. Make sure the alignment tang is seated in the alignment slot. 7. Install the LH and RH catalytic converters (2 and 4) to the exhaust manifold. Install bolts. Do not tighten at this time. 8. Connect the oxygen sensor electrical connectors. 9. Make sure the catalytic converter assembly (2 and 4) are correctly positioned and the properly aligned. The minimum clearance between components is 25 mm (1 inch). Ensure that the exhaust crossover has at least 15 mm (.59 in.) clearance at transmission crossmember. Ensure that muffler isolators are not stretched. Measurement between insulator rods is approximately 42 mm (1.65 in.). Make the necessary adjustments, if necessary. 10. Tighten manifold flange bolts to 34 Nm (24 lbs. ft.). Tighten the new exhaust clamps to 61 Nm (45 lbs. ft). 11. If other sections of the exhaust system where loosened in removal, refer to that information for the tightening procedures. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Start the engine, inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations The duty cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid (1) is located in the engine compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4423 Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 403 Component : SOLENOID-EVAP/PURGE Connector: Name : SOLENOID-EVAP/PURGE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL K70 20DB/BR 2 EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL K52 20DB/WT Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4424 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The duty cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid (1) is located in the engine compartment. It is attached to a tongue-type bracket near the brake power booster (3). 1. Carefully pull the solenoid assembly straight forward from the tongue-type bracket without bending the two vapor lines. 2. Disconnect electrical wiring connector (2) at solenoid. 3. Disconnect vapor line quick-connect fitting (4) at solenoid. 4. Disconnect vapor line quick-connect fitting (5) at solenoid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4427 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The duty cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid (1) is located in the engine compartment. It is attached to a tongue-type bracket near the brake power booster (3). 1. Connect vapor line quick-connect fitting (5) to solenoid. 2. Connect vapor line quick-connect fitting (4) to solenoid. 3. Connect electrical wiring connector (2) to solenoid. 4. Carefully push the solenoid assembly straight rearward onto the tongue-type bracket without bending the two vapor lines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4436 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4437 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4443 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Canister Filter: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4444 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Check Valve: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4453 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4454 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4460 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4461 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4470 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4471 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Emission Control Canister: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4477 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4478 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4479 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Locations The EVAP canister (1) is located at the front of the fuel tank. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4480 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Description and Operation OPERATION The EVAP canister is filled with granules of an activated carbon mixture. Fuel vapors entering the EVAP canister is absorbed by the charcoal granules. Fuel tank pressure vents into the EVAP canister. Fuel vapors are temporarily held in the canister until they can be drawn into the intake manifold. The duty cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid allows the EVAP canister to be purged at predetermined times and at certain engine operating conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The EVAP canister (1) is located at the front of the fuel tank. The ESIM (Evaporative System Integrity Monitor) switch (2) is attached to the EVAP canister. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. If equipped, remove fuel tank skid plate. 3. Remove electrical connector (3) at ESIM switch. 4. Disconnect rubber hose (2) from ESIM switch. 5. Disconnect quick-connect fitting (5) at EVAP canister. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4483 6. Three lock tabs are used to mount the canister (2) to its bracket. Press on lock tab (1) to unlock canister from mounting bracket. An upper, symmetrical lock tab is located on top of canister above (1). 7. Slip canister from outer (third) mounting tab. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4484 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Snap canister into lock tabs (1). 2. Connect quick-connect fitting (5) to EVAP canister. 3. Connect rubber hose (2) to ESIM switch. 4. Connect electrical connector (3) to ESIM switch. 5. If equipped, install fuel tank skid plate. 6. Lower vehicle. 7. All vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Also check the vapor/vacuum lines at the EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Emissions Hose: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4493 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4494 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Emissions Hose: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4499 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4500 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Emissions Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4506 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4507 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set Evaporative Emissions Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set NUMBER: 25-003-07 GROUP: Emissions DATE: November 14, 2007 SUBJECT: DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak Due To Loose Charcoal From Canister OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves performing the diagnostic procedure for DTC P0456, and if necessary, the replacement of evaporative system components. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicle built on or between January 26, 2007 and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0126XX to MDH 0618XX respectively). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination. Additional investigation may reveal that the MIL is due to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0456 Evaporative System Small Leak. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Was vehicle built (check vehicle build date) on or between January 26, 2007 (MDH 0126XX) and June 18, 2007 (MDH 0618XX)? a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. 2. Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT> Service Info tab > 9 - Engine - Electrical Diagnosis > Diagnosis and Testing, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. 3. Perform the complete Diagnostic Procedures for DTC P0456 - Evaporative System Small Leak. NOTE: Make sure that the flow and smoke tests are performed completely. 4. Was an evaporative system leak detected when a complete DIG P0456 Diagnostic Procedure was performed. a. If YES >>> then proceed to the next step. b. If NO >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 5. Was the root cause of the leak in the evaporative system a leaking Evaporative System Integrity Module (ESIM)? a. If YES >>> then perform the Repair Procedure. b. If NO >>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis and/or repair is required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4512 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 25-003-07 > Nov > 07 > Emissions - MIL ON/DTC P0456 Set > Page 4513 1. Replace the following emission system components: a. Fuel Vapor Canister (with ESIM). b. Fresh Air Fuel Vapor Filter. c. Fresh Air Filter to Fuel Vapor Canister Hose. 2. Refer to TechCONNECT for detailed service procedures. From the "Service Info tab select: 25 Emissions > Evaporative Emissions > Switch - Evap System Monitor and Canister - Vapor POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4514 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION A vacuum schematic for emission related items can be found on the vehicles VECI label. Refer to Body and Frame/Information Labels for label location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations Leak Detector: Locations Component ID: 421 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z910 20BK 2 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT Component Location - 53 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4518 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4519 Leak Detector: Diagrams Component ID: 421 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z910 20BK 2 ESM SIGNAL K107 20VT/WT Component Location - 53 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 4520 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation Leak Detection Pump: Description and Operation OPERATION SYSTEM The ESIM (Evaporative System Integrity Monitor) is very similar to the NVLD. However, the design of the ESIM has been simplified and unlike the NVLD the ESIM does not require a solenoid. The ESIM mounts directly to the canister, eliminating the need for a mounting bracket. It is critical that the ESIM is mounted vertically. On vehicles where the canister is mounted on an angle, the ESIM requires an adaptor to maintain a vertical position. When the ESIM is installed vertically, the electrical connector is in the 3 o'clock position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4524 EXPLODED VIEW The ESIM assembly consists of a housing, a small weight and a large weight that serve as check valves, a diaphragm, a switch and a cover. There is one large weight and one small weight check valve in the ESIM assembly. A seal is attached at the end of each weighted check valve. The large weight check valve seals for pressure. The small weight check valve seals for vacuum. The weighted check valves are contained within the ESIM housing. CUT AWAY OF MODULE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4525 The ESIM (Evaporative System Integrity Monitor), while physically different than the NVLD system, performs the same basic function as the NVLD does - controlling evaporative emissions. The ESIM has been simplified because the solenoid used on the NVLD is not used on the ESIM. The ESIM consists of housing, two check valves (sometimes referred to as weights), a diaphragm, a switch and a cover. The larger check valve seals for pressure and the smaller one seals for vacuum. During refueling, pressure is built up in the evaporative system. When pressure reaches approximately 0.5 inches of water, the large check valve unseats and pressure vents to the fresh air filter. Conversely, when the system cools, and the resulting vacuum lifts the small check valve from its seat and allows fresh air to enter the system and relieves the vacuum condition. When a calibrated amount of vacuum is achieved in the evaporative system, the diaphragm is pulled inward, pushing on the spring and closing the contacts. The ESIM conducts test on the evaporative system as follows: An engine off, non-intrusive test for small leaks and an engine running, intrusive test for medium/large leaks. The ESIM weights seal the evap. system during engine off conditions. If the evap. system is sealed, it will be pulled into a vacuum, either due to the cool down from operating temperature or diurnal ambient temperature cycling. When the vacuum in the system exceeds about 1 inch H20, the vacuum switch closes. The switch closure sends a signal to the GPEC1. In order to pass the non-intrusive small leak test, the ESIM switch must close within a calculated amount of time and within a specified amount of key-off events. If the ESIM switch does not close as specified, the test is considered inconclusive and the intrusive engine running test will be run during the next key-on cycle. This intrusive test will run on the next cold engine running condition. Conditions for running the intrusive test are: - After the vehicle is started, the engine coolant temperature must be within 50° F (10° C) of ambient to indicate a cold start. - The fuel level must be between 12% and 88%. - The engine must be in closed loop. - Manifold vacuum must be greater than a minimum specified value. - Ambient temperature must be between 39° F and 98° F (4° C and 37° C) and the elevation level must be below 8500 feet (2591 meters). The test is accomplished by the GPEC1 activating the purge solenoid to create a vacuum in the evaporative system. The GPEC1 then measures the amount of time it takes for the vacuum to dissipate. This is known as the vacuum decay method. If the switch opens quickly a large leak is recorded. If the switch opens after a predetermined amount of time, then the small leak matures. If the switch does not close, then a general evaporative failure is recorded. The purge monitor tests the integrity of the hose attached between the purge valve and throttle body/intake. The purge monitor is a two stage test and it runs only after the evaporative system passes the small leak test. Even when all of the thresholds are met, a small leak won't be recorded until after the medium/large leak monitor has been run. This is accomplished by the GPEC1 activating the purge solenoid to create a vacuum in the evaporative system. The GPEC1 then measures the amount of time it takes for the vacuum to dissipate. This is known as the vacuum decay method. If the switch opens quickly a large leak is recorded. If the switch opens after a predetermined amount of time, then the small leak matures. If the medium/large leak test runs and the ESIM switch doesn't close, a general evaporative test is run. The purge solenoid is activated for approximately 10 seconds, increasing the amount of vacuum in the system. If the ESIM switch closes after the extended purge activation, a large leak fault is generated. If the switch doesn't close, a general evaporative system fault is generated. The purge monitor tests the integrity of the hose attached between the purge valve and throttle body/intake. The purge monitor is a two stage test and it runs only after the evaporative system passes the small leak test. Stage one of the purge monitor is non-intrusive. GPEC1 monitors the purge vapor ratio. If the ratio is above a calibrated specification, the monitor passes. Stage two is an intrusive test and it runs only if stage one fails. During the stage two test, the GPEC1 commands the purge solenoid to flow at a specified rate to force the purge vapor ratio to update. The vapor ratio is compared to a calibrated specification and if it is less than specified, a one-trip failure is recorded. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4526 The ESIM switch stuck closed monitor checks to see if the switch is stuck closed. This is a power down test that runs at key-off; when the GPEC1 sees 0 rpms, the purge solenoid is energized for a maximum of 30 seconds, venting any vacuum trapped in the evaporative system. If the switch opens or was open before the test began, the monitor passes. If the switch doesn't open, the monitor fails. This is a two-trip MIL. The star scan tool can be used to force the ESIM switch stick closed monitor to run. The GPEC1 also uses the ESIM to detect a loose or missing gas cap. The GPEC1 controller looks for a change in the fuel level (25% minimum) and then gas cap is loose or missing. If a medium/large leak is detected, a loose gas cap light illuminates and a pending one-trip fault code is set. On the GPEC1, this is a three-trip fault before the code matures Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ORVR (On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery) system consists of a unique fuel tank, flow management valve, fluid control valve, one-way check valve and vapor canister. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4531 Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ORVR (On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery) system is used to remove excess fuel tank vapors. This is done while the vehicle is being refueled. Fuel flowing into the fuel filler tube (approx. 1 inch I.D.) creates an aspiration effect drawing air into the fuel fill tube. During refueling, the fuel tank is vented to the EVAP canister to capture escaping vapors. With air flowing into the filler tube, there are no fuel vapors escaping to the atmosphere. Once the refueling vapors are captured by the EVAP canister, the vehicle's computer controlled purge system draws vapor out of the canister for the engine to burn. The vapor flow is metered by the purge solenoid so that there is no, or minimal impact on driveability or tailpipe emissions. As fuel starts to flow through the fuel fill tube, it opens the normally closed check valve and enters the fuel tank. Vapor or air is expelled from the tank through the control valve and on to the vapor canister. Vapor is absorbed in the EVAP canister until vapor flow in the lines stops. This stoppage occurs following fuel shut-off, or by having the fuel level in the tank rise high enough to close the control valve. This control valve contains a float that rises to seal the large diameter vent path to the EVAP canister. At this point in the refueling process, fuel tank pressure increases, the check valve closes (preventing liquid fuel from spitting back at the operator), and fuel then rises up the fuel filler tube to shut off the dispensing nozzle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Locations EGR Control Solenoid: Locations The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (3) is attached to the front of the right cylinder head (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal EGR Control Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (3) is attached to the front of the right cylinder head (1). An exhaust gas routing tube connects the EGR valve to the intake manifold. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (1) from EGR solenoid (2). 2. Remove two bolts (3) connecting EGR tube (4) to valve assembly. 3. Remove gasket located between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4538 4. Remove two mounting bolts (2). 5. Separate valve assembly (3) from cylinder head (1). 6. Remove and discard metal gasket located between cylinder head and valve assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4539 EGR Control Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position a new metal gasket between cylinder head (1) and valve assembly (3). 2. Install two mounting bolts (2) and tighten to 20 ft.lbs. (27 Nm). 3. Clean EGR tube where it joins EGR valve. 4. Position new gasket between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 5. Install two bolts (3) connecting EGR tube (4) to valve assembly (2). Tighten bolts to 20 ft.lbs. (27 Nm). 6. Connect electrical connector (1) to EGR solenoid (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations EGR Valve: Locations The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (3) is attached to the front of the right cylinder head (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4543 EGR Valve: Diagrams Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 EGR SIGNAL K34 20LB/GY 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 GROUND Z958 20BK 5-6 EGR SOL CONTROL K35 20LB/RD Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4544 Fig. 15 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4545 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 4546 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal EGR Valve: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (3) is attached to the front of the right cylinder head (1). An exhaust gas routing tube connects the EGR valve to the intake manifold. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (1) from EGR solenoid (2). 2. Remove two bolts (3) connecting EGR tube (4) to valve assembly. 3. Remove gasket located between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4549 4. Remove two mounting bolts (2). 5. Separate valve assembly (3) from cylinder head (1). 6. Remove and discard metal gasket located between cylinder head and valve assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4550 EGR Valve: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position a new metal gasket between cylinder head (1) and valve assembly (3). 2. Install two mounting bolts (2) and tighten to 20 ft.lbs. (27 Nm). 3. Clean EGR tube where it joins EGR valve. 4. Position new gasket between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 5. Install two bolts (3) connecting EGR tube (4) to valve assembly (2). Tighten bolts to 20 ft.lbs. (27 Nm). 6. Connect electrical connector (1) to EGR solenoid (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Locations Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Locations 4.7L V-8 The PCV valve (6) is located on the oil filler tube. 5.7L V-8 The PCV valve (4) is mounted into the top of the intake manifold (1). This is located to the right / rear of the throttle body (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Valve-PCV-3.7L Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Description and Operation Valve-PCV-3.7L OPERATION A typical enclosed crankcase ventilation system is shown in the graphic. The PCV system operates by engine intake manifold vacuum. Filtered air is routed into the crankcase through the air cleaner hose. The metered air, along with crankcase vapors, are drawn through the PCV valve (4) and into a passage in the intake manifold. The PCV system manages crankcase pressure and meters blow by gases to the intake system, reducing engine sludge formation. The PCV valve contains a spring loaded plunger. This plunger meters the amount of crankcase vapors routed into the combustion chamber based on intake manifold vacuum. When the engine is not operating or during an engine pop-back, the spring forces the plunger back against the seat. This will prevent vapors from flowing through the valve. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Valve-PCV-3.7L > Page 4557 During periods of high manifold vacuum, such as idle or cruising speeds, vacuum is sufficient to completely compress spring. It will then pull the plunger to the top of the valve. In this position there is minimal vapor flow through the valve. During periods of moderate manifold vacuum, the plunger is only pulled part way back from inlet. This results in maximum vapor flow through the valve. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Valve-PCV-3.7L > Page 4558 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Description and Operation Valve-PCV-4.7L/5.7L Description DESCRIPTION 4.7L V-8 The 4.7L V-8 engine is equipped with a closed crankcase ventilation system. The Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve (6) is mounted to the oil filler housing (4). The PCV valve is sealed to the oil filler housing with an O-ring (1). Two interconnected breathers (1) threaded into the rear of each cylinder head are used with the system. The system also includes the air cleaner housing and various tubes and hoses to connect the system components. 5.7L V-8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Valve-PCV-3.7L > Page 4559 The 5.7L V-8 engine is equipped with a closed crankcase ventilation system and a Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve. A PCV valve (4) mounted into the top of the intake manifold (1), located to the right / rear of the throttle body (2) is used. The PCV valve (1) is sealed to the intake manifold with two O-rings (2). The system also consists of passages in the intake manifold, and various tubes and hoses to connect the system components. Operation OPERATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Valve-PCV-3.7L > Page 4560 A typical enclosed crankcase ventilation system is shown in the graphic. The PCV system operates by engine intake manifold vacuum. Filtered air is routed into the crankcase through the air cleaner hose. The metered air, along with crankcase vapors, are drawn through the PCV valve (4) and into a passage in the intake manifold. The PCV system manages crankcase pressure and meters blow by gases to the intake system, reducing engine sludge formation. The PCV valve contains a spring loaded plunger. This plunger meters the amount of crankcase vapors routed into the combustion chamber based on intake manifold vacuum. When the engine is not operating or during an engine pop-back, the spring forces the plunger back against the seat. This will prevent vapors from flowing through the valve. During periods of high manifold vacuum, such as idle or cruising speeds, vacuum is sufficient to completely compress spring. It will then pull the plunger to the top of the valve. In this position there is minimal vapor flow through the valve. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Valve-PCV-3.7L > Page 4561 During periods of moderate manifold vacuum, the plunger is only pulled part way back from inlet. This results in maximum vapor flow through the valve. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 The PCV valve (6) is located on the oil filler tube. Two locating tabs (2) are located on the side of the valve. These 2 tabs fit into a cam lock in the oil filler tube. An O-ring seals the valve to the filler tube. 1. Disconnect PCV line/hose by disconnecting rubber hose at PCV valve fitting. 2. Remove PCV valve at oil filler tube by rotating PCV valve downward (counter-clockwise) until locating tabs have been freed at cam lock. After tabs have cleared, pull valve straight out from filler tube. To prevent damage to PCV valve locating tabs, valve must be pointed downward for removal. Do not force valve from oil filler tube. 3. After valve is removed, check condition of valve O-ring. 5.7L V-8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4564 The PCV valve (4) is mounted into the top of the intake manifold (1). This is located to the right / rear of the throttle body (2). 1. The PCV valve is sealed to the intake manifold with 2 O-rings (2). 2. Remove PCV valve by rotating counter-clockwise 90 degrees until locating tabs (3) have been freed. After tabs have cleared, pull valve straight up from intake manifold. 3. After valve is removed, check condition of 2 valve O-rings (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4565 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 4.7L V-8 The PCV valve is located on the oil filler tube. Two locating tabs are located on the side of the valve. These 2 tabs fit into a cam lock in the oil filler tube. An O-ring seals the valve to the filler tube. 1. Return PCV valve back to oil filler tube by placing valve locating tabs into cam lock. Press PCV valve in and rotate valve upward. A slight click will be felt when tabs have engaged cam lock. Valve should be pointed towards rear of vehicle. 2. Connect PCV line/hose and rubber hose to PCV valve. 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out intake manifold opening. 2. Check condition of 2 O-rings on PCV valve. 3. Apply engine oil to 2 O-rings. 4. Place PCV valve into intake manifold and rotate 90 degrees clockwise for installation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE The correct fuel pressure for this vehicle is 58 psi ± 2 psi Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4570 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4571 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4572 - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16 inch) or #6631(3/8 inch) fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4573 Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Idle Speed: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The IAC stepper motor is mounted to the throttle body, and regulates the amount of air bypassing the control of the throttle plate. As engine loads and ambient temperatures change, engine rpm changes. A pintle on the IAC stepper motor protrudes into a passage in the throttle body, controlling air flow through the passage. The IAC is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the target engine idle speed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4582 Idle Speed: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. At idle, engine speed can be increased by retracting the IAC motor pintle and allowing more air to pass through the port, or it can be decreased by restricting the passage with the pintle and diminishing the amount of air bypassing the throttle plate. The IAC is called a stepper motor because it is moved (rotated) in steps, or increments. Opening the IAC opens an air passage around the throttle blade which increases RPM. The PCM uses the IAC motor to control idle speed (along with timing) and to reach a desired MAP during decel (keep engine from stalling). The IAC motor has 4 wires with 4 circuits. Two of the wires are for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to the motor windings to operate the stepper motor in one direction. The other 2 wires are also for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to operate the stepper motor in the opposite direction. To make the IAC go in the opposite direction, the PCM just reverses polarity on both windings. If only 1 wire is open, the IAC can only be moved 1 step (increment) in either direction. To keep the IAC motor in position when no movement is needed, the PCM will energize both windings at the same time. This locks the IAC motor in place. In the IAC motor system, the PCM will count every step that the motor is moved. This allows the PCM to determine the motor pintle position. If the memory is cleared, the PCM no longer knows the position of the pintle. So at the first key ON, the PCM drives the IAC motor closed, regardless of where it was before. This zeros the counter. From this point the PCM will back out the IAC motor and keep track of its position again. When engine rpm is above idle speed, the IAC is used for the following: - Off-idle dashpot (throttle blade will close quickly but idle speed will not stop quickly) - Deceleration air flow control - A/C compressor load control (also opens the passage slightly before the compressor is engaged so that the engine rpm does not dip down when the compressor engages) - Power steering load control The PCM can control polarity of the circuit to control direction of the stepper motor. IAC Stepper Motor Program: The PCM is also equipped with a memory program that records the number of steps the IAC stepper motor most recently advanced to during a certain set of parameters. For example: The PCM was attempting to maintain a 1000 rpm target during a cold start-up cycle. The last recorded number of steps for that may have been 125. That value would be recorded in the memory cell so that the next time the PCM recognizes the identical conditions, the PCM recalls that 125 steps were required to maintain the target. This program allows for greater customer satisfaction due to greater control of engine idle. Another function of the memory program, which occurs when the power steering switch (if equipped), or the A/C request circuit, requires that the IAC stepper motor control engine rpm, is the recording of the last targeted steps into the memory cell. The PCM can anticipate A/C compressor loads. This is accomplished by delaying compressor operation for approximately 0.5 seconds until the PCM moves the IAC stepper motor to the recorded steps that were loaded into the memory cell. Using this program helps eliminate idle-quality changes as loads change. Finally, the PCM incorporates a "No-Load" engine speed limiter of approximately 1800 - 2000 rpm, when it recognizes that the TPS is indicating an idle signal and IAC motor cannot maintain engine idle. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the IAC motor through the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Removal Without Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) WITHOUT ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (APPS) The accelerator pedal is serviced as a complete assembly including the bracket. The accelerator cable is connected to the upper part of the accelerator pedal arm by a plastic retainer (clip) (7). This plastic retainer snaps into the top of the accelerator pedal arm. 1. From inside the vehicle, hold up accelerator pedal. Remove plastic cable retainer (clip) (7) and throttle cable core wire from upper end of accelerator pedal arm (6). Plastic cable retainer (clip) snaps into pedal arm. 2. Remove two accelerator pedal mounting bracket nuts (5). Remove accelerator pedal assembly (4). With Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) WITH ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (APPS) The accelerator pedal (4) is serviced as a complete assembly including the bracket and sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4587 1. Disconnect electrical connector (1) at APPS (6). 2. Remove two accelerator pedal mounting bracket nuts (5). Remove accelerator pedal assembly (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4588 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Installation Without Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) WITHOUT ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (APPS) The accelerator cable is connected to the upper part of the accelerator pedal arm by a plastic retainer (clip) (7). This plastic retainer snaps into the top of the accelerator pedal arm. 1. Place accelerator pedal assembly (4) over two mounting studs (3). 2. Install and tighten two mounting nuts (5). Refer to Torque Specifications. 3. Slide throttle cable into opening slot (6) in top of pedal arm. 4. Push plastic cable retainer (clip) (7) into accelerator pedal arm opening until it snaps into place. 5. Before starting engine, operate accelerator pedal to check for any binding. With Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) WITH ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR (APPS) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4589 1. Place accelerator pedal assembly (4) over two mounting studs (3). 2. Install and tighten two mounting nuts (5). Refer to Torque Specifications. 3. Install electrical connector (1) to APPS (6). 4. A Scan Tool may be used to learn electrical parameters. Go to the Miscellaneous menu, and then select ETC Learn. 5. If the previous step is not performed, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. 6. If necessary, use a scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from PCM. 7. Before starting engine, operate accelerator pedal to check for any binding. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4593 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4594 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4595 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4598 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Pull the air inlet hose straight (1) upward to disengage it from the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). 2. Disengage the three retaining clamps (3) that secure the air cleaner housing cover (4) to air cleaner housing (6). 3. Lift and pull the air cleaner housing cover toward the engine to disengage the cover locating tabs (5) from the air cleaner housing and position the cover out of the way. 4. Remove the air cleaner element (1) from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4604 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean any dirt or foreign matter from the inside of the air cleaner housing (2). 2. Install the air cleaner element (1) into air cleaner housing. Make sure the element is properly seated in the housing. 3. Position the air cleaner housing cover (4) to the air cleaner housing (6) and engage the cover locating tabs (5). Make sure the tabs are fully engaged. 4. Fully install the air cleaner housing cover to the air cleaner housing and engage the three retaining clamps (3). Make sure the clamps are fully engaged. 5. Engage air inlet hose (1) to the grommet located on the top of the radiator fan shroud (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The plastic fuel tank filler tube cap is threaded onto the end of the fuel fill tube. Certain models are equipped with a 1/4 turn cap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4609 Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The loss of any fuel or vapor out of fuel filler tube is prevented by the use of a pressure-vacuum fuel fill cap. Relief valves inside the cap will release fuel tank pressure at predetermined pressures. Fuel tank vacuum will also be released at predetermined values. This cap must be replaced by a similar unit if replacement is necessary. This is in order for the system to remain effective. CAUTION: Remove fill cap before servicing any fuel system component to relieve tank pressure. If equipped with an ORVR system and an ESIM switch, the cap must be tightened securely. If cap is left loose, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4618 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4619 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4620 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4621 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4622 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4623 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4624 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4625 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 127 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4626 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4627 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4628 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4629 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 128 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4630 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4631 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4632 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4633 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4634 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4635 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4636 Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4637 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4638 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4639 Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 127 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4640 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4641 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4642 Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 128 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4643 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4644 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4645 Injector-Fuel-No. 5 Component ID: 129 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4646 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4647 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4648 Injector-Fuel-No. 6 Component ID: 130 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4649 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4650 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4651 Injector-Fuel-No. 7 Component ID: 131 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4652 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 15 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4653 Injector-Fuel-No. 8 Component ID: 132 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4654 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 16 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4655 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4658 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4659 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4660 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4661 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4662 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4663 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4664 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4665 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 127 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4666 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4667 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4668 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4669 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 128 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4670 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4671 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4672 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4673 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 K11 16BR/YL 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4674 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4675 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4676 Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4677 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 K12 16BR/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4678 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4679 Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 127 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4680 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 K13 16PK/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4681 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4682 Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 128 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4683 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 K14 16YL/LB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4684 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4685 Injector-Fuel-No. 5 Component ID: 129 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4686 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 K38 16YL/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4687 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4688 Injector-Fuel-No. 6 Component ID: 130 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4689 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 K58 16PK/DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4690 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4691 Injector-Fuel-No. 7 Component ID: 131 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4692 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 K26 16YL/TN 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 15 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4693 Injector-Fuel-No. 8 Component ID: 132 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4694 1 INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 K28 16VT/LG 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD Component Location - 16 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 4695 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An individual fuel injector (1) is used for each individual cylinder. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4698 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The top (fuel entry) end of the injector (3) is attached into an opening on the fuel rail. The fuel injectors are electrical solenoids. The injector contains a pintle that closes off an orifice at the nozzle end. When electric current is supplied to the injector, the armature and needle move a short distance against a spring, allowing fuel to flow out the orifice. Because the fuel is under high pressure, a fine spray is developed in the shape of a pencil stream. The spraying action atomizes the fuel, adding it to the air entering the combustion chamber. The nozzle (outlet) ends of the injectors (2) are positioned into openings in the intake manifold just above the intake valve ports of the cylinder head. The engine wiring harness connector for each fuel injector is equipped with an attached numerical tag (INJ 1, INJ 2 etc.). This is used to identify each fuel injector. The injectors are energized individually in a sequential order by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will adjust injector pulse width by switching the ground path to each individual injector on and off. Injector pulse width is the period of time that the injector is energized. The PCM will adjust injector pulse width based on various inputs it receives. Battery voltage is supplied to the injectors through the ASD relay. The PCM determines injector pulse width based on various inputs. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove fuel rail. 2. Disconnect clip(s) that retain fuel injector(s) to fuel rail (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4701 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel injector(s) into fuel rail assembly and install retaining clip(s). 2. If same injector(s) is being reinstalled, install new O-ring(s). 3. Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to each injector O-ring. This will aid in installation. 4. Install fuel rail. 5. Start engine and check for fuel leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Different types of quick-connect fittings are used to attach various fuel system components, lines and tubes. These are: a single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer ring type. Some are equipped with safety latch clips. Some may require the use of a tool for disconnection and removal. CAUTION: The interior components (O-rings, clips) of quick-connect fittings are not serviced separately, but new plastic spacers are available for some types. If service parts are not available, do not attempt to repair the damaged fitting or fuel line (tube). If repair is necessary, replace the complete fuel line (tube) assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4705 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS Different types of quick-connect fittings are used to attach the various fuel system components, lines and tubes. These are: a single-button type, a two-button type, a pinch type, a single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer ring type. Some are equipped with safety latch clips. Some may require the use of a special tool for disconnection and removal. DISCONNECTING WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with engine off). Before servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, fuel system pressure must be released. Refer to fuel system pressure release procedure. CAUTION: Before separating a quick-connect fitting, pay attention to what type of fitting is being used by referring to Quick-Connect Fitting Removal. This will prevent unnecessary fitting or fitting latch breakage. CAUTION: The interior components (O-rings, clips) of quick-connect fittings are not serviced separately, but new plastic spacers and latches are available for some types. If service parts are not available, do not attempt to repair the damaged fitting or fuel line (tube). If repair is necessary, replace the complete fuel line (tube) assembly. 1. Perform fuel pressure release procedure. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 3. Clean fitting of any foreign material before disassembly. 4. Single-Button Type Fitting: This type of fitting is equipped with a single push-button (2) located on the quick-connect fitting. 5. The push-button is attached to two internal latches (1). To disconnect, press on push-button with your thumb and unlatch fitting from fuel line. Special tools are not required for disconnection. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY OR PULL UP ON PUSH-BUTTON. LATCHES WILL BE BROKEN. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4706 6. Perform fuel pressure release procedure. 7. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 8. Clean fitting of any foreign material before disassembly. 9. 2-Button Type Fitting: This type of fitting (1) is equipped with a push-button located on each side of quick-connect fitting (2). Press on both buttons simultaneously for removal. Special tools are not required for disconnection. 10. Pinch-Type Fitting: This fitting (1) is equipped with two finger tabs (2). Pinch both tabs together while removing fitting. Special tools are not required for disconnection. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4707 11. Single-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting (3) is equipped with a single pull tab (1). The tab is removable. After tab is removed, quick-connect fitting can be separated from fuel system component. Special tools are not required for disconnection. 12. Press release tab on side of fitting to release pull tab (1). If release tab is not pressed prior to releasing pull tab, pull tab will be damaged. 13. While pressing release tab on side of fitting, use screwdriver (2) to pry up pull tab. 14. Raise pull tab until it separates from quick-connect fitting. 15. Two-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting (2) is equipped with tabs located on both sides of fitting (1). The tabs are supplied for disconnecting quick-connect fitting from component being serviced. a. To disconnect quick-connect fitting, squeeze plastic retainer tabs (1) against sides of quick-connect fitting with your fingers. Tool use is not required for removal and may damage plastic retainer. b. Pull fitting from fuel system component being serviced. c. The plastic retainer will remain on component being serviced after fitting is disconnected. The O-rings and spacer will remain in quick-connect fitting connector body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4708 16. Plastic Retainer Ring Type Fitting: This type of fitting can be identified by the use of a full-round plastic retainer ring (4) usually black in color. a. To release fuel system component from quick-connect fitting, firmly push fitting towards component being serviced while firmly pushing plastic retainer ring into fitting (6). With plastic ring depressed, pull fitting from component. The plastic retainer ring must be pressed squarely into fitting body. If this retainer is cocked during removal, it may be difficult to disconnect fitting. Use an open-end wrench on shoulder of plastic retainer ring to aid in disconnection. b. After disconnection, plastic retainer ring will remain with quick-connect fitting connector body. c. Inspect fitting connector body, plastic retainer ring and fuel system component for damage. Replace as necessary. 17. Latch Clips - Type 1: Depending on vehicle model and engine, 2 different types of safety latch clips are used. Type-1 (4) is tethered to fuel line and type-2 is not. A special tool will be necessary to disconnect fuel line after latch clip is removed. The latch clip may be used on certain fuel line/fuel rail connection, or to join fuel lines together. 18. Pry up on latch clip with a screwdriver (3). 19. Slide latch clip toward fuel rail while lifting with screwdriver. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4709 20. Insert special fuel line removal tool (Snap-On number FIH 9055-1 or equivalent) into fuel line (1). Use tool to release locking fingers in end of line. 21. With special tool still inserted, pull fuel line from fuel rail. 22. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting at end of fuel line. 23. Disconnect quick-connect fitting from fuel system component being serviced. 24. Latch Clips - Type 2: Depending on vehicle model and engine, 2 different types of safety latch clips are used. Type-1 is tethered to fuel line and type-2 is not. A special tool will be necessary to disconnect fuel line after latch clip is removed. The latch clip may be used on certain fuel line/fuel rail connection, or to join fuel lines together. 25. Type 2: Separate and unlatch small arms on end of clip and swing away from fuel line. 26. Slide latch clip toward fuel rail while lifting with screwdriver. 27. Insert special fuel line removal tool (Snap-On number FIH 9055-1 or equivalent) into fuel line (1). Use tool to release locking fingers in end of line. 28. With special tool still inserted, pull fuel line from fuel rail. 29. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting at end of fuel line. 30. Disconnect quick-connect fitting from fuel system component being serviced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4710 31. Wing Type: A special tool will not be necessary to disconnect this type of fitting (2). This line is used on different fuel and emission components. The graphic shows the fitting used on an EVAP canister. 32. Use two fingers to push on fitting wings (2) 33. Pull and disconnect fitting while holding wings. 34. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting. CONNECTING 1. Inspect quick-connect fitting body and fuel system component for damage. Replace as necessary. 2. Prior to connecting quick-connect fitting to component being serviced, check condition of fitting and component. Clean parts with a lint-free cloth. Lubricate with clean engine oil. 3. Insert quick-connect fitting into fuel tube or fuel system component until built-on stop on fuel tube or component rests against back of fitting. 4. Continue pushing until a click is felt. 5. Single-tab type fitting: Push new tab down until it locks into place in quick-connect fitting. 6. Verify a locked condition by firmly pulling on fuel tube and fitting (15-30 lbs.). 7. Latch Clip Equipped: Install latch clip (snaps into position). If latch clip will not fit, this indicates fuel line is not properly installed to fuel rail (or other fuel line). Recheck fuel line connection. 8. Connect negative cable to battery. 9. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Regulator: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4714 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4715 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE The correct fuel pressure for this vehicle is 58 psi ± 2 psi Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4720 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram refer to Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4721 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4722 - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16 inch) or #6631(3/8 inch) fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa ± 34 kPa (59 psi ± 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 4723 Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4727 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 218 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A921 18OR/PK 85 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 87 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4730 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 secondsunless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4733 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4737 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Rail: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fuel injector rail is used to mount the fuel injectors to the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4742 Fuel Rail: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION High pressure from the fuel pump is routed to the fuel rail. The fuel rail then supplies the necessary fuel to each individual fuel injector. A quick-connect fitting with a safety latch clip is used to attach the fuel line to the fuel rail. The fuel rail is not repairable. CAUTION: The left and right sections of the fuel rail are connected with either a flexible connecting hose, or joints. Do not attempt to separate the rail halves at these connecting hose or joints. Due to the design of the connecting hose or joint, it does not use any clamps. Never attempt to install a clamping device of any kind to the hose or joint. When removing the fuel rail assembly for any reason, be careful not to bend or kink the connecting hose or joint. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L WARNING: The fuel system is under constant pressure even with engine off. Before servicing fuel rail, fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Disconnect electrical connectors at all 8 fuel injectors. Push red colored slider away from injector (1). While pushing slider, depress tab (2) and remove connector (3) from injector. The factory fuel injection wiring harness is numerically tagged (INJ 1, INJ 2, etc.) for injector position identification. If harness is not tagged, note wiring location before removal. 2. Disconnect electrical connectors at all throttle body sensors. 3. Remove four fuel rail mounting bolts (1) and holddown clamps. 4. Gently rock and pull left side of fuel rail until fuel injectors just start to clear machined holes in intake manifold. Gently rock and pull right side of rail until injectors just start to clear intake manifold head holes. Repeat this procedure (left/right) until all injectors have cleared machined holes. 5. Remove fuel rail (with injectors attached) from engine. 6. If fuel injectors are to be removed,Refer to Fuel Injector / Removal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4745 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. If fuel injectors are to be installed, Refer to Fuel Injector / Installation. 2. Clean out fuel injector machined bores in intake manifold. 3. Apply a small amount of engine oil to each fuel injector O-ring. This will help in fuel rail installation. 4. Position fuel rail/fuel injector assembly to machined injector openings in intake manifold. 5. Guide each injector into intake manifold. Be careful not to tear injector O-rings. 6. Push right side of fuel rail down until fuel injectors have bottomed on shoulders. Push left fuel rail down until injectors have bottomed on shoulders. 7. Install 4 fuel rail holddown clamps and 4 mounting bolts (1). Tighten fuel rail mounting bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.) 8. Connect electrical connector to throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4746 9. Connect electrical connectors at all fuel injectors. Push connector onto injector (1) and then push and lock red colored slider (2). Verify connector is locked to injector by lightly tugging on connector. 10. Connect fuel line latch clip and fuel line to fuel rail. 11. Install air resonator to throttle body (2 bolts). 12. Install flexible air duct to air box. 13. Connect battery cable to battery. 14. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Return Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Return Line: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing any fuel system hoses, fittings, lines, or most components, fuel system pressure must be released. Refer to the fuel system pressure release procedure. The lines/tubes/hoses used on fuel injected vehicles are of a special construction. This is due to the higher fuel pressures and the possibility of contaminated fuel in this system. If it is necessary to replace these lines/tubes/hoses, only those marked EFM/EFI may be used. If equipped: The hose clamps used to secure rubber hoses on fuel injected vehicles are of a special rolled edge construction. This construction is used to prevent the edge of the clamp from cutting into the hose. Only these rolled edge type clamps may be used in this system. All other types of clamps may cut into the hoses and cause high-pressure fuel leaks. Use new original equipment type hose clamps. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Supply Line: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing any fuel system hoses, fittings, lines, or most components, fuel system pressure must be released. Refer to the fuel system pressure release procedure. The lines/tubes/hoses used on fuel injected vehicles are of a special construction. This is due to the higher fuel pressures and the possibility of contaminated fuel in this system. If it is necessary to replace these lines/tubes/hoses, only those marked EFM/EFI may be used. If equipped: The hose clamps used to secure rubber hoses on fuel injected vehicles are of a special rolled edge construction. This construction is used to prevent the edge of the clamp from cutting into the hose. Only these rolled edge type clamps may be used in this system. All other types of clamps may cut into the hoses and cause high-pressure fuel leaks. Use new original equipment type hose clamps. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4762 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4763 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4769 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4770 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 4774 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 4775 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Tank Vent: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4784 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4785 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Tank Vent: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4791 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 4792 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counterclockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4797 Fuel Tank Unit: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : MOTOR-IAC Connector: Name : MOTOR-IAC Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 IAC SIGNAL K961 20BR/VT 2 IAC CONTROL K61 20VT/GY Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4801 Fig. 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The IAC stepper motor is mounted to the throttle body, and regulates the amount of air bypassing the control of the throttle plate. As engine loads and ambient temperatures change, engine rpm changes. A pintle on the IAC stepper motor protrudes into a passage in the throttle body, controlling air flow through the passage. The IAC is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to maintain the target engine idle speed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4804 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A separate IAC motor is not used with the 5.7L V-8 engine. At idle, engine speed can be increased by retracting the IAC motor pintle and allowing more air to pass through the port, or it can be decreased by restricting the passage with the pintle and diminishing the amount of air bypassing the throttle plate. The IAC is called a stepper motor because it is moved (rotated) in steps, or increments. Opening the IAC opens an air passage around the throttle blade which increases RPM. The PCM uses the IAC motor to control idle speed (along with timing) and to reach a desired MAP during decel (keep engine from stalling). The IAC motor has 4 wires with 4 circuits. Two of the wires are for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to the motor windings to operate the stepper motor in one direction. The other 2 wires are also for 12 volts and ground to supply electrical current to operate the stepper motor in the opposite direction. To make the IAC go in the opposite direction, the PCM just reverses polarity on both windings. If only 1 wire is open, the IAC can only be moved 1 step (increment) in either direction. To keep the IAC motor in position when no movement is needed, the PCM will energize both windings at the same time. This locks the IAC motor in place. In the IAC motor system, the PCM will count every step that the motor is moved. This allows the PCM to determine the motor pintle position. If the memory is cleared, the PCM no longer knows the position of the pintle. So at the first key ON, the PCM drives the IAC motor closed, regardless of where it was before. This zeros the counter. From this point the PCM will back out the IAC motor and keep track of its position again. When engine rpm is above idle speed, the IAC is used for the following: - Off-idle dashpot (throttle blade will close quickly but idle speed will not stop quickly) - Deceleration air flow control - A/C compressor load control (also opens the passage slightly before the compressor is engaged so that the engine rpm does not dip down when the compressor engages) - Power steering load control The PCM can control polarity of the circuit to control direction of the stepper motor. IAC Stepper Motor Program: The PCM is also equipped with a memory program that records the number of steps the IAC stepper motor most recently advanced to during a certain set of parameters. For example: The PCM was attempting to maintain a 1000 rpm target during a cold start-up cycle. The last recorded number of steps for that may have been 125. That value would be recorded in the memory cell so that the next time the PCM recognizes the identical conditions, the PCM recalls that 125 steps were required to maintain the target. This program allows for greater customer satisfaction due to greater control of engine idle. Another function of the memory program, which occurs when the power steering switch (if equipped), or the A/C request circuit, requires that the IAC stepper motor control engine rpm, is the recording of the last targeted steps into the memory cell. The PCM can anticipate A/C compressor loads. This is accomplished by delaying compressor operation for approximately 0.5 seconds until the PCM moves the IAC stepper motor to the recorded steps that were loaded into the memory cell. Using this program helps eliminate idle-quality changes as loads change. Finally, the PCM incorporates a "No-Load" engine speed limiter of approximately 1800 - 2000 rpm, when it recognizes that the TPS is indicating an idle signal and IAC motor cannot maintain engine idle. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the IAC motor through the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The IAC motor is not serviceable on the 5.7L V-8 engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4807 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The IAC motor is not serviceable on the 5.7L V-8 engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4811 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 4814 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4817 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4822 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 218 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A921 18OR/PK 85 FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL K31 20BR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 87 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4825 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 secondsunless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair or replace as necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4828 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Auto Shut Down Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 4832 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 214 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 85 ASD RELAY CONTROL K51 20BR/GY 86 FUSED B(+) A922 14RD/LB 87 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 4835 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4838 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Resonator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the air inlet hose. 3. Disconnect the PCV fresh air hose (4) from the front of the resonator (1). 4. Disconnect the engine wire harness connector (5) from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. 5. Remove the two bolts (3) that secure the resonator to the top of the engine. 6. Pull the resonator forward to disconnect it from the throttle body (2). 7. Tilt and rotate the resonator as necessary to remove it from the engine compartment. 8. If required, remove the IAT sensor from the front of the resonator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4843 Resonator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. 2. Position the resonator (1) to the top of the engine and connect it the throttle body (2). Make sure the resonator is properly installed over the throttle body inlet. 3. Install the two bolts (3) that secure the resonator to the top of the engine. Tighten the bolts securely. 4. Connect the engine wire harness connector (5) to the IAT sensor. 5. Connect the PCV fresh air hose (4) to the front of the resonator. 6. Install the air intake hose. 7. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4848 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4849 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 352 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL K23 20BR/WT 3 APPS NO. 1 RETURN K4 20BR/LB 4 APPS NO. 2 RETURN K400 20BR/VT 5 APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL K29 20PK/RD 6 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 30 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4850 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) (6) is attached to the accelerator pedal assembly (4) under the instrument panel. The APPS is used only with the 5.7L V-8 engine. The APPS is part of the pedal assembly and is a non-serviceable part and the pedal assembly has to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4853 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) is a linear potentiometer. It provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with a DC voltage signal proportional to the angle, or position of the accelerator pedal. The APPS signal is translated (along with other sensors) to place the throttle plate (within the throttle body) to a pre-determined position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4858 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4861 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations Throttle Body: Locations Component ID: 455 Component : THROTTLE BODY Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 3 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 4 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 5 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 6 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4865 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4866 Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 3 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 4 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4867 5 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 6 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY Component Location - 11 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4868 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4869 Throttle Body: Diagrams Component ID: 455 Component : THROTTLE BODY Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 3 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY 4 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 5 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB 6 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4870 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4871 Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 TP NO. 1 SIGNAL K22 20YL/OR 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 3 ETC MOTOR (+) K447 20TN/YL 4 TP NO. 2 SIGNAL K122 20PK/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4872 5 ETC MOTOR (-) K448 20TN/OR 6 TP SENSOR RETURN K922 20PK/GY Component Location - 11 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 4873 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Body: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The throttle body is located on the intake manifold. Fuel does not enter the intake manifold through the throttle body. Fuel is sprayed into the manifold by the fuel injectors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4876 Throttle Body: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Filtered air from the air cleaner enters the intake manifold through the throttle body. The throttle body contains an air control passage controlled by an Idle Air Control (IAC) motor. The air control passage is used to supply air for idle conditions. A throttle valve (plate) is used to supply air for above idle conditions. 5.7L V-8 Engine: The throttle body on the 5.7L engine is an electrically controlled unit. A mechanical cable is not used to connect the throttle body to the accelerator pedal . The Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor (APPS) along with inputs from other sensors sets the throttle blade to pre-determined positions. Except 5.7L V-8 Engine: Certain sensors are attached to the throttle body. The accelerator pedal cable, speed control cable and transmission control cable (when equipped) are connected to the throttle body linkage arm. A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechanically limit the position of the throttle body throttle plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are controlled by the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Body: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 CAUTION: Do not use spray (carb) cleaners on any part of the throttle body. Do not apply silicone lubricants to any part of the throttle body. 1. Remove air duct and air resonator box at throttle body. 2. Disconnect electrical connector at throttle body (2). 3. Remove four throttle body mounting bolts (4). 4. Remove throttle body from intake manifold. 5. Check condition of throttle body O-ring (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4879 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 CAUTION: Do not use spray (carb) cleaners on any part of the throttle body. Do not apply silicone lubricants to any part of the throttle body. 1. Clean and check condition of throttle body-to-intake manifold O-ring. 2. Clean mating surfaces of throttle body and intake manifold. 3. Install throttle body to intake manifold by positioning throttle body to manifold alignment pins. 4. Install 4 mounting bolts and tighten to 105 in. lbs. (12 Nm). 5. Install electrical connector. 6. Install air plenum. 7. A Scan Tool may be used to learn electrical parameters. Go to the Miscellaneous menu, and then select ETC Learn. 8. If the previous step is not performed, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be set. 9. If necessary, use a scan tool to erase any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) from PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 3-wire Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) is mounted on the throttle body and is connected to the throttle blade shaft. The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate TPS on the throttle body. If it is determined that TPS signal is bad, due to the sensor itself, the throttle body will need to be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4884 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. The 3-wire TPS provides the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal (voltage) that represents the throttle blade position of the throttle body. The sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the position of the throttle blade changes, the output voltage of the TPS changes. The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS. This will vary in an approximate range of from 0.26 volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine current engine operating conditions. In response to engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel injector pulse width and ignition timing. The PCM needs to identify the actions and position of the throttle blade at all times. This information is needed to assist in performing the following calculations: - Ignition timing advance - Fuel injection pulse-width - Idle (learned value or minimum TPS) - Off-idle (0.06 volt) - Wide Open Throttle (WOT) open loop (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - Deceleration fuel lean out - Fuel cutoff during cranking at WOT (2.608 volts above learned idle voltage) - A/C WOT cutoff (certain automatic transmissions only). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4887 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 The 5.7L V-8 engine does not use a separate Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) on the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications DESCRIPTION The 5.7L engine (345 CID) eight-cylinder engine is a 90° V-Type lightweight, deep skirt cast iron block, aluminum heads, single cam, overhead valve engine with hydraulic roller tappets. The heads incorporate splayed valves with a hemispherical style combustion chamber and dual spark plugs. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear; 1, 3, 5, 7 on the left bank and 2, 4, 6, 8 on the right bank. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4893 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications FIRING ORDER - 5.7L These numbers (2) and (3) can also be found on the top of the intake manifold (1) to the right of the throttle body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any of the available engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4900 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4901 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4902 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4903 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4904 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4905 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4906 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4909 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4912 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4916 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4917 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4918 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4919 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4920 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4921 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4922 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4923 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4924 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4925 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4926 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4927 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4928 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4929 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4930 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4931 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4932 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4933 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 4934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4937 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4940 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Coil: Specifications IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE - 5.7L Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition Ignition Coil: Locations Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 50 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 2-Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4946 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4947 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4948 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 57 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4949 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4950 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4951 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4952 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 58 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4953 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4954 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4955 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4956 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 59 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4957 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4958 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4959 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4960 Ignition Coil: Locations Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 50 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 2-Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4961 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4962 Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 57 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4963 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4964 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4965 Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 58 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4966 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4967 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4968 Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 59 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4969 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4970 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4971 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 Component ID: 60 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4972 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4973 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4974 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 Component ID: 61 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4975 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4976 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4977 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 Component ID: 62 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4978 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4979 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4980 Coil-Ignition-No. 7 Component ID: 63 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4981 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 15 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4982 Coil-Ignition-No. 8 Component ID: 64 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4983 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 16 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4984 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition Ignition Coil: Diagrams Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 50 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 2-Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4987 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4988 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4989 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 57 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4990 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4991 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4992 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4993 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 58 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4994 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4995 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4996 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4997 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 59 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4998 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 4999 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5000 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5001 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Capacitor-Ignition Component ID: 50 Component : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Connector: Name : CAPACITOR-IGNITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 2-Component Location - 18 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5002 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5003 Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 57 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5004 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 1 K19 16LB/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5005 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5006 Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 58 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5007 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 2 K17 16DB/TN 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5008 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5009 Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 59 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5010 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 3 K18 16VT/RD 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5011 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5012 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 Component ID: 60 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5013 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 4 K15 16DB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5014 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5015 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 Component ID: 61 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5016 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 5 K16 16DG/WT 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 15 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5017 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5018 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 Component ID: 62 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5019 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 6 K10 16VT/LB 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 12 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5020 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5021 Coil-Ignition-No. 7 Component ID: 63 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5022 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 7 K97 16BR 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 15 Fig. 15 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5023 Coil-Ignition-No. 8 Component ID: 64 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5024 1 COIL CONTROL NO. 8 K98 16DB/YL 2 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 3-Component Location - 16 Fig. 16 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Capacitor-Ignition > Page 5025 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The 5.7L engine uses 8 dedicated and individually fired coils (3) for each pair of spark plugs. Each coil (3) is mounted directly to the top of each spark plug. Each coil is bolted (2) to the valve cover (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5028 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The ignition system is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on all engines. The 5.7L engine uses dual output coils, and 2 spark plugs per cylinder. Each cylinder is equipped with 1 dual-output coil. Meaning one coil mounts directly over one of the dual spark plugs for 1 high-voltage output. Battery voltage is supplied to all of the ignition coils positive terminals from the ASD relay. If the PCM does not see a signal from the crankshaft and camshaft sensors (indicating the ignition key is ON but the engine is not running), it will shut down the ASD circuit. Base ignition timing is not adjustable. By controlling the coil ground circuits, the PCM is able to set the base timing and adjust the ignition timing advance. This is done to meet changing engine operating conditions. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based on inputs it receives from: - The engine coolant temperature sensor - The crankshaft position sensor (engine speed) - The camshaft position sensor (crankshaft position) - The manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - The throttle position sensor - Transmission gear selection Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L 1. Disconnect the electrical connector (1) from coil (3). 2. Clean area at base of coil with compressed air before removal. 3. Remove two mounting bolts (2) (note that mounting bolts are retained to coil). 4. Carefully pull up coil (1) from valve cover. 5. Remove coil (1) from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5031 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Using compressed air, blow out any dirt or contaminants from around top of spark plug. NOTE: Use dielectric grease on each of the spark plug boots before installing the coil. 2. Position ignition coil (1) into valve cover and push onto spark plugs. 3. Install 2 coil mounting bolts (2). Tighten to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.). 4. Connect electrical connector (1) to coil by snapping into position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 5036 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5039 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5044 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5045 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5046 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5047 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5048 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5051 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5052 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5053 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5054 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5055 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5058 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5061 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 5067 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5070 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5075 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5076 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5077 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5078 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 356 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 CMP SIGNAL K44 20TN/LB 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5079 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5080 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5081 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is located below the generator on the timing chain / case cover (1) on the right/front side of engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5084 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L The CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. The sensor generates electrical pulses. These pulses (signals) are sent to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will then determine crankshaft position from both the camshaft position sensor and crankshaft position sensor. The tonewheel is located at the front of the camshaft (2). As the tonewheel rotates, notches (3) pass through the sync signal generator. When the cam gear is rotating, the sensor will detect the notches. Input voltage from the sensor to the PCM will then switch from a low (approximately 0.3 volts) to a high (approximately 5 volts). When the sensor detects a notch has passed, the input voltage switches back low to approximately 0.3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (3) is located on right side of timing gear/chain cover below generator (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (3) at CMP sensor. 2. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 3. Carefully twist sensor (2) from timing gear/chain cover. 4. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5087 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in timing gear/chain cover. 2. Install sensor (2) into timing gear/chain cover with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to O-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to timing gear/chain cover. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 3. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.) 4. Connect electrical connector to sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5091 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5092 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5093 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5094 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5095 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5096 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5097 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5098 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5099 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5100 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 357 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5101 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5102 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5103 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5104 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5105 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5106 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 5 VOLT SUPPLY F855 20PK/YL 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 3 CKP SIGNAL K24 20VT/DG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5107 Component Location - 19 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5108 Component Location - 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5109 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 5.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5112 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 5.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 5.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (3) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L V-8 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector (2) at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor O-ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5115 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor O-ring. 3. Install sensor into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt, be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover. 3. Remove the tilt lever handle. 4. Remove the lower shroud (2) from steering column. 5. Place shifter in PARK position. The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 6. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key (2) to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin with a small punch (3), while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5121 7. Remove the key (2) and key cylinder (1) from the column (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5122 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder (1) into the housing (3) using care to align the end of the key cylinder with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (1) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the lower shroud. 4. Install the tilt lever handle. 5. Install the steering column opening cover. 6. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5127 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5128 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5129 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5130 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5131 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 368 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL K42 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN K942 20YL/DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5134 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5135 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5136 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 369 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (3.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL K242 20DB/OR 2 KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN K924 20DG/RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5137 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 5138 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold 3.7L & 4.7L. Two knock sensors are also used with the 5.7L. These are bolted into each side of the cylinder block (outside) under the exhaust manifold. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5141 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 5.7L Two sensors (1) are used. Each sensor is bolted into the outside of cylinder block below the exhaust manifold (3). 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect knock sensor electrical connector (5). 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensor from engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5144 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 5.7L 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting hole. 2. Install sensor (1) into cylinder block (3). NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock sensor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt (2). NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolt (2). Tighten to 15 ± 2 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in. lbs.). 4. Install electrical connector to sensor (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5148 Spark Plug: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Resistor type spark plugs are used on all engines. Sixteen spark plugs (2 per cylinder) are used with 5.7L engines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Spark Plug: Procedures CLEANING AND ADJUSTMENT The plugs may be cleaned using commercially available spark plug cleaning equipment. After cleaning, file center electrode flat with a small point file or jewelers file before adjusting gap. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. Adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5151 Spark Plug: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL Each individual spark plug is located under each ignition coil. Each individual ignition coil must be removed to gain access to each spark plug. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing at throttle body. 2. Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. 4. Remove spark plug from cylinder head using a quality socket with a rubber or foam insert. Also check condition of ignition coil O-ring and replace as necessary. 5. Inspect spark plug condition. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The 4.7L is equipped with copper core ground electrode spark plugs. They must be replaced with the same type/number spark plug as the original. If another spark plug is substituted, pre-ignition will result. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap or a cracked porcelain insulator. 1. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. 2. Tighten spark plugs to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 3.7L & 4.7L. 3. The 5.7L is equipped with torque critical design spark plugs. Do not exceed 15 ft. lbs. torque. Tighten spark plugs to 18 Nm (13 ft. lbs). NOTE: 5.7L does not use an O-ring 4. Before installing ignition coil(s), check condition of coil O-ring and replace as necessary. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone to coil O-ring. 5. Install ignition coil(s). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5159 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5162 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5167 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5168 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5169 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5170 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5173 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5174 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5175 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5176 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5179 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5182 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5186 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5187 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5188 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5193 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5194 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5195 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5196 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5199 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5200 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5201 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5202 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5205 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5208 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5213 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5216 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tow/haul indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tow/haul indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The tow/haul indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text TOW/HAUL in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the tow/haul indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The tow/haul indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5223 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tow/haul indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the tow/haul function of the tow/haul switch has been selected, revising the shift schedule of the electronically controlled automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tow/haul indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the tow/haul indicator for the following reasons: - Tow/Haul Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic tow/haul indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the tow/haul shift schedule has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tow/haul indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tow/haul indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5228 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135° C (275° F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM is located on the right inner fender. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5235 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5236 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5237 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5238 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5242 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 230 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A104 18YL/RD 85 GROUND Z915 20BK 86 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20VT/YL 87 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18YL/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5245 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5252 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5253 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5254 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5255 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5256 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5257 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5260 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5261 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5262 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5263 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5264 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5265 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5268 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5271 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5275 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5276 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5277 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tow/haul overdrive OFF (control) switch is located in the shift lever arm. The switch is a momentary contact device that signals the PCM to toggle current status of the overdrive function. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5280 Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION At key-on, overdrive operation is allowed. Pressing the switch once causes the tow/haul overdrive OFF mode to be entered and the Tow/Haul lamp to be illuminated. Pressing the switch a second time causes normal overdrive operation to be restored and the tow/haul lamp to be turned off. The tow/haul overdrive OFF mode defaults to ON after the ignition switch is cycled OFF and ON. The normal position for the control switch is the ON position. The switch must be in this position to energize the solenoid and allow a 3-4 upshift. The control switch indicator light illuminates only when the tow/haul overdrive switch is turned to the OFF position, or when illuminated by the transmission control module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5283 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5288 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5293 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5294 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5295 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5296 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5299 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5300 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5301 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5302 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5305 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5308 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5313 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5314 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5315 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5316 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5317 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5318 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5319 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5320 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5323 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5324 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5325 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5326 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5327 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5328 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5329 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5330 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5333 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5336 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic Technical Service Bulletin # F43 Date: 061001 Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic October 2006 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall F43 Reprogram PCM Transmission Shift Logic Models 2007 (KA) Dodge Nitro (built through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080916). 2007 (KJ) Jeep(R) Liberty (built through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080916). 2007 (DR) Dodge Ram Pick Up Truck (1500 Series) (built at the St.Louis North assembly plant through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080915). 2007 (HB) Dodge Durango (built through August 14, 2006 - MDH 081406). 2007 (LX) Chrysler 300, Dodge Magnum and Charger (built through August 10, 2006 - MDH 081017). 2007 (ND) Dodge Dakota (built through August 14, 2006 - MDH 081403). NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with a 42RLE transmission. IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build periods have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The software programmed into the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on about 4,700 of the above vehicles may allow the transmission to shift into first gear if the operator shifts from "Drive" to "Neutral" and back into the "Drive" position. A shift into first gear at speeds above 40 mph could cause a momentary lock up of the drive wheels, which can result in a crash without prior warning Repair The PCM must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information Due to the likelihood that the required labels are already in your parts inventory, no labels will be distributed initially. The following label may be ordered as needed. Each vehicle requires application of the labels shown. Special Tools Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5345 These special tools are required to perform this repair. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by DaimlerChrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive three copies of this dealer recall notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to DaimlerChrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this recall. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a DaimlerChrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5346 Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations DaimlerChrysler Corporation Service Procedure A. Reprogram the Powertrain Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 7.02 or later. To update your StarSCAN(R) diagnostic tool via the internet, the StarSCAN software must be at version 7.02 and properly configured to work with your dealership's network. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. If the battery charger is timer controlled, set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN ethernet cable to the StarSCAN and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable to the StarSCAN and the vehicle. 4. Place the Ignition in the "RUN" position, then Power "ON" the StarSCAN. 5. Retrieve the old PCM part number. With the StarSCAN on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Touch the screen to highlight "PCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for statement near the top of "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarSCAN. With the StarSCAN on the "ECU Overview" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description is the same as the number recorded in Step 5e, then the PCM is up to date and no further action is required. If the part number is different, continue with Step 6c. c. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarSCAN screen. d. Select "Download to Scan Tool". e. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". f. Highlight the listed calibration. g. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. h. When the update is completed, select "OK". 7. Disconnect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable from the vehicle. Wait until the StarSCAN screen reads "Vehicle Disconnected", then press "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5347 8. Reconnect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable to the vehicle. 9. Retrieve the PCM part number. With the StarSCAN on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Touch the screen to highlight "PCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set in other modules (ABS, TCM, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTC's". Press "Clear All Stored DTC's" if there are any DTC's shown on the list. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN and battery charger from the vehicle. B. Install the Authorized Modifications Label: 1. Type or print (with a ballpoint pen) the recall number, dealer code and date on the Authorized Modifications Label (Figure 1). 2. Attach the label near the VECI label and then close the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5348 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > NHTSA06V341000 > Sep > 06 > Recall 06V341000: PCM Upgrade for A/T Shift Logic PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Recalls Recall 06V341000: PCM Upgrade for A/T Shift Logic MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Chrysler/300 2007 Dodge/Charger 2007 Dodge/Dakota 2007 Dodge/Durango 2007 Dodge/Magnum 2007 Dodge/Nitro 4X2 2007 Dodge/RAM 1500 2007 Jeep/Liberty 2007 MANUFACTURER: DaimlerChrysler Corporation NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V341000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September 06, 2006 COMPONENT: Power Train: Automatic Transmission POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 2333 SUMMARY: On certain passenger and sport utility vehicles and pickup trucks equipped with automatic transmissions, the software programmed into the powertrain control module can cause a momentary lock up of the drive wheels if the vehicle is traveling over 40 MPH and the operator shifts from drive to neutral and back to drive. CONSEQUENCE: If the drive wheels locked up, loss of vehicle control could occur increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) free of charge. The recall began on October 2, 2006. Owners may contact DaimlerChrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: DaimlerChrysler recall No. F43. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 5358 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 5363 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5368 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5369 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5370 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5371 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory NUMBER: 18-003-08 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: January 19, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-044-07, DATED OCTOBER 12, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND CLEAN DATES. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.04 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0524 - Engine Oil Pressure Too Low OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: **2007** - 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) **2007** - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango / Aspen **2007** - 2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger **2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** **2007 (L2) 300 (China)** **2007** - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee **2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets)** **2007** - 2008 (XK) Commander **2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets)** NOTE: This bulletin applies to the above listed vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine with MDS (sales code EZB) built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before August 15, 2007 (MDH 0814XX) ^ (LX) built before September 14, 2007 (MDH 0914XX) ^ (DR) built before August 16, 2007 (MDH 0816XX) ** (WK/WH/XK/XH) built before January 8, 2008 (MDH 0108XX)** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination due to the following Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC): P0524 - Engine Oil Pressure Too Low DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5376 If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.04 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5377 c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5378 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering NUMBER: 21-002-07 REV. E GROUP: Transmission DATE: December 21, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-002-07 REV. D, DATED NOVEMBER 8, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS REVISION INCLUDES THE REMOVAL OF KJ AND KA MODELS. THE KJ MODEL WILL BE ADDRESSED IN A SERVICE BULLETIN 21-020-07 AND KA MODELS WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE BULLETIN 21-021-07. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.03 OR HIGHER. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: Torque Converter Shudder OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software and replacing the torque converter as required. MODELS: 2007 (DR) Ram 1500 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2007 (JS) Sebring 2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets) 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/HB/JK/JS/LE/LX models built with a 41TE, 42RLE, or 62TE automatic transmission (Sales Codes DFF, DGV, or DG2). built on or before December 15, 2006 (MDH1215XX) and ND models with 42RLE built on or before January 2, 2007 (MDH0102XX). NOTE: **This bulletin DOES NOT apply to JS models with a 2.4L engine.** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience one or more of the following symptoms: 1. **Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (41TE JS), (62TE J5)** a. This condition can only occur after the vehicle has been driven and the torque convertor is past the break in period. Torque Converter break in can be confirmed with the StarSCAN(R). b. If experienced, the shudder may occur when the transmission temperature is between 38° C and 54° (100° F and 130° F) during steady state driving with the torque convertor in partial lock (EMCC) operation. The shudder feels like the vehicle is being driven over rumble strips. 2. Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE/62TE JS) a. This condition can occur due to abrupt torque converter clutch engagement during EMCC initialization. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5383 DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine/transmission systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Conditions and they can be verified, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURES BY SYMPTOM/CONDITION: **SYMPTOM/CONDITION 1 - Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (4ITE / 62TE JS)**: 1. Is the vehicle an LX/LE/L2 that has had Service Bulletin 21-002-07 or 21-002-07 REV. A been performed already? a. Yes >>> Proceed to Step # 3. b. No >>> Proceed to Step # 2. 2. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 3. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN® Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". SYMPTOM/CONDITION 2 - Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE / 62TE JS): Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5384 1. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 2. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". FLASH REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: When performing this Repair Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN®; must be programmed with 8.03 level software or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the run position. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5385 l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 7. After flash reprogramming, be sure to Perform the additional Repair Steps associated with each procedure. These steps may include VLP clear counters, Quick Learn and/or Re-enable TCC break in. It is important to perform these additional steps in the order listed for each repair. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5386 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral NUMBER: 18-035-07 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: May 18, 2007 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN ARE AVAILABLE VIA THE INTERNET. SUBJECT: FLASH: 545RFE Transmission Defaults To Neutral OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 545RFE transmission (sale code DGQ) built on or before March 26, 2007 (MDH 0326XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The transmission may default into neutral gear if the transmission gear selector is moved into "reverse gear range under certain operating conditions. The default into neutral gear is done to protect the transmission mechanical components from potential damage. New PCM software will monitor transmission hydraulic pressure and allow reverse gear engagement, if the transmission is in "reverse gear range and the transmission hydraulic pressure is sufficient to support reverse gear operation. DIAGNOSIS: Using a StarSCAN(R) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral > Page 5391 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN AND THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN® must be programmed with software release level 7.04 SPI or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN® for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide available on the website under the "download center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Retrieve the old ECU (PCM) part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral > Page 5392 i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the PCM update is complete, select "OK". NOTE: Due to the ECU programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other electronic modules within the vehicle. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM or TCM. 6. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 NUMBER: 18-027-07 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 17, 2007 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination Due To EGR Position Sensor DTC - P0404, P0405, or P0406 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck (1500) 2006-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (LX/LE) 300 / Magnum / Charger 2006-2007 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK / XH) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine with MDS (sales code EZB) built on or before February 15, 2007 (MDH 0215XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination due to one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC): ==> P0404 - EGR Position Sensor Performance ==> P0405 - EGR Position Sensor Circuit Low ==> P0406 - EGR Position Sensor Circuit High DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 > Page 5397 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 7.03 SPI or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 > Page 5398 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 6. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 5404 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 5409 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5414 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5415 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5416 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5417 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory NUMBER: 18-003-08 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: January 19, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-044-07, DATED OCTOBER 12, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND CLEAN DATES. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.04 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0524 - Engine Oil Pressure Too Low OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: **2007** - 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) **2007** - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango / Aspen **2007** - 2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger **2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** **2007 (L2) 300 (China)** **2007** - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee **2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets)** **2007** - 2008 (XK) Commander **2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets)** NOTE: This bulletin applies to the above listed vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine with MDS (sales code EZB) built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before August 15, 2007 (MDH 0814XX) ^ (LX) built before September 14, 2007 (MDH 0914XX) ^ (DR) built before August 16, 2007 (MDH 0816XX) ** (WK/WH/XK/XH) built before January 8, 2008 (MDH 0108XX)** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination due to the following Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC): P0524 - Engine Oil Pressure Too Low DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5422 If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.04 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5423 c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5424 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls Torque Converter Shuddering NUMBER: 21-002-07 REV. E GROUP: Transmission DATE: December 21, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-002-07 REV. D, DATED NOVEMBER 8, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS REVISION INCLUDES THE REMOVAL OF KJ AND KA MODELS. THE KJ MODEL WILL BE ADDRESSED IN A SERVICE BULLETIN 21-020-07 AND KA MODELS WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE BULLETIN 21-021-07. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.03 OR HIGHER. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: Torque Converter Shudder OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software and replacing the torque converter as required. MODELS: 2007 (DR) Ram 1500 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2007 (JS) Sebring 2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets) 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/HB/JK/JS/LE/LX models built with a 41TE, 42RLE, or 62TE automatic transmission (Sales Codes DFF, DGV, or DG2). built on or before December 15, 2006 (MDH1215XX) and ND models with 42RLE built on or before January 2, 2007 (MDH0102XX). NOTE: **This bulletin DOES NOT apply to JS models with a 2.4L engine.** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience one or more of the following symptoms: 1. **Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (41TE JS), (62TE J5)** a. This condition can only occur after the vehicle has been driven and the torque convertor is past the break in period. Torque Converter break in can be confirmed with the StarSCAN(R). b. If experienced, the shudder may occur when the transmission temperature is between 38° C and 54° (100° F and 130° F) during steady state driving with the torque convertor in partial lock (EMCC) operation. The shudder feels like the vehicle is being driven over rumble strips. 2. Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE/62TE JS) a. This condition can occur due to abrupt torque converter clutch engagement during EMCC initialization. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5429 DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine/transmission systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Conditions and they can be verified, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURES BY SYMPTOM/CONDITION: **SYMPTOM/CONDITION 1 - Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (4ITE / 62TE JS)**: 1. Is the vehicle an LX/LE/L2 that has had Service Bulletin 21-002-07 or 21-002-07 REV. A been performed already? a. Yes >>> Proceed to Step # 3. b. No >>> Proceed to Step # 2. 2. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 3. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN® Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". SYMPTOM/CONDITION 2 - Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE / 62TE JS): Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5430 1. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 2. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". FLASH REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: When performing this Repair Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN®; must be programmed with 8.03 level software or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the run position. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5431 l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 7. After flash reprogramming, be sure to Perform the additional Repair Steps associated with each procedure. These steps may include VLP clear counters, Quick Learn and/or Re-enable TCC break in. It is important to perform these additional steps in the order listed for each repair. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5432 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral NUMBER: 18-035-07 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: May 18, 2007 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN ARE AVAILABLE VIA THE INTERNET. SUBJECT: FLASH: 545RFE Transmission Defaults To Neutral OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 545RFE transmission (sale code DGQ) built on or before March 26, 2007 (MDH 0326XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The transmission may default into neutral gear if the transmission gear selector is moved into "reverse gear range under certain operating conditions. The default into neutral gear is done to protect the transmission mechanical components from potential damage. New PCM software will monitor transmission hydraulic pressure and allow reverse gear engagement, if the transmission is in "reverse gear range and the transmission hydraulic pressure is sufficient to support reverse gear operation. DIAGNOSIS: Using a StarSCAN(R) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral > Page 5437 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN AND THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN® must be programmed with software release level 7.04 SPI or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN® for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide available on the website under the "download center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Retrieve the old ECU (PCM) part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral > Page 5438 i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the PCM update is complete, select "OK". NOTE: Due to the ECU programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other electronic modules within the vehicle. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM or TCM. 6. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 NUMBER: 18-027-07 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 17, 2007 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination Due To EGR Position Sensor DTC - P0404, P0405, or P0406 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck (1500) 2006-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (LX/LE) 300 / Magnum / Charger 2006-2007 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK / XH) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine with MDS (sales code EZB) built on or before February 15, 2007 (MDH 0215XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination due to one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC): ==> P0404 - EGR Position Sensor Performance ==> P0405 - EGR Position Sensor Circuit Low ==> P0406 - EGR Position Sensor Circuit High DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 > Page 5443 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 7.03 SPI or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 > Page 5444 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 6. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic Technical Service Bulletin # F43 Date: 061001 Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic October 2006 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall F43 Reprogram PCM Transmission Shift Logic Models 2007 (KA) Dodge Nitro (built through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080916). 2007 (KJ) Jeep(R) Liberty (built through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080916). 2007 (DR) Dodge Ram Pick Up Truck (1500 Series) (built at the St.Louis North assembly plant through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080915). 2007 (HB) Dodge Durango (built through August 14, 2006 - MDH 081406). 2007 (LX) Chrysler 300, Dodge Magnum and Charger (built through August 10, 2006 - MDH 081017). 2007 (ND) Dodge Dakota (built through August 14, 2006 - MDH 081403). NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with a 42RLE transmission. IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build periods have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The software programmed into the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on about 4,700 of the above vehicles may allow the transmission to shift into first gear if the operator shifts from "Drive" to "Neutral" and back into the "Drive" position. A shift into first gear at speeds above 40 mph could cause a momentary lock up of the drive wheels, which can result in a crash without prior warning Repair The PCM must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information Due to the likelihood that the required labels are already in your parts inventory, no labels will be distributed initially. The following label may be ordered as needed. Each vehicle requires application of the labels shown. Special Tools Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5449 These special tools are required to perform this repair. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by DaimlerChrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive three copies of this dealer recall notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to DaimlerChrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this recall. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a DaimlerChrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5450 Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations DaimlerChrysler Corporation Service Procedure A. Reprogram the Powertrain Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 7.02 or later. To update your StarSCAN(R) diagnostic tool via the internet, the StarSCAN software must be at version 7.02 and properly configured to work with your dealership's network. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. If the battery charger is timer controlled, set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN ethernet cable to the StarSCAN and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable to the StarSCAN and the vehicle. 4. Place the Ignition in the "RUN" position, then Power "ON" the StarSCAN. 5. Retrieve the old PCM part number. With the StarSCAN on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Touch the screen to highlight "PCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for statement near the top of "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarSCAN. With the StarSCAN on the "ECU Overview" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description is the same as the number recorded in Step 5e, then the PCM is up to date and no further action is required. If the part number is different, continue with Step 6c. c. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarSCAN screen. d. Select "Download to Scan Tool". e. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". f. Highlight the listed calibration. g. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. h. When the update is completed, select "OK". 7. Disconnect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable from the vehicle. Wait until the StarSCAN screen reads "Vehicle Disconnected", then press "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5451 8. Reconnect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable to the vehicle. 9. Retrieve the PCM part number. With the StarSCAN on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Touch the screen to highlight "PCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set in other modules (ABS, TCM, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTC's". Press "Clear All Stored DTC's" if there are any DTC's shown on the list. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN and battery charger from the vehicle. B. Install the Authorized Modifications Label: 1. Type or print (with a ballpoint pen) the recall number, dealer code and date on the Authorized Modifications Label (Figure 1). 2. Attach the label near the VECI label and then close the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5452 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > NHTSA06V341000 > Sep > 06 > Recall 06V341000: PCM Upgrade for A/T Shift Logic PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V341000: PCM Upgrade for A/T Shift Logic MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Chrysler/300 2007 Dodge/Charger 2007 Dodge/Dakota 2007 Dodge/Durango 2007 Dodge/Magnum 2007 Dodge/Nitro 4X2 2007 Dodge/RAM 1500 2007 Jeep/Liberty 2007 MANUFACTURER: DaimlerChrysler Corporation NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V341000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September 06, 2006 COMPONENT: Power Train: Automatic Transmission POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 2333 SUMMARY: On certain passenger and sport utility vehicles and pickup trucks equipped with automatic transmissions, the software programmed into the powertrain control module can cause a momentary lock up of the drive wheels if the vehicle is traveling over 40 MPH and the operator shifts from drive to neutral and back to drive. CONSEQUENCE: If the drive wheels locked up, loss of vehicle control could occur increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) free of charge. The recall began on October 2, 2006. Owners may contact DaimlerChrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: DaimlerChrysler recall No. F43. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery NUMBER: 18-001-06 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: July 12, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-001-06, DATED JANUARY II, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS, YEARS AND A REVISED DISCUSSION ABOUT ABORTED FLASH REPROGRAMMING RECOVERY. SUBJECT: StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM) Abort Recovery Procedures OVERVIEW: This Bulletin provides guidelines to minimize flash reprogramming problems and recovery procedure information for failed flash attempts. MODELS: **2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis** 2006 - **2007** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - **2007** (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (JK) Wrangler **2007 (JS) Sebring** **2007 (KA) Nitro** 2006 - **2007** (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2005 - **2007** (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger **2007 (MK) Compass** 2005 - **2007** (ND) Dakota **2007 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - **2007* (PT) PT Cruiser 2005 - **2007** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2007** (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: NOTE: Many of the reasons a flash reprogramming procedure may not complete are documented in this service bulletin. Occasionally a flash update procedure may not complete properly and/or the diagnostic equipment may lock up or become disconnected during the procedure. Flash Reprogramming is a "CRITICAL PROCESS"; an error may result in a no-start/failed control module. Most modules, encountering an interruption or failure while reprogramming, are recoverable. Replacing a module that is recoverable is not covered under the provisions of the warranty. This service bulletin covers items that may cause this condition, a process to restart the flash procedure, and miscellaneous information that will help prevent unnecessary replacement of control modules. GENERAL: Flash Reprogramming is only authorized when programming a generic module or by a specific SERVICE ACTION (Service Bulletin/Recall/Rapid Response Transmittal/Advance Service Information). CAUTION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5461 When updating a module because of a Service Action, it is important to follow the steps outlined in the Repair Procedure section of the Service Action. Procedures may differ depending on the module that is being reprogrammed. Review the entire Service Action prior to performing a flash reprogramming update. Often other parts may need to be serviced, replaced, or tested, prior to flash reprogramming, and ARE REQUIRED as part of completing the Service Action. COMMON CAUSES OF FLASH REPROGRAMMING ERRORS Interruptions, voltage problems, a variety of other outside interactions, and failure to follow the steps outlined in the Service Action can potentially interfere with the process. This document seeks to provide information to minimize problems associated with module flash reprogramming. SOFTWARE VERSIONS MUST BE CURRENT Before attempting a flash reprogramming session, make sure you have the most current software installed in the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM)). Refer to the current software release information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(TM) Tools > Latest News > Select the most recent release number. The technician will be able to see the applicable version numbers. Often, because of multiple StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM)s in the shop, not all devices will get updated in a timely manner. The installed StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM) software version and scan tool operating system version, (Fig. 2), can be verified from the "Home" screen as follows: StarMOBILE Desktop Client ^ Select "Tool Menu". ^ Select "Version Information" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5462 StarSCAN ^ Select "Show Shortcuts" ^ Select "Tool Menu". ^ Select "Version Information" Typical Tool Menu (Fig. 1) NOTE: The StarSCAN also displays the version number on the right side of the blue header at the top of each screen. NOTE: To read the version on the StarMOBILE(TM), it must be connected and the application running or the user will receive "N/A" for the "System" value. GENERAL NOTES FOR CABLES AND VEHICLE CONNECTIONS Consider ALL cables to be wear items. It is a good practice to have dedicated cables devoted to "Flash ONLY". Always have a spare StarSCAN(R) CH9404 (vehicle) cable available. Always have a spare StarMOBILE(TM) CH9804 (vehicle) cable available (blue cable end). Diagnosing vehicle cable problems Inspect vehicle cable connectors for potential problems that might cause communication interruptions. Use the information available on DealerCONNECT under: ^ eSupport (above the "Marketing" tab) ^ Under "Knowledge Center" - select "Find Answers" ^ In the "Enter link, error message, or topic" area, type "561" ^ In the "Search By" area, select "Answer ID" ^ At the next screen, select the "StarSCAN Flash Lockup.pdf" link to access the information to diagnose suspect vehicle cable continuity. FLASH REPROGRAMMING PROBLEM PREVENTION ^ Follow the steps outlined in the Service Action. ^ Pay attention to the screen prompts displayed during the flash process. ^ Replace worn cables. ^ Verify the vehicle is equipped with a known good battery. ^ Ensure the battery charger charging rate provides approximately 13.2 - 13.8 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. **ABORTED FLASH REPROGRAMMING RECOVERY** ** The following steps may help recover a non-responsive module when the flash process is aborted or interrupted. 1. When the Flash ECU screen displays an Error Message, select OK. 2. Turn the ignition to "off" and power down the StarSCAN(R). 3. Turn the vehicle ignition to the "On" position. 4. Power on the StarSCAN®. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5463 NOTE: If the technician was flashing a PCM, the tool may display "Unknown VIN". Disregard this. 5. Select (ECU) View. 6. Highlight the ECU that was being flashed. NOTE: The module may appear to be non-responsive. Highlight the module anyway. 7. Select More Options 8. Select ECU Flash 9. If the "Flash ECU" screen displays "Resident flash files for Part # XXXXX", the module should be recoverable. If the screen displays "No resident flash files found" the module is not recoverable. Does the Flash ECU screen display "No resident flash files found?" a. Yes >> The module must be replaced. b. No >> proceed to Step # 10. 10. Is a calibration file displayed on the StarSCAN(R)? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 11. b. No >> Select "Browse For New File" and follow on screen instructions. Highlight the calibration that was previously chosen. Select "Download to Scantool". When the file is downloaded to the scantool, select "Back" and proceed to Step # 11. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration. 12. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. 13. When the flash is complete, verify the "Resident flash file part number" matches the 'New PIN" of the appropriate calibration. 14. Proceed with the steps listed in the Service Bulletin to complete the service action.** NOTE: If after following the steps above, you are still having issues performing the flash reprogramming procedure using a specific StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(R) it is suggested to contact SPX/Miller Special Tools for service. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set NUMBER: 18-019-11 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 09, 2011 HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.03 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination For P2181 - Cooling System Performance OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flash reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to HB/HG vehicles equipped with a 3.7L or 5.7L engine (Sales code EKG or EZB) and a automatic transmission. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some customers may complain of a MIL illumination. Upon further investigation the Technician may find that P2181 - Cooling System Performance has been set. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH or StarMOBILE) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's other than the one listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the customer describes the symptom or if the technician finds the DTC, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: Install a battery charger to ensure battery voltage does not drop below 13.2 volts. Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-019-11 > Apr > 11 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2181 Set > Page 5469 a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label.** POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements NUMBER: 18-006-10 REV. C GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 18-006-10 REV. B, DATED MAY 26, 2010, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITIONAL 2008 MODELS. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 11.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MDS Driveability Improvements OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck 2007 - 2008 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen **2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger** **2008 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 - 2008 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to models equipped with a 5.7L engine (Sales code EZB). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience that the vehicle has a harsh engagement or has a buck/jerking feeling at low speeds of around 12 mph (19 kmh) to 15mph (24 kmh). The customer may also experience a harsh engagement or buck/jerking feeling during highway cruise control operation from 65 mph (105 kmh) to 75 mph (121 kmh). These conditions are caused by excessive MDS transitions. The MDS low speed engagement point has been changed to 21 mph (34 kmh). In addition to the MDS low speed engagement change, enhancements from V8 to V4 and V4 to V8 in all ambient temperatures and operating ranges have been made to make all the transition less noticeable to the customer. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-006-10C > Oct > 10 > Engine Controls - MDS Driveability Improvements > Page 5474 PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information> Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set NUMBER: 18-014-09 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: November 6, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-014-09 DATED MAY 9, 2009 AND 18-049-07 DATED DECEMBER 13, 2007 EXCEPT FOR THE 2006 XK/XH 4.7L MODELS WHICH ARE COVERED BY SAFETY RECALL H19 AND 18-028-07 DATED APRIL 21, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND ENGINES. THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION IS THE PREFERRED METHOD FOR FLASHING ECUs. HELP USING THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION FOR FLASHING AN ECU IS AVAILABLE BY SELECTING "HELP" THEN "HELP CONTENTS" AT THE TOP OF THE wiTECH DIAGNOSTIC APPLICATION WINDOW. THE wiTECH SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 10.01 OR HIGHER TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT or StarSCAN MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. WHENEVER A MODULE IS REPROGRAMMED, THE SOFTWARE IN THE DRBIII(R) MUST BE PROGRAMMED WITH THE LATEST REVISION LEVEL AVAILABLE. SUBJECT: FLASH: ESP System May Prematurely Activate Momentarily When Negotiating A Curve Or MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0340, P0344 or P0116 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango **2007 (HG) Aspen ** **2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - **2007** (WK) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2006** (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - **2007** (XK) Commander 2006 - **2007** (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2004 - 2006 (KJ) Liberty NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the HB/HG/WK/WH/XK/XH/KJ vehicles equipped with a 3.7L, 4.7L or 5.7L engine (sales code EKG, EVA, EVD, EZB or EZA).** NOTE: **This bulletin applies to the DR vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine (sales code EZB).** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may experience a premature and momentary activation of the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. The premature activation of the ESP system may or may not be accompanied with the illumination of the ESP indicator lamp located in the instrument cluster. The customer may experience the momentary ESP system activation on a "clover leaf type turn, at speeds of approximately 25 to 40 MPH (40 to 64 KPH). This could also be described as a lack of throttle response or hesitation. Driving over speed bumps at a slight angle can also cause the same ESP event accompanied by lack of throttle response. The customer may also complain of low idle speed. The customer may also experience MIL for one of the following Diagnostic Trouble Code: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5479 I. P0340 - Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor 1 ii. P0344 - Camshaft Position Sensor Intermittent - Bank 1 Sensor 1 iii. P0116 - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Performance DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R) or DRBIII(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. If the PCM software is up to date and the above mentioned DTC's are present then further diagnosis is required. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN Or wiTech: NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 8 - Electrical > Electronic Control Modules - Service Information > Module - Powertrain Control > Standard Procedures > PCM/ECM Programming - Gas. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. The wiTECH application will automatically present all DTCs after the flash and allow the tech to clear them. 2. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach it near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR DOMESTIC VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5480 NOTE: Whenever a module is reprogrammed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash process should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the flash procedure, remove any old flash files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone". b. "1998 - 2005 Diagnostics". c. "All (Except Below)". d. "Engine". e. "Module Display". f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. 3. Connect the DRBIII(R) to TechCONNECT. Open TechTOOLS and verify that the "DRBIII(R) Status: Connected" message is in the upper right corner of the TechTOOLS screen. 4. Enter the "PCM part # " recorded in Step # 2 in the "Parts Criteria" area and select "Show Updates". TechTOOLS will populate the appropriate flash file. 5. Select the flash file. 6. Select the "DRBIII" radio button which is next to the "Download/Update" button. 7. Select the "Download/Update" button. 8. Monitor the "Flash Download/Update Progress" window on the TechCONNECT and follow the instructions on TechCONNECT. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 9. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from TechCONNECT. 10. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 11. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 12. Download the flash file from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash". b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" as necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure as necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5481 NOTE: The following step is required by law. 15. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. REPAIR PROCEDURE FOR EXPORT VEHICLES USING DRBIII(R) AND DOWNLOADING THE FLASH FILE FROM DealerCONNECT: NOTE: Whenever a controller is programmed, the software in the DRBIII(R); must be programmed with the latest revision level available. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted and then follow the directions on the DRBIII(R). 1. Before beginning the reprogramming procedure, remove any old flash reprogramming files from the DRBIII(R) memory. To clear the memory from the MAIN MENU: a. Simultaneously press the "MORE" and "YES" keys. b. A screen will appear requesting a "COLD BOOT". c. Follow the on screen instructions by selecting the "F4" key. d. When the DRBIII(R) reboots to the MAIN MENU, proceed to Step # 2. 2. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position, determine the original part number of the PCM currently in the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "DRBIII(R) Standalone" b. "1998 - 2006 Diagnostics" C. "All (Except Below)" d. "Engine" e. "Module Display" f. Record the "PCM part # "on the repair order for later reference. g. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the vehicle. h. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the ITIL/ISIS PC and NULL modem cable. 3. Log into DealerCONNECT. Proceed to: Service / Repair - Flash. 4. Select vehicle Year, Model, and Engine (YME). Then select the "Submit" button at the bottom of the screen. 5. Compare the calibration part number available for flash reprogramming to the module part number recorded earlier. Select the new calibration if applicable. 6. Download the new calibration to the PC. 7. Using the "DRBIII - WINFLASH II" application on the PC, download the flash calibration file to the DRBIII(R) from the PC. 8. Disconnect the DRBIII(R) from the PC and NULL modem cable. 9. Open the hood, install a battery charger and verify that charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. 10. Connect the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition switch to the "Run" position (engine not running). 12. Reprogram the PCM by downloading the flash from the DRBIII(R) to the vehicle. Using the DRBIII(R) select: a. "Vehicle Flash" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-014-09A > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/Early ESP Actuation/DTC's Set > Page 5482 b. Follow the directions on the DRBIII(R) screen. When the flash process is complete, proceed to the next step. 13. Reset the "Pinion Factor" if necessary. 14. Perform the transmission Quick Learn Procedure if necessary. 15. Update the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) or Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM), Secret Key data if necessary. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKIM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. Check all modules using "Module Scan", record the DTC's, and erase these DTC's prior to returning the vehicle to the customer. Erase any DTC's in the PCM only after all other modules have had their DTC's erased. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 16. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Software Update label, p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory NUMBER: 18-003-08 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: January 19, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-044-07, DATED OCTOBER 12, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE THE ADDITION OF YEARS, MODELS AND CLEAN DATES. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.04 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination Due To Diagnostic Trouble Code P0524 - Engine Oil Pressure Too Low OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: **2007** - 2008 (DR/DH/DC/D1) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) **2007** - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango / Aspen **2007** - 2008 (LX) 300 / Magnum / Charger **2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets)** **2007 (L2) 300 (China)** **2007** - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee **2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets)** **2007** - 2008 (XK) Commander **2007 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets)** NOTE: This bulletin applies to the above listed vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine with MDS (sales code EZB) built before the following dates: ^ (HB/HG) built before August 15, 2007 (MDH 0814XX) ^ (LX) built before September 14, 2007 (MDH 0914XX) ^ (DR) built before August 16, 2007 (MDH 0816XX) ** (WK/WH/XK/XH) built before January 8, 2008 (MDH 0108XX)** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination due to the following Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC): P0524 - Engine Oil Pressure Too Low DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If other DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5487 If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.04 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5488 c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-003-08 > Jan > 08 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P0524 Stored in Memory > Page 5489 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls Torque Converter Shuddering NUMBER: 21-002-07 REV. E GROUP: Transmission DATE: December 21, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-002-07 REV. D, DATED NOVEMBER 8, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS REVISION INCLUDES THE REMOVAL OF KJ AND KA MODELS. THE KJ MODEL WILL BE ADDRESSED IN A SERVICE BULLETIN 21-020-07 AND KA MODELS WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE BULLETIN 21-021-07. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.03 OR HIGHER. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: Torque Converter Shudder OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software and replacing the torque converter as required. MODELS: 2007 (DR) Ram 1500 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2007 (JS) Sebring 2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets) 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/HB/JK/JS/LE/LX models built with a 41TE, 42RLE, or 62TE automatic transmission (Sales Codes DFF, DGV, or DG2). built on or before December 15, 2006 (MDH1215XX) and ND models with 42RLE built on or before January 2, 2007 (MDH0102XX). NOTE: **This bulletin DOES NOT apply to JS models with a 2.4L engine.** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience one or more of the following symptoms: 1. **Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (41TE JS), (62TE J5)** a. This condition can only occur after the vehicle has been driven and the torque convertor is past the break in period. Torque Converter break in can be confirmed with the StarSCAN(R). b. If experienced, the shudder may occur when the transmission temperature is between 38° C and 54° (100° F and 130° F) during steady state driving with the torque convertor in partial lock (EMCC) operation. The shudder feels like the vehicle is being driven over rumble strips. 2. Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE/62TE JS) a. This condition can occur due to abrupt torque converter clutch engagement during EMCC initialization. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5494 DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine/transmission systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Conditions and they can be verified, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURES BY SYMPTOM/CONDITION: **SYMPTOM/CONDITION 1 - Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (4ITE / 62TE JS)**: 1. Is the vehicle an LX/LE/L2 that has had Service Bulletin 21-002-07 or 21-002-07 REV. A been performed already? a. Yes >>> Proceed to Step # 3. b. No >>> Proceed to Step # 2. 2. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 3. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN® Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". SYMPTOM/CONDITION 2 - Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE / 62TE JS): Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5495 1. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 2. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". FLASH REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: When performing this Repair Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN®; must be programmed with 8.03 level software or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the run position. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5496 l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 7. After flash reprogramming, be sure to Perform the additional Repair Steps associated with each procedure. These steps may include VLP clear counters, Quick Learn and/or Re-enable TCC break in. It is important to perform these additional steps in the order listed for each repair. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5497 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral NUMBER: 18-035-07 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: May 18, 2007 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN ARE AVAILABLE VIA THE INTERNET. SUBJECT: FLASH: 545RFE Transmission Defaults To Neutral OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 545RFE transmission (sale code DGQ) built on or before March 26, 2007 (MDH 0326XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The transmission may default into neutral gear if the transmission gear selector is moved into "reverse gear range under certain operating conditions. The default into neutral gear is done to protect the transmission mechanical components from potential damage. New PCM software will monitor transmission hydraulic pressure and allow reverse gear engagement, if the transmission is in "reverse gear range and the transmission hydraulic pressure is sufficient to support reverse gear operation. DIAGNOSIS: Using a StarSCAN(R) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral > Page 5502 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING StarSCAN AND THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN® must be programmed with software release level 7.04 SPI or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, in order to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN® for your dealership's network. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network; refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide available on the website under the "download center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Retrieve the old ECU (PCM) part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-035-07 > May > 07 > Engine Controls - A/T May Default To Neutral > Page 5503 i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the PCM update is complete, select "OK". NOTE: Due to the ECU programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other electronic modules within the vehicle. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM or TCM. 6. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 NUMBER: 18-027-07 GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: April 17, 2007 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. SUBJECT: Flash: MIL Illumination Due To EGR Position Sensor DTC - P0404, P0405, or P0406 OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck (1500) 2006-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (LX/LE) 300 / Magnum / Charger 2006-2007 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK / XH) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine with MDS (sales code EZB) built on or before February 15, 2007 (MDH 0215XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience a Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illumination due to one or more of the following Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC): ==> P0404 - EGR Position Sensor Performance ==> P0405 - EGR Position Sensor Circuit Low ==> P0406 - EGR Position Sensor Circuit High DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DIG's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 > Page 5508 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 7.03 SPI or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Retrieve the old ECU part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-027-07 > Apr > 07 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC's P0404/P0405/P0406 > Page 5509 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 6. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery NUMBER: 18-001-06 REV. A GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: July 12, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-001-06, DATED JANUARY II, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS, YEARS AND A REVISED DISCUSSION ABOUT ABORTED FLASH REPROGRAMMING RECOVERY. SUBJECT: StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM) Abort Recovery Procedures OVERVIEW: This Bulletin provides guidelines to minimize flash reprogramming problems and recovery procedure information for failed flash attempts. MODELS: **2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis** 2006 - **2007** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2004 - **2007** (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (JK) Wrangler **2007 (JS) Sebring** **2007 (KA) Nitro** 2006 - **2007** (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2005 - **2007** (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger **2007 (MK) Compass** 2005 - **2007** (ND) Dakota **2007 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - **2007* (PT) PT Cruiser 2005 - **2007** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2007** (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: NOTE: Many of the reasons a flash reprogramming procedure may not complete are documented in this service bulletin. Occasionally a flash update procedure may not complete properly and/or the diagnostic equipment may lock up or become disconnected during the procedure. Flash Reprogramming is a "CRITICAL PROCESS"; an error may result in a no-start/failed control module. Most modules, encountering an interruption or failure while reprogramming, are recoverable. Replacing a module that is recoverable is not covered under the provisions of the warranty. This service bulletin covers items that may cause this condition, a process to restart the flash procedure, and miscellaneous information that will help prevent unnecessary replacement of control modules. GENERAL: Flash Reprogramming is only authorized when programming a generic module or by a specific SERVICE ACTION (Service Bulletin/Recall/Rapid Response Transmittal/Advance Service Information). CAUTION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5514 When updating a module because of a Service Action, it is important to follow the steps outlined in the Repair Procedure section of the Service Action. Procedures may differ depending on the module that is being reprogrammed. Review the entire Service Action prior to performing a flash reprogramming update. Often other parts may need to be serviced, replaced, or tested, prior to flash reprogramming, and ARE REQUIRED as part of completing the Service Action. COMMON CAUSES OF FLASH REPROGRAMMING ERRORS Interruptions, voltage problems, a variety of other outside interactions, and failure to follow the steps outlined in the Service Action can potentially interfere with the process. This document seeks to provide information to minimize problems associated with module flash reprogramming. SOFTWARE VERSIONS MUST BE CURRENT Before attempting a flash reprogramming session, make sure you have the most current software installed in the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM)). Refer to the current software release information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(TM) Tools > Latest News > Select the most recent release number. The technician will be able to see the applicable version numbers. Often, because of multiple StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM)s in the shop, not all devices will get updated in a timely manner. The installed StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM) software version and scan tool operating system version, (Fig. 2), can be verified from the "Home" screen as follows: StarMOBILE Desktop Client ^ Select "Tool Menu". ^ Select "Version Information" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5515 StarSCAN ^ Select "Show Shortcuts" ^ Select "Tool Menu". ^ Select "Version Information" Typical Tool Menu (Fig. 1) NOTE: The StarSCAN also displays the version number on the right side of the blue header at the top of each screen. NOTE: To read the version on the StarMOBILE(TM), it must be connected and the application running or the user will receive "N/A" for the "System" value. GENERAL NOTES FOR CABLES AND VEHICLE CONNECTIONS Consider ALL cables to be wear items. It is a good practice to have dedicated cables devoted to "Flash ONLY". Always have a spare StarSCAN(R) CH9404 (vehicle) cable available. Always have a spare StarMOBILE(TM) CH9804 (vehicle) cable available (blue cable end). Diagnosing vehicle cable problems Inspect vehicle cable connectors for potential problems that might cause communication interruptions. Use the information available on DealerCONNECT under: ^ eSupport (above the "Marketing" tab) ^ Under "Knowledge Center" - select "Find Answers" ^ In the "Enter link, error message, or topic" area, type "561" ^ In the "Search By" area, select "Answer ID" ^ At the next screen, select the "StarSCAN Flash Lockup.pdf" link to access the information to diagnose suspect vehicle cable continuity. FLASH REPROGRAMMING PROBLEM PREVENTION ^ Follow the steps outlined in the Service Action. ^ Pay attention to the screen prompts displayed during the flash process. ^ Replace worn cables. ^ Verify the vehicle is equipped with a known good battery. ^ Ensure the battery charger charging rate provides approximately 13.2 - 13.8 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. **ABORTED FLASH REPROGRAMMING RECOVERY** ** The following steps may help recover a non-responsive module when the flash process is aborted or interrupted. 1. When the Flash ECU screen displays an Error Message, select OK. 2. Turn the ignition to "off" and power down the StarSCAN(R). 3. Turn the vehicle ignition to the "On" position. 4. Power on the StarSCAN®. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5516 NOTE: If the technician was flashing a PCM, the tool may display "Unknown VIN". Disregard this. 5. Select (ECU) View. 6. Highlight the ECU that was being flashed. NOTE: The module may appear to be non-responsive. Highlight the module anyway. 7. Select More Options 8. Select ECU Flash 9. If the "Flash ECU" screen displays "Resident flash files for Part # XXXXX", the module should be recoverable. If the screen displays "No resident flash files found" the module is not recoverable. Does the Flash ECU screen display "No resident flash files found?" a. Yes >> The module must be replaced. b. No >> proceed to Step # 10. 10. Is a calibration file displayed on the StarSCAN(R)? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 11. b. No >> Select "Browse For New File" and follow on screen instructions. Highlight the calibration that was previously chosen. Select "Download to Scantool". When the file is downloaded to the scantool, select "Back" and proceed to Step # 11. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration. 12. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. 13. When the flash is complete, verify the "Resident flash file part number" matches the 'New PIN" of the appropriate calibration. 14. Proceed with the steps listed in the Service Bulletin to complete the service action.** NOTE: If after following the steps above, you are still having issues performing the flash reprogramming procedure using a specific StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(R) it is suggested to contact SPX/Miller Special Tools for service. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic Technical Service Bulletin # F43 Date: 061001 Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic October 2006 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall F43 Reprogram PCM Transmission Shift Logic Models 2007 (KA) Dodge Nitro (built through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080916). 2007 (KJ) Jeep(R) Liberty (built through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080916). 2007 (DR) Dodge Ram Pick Up Truck (1500 Series) (built at the St.Louis North assembly plant through August 9, 2006 - MDH 080915). 2007 (HB) Dodge Durango (built through August 14, 2006 - MDH 081406). 2007 (LX) Chrysler 300, Dodge Magnum and Charger (built through August 10, 2006 - MDH 081017). 2007 (ND) Dodge Dakota (built through August 14, 2006 - MDH 081403). NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with a 42RLE transmission. IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build periods have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The software programmed into the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on about 4,700 of the above vehicles may allow the transmission to shift into first gear if the operator shifts from "Drive" to "Neutral" and back into the "Drive" position. A shift into first gear at speeds above 40 mph could cause a momentary lock up of the drive wheels, which can result in a crash without prior warning Repair The PCM must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information Due to the likelihood that the required labels are already in your parts inventory, no labels will be distributed initially. The following label may be ordered as needed. Each vehicle requires application of the labels shown. Special Tools Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5522 These special tools are required to perform this repair. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by DaimlerChrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive three copies of this dealer recall notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to DaimlerChrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this recall. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a DaimlerChrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5523 Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations DaimlerChrysler Corporation Service Procedure A. Reprogram the Powertrain Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 7.02 or later. To update your StarSCAN(R) diagnostic tool via the internet, the StarSCAN software must be at version 7.02 and properly configured to work with your dealership's network. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. If the battery charger is timer controlled, set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN ethernet cable to the StarSCAN and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable to the StarSCAN and the vehicle. 4. Place the Ignition in the "RUN" position, then Power "ON" the StarSCAN. 5. Retrieve the old PCM part number. With the StarSCAN on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Touch the screen to highlight "PCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for statement near the top of "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. 6. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarSCAN. With the StarSCAN on the "ECU Overview" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description is the same as the number recorded in Step 5e, then the PCM is up to date and no further action is required. If the part number is different, continue with Step 6c. c. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarSCAN screen. d. Select "Download to Scan Tool". e. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". f. Highlight the listed calibration. g. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. h. When the update is completed, select "OK". 7. Disconnect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable from the vehicle. Wait until the StarSCAN screen reads "Vehicle Disconnected", then press "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5524 8. Reconnect the CH9404 StarSCAN vehicle cable to the vehicle. 9. Retrieve the PCM part number. With the StarSCAN on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Touch the screen to highlight "PCM" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set in other modules (ABS, TCM, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTC's". Press "Clear All Stored DTC's" if there are any DTC's shown on the list. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN and battery charger from the vehicle. B. Install the Authorized Modifications Label: 1. Type or print (with a ballpoint pen) the recall number, dealer code and date on the Authorized Modifications Label (Figure 1). 2. Attach the label near the VECI label and then close the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > F43 > Oct > 06 > Recall - PCM Update for A/T Shift Logic > Page 5525 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > NHTSA06V341000 > Sep > 06 > Recall 06V341000: PCM Upgrade for A/T Shift Logic PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V341000: PCM Upgrade for A/T Shift Logic MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Chrysler/300 2007 Dodge/Charger 2007 Dodge/Dakota 2007 Dodge/Durango 2007 Dodge/Magnum 2007 Dodge/Nitro 4X2 2007 Dodge/RAM 1500 2007 Jeep/Liberty 2007 MANUFACTURER: DaimlerChrysler Corporation NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V341000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: September 06, 2006 COMPONENT: Power Train: Automatic Transmission POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 2333 SUMMARY: On certain passenger and sport utility vehicles and pickup trucks equipped with automatic transmissions, the software programmed into the powertrain control module can cause a momentary lock up of the drive wheels if the vehicle is traveling over 40 MPH and the operator shifts from drive to neutral and back to drive. CONSEQUENCE: If the drive wheels locked up, loss of vehicle control could occur increasing the risk of a crash. REMEDY: Dealers will reprogram the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) free of charge. The recall began on October 2, 2006. Owners may contact DaimlerChrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: DaimlerChrysler recall No. F43. Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5534 When updating a module because of a Service Action, it is important to follow the steps outlined in the Repair Procedure section of the Service Action. Procedures may differ depending on the module that is being reprogrammed. Review the entire Service Action prior to performing a flash reprogramming update. Often other parts may need to be serviced, replaced, or tested, prior to flash reprogramming, and ARE REQUIRED as part of completing the Service Action. COMMON CAUSES OF FLASH REPROGRAMMING ERRORS Interruptions, voltage problems, a variety of other outside interactions, and failure to follow the steps outlined in the Service Action can potentially interfere with the process. This document seeks to provide information to minimize problems associated with module flash reprogramming. SOFTWARE VERSIONS MUST BE CURRENT Before attempting a flash reprogramming session, make sure you have the most current software installed in the scan tool (StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM)). Refer to the current software release information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info > StarSCAN(R) and StarMOBILE(TM) Tools > Latest News > Select the most recent release number. The technician will be able to see the applicable version numbers. Often, because of multiple StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM)s in the shop, not all devices will get updated in a timely manner. The installed StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(TM) software version and scan tool operating system version, (Fig. 2), can be verified from the "Home" screen as follows: StarMOBILE Desktop Client ^ Select "Tool Menu". ^ Select "Version Information" Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5535 StarSCAN ^ Select "Show Shortcuts" ^ Select "Tool Menu". ^ Select "Version Information" Typical Tool Menu (Fig. 1) NOTE: The StarSCAN also displays the version number on the right side of the blue header at the top of each screen. NOTE: To read the version on the StarMOBILE(TM), it must be connected and the application running or the user will receive "N/A" for the "System" value. GENERAL NOTES FOR CABLES AND VEHICLE CONNECTIONS Consider ALL cables to be wear items. It is a good practice to have dedicated cables devoted to "Flash ONLY". Always have a spare StarSCAN(R) CH9404 (vehicle) cable available. Always have a spare StarMOBILE(TM) CH9804 (vehicle) cable available (blue cable end). Diagnosing vehicle cable problems Inspect vehicle cable connectors for potential problems that might cause communication interruptions. Use the information available on DealerCONNECT under: ^ eSupport (above the "Marketing" tab) ^ Under "Knowledge Center" - select "Find Answers" ^ In the "Enter link, error message, or topic" area, type "561" ^ In the "Search By" area, select "Answer ID" ^ At the next screen, select the "StarSCAN Flash Lockup.pdf" link to access the information to diagnose suspect vehicle cable continuity. FLASH REPROGRAMMING PROBLEM PREVENTION ^ Follow the steps outlined in the Service Action. ^ Pay attention to the screen prompts displayed during the flash process. ^ Replace worn cables. ^ Verify the vehicle is equipped with a known good battery. ^ Ensure the battery charger charging rate provides approximately 13.2 - 13.8 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. **ABORTED FLASH REPROGRAMMING RECOVERY** ** The following steps may help recover a non-responsive module when the flash process is aborted or interrupted. 1. When the Flash ECU screen displays an Error Message, select OK. 2. Turn the ignition to "off" and power down the StarSCAN(R). 3. Turn the vehicle ignition to the "On" position. 4. Power on the StarSCAN®. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-001-06A > Jul > 06 > Engine Controls - Flash Reprogramming Abort Recovery > Page 5536 NOTE: If the technician was flashing a PCM, the tool may display "Unknown VIN". Disregard this. 5. Select (ECU) View. 6. Highlight the ECU that was being flashed. NOTE: The module may appear to be non-responsive. Highlight the module anyway. 7. Select More Options 8. Select ECU Flash 9. If the "Flash ECU" screen displays "Resident flash files for Part # XXXXX", the module should be recoverable. If the screen displays "No resident flash files found" the module is not recoverable. Does the Flash ECU screen display "No resident flash files found?" a. Yes >> The module must be replaced. b. No >> proceed to Step # 10. 10. Is a calibration file displayed on the StarSCAN(R)? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 11. b. No >> Select "Browse For New File" and follow on screen instructions. Highlight the calibration that was previously chosen. Select "Download to Scantool". When the file is downloaded to the scantool, select "Back" and proceed to Step # 11. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration. 12. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. 13. When the flash is complete, verify the "Resident flash file part number" matches the 'New PIN" of the appropriate calibration. 14. Proceed with the steps listed in the Service Bulletin to complete the service action.** NOTE: If after following the steps above, you are still having issues performing the flash reprogramming procedure using a specific StarSCAN(R)/StarMOBILE(R) it is suggested to contact SPX/Miller Special Tools for service. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5544 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5547 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5552 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5553 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5554 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5555 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5558 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5559 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5560 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5561 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5564 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5567 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5571 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5572 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5573 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5578 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5579 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5580 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5581 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5584 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5585 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5586 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5587 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5590 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5593 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5598 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5601 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5608 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5611 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5616 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5617 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5618 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5619 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5622 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5623 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5624 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5625 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5628 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5631 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5635 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5636 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5637 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5642 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5643 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5644 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5645 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5648 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5649 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5650 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5651 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5654 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5657 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5662 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5665 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accumulator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Valve Body Components The valve body consists of a cast aluminum valve body, a separator plate, and a transfer plate. The valve body contains valves and check balls that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch and frictional clutches. The valve body contains the following components: - Solenoid switch valve - Manual valve - Low/reverse shuttle valve - 5 Accumulators Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5670 - 7 check balls Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Accumulator, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5671 Accumulator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for a visual aid in determining valve location, operation and design. SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE The Solenoid Switch Valve (SSV) controls the direction of the transmission fluid when the L/R-TCC solenoid is energized. The Solenoid Switch Valve controls line pressure from the LR-TCC solenoid. In 1st gear, the SSV will be in the downshifted position, thus directing fluid to the L/R clutch circuit. In 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and fifth gears, the solenoid switch valve will be in the upshifted position and directs the fluid into the torque converter clutch (TCC) circuit. When shifting into 1st gear, a special hydraulic sequence is performed to ensure SSV movement into the downshifted position. The L/R pressure switch is monitored to confirm SSV movement. If the movement is not confirmed (the L/R pressure switch does not close), 2nd gear is substituted for 1st. A DTC will be set after three unsuccessful attempts are made to get into 1st gear in one given key start. MANUAL VALVE The manual valve is a relay valve. The purpose of the manual valve is to direct fluid to the correct circuit needed for a specific gear or driving range. The manual valve, as the name implies, is manually operated by the driver with a lever located on the top of the valve body. The valve is connected mechanically by a cable to the gearshift mechanism. The valve is held in each of its positions by a roller detent spring (2) that engages the roostercomb of the TRS selector plate (1). LOW/REVERSE SWITCH VALVE The low/reverse switch valve allows the low/reverse clutch to be operated by either the LR/CC solenoid or the MS solenoid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM is located on the right inner fender. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5676 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5677 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5678 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5679 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5685 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5690 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5691 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF + 4 Fluid Usage NUMBER: 21-014-07 GROUP: Transmission DATE: October 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-010-06, DATED APRIL 14, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES THE ADDITION OF THE ASIAN WARNER (AW4) TRANSMISSION AND ADDITIONAL MODELS AND YEARS. SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Fluid Usage ATF+4 (Type M59602) MODELS: 1989 - 1995 (AA) Spirit/Acclaim/Lebaron Sedan 1989 - 2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1989 - 1993 (AC) Dynasty/New Yorker/New Yorker Salon 1989 - 1993 (AD) Ram Truck 1989 - 1994 (AG) Daytona 1989 (AH) Lancer/Lebaron GTS 1989 - 1995 (AJ) Lebaron Coupe/Lebaron Convertible 1989 - 1990 (AK) Aries/Reliant 1989 - 1990 (AL) Horizon/Omni 1989 (AM) Diplomat/Gran Fury/New Yorker fifth Avenue 1989 - 2004 (AN) Dakota 1989 - 1994 (AP) Shadow/Sundance 1990 - 1991 (AQ) Maserati 1990 - 1993 (AY) Imperial/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1994 - 2003 (BR/BE) Ram Truck 2004 - **2008** (CS) Pacifica 1998-2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - **2008** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2007 - **2008** (DC) Ram 3500 Cab Chassis 1995 - 2000 (FJ) Sebring/Avenger/Talon 1996 - 2000 (GS) Chrysler Voyager (International Market) 2004 - **2008** (HB) Durango **2008 (HG) Aspen** 1995 - 2000 (JA) Cirrus/Stratus/Breeze Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5692 2007 - **2008** (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - **2008** (JS) Avenger/Sebring/Sebring Convertible 1996 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty **2008 (KK) Liberty** **2008 (L2) 300C (China)** 1993 - 2004 (LH) Concorde/Intrepid/Vision/LHS/New Yorker /300M 2005 - **2008** (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 1996 - 2000 (NS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon 2002 - 2003 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2001 - **2008** (PT) PT Cruiser 1997 - 2002 (PR) Prowler 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager **2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan/Grand Voyager (U.S. & International Markets)** 1997-2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2001 - 2004 (WG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) Vehicles equipped with Gas engines 1999 - 2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2008** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2008** (XK/XH) Commander 1989 - 1995 (YJ) Wrangler **1989 - 2001 (XJ) Cherokee** **1989 - 1993 (MJ) Comanche** 1996 - 1998 (ZG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 1994 - 1998 (ZJ) Grand Cherokee/Grand Wagoneer NOTE: **AWA (Asian Warner) transmission are now included in this Service Bulletin. ATF+4(R) is recommended for AW-4 (Asian Warner) transmissions** NOTE: This Service Bulletin DOES NOT apply to Sprinter transmissions, Crossfire transmissions, MK/PM vehicles equipped with Continuously Variable Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5693 Transmission (CVT) and WG vehicles equipped with a diesel engine (sales code ENF) and a W5J400 or NAG1 transmission (sales code DGJ). DISCUSSION: ATF+4(R) - (Type 9602) is being used as factory fill for Chrysler Group automatic transmissions. ATF+4(R) is recommended for all vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group automatic transmissions EXCEPT FOR THOSE LISTED IN THE NOTE ABOVE. NOTE: ATF+4(R) must always be used in vehicles that were originally filled with ATF+4(R). DO NOT USE ANY OTHER FLUID. NOTE: ATF+4(R) is backward compatible with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+. Additionally, ATF+4(R) can be used to top off vehicles that used ATF+3, ATF+2, or ATF+. NOTE: If ATF+4® is used to service models originally filled with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+ the fluid maintenance schedules listed for that model does not change. The service interval currently in effect for a given model should continue to be followed. Refer to the Service or Owners manual for maintenance schedule directions. In general terms, If ATF+, ATF+2 or ATF+3 was the recommended fluid, it is now recommended to use ATF+4® BENEFITS ^ Better anti-wear properties ^ Improved rust/corrosion prevention ^ Controls oxidation ^ Eliminates deposits ^ Controls friction ^ Retains anti-foaming properties ^ Superior properties for low temperature operation FLUID COLOR Mopar ATF+4(R) has exceptional durability. However, the red dye used in ATF+4(R) is not permanent; as the fluid ages it may become darker or appear brown in color. ATF+4(R) also has a unique odor that may change with age. With ATF+4(R) fluid, color and odor are no longer indicators of fluid condition and do not necessarily support a fluid change. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5694 Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - ATF+4 Fluid Usage/Applications NUMBER: 21-010-06 GROUP: Transmission DATE: April 14, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-004-04, DATED MARCH 16, 2004, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Automatic Transmission Fluid Usage ATF+4 (Type M59602) MODELS: 1989 - 1995 (AA) Spirit/Acclaim/Lebaron Sedan 1989 - 2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1989 - 1993 (AC) Dynasty/New Yorker/New Yorker Salon 1989 - 1993 (AD) Ram Truck 1989 - 1994 (AG) Daytona 1989 (AH) Lancer/Lebaron GTS 1989 - 1995 (AJ) Lebaron Coupe/Lebaron Convertible 1989 - 1990 (AK) Aries/Reliant 1989 - 1990 (AL) Horizon/Omni 1989 (AM) Diplomat/Gran Fury/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1989 - 2004 (AN) Dakota 1989 - 1994 (AP) Shadow/Sundance 1990 - 1991 (AQ) Maserati 1990 - 1993 (AY) Imperial/New Yorker Fifth Avenue 1994 - 2003 (BR/BE) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 1998 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2007 (DC) Ram 3500 Cab Chassis 1995 - 2000 (FJ) Sebring/Avenger/Talon 1996 - 2000 (CS) Chrysler Voyager (International Market) 2004 - 2007 (HB) Durango 1995 - 2000 (JA) Cirrus/Stratus/Breeze 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5695 2007 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 1996 - 2000 (JX) Sebring Convertible 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 1993 - 2004 (LH) Concorde/Intrepid/Vision/LHS/New Yorker /300M 2005 - 2007 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 1996 - 2000 (NS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon 2002 - 2003 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (PT) PT Cruiser 1997 - 2002 (PR) Prowler 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 1997 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2001 - 2004 (WG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) Vehicles equipped with Gas engines 1999 - 2004 (WJ) Grand Cherokee 2005 - 2007 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK/XH) Commander 1989 - 1995 (YJ) Wrangler 1996 - 1998 (ZG) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 1994 - 1998 (ZJ) Grand Cherokee/Grand Wagoneer NOTE: This Service Bulletin DOES NOT apply to AW-4 transmissions, Sprinter transmissions, Crossfire transmissions, MK/PM vehicles equipped with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) and WG vehicles equipped with a diesel engine (sales code ENF) and a W5J400 or NAG1 transmission (sales code DGJ). DISCUSSION: ATF+4(R) - (Type 9602) is being used as factory fill for Chrysler Group automatic transmissions. ATF+4(R) is recommended for all vehicles equipped with Chrysler Group automatic transmissions EXCEPT FOR THOSE NOTED ABOVE. NOTE: ATF+4(R) must always be used in vehicles that were originally filled with ATF+4(R). DO NOT USE ANY OTHER FLUID. NOTE: ATF+4(R) is backward compatible with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+. Additionally, ATF+4 can be used to top off vehicles that used ATF+3, ATF+2, or ATF+. NOTE: If ATF+4(R) is used to service models originally filled with ATF+3, ATF+2, and ATF+ the fluid maintenance schedules listed for that model does not change. The service interval currently in effect for a given model should continue to be followed. Refer to the Service or Owners manual for maintenance schedule directions. In general terms, If ATF+, ATF+2 or ATF+3 was the recommended fluid, it is now recommended to use ATF+4. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5696 BENEFITS ^ Better anti-wear properties ^ Improved rust/corrosion prevention ^ Controls oxidation ^ Eliminates deposits ^ Controls friction ^ Retains anti-foaming properties ^ Superior properties for low temperature operation FLUID COLOR Mopar ATF+4(R) has exceptional durability. However, the red dye used in ATF+4(R) is not permanent; as the fluid ages it may become darker or appear brown in color. ATF+4(R) also has a unique odor that may change with age. With ATF+4(R) fluid, color and odor are no longer indicators of fluid condition and do not necessarily support a fluid change. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity 42RLE -Service Fill .............................................................................................................................. .................................................................. 3.8Liters (4.0 Qt) -Overhaul Fill ........................................ .................................................................................................................................................... 8.3Liters (17.6 Pt) 545RFE -Service Fill ............................................................................................................................ ...................................................................... 5.2Liters (11 Pt) -Overhaul Fill ...................................... .................................................................................................................................................. 13.33Liters (28.0 Pt) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5699 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid ............................................................................................................. .......................................................... Mopar ATF +4 NOTE: Dextron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 5702 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 5703 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid. - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level. - engine coolant entering the fluid. - internal failure that generates debris. - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown). - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair. The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Level Check - 545RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart. NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 5706 transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 5707 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the diagnosis. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 5708 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with a suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer, or other suitable tool). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 5709 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid and adjust as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to the diagnosis. CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5713 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with a suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer, or other suitable tool). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Tighten bolts to ....................................................................................................................... .................................................. 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5721 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5722 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5723 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5724 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5725 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5726 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5729 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5730 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5731 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5732 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5733 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5734 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5737 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5740 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pump, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Fluid Pump: Testing and Inspection STANDARD PROCEDURE - OIL PUMP VOLUME CHECK Measuring the oil pump output volume will determine if sufficient oil flow to the transmission oil cooler exists, and whether or not an internal transmission failure is present. Verify that the transmission fluid is at the proper level. Refer to the Fluid Level Check procedure. If necessary, fill the transmission to the proper level with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. 1. Disconnect the To cooler line at the cooler inlet and place a collecting container under the disconnected line. CAUTION: With the fluid set at the proper level, fluid collection should not exceed (1) quart or internal damage to the transmission may occur. 2. Run the engine at 1800 rpm, with the shift selector in neutral. Verify that the transmission fluid temperature is below 104.5° C (220° F) for this test. 3. If one quart of transmission fluid is collected in the container in 30 seconds or less, oil pump flow volume is within acceptable limits. If fluid flow is intermittent, or it takes more than 30 seconds to collect one quart of fluid, refer to the Hydraulic Pressure tests for further diagnosis. 4. Re-connect the To cooler line to the transmission cooler inlet. 5. Refill the transmission to proper level. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tow/haul indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tow/haul indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The tow/haul indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text TOW/HAUL in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the tow/haul indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The tow/haul indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5749 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tow/haul indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the tow/haul function of the tow/haul switch has been selected, revising the shift schedule of the electronically controlled automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tow/haul indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the tow/haul indicator for the following reasons: - Tow/Haul Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic tow/haul indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the tow/haul shift schedule has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tow/haul indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tow/haul indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5754 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135° C (275° F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5760 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5763 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tow/haul indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tow/haul indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The tow/haul indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text TOW/HAUL in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the tow/haul indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The tow/haul indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5768 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tow/haul indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the tow/haul function of the tow/haul switch has been selected, revising the shift schedule of the electronically controlled automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tow/haul indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the tow/haul indicator for the following reasons: - Tow/Haul Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic tow/haul indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the tow/haul shift schedule has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tow/haul indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tow/haul indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5772 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5773 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5774 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tow/haul overdrive OFF (control) switch is located in the shift lever arm. The switch is a momentary contact device that signals the PCM to toggle current status of the overdrive function. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5777 Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION At key-on, overdrive operation is allowed. Pressing the switch once causes the tow/haul overdrive OFF mode to be entered and the Tow/Haul lamp to be illuminated. Pressing the switch a second time causes normal overdrive operation to be restored and the tow/haul lamp to be turned off. The tow/haul overdrive OFF mode defaults to ON after the ignition switch is cycled OFF and ON. The normal position for the control switch is the ON position. The switch must be in this position to energize the solenoid and allow a 3-4 upshift. The control switch indicator light illuminates only when the tow/haul overdrive switch is turned to the OFF position, or when illuminated by the transmission control module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5780 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5785 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5786 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5787 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5788 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5791 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5792 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5793 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5794 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5797 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5800 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM is located on the right inner fender. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5806 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5807 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5808 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5809 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5813 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 230 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A104 18YL/RD 85 GROUND Z915 20BK 86 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20VT/YL 87 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18YL/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5816 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5822 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5823 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5824 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5825 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5826 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5827 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5830 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5831 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5832 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5833 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5834 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5835 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5838 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5841 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5845 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5846 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5847 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tow/haul overdrive OFF (control) switch is located in the shift lever arm. The switch is a momentary contact device that signals the PCM to toggle current status of the overdrive function. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5850 Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION At key-on, overdrive operation is allowed. Pressing the switch once causes the tow/haul overdrive OFF mode to be entered and the Tow/Haul lamp to be illuminated. Pressing the switch a second time causes normal overdrive operation to be restored and the tow/haul lamp to be turned off. The tow/haul overdrive OFF mode defaults to ON after the ignition switch is cycled OFF and ON. The normal position for the control switch is the ON position. The switch must be in this position to energize the solenoid and allow a 3-4 upshift. The control switch indicator light illuminates only when the tow/haul overdrive switch is turned to the OFF position, or when illuminated by the transmission control module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5853 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5858 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5863 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5864 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5865 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5866 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5869 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5870 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5871 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5872 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5875 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5878 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5883 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5884 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5885 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5886 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5887 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5888 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5889 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5890 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5893 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5894 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5895 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5896 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5897 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5898 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5899 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5900 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5903 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5906 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5911 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5912 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5913 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5918 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5919 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5920 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5921 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5924 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5925 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5926 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5927 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5930 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5933 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shifter A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The gear shift mechanism provides six shift positions which are: - Park (P) - Reverse (R) - Neutral (N) - Drive (D) - Manual second (2) - Manual low (1) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5938 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION MANUAL LOW (1) range provides FIRST gear only. Overrun braking is also provided in this range. MANUAL SECOND (2) range provides FIRST and SECOND gear only. DRIVE range provides FIRST, SECOND, THIRD and OVERDRIVE FOURTH and FIFTH gear ranges. The shift into OVERDRIVE FOURTH and FIFTH gear range occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into D THIRD gear range. No further movement of the shift mechanism is required to complete the 3-4 or 4-5 shifts. The FOURTH and FIFTH gear upshifts occurs automatically when the overdrive selector switch is in the ON position. An upshift to FOURTH and FIFTH gears may not occur or may be delayed in some of the possible shift schedules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the steering column opening cover (2). 2. Remove the steering column opening reinforcement (1). 3. Remove the tilt lever knob. 4. Remove the upper (1) and lower (3) column shroud. 5. Remove and discard the brake light switch (5). 6. Loosen the column bolts and lower the column enough to allow clearance for the gear shift lever removal. 7. Disconnect the tow/haul switch harness. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5941 8. Disconnect the shift cable from the shift lever (2). 9. Remove the SKIM. 10. Remove the gear shift lever mounting screws and remove the lever (2). 11. Remove the blocker pin (1) from the inhibit link slot. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5942 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the lever assembly (2) using care to install the pin in the blocker to slider slot (1) and install the mounting screws and tighten to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 2. Cycle the key from ACC to RUN and ensure that the blocker does not stick or bind. 3. Turn the key to the OFF position and ensure that the shifter will not pull from the PARK position. 4. Connect the tow/haul switch harness. NOTE: Route and tie off harness to original location. 5. Connect the shift cable to the lever. 6. Ensure the gear shift lever and transmission are in the PARK position and snap the cable adjust clip in place. 7. Install a new brake light switch (5). 8. Install the SKIM and halo. 9. Install the upper (1) and lower (3) column shroud. 10. Install the tilt lever knob. 11. Install the column back into place and tighten the four nuts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5943 12. Install the steering column opening reinforcement (1). 13. Install the steering column opening cover (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE 1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be possible in any other gear position. 2. With the shift lever in the: a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible. d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5948 Shift Cable: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE NOTE: Always run the shift lever test using the scan tool to help diagnose a potential TRS problem Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the transmission range sensor may be faulty. Gearshift Adjustment Procedure 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Release cable adjuster lock tab (3) (underneath the steering column) to unlock cable. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Disengage the cable eyelet from the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK position. 6. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate when park lock is engaged. 7. Snap the cable eyelet onto the transmission manual shift lever. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock shift cable by pressing cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check engine starting. Engine should start only in PARK and NEUTRAL. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket, RFE transmission equipped vehicles. 4. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket (2), RLE transmission equipped vehicles. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5951 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the dash panel insulation pad as necessary to access the gearshift cable grommet (2). 7. Remove grommet (2) from the dash panel. 8. Remove any steering column (1) trim necessary to access the gearshift cable (2) and BTSI mechanism. 9. Disconnect the BTSI wiring connector (5). 10. Disconnect cable at lower column bracket and shift lever pin and pull the cable through the dash panel opening into the vehicle. 11. Remove gearshift cable (2) from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5952 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the transmission end of the gearshift cable (1) through the opening in the dash panel. 2. Seat the cable grommet (2) into the dash panel opening. 3. Snap the cable into the steering column (1) bracket so the retaining ears are engaged and snap the cable eyelet onto the shift lever ball stud. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Place the transmission manual shift lever in the "PARK" detent (rearmost) position and rotate prop shaft to ensure transmission is in PARK. 6. Route the gearshift cable (1) through the transmission mounting bracket (2) and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever (3) ball stud, RLE transmission equipped vehicles. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5953 7. Route the gearshift cable (1) through the transmission mounting bracket and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever (3) ball stud, RFE transmission equipped vehicles. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock the shift cable adjustment by pressing the cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check for proper operation of the transmission range sensor. 11. Adjust the gearshift cable as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5958 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5963 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135° C (275° F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering Torque Converter: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering NUMBER: 21-002-07 REV. E GROUP: Transmission DATE: December 21, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-002-07 REV. D, DATED NOVEMBER 8, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS REVISION INCLUDES THE REMOVAL OF KJ AND KA MODELS. THE KJ MODEL WILL BE ADDRESSED IN A SERVICE BULLETIN 21-020-07 AND KA MODELS WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE BULLETIN 21-021-07. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.03 OR HIGHER. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: Torque Converter Shudder OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software and replacing the torque converter as required. MODELS: 2007 (DR) Ram 1500 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2007 (JS) Sebring 2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets) 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/HB/JK/JS/LE/LX models built with a 41TE, 42RLE, or 62TE automatic transmission (Sales Codes DFF, DGV, or DG2). built on or before December 15, 2006 (MDH1215XX) and ND models with 42RLE built on or before January 2, 2007 (MDH0102XX). NOTE: **This bulletin DOES NOT apply to JS models with a 2.4L engine.** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience one or more of the following symptoms: 1. **Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (41TE JS), (62TE J5)** a. This condition can only occur after the vehicle has been driven and the torque convertor is past the break in period. Torque Converter break in can be confirmed with the StarSCAN(R). b. If experienced, the shudder may occur when the transmission temperature is between 38° C and 54° (100° F and 130° F) during steady state driving with the torque convertor in partial lock (EMCC) operation. The shudder feels like the vehicle is being driven over rumble strips. 2. Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE/62TE JS) a. This condition can occur due to abrupt torque converter clutch engagement during EMCC initialization. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5972 DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine/transmission systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Conditions and they can be verified, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURES BY SYMPTOM/CONDITION: **SYMPTOM/CONDITION 1 - Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (4ITE / 62TE JS)**: 1. Is the vehicle an LX/LE/L2 that has had Service Bulletin 21-002-07 or 21-002-07 REV. A been performed already? a. Yes >>> Proceed to Step # 3. b. No >>> Proceed to Step # 2. 2. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 3. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN® Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". SYMPTOM/CONDITION 2 - Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE / 62TE JS): Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5973 1. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 2. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". FLASH REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: When performing this Repair Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN®; must be programmed with 8.03 level software or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the run position. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5974 l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 7. After flash reprogramming, be sure to Perform the additional Repair Steps associated with each procedure. These steps may include VLP clear counters, Quick Learn and/or Re-enable TCC break in. It is important to perform these additional steps in the order listed for each repair. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5975 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering NUMBER: 21-002-07 REV. E GROUP: Transmission DATE: December 21, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 21-002-07 REV. D, DATED NOVEMBER 8, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS REVISION INCLUDES THE REMOVAL OF KJ AND KA MODELS. THE KJ MODEL WILL BE ADDRESSED IN A SERVICE BULLETIN 21-020-07 AND KA MODELS WILL BE ADDRESSED IN SERVICE BULLETIN 21-021-07. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.03 OR HIGHER. StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: Torque Converter Shudder OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) with new software and replacing the torque converter as required. MODELS: 2007 (DR) Ram 1500 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2007 (JS) Sebring 2007 (LE) 300C/300 Touring (International Markets) 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2007 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to DR/HB/JK/JS/LE/LX models built with a 41TE, 42RLE, or 62TE automatic transmission (Sales Codes DFF, DGV, or DG2). built on or before December 15, 2006 (MDH1215XX) and ND models with 42RLE built on or before January 2, 2007 (MDH0102XX). NOTE: **This bulletin DOES NOT apply to JS models with a 2.4L engine.** SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The vehicle operator may experience one or more of the following symptoms: 1. **Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (41TE JS), (62TE J5)** a. This condition can only occur after the vehicle has been driven and the torque convertor is past the break in period. Torque Converter break in can be confirmed with the StarSCAN(R). b. If experienced, the shudder may occur when the transmission temperature is between 38° C and 54° (100° F and 130° F) during steady state driving with the torque convertor in partial lock (EMCC) operation. The shudder feels like the vehicle is being driven over rumble strips. 2. Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE/62TE JS) a. This condition can occur due to abrupt torque converter clutch engagement during EMCC initialization. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5981 DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine/transmission systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's other than those listed above are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Conditions and they can be verified, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURES BY SYMPTOM/CONDITION: **SYMPTOM/CONDITION 1 - Transmission Shudder - (42RLE), (4ITE / 62TE JS)**: 1. Is the vehicle an LX/LE/L2 that has had Service Bulletin 21-002-07 or 21-002-07 REV. A been performed already? a. Yes >>> Proceed to Step # 3. b. No >>> Proceed to Step # 2. 2. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 3. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming, the following must be performed: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN® Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". SYMPTOM/CONDITION 2 - Torque Converter Pull In Bump - (41TE / 62TE JS): Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5982 1. Replace the Torque Converter - Use the appropriate part number listed in the parts table above Follow detailed service procedures listed in DealerCONNECT > TechCONNECT for Torque Converter replacement. 2. Reprogram the PCM with the latest software using the flash procedure listed in the flash procedure below. After PCM reprogramming: a. Clear the Variable Line Pressure (VLP) Counters, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. VLP Clear Counters must be completed on all models with a 62TE transmission or if DTC P1745 appears on other transmission applications. b. Clear any DTC's that may have been set in other modules due to reprogramming. c. Perform the Quick Learn function, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu. d. Select the TCC Break In, found in the StarSCAN(R) Misc Function Menu and select "Start TCC Break In". FLASH REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: When performing this Repair Procedure, the software release level in the StarSCAN®; must be programmed with 8.03 level software or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch to the run position. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. j. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. k. When the update is complete, select "OK". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5983 l. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. 7. After flash reprogramming, be sure to Perform the additional Repair Steps associated with each procedure. These steps may include VLP clear counters, Quick Learn and/or Re-enable TCC break in. It is important to perform these additional steps in the order listed for each repair. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. 8. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" p/n 04275086AB and attach near the VECI label (Fig. 1). POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 21-002-07E > Dec > 07 > Engine, A/T Controls - Torque Converter Shuddering > Page 5984 FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The torque converter is a hydraulic device that couples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The torque converter consists of an outer shell with an internal turbine (1), a stator (2), an overrunning clutch, an impeller (5), and an electronically applied converter clutch (6). The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid temperatures. The torque converter hub (3) drives the transmission oil (fluid) pump and contains an O-ring seal (4) to better control oil flow. The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is not repairable and is serviced as an assembly. CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid. IMPELLER Impeller Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5987 The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system. TURBINE Turbine The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are curved in the opposite direction. STATOR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5988 The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and the turbine (4) within the torque converter case. The stator contains an over-running clutch (1 - 4), which allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator is locked against the over-running clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque converter is operational. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5989 The TCC was installed to improve the efficiency of the torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the fluid coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides smooth, shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all fluid couplings to slip. If the impeller (3) and turbine (5) were mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condition could be obtained. A hydraulic piston (6) with friction material (7) was added to the turbine assembly (5) to provide this mechanical lock-up. In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations, the TCM can duty cycle the L/R-CC Solenoid to achieve a smooth application of the torque converter clutch. This function, referred to as Electronically Modulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) can occur at various times depending on the following variables: - Shift lever position - Current gear range - Transmission fluid temperature - Engine coolant temperature - Input speed - Throttle angle - Engine speed Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5990 Torque Converter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Torque Converter Fluid Operation - Typical The converter impeller (driving member), which is integral to the converter housing and bolted to the engine drive plate, rotates at engine speed. The converter turbine (driven member), which reacts from fluid pressure generated by the impeller, rotates and turns the transmission input shaft. TURBINE As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft) to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine's blades it continues in a "hindering" direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes the impeller, it will strike the impeller in such a direction that it would tend to slow it down. STATOR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5991 Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the stator's over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall conditions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction. When this happens the over-running clutch of the stator locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is redirected into a "helping" direction before it enters the impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine, turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a maximum torque multiplication of about 2.4:1. As the turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this condition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and the converter acts as a fluid coupling. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) In a standard torque converter, the impeller and turbine are rotating at about the same speed and the stator is freewheeling, providing no torque multiplication. By applying the turbine's piston and friction material to the front cover, a total converter engagement can be obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1 mechanical link between the engine and the transmission. The clutch can be engaged in second, third, and fourth gear ranges depending on overdrive control switch position. If the overdrive control switch is in the normal ON position, the clutch will engage after the shift to fourth gear. If the control switch is in the OFF position, the clutch will engage after the shift to third gear. The TCM controls the torque converter by way of internal logic software. The programming of the software provides the TCM with control over the L/R-CC Solenoid. There are four output logic states that can be applied as follows: - No EMCC - Partial EMCC - Full EMCC - Gradual-to-no EMCC NO EMCC Under No EMCC conditions, the L/R Solenoid is OFF. There are several conditions that can result in NO EMCC operations. No EMCC can be initiated due to a fault in the transmission or because the TCM does not see the need for EMCC under current driving conditions. PARTIAL EMCC Partial EMCC operation modulates the L/R Solenoid (duty cycle) to obtain partial torque converter clutch application. Partial EMCC operation is maintained until Full EMCC is called for and actuated. During Partial EMCC some slip does occur. Partial EMCC will usually occur at low speeds, low load and light throttle situations. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5992 FULL EMCC During Full EMCC operation, the TCM increases the L/R Solenoid duty cycle to full ON after Partial EMCC control brings the engine speed within the desired slip range of transmission input speed relative to engine rpm. GRADUAL-TO-NO EMCC This operation is to soften the change from Full or Partial EMCC to No EMCC. This is done at mid-throttle by decreasing the L/R Solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle. 2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission. CAUTION: Verify that transmission is secure on the lifting device or work surface, the center of gravity of the transmission will shift when the torque converter is removed creating an unstable condition. The torque converter is a heavy unit. Use caution when separating the torque converter from the transmission. 3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal. 4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5995 Torque Converter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Check converter hub and drive flats for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and flats with 320/400 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. Verify that the converter hub O-ring is properly installed and is free from debris. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump seal at installation. 1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid. 2. Place torque converter in position on transmission. CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or converter hub O-ring while inserting torque converter into the front of the transmission. 3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening. 4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump. 5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate converter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump gears. 6. Check converter seating with a scale (1) and straightedge (2). Surface of converter lugs should be at least 13 mm (1/2 in.) to rear of straightedge when converter is fully seated. 7. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing. 8. Install the transmission in the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6000 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6003 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6007 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 230 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A104 18YL/RD 85 GROUND Z915 20BK 86 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20VT/YL 87 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18YL/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6010 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: On in-radiator type oil coolers, if transmission oil cooler is leaking, engine coolant may enter cooler, or transmission oil may enter engine cooling system. Both engine cooling system and transmission oil circuit should be drained, flushed, and inspected. There are two types of transmission oil coolers used. One type of cooler is the in-radiator type or oil to coolant type. This type oil cooler is not serviceable. The second type used is a remote type auxiliary oil cooler or oil to air cooler. The oil to air type cooler (3) is located in front of the radiator, and is serviceable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove pushpins (1) and the upper condenser/radiator seal (2). 2. Remove upper radiator support. 3. Remove upper transmission cooler mounting bolt. 4. Raise vehicle. 5. Disconnect the transmission cooler lines (1). 6. Remove lower transmission cooler mounting bolts. 7. Remove transmission cooler from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6016 1. Position transmission cooler in vehicle. 2. Install lower transmission cooler mounting bolt. Tighten to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.) 3. Connect transmission cooler lines. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Install upper transmission cooler mounting bolt. Tighten bolt to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 6. Install upper condenser/radiator seal. 7. Check transmission fluid level. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6017 Transmission Cooler: Overhaul TRANSMISSION COOLER LINE QUICK CONNECT FITTING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DISCONNECT 1. Remove dust cap by pulling it straight back off of quick connect fitting (1). 2. Place Release Tool 8875A (4) onto transmission cooler line with the fingers of the tool facing the quick connect fitting. 3. Slide Release Tool 8875A down the transmission line and engage the fingers of the tool into the retaining clip. When properly engaged in the clip, the tool will fit flush against the quick connect fitting. 4. Rotate the release tool 60° to expand the retaining clip. 5. While holding the release tool against the quick connect fitting, pull back on the transmission cooler line to remove. CONNECT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6018 1. Align transmission cooler line (3) with quick connect fitting while pushing straight into the fitting. 2. Push in on transmission cooler line until a "click" is heard or felt. 3. Slide dust cap (4) down the transmission cooler line and snap it over the quick connect fitting until it is fully seated and rotates freely. Dust cap will only snap over quick connect fitting when the transmission cooler line is properly installed. NOTE: If dust cap will not snap into place, repeat assembly step #2. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6023 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6024 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6025 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6026 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6029 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6030 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6031 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6032 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6035 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6038 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6043 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6044 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6045 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6046 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6047 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6048 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6049 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6050 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6053 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6054 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6055 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6056 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6057 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6058 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6059 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6060 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6063 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6066 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Valve Body: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Valve Body Components The valve body consists of a cast aluminum valve body, a separator plate, and a transfer plate. The valve body contains valves and check balls that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch and frictional clutches. The valve body contains the following components: - Solenoid switch valve - Manual valve - Low/reverse shuttle valve - 5 Accumulators Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6071 - 7 check balls Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6072 Valve Body: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for a visual aid in determining valve location, operation and design. SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE The Solenoid Switch Valve (SSV) controls the direction of the transmission fluid when the L/R-TCC solenoid is energized. The Solenoid Switch Valve controls line pressure from the LR-TCC solenoid. In 1st gear, the SSV will be in the downshifted position, thus directing fluid to the L/R clutch circuit. In 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and fifth gears, the solenoid switch valve will be in the upshifted position and directs the fluid into the torque converter clutch (TCC) circuit. When shifting into 1st gear, a special hydraulic sequence is performed to ensure SSV movement into the downshifted position. The L/R pressure switch is monitored to confirm SSV movement. If the movement is not confirmed (the L/R pressure switch does not close), 2nd gear is substituted for 1st. A DTC will be set after three unsuccessful attempts are made to get into 1st gear in one given key start. MANUAL VALVE The manual valve is a relay valve. The purpose of the manual valve is to direct fluid to the correct circuit needed for a specific gear or driving range. The manual valve, as the name implies, is manually operated by the driver with a lever located on the top of the valve body. The valve is connected mechanically by a cable to the gearshift mechanism. The valve is held in each of its positions by a roller detent spring (2) that engages the roostercomb of the TRS selector plate (1). LOW/REVERSE SWITCH VALVE The low/reverse switch valve allows the low/reverse clutch to be operated by either the LR/CC solenoid or the MS solenoid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Clutch Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6079 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6086 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6091 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove differential fill plug. 2. Remove watts link bell crank bolt (2) from differential cover (1). 3. Remove differential cover bolts. 4. Remove cover and drain fluid. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean differential cover. 2. Apply a bead of orange Mopar(TM) Axle RTV Sealant (1) or equivalent to the cover (2). CAUTION: If cover is not installed within 3 to 5 minutes, the cover must be cleaned and new RTV applied. Failure to follow these instructions will compromise adhesion quality. 3. Install cover and tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 4. Fill differential with 2.07 L (4.375 pts.) of gear lubricant. CAUTION: Fill differential by volume only, not to the bottom of fill plug. Failure to follow these instructions will cause an over fill condition. 5. Install fill hole plug. 6. Install watts link bell crank bolt and tighten to 217 Nm (160 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6097 NOTE: Bell crank bolt has a Loctite(R) patch, a new bolt should be used. If bolt is not available, clean bolt and apply Loctite(R) 242 to the threads. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6098 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove watts link bell crank bolt (2) from differential cover (1). 2. Remove differential cover bolts. 3. Remove cover and drain fluid. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean differential cover. 2. Apply a bead of orange Mopar(TM) Axle RTV Sealant (1) or equivalent to the cover (2). CAUTION: If cover is not installed within 3 to 5 minutes, the cover must be cleaned and new RTV applied or adhesion quality will be compromised. 3. Install cover and tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern to 44 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 4. Fill differential with 2.13 L (4.501 pts.) of gear lubricant. CAUTION: Fill differential by volume only, not to the bottom of fill plug. 5. Install fill hole plug. 6. Install watts link bell crank bolt and tighten to 217 Nm (160 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Bell crank bolt has a Loctite(R) patch, a new bolt should be used. If bolt is not available, clean bolt and apply Loctite(R) 242 to Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6099 the threads. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6104 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6105 Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Differential - Fluid Level Inspection Procedure NUMBER: 03-003-06 GROUP: Axle DATE: October 20, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 03-001-04 REV. A, DATED MAY 11, 2004, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODEL YEARS. SUBJECT: Axle Fluid Level MODELS: 2004 (AN) Dakota **2004 - 2007** (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck **2004 - 2007** (HB/HG) Durango / Aspen **2005 - 2007** (ND) Dakota DISCUSSION: The axle fill holes on some Dodge Truck vehicle axles may be located considerably higher than the actual fluid level. Filling the axle until the fluid comes out of the fill hole will over fill the axle, which may cause fluid foaming. When checking fluid level or filling a rear axle with fluid, you must measure the distance from the bottom of the fill hole to the top of the actual fluid level. This can easily be accomplished using a pipe cleaner or piece of wire. Make a 90 degree bend in the wire 2 inches from the end. The wire can then be inserted into the axle fill hole to use as a dipstick. Measure the distance from the bend to the oil level. The fluid levels for the axles are shown in the table below. CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR DURANGO / ASPEN: NOTE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6106 The Trac-Lok feature is not available on Durango rear axles. Traction control is provided electronically through the ABS system. Trac-Lok additives or friction modifiers are not required. CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR RAM TRUCK 1500: CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR RAM TRUCK 2500 -3500: CORRECT FLUID LEVELS FOR DAKOTA: NOTE: The Trac-Lok feature is available on Dakota rear axles. Trac-Lok additives are required on axles equipped with Trac Lok. POLICY: Information Only. Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications 8 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 70 oz (2.07L) 9 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................ 72 oz (2.13L) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6109 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications 8 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant 75W-140 9 1/4 ..................................................................................................................................................... ............... Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant 75W-140 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle shaft seal (1) from end of the axle tube (2) with a pry bar. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Coat new seal lip with axle lubricant and install seal with Installer 9337 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 3. Install axle shaft. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6114 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Mark a reference line across the axle flange (3) and propeller shaft flange (4). 3. Remove propeller shaft 4. Remove brake calipers and rotors to prevent any drag. 5. Rotate flange three or four times and verify flange rotates smoothly. 6. Record pinion torque to rotating (1) with a inch pound torque wrench (2) for installation reference. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6115 7. Install bolts into two of the threaded holes in the flange 180° apart. 8. Position Holder 6719A against the flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so the Holder 6719A is held to the flange. 9. Remove pinion nut and washer. 10. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange (1) for installation reference. 11. Remove flange (1) with Puller C-452 (2). 12. Remove pinion seal with seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. 2. Install new pinion seal with Installer C-4076-B (3) and Handle C-4735 (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6116 3. Position flange on pinion shaft with reference marks aligned. 4. Install bolts into two of the threaded holes in the companion flange 180° apart. 5. Position Holder 6719A (2) against the companion flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so Holder 6719A is held to the flange. 6. Install pinion flange with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 7. Install pinion washer and a new pinion nut. The convex side of the washer must face outward. 8. Hold companion flange with Holder 6719A (2) and tighten the pinion nut to 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not exceed the minimum torque 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.) when installing the pinion nut at this point. 9. Rotate pinion several times to ensure bearings are seated. 10. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). If pinion torque to rotate is low, tighten pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotating is achieved. CAUTION: Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque. If pinion torque to rotating is exceeded, a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the axle. 11. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. 12. Install rear brake rotors components. 13. Add gear lubricant if necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6117 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle shaft seal (1) from end of the axle tube (2) with a pry bar. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Coat new seal lip with axle lubricant and install seal with Installer 9337 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 3. Install axle shaft. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6118 1. With vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist. 2. Mark a installation reference line (3) across the pinion flange (3) and propeller shaft flange (4). 3. Remove propeller shaft. 4. Remove brake calipers and rotors to prevent any drag. 5. Rotate pinion flange three or four times and verify flange rotates smoothly. 6. Record pinion torque to rotate (1) with a inch pound torque wrench (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6119 7. Install two bolts into the pinion flange threaded holes, 180 degrees apart. Position Holder 6719A against the flange and install and tighten two bolts and washers into the remaining holes. 8. Hold the flange with Holder 6719A and remove pinion nut and washer. 9. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange (1) for installation reference. 10. Remove companion flange (1) with Puller C-452 (2). 11. Remove pinion seal with seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. 2. Install new pinion seal with Installer C-4076-B (3) and Handle C-4735 (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6120 3. Install companion flange on the end of the shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Install two bolts into the threaded holes in the companion flange, 180° apart. 5. Position Holder 6719A (2) against the companion flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so holder is held to the flange. 6. Install companion flange on pinion shaft with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 7. Install pinion washer and a new pinion nut. The convex side of the washer must face outward. 8. Hold companion flange with Holder 6719A (2) and tighten pinion nut with a torque wrench (3) to 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not exceed the minimum torque 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.) when installing the pinion nut at this point. 9. Rotate pinion several times to ensure pinion bearings are seated. 10. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). If pinion torque to rotate is low, tighten pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotating is achieved. CAUTION: Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque. If pinion torque to rotating is exceeded, a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the axle. 11. Install propeller shaft. 12. Install rear brake rotors components. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vibration Damper: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH Vibration Damper: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-001-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle / coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vibration Damper: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 6129 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vibration Damper: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH Vibration Damper: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-002-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle I coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Vibration Damper: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 6134 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vibration Damper: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH Vibration Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-001-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle / coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vibration Damper: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 6140 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vibration Damper: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH Vibration Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-002-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle I coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Vibration Damper, Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Vibration Damper: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 6145 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle seal with pry bar. 3. Position bearing Receiver 9338 (1) on axle tube. 4. Insert bearing Remover 6310 with Foot 6310-9 (3) through receiver (2) and bearing (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6151 5. Tighten nut (1) to pull bearing into the receiver (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Install axle shaft bearing with Installer 9337 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). Drive bearing in until tool contacts the axle tube. NOTE: Bearing is installed with the bearing part number against the installer. 3. Coat new axle seal lip with axle lubricant and install with Installer 9337 and Handle C-4171. 4. Install axle shaft. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6152 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle seal with pry bar. 3. Position bearing Receiver 9338 (1) on axle tube. 4. Insert bearing Remover 6310 with Foot 6310-9 (3) through receiver (2) and bearing (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6153 5. Tighten nut (1) to pull bearing into the receiver (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Install axle shaft bearing with Installer 9337 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). Drive bearing in until tool contacts the axle tube. NOTE: Bearing is installed with the bearing part number against the installer. 3. Coat new axle seal lip with axle lubricant and install with Installer 9337 and Handle C-4171. 4. Install axle shaft. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper adapter with caliper and remove rotor. 3. Remove wheel speed sensors. 4. Remove differential housing cover and drain lubricant. 5. Remove pinion mate shaft (1) lock screw (2). 6. Remove pinion mate shaft (1) from differential case (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6159 7. Push axle shaft (2) inward and remove axle shaft C-lock (1). 8. Remove axle shaft. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Insert axle shaft (1) through seal (2) and engage into side gear splines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6160 3. Insert C-lock (1) in end of axle shaft (2) then push axle shaft outward to seat C-lock in side gear (3). 4. Insert pinion mate shaft (1) into differential case (2) and pinions gears. 5. Align hole in mate shaft (1) with hole in differential case. Install lock screw (2) with Loctite(R) on the threads. Tighten lock screw to 25 Nm (220 in. lbs.). 6. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant. 7. Install brake rotor and caliper adapter with caliper. 8. Install wheel speed sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6161 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove brake caliper adapter with caliper and remove rotor. 3. Remove wheel speed sensors. 4. Remove differential housing cover and drain lubricant. 5. Remove pinion mate shaft (1) lock screw (2). 6. Remove pinion mate shaft (1) from differential case (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6162 7. Push axle shaft (2) inward and remove axle shaft C-lock (1). 8. Remove axle shaft. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Insert axle shaft (1) through seal (2) and engage into side gear splines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Axle - 8 1/4 > Page 6163 3. Insert C-lock (1) in end of axle shaft (2) then push axle shaft outward to seat C-lock in side gear (3). 4. Insert pinion mate shaft (1) into differential case (2) and pinions gears. 5. Align hole in mate shaft (1) with hole in differential case. Install lock screw (2) with Loctite(R) on the threads. Tighten lock screw to 25 Nm (220 in. lbs.). 6. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant. 7. Install brake rotor and caliper adapter with caliper. 8. Install wheel speed sensors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle using puller 8677 (1). 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) using puller 8677 (2). 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the half shaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6169 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts (5) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (4) if equipped. 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Half Shaft Nut Tighten to ..................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 251Nm (185 Ft.Lbs) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications PROPELLER SHAFT Torque Specifications Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis And Testing Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis And Testing PROPELLER SHAFT PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION Out-of-round tires or wheels that are out of balance, will cause a low frequency vibration. Driveline vibration can also be caused by loose or damaged engine mounts. Propeller shaft vibration increases with vehicle speed. A vibration that occurs at a specific speed range, is not usually caused by an out of balance propeller shaft. Defective universal joints or an incorrect propeller shaft angle are usually the cause of such a vibration. Driveline Vibration PROPELLER SHAFT BALANCE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis And Testing > Page 6180 If propeller shaft is suspected of being out of balance, use the following procedure. NOTE: Indexing propeller shaft 180 degrees relative to the yoke may eliminate some vibrations. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Clean all foreign material from the propeller shaft and universal joints. 3. Inspect propeller shaft for missing balance weights, broken welds and bent areas. If propeller shaft is bent, it must be replaced. 4. Inspect universal joints for wear and properly installed. 5. Check propeller shaft bolt torques. 6. Remove wheels and install lug nuts to retain brake rotors. 7. Mark and number the shaft six inches from the pinion yoke end at four positions 90 degrees apart. 8. Run and accelerate vehicle until vibration occurs. Note the intensity and speed the vibration occurred. Stop the engine. 9. Install a screw clamp at position (1). 10. Start engine and check vibration. If there is little or no change move the clamp to the next positions. Repeat the vibration test. NOTE: If there is no difference in vibration at this positions, the vibration may not be the propeller shaft. 11. If vibration decreased, install a second clamp (1) and repeat the test. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis And Testing > Page 6181 12. If additional clamp causes an additional vibration, separate the clamps 1/2 inch (1) above and below the mark. Repeat the vibration test. 13. Increase distance between the clamp screws (1) (2) and repeat test, until the least amount of vibration is noticed. Bend the slack end of the clamps so screws will not loosen. 14. If vibration remains unacceptable, repeat the procedure to the front end of the propeller shaft. 15. Install wheels and lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis And Testing > Page 6182 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Standard Procedure PROPELLER SHAFT ANGLE NOTE: This procedure applies to the front and rear propeller shaft. 1. Raise and support vehicle at the axles as level as possible, allowing wheels and propeller shaft to turn. 2. Remove universal joint snap rings if equipped, so inclinometer base will sit flat. 3. Rotate shaft until transmission/transfer case output yoke bearing cap is facing downward. NOTE: Always make measurements from front to rear and from the same side of the vehicle. 4. Place Inclinometer 7663 on yoke bearing cap or pinion flange ring, parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement (A). This measurement will give you the transmission or Output Yoke Angle (A). 5. Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place Inclinometer 7663 on yoke bearing cap parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement (C). This measurement can also be taken at the rear end of the shaft. This measurement will give you the propeller shaft angle (C). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis And Testing > Page 6183 6. Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus A) to obtain transmission output operating angle. 7. Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place Inclinometer 7663 on pinion yoke bearing cap parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement (B). This measurement will give you the pinion shaft or input yoke angle (B). 8. Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus B) to obtain axle Input Operating Angle. PROPELLER SHAFT ANGLE RULES - Good cancellation of U-joint operating angles is within 1 degree. - Operating angles less than 3 degrees. - At least 1/2 of one degree continuous operating (propeller shaft) angle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Mark a reference line (3) across the pinion flange (2) and propeller shaft (1) flange (4). 3. Remove pinion flange (1) bolts from propeller shaft flange (2). 4. Slide propeller shaft back off automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft, then mark propeller shaft (1) and transmission/transfer case output Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6186 shaft (2) for installation reference. 5. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions may result in a driveline vibration. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6187 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Slide slip yoke (1) onto automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft (2) with reference marks aligned. 2. Align reference marks on propeller shaft flange (2) and pinion flange (1). Install new companion flange (1) bolts and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.) NOTE: Flange bolts incorporate a Loctite(R) patch, new bolts should be used. If bolts are not available, clean bolts and apply Mopar(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive or equivalent to the threads. CAUTION: Failure to follow these instruction may result in a driveline vibration. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6188 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment SPECIAL TOOLS INCLINOMETER 7663 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Universal Joint: Service and Repair Disassembly Disassembly - With Snap Rings DISASSEMBLY - WITH SNAP RINGS NOTE: This procedure describes a propeller shaft equipped with a cardan joint in the tube yoke. For propeller shafts equipped with a companion/slip yoke, repeat the steps to remove the remaining cardan joint. 1. Tap outside of bearing cap with a drift to loosen snap ring. 2. Remove snap rings (1) from both sides of yoke. 3. Position yoke with the grease fitting if equipped, pointing up. 4. Position a socket with a inside diameter large enough to receive the bearing cap, beneath the yoke on a press. 5. Place another socket with an outside diameter smaller than bearing cap on the upper bearing cap and press (1) the lower cap through the yoke. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6193 NOTE: If the bearing cap will not pull out of the yoke by hand after pressing, tap the yoke ear near the bearing cap to dislodge the cap. 6. Pull bearing cap of the yoke. 7. Turn yoke over in the press and straighten the cross (1). Press the cross until the remaining bearing cap (2) can be removed. CAUTION: If cross or bearing cap are not straight during removal, the bearing cap will score the walls of the yoke bore and damage can occur. Disassembly - With Injected Rings DISASSEMBLY - WITH INJECTED RINGS 1. Place shaft yoke in vise. 2. Position U-joint press (1) with receiver (2) on propeller shaft yoke. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6194 3. Pressed U-joint bearing caps (1) out of shaft yoke (2). 4. Remove lower bearing cap from shaft yoke. 5. Turn shaft over and position press (1) with receiver (2) on shaft yoke. 6. Press remaining U-joint bearing cap out of shaft yoke. 7. Remove flange (1) with U-joint out of shaft yoke (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6195 8. Position U-joint press (2) with receiver (1) on flange. 9. Press U-joint bearing caps (1) out of flange (2). 10. Remove bearing cap on the outside of the flange. 11. Position U-joint press (2) with receiver (1) on flange. 12. Press remaining U-joint bearing cap out of flange. 13. Remove U-joint from flange. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6196 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Assembly Assembly - With Snap Rings ASSEMBLY - WITH SNAP RINGS NOTE: This procedure describes a propeller shaft equipped a cardan joint in the tube yoke. For propeller shafts equipped with a companion/slip yoke, repeat the steps to remove the remaining cardan joint. 1. Apply (EP) N.L.G.I. Grade 1 or 2 grease to inside of yoke bores. 2. Position cross (1) in yoke with lube fitting pointing up, if equipped. 3. Place a bearing cap (1) over the cross end (2) and align cap with yoke bore. 4. Press bearing cap into the yoke bore enough to clear snap ring groove. 5. Repeat STEP 3 and STEP 4 to install the opposite bearing cap. NOTE: If joint is stiff or binding, strike the yoke with a soft hammer to seat the needle bearings. 6. Add grease to lube fitting, if equipped. Assembly - With Injected Rings ASSEMBLY - WITH INJECTED RINGS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6197 NOTE: Replacement joint has internal snap rings. 1. Place joint in flange with one bearing cap. 2. Position press (3) with receiver (1) on flange and bearing cap (2). 3. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove (1) is through the flange (2). 4. Install snap ring (2) on bearing (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6198 5. Position press (3) with receiver (2) on remaining bearing cap (1) and flange. 6. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the flange. 7. Install snap ring (1) on bearing cap (2). 8. Install flange (1) with U-joint in yoke (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6199 9. Position press (2) with receiver (1) and lower bearing cap (3) on yoke. 10. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the yoke. 11. Install snap ring (2) on bearing cap (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 6200 12. Position press (2) with receiver (3) on remaining bearing cap (1) and yoke. 13. Press remaining bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the yoke. 14. Install snap ring (2) on bearing cap (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flexplate to crankshaft-Bolts ............................................................................................................... ..................................................... 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Flex Plate: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts and flexplate (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6206 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the flexplate or flywheel onto the crankshaft and install the bolts hand tight. 2. For automatic transmissions: Tighten the flexplate retaining bolts to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications Flywheel: Specifications Flywheel to crankshaft-Bolts ................................................................................................................ .................................................... 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tow/haul indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tow/haul indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The tow/haul indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text TOW/HAUL in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the tow/haul indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The tow/haul indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6216 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tow/haul indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the tow/haul function of the tow/haul switch has been selected, revising the shift schedule of the electronically controlled automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tow/haul indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the tow/haul indicator for the following reasons: - Tow/Haul Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic tow/haul indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the tow/haul shift schedule has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tow/haul indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tow/haul indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6221 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135° C (275° F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6228 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6233 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM is located on the right inner fender. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6240 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6241 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6242 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6243 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6247 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 230 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A104 18YL/RD 85 GROUND Z915 20BK 86 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20VT/YL 87 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18YL/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6250 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6257 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6258 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6259 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6260 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6261 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6262 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6265 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6266 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6267 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6268 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6269 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6270 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6273 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6276 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6280 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6281 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6282 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tow/haul overdrive OFF (control) switch is located in the shift lever arm. The switch is a momentary contact device that signals the PCM to toggle current status of the overdrive function. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6285 Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION At key-on, overdrive operation is allowed. Pressing the switch once causes the tow/haul overdrive OFF mode to be entered and the Tow/Haul lamp to be illuminated. Pressing the switch a second time causes normal overdrive operation to be restored and the tow/haul lamp to be turned off. The tow/haul overdrive OFF mode defaults to ON after the ignition switch is cycled OFF and ON. The normal position for the control switch is the ON position. The switch must be in this position to energize the solenoid and allow a 3-4 upshift. The control switch indicator light illuminates only when the tow/haul overdrive switch is turned to the OFF position, or when illuminated by the transmission control module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6288 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6293 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6298 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6299 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6300 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6301 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6304 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6305 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6306 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6307 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6310 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6313 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6318 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6319 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6320 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6321 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6322 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6323 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6324 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6325 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6328 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6329 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6330 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6331 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6332 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6333 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6334 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6335 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6338 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6341 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6348 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6353 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6361 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6364 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6369 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6370 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6371 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6372 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6375 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6376 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6377 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6378 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6381 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6384 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6388 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6389 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 402 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT INTERLOCK Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL B30 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z101 20BK/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 6390 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6395 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6396 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6397 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6398 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6401 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6402 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6403 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 6404 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6407 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6410 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6415 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6418 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tow/haul indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tow/haul indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The tow/haul indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text TOW/HAUL in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the tow/haul indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The tow/haul indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6425 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tow/haul indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the tow/haul function of the tow/haul switch has been selected, revising the shift schedule of the electronically controlled automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tow/haul indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the tow/haul indicator for the following reasons: - Tow/Haul Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic tow/haul indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the tow/haul shift schedule has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tow/haul indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tow/haul indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6430 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135° C (275° F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM is located on the right inner fender. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6437 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6438 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6439 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6440 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6444 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 230 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A104 18YL/RD 85 GROUND Z915 20BK 86 TRANSMISSION CONTROL T15 20VT/YL 87 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18YL/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6447 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6454 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6455 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6456 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6457 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6458 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6459 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 5 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 6 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6462 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6463 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 20 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 2 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 4 2-4 CONTROL T19 18YL/DB 5 2-4 PRESSURE SIGNAL T47 20YL/DG 6 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 7 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 8-9-10 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6464 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6465 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 372 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (4.7L/5.7L) Pin Description Circuit 1 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY F856 20YL/PK 3 LINE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL T38 20YL/BR 4-Component Location - 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6466 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 6467 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6470 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6473 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6477 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6478 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 450 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 2 GROUND Z953 20BK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 6479 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tow/haul overdrive OFF (control) switch is located in the shift lever arm. The switch is a momentary contact device that signals the PCM to toggle current status of the overdrive function. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6482 Overdrive Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION At key-on, overdrive operation is allowed. Pressing the switch once causes the tow/haul overdrive OFF mode to be entered and the Tow/Haul lamp to be illuminated. Pressing the switch a second time causes normal overdrive operation to be restored and the tow/haul lamp to be turned off. The tow/haul overdrive OFF mode defaults to ON after the ignition switch is cycled OFF and ON. The normal position for the control switch is the ON position. The switch must be in this position to energize the solenoid and allow a 3-4 upshift. The control switch indicator light illuminates only when the tow/haul overdrive switch is turned to the OFF position, or when illuminated by the transmission control module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6485 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6490 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: Pressure Switches A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6495 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6496 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6497 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6498 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 394 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 4 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD 5-6-- 7 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 10 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) T41 20YL/DB Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6501 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6502 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 21 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 L/R CONTROL T20 18VT/DG 3-4 TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SENSE) T41 20YL/DB 5 TRS T42 SIGNAL T42 20DG/YL 6-- 7 OD CONTROL T60 18VT/WT 8 TRS T3 SIGNAL T3 20DG/DB 9 TRS T1 SIGNAL T1 20BR/DB 10 TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT T16 18BR/DB 11 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL T48 20BR/YL 12 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL T118 20DG 13 TRS T2 SIGNAL T4 20BR/PK 14 L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL T50 20VT/GY 15 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL T147 20DG/YL 16 OD PRESSURE SIGNAL T9 20BR/VT 17 UD CONTROL T59 18YL/LB 18 UD PRESSURE SIGNAL T29 20YL/WT 19 4C CONTROL T259 18VT/RD 20 2C CONTROL T219 18OR/LG 21 MS CONTROL T140 20VT/BR 22 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 23 TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL T54 20BR/RD Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6503 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 6504 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6507 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission. 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6510 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6515 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6516 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6517 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6518 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6519 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6520 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6521 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6522 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 365 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 INPUT SPEED SIGNAL T52 20VT/OR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6525 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6526 Fig. 19 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6527 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6528 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 375 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL T14 20DG/BR 2 SPEED SENSOR GROUND T13 20DG/VT Component Location - 14 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6529 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6530 Fig. 19 Component Location - 21 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6531 Component Location - 26 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6532 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6535 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 6538 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description ABS Light: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator serves both the standard equipment Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) and optional equipment 4-Wheel Anti-Lock (4WAL) brake systems. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The ABS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Failure of Anti-lock Braking System in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ABS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6545 ABS Light: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ABS system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ABS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - ABS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ABS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the ABS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the CAB for five consecutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. - ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked ON and OFF by lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests. The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the antilock brake system, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ABS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 167 Component : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) (PUMP) A107 12TN/RD 2-3-4-5-6 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT 7-- 8-9 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG 10 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 11 - 12 - 13 GROUND Z107 12BK/DG 14 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 19 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 20DG/LB 20 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 20DG/YL 21 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 22 - 23 - 24 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 25 FUSED B(+) (VALVE) A111 18DG/RD 26 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 27 - 28 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 29 - 30 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 31 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 20VT/WT 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 33 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 20LG/GY 34 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN 35 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6549 36 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B401 20DG 37 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 38 GROUND Z923 12BK Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6550 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 167 Component : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) (PUMP) A107 12TN/RD 2-3-4-5-6 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT 7-- 8-9 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG 10 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 11 - 12 - 13 GROUND Z107 12BK/DG 14 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 19 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 20DG/LB 20 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 20DG/YL 21 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 22 - 23 - 24 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 25 FUSED B(+) (VALVE) A111 18DG/RD 26 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 27 - 28 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 29 - 30 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 31 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 20VT/WT 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 33 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 20LG/GY 34 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN 35 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6551 36 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B401 20DG 37 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 38 GROUND Z923 12BK Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor which handles testing, monitoring and controlling the ABS brake system operation. The ABM is mounted on the top of the hydraulic control unit (HCU). The ABM operates the ABS system and is separate from other vehicle electrical circuits. ABM voltage source is through CKT A111 (fused B+). NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, Perform the ABS verification using a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6554 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation ABS Unit ABS UNIT SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor (CAN C BUS) - G-Sensor (4X4) ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp ESP Unit - (Electronic Stability Program) ESP UNIT - (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM) SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS and ESP warning lights when a ABS system fault is detected. If only the ESP light is illuminated ESP system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. System faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor (CAN C BUS) - Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) (CAN C BUS) - Dynamic Sensor - ESP Off Switch Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6555 - Vacuum Sensor ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp - ESP Warning Lamp - ESP Function Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: ABM module can be removed without removing the HCU unit. 1. Remove the left front tire and wheel assembly. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ABM module. 3. Remove the module mounting screws (2). 4. Remove the module from the HCU (1) on ESP vehicles be careful not to damage the pressure sensor or not to touch the sensor terminals on the HCU side or the contact pads on the ABM side when removing the ABM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6558 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the module on the HCU on ESP vehicles be careful not to damage the pressure sensor or not to touch the sensor terminals on the HCU side or the contact pads on the ABM side when installing the ABM. 2. Install the mounting screws (2) and tighten to 2.5 Nm (22 in. lbs). 3. Perform the ABS verification test with a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The HCU consists of a valve body, pump motor, low pressure accumulators, inlet valves, outlet valves and noise attenuators. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6563 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Accumulators in the valve body store extra fluid released from the calipers during ABS mode operation. The pump is used to clear the accumulator of brake fluid and is operated by a DC type motor. The motor is controlled by the ABM. The valves modulate brake pressure during antilock braking and are controlled by the ABM. The HCU provides individual pressure control to each front and rear brake. During antilock braking, the solenoid valves are opened and closed as needed. They are cycled rapidly and continuously to modulate pressure and control wheel slip and deceleration. Brake Traction Control and Electronic Stability Program modulate pressure on each wheel individually without any driver brake input. During normal braking, the HCU solenoid valves and pump are not activated. The master cylinder and power booster operate the same as a vehicle without an ABS brake system. During antilock braking, solenoid valve pressure modulation occurs in three stages; pressure increase, pressure hold, and pressure decrease. The valves are all contained in the valve body portion of the HCU. PRESSURE DECREASE The outlet valve is opened and the inlet valve is closed during the pressure decrease cycle. A pressure decrease cycle is initiated when speed sensor signals indicate high wheel slip at one or more wheels. At this point, the ABM closes the inlet then opens the outlet valve, which also opens the return circuit to the accumulators. Fluid pressure is allowed to bleed off (decrease) as needed to prevent wheel lock. Once the period of high wheel slip has ended, the ABM closes the outlet valve and begins a pressure increase or hold cycle as needed. PRESSURE HOLD Both solenoid valves are closed in the pressure hold cycle but only the inlet valve is energized. Fluid apply pressure in the control channel is maintained at a constant rate. The ABM maintains the hold cycle until sensor inputs indicate a pressure change is necessary. PRESSURE INCREASE The inlet valve is open and the outlet valve is closed during the pressure increase cycle. The pressure increase cycle is used to reapply thew brakes. This cycle controls re-application of fluid apply pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the negative battery cable from the battery. 2. Install a brake pedal prop rod. 3. Siphon the master cylinder. 4. Disconnect the brake lines (1) from the master cylinder to the HCU (4). 5. Disconnect the chassis lines (2) to the HCU (4). 6. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (3). 7. Remove HCU assembly mounting nuts. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. 9. Remove the left front tire. NOTE: Careful not to lose the mounting pins when remove the HCU from the vehicle. 10. Lift the HCU assembly off the mounting bracket. 11. Remove the HCU assembly through the left wheel well. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6566 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Reinstall the HCU assembly through the left wheel well. 2. Install HCU assembly on the mounting bracket and Tighten the nuts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake lines (1) to the HCU (4) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 4. Install the electrical harness connector (3) to the HCU/ABM assembly (4). NOTE: If the ABM (2) is being replaced with a new ABM it must be reprogrammed with the use of a Scan tool. 5. Install the chassis lines (1) to the HCU/ABM (2) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 6. Install the left front tire. 7. Install negative battery cable to the battery. 8. Remove the brake pedal prop rod. 9. Bleed ABS brake system. 10. Perform the ABS verification test with a scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Lateral Accelerometer: Locations Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 6570 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 6571 Lateral Accelerometer: Diagrams Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 6572 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation Sensor-Dynamics DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor (2). The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor (2) must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics > Page 6575 Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation Sensor-G DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located only inside the ABS controller 4x4 only. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the antilock brake module (ABM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (3) from the dynamics sensor (2). 3. Remove the two nuts (1) securing the sensor to the floor. 4. Remove the sensor (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6578 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor (2) on the studs (4) to the vehicle. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is facing toward the rear of the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the sensor (2). 3. Install the two retaining nuts (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). 4. Install the floor console. 5. Perform the ABS verification test with the scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Component ID: 391 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : # of pins : 4 A CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD B GROUND Z455 20BK/LB C CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB D FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6582 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6583 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 391 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : # of pins : 4 A CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD B GROUND Z455 20BK/LB C CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB D FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6584 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6585 Steering Angle Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. The steering angle sensor is used to measure the driver intended path in the ESP system. Based on the deviation between steering wheel input and the Yaw Rate signal from the dynamic sensor, ESP can be activated. The SAS should be mounted correctly to ensure that the system functions properly and there are not inadvertent activations. Any replacement of the steering angle sensor requires that the ABS verification test be performed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. 1. For removal of the steering angle sensor Refer to CLOCKSPRING - REMOVAL. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6588 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. 1. For installation of the steering angle sensor Refer to CLOCKSPRING - INSTALLATION). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area below and to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The ESP/BAS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text ESP BAS in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ESP/BAS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The ESP/BAS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a problem has been detected in the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) and the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ESP/BAS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ESP/BAS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP/BAS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. - ESP/BAS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ESP/BAS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB or the FCM, the ESP/BAS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB or FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ESP/BAS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB and FCM continually monitor the ESP/BAS system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition and the proper outputs to the components of the system. The CAB or FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS system, the CAB, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ESP/BAS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 6593 indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 6594 Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Traction Control Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) traction control indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The traction control indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Stability - Anti-Spin in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The traction control indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The traction control indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the traction control indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the traction control indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Traction Control Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic traction control indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB indicating that the ESP/BAS/TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB continually monitors the status of the inputs to the ESP/BAS/TCS systems to determine the proper outputs to the components of the Antilock Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 6595 diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS/TCS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to traction control indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Component ID: 451 Component : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE B27 20DG/WT 2 GROUND Z427 20BK/WT Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6599 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6600 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 451 Component : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE B27 20DG/WT 2 GROUND Z427 20BK/WT Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6601 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 397 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 2 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6606 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6607 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 18LG/GY 2 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 18DG/YL Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6608 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6609 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 2 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6610 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6611 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 18DG/LB 2 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 18DG/DB Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6612 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 397 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 2 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6615 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6616 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 18LG/GY 2 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 18DG/YL Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6617 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6618 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 2 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6619 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6620 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 18DG/LB 2 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 18DG/DB Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6621 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6622 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The sensors convert wheel speed into a digital signal. The ABM sends 12 volts to the sensors. The sensor has an internal hall sensor that alters the voltage and amperage of the signal circuit. This voltage and amperage is changed by magnetic induction when the toothed tone wheel passes the wheel speed sensor. This digital signal is sent to the ABM. The ABM measures the voltage and amperage of the digital signal for each wheel. The signal strength is affected by the distance between the Sensor and the tone ring. If the "Air Gap" between the WSS and the tone ring/wheel is too large, the WSS signal can drop out at low speed, (below 40 mph) and can cause an ABS activation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front rotor. 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front > Page 6625 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (3). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (1) from the sensor (4). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the brake caliper adapter (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the wheel speed sensor (4) in the brake caliper adapter (2). 2. Install the sensor mounting bolt (1) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical wiring connector (3) to the sensor (4). 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6629 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6630 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6631 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Dynamics DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor (2). The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor (2) must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics > Page 6634 Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-G DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located only inside the ABS controller 4x4 only. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the antilock brake module (ABM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (3) from the dynamics sensor (2). 3. Remove the two nuts (1) securing the sensor to the floor. 4. Remove the sensor (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6637 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor (2) on the studs (4) to the vehicle. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is facing toward the rear of the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the sensor (2). 3. Install the two retaining nuts (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). 4. Install the floor console. 5. Perform the ABS verification test with the scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 6642 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 6643 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 6644 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of the scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding.. 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time. 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The brake pedal is serviced as a complete assembly including the bracket. Including vehicles with Adjustable Pedals. A suspended-type brake pedal (5) is used. The pedal is attached to the pedal support bracket (4) with a pivot shaft pin (2), bushings (3) and clips (1). If the bushings (3) become dry a spray lubricant can be used to eliminate noises. The booster push rod is attached to the pedal with a clip. The pedal (5), bushings (3), pivot pin (2) and support bracket (4) are not serviceable components. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6649 Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake pedal is attached to the booster push rod. When the pedal is depressed, the primary booster push rod is depressed which move the booster secondary rod. The booster secondary rod depress the master cylinder piston. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Loosen the cable tensioner nut at the equalizer (5) to create slack in the front cable. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the steering column opening cover (2). 6. Remove the steering column opening reinforcement (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6652 7. Disconnect the brake lamp wire from the switch on the pedal assembly. 8. Roll the carpet back, loosen the front cable grommet from the floor pan and the cable retainer. 9. Disengage the release rod (1) from the arm on the pedal assembly. 10. Remove the bolts (2) /nuts (1) from the pedal assembly (5) and remove the assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6653 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the replacement pedal assembly (5) on the dash and cowl. 2. Install the bolts (2) / nuts (1) and tighten to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the front cable (3) to the arm on the pedal assembly (5). 4. Tighten the front cable grommet (4) to the floor pan and the cable retainer, roll the carpet back. 5. Connect the wires to the brake lamp switch. 6. Install the park brake release rod (1). 7. Install the steering column opening reinforcement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6654 8. Install the steering column opening cover. 9. Raise the vehicle. 10. Adjust the parking brake cable tensioner (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A brake indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area below and right of the speedometer needle hub. The brake indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word BRAKE (all clusters with a miles-per-hour primary speedometer scale), or the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Brake Failure (all clusters with a kilometers-per-hour primary scale) in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The brake indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6659 Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the parking brake is applied, when there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level condition, or when the brake fluid level switch is disconnected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch. The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the brake indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the brake indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Brake Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic brake indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the brake indicator will be illuminated. The CAB may also send lamp-ON messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the brake indicator flashes ON and OFF. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released. The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. For further diagnosis of the brake indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. The hard wired park brake switch input to the instrument cluster may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. For proper diagnosis of the brake fluid level switch, the ABS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6660 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection BRAKE INDICATOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired park brake switch input to the EMIC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the EMIC, the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the electronic message inputs also used by the EMIC to provide brake indicator operation. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAB, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The calipers are a single piston type in the rear and dual piston type in the front. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6666 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the brakes are applied fluid pressure is exerted against the caliper piston (2). The fluid pressure is exerted equally and in all directions. This means pressure exerted against the caliper piston and within the caliper bore will be equal. Fluid pressure applied to the piston is transmitted directly to the inboard brake pad (5). This forces the pad lining against the inner surface of the disc brake rotor. At the same time, fluid pressure within the piston bore forces the caliper to slide inward on the mounting bolts. This action brings the outboard brake pad lining (6) into contact with the outer surface of the disc brake rotor. In summary, fluid pressure acting simultaneously on both piston and caliper, produces a strong clamping action. When sufficient force is applied, friction will attempt to stop the rotors from turning and bring the vehicle to a stop. Application and release of the brake pedal generates only a very slight movement of the caliper and piston. Upon release of the pedal, the caliper and piston return to a rest position. The brake pads do not retract an appreciable distance from the rotor. In fact, clearance is usually at, or close to zero. The reasons for this are to keep road debris from getting between the rotor and lining and in wiping the rotor surface clear each revolution. The caliper piston seal (4) controls the amount of piston (2) extension needed to compensate for normal lining wear. During brake application, the seal is deflected outward by fluid pressure and piston movement(6). When the brakes (and fluid pressure) are released, the seal relaxes and retracts the piston (3). The amount of piston retraction is determined by the amount of seal deflection. Generally the amount is just enough to maintain contact between the piston and inboard brake pad. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures Cleaning - Disc Brake Caliper CLEANING - DISC BRAKE CALIPER Clean the caliper components with clean brake fluid or brake clean only. Wipe the caliper and piston dry with lint free towels or use low pressure compressed air. CAUTION: Do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or similar solvents. These products may leave a residue that could damage the piston and seal. Inspection INSPECTION The piston is made from a phenolic resin (plastic material) and should be smooth and clean. The piston must be replaced if cracked or scored. Do not attempt to restore a scored piston surface by sanding or polishing. CAUTION: If the caliper piston is replaced, install the same type of piston in the caliper. Never interchange phenolic resin and steel caliper pistons. The pistons, seals, seal grooves, caliper bore and piston tolerances are different. The bore can be lightly polished with a brake hone (3) to remove very minor surface imperfections. The caliper should be replaced if the bore is severely corroded, rusted, scored, or if polishing would increase bore diameter more than 0.025 mm (0.001 inch). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6669 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Front FRONT CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose with result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Install prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system, Holding pedal in this position will isolate master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid reservoir while brake lines are open. This will allow you to bleed out the area of repair instead of the entire system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Compress the disc brake caliper (2). 5. Remove the banjo bolt (1) and discard the copper washers (4). 6. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts. 7. Remove the disc brake caliper from the caliper adapter (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6670 Rear REAR 1. Install prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system, Holding pedal in this position will isolate master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid reservoir while brake lines are open. This will allow you to bleed out the area of repair instead of the entire system. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Remove the wheel and tire assembly (6). 4. Drain small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with suction gun. 5. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt (5) if replacing caliper (4). 6. Remove the caliper mounting slide pin bolts (2). 7. Remove the caliper (4) from vehicle. Front FRONT NOTE: Install new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 1. Install the disc brake caliper (2) to the brake caliper adapter (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6671 CAUTION: Verify brake hose (3) is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 2. Install the banjo bolt (1) with new copper washers (4) to the caliper (2). Tighten to 18 Nm (155 in. lbs.) 3. Install the caliper slide pin bolts. Tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 4. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 5. Bleed the area of repair for the brake system, If a proper pedal is not felt during bleeding an area of repair then a base bleed system must be performed. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Rear REAR 1. Install caliper (4) to the caliper adapter (7). 2. Coat the caliper mounting slide pin bolts (2) with silicone grease. Then install and tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake hose banjo bolt (5) and new copper seal washers if caliper was removed. 4. Install the brake hose (3) to the caliper (4) with and tighten fitting bolt to 18 Nm (155 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 5. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 6. Bleed the area of repair for the brake system, If a proper pedal is not felt during bleeding an area of repair then a base bleed system must be performed. 7. Install the wheel and tire assemblies (6). 8. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 9. Verify a firm pedal before moving the vehicle. Front FRONT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6672 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the disc brake caliper (1). 4. Remove the bolts securing the caliper adapter (2) to the steering knuckle 5. Remove the caliper adapter. Rear REAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Drain a small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with a clean suction gun. 4. Bottom the caliper pistons into the caliper by prying the caliper over. 5. Remove the caliper mounting bolts. 6. Remove the disc brake caliper from the mount. CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 7. Remove the inboard and outboard brake pads (1). 8. Remove the anti-rattle clips (2). 9. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). Front FRONT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6673 1. Install the caliper adapter (1) to the steering knuckle. 2. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (2) and tighten to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs.). 3. Install the disc brake caliper (1). 4. Install the tire and wheel assembly 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Rear REAR 1. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). Tighten the mounting bolts to 135 Nm (100 ft.lbs). 2. Install the anti-rattle clips (2). 3. Install the inboard and outboard pads (1). 4. Install the caliper mounting bolts. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6674 2. Remove the disc brake caliper (3). 3. Remove the caliper adapter (2). 4. Remove the rotor (1). 5. Remove the axle shaft (1). 6. Remove the park brake shoes (1). 7. Remove the parking brake cable (2) from the brake lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6675 8. Remove the bolts (2) attaching the support plate to the axle and remove the support plate (1). 9. Remove the caliper adapter mount (1) from the axle housing (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the caliper adapter mount (1) on the axle housing (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6676 2. Install support plate (1) on axle flange. Tighten attaching bolts (2) to 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.). 3. Install parking brake cable (2) in the brake lever (1). 4. Install the park brake shoes (1). 5. Install axle shaft (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6677 6. Adjust brake shoes to drum (2) with brake gauge (1). 7. Install the rotor (1). 8. Install the caliper adapter (2). 9. Install the caliper (3). 10. Install wheel and tire assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6678 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: Never attempt to catch the piston as it leaves the bore. This could result in personal injury. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6679 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) with a suitable pry tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove piston seals (3) from caliper (1). 10. Push caliper mounting bolt bushings (3) out of the boot seals (2) and remove the boot seals from the caliper (1). 11. Remove caliper bleed screw. Assembly ASSEMBLY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6680 CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (3) into caliper bores (2). 3. Lightly lubricate lip of new boot with silicone grease. Install boot on piston and work boot lip into the groove at the top of piston (3). 4. Stretch boot (2) rearward to straighten boot folds, then move boot forward until folds snap into place. 5. Install piston (3) into caliper bore and press piston down to the bottom of the caliper bore by hand or with hammer handle. 6. Seat dust boot in caliper (2) with Handle C-4171 (1) and Installer (3): - 54 mm caliper: Installer C-3716-A 7. Install the second piston and dust boot. 8. Lubricate caliper mounting bolt bushings, boot seals and bores with Mopar brake grease or Dow Corning(R) 807 grease only. CAUTION: Use of alternative grease may cause damage to the boots seals. 9. Install the boot seals into the caliper seal bores and center the seals in the bores. 10. Install mounting bolt bushings into the boot seals and insure seal lip is engaged into the bushing grooves at either end of the bushing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6681 11. Install caliper bleed screw. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Pad: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Compress the caliper. 4. Remove the caliper. 5. Remove the caliper by tilting the top up and off the caliper adapter. NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper assembly. 6. Support and hang the caliper. 7. Remove the inboard brake shoe from the caliper adapter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6686 8. Remove the outboard brake shoe from the caliper adapter. NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. 9. Remove the top anti-rattle springs from the caliper adapter. 10. Remove the bottom anti-rattle springs from the caliper adapter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6687 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Bottom pistons in caliper bore with C-clamp. Place an old brake shoe between a C-clamp and caliper piston. 2. Clean caliper mounting adapter and anti-rattle springs. 3. Lubricate anti-rattle springs with Mopar brake grease. NOTE: Anti-rattle springs are not interchangeable. 4. Install the bottom anti-rattle springs. 5. Install the top anti-rattle springs. 6. Install inboard brake shoe in adapter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6688 7. Install outboard brake shoe in adapter. 8. Tilt the top of the caliper over rotor and under adapter. Then push the bottom of the caliper down onto the adapter. 9. Install caliper. 10. Install wheel and tire assemblies and lower vehicle. 11. Apply brakes several times to seat caliper pistons and brake shoes and obtain firm pedal. 12. Top off master cylinder fluid level. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications BASE BRAKE Base Brake Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6692 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection DISC BRAKE ROTOR The rotor braking surfaces should not be refinished unless necessary. Light surface rust and scale can be removed with a lathe equipped with dual sanding discs. The rotor surfaces can be restored by machining with a disc brake lathe if surface scoring and wear are light. Replace the rotor for the following conditions: - Severely Scored - Tapered - Hard Spots - Cracked - Below Minimum Thickness ROTOR MINIMUM THICKNESS Measure rotor thickness at the center of the brake shoe contact surface. Replace the rotor if below minimum thickness, or if machining would reduce thickness below the allowable minimum. Rotor minimum thickness is usually specified on the rotor hub. The specification is either stamped or cast into the hub surface. ROTOR RUNOUT Check rotor lateral runout with dial indicator C-3339. Excessive lateral runout will cause brake pedal pulsation and rapid, uneven wear of the brake shoes. Position the dial indicator plunger approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.) inward from the rotor edge. NOTE: Be sure wheel bearing has zero end play before checking rotor runout. Maximum allowable rotor runout is 0.131 mm (0.002 in.). ROTOR THICKNESS VARIATION Variations in rotor thickness will cause pedal pulsation, noise and shudder. Measure rotor thickness at 6 to 12 points around the rotor face. Position the micrometer approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.) from the rotor outer circumference for each measurement. Thickness should not vary by more than 0.015 mm (0.0059 in.) from point-to-point on the rotor. Machine or replace the rotor if necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6693 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures Standard Procedure STANDARD PROCEDURE NOTE: A hub mounted on-vehicle lathe is highly recommended. This type of lathe trues the rotor to the vehicles hub/bearing. The disc brake rotor can be machined if scored or worn. The on-vehicle lathe must machine both sides of the rotor simultaneously with dual cutter heads. The rotor mounting surface must be clean before placing on the on-vehicle lathe. Equipment capable of machining only one side at a time may produce a tapered rotor This type of rotor machining is not recommended. NOTE: Proper wheel torque is also critical to help prevent any warping of the disc brake rotor. CAUTION: Brake rotors that do not meet minimum thickness specifications before or after machining must be replaced. Brake Drum In Hat Rotor Machining BRAKE DRUM IN HAT ROTOR MACHINING The brake drum in hat rotor can be machined on a drum lathe when necessary. Initial machining cuts should be limited to 0.12 - 0.20 mm (0.005 - 0.008 in.) at a time as heavier feed rates can produce taper and surface variation. Final finish cuts of 0.025 to 0.038 mm (0.001 to 0.0015 in.) are recommended and will generally provide the best surface finish. Be sure the drum in hat rotor is securely mounted in the lathe before machining operations. A damper strap should always be used around the drum to reduce vibration and avoid chatter marks. The maximum allowable diameter of the drum braking surface is stamped or cast into the drum in hat rotor. CAUTION: Replace the drum in hat rotor if machining will cause the drum to exceed the maximum allowable diameter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6696 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Front FRONT 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper (2) from the steering knuckle (1) and remove caliper adapter assembly. NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper adapter assembly. 4. Remove the rotor (1) from the hub/bearing wheel studs (2). Rear REAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6697 3. Remove the disc brake caliper. 4. Remove the caliper adapter bolts. 5. Remove the disc brake caliper adapter (2). 6. Remove the retaining clips and rotor assembly (1). Front FRONT 1. On models with all-wheel antilock system (ABS), check condition of tone wheel on hub/bearing. If teeth on wheel are damaged, hub/bearing assembly will have to be replaced (tone wheel is not serviced separately). 2. Install the rotor (1) onto the hub/bearing wheel studs (2). 3. Install the caliper adapter assembly (2) and tighten adapter bolts to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs.). 4. Install the wheel and tire assembly and lower the vehicle. 5. Apply the brakes several times to seat brake pads. Be sure to obtain firm pedal before moving vehicle. Rear REAR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6698 1. Install the rotor (1) to the hub/bearing. 2. Install the caliper adapter (2). 3. Install the caliper adapter bolts and tighten the mounting bolts to 135 Nm (100 ft.lbs). 4. Install the disc brake caliper. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 6704 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 6705 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Bleeding > Page 6706 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of the scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding.. 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time. 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The calipers are a single piston type in the rear and dual piston type in the front. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6711 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the brakes are applied fluid pressure is exerted against the caliper piston (2). The fluid pressure is exerted equally and in all directions. This means pressure exerted against the caliper piston and within the caliper bore will be equal. Fluid pressure applied to the piston is transmitted directly to the inboard brake pad (5). This forces the pad lining against the inner surface of the disc brake rotor. At the same time, fluid pressure within the piston bore forces the caliper to slide inward on the mounting bolts. This action brings the outboard brake pad lining (6) into contact with the outer surface of the disc brake rotor. In summary, fluid pressure acting simultaneously on both piston and caliper, produces a strong clamping action. When sufficient force is applied, friction will attempt to stop the rotors from turning and bring the vehicle to a stop. Application and release of the brake pedal generates only a very slight movement of the caliper and piston. Upon release of the pedal, the caliper and piston return to a rest position. The brake pads do not retract an appreciable distance from the rotor. In fact, clearance is usually at, or close to zero. The reasons for this are to keep road debris from getting between the rotor and lining and in wiping the rotor surface clear each revolution. The caliper piston seal (4) controls the amount of piston (2) extension needed to compensate for normal lining wear. During brake application, the seal is deflected outward by fluid pressure and piston movement(6). When the brakes (and fluid pressure) are released, the seal relaxes and retracts the piston (3). The amount of piston retraction is determined by the amount of seal deflection. Generally the amount is just enough to maintain contact between the piston and inboard brake pad. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures Cleaning - Disc Brake Caliper CLEANING - DISC BRAKE CALIPER Clean the caliper components with clean brake fluid or brake clean only. Wipe the caliper and piston dry with lint free towels or use low pressure compressed air. CAUTION: Do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or similar solvents. These products may leave a residue that could damage the piston and seal. Inspection INSPECTION The piston is made from a phenolic resin (plastic material) and should be smooth and clean. The piston must be replaced if cracked or scored. Do not attempt to restore a scored piston surface by sanding or polishing. CAUTION: If the caliper piston is replaced, install the same type of piston in the caliper. Never interchange phenolic resin and steel caliper pistons. The pistons, seals, seal grooves, caliper bore and piston tolerances are different. The bore can be lightly polished with a brake hone (3) to remove very minor surface imperfections. The caliper should be replaced if the bore is severely corroded, rusted, scored, or if polishing would increase bore diameter more than 0.025 mm (0.001 inch). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6714 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Front FRONT CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose with result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Install prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system, Holding pedal in this position will isolate master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid reservoir while brake lines are open. This will allow you to bleed out the area of repair instead of the entire system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Compress the disc brake caliper (2). 5. Remove the banjo bolt (1) and discard the copper washers (4). 6. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts. 7. Remove the disc brake caliper from the caliper adapter (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6715 Rear REAR 1. Install prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system, Holding pedal in this position will isolate master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid reservoir while brake lines are open. This will allow you to bleed out the area of repair instead of the entire system. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Remove the wheel and tire assembly (6). 4. Drain small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with suction gun. 5. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt (5) if replacing caliper (4). 6. Remove the caliper mounting slide pin bolts (2). 7. Remove the caliper (4) from vehicle. Front FRONT NOTE: Install new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 1. Install the disc brake caliper (2) to the brake caliper adapter (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6716 CAUTION: Verify brake hose (3) is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 2. Install the banjo bolt (1) with new copper washers (4) to the caliper (2). Tighten to 18 Nm (155 in. lbs.) 3. Install the caliper slide pin bolts. Tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 4. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 5. Bleed the area of repair for the brake system, If a proper pedal is not felt during bleeding an area of repair then a base bleed system must be performed. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Lower the vehicle. Rear REAR 1. Install caliper (4) to the caliper adapter (7). 2. Coat the caliper mounting slide pin bolts (2) with silicone grease. Then install and tighten the bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake hose banjo bolt (5) and new copper seal washers if caliper was removed. 4. Install the brake hose (3) to the caliper (4) with and tighten fitting bolt to 18 Nm (155 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or kinked before tightening fitting bolt. 5. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 6. Bleed the area of repair for the brake system, If a proper pedal is not felt during bleeding an area of repair then a base bleed system must be performed. 7. Install the wheel and tire assemblies (6). 8. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. 9. Verify a firm pedal before moving the vehicle. Front FRONT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6717 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the disc brake caliper (1). 4. Remove the bolts securing the caliper adapter (2) to the steering knuckle 5. Remove the caliper adapter. Rear REAR 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Drain a small amount of fluid from master cylinder brake reservoir with a clean suction gun. 4. Bottom the caliper pistons into the caliper by prying the caliper over. 5. Remove the caliper mounting bolts. 6. Remove the disc brake caliper from the mount. CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 7. Remove the inboard and outboard brake pads (1). 8. Remove the anti-rattle clips (2). 9. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). Front FRONT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6718 1. Install the caliper adapter (1) to the steering knuckle. 2. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (2) and tighten to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs.). 3. Install the disc brake caliper (1). 4. Install the tire and wheel assembly 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Rear REAR 1. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (4). Tighten the mounting bolts to 135 Nm (100 ft.lbs). 2. Install the anti-rattle clips (2). 3. Install the inboard and outboard pads (1). 4. Install the caliper mounting bolts. 5. Install the tire and wheel assembly. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6719 2. Remove the disc brake caliper (3). 3. Remove the caliper adapter (2). 4. Remove the rotor (1). 5. Remove the axle shaft (1). 6. Remove the park brake shoes (1). 7. Remove the parking brake cable (2) from the brake lever (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6720 8. Remove the bolts (2) attaching the support plate to the axle and remove the support plate (1). 9. Remove the caliper adapter mount (1) from the axle housing (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the caliper adapter mount (1) on the axle housing (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6721 2. Install support plate (1) on axle flange. Tighten attaching bolts (2) to 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.). 3. Install parking brake cable (2) in the brake lever (1). 4. Install the park brake shoes (1). 5. Install axle shaft (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6722 6. Adjust brake shoes to drum (2) with brake gauge (1). 7. Install the rotor (1). 8. Install the caliper adapter (2). 9. Install the caliper (3). 10. Install wheel and tire assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6723 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: Never attempt to catch the piston as it leaves the bore. This could result in personal injury. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6724 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) with a suitable pry tool. CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove piston seals (3) from caliper (1). 10. Push caliper mounting bolt bushings (3) out of the boot seals (2) and remove the boot seals from the caliper (1). 11. Remove caliper bleed screw. Assembly ASSEMBLY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6725 CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (3) into caliper bores (2). 3. Lightly lubricate lip of new boot with silicone grease. Install boot on piston and work boot lip into the groove at the top of piston (3). 4. Stretch boot (2) rearward to straighten boot folds, then move boot forward until folds snap into place. 5. Install piston (3) into caliper bore and press piston down to the bottom of the caliper bore by hand or with hammer handle. 6. Seat dust boot in caliper (2) with Handle C-4171 (1) and Installer (3): - 54 mm caliper: Installer C-3716-A 7. Install the second piston and dust boot. 8. Lubricate caliper mounting bolt bushings, boot seals and bores with Mopar brake grease or Dow Corning(R) 807 grease only. CAUTION: Use of alternative grease may cause damage to the boots seals. 9. Install the boot seals into the caliper seal bores and center the seals in the bores. 10. Install mounting bolt bushings into the boot seals and insure seal lip is engaged into the bushing grooves at either end of the bushing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6726 11. Install caliper bleed screw. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6731 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6732 Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6733 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6734 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts. Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid. To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers, there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid. If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brakes hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6735 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Always clean the master cylinder reservoir (1) and cap (2) before checking fluid level. If not cleaned, dirt could enter the fluid. The fluid fill level is indicated on the side of the master cylinder reservoir (1). The correct fluid level is to the MAX indicator on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add fluid to the proper level. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 355 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z420 20BK/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6739 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6740 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 355 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z420 20BK/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6741 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Hose/Line: Procedures Double Inverted Flaring DOUBLE INVERTED FLARING A preformed metal brake tube is recommended and preferred for all repairs. However, double-wall steel tube can be used for emergency repair when factory replacement parts are not readily available. 1. Cut off damaged tube with Tubing Cutter. 2. Ream cut edges of tubing to ensure proper flare. 3. Install replacement tube nut on the tube. 4. Insert tube in flaring tool. 5. Place gauge form over the end of the tube. 6. Push tubing through flaring tool jaws until tube contacts recessed notch in gauge that matches tube diameter. 7. Tighten the tool bar on the tube 8. Insert plug on gauge in the tube. Then swing compression disc over gauge and center tapered flaring screw in recess of compression disc. 9. Tighten tool handle until plug gauge is squarely seated on jaws of flaring tool. This will start the inverted flare. 10. Remove the plug gauge and complete the inverted flare. ISO Flaring ISO FLARING A preformed metal brake tube is recommended and preferred for all repairs. However, double-wall steel tube can be used for emergency repair when factory replacement parts are not readily available. To make a ISO flare use an ISO flaring tool kit. 1. Cut off damaged tube with Tubing Cutter. 2. Remove any burrs from the inside of the tube. 3. Install tube nut on the tube. 4. Position the tube in the flaring tool flush with the top of the tool bar (6). Then tighten the tool bar on the tube. 5. Install the correct size adaptor (1) on the flaring tool yoke screw. 6. Lubricate the adaptor (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6746 7. Align the adaptor and yoke screw over the tube. 8. Turn the yoke screw in until the adaptor is squarely seated on the tool bar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6747 Brake Hose/Line: Removal and Replacement Front Hose FRONT HOSE 1. Install prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system, Holding pedal in this position will isolate master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid reservoir while brake lines are open. This will allow you to bleed out the area of repair instead of the entire system. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Loosen the brake line (1) from the brake hose (2) at the frame. 5. Remove the brake line (1) from the brake hose (3) and remove the retaining clip (2) located at the frame. 6. Remove the retaining clip from the brake hose (2). 7. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt at the caliper. 8. Remove the hose. Rear Brake Lines Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6748 REAR BRAKE LINES 1. Install prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system, Holding pedal in this position will isolate master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid reservoir while brake lines are open. This will allow you to bleed out the area of repair instead of the entire system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. NOTE: If brake line (6) is being replaced 3. Remove the brake line (6) from the junction block (2) at the frame, then remove the other end of the line at the caliper hose connection. NOTE: If brake line (1) is being replaced 4. Remove the brake line (1) from the junction block (2) at the frame, then remove the other end of the line at the caliper hose connection. 5. Remove the line being replaced. Caliper Hose Assembly CALIPER HOSE ASSEMBLY NOTE: The axle should be supported in the normal curb position for rear brake hose change. 1. Install prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system, Holding pedal in this position will isolate master cylinder from hydraulic brake system and will not allow brake fluid to drain out of brake fluid reservoir while brake lines are open. This will allow you to bleed out the area of repair instead of the entire system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the brake line going into the brake hose. 4. Remove the mounting bolt for the brake hose at the frame. 5. Remove the banjo bolt (4) at the caliper (2) and discard the copper washers (3). 6. Remove the hose (6). Front Brake Hose Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6749 FRONT BRAKE HOSE 1. Install the brake hose (2) in position. 2. Install the retaining clip (2) for the brake hose (3) at the frame. 3. Install the brake line (1) into the brake hose (2) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in.lbs). 4. Install the brake hose banjo bolt at the caliper and tighten to 18 Nm (155 in.lbs). 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 7. Bleed the area of repair for the brake system, If a proper pedal is not felt during bleeding an area of repair then a base bleed system must be performed. Rear Brake Line REAR BRAKE LINE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6750 1. Install the line. NOTE: If brake line (6) was replaced 2. Install the brake line (6) at the junction block (2) located at the frame. 3. Install the brake line (6) at the brake caliper hose. NOTE: If brake line (1) was replaced 4. Install the brake line (1) at the junction block located at the frame. 5. Install the brake line (1) at the brake caliper hose (6). 6. Lower the vehicle and remove the support. 7. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 8. Bleed the area of repair for the brake system, If a proper pedal is not felt during bleeding an area of repair then a base bleed system must be performed. Caliper Hose Assembly CALIPER HOSE ASSEMBLY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6751 1. Install the hose (6). 2. Install the banjo bolt (4) and new cooper washers (3) at the caliper (2). 3. Install the mounting bolt (5) for the brake hose (6) at the frame. 4. Install the brake line (1) into the caliper hose (6). 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the support. 6. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 7. Bleed the area of repair for the brake system, If a proper pedal is not felt during bleeding an area of repair then a base bleed system must be performed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The HCU consists of a valve body, pump motor, low pressure accumulators, inlet valves, outlet valves and noise attenuators. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6756 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Accumulators in the valve body store extra fluid released from the calipers during ABS mode operation. The pump is used to clear the accumulator of brake fluid and is operated by a DC type motor. The motor is controlled by the ABM. The valves modulate brake pressure during antilock braking and are controlled by the ABM. The HCU provides individual pressure control to each front and rear brake. During antilock braking, the solenoid valves are opened and closed as needed. They are cycled rapidly and continuously to modulate pressure and control wheel slip and deceleration. Brake Traction Control and Electronic Stability Program modulate pressure on each wheel individually without any driver brake input. During normal braking, the HCU solenoid valves and pump are not activated. The master cylinder and power booster operate the same as a vehicle without an ABS brake system. During antilock braking, solenoid valve pressure modulation occurs in three stages; pressure increase, pressure hold, and pressure decrease. The valves are all contained in the valve body portion of the HCU. PRESSURE DECREASE The outlet valve is opened and the inlet valve is closed during the pressure decrease cycle. A pressure decrease cycle is initiated when speed sensor signals indicate high wheel slip at one or more wheels. At this point, the ABM closes the inlet then opens the outlet valve, which also opens the return circuit to the accumulators. Fluid pressure is allowed to bleed off (decrease) as needed to prevent wheel lock. Once the period of high wheel slip has ended, the ABM closes the outlet valve and begins a pressure increase or hold cycle as needed. PRESSURE HOLD Both solenoid valves are closed in the pressure hold cycle but only the inlet valve is energized. Fluid apply pressure in the control channel is maintained at a constant rate. The ABM maintains the hold cycle until sensor inputs indicate a pressure change is necessary. PRESSURE INCREASE The inlet valve is open and the outlet valve is closed during the pressure increase cycle. The pressure increase cycle is used to reapply thew brakes. This cycle controls re-application of fluid apply pressure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the negative battery cable from the battery. 2. Install a brake pedal prop rod. 3. Siphon the master cylinder. 4. Disconnect the brake lines (1) from the master cylinder to the HCU (4). 5. Disconnect the chassis lines (2) to the HCU (4). 6. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (3). 7. Remove HCU assembly mounting nuts. 8. Raise and support the vehicle. 9. Remove the left front tire. NOTE: Careful not to lose the mounting pins when remove the HCU from the vehicle. 10. Lift the HCU assembly off the mounting bracket. 11. Remove the HCU assembly through the left wheel well. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6759 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Reinstall the HCU assembly through the left wheel well. 2. Install HCU assembly on the mounting bracket and Tighten the nuts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake lines (1) to the HCU (4) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 4. Install the electrical harness connector (3) to the HCU/ABM assembly (4). NOTE: If the ABM (2) is being replaced with a new ABM it must be reprogrammed with the use of a Scan tool. 5. Install the chassis lines (1) to the HCU/ABM (2) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 6. Install the left front tire. 7. Install negative battery cable to the battery. 8. Remove the brake pedal prop rod. 9. Bleed ABS brake system. 10. Perform the ABS verification test with a scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic System Junction Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hydraulic System Junction Block: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the brake lines (2) from the junction block (1). 2. Remove the junction block (1) mounting bolt and remove the junction block from the bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic System Junction Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6764 Hydraulic System Junction Block: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the junction block (1) on the bracket and install the mounting bolt. Tighten the mounting bolt to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 2. Install the brake lines (2) into the junction block and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 3. Bleed the base brake system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A two-piece master cylinder is used on all models. The cylinder body containing the primary and secondary pistons is made of aluminum. The removable fluid reservoir (1) is made of nylon reinforced with glass fiber. The reservoir stores reserve brake fluid for the hydraulic brake circuits and has a switch (4) for indicating low fluid levels. The reservoir is the only serviceable component. The fluid compartments of the nylon reservoir are interconnected to permit fluid level equalization. However, the equalization feature does not affect circuit separation in the event of a front or rear brake malfunction. The reservoir compartments will retain enough fluid to operate the functioning hydraulic circuit. Care must be exercised when removing/installing the master cylinder connecting lines. The threads in the cylinder fluid ports (3) can be damaged if care is not exercised. Start all brake line fittings by hand to avoid cross threading. The cylinder reservoir can be replaced when necessary. However, the aluminum body section (2) of the master cylinder is not a repairable component. NOTE: If diagnosis indicates that an internal malfunction has occurred, the aluminum body section must be replaced as an assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6769 Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The master cylinder bore contains a primary and secondary piston. The primary piston supplies hydraulic pressure to the front brakes. The secondary piston supplies hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6770 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection MASTER CYLINDER/POWER BOOSTER 1. Start engine and check booster vacuum hose connections. A hissing noise indicates vacuum leak. Correct any vacuum leak before proceeding. 2. Stop engine and shift transmission into Neutral. 3. Pump brake pedal until all vacuum reserve in booster is depleted. 4. Press and hold brake pedal under light foot pressure. The pedal should hold firm, if the pedal falls away master cylinder is faulty (internal leakage). 5. Start engine and note pedal action. It should fall away slightly under light foot pressure then hold firm. If no pedal action is discernible, power booster, vacuum supply, or vacuum check valve is faulty. Proceed to the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST. 6. If the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST passes, rebuild booster vacuum reserve as follows: Release brake pedal. Increase engine speed to 1500 rpm, close the throttle and immediately turn off ignition to stop engine. 7. Wait a minimum of 90 seconds and try brake action again. Booster should provide two or more vacuum assisted pedal applications. If vacuum assist is not provided, booster is faulty. POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST 1. Connect vacuum gauge (6) to booster check valve (4) with short length of hose (3) and T-fitting (2). 2. Start and run engine at curb idle speed for one minute. 3. Observe the vacuum supply. If vacuum supply is not adequate, repair vacuum supply. 4. Clamp (1) hose (7) shut between intake vacuum source (5) and check valve (4). 5. Stop engine and observe vacuum gauge (6). 6. If vacuum drops more than one inch HG (33 millibars) within 15 seconds, booster diaphragm or check valve is faulty. POWER BOOSTER CHECK VALVE TEST 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from check valve (1). 2. Remove check valve (1) and valve seal (2) from booster (3). 3. Use a hand operated vacuum pump for test. 4. Apply 15-20 inches vacuum at large end of check valve. 5. Plug off the small end to prevent vacuum leakage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6771 6. Vacuum should hold steady. If gauge on pump indicates vacuum loss, check valve is faulty and should be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6774 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Install the prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system. 2. Remove the reservoir cap (2) and siphon fluid into a drain container. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (4) from the fluid level switch in the reservoir (1). 4. Remove the reservoir mounting bolts (2). 5. Remove the reservoir (1) from the master cylinder (3) by pulling upwards and to the side. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6775 6. Remove old seals (1) from the cylinder body (2). Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not use any type of tool to install the seals. Tools may cut, or tear the seals creating a leak problem after installation. Install the seals using finger pressure only. 1. Lubricate the new seals (1) with clean brake fluid and Install new seals in cylinder body (2). Use finger pressure to install and seat seals. 2. Start the reservoir (1) in the seals (2). Then rock the reservoir (1) back and forth while pressing downward to seat it into the seals (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6776 3. Install the mounting bolts (2) for the reservoir (1) to the master cylinder (3). 4. Reconnect the electrical connector (4) to the fluid reservoir level switch. 5. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 6. Fill and bleed base brake system. Without ESP WITHOUT ESP 1. Depress the brake pedal five times to deplete any vacuum that may remain in the booster unit. 2. Siphon and drain the fluid from the reservoir. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (4) for the low fluid level. NOTE: Place a towel or rag under the master cylinder outlet port area to protect the vehicle from brake fluid damage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6777 4. Remove the brake lines (2) from the master cylinder. 5. Remove the four mounting nuts (2) from the master cylinder (1). 6. Remove the master cylinder. NOTE: Gently ease the master cylinder & reservoir assembly away from the booster, During removal the master cylinder should be kept as perpendicular to the front of the booster as possible to avoid excess interference with the booster output rod and in order not to dislodge the output rod (2) from its seat inside the booster. With ESP WITH ESP Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6778 1. Depress the brake pedal five times to deplete any vacuum that may remain in the booster unit. 2. Siphon and drain the fluid from the reservoir. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (4) for the low fluid level. NOTE: Place a towel or rag under the master cylinder outlet port area to protect the vehicle from brake fluid damage. 4. Remove the brake lines (5) from the master cylinder (6). 5. Remove the two mounting nuts (2) from the master cylinder (6). 6. Remove the inner fender well. 7. Remove the fasteners for the integrated power module (IPM) (1). 8. Move the IPM (1) forward to allow clearance to remove the master cylinder (2). 9. Remove the master cylinder (2). NOTE: Gently ease the master cylinder & reservoir assembly (2) away from the booster (3), During removal the master cylinder should be kept as perpendicular to the front of the booster as possible to avoid excess interference with the booster output rod and in order not to dislodge the output rod (4) from its seat inside the booster. Without ESP WITHOUT ESP Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6779 NOTE: If master cylinder is replaced bleed cylinder before installation. NOTE: Make sure the output rod (2) of the brake booster is in position and retained by a output rod retaining ring, by looking into the boosters master cylinder mounting hole. This position will enable the output rod to enter inside of the master cylinder plunger sleeve during installation. Proper position is obtained when the output rod is centered perpendicular to the master cylinder mounting hole. NOTE: Prior to installing the master cylinder assembly check that there is a vacuum seal present at the shoulder of the master cylinder flange and it's neck. A round seal must be present to ensure vacuum integrity with the booster. 1. Gently install the master cylinder on the booster mounting studs (1). NOTE: Take precautions to locate the master cylinder plunger over the booster output rod, before installing the master cylinder. If correctly fitted the master cylinder should slide easily onto the booster output rod before the mounting studs are engaged in the flange holes of the master cylinder. 2. Install new mounting nuts (2) and tighten to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.) 3. Install the brake lines (2) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6780 4. Reconnect the electrical connector (4) for the low fluid level switch. 5. Fill and bleed the base brake system. With ESP WITH ESP NOTE: If master cylinder is replaced bleed cylinder before installation. NOTE: Make sure the output rod (4) of the brake booster is in position and retained by a output rod retaining ring, by looking into the boosters master cylinder mounting hole. This position will enable the output rod to enter inside of the master cylinder plunger sleeve during installation. Proper position is obtained when the output rod is centered perpendicular to the master cylinder mounting hole. NOTE: Prior to installing the master cylinder assembly (2) check that there is a vacuum seal present at the shoulder of the master cylinder flange and its neck. A round seal must be present to ensure vacuum integrity with the booster. 1. Gently install the master cylinder (2) on the booster mounting studs (3). NOTE: Take precautions to locate the master cylinder plunger over the booster output rod, before installing the master cylinder. If correctly fitted the master cylinder should slide easily onto the booster output rod before the mounting studs are engaged in the flange holes of the master cylinder. 2. Install the IPM (1) back in place and install the fasteners for the IPM (1) 3. Install the left front wheel well. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6781 4. Install new mounting nuts (2) and tighten to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 5. Install the brake lines (5) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 6. Reconnect the electrical connector (4) for the low fluid level switch. 7. Fill and bleed the base brake system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Backing Plate: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the disc brake caliper. 3. Remove the caliper adapter. 4. Remove the rotor. 5. Remove the axle shaft (1). 6. Remove the park brake shoes (3). 7. Remove the parking brake cable from the brake lever. 8. Remove the four bolts (2) attaching the support plate (1) to the axle and remove the support plate (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6787 Parking Brake Backing Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install support plate (1) on axle flange. Tighten attaching bolts (3) to 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.). 2. Install parking brake cable in the brake lever. 3. Install the park brake shoes (2). 4. Install axle shaft (1). 5. Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge. 6. Install the rotor. 7. Install the caliper adapter. 8. Install the caliper. 9. Install the wheel and tire assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments CABLE TENSIONER NOTE: Tensioner adjustment is only necessary when the tensioner, or a cable has been replaced or disconnected for service. When adjustment is necessary, perform adjustment only as described in the following procedure. This is necessary to avoid faulty park brake operation. 1. Raise the vehicle. 2. Back off the cable tensioner adjusting nut (5) to create slack in the cables. 3. Remove the rear wheel/tire assemblies. Then remove the brake rotors. 4. Verify the brakes are in good condition and operating properly. 5. Verify the park brake cables operate freely and are not binding, or seized. 6. Check the rear brake shoe adjustment with standard brake gauge. 7. Install the rotors and verify that the rotors rotate freely without drag. 8. Install the wheel/tire assemblies. 9. Lower the vehicle enough for access to the park brake foot pedal. Then fully apply the park brakes. NOTE: Leave park brakes applied until adjustment is complete. 10. Raise the vehicle again. 11. Mark the tensioner rod 6.35 mm (1/4 in.) from edge of the tensioner (2). 12. Tighten the adjusting nut (5) on the tensioner rod until the mark is no longer visible. CAUTION: Do not loosen, or tighten the tensioner adjusting nut for any reason after completing adjustment. 13. Lower the vehicle until the rear wheels are 15-20 cm (6-8 in.) off the shop floor. 14. Release the park brake foot pedal and verify that rear wheels rotate freely without drag. Then lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Removal Front Parking Brake Cable FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (2). 3. Loosen adjusting nut (1) to create slack in front cable. 4. Remove the front cable from the cable connector. 5. Compress cable end fitting at underbody bracket (1) and remove the cable (2) from the bracket. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6793 7. Push ball end of cable out of pedal clevis with small screwdriver. 8. Compress cable end fitting (2) at the pedal bracket and remove the cable (1). 9. Remove the left cowl trim and sill plate. 10. Pull up the carpet and remove the cable from the body clip. 11. Pull up on the cable (2) and remove the cable with the body grommet (1). Rear Park Brake Cable REAR PARK BRAKE CABLE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6794 3. Loosen cable adjuster nut (6). 4. Remove the rear park brake cable (5) from the intermediate park brake cable (1). 5. Compress tabs on cable end fitting (3) on the rear park brake cable (4) to the frame mount bracket. Then pull the cable through the bracket. 6. Disengage the park brake cable (2) from behind the rotor assembly. 7. Compress cable tabs on each cable end fitting at the brake cable support plate (1). 8. Remove the cables from the brake cable support plates. Right Rear Cable RIGHT REAR CABLE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (1). 3. Loosen the brake cable at the equalizer and adjuster nut. 4. Remove the right cable from the front cable. 5. Remove the right cable from the equalizer. 6. Remove the cable from the frame bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6795 7. Remove the cable (4) from the axle bracket (2). 8. Remove the cable bracket from the shock bracket. 9. Remove the brake cable from the brake lever (3). Left Rear Cable LEFT REAR CABLE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (1). 3. Loosen the brake cable at the equalizer and adjuster nut. 4. Remove the left cable from the front cable. 5. Remove the left cable from the equalizer. 6. Remove the cable from the frame bracket. 7. Remove the cable (4) from the axle bracket (2). 8. Remove the brake cable from the brake lever (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6796 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Installation Front Parking Brake Cable FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE 1. From inside the vehicle, insert the cable end fitting (2) into the hole in the pedal assembly (1). 2. Seat the cable retainer in the pedal assembly (1). 3. Engage the cable ball end in clevis on the pedal assembly. 4. Route the cable (2) through the floorpan and install the body grommet (1). 5. Place the carpet down and install the left cowl trim and sill plate. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6797 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Route the cable through the underbody bracket (1) and seat the cable end fitting (2) in the bracket. 8. Connect the cable to the cable connector. 9. Perform the park brake adjustment procedure. 10. Lower the vehicle. Rear Park Brake Cable REAR PARK BRAKE CABLE 1. Push each cable end through the brake cable support plate hole until the cable end fitting tabs lock into place. NOTE: Pull on the cable to ensure it is locked into place. 2. Push the cable (4) through the frame bracket. 3. Lock the left cable end fitting tabs (3) into the frame bracket hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6798 4. Install the rear cables (2) into the tensioner rod behind the rear of the brake assembly (1). 5. Install the cable to the intermediate cable connector. 6. Release and remove the lock out device. 7. Perform the park brake adjustment procedure. 8. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. Right Rear Cable RIGHT REAR CABLE 1. Install the brake cable (2) to the brake lever (3). 2. Install the cable bracket to the shock bracket. 3. Install the cable to the axle bracket. 4. Install the cable to the frame bracket. 5. Install the right cable to the equalizer. 6. Install the right cable to the front cable. 7. Adjust the brake cable at the equalizer and using the adjuster nut. Left Rear Cable LEFT REAR CABLE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6799 1. Install the brake cable (2) to the brake lever (3). 2. Install the cable to the axle bracket. 3. Install the cable to the frame bracket. 4. Install the left cable to the equalizer. 5. Install the left cable to the front cable. 6. Adjust the brake cable at the equalizer and using the adjuster nut. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Pedal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Loosen the cable tensioner nut at the equalizer (5) to create slack in the front cable. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the steering column opening cover (2). 6. Remove the steering column opening reinforcement (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6804 7. Disconnect the brake lamp wire from the switch on the pedal assembly. 8. Roll the carpet back, loosen the front cable grommet from the floor pan and the cable retainer. 9. Disengage the release rod (1) from the arm on the pedal assembly. 10. Remove the bolts (2) /nuts (1) from the pedal assembly (5) and remove the assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6805 Parking Brake Pedal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the replacement pedal assembly (5) on the dash and cowl. 2. Install the bolts (2) / nuts (1) and tighten to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the front cable (3) to the arm on the pedal assembly (5). 4. Tighten the front cable grommet (4) to the floor pan and the cable retainer, roll the carpet back. 5. Connect the wires to the brake lamp switch. 6. Install the park brake release rod (1). 7. Install the steering column opening reinforcement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6806 8. Install the steering column opening cover. 9. Raise the vehicle. 10. Adjust the parking brake cable tensioner (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Shoes Parking Brake Shoe: Adjustments Parking Brake Shoes PARKING BRAKE SHOES CAUTION: Before adjusting the park brake shoes be sure that the park brake pedal is in the fully released position. If park brake pedal is not in the fully released position, the park brake shoes can not be accurately adjusted. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove tire and wheel. 3. Remove disc brake caliper from caliper adapter. 4. Remove rotor from the axleshaft. NOTE: When measuring the brake drum diameter, the diameter should be measured in the center of the area in which the park brake shoes contact the surface of the brake drum. 5. Using Brake Shoe Gauge, Special Tool C-3919 (1), or equivalent, accurately measure the inside diameter of the park brake drum portion (2) of the rotor. 6. Using a ruler (2) that reads in 64th of an inch, accurately read the measurement of the inside diameter of the park brake drum from the special tool (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Shoes > Page 6811 7. Reduce the inside diameter measurement of the brake drum that was taken using Special Tool C-3919 (2) by 1/64 of an inch. Reset Gauge, Brake Shoe, Special Tool C-3919 (2) or the equivalent used, so that the outside measurement jaws are set to the reduced measurement. 8. Place Gauge, Brake Shoe, Special Tool C-3919, or equivalent over the park brake shoes. The special tool must be located diagonally across at the top of one shoe and bottom of opposite shoe (widest point) of the park brake shoes. 9. Using the star wheel adjuster, adjust the park brake shoes until the lining on the park brake shoes just touches the jaws on the special tool. 10. Repeat step 8 above and measure shoes in both directions. 11. Install brake rotor on the axleshaft. 12. Rotate rotor to verify that the park brake shoes are not dragging on the brake drum. If park brake shoes are dragging, remove rotor and back off star wheel adjuster one notch and recheck for brake shoe drag against drum. Continue with the previous step until brake shoes are not dragging on brake drum. 13. Install disc brake caliper on caliper adapter. 14. Install wheel and tire. 15. Tighten the wheel mounting nuts in the proper sequence until all nuts are torqued to half the specified torque. Then repeat the tightening sequence to the full specified torque of 129 Nm (95 ft. lbs.). 16. Lower vehicle. 17. Apply and release the park brake pedal one time. This will seat and correctly adjust the park brake cables. CAUTION: Before moving vehicle, pump brake pedal several times to ensure the vehicle has a firm enough pedal to stop the vehicle. 18. Road test the vehicle to ensure proper function of the vehicle's brake system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Shoes > Page 6812 Parking Brake Shoe: Adjustments With Adjusting Tool WITH ADJUSTING TOOL Adjustment can be made with a standard brake gauge or with adjusting tool. Adjustment is performed with the complete brake assembly installed on the backing plate. 1. Be sure parking brake lever is fully released. 2. Raise vehicle so rear wheels can be rotated freely. 3. Remove plug from each access hole in brake support plates. 4. Loosen parking brake cable adjustment nut until there is slack in front cable. 5. Insert adjusting tool (4) through support plate access hole (1) and engage tool in teeth of adjusting screw star wheel (2). 6. Rotate adjuster screw star wheel (move tool handle upward) until slight drag can be felt when wheel is rotated. 7. Push and hold adjuster lever away from star wheel with thin screwdriver (3). 8. Back off adjuster screw star wheel until brake drag is eliminated. 9. Repeat adjustment at opposite wheel. Be sure adjustment is equal at both wheels. 10. Install support plate access hole plugs. 11. Adjust parking brake cable and lower vehicle. 12. Depress park brake pedal and make sure park brakes hold the vehicle stationary. 13. Release park brake pedal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Parking Brake Shoe: Procedures Cleaning - Rear Drum In Hat Brake CLEANING - REAR DRUM IN HAT BRAKE Clean the individual brake components, including the support plate exterior, with a water dampened cloth or with brake cleaner. Do not use any other cleaning agents. Remove light rust and scale from the brake shoe contact pads on the support plate with fine sandpaper. Inspection - Rear Drum In Hat Brake INSPECTION - REAR DRUM IN HAT BRAKE As a general rule, riveted brake shoes (2) should be replaced when worn to within 0.78 mm (1/32 in.) of the rivet heads. Bonded lining should be replaced when worn to a thickness of 1.6 mm (1/16 in.). Examine the lining contact pattern to determine if the shoes are bent or the drum is tapered. The lining should exhibit contact across its entire width. Shoes (2) exhibiting contact only on one side should be replaced and the drum checked for runout or taper. Inspect the adjuster screw assembly (5). Replace the assembly if the star wheel or threads are damaged, or the components are severely rusted or corroded. Discard the brake springs (3) and retainer components (4) if worn, distorted or collapsed. Also replace the springs if a brake drag condition had occurred. Overheating will distort and weaken the springs. Inspect the brake shoe contact pads on the support plate (1), replace the support plate if any of the pads are worn or rusted through. Also replace the plate (1) if it is bent or distorted. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6815 Parking Brake Shoe: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the disc brake caliper. 4. Remove the disc brake rotor. 5. Lockout the parking brake cable (1). 6. Disengage the park brake cable (2) from behind the rotor assembly to allow easier disassembly of the park brake shoes. 7. Remove the axleshaft (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6816 8. Disassemble the rear park brake shoes (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: On a new vehicle or after parking brake lining replacement, it is recommended that the parking brake system be conditioned prior to use. This is done by making one stop from 25 mph on dry pavement or concrete using light to moderate force on the parking brake foot pedal. 1. Reassemble the rear park brake shoes (1). 2. Install the axleshaft (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6817 3. Install the park brake cable (2) to the lever behind the support plate (1). 4. Unlock the park brake cable. 5. Adjust the rear brake shoes. 6. Install the disc brake rotor. 7. Install the disc brake caliper. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly . 9. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6821 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6822 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6823 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6826 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6827 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6830 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Vacuum sensor measures the available vacuum in the brake booster. In the event of a Booster failure, the ESP system offers additional brake force to the driver. Utilizing the hydraulic system of ESP, the brake line pressure is increased to achieve a higher deceleration with low pedal force Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the vacuum sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Remove vacuum sensor (1) from the master cylinder. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6837 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install vacuum sensor (1) to the master cylinder. 2. Connect wiring harness (1) connector to vacuum sensor. 3. Perform Verification Test and clear any faults. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Description Without ESP WITHOUT ESP All models use a tandem diaphragm, power brake booster (3). NOTE: The power brake booster is not a repairable component. The booster must be replaced as an assembly if diagnosis indicates a malfunction has occurred. With ESP WITH ESP The booster assembly consists of a housing divided into separate chambers by two internal diaphragms. The outer edge of each diaphragm is attached to the booster housing (1). Two push rods are used in the booster. The primary push rod connects the booster to the brake pedal. The secondary push rod connects the booster to the master cylinder to stroke the cylinder pistons. Power brake boosters with ESP will have a travel sensor (7). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6842 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The booster unit consists of a single housing divided into two by a tandem diaphragm (3). The outer edge of the diaphragm is secured to the housing. A spacer block (2) is located in between the cowl and the booster housing. The booster push rod (1), connects the booster to the brake pedal and master cylinder (4), is attached to the center of the diaphragm. A check valve (5) is used in the booster outlet connected to the engine intake manifold. Power assist is generated by utilizing a combination of vacuum and atmospheric pressure to boost brake assist. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Removal Without ESP WITHOUT ESP 1. Depress the brake pedal five times to deplete any vacuum that may remain in the booster unit. 2. Siphon and drain the fluid from the reservoir. 3. Remove the wiper arm (1) and cowl assembly. 4. Remove the brake lamp switch. 5. Remove clip securing booster push rod to brake pedal (1). 6. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (2). 7. Disconnect the brake level electrical connector (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6845 8. Disconnect the brake lines at the master cylinder. 9. Disconnect vacuum line (1) at booster. 10. Remove master cylinder (1) from the mounting studs (2) on the power brake booster. 11. Remove the booster (1) and spacer block from front cowl panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6846 12. Wipe clean any debris from the brake booster cowl mounting hole (1). With ESP WITH ESP 1. Depress the brake pedal five times to deplete any vacuum that may remain in the booster unit. 2. Siphon and drain the fluid from the reservoir. 3. Remove the wiper arm (1) and cowl assembly. 4. Disconnect the electrical connectors (4, 5 & 7). 5. Remove the mounting nuts (6) for the master cylinder. 6. Remove the vacuum hoses to the check valve (2) (DO NOT REMOVE CHECK VALVE). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6847 7. Remove the inner fender well. 8. Remove the fasteners for the integrated power module (IPM) (4). 9. Move the IPM (4) forward to allow clearance to remove the master cylinder (1). NOTE: Gently ease the master cylinder & reservoir assembly (1) away from the booster (2), During removal the master cylinder should be kept as perpendicular to the front of the booster as possible to avoid excess interference with the booster output rod and in order not to dislodge the output rod (3) from its seat inside the booster. 10. Move the master cylinder (1) off the booster and forward to the engine side. 11. Remove the brake lamp switch. 12. Remove clip securing booster push rod to brake pedal (1). 13. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (2). 14. Remove the booster (4) with the spacer block (3) and gasket (2) from front cowl panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6848 15. Wipe clean any debris from the brake booster cowl mounting hole (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6849 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Installation Without ESP WITHOUT ESP 1. Install the spacer block and gaskets if removed. 2. Guide the booster studs into the cowl panel holes and seat the booster (1) on the panel. 3. Install and tighten new booster attaching nuts (2) to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 4. Install the booster push rod (1) on brake pedal and install clip. 5. Install a new brake lamp switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6850 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6855 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6856 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6857 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 167 Component : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) (PUMP) A107 12TN/RD 2-3-4-5-6 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT 7-- 8-9 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG 10 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 11 - 12 - 13 GROUND Z107 12BK/DG 14 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 19 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 20DG/LB 20 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 20DG/YL 21 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 22 - 23 - 24 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 25 FUSED B(+) (VALVE) A111 18DG/RD 26 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 27 - 28 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 29 - 30 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 31 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 20VT/WT 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 33 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 20LG/GY 34 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN 35 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6862 36 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B401 20DG 37 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 38 GROUND Z923 12BK Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6863 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 167 Component : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTILOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 38 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) (PUMP) A107 12TN/RD 2-3-4-5-6 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT 7-- 8-9 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SUPPLY B31 20DG 10 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL B32 20DG/BK 11 - 12 - 13 GROUND Z107 12BK/DG 14 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 19 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 20DG/LB 20 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 20DG/YL 21 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 22 - 23 - 24 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 25 FUSED B(+) (VALVE) A111 18DG/RD 26 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 27 - 28 VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR RETURN B33 20DG/BR 29 - 30 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 31 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 20VT/WT 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 33 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 20LG/GY 34 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN 35 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6864 36 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B401 20DG 37 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 38 GROUND Z923 12BK Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor which handles testing, monitoring and controlling the ABS brake system operation. The ABM is mounted on the top of the hydraulic control unit (HCU). The ABM operates the ABS system and is separate from other vehicle electrical circuits. ABM voltage source is through CKT A111 (fused B+). NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, Perform the ABS verification using a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6867 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation ABS Unit ABS UNIT SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor (CAN C BUS) - G-Sensor (4X4) ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp ESP Unit - (Electronic Stability Program) ESP UNIT - (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM) SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS and ESP warning lights when a ABS system fault is detected. If only the ESP light is illuminated ESP system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. System faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor (CAN C BUS) - Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) (CAN C BUS) - Dynamic Sensor - ESP Off Switch Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6868 - Vacuum Sensor ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp - ESP Warning Lamp - ESP Function Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: ABM module can be removed without removing the HCU unit. 1. Remove the left front tire and wheel assembly. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the ABM module. 3. Remove the module mounting screws (2). 4. Remove the module from the HCU (1) on ESP vehicles be careful not to damage the pressure sensor or not to touch the sensor terminals on the HCU side or the contact pads on the ABM side when removing the ABM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6871 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the module on the HCU on ESP vehicles be careful not to damage the pressure sensor or not to touch the sensor terminals on the HCU side or the contact pads on the ABM side when installing the ABM. 2. Install the mounting screws (2) and tighten to 2.5 Nm (22 in. lbs). 3. Perform the ABS verification test with a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6875 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6876 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6877 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Vacuum sensor measures the available vacuum in the brake booster. In the event of a Booster failure, the ESP system offers additional brake force to the driver. Utilizing the hydraulic system of ESP, the brake line pressure is increased to achieve a higher deceleration with low pedal force Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the vacuum sensor electrical connector (1). 2. Remove vacuum sensor (1) from the master cylinder. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6884 Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install vacuum sensor (1) to the master cylinder. 2. Connect wiring harness (1) connector to vacuum sensor. 3. Perform Verification Test and clear any faults. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 355 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z420 20BK/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6888 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6889 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 355 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 2 GROUND Z420 20BK/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6890 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations Lateral Accelerometer: Locations Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 6894 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 6895 Lateral Accelerometer: Diagrams Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Locations > Page 6896 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation Sensor-Dynamics DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor (2). The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor (2) must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics > Page 6899 Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation Sensor-G DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located only inside the ABS controller 4x4 only. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the antilock brake module (ABM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (3) from the dynamics sensor (2). 3. Remove the two nuts (1) securing the sensor to the floor. 4. Remove the sensor (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6902 Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor (2) on the studs (4) to the vehicle. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is facing toward the rear of the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the sensor (2). 3. Install the two retaining nuts (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). 4. Install the floor console. 5. Perform the ABS verification test with the scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6906 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6907 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6908 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6911 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6912 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6915 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations Steering Angle Sensor: Locations Component ID: 391 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : # of pins : 4 A CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD B GROUND Z455 20BK/LB C CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB D FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6919 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6920 Steering Angle Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 391 Component : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Connector: Name : SENSOR-STEERING ANGLE Color : # of pins : 4 A CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD B GROUND Z455 20BK/LB C CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB D FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6921 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Locations > Page 6922 Steering Angle Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. The steering angle sensor is used to measure the driver intended path in the ESP system. Based on the deviation between steering wheel input and the Yaw Rate signal from the dynamic sensor, ESP can be activated. The SAS should be mounted correctly to ensure that the system functions properly and there are not inadvertent activations. Any replacement of the steering angle sensor requires that the ABS verification test be performed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. 1. For removal of the steering angle sensor Refer to CLOCKSPRING - REMOVAL. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Steering Angle Sensor, Traction Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6925 Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Steering angle sensor is part of the airbag clockspring and is not serviced separately from the clockspring. 1. For installation of the steering angle sensor Refer to CLOCKSPRING - INSTALLATION). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations Traction Control Switch: Locations Component ID: 451 Component : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE B27 20DG/WT 2 GROUND Z427 20BK/WT Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6929 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6930 Traction Control Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 451 Component : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRACTION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH SENSE B27 20DG/WT 2 GROUND Z427 20BK/WT Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6931 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 397 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 2 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6936 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6937 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 18LG/GY 2 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 18DG/YL Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6938 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6939 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 2 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6940 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6941 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 18DG/LB 2 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 18DG/DB Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6942 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 397 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B9 20DG/LG 2 LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B8 20DG/TN Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6945 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6946 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Rear Component ID: 398 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B4 18LG/GY 2 LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B3 18DG/YL Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6947 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6948 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 399 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B7 20DG/VT 2 RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B6 20DG/WT Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6949 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6950 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Rear Component ID: 400 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+) B2 18DG/LB 2 RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-) B1 18DG/DB Component Location - 54 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 6951 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6952 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The sensors convert wheel speed into a digital signal. The ABM sends 12 volts to the sensors. The sensor has an internal hall sensor that alters the voltage and amperage of the signal circuit. This voltage and amperage is changed by magnetic induction when the toothed tone wheel passes the wheel speed sensor. This digital signal is sent to the ABM. The ABM measures the voltage and amperage of the digital signal for each wheel. The signal strength is affected by the distance between the Sensor and the tone ring. If the "Air Gap" between the WSS and the tone ring/wheel is too large, the WSS signal can drop out at low speed, (below 40 mph) and can cause an ABS activation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front rotor. 2. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector. 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Front > Page 6955 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector (3). 3. Remove the mounting bolt (1) from the sensor (4). 4. Remove the sensor (4) from the brake caliper adapter (2). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the wheel speed sensor (4) in the brake caliper adapter (2). 2. Install the sensor mounting bolt (1) and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the electrical wiring connector (3) to the sensor (4). 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations Yaw Rate Sensor: Locations Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6959 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6960 Yaw Rate Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 358 Component : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Connector: Name : SENSOR-DYNAMICS Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (ESP) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z608 20BK 2 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 3 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6961 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Dynamics DESCRIPTION The Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensors are housed into one unit known as the Dynamics Sensor (2). The sensor is used to measure side-to-side (Lateral) motion and vehicle rotational sensing (how fast the vehicle is turning - Yaw). Yaw and Lateral Acceleration Sensors cannot be serviced separately. The entire Dynamics Sensor (2) must be replaced when necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Dynamics > Page 6964 Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-G DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located only inside the ABS controller 4x4 only. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the antilock brake module (ABM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (3) from the dynamics sensor (2). 3. Remove the two nuts (1) securing the sensor to the floor. 4. Remove the sensor (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6967 Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the dynamics sensor (2) on the studs (4) to the vehicle. NOTE: Make sure the electrical connector is facing toward the rear of the vehicle. 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to the sensor (2). 3. Install the two retaining nuts (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). 4. Install the floor console. 5. Perform the ABS verification test with the scan tool. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/ABS Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover. 3. Remove the tilt lever handle. 4. Remove the lower shroud (2) from steering column. 5. Place shifter in PARK position. The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 6. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key (2) to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin with a small punch (3), while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6975 7. Remove the key (2) and key cylinder (1) from the column (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6976 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder (1) into the housing (3) using care to align the end of the key cylinder with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (1) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the lower shroud. 4. Install the tilt lever handle. 5. Install the steering column opening cover. 6. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starter Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6981 Starter Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 226 Component : RELAY-STARTER MOTOR Connector: Name : RELAY-STARTER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A923 14RD/OR 85 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)F924 20PK/YL 87 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT T750 14GY/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Starter Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The starter relay is an electromechanical device that switches battery current to the pull-in coil of the starter solenoid when the ignition switch is turned to the Start position. The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. See the PDC cover for relay identification and location. The starter relay is a International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. The starter relay cannot be repaired or adjusted. If faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6984 Starter Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one movable) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed) relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts (normally closed) by spring pressure. When electromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable contact away from normally closed fixed contact, and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed contact. When electromagnetic coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns movable contact to normally closed position. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with electromagnetic coil within relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes produced when coil is de-energized. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Starter Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove cover from Power Distribution Center (PDC) for relay identification and location. 3. Remove starter relay from PDC. 4. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 5. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6987 Starter Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Push down firmly on starter relay until terminals are fully seated into PDC receptacle. 2. Install PDC cover. 3. Connect battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Description DESCRIPTION The battery cables are large gauge, stranded copper wires sheathed within a heavy plastic or synthetic rubber insulating jacket. The wire used in the battery cables combines excellent flexibility and reliability with high electrical current carrying capacity. The battery cables cannot be repaired and, if damaged or inoperative, they must be replaced. The battery cables feature a stamped brass clamping type female battery terminal crimped onto one end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. A square headed pinch-bolt and hex nut are installed at the open end of the female battery terminal clamp. The battery positive cable also includes a red molded rubber protective cover for the female battery terminal clamp. Large eyelet type terminals are crimped onto the opposite end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. The battery positive cable wires have a red insulating jacket to provide visual identification and feature a larger female battery terminal clamp to allow connection to the larger battery positive terminal post. The battery negative cable wires have a black insulating jacket and a smaller female battery terminal clamp. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description > Page 6993 Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Operation OPERATION The battery cables connect the battery terminal posts to the vehicle electrical system. These cables also provide a return path for electrical current generated by the charging system for restoring the voltage potential of the battery. The female battery terminal clamps on the ends of the battery cable wires provide a strong and reliable connection of the battery cable to the battery terminal posts. The terminal pinch bolts allow the female terminal clamps to be tightened around the male terminal posts on the top of the battery. The eyelet terminals secured to the ends of the battery cable wires opposite the female battery terminal clamps provide secure and reliable connection of the battery to the vehicle electrical system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6994 Battery Cable: Testing and Inspection BATTERY CABLES A voltage drop test will determine if there is excessive resistance in the battery cable terminal connections or the battery cables. If excessive resistance is found in the battery cable connections, the connection point should be disassembled, cleaned of all corrosion or foreign material, then reassembled. Following reassembly, check the voltage drop for the battery cable connection and the battery cable again to confirm repair. When performing the voltage drop test, it is important to remember that the voltage drop is giving an indication of the resistance between the two points at which the voltmeter probes are attached. EXAMPLE: When testing the resistance of the battery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the battery positive cable terminal clamp and to the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. If you probe the battery positive terminal post and the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud, you are reading the combined voltage drop in the battery positive cable terminal clamp-to-terminal post connection and the battery positive cable. TESTING VOLTAGE DROP TEST WARNING: If the battery shows signs of freezing, leaking, loose posts, or low electrolyte level, do not test, assist-boost, or charge. The battery may arc internally and explode. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: Explosive hydrogen gas forms in and around the battery. Do not smoke, use flame, or create sparks near the battery. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: The battery contains sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes, or clothing. In the event of contact, flush with water and call a physician immediately. Keep out of the reach of children. WARNING: If the battery is equipped with removable cell caps, be certain that each of the cell caps is in place and tight before the battery is returned to service. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result from loose or missing cell caps. The following operation will require a voltmeter accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing this test, be certain that the following procedures are accomplished: - The battery is fully-charged and tested. - Fully engage the parking brake. - If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Park position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neutral position and block the clutch pedal in the fully depressed position. - Verify that all lamps and accessories are turned off. - To prevent the engine from starting, remove the proper fuse in the PDC. 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery negative terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6995 2. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery positive terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery positive terminal post. 3. Connect the voltmeter (2) to measure between the battery positive cable terminal clamp (1) and the starter solenoid (3) B(+) terminal stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery positive cable eyelet terminal connection at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery positive cable. 4. Connect the voltmeter (1) to measure between the battery (2) negative cable terminal clamp and a good clean ground (3) on the engine block. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery negative cable eyelet terminal connection to the engine block. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the battery from the battery tray. 2. Remove the two upper bolts for the battery tray (1). 3. Remove the right front tire and wheel assembly. 4. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 5. Remove the lower battery tray (1) mounting bolts (2). 6. Remove the electrical routing clips at the battery tray. 7. Remove the battery tray (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal > Page 7000 Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean and inspect the battery tray (1). 2. Position the battery tray (1) into the vehicle. 3. Install and tighten the lower bolts (2) that secure the battery tray (1). Tighten the screws to 12.4 Nm (110 in. lbs.) 4. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 5. Install the right front tire and wheel assembly. 6. Install and tighten upper bolts that secure the battery tray to fender frame. Tighten the screws to 12.4 Nm (110 in. lbs.). 7. Install the battery onto the battery tray. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations Alternator: Locations Component ID: 117 Component : GENERATOR Connector: Name : GENERATOR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 2 GEN SENSE A803 18GY Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7005 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7006 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7007 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7008 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7009 Component Location - 7 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7010 Connector: Name : GENERATOR-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7011 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7012 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7013 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7014 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7015 Component Location - 7 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7016 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7019 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7020 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7021 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7022 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7023 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7024 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7025 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7026 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7027 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7028 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7029 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7030 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7031 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7032 Alternator: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7033 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7034 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7035 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7036 Alternator: Connector Views Component ID: 117 Component : GENERATOR Connector: Name : GENERATOR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GEN FIELD CONTROL K20 18BR/GY 2 GEN SENSE A803 18GY Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7037 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7038 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7039 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7040 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7041 Component Location - 7 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7042 Connector: Name : GENERATOR-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7043 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7044 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7045 Component Location - 22 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7046 Component Location - 23 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7047 Component Location - 7 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7048 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Alternator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The generator is belt-driven by the engine using a serpentine type drive belt. It is serviced only as a complete assembly. If the generator fails for any reason, the entire assembly must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7051 Alternator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION As the energized rotor begins to rotate within the generator, the spinning magnetic field induces a current into the windings of the stator coil. Once the generator begins producing sufficient current, it also provides the current needed to energize the rotor. The stator winding connections deliver the induced alternating current to 3 positive and 3 negative diodes for rectification. From the diodes, rectified direct current is delivered to the vehicle electrical system through the generator battery terminal. Although the generators appear the same externally, different generators with different output ratings are used on this vehicle. Be certain that the replacement generator has the same output rating and part number as the original unit. Refer to Generator Ratings for amperage ratings and part numbers. Noise emitting from the generator may be caused by: worn, loose or defective bearings; a loose or defective drive pulley; incorrect, worn, damaged or misadjusted fan drive belt; loose mounting bolts; a misaligned drive pulley or a defective stator or diode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Alternator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 3.7L / 4.7L WARNING: Disconnect negative cable from battery before removing battery output wire (B+ wire) from generator. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to electrical system. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove generator drive belt. 3. Unsnap plastic insulator cap (3) from B+ output terminal. 4. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut (2) at rear of generator. Disconnect terminal from generator. 5. Disconnect field wire connector (4) at rear of generator by pushing on connector tab. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7054 6. Remove 1 rear vertical generator mounting bolt (2). 7. Remove 2 front horizontal generator mounting bolts (1). 8. Remove generator from vehicle. 5.7L WARNING: Disconnect negative cable from battery before removing battery output wire (B+ wire) from generator. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to electrical system. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove generator drive belt. 3. Unsnap plastic insulator cap from B+ output terminal. 4. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of generator. Disconnect terminal from generator. 5. Disconnect field wire connector at rear of generator by pushing on connector tab. 6. Remove generator support bracket nuts and bolt (3) and (4) and remove support bracket (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7055 7. Remove 2 generator mounting bolts (1) and (3). 8. Remove generator (2) from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7056 Alternator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 3.7L / 4.7L 1. Position generator (3) to engine and install 2 horizontal bolts (1) and 1 vertical bolt (2). 2. Tighten 2 horizontally mounted bolts to 40 ft. lbs. (55 Nm). Tighten 1 vertically mounted bolt to 40 ft. lbs. (55 Nm). 3. Snap field wire connector (4) into rear of generator. 4. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud. Tighten mounting nut (2) to 108 in. lbs. (12 Nm). CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt can be damaged. CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The water pump may be rotating in the wrong direction if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine to overheat. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7057 5. Install generator drive belt. 6. Install negative battery cable to battery. 5.7L 1. Position generator (2) to engine and install 2 mounting bolts (1) and (3). 2. Tighten bolts to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm). 3. Position support bracket (2) to front of generator and install bolt and nuts (3). Tighten bolt / nuts to to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm). 4. Snap field wire connector into rear of generator. 5. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud. Tighten mounting nut to 108 in. lbs. (12 Nm). CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt can be damaged. CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The water pump may be rotating in the wrong direction if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine to overheat. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7058 6. Install generator drive belt. 7. Install negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Voltage Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Voltage Regulator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) is not a separate component. It is actually a voltage regulating circuit located within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EVR is not serviced separately. If replacement is necessary, the PCM must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Voltage Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7063 Voltage Regulator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The amount of DC current produced by the generator is controlled by EVR circuitry contained within the PCM. This circuitry is connected in series with the generators second rotor field terminal and its ground. Voltage is regulated by cycling the ground path to control the strength of the rotor magnetic field. The EVR circuitry monitors system line voltage (B+) and battery temperature. It then determines a target charging voltage. If sensed battery voltage is 0.5 volts or lower than the target voltage, the PCM grounds the field winding until sensed battery voltage is 0.5 volts above target voltage. A circuit in the PCM cycles the ground side of the generator field up to 100 times per second (100Hz), but has the capability to ground the field control wire 100% of the time (full field) to achieve the target voltage. If the charging rate cannot be monitored (limp-in), a duty cycle of 25% is used by the PCM in order to have some generator output. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover. 3. Remove the tilt lever handle. 4. Remove the lower shroud (2) from steering column. 5. Place shifter in PARK position. The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder removal. 6. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly. a. Rotate key (2) to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin with a small punch (3), while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7070 7. Remove the key (2) and key cylinder (1) from the column (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7071 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (2) must be in the key cylinder (1) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder (1) into the housing (3) using care to align the end of the key cylinder with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (1) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the lower shroud. 4. Install the tilt lever handle. 5. Install the steering column opening cover. 6. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart Keyless Start Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart NUMBER: 08-003-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: January 27, 2007 SUBJECT: Remote Start System - Diagnostic Chart For Antenna OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves a diagnostic chart that may be used to aid the technician with the diagnosis of the antenna on an originally equipped (factory installed) remote start system. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2006-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2007 (KA) Nitro 2007 (ND) Dakota 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles with an original equipment Remote Start system (sales code XBM). DISCUSSION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart > Page 7077 The customer may notice that the signal range of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system is reduced. The RKE key fob may need to be closer than 3 meters (10 feet) before the functions available on the key fob will operate. This condition may be due to the RKE antenna. The diagnostic flow chart is provide as a diagnostic aid for dealer technician (Fig. 1). POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations Starter Motor: Locations Component ID: 418 Component : STARTER Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 STARTER RELAY OUTPUT T750 14GY/YL Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7081 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7082 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7083 Component Location - 24 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7084 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 6RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7085 Component Location - 13 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7086 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7087 Component Location - 24 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7088 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7089 Starter Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 418 Component : STARTER Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 STARTER RELAY OUTPUT T750 14GY/YL Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7090 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7091 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7092 Component Location - 24 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7093 Connector: Name : STARTER-EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 6RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7094 Component Location - 13 Component Location - 19 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7095 Fig. 19 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7096 Component Location - 24 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7097 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7098 Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - STARTER MOTOR Correct starter motor operation can be confirmed by performing the following free running bench test. This test can only be performed with starter motor removed from vehicle. Refer to Specifications for starter motor specifications. 1. Remove starter motor from vehicle. 2. Mount starter motor securely in a soft-jawed bench vise. The vise jaws should be clamped on the mounting flange of starter motor. Never clamp on starter motor by field frame. 3. Connect a suitable volt-ampere tester and a 12-volt battery to starter motor in series, and set ammeter to 100 ampere scale. See instructions provided by manufacturer of volt-ampere tester being used. 4. Install jumper wire from solenoid terminal to solenoid battery terminal. The starter motor should operate. If starter motor fails to operate, replace faulty starter motor assembly. 5. Adjust carbon pile load of tester to obtain free running test voltage. Refer to Specifications for starter motor free running test voltage specifications. 6. Note reading on ammeter and compare reading to free running test maximum amperage draw. Refer to Specifications for starter motor free running test maximum amperage draw specifications. 7. If ammeter reading exceeds maximum amperage draw specification, replace faulty starter motor assembly. STARTER SOLENOID Certain vehicles with certain engines may require starter motor removal for the following test. 1. If necessary, remove starter motor from vehicle. Refer to Starter Motor Removal and Installation. 2. Disconnect solenoid connector wiring from starter motor. 3. Check for continuity between solenoid terminal (2) and solenoid case (3). There should be continuity. If not OK, replace faulty starter motor assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Starter Motor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 3.7L / 4.7L With Manual Trans. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Note: If equipped with 4WD and certain transmissions, a support bracket is used between front axle and side of transmission. Remove 2 support bracket bolts at transmission. Pry support bracket slightly to gain access to lower starter mounting bolt. 4. Remove one bolt (9) and one nut (8) if equipped with a manual transmission. 5. Move starter motor (5) towards front of vehicle far enough for nose of starter pinion housing to clear housing. Always support starter motor during this process, do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 6. Tilt nose downwards and lower starter motor far enough to access and remove nut (2) that secures battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet to solenoid battery terminal stud. Do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 7. Remove battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet (1) from solenoid battery terminal stud. 8. Disconnect battery positive cable wire harness connector (7) from solenoid terminal connector receptacle. 9. Remove starter motor. 3.7L / 4.7L With Auto. Trans. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Note: If equipped with 4WD and certain transmissions, a support bracket is used between front axle and side of transmission. Remove 2 support bracket bolts at transmission. Pry support bracket slightly to gain access to lower starter mounting bolt. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7101 4. Remove two bolts (3) if equipped with an automatic transmission. 5. Move starter motor (4) towards front of vehicle far enough for nose of starter pinion housing to clear housing. Always support starter motor during this process, do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 6. Tilt nose downwards and lower starter motor far enough to access and remove nut (2) that secures battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet (1) to solenoid battery terminal stud. Do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 7. Remove battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet (5) from solenoid battery terminal stud. 8. Disconnect battery positive cable wire harness connector from solenoid terminal connector receptacle. 9. Remove starter motor. 5.7L V-8 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Note: If equipped with 4WD and certain transmissions, a support bracket is used between front axle and side of transmission. Remove 2 support bracket bolts at transmission. Pry support bracket slightly to gain access to lower starter mounting bolt. 4. Remove two mounting bolts (2). 5. Move starter motor towards front of vehicle far enough for nose of starter pinion housing to clear housing. Always support starter motor (1) during this process, do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 6. Tilt nose downwards and lower starter motor far enough to access and remove nut that secures battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet to solenoid battery terminal stud. Do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 7. Remove battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet from solenoid battery terminal stud. 8. Disconnect battery positive cable wire harness connector from solenoid terminal connector receptacle. 9. Remove starter motor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7102 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 3.7L / 4.7L With Manual Trans. 1. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on). 2. Position battery cable (1) to solenoid stud. Install and tighten battery cable eyelet nut (2). Refer to Torque Specifications. Do not allow starter motor to hang from wire harness. 3. Position starter motor (5) to transmission. 4. Install and tighten lockwasher (6) nut (8) and bolt (9). Refer to Torque Specifications. 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Connect negative battery cable. 3.7L / 4.7L With Auto. Trans. 1. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on). 2. Position battery cable (1) to solenoid stud. Install and tighten battery cable eyelet nut (2). Refer to Torque Specifications. Do not allow starter motor to hang from wire harness. 3. Position starter motor (4) to transmission. 4. If equipped with automatic transmission, slide cooler tube bracket into position. 5. Install and tighten both bolts (3). Refer to Torque Specifications. 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7103 5.7L V-8 1. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on). 2. Position battery cable to solenoid stud. Install and tighten battery cable eyelet nut. Refer to Torque Specifications. Do not allow starter motor to hang from wire harness. 3. Position starter motor (1) to engine. 4. If equipped with automatic transmission, slide cooler tube bracket into position. 5. Install and tighten both mounting bolts (2). Refer to Torque Specifications. 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starter Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7107 Starter Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 226 Component : RELAY-STARTER MOTOR Connector: Name : RELAY-STARTER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A923 14RD/OR 85 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY CONTROL T752 20DG/OR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)F924 20PK/YL 87 ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT T750 14GY/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Starter Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The starter relay is an electromechanical device that switches battery current to the pull-in coil of the starter solenoid when the ignition switch is turned to the Start position. The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. See the PDC cover for relay identification and location. The starter relay is a International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. The starter relay cannot be repaired or adjusted. If faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7110 Starter Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one movable) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed) relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts (normally closed) by spring pressure. When electromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable contact away from normally closed fixed contact, and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed contact. When electromagnetic coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns movable contact to normally closed position. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with electromagnetic coil within relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes produced when coil is de-energized. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Starter Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove cover from Power Distribution Center (PDC) for relay identification and location. 3. Remove starter relay from PDC. 4. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 5. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7113 Starter Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Push down firmly on starter relay until terminals are fully seated into PDC receptacle. 2. Install PDC cover. 3. Connect battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 203 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18LB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z738 18BK/WT Component Location - 38 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7119 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7120 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Power Outlet-Rear Component ID: 205 Component : POWER OUTLET-REAR Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 2-3 GROUND Z737 18BK/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7121 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7122 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 204 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z959 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7123 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7126 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7127 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7128 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7129 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7130 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7131 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7132 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7133 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7134 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7135 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7136 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7137 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7138 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7139 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7140 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7141 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7142 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7143 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 203 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18LB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z738 18BK/WT Component Location - 38 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7144 Power Outlet-Rear Component ID: 205 Component : POWER OUTLET-REAR Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7145 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 2-3 GROUND Z737 18BK/LB Component Location - 47 Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 204 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7146 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z959 18BK Component Location - 31 Power Outlet-Rear Seat Component ID: 206 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7147 Component : POWER OUTLET-REAR SEAT Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-REAR SEAT Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16LB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z964 16BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7148 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7149 8w-41-03 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED An instrument panel mounted cigar lighter/power outlet receptacle is optional equipment on this model. On models equipped with the optional Smoker's Package, the cigar lighter knob and heating element are included. On models without the Smoker's Package, the cigar lighter receptacle is equipped with a snap fit plastic cap and is treated as an auxiliary power outlet. The cigar lighter receptacle is installed in the instrument panel accessory switch bezel, which is located near the bottom of the instrument panel center stack area, below the radio. The cigar lighter base is secured by a snap fit within the center lower bezel. This power outlet has a constant 12 volt battery feed. The cigar lighter receptacle is serviced with the accessory switch bezel and if defective, the entire switch bezel must be replaced. The plastic cap and the knob and heating element unit are available for service replacement. These components cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, they must be replaced. FRONT CONSOLE AND REAR CARGO MOUNTED A front console mounted power outlet is standard equipment and a rear cargo area power outlet is optional equipment on this model. The front console mounted power outlet is mounted near the front of the console just in front of the cup holders. This outlet can be used as a cigar lighter or power outlet, but only has 12 volt battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. The rear power outlet is installed in the right rear quarter trim panel, near the spare tire jack. The power outlet base and mount are secured by a snap fit within the quarter trim panel. A plastic protective cap snaps into the power outlet base when the power outlet is not being used, and hangs from the power outlet base mount by an integral bail strap while the power outlet is in use. While the power outlet is very similar to a cigar lighter base unit, it does not include the two small spring-clip retainers inside the bottom of the receptacle shell that are used to secure the cigar lighter heating element to the insulated contact. It has 12 volt battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7152 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET The cigar lighter consists of two major components: a knob and heating element unit, and the cigar lighter base or receptacle shell. The receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The cigar lighter knob and heating element are encased within a spring-loaded housing, which also features a sliding protective heat shield. When the knob and heating element are inserted in the receptacle shell, the heating element resistor coil is grounded through its housing to the receptacle shell. If the cigar lighter knob is pushed inward, the heat shield slides up toward the knob exposing the heating element, and the heating element extends from the housing toward the insulated contact in the bottom of the receptacle shell. Two small spring-clip retainers are located on either side of the insulated contact inside the bottom of the receptacle shell. These clips engage and hold the heating element against the insulated contact long enough for the resistor coil to heat up. When the heating element is engaged with the contact, battery current can flow through the resistor coil to ground, causing the resistor coil to heat. When the resistor coil becomes sufficiently heated, excess heat radiates from the heating element causing the spring-clips to expand. Once the spring-clips expand far enough to release the heating element, the spring-loaded housing forces the knob and heating element to pop back outward to their relaxed position. When the cigar lighter knob and element are pulled out of the receptacle shell, the protective heat shield slides downward on the housing so that the heating element is recessed and shielded around its circumference for safety. POWER OUTLET The power outlet base or receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The power outlet receives battery voltage from a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) through a fuse in the fuse block when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Look inside and note position of the retaining bosses (1). 3. Using special tool 9857 Power Outlet Remover. Insert the tool forcing the bosses out of base. 4. Pull out the base through mounting ring by gently rocking the tool (3). 5. Disconnect the base wires. 6. Set base aside and remove base mount ring. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position mount ring to the instrument panel and feed the wires through ring. Index the cap and the mount ring with the index tab at 9 o'clock to the key in the instrument panel. Install the ring. 2. Connect wires to base. Orient base alignment rib at 11 o'clock to mate the groove in mount ring at the same location. 3. Push base into the bezel till it locks. 4. Install cigar lighter cap. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet > Page 7155 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Outlet-AC Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the center console. 3. Disconnect electrical connector. 4. Remove AC power outlet. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the AC power outlet. 2. Connect electrical connector. 3. Install the center console. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Locations Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7159 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7160 Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7161 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component ID: 53 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F981 12PK/YL 2 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power Electrical Accessory Panel: Description and Operation Module-Integrated Power Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The IPM is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. The power distribution center mates directly with the (FCM) to form the IPM. The (PDC) is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7169 Electrical Accessory Panel: Description and Operation Power Distribution Center Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Distribution Center Electrical Accessory Panel: Service and Repair Power Distribution Center Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Distribution Center > Page 7172 Electrical Accessory Panel: Service and Repair Module-Integrated Power Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. 2. Unsnap cover and remove the B+ terminal nut from the integrated power module (IPM). Remove the B+ cable. 3. Remove the IPM from the retaining bracket (1). 4. Disconnect the connectors from the (IPM). 5. Remove the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) retaining screws. 6. Disconnect the front control module by pulling it straight off the integrated power module. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) to the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Distribution Center > Page 7173 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the IPM (1). 3. Install the IPM to the retaining bracket. 4. Install the B+ cable and nut on the IPM B+ terminal. Snap the cover in place. 5. Connect the negative and positive battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse: > 22-002-06 > Jul > 06 > Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set Fuse: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set NUMBER: 22-002-06 GROUP: Tires & Wheels DATE: July 02, 2006 SUBJECT: Tire Pressure Monitor DIG's Due To The IOD Fuse Not Being Installed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves erroneous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) that are caused when the vehicle is driven without the IOD fuse installed. MODELS: 2007 HB/HG Durango/Aspen 2007 WK/WH Grand Cherokee 2007 XK/XH Commander DISCUSSION: The driver may notice that the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. Whether a premium or base system, the tire pressure monitor warning light in the instrument cluster may be flashing indicating a TPM SYSTEM problem. On premium TPM systems, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) may display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. And when stepping through the EVIC to the tire pressure display, all of the tire pressure readings may display as dashes "- -" rather than actual tire pressure values. Investigation by the technician may find the presence of all four TPM related DTC's: C1501 - Tire Pressure Sensor 1 (L.F.) Internal C1502 - Tire Pressure Sensor 2 (R.F.) Internal C1503 - Tire Pressure Sensor 3 (R.R.) Internal C1504 - Tire Pressure Sensor 4 (L.R.) Internal The above condition is most likely caused by driving the vehicle without the IOD fuse installed. If the vehicle is driven at speeds greater than 32 kph (20 mph) for more than approximately ten (10) minutes without the IOD fuse installed, then the TPM system will log the above four DTC's. This sceneno is most likely to occur when the vehicle is driven while in dealer inventory. Without the IOD fuse installed part of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), the receiver circuit, is not operational (not powered). Though the 1PM tire sensors are powered and transmitting correct tire pressure signals, the WCM receiver is not receiving those signals. The portion of the WCM circuitry that is powered, by the ignition on/run feed, sends a CAN message to the Cabin Control Node (CCN) in the instrument cluster indicating that the TPM tire pressure signals are not available. On base and premium TPM systems the CCN will flash the tire pressure monitor warning light, and the powered portion of the WCM will log all four of the above TPM DTC's as faults with the TPM system. On premium 1PM systems the CCN will also cause the EVIC to display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. For the TPM system to operate correctly the IOD fuse must be installed. A scan tool (StarSCAN(R) / StarMOBILE(TM) will be required to erase the four TPM DTC's. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 22-002-06 > Jul > 06 > Tire Monitor System Warning Message/DTC's Set Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set NUMBER: 22-002-06 GROUP: Tires & Wheels DATE: July 02, 2006 SUBJECT: Tire Pressure Monitor DIG's Due To The IOD Fuse Not Being Installed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves erroneous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) that are caused when the vehicle is driven without the IOD fuse installed. MODELS: 2007 HB/HG Durango/Aspen 2007 WK/WH Grand Cherokee 2007 XK/XH Commander DISCUSSION: The driver may notice that the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. Whether a premium or base system, the tire pressure monitor warning light in the instrument cluster may be flashing indicating a TPM SYSTEM problem. On premium TPM systems, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) may display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. And when stepping through the EVIC to the tire pressure display, all of the tire pressure readings may display as dashes "- -" rather than actual tire pressure values. Investigation by the technician may find the presence of all four TPM related DTC's: C1501 - Tire Pressure Sensor 1 (L.F.) Internal C1502 - Tire Pressure Sensor 2 (R.F.) Internal C1503 - Tire Pressure Sensor 3 (R.R.) Internal C1504 - Tire Pressure Sensor 4 (L.R.) Internal The above condition is most likely caused by driving the vehicle without the IOD fuse installed. If the vehicle is driven at speeds greater than 32 kph (20 mph) for more than approximately ten (10) minutes without the IOD fuse installed, then the TPM system will log the above four DTC's. This sceneno is most likely to occur when the vehicle is driven while in dealer inventory. Without the IOD fuse installed part of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), the receiver circuit, is not operational (not powered). Though the 1PM tire sensors are powered and transmitting correct tire pressure signals, the WCM receiver is not receiving those signals. The portion of the WCM circuitry that is powered, by the ignition on/run feed, sends a CAN message to the Cabin Control Node (CCN) in the instrument cluster indicating that the TPM tire pressure signals are not available. On base and premium TPM systems the CCN will flash the tire pressure monitor warning light, and the powered portion of the WCM will log all four of the above TPM DTC's as faults with the TPM system. On premium 1PM systems the CCN will also cause the EVIC to display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. For the TPM system to operate correctly the IOD fuse must be installed. A scan tool (StarSCAN(R) / StarMOBILE(TM) will be required to erase the four TPM DTC's. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module Fuse: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7189 Fuse: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7190 Fuse: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7193 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7194 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7195 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7196 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7197 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7198 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7199 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7200 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7201 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7202 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7203 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7204 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7205 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7206 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7207 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7208 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7209 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7210 Fuse: Connector Views Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7211 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7212 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7213 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7214 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7215 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7216 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7217 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7218 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7219 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7220 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7221 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7222 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7223 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7224 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7225 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7226 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7227 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7228 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Fuse: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7231 Fuse: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7232 Fuse: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module Fuse Block: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7237 Fuse Block: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7238 Fuse Block: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7241 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7242 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7243 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7244 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7245 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7246 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7247 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7248 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7249 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7250 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7251 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7252 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7253 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7254 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7255 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7256 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7257 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7258 Fuse Block: Connector Views Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7259 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7260 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7261 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7262 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7263 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7264 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7265 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7266 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7267 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7268 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7269 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7270 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7271 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7272 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7273 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7274 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7275 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7276 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Fuse Block: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7279 Fuse Block: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7280 Fuse Block: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Description and Operation > Junction Block Fuse Block: Description and Operation Junction Block Description DESCRIPTION An electrical Junction Block (JB) (1) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. The JB combines the functions previously provided by a separate fuseblock module and relay center, serves to simplify and centralize numerous electrical components, and to distribute electrical current to many of the accessory systems in the vehicle. It also eliminates the need for numerous splice connections and serves in place of a bulkhead connector between many of the engine compartment, instrument panel, and body wire harnesses. The molded plastic JB housing has integral mounting brackets that are secured with two screws to the left instrument panel end bracket. The left end of the instrument panel cover has a snap-fit fuse access panel that can be removed for service of the JB. A fuse puller and spare fuse holders are located on the back of the fuse access cover, as well as a fuse layout to help ensure proper fuse identification. The JB unit cannot be repaired and is only serviced as an assembly. If any internal circuit or the JB housing is faulty or damaged, the entire JB unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION All of the circuits entering and leaving the JB do so through wire harness connectors, which are connected to the JB through integral connector receptacles molded into the JB housing. Internal connection of all of the JB circuits is accomplished by an intricate combination of hard wiring and bus bars. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Description and Operation > Junction Block > Page 7283 Fuse Block: Description and Operation Power Distribution Center Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block Fuse Block: Service and Repair Junction Block Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cowl trim cover. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners (3). 4. Disconnect the electrical harness connectors and remove Junction Block (1). 5. Transfer components as necessary. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect wire harness connectors to the Junction Block (JB) (1). 2. Position JB and install mounting fasteners (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block > Page 7286 3. Install cowl trim cover. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block > Page 7287 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Power Distribution Center Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7292 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7293 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7294 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7295 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7296 Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7297 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7298 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7299 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7300 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7301 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7302 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7303 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7304 Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7305 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-110V Inverter Component ID: 166 Component : MODULE-110V INVERTER Connector: Name : MODULE-110V INVERTER Color : # of pins : 9 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A957 16RD 2 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 3 110 VOLT AC LINE 1 P801 20LG 4 GROUND Z920 16BK 4 GROUND Z920 20BK 5 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 6-- 7-8 110 VOLT AC LINE 2 P802 20LG/BK 9-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7308 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7309 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7310 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7311 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7312 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7313 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7314 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7315 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7316 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7317 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7318 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7319 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7320 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7321 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7322 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Integrated Power Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The IPM is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. The power distribution center mates directly with the (FCM) to form the IPM. The (PDC) is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7325 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Front Control Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The front control module mates to the power distribution center to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the CAN bus circuit. Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the CAN bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing - Air conditioning condenser cooling fan The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It provides a illuminated approach feature that turns the headlamps on when the vehicle is unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, RKE and Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to RKE and VTSS inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It turns off the windshield washer motor after 10 seconds of continuous operation to protect the motor. - It minimizes voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger, and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a link between the CAN bus network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the network for body and interior modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Integrated Power Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. 2. Unsnap cover and remove the B+ terminal nut from the integrated power module (IPM). Remove the B+ cable. 3. Remove the IPM from the retaining bracket (1). 4. Disconnect the connectors from the (IPM). 5. Remove the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) retaining screws. 6. Disconnect the front control module by pulling it straight off the integrated power module. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) to the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7328 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the IPM (1). 3. Install the IPM to the retaining bracket. 4. Install the B+ cable and nut on the IPM B+ terminal. Snap the cover in place. 5. Connect the negative and positive battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7329 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Front Control Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the positive and negative battery cables from the battery. 2. Partially remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment. 3. Remove the front control module retaining screws. 4. Pull the front control module straight from the IPM. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Press the Front Control Module (FCM) onto the Integrated Power Module (IPM). 2. Install the mounting fasteners. 3. Install the IPM. 4. Connect the positive and negative battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the Integrated Power Module as part of the preparation procedures performed just prior to new vehicle delivery. The following circuits are protected by the IOD fuse: - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7334 Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term ignition-off draw identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7340 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7341 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7342 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7343 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7344 Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7345 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7346 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7347 6-- 7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7348 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7349 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7350 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7351 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7352 Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7353 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-110V Inverter Component ID: 166 Component : MODULE-110V INVERTER Connector: Name : MODULE-110V INVERTER Color : # of pins : 9 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A957 16RD 2 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 3 110 VOLT AC LINE 1 P801 20LG 4 GROUND Z920 16BK 4 GROUND Z920 20BK 5 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 6-- 7-8 110 VOLT AC LINE 2 P802 20LG/BK 9-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7356 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7357 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7358 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7359 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7360 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7361 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7362 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7363 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7364 6-- 7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7365 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7366 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7367 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7368 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7369 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7370 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Integrated Power Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The IPM is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. The power distribution center mates directly with the (FCM) to form the IPM. The (PDC) is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7373 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Front Control Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The front control module mates to the power distribution center to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the CAN bus circuit. Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the CAN bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing - Air conditioning condenser cooling fan The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It provides a illuminated approach feature that turns the headlamps on when the vehicle is unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, RKE and Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to RKE and VTSS inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It turns off the windshield washer motor after 10 seconds of continuous operation to protect the motor. - It minimizes voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger, and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a link between the CAN bus network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the network for body and interior modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Integrated Power Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. 2. Unsnap cover and remove the B+ terminal nut from the integrated power module (IPM). Remove the B+ cable. 3. Remove the IPM from the retaining bracket (1). 4. Disconnect the connectors from the (IPM). 5. Remove the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) retaining screws. 6. Disconnect the front control module by pulling it straight off the integrated power module. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) to the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7376 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the IPM (1). 3. Install the IPM to the retaining bracket. 4. Install the B+ cable and nut on the IPM B+ terminal. Snap the cover in place. 5. Connect the negative and positive battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7377 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Front Control Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the positive and negative battery cables from the battery. 2. Partially remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment. 3. Remove the front control module retaining screws. 4. Pull the front control module straight from the IPM. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Press the Front Control Module (FCM) onto the Integrated Power Module (IPM). 2. Install the mounting fasteners. 3. Install the IPM. 4. Connect the positive and negative battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay Relay Box: Locations Remote Run Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7382 Relay Box: Locations Run/Start Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7383 Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7384 Relay Box: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7385 Relay Box: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run Remote Component ID: 224 Component : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7388 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 225 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 85 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 86 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7389 Relay Box: Diagrams Junction Block Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7390 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7391 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7392 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7393 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7394 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7395 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7396 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7397 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7398 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7399 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7400 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7401 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7402 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7403 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7404 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7405 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7406 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7407 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7410 Relay Box: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7411 Relay Box: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Relay Box: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7414 Relay Box: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7417 Relay Box: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay Relay Box: Locations Remote Run Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7422 Relay Box: Locations Run/Start Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7423 Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7424 Relay Box: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7425 Relay Box: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run Remote Component ID: 224 Component : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7428 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 225 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 85 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 86 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7429 Relay Box: Diagrams Junction Block Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7430 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7431 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7432 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7433 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7434 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7435 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7436 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7437 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7438 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7439 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7440 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7441 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7442 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7443 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7444 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7445 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7446 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7447 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7450 Relay Box: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7451 Relay Box: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Relay Box: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7454 Relay Box: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7457 Relay Box: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Locations Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7462 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7463 Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7464 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the Integrated Power Module as part of the preparation procedures performed just prior to new vehicle delivery. The following circuits are protected by the IOD fuse: - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7469 Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term ignition-off draw identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 7478 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 7484 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 203 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18LB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z738 18BK/WT Component Location - 38 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7490 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7491 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Power Outlet-Rear Component ID: 205 Component : POWER OUTLET-REAR Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 2-3 GROUND Z737 18BK/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7492 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7493 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 204 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z959 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Power Outlet-Console > Page 7494 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7497 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7498 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7499 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7500 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7501 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7502 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7503 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7504 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7509 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7510 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7511 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7512 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 203 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18LB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z738 18BK/WT Component Location - 38 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515 Power Outlet-Rear Component ID: 205 Component : POWER OUTLET-REAR Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7516 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 2-3 GROUND Z737 18BK/LB Component Location - 47 Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 204 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7517 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z959 18BK Component Location - 31 Power Outlet-Rear Seat Component ID: 206 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7518 Component : POWER OUTLET-REAR SEAT Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-REAR SEAT Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16LB/PK 2-3 GROUND Z964 16BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7519 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7520 8w-41-03 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED An instrument panel mounted cigar lighter/power outlet receptacle is optional equipment on this model. On models equipped with the optional Smoker's Package, the cigar lighter knob and heating element are included. On models without the Smoker's Package, the cigar lighter receptacle is equipped with a snap fit plastic cap and is treated as an auxiliary power outlet. The cigar lighter receptacle is installed in the instrument panel accessory switch bezel, which is located near the bottom of the instrument panel center stack area, below the radio. The cigar lighter base is secured by a snap fit within the center lower bezel. This power outlet has a constant 12 volt battery feed. The cigar lighter receptacle is serviced with the accessory switch bezel and if defective, the entire switch bezel must be replaced. The plastic cap and the knob and heating element unit are available for service replacement. These components cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, they must be replaced. FRONT CONSOLE AND REAR CARGO MOUNTED A front console mounted power outlet is standard equipment and a rear cargo area power outlet is optional equipment on this model. The front console mounted power outlet is mounted near the front of the console just in front of the cup holders. This outlet can be used as a cigar lighter or power outlet, but only has 12 volt battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. The rear power outlet is installed in the right rear quarter trim panel, near the spare tire jack. The power outlet base and mount are secured by a snap fit within the quarter trim panel. A plastic protective cap snaps into the power outlet base when the power outlet is not being used, and hangs from the power outlet base mount by an integral bail strap while the power outlet is in use. While the power outlet is very similar to a cigar lighter base unit, it does not include the two small spring-clip retainers inside the bottom of the receptacle shell that are used to secure the cigar lighter heating element to the insulated contact. It has 12 volt battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7523 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET The cigar lighter consists of two major components: a knob and heating element unit, and the cigar lighter base or receptacle shell. The receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The cigar lighter knob and heating element are encased within a spring-loaded housing, which also features a sliding protective heat shield. When the knob and heating element are inserted in the receptacle shell, the heating element resistor coil is grounded through its housing to the receptacle shell. If the cigar lighter knob is pushed inward, the heat shield slides up toward the knob exposing the heating element, and the heating element extends from the housing toward the insulated contact in the bottom of the receptacle shell. Two small spring-clip retainers are located on either side of the insulated contact inside the bottom of the receptacle shell. These clips engage and hold the heating element against the insulated contact long enough for the resistor coil to heat up. When the heating element is engaged with the contact, battery current can flow through the resistor coil to ground, causing the resistor coil to heat. When the resistor coil becomes sufficiently heated, excess heat radiates from the heating element causing the spring-clips to expand. Once the spring-clips expand far enough to release the heating element, the spring-loaded housing forces the knob and heating element to pop back outward to their relaxed position. When the cigar lighter knob and element are pulled out of the receptacle shell, the protective heat shield slides downward on the housing so that the heating element is recessed and shielded around its circumference for safety. POWER OUTLET The power outlet base or receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The power outlet receives battery voltage from a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) through a fuse in the fuse block when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Look inside and note position of the retaining bosses (1). 3. Using special tool 9857 Power Outlet Remover. Insert the tool forcing the bosses out of base. 4. Pull out the base through mounting ring by gently rocking the tool (3). 5. Disconnect the base wires. 6. Set base aside and remove base mount ring. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position mount ring to the instrument panel and feed the wires through ring. Index the cap and the mount ring with the index tab at 9 o'clock to the key in the instrument panel. Install the ring. 2. Connect wires to base. Orient base alignment rib at 11 o'clock to mate the groove in mount ring at the same location. 3. Push base into the bezel till it locks. 4. Install cigar lighter cap. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cigar Lighter/Power Outlet > Page 7526 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Outlet-AC Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the center console. 3. Disconnect electrical connector. 4. Remove AC power outlet. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the AC power outlet. 2. Connect electrical connector. 3. Install the center console. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Locations Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7530 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7531 Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7532 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Diagrams Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component ID: 53 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F981 12PK/YL 2 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power Electrical Accessory Panel: Description and Operation Module-Integrated Power Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The IPM is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. The power distribution center mates directly with the (FCM) to form the IPM. The (PDC) is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7540 Electrical Accessory Panel: Description and Operation Power Distribution Center Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Distribution Center Electrical Accessory Panel: Service and Repair Power Distribution Center Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Distribution Center > Page 7543 Electrical Accessory Panel: Service and Repair Module-Integrated Power Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. 2. Unsnap cover and remove the B+ terminal nut from the integrated power module (IPM). Remove the B+ cable. 3. Remove the IPM from the retaining bracket (1). 4. Disconnect the connectors from the (IPM). 5. Remove the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) retaining screws. 6. Disconnect the front control module by pulling it straight off the integrated power module. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) to the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electrical Accessory Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Distribution Center > Page 7544 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the IPM (1). 3. Install the IPM to the retaining bracket. 4. Install the B+ cable and nut on the IPM B+ terminal. Snap the cover in place. 5. Connect the negative and positive battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuse: > 22-002-06 > Jul > 06 > Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set Fuse: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set NUMBER: 22-002-06 GROUP: Tires & Wheels DATE: July 02, 2006 SUBJECT: Tire Pressure Monitor DIG's Due To The IOD Fuse Not Being Installed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves erroneous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) that are caused when the vehicle is driven without the IOD fuse installed. MODELS: 2007 HB/HG Durango/Aspen 2007 WK/WH Grand Cherokee 2007 XK/XH Commander DISCUSSION: The driver may notice that the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. Whether a premium or base system, the tire pressure monitor warning light in the instrument cluster may be flashing indicating a TPM SYSTEM problem. On premium TPM systems, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) may display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. And when stepping through the EVIC to the tire pressure display, all of the tire pressure readings may display as dashes "- -" rather than actual tire pressure values. Investigation by the technician may find the presence of all four TPM related DTC's: C1501 - Tire Pressure Sensor 1 (L.F.) Internal C1502 - Tire Pressure Sensor 2 (R.F.) Internal C1503 - Tire Pressure Sensor 3 (R.R.) Internal C1504 - Tire Pressure Sensor 4 (L.R.) Internal The above condition is most likely caused by driving the vehicle without the IOD fuse installed. If the vehicle is driven at speeds greater than 32 kph (20 mph) for more than approximately ten (10) minutes without the IOD fuse installed, then the TPM system will log the above four DTC's. This sceneno is most likely to occur when the vehicle is driven while in dealer inventory. Without the IOD fuse installed part of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), the receiver circuit, is not operational (not powered). Though the 1PM tire sensors are powered and transmitting correct tire pressure signals, the WCM receiver is not receiving those signals. The portion of the WCM circuitry that is powered, by the ignition on/run feed, sends a CAN message to the Cabin Control Node (CCN) in the instrument cluster indicating that the TPM tire pressure signals are not available. On base and premium TPM systems the CCN will flash the tire pressure monitor warning light, and the powered portion of the WCM will log all four of the above TPM DTC's as faults with the TPM system. On premium 1PM systems the CCN will also cause the EVIC to display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. For the TPM system to operate correctly the IOD fuse must be installed. A scan tool (StarSCAN(R) / StarMOBILE(TM) will be required to erase the four TPM DTC's. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuse: > 22-002-06 > Jul > 06 > Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set Fuse: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Warning Message/DTC's Set NUMBER: 22-002-06 GROUP: Tires & Wheels DATE: July 02, 2006 SUBJECT: Tire Pressure Monitor DIG's Due To The IOD Fuse Not Being Installed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves erroneous Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) that are caused when the vehicle is driven without the IOD fuse installed. MODELS: 2007 HB/HG Durango/Aspen 2007 WK/WH Grand Cherokee 2007 XK/XH Commander DISCUSSION: The driver may notice that the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. Whether a premium or base system, the tire pressure monitor warning light in the instrument cluster may be flashing indicating a TPM SYSTEM problem. On premium TPM systems, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) may display a "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. And when stepping through the EVIC to the tire pressure display, all of the tire pressure readings may display as dashes "- -" rather than actual tire pressure values. Investigation by the technician may find the presence of all four TPM related DTC's: C1501 - Tire Pressure Sensor 1 (L.F.) Internal C1502 - Tire Pressure Sensor 2 (R.F.) Internal C1503 - Tire Pressure Sensor 3 (R.R.) Internal C1504 - Tire Pressure Sensor 4 (L.R.) Internal The above condition is most likely caused by driving the vehicle without the IOD fuse installed. If the vehicle is driven at speeds greater than 32 kph (20 mph) for more than approximately ten (10) minutes without the IOD fuse installed, then the TPM system will log the above four DTC's. This sceneno is most likely to occur when the vehicle is driven while in dealer inventory. Without the IOD fuse installed part of the Wireless Control Module (WCM), the receiver circuit, is not operational (not powered). Though the 1PM tire sensors are powered and transmitting correct tire pressure signals, the WCM receiver is not receiving those signals. The portion of the WCM circuitry that is powered, by the ignition on/run feed, sends a CAN message to the Cabin Control Node (CCN) in the instrument cluster indicating that the TPM tire pressure signals are not available. On base and premium TPM systems the CCN will flash the tire pressure monitor warning light, and the powered portion of the WCM will log all four of the above TPM DTC's as faults with the TPM system. On premium 1PM systems the CCN will also cause the EVIC to display the "SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM" message. For the TPM system to operate correctly the IOD fuse must be installed. A scan tool (StarSCAN(R) / StarMOBILE(TM) will be required to erase the four TPM DTC's. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module Fuse: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7560 Fuse: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7561 Fuse: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7564 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7565 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7566 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7567 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7568 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7569 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7570 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7571 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7572 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7573 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7574 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7575 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7576 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7577 Fuse: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7578 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7579 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7580 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7581 Fuse: Connector Views Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7582 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7583 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7584 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7585 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7586 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7587 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7588 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7589 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7590 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7591 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7592 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7593 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7594 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7595 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7596 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7597 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7598 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7599 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Fuse: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7602 Fuse: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7603 Fuse: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module Fuse Block: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7608 Fuse Block: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Integrated Power Module > Page 7609 Fuse Block: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7612 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7613 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7614 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7615 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7616 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7617 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7618 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7619 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7620 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7621 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7622 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7623 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7624 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7625 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7626 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7627 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7628 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7629 Fuse Block: Connector Views Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7630 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7631 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7632 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7633 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7634 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7635 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7636 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7637 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7638 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7639 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7640 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7641 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7642 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7643 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7644 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7645 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7646 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7647 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Fuse Block: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7650 Fuse Block: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7651 Fuse Block: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Description and Operation > Junction Block Fuse Block: Description and Operation Junction Block Description DESCRIPTION An electrical Junction Block (JB) (1) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. The JB combines the functions previously provided by a separate fuseblock module and relay center, serves to simplify and centralize numerous electrical components, and to distribute electrical current to many of the accessory systems in the vehicle. It also eliminates the need for numerous splice connections and serves in place of a bulkhead connector between many of the engine compartment, instrument panel, and body wire harnesses. The molded plastic JB housing has integral mounting brackets that are secured with two screws to the left instrument panel end bracket. The left end of the instrument panel cover has a snap-fit fuse access panel that can be removed for service of the JB. A fuse puller and spare fuse holders are located on the back of the fuse access cover, as well as a fuse layout to help ensure proper fuse identification. The JB unit cannot be repaired and is only serviced as an assembly. If any internal circuit or the JB housing is faulty or damaged, the entire JB unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION All of the circuits entering and leaving the JB do so through wire harness connectors, which are connected to the JB through integral connector receptacles molded into the JB housing. Internal connection of all of the JB circuits is accomplished by an intricate combination of hard wiring and bus bars. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Description and Operation > Junction Block > Page 7654 Fuse Block: Description and Operation Power Distribution Center Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block Fuse Block: Service and Repair Junction Block Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cowl trim cover. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners (3). 4. Disconnect the electrical harness connectors and remove Junction Block (1). 5. Transfer components as necessary. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect wire harness connectors to the Junction Block (JB) (1). 2. Position JB and install mounting fasteners (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block > Page 7657 3. Install cowl trim cover. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Junction Block > Page 7658 Fuse Block: Service and Repair Power Distribution Center Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7663 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7664 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7665 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7666 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7667 Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7668 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7669 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7670 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7671 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7672 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7673 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7674 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7675 Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7676 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-110V Inverter Component ID: 166 Component : MODULE-110V INVERTER Connector: Name : MODULE-110V INVERTER Color : # of pins : 9 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A957 16RD 2 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 3 110 VOLT AC LINE 1 P801 20LG 4 GROUND Z920 16BK 4 GROUND Z920 20BK 5 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 6-- 7-8 110 VOLT AC LINE 2 P802 20LG/BK 9-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7679 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7680 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7681 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7682 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7683 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7684 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7685 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7686 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7687 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7688 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7689 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7690 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7691 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7692 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7693 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Integrated Power Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The IPM is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. The power distribution center mates directly with the (FCM) to form the IPM. The (PDC) is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7696 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Front Control Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The front control module mates to the power distribution center to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the CAN bus circuit. Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the CAN bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing - Air conditioning condenser cooling fan The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It provides a illuminated approach feature that turns the headlamps on when the vehicle is unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, RKE and Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to RKE and VTSS inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It turns off the windshield washer motor after 10 seconds of continuous operation to protect the motor. - It minimizes voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger, and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a link between the CAN bus network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the network for body and interior modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Integrated Power Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. 2. Unsnap cover and remove the B+ terminal nut from the integrated power module (IPM). Remove the B+ cable. 3. Remove the IPM from the retaining bracket (1). 4. Disconnect the connectors from the (IPM). 5. Remove the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) retaining screws. 6. Disconnect the front control module by pulling it straight off the integrated power module. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) to the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7699 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the IPM (1). 3. Install the IPM to the retaining bracket. 4. Install the B+ cable and nut on the IPM B+ terminal. Snap the cover in place. 5. Connect the negative and positive battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7700 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Front Control Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the positive and negative battery cables from the battery. 2. Partially remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment. 3. Remove the front control module retaining screws. 4. Pull the front control module straight from the IPM. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Press the Front Control Module (FCM) onto the Integrated Power Module (IPM). 2. Install the mounting fasteners. 3. Install the IPM. 4. Connect the positive and negative battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the Integrated Power Module as part of the preparation procedures performed just prior to new vehicle delivery. The following circuits are protected by the IOD fuse: - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7705 Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term ignition-off draw identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7711 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7712 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7713 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7714 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7715 Power Distribution Module: Locations Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7716 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7717 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7718 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7719 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7720 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7721 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7722 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7723 Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Front Control > Page 7724 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-110V Inverter Component ID: 166 Component : MODULE-110V INVERTER Connector: Name : MODULE-110V INVERTER Color : # of pins : 9 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A957 16RD 2 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 3 110 VOLT AC LINE 1 P801 20LG 4 GROUND Z920 16BK 4 GROUND Z920 20BK 5 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 6-- 7-8 110 VOLT AC LINE 2 P802 20LG/BK 9-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7727 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 173 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z116 18BK/VT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) F924 20PK/YL 5 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (+) D52 20WT/LB 6 CAN C DIAGNOSTIC (-) D51 20PK/RD 7-- 8 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 9 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 10 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE B20 20DG/OR 11 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 12 - 13 - 14 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 15 - 16 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 17 MODE SENSOR A D201 20WT/DG 18 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN 19 - 20 - 21 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 22 GROUND Z117 18BK/WT 23 - 24 GROUND Z965 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7728 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER L44 18WT/TN 2 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 20OR 3-4 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 5 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7729 6 LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER L43 18WT/DB 7 LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L33 18WT/LG 8 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L60 18WT/TN 9-10 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L61 18WT/LG 11 GROUND Z947 18BK 12 RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER L34 18WT/GY Component Location - 9 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL IPM Color : # of pins : 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7730 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z921 14BK 2 FUSED B(+) A908 18RD 3 FUSED B(+) A906 18RD 4 FUSED B(+) A905 18RD 5 FUSED B(+) A907 18RD 6 FUSED B(+) A909 14RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 8 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 9 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 10 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 11 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 12 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 14 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 15 FUSED B(+) A920 14RD 16 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 18 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 19 GROUND Z909 18BK 20 - 21 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 22 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 23 - 24 GROUND Z909 18BK 25 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 26 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 27 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 28 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 29 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 30 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 14RD 31 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 32 GROUND Z909 18BK 33 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 34 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 35 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 36 - 37 - 38 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 39 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N201 20DB/LG 40 - 41 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 42 - 43 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 44 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 45 - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7731 46 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 47 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 48 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 49 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL N112 20DB/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7732 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 177 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 2-3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 7 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 8 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 9 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 10 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 11 - 12 - 13 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 14 - 15 GROUND Z385 20BK 16 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 17 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 18 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 19 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 20 - 21 - 22 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 23 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 24 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 25 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N202 12DB/OR 26 - 27 - 28 GROUND Z909 18BK 29 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR 30 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 31 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 32 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 33 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7733 34 FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT N1 18DB/OR 35 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 36 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (OFF-RUN-START) F1 20PK/DG 37 - 38 - 39 GROUND Z967 18BK 40 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD Component Location - 9 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7734 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : # of pins : 40 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 3-4-5 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7735 6-7 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 8 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 9 GROUND Z118 18BK/YL 10 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 11 ASD RELAY OUTPUT A955 16RD 12 - 13 SHIFT MOTOR (-) T102 14YL 14 SHIFT MOTOR (+) T101 14DG 15 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 16 - 17 - 18 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 19 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 25 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 26 GROUND Z902 14BK 27 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 28 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 29 GROUND Z903 14BK 30 GROUND Z901 18BK 31 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 32 GROUND Z921 14BK 33 - 34 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 35 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 36 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7736 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7737 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7738 Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7739 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7740 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Power Distribution Center Component ID: 202 Component : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER Connector: Name : POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 Qualifier : (BATTERY) Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 4RD Pin Description Circuit 1 B(+) A1 8RD Component Location - 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-110V Inverter > Page 7741 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Integrated Power Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The IPM is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. The power distribution center mates directly with the (FCM) to form the IPM. The (PDC) is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7744 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Module-Front Control Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The front control module mates to the power distribution center to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the CAN bus circuit. Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the CAN bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing - Air conditioning condenser cooling fan The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It provides a illuminated approach feature that turns the headlamps on when the vehicle is unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, RKE and Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to RKE and VTSS inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It turns off the windshield washer motor after 10 seconds of continuous operation to protect the motor. - It minimizes voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger, and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a link between the CAN bus network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the network for body and interior modules. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Integrated Power Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery cables. 2. Unsnap cover and remove the B+ terminal nut from the integrated power module (IPM). Remove the B+ cable. 3. Remove the IPM from the retaining bracket (1). 4. Disconnect the connectors from the (IPM). 5. Remove the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) retaining screws. 6. Disconnect the front control module by pulling it straight off the integrated power module. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the Front Control Module (FCM) (2) to the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7747 2. Connect the electrical connectors to the IPM (1). 3. Install the IPM to the retaining bracket. 4. Install the B+ cable and nut on the IPM B+ terminal. Snap the cover in place. 5. Connect the negative and positive battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Integrated Power > Page 7748 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Module-Front Control Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the positive and negative battery cables from the battery. 2. Partially remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment. 3. Remove the front control module retaining screws. 4. Pull the front control module straight from the IPM. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Press the Front Control Module (FCM) onto the Integrated Power Module (IPM). 2. Install the mounting fasteners. 3. Install the IPM. 4. Connect the positive and negative battery cables. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay Relay Box: Locations Remote Run Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7753 Relay Box: Locations Run/Start Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7754 Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7755 Relay Box: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7756 Relay Box: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run Remote Component ID: 224 Component : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7759 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 225 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 85 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 86 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7760 Relay Box: Diagrams Junction Block Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7761 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7762 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7763 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7764 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7765 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7766 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7767 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7768 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7769 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7770 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7771 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7772 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7773 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7774 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7775 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7776 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7777 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7778 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7781 Relay Box: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7782 Relay Box: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Relay Box: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7785 Relay Box: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7788 Relay Box: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay Relay Box: Locations Remote Run Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7793 Relay Box: Locations Run/Start Relay Run Remote Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7794 Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7795 Relay Box: Locations Junction Block Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Remote Run Relay > Page 7796 Relay Box: Locations Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run Remote Component ID: 224 Component : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN REMOTE Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A917 14RD/BR 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7799 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 225 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 85 RUN/START RELAY CONTROL K617 20BR 86 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 87 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7800 Relay Box: Diagrams Junction Block Component ID: 133 Component : JUNCTION BLOCK Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 3-4-5-6-7 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR 7 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 8 FUSED B(+) A103 20GY/RD 9-10 FUSED B(+) A918 14OR/LG 11 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F921 14PK/YL 12 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 13 - 14 - 15 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 16 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 17 FUSED B(+) A928 18RD 18 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 19 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 20 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 21 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD 22 - 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 25 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 26 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 27 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 28 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 29 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 30 GROUND Z911 20BK 31 FUSED B(+) A920 14OR/RD 32 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7801 33 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR 34 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 35 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 36 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED B(+) A952 10OR/DB 40 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR Component Location - 28 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7802 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7803 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C2 Color : BROWN # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F941 18PK/LG 3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7804 6-7-8-9 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 10 - 11 FUSED B(+) A924 16RD 12 - 13 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 14 FUSED B(+) A116 14YL/RD 15 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F306 18DB/PK 16 FUSED B(+) A114 16GY/RD 17 - 18 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 19 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 20 - 21 - 22 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 23 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 24 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 25 FUSED B(+) A106 18LB/RD 26 - 27 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 28 - 29 FUSED B(+). A920 16OR/RD 30 - 31 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 32 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 33 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 33 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 34 - 35 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 36 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7805 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7806 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7807 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 2 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 3-4-5 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L78 20WT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7808 6 FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP L77 20PK/RD 7 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 9 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 10 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 11 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 13 - 14 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 15 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 16 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 17 - 18 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 16WT/RD 19 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN 20 - 21 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL L62 18VT/GY 22 LEFT TURN SIGNAL L63 18WT/DG 23 FUSED B(+) A926 20RD 24 - 25 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 18YL/LB 26 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 27 - 28 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 29 - 30 FUSED B(+) A300 20RD/GY 31 FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C16 20DB/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 32 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 33 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 34 - 35 - - 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 FUSED ACCESSORY RELAY OUTPUT F307 16YL/LB 40 - Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7809 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7810 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7811 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C4 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2-3-4-5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7812 6-7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 17 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 18 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 19 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 20 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 21 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT 22 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 23 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 24 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 30 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 31 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 32 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7813 Component Location - 31 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7814 Connector: Name : JUNCTION BLOCK C5 Color : # of pins : 0 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 2 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 4 TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SENSE T6 20LB/LG 5 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7815 6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 6 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 7 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V32 20VT/YL 8 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 DYNAMICS SENSOR HIGH DATA LINK D465 20WT/BK 14 DYNAMICS SENSOR LOW DATA LINK D464 20WT 15 CAN C BUS (-) D64 20WT/LB 16 CAN C BUS (+) D65 20YL/RD 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 32 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7816 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7817 Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Run Remote > Page 7818 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Application and ID Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7821 Relay Box: Application and ID Junction Block Junction Block Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Integrated Power Module > Page 7822 Relay Box: Application and ID Power Distribution Center Power Distribution Center Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Relay Box: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All of the electrical current distributed throughout this vehicle is directed through the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1). The molded plastic PDC housing is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. The PDC houses the generator cartridge fuse and maxi-type cartridge fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC also houses blade-type fuses, relays, and a fuse puller. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7825 Relay Box: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the PDC through two cables with eyelets that are secured with nuts to the two B(+) terminal studs located just inside the inboard end of the PDC housing. The PDC cover is unlatched and removed to access the battery and generator output connection B(+) terminal studs, the fuses, the relays, the joint connectors and the engine wire harness in-line connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Relay Box: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Depress retaining tabs on the side on the PDC (1). 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors (2) and remove PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7828 Relay Box: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to Power Distribution Center (PDC). 2. Position PDC and engage into the retaining tabs. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Locations Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7833 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7834 Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 430 Component : SWITCH-INVERTER Connector: Name : SWITCH-INVERTER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 INVERTER STATUS INDICATOR DRIVER P806 20LG/VT 2-3 INVERTER ENABLE SWITCH SIGNAL P805 20LG/RD 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z600 20BK 6 INVERTER SWITCH SIGNAL P807 18BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7835 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the Integrated Power Module as part of the preparation procedures performed just prior to new vehicle delivery. The following circuits are protected by the IOD fuse: - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Sensors and Switches - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Interrupt Connector/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7840 Power Interrupt Connector/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term ignition-off draw identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Wiring Harness: Customer Interest Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 7849 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Wiring Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Wiring Harness > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiring Harness: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 7855 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Wheel Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Wheel Alignment Specifications ALIGNMENT NOTE: All alignment specifications are in degrees. Wheel Alignment Specifications Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Alignment: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Suspension components with rubber/urethane bushings should be tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is important to have the springs supporting the weight of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle ride comfort could be affected and premature bushing wear may occur. Wheel alignment involves the correct positioning of the wheels in relation to the vehicle. The positioning is accomplished through suspension and steering linkage adjustments. An alignment is considered essential for efficient steering, good directional stability and to minimize tire wear. The most important measurements of an alignment are caster, camber and toe. CAUTION: Never attempt to modify suspension or steering components by heating or bending. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7863 Alignment: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION - CASTER (1) is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering knuckle from vertical. Tilting the top of the knuckle forward provides less positive caster. Tilting the top of the knuckle rearward provides more positive caster. Positive caster promotes directional stability. This angle enables the front wheels to return to a straight ahead position after turns. - CAMBER (2) is the inward or outward tilt of the wheel relative to the center of the vehicle. Tilting the top of the wheel inward provides negative camber. Tilting the top of the wheel outward provides positive camber. Incorrect camber will cause wear on the inside or outside edge of the tire. - TOE (4) is the difference between the leading inside edges and trailing inside edges of the front tires. Wheel toe position out of specification cause's unstable steering, uneven tire wear and steering wheel off- center. The wheel toe position is the final front wheel alignment adjustment. THRUST ANGLE (3) is the angle of the rear axle relative to the centerline of the vehicle. Incorrect thrust angle can cause off-center steering and excessive tire wear. This angle is not adjustable, damaged component(s) must be replaced to correct the thrust angle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7864 Alignment: Testing and Inspection PRE-ALIGNMENT INSPECTION Before starting wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary corrections must be completed. Refer to Suspension and Steering System Diagnosis Chart. NOTE: Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel prior to measuring and adjusting alignment. 1. Inspect tires for size, air pressure and tread wear. 2. Inspect front wheel bearings for wear. 3. Inspect front wheels for excessive radial or lateral runout and balance. 4. Inspect ball studs, linkage pivot points and steering gear for looseness, roughness or binding. 5. Inspect suspension components for wear and noise. 6. Check suspension ride height. 7. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7865 Suspension And Steering System Diagnosis (Part 1) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 7866 Suspension And Steering System Diagnosis (Part 2) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement Alignment: Service and Repair Height Measurement HEIGHT MEASUREMENT The vehicle suspension height MUST be measured and adjusted before performing wheel alignment procedure. Also when front suspension components have been replaced. This measure must be performed with the vehicle supporting it's own weight and taken on both sides of the vehicle. NOTE: Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel prior to measuring and adjusting alignment. FRONT RIDE HEIGHT MEASUREMENT 1. Inspect tires and set to correct pressure. 2. Jounce the front of the vehicle. 3. With vehicle on level ground or hoist, make the following measurements: a. Front wheel spindle (center) to ground vertical distance. b. Center of the front face of bolt on the rear leg of Lower control arm to ground vertical distance. c. Difference between spindle and control arm bolt to ground distances should be 81mm+/-3.2mm Note that the control arm bolt is lower than the spindle. 4. If adjustment is required, turn the torsion bar adjuster bolts- if lowering ride height, unscrew Torsion bar adjuster bolt beyond desired point so as to set height when screwing-in adjuster bolt. 5. After making any ride height adjustment, roll vehicle preferably jouncing it also, to relieve camber Effects and then re-measure Lower control arm bolt to ground height. 6. Repeat the previous steps until the ride height is within specifications. REAR RIDE HEIGHT MEASUREMENT 1. Inspect tires and set to correct pressure. 2. Jounce the front of the vehicle. 3. With vehicle on level ground or hoist, make the following measurements: a. Distance from the landing pad of the jounce bumper on the axle side to the jounce bumper cup lip of the frame side. b. The difference between the jounce bumper landing pad and the jounce bumper cup lip. The reading should be 148 mm +/-10 mm for 9.25" axle, 154 mm +/-10 mm for 8.25" axle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement > Page 7869 Alignment: Service and Repair Height Adjustment HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT The vehicle suspension height MUST be measured and adjusted before performing wheel alignment procedure. Also when front suspension components have been replaced. This measurement must be performed with the vehicle supporting it's own weight and taken on both sides of the vehicle. To adjust the vehicle height turn the torsion bar adjustment bolt CLOCKWISE to raise the vehicle and COUNTER CLOCKWISE to lower the vehicle. CAUTION: ALWAYS raise the vehicle to the correct suspension height, NEVER lower the vehicle to obtain the correct suspension height. If the vehicle suspension height is too high, lower the vehicle below the height specification. Then raise the vehicle to the correct suspension height specification. This will insure the vehicle maintains the proper suspension height. NOTE: If a height adjustment has been made, perform height measurement again on both sides of the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement > Page 7870 Alignment: Service and Repair Camber, Caster And Toe Adjustment CAMBER, CASTER AND TOE ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Suspension height measurement must be performed before an alignment. Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm with the slots in the frame brackets to move the lower control arm inwards or outwards for proper adjustment. This can be achieved by using a long pry bar with a curved tip and inserting the pry bar into the lower control arm frame brackets and prying inwards or outwards. NOTE: Camber and caster adjustments must be made at the lower control arm. Do not use the upper control arm for Camber and Caster adjustments. NOTE: When the lower control arm pivot bolts are loosened the lower control arm will normally go outwards automatically with the weight of the vehicle. CASTER Moving the rear position of the lower control arm at the frame in or out, will change the caster angle significantly and camber angle only slightly. To maintain the camber angle while adjusting caster, move the rear of the lower control arm in or out. Then move the front of the lower control arm slightly in the opposite direction. CAMBER Move both the front and rear of the lower control arm together in or out. This will change the camber angle significantly and caster angle slightly. After adjustment is made tighten the lower control arm bolt & nuts to 244 Nm (180 ft. lbs.). TOE ADJUSTMENT The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (3). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (4) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Height Measurement > Page 7871 Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment TOE ADJUSTMENT SUSPENSION HEIGHT MEASUREMENT MUST BE PERFORMED BEFORE AN ALIGNMENT. The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (3). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (4) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 130 Nm (96 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description - Premium System DESCRIPTION - PREMIUM SYSTEM A transponder is located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System > Page 7878 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation - Premium System OPERATION - PREMIUM SYSTEM Transponders located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle provide the Wireless Control Module (WCM) commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Removal Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover (2). 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7881 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7882 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Installation Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7883 1. Install the transponder (4) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4) 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the "WCM/Wireless Control Module" menu item as appropriate.Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a black sensor body, with (an oval insignia) (1) and a grey valve cap (2). The Export TPM system operates on a 433 MHz radio frequency. The 433 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a gray sensor body (with an oval insignia) and a black valve cap (2). CAUTION: Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct sensor is being used. NOTE: Sensors may be identified by valve stem cap color. From the factory, 315 MHz sensors have a gray valve stem cap while 433 MHz sensors have a black valve stem cap. Otherwise, once mounted inside a tire and wheel assembly you are not able to visually tell the difference between a 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensor. The tire must be dismounted allowing visual inspection of the sensor body. NOTE: If aftermarket wheels are installed and do not contain tire pressure sensors, the system will not function properly and the driver will be continuously notified of a system malfunction. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7891 The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: NOTE: Any time a sensor is installed on a wheel, a new Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) must be installed to ensure proper sealing. - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7892 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the wireless control module (WCM), commonly referred to as the sentry key remote entry module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor's operating mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: - Sleep Mode - This is the operating mode of a new TPM sensor. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 1 PSI. Driving the vehicle continuously at this speed for more then 4 minutes, and then stopping the vehicle will change the sensor state into Park Mode. If the vehicle is equipped with a full size matching spare tire and the spare tire sensor has been replaced, The sensor must be changed to Park Mode to conserve battery life. Either use a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or swap the spare tire with a road tire. - Park Mode - This is the correct operating mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 1 PSI delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure - 0ff / 30 Block - If the vehicle has been stopped for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's operating mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from Park Mode to 30 Block Mode once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After about 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensor's mode will change to Drive Mode - Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph, the sensor will revert back to Park Mode. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h), unless the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced, The vehicle must be stationary for more than 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7893 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 14 to 41 kPa (2 to 6 psi) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. Check the tire pressure yellow telltale in the instrument cluster. If the yellow telltale is illuminating continuously, proceed as listed below. If the yellow telltale is flashing on/off for 60 seconds, once every ten minutes, there is a system fault detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire, allow approximately two minutes for the message or yellow telltale to go out. If air pressure in any tire is low, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for a leak around the tire assembly and sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7896 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacing the spare tire pressure sensor, take the time now to write down the tire pressure sensor ID. NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7897 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Rotating Wheel Tire Changers - Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7898 Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. SPARE TIRE SENSOR REPLACEMENT NOTE: When the spare tire sensor is replaced on vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and a full-sized matching spare tire and wheel assembly, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the (WCM) Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is available, put the new spare tire pressure sensor into "Park" mode. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is not available, rotate the spare tire with one of the road tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # F48 Date: 061101 Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement November 2006 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall F48 - Right Steering Knuckle Models 2007 (HB) Dodge Durango 2007 (HG) Chrysler Aspen NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from July 24, 2006 through September 1, 2006 (MDH 072406 through 090110). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. In addition, a small number of 2004 (HB) through 2006 (HB) model year vehicles that have had a suspect replacement right steering knuckle installed between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006 according to our records, have been added to this recall. Every effort should be made by dealers to review their records and contact owners who have purchased a right steering knuckle shipped to dealers between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The right steering knuckle on about 5,000 of the above vehicles may have been improperly manufactured and could break. This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. Repair The right steering knuckle must be inspected and replaced if necessary. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that right knuckle replacement is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Parts Information Essential Tools The essential tool shown is required to perform this repair. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7908 submitted will be used by DaimlerChrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive three copies of this dealer recall notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to DaimlerChrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations DaimlerChrysler Corporation A. Inspect the Right Steering Knuckle Date Code 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7909 2. Look on the inboard side of the right steering knuckle. Read the cavity number to right of the letter "J" (Figure 1). > If the mold cavity number is NOT # 63, no further action is needed. Return the vehicle to the customer. > If the mold cavity number IS # 63, read the 15 digit date code (Figure 1). If the first 5 digits of the date code is either 06199XX_XXXXXXXX or 06200XX_XXXXXXXX, continue to Section B Replace the Right Steering Knuckle. If the first five digits of the date code are NOT 06199... or 06200..., return the vehicle to the customer. B. Replace the Right Steering Knuckle 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper assembly and adaptor from the steering knuckle. Suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor away from the work area. CAUTION: Do not suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor by the brake hose. 3. Mark the brake rotor and the corresponding hub wheel stud. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7910 4. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the brake rotor and ABS wheel speed sensor (Figure 2). 5. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer from the knuckle. 6. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: remove the front half shaft hub nut. 7. Remove the tie-rod end nut and separate the tie-rod from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod seal when using essential tool # 8677. 8. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 9. Loosen the lower ball joint nut and leave the nut on the ball joint only finger tight. 10. Separate the lower ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 11. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle. 12. Transfer the hub/bearing and splash shield from the old steering knuckle to the new steering knuckle and tighten the three bolts to 120 ft. lbs. (163 N.m). 13. Discard the old steering knuckle. 14. Using mineral spirits, clean and dry the ball joint and tie rod end stud tapers. 15. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: Position the half-shaft into the new steering knuckle. 16. Install the upper and lower ball joint tapers to the steering knuckle and hand start the nuts. 17. Tighten the upper ball joint nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 18. Tighten the lower ball joint nut to 70 ft. lbs. (95 N.m). 19. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 20. For 4 x 4 equipped vehicles: Install the half shaft nut and tighten to 185 ft. lbs. (251 N.m) 21. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Attach the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer to the knuckle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7911 22. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Install the ABS wheel speed sensor into the hub and tighten the bolt to 190 in. lbs. (21 N.m). 23. Install the brake rotor aligning the brake rotor to the hub wheel stud marks made in Step 3. 24. Install the brake caliper assembly and adaptor to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts to 130 ft. lbs. (176 N.m). 25. Install the wheel and tire assembly. Tighten the wheel lug nuts to 135 ft. lbs. (183 N.m). 26. Apply the service brakes several times to seat the brake caliper pistons. 27. Transfer the vehicle onto an alignment rack and adjust the toe-in to 0.10° +/- 0.05°. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > NHTSA06V386000 > Oct > 06 > Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect Front Steering Knuckle: Recalls Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Chrysler/Aspen 2007 Dodge/Durango 2007 MANUFACTURER: DaimlerChrysler Corporation NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V386000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: October 03, 2006 COMPONENT: Steering POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 6644 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the right front steering knuckle may have been improperly manufactured and could break. CONSEQUENCE: This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect and replace the right steering knuckle. The recall is expected to begin during October 2006. Owners may contact DaimlerChrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: DaimlerChrysler recall No. F48. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # F48 Date: 061101 Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement November 2006 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall F48 - Right Steering Knuckle Models 2007 (HB) Dodge Durango 2007 (HG) Chrysler Aspen NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from July 24, 2006 through September 1, 2006 (MDH 072406 through 090110). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. In addition, a small number of 2004 (HB) through 2006 (HB) model year vehicles that have had a suspect replacement right steering knuckle installed between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006 according to our records, have been added to this recall. Every effort should be made by dealers to review their records and contact owners who have purchased a right steering knuckle shipped to dealers between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The right steering knuckle on about 5,000 of the above vehicles may have been improperly manufactured and could break. This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. Repair The right steering knuckle must be inspected and replaced if necessary. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that right knuckle replacement is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Parts Information Essential Tools The essential tool shown is required to perform this repair. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7921 submitted will be used by DaimlerChrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive three copies of this dealer recall notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to DaimlerChrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations DaimlerChrysler Corporation A. Inspect the Right Steering Knuckle Date Code 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7922 2. Look on the inboard side of the right steering knuckle. Read the cavity number to right of the letter "J" (Figure 1). > If the mold cavity number is NOT # 63, no further action is needed. Return the vehicle to the customer. > If the mold cavity number IS # 63, read the 15 digit date code (Figure 1). If the first 5 digits of the date code is either 06199XX_XXXXXXXX or 06200XX_XXXXXXXX, continue to Section B Replace the Right Steering Knuckle. If the first five digits of the date code are NOT 06199... or 06200..., return the vehicle to the customer. B. Replace the Right Steering Knuckle 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper assembly and adaptor from the steering knuckle. Suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor away from the work area. CAUTION: Do not suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor by the brake hose. 3. Mark the brake rotor and the corresponding hub wheel stud. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7923 4. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the brake rotor and ABS wheel speed sensor (Figure 2). 5. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer from the knuckle. 6. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: remove the front half shaft hub nut. 7. Remove the tie-rod end nut and separate the tie-rod from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod seal when using essential tool # 8677. 8. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 9. Loosen the lower ball joint nut and leave the nut on the ball joint only finger tight. 10. Separate the lower ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 11. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle. 12. Transfer the hub/bearing and splash shield from the old steering knuckle to the new steering knuckle and tighten the three bolts to 120 ft. lbs. (163 N.m). 13. Discard the old steering knuckle. 14. Using mineral spirits, clean and dry the ball joint and tie rod end stud tapers. 15. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: Position the half-shaft into the new steering knuckle. 16. Install the upper and lower ball joint tapers to the steering knuckle and hand start the nuts. 17. Tighten the upper ball joint nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 18. Tighten the lower ball joint nut to 70 ft. lbs. (95 N.m). 19. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 20. For 4 x 4 equipped vehicles: Install the half shaft nut and tighten to 185 ft. lbs. (251 N.m) 21. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Attach the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer to the knuckle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 7924 22. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Install the ABS wheel speed sensor into the hub and tighten the bolt to 190 in. lbs. (21 N.m). 23. Install the brake rotor aligning the brake rotor to the hub wheel stud marks made in Step 3. 24. Install the brake caliper assembly and adaptor to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts to 130 ft. lbs. (176 N.m). 25. Install the wheel and tire assembly. Tighten the wheel lug nuts to 135 ft. lbs. (183 N.m). 26. Apply the service brakes several times to seat the brake caliper pistons. 27. Transfer the vehicle onto an alignment rack and adjust the toe-in to 0.10° +/- 0.05°. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > NHTSA06V386000 > Oct > 06 > Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Chrysler/Aspen 2007 Dodge/Durango 2007 MANUFACTURER: DaimlerChrysler Corporation NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V386000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: October 03, 2006 COMPONENT: Steering POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 6644 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the right front steering knuckle may have been improperly manufactured and could break. CONSEQUENCE: This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect and replace the right steering knuckle. The recall is expected to begin during October 2006. Owners may contact DaimlerChrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: DaimlerChrysler recall No. F48. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The knuckle is a single casting with legs machined for the upper and lower ball joints. The knuckle also has machined mounting locations for the front brake calipers and hub bearing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7931 Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The steering knuckle pivot between the upper and lower ball joint. Steering linkage attached to the knuckle allows the vehicle to be steered. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, rotor, shield and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 4. Remove the front half shaft nut 4X4 only. 5. Remove the tie rod end nut. Separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle with puller 8677 (1). CAUTION: When installing puller 8677 to separate the ball joint, be careful not to damage the ball joint seal. 6. Remove the upper ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) with Remover 8677 (2). 7. Install an hydraulic jack to support the lower control arm. 8. Remove the lower ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle (1) with Remover 8677 (2) and remove the knuckle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7934 9. Remove the hub/bearing bolts (1) from the knuckle. 10. Remove the hub/bearing (4) from the steering knuckle (1). 11. Remove the steering knuckle (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7935 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The ball joint stud tapers must be CLEAN and DRY before installing the knuckle. Clean the stud tapers with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease. 1. Install the hub/bearing to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts (1) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the knuckle (1) onto the upper and lower ball joints. 3. Install the upper ball joint nut. Tighten the nut to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the lower ball joint nut (3). Tighten the nut to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove the hydraulic jack from the lower suspension arm (2). 6. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the front halfshaft (2) into the hub/bearing 4X4 only. 8. Install the the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 9. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped and brake shield, rotor and caliper. 10. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7936 12. Perform a wheel alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 7942 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7943 Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Mopar ATF +4 Automatic Transmission Fluid is required in the power steering system. Substitute fluids can induce power steering system failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7944 Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The recommended fluid for the power steering system is Mopar(R) ATF +4. Mopar(R) ATF+4, when new is red in color. The ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition, As the vehicle is driven, the ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7945 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL CHECKING WARNING: FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH THE ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY FROM MOVING PARTS. CAUTION: MOPAR(R) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, and do not overfill. The power steering fluid level can be viewed on the dipstick attached to the filler cap. There are two ranges listed on the dipstick, COLD and HOT. Before opening power steering system, wipe the reservoir filler cap free of dirt and debris. Remove the cap and check the fluid level on its dipstick. When the fluid is at normal ambient temperature, approximately 21° C to 27° C (70° F to 80° F), the fluid level should read between the minimum and maximum area of the cold range. When the fluid is hot, fluid level is allowed to read up to the highest end of the HOT range. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4 Do not overfill the power steering system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7946 Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair POWER STEERING SYSTEM BLEEDING WARNING: The fluid level should be checked with engine off to prevent injury from moving components. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Power Steering Fluid + 4 or Mopar(R) ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid is to be used in the power steering system. Both Fluids have the same material standard specifications (MS-9602). No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if another fluid is used. Do not overfill the system. CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, pump failure could result. NOTE: Be sure the vacuum tool used in the following procedure is clean and free of any fluids. 1. Check the fluid level. As measured on the side of the reservoir, the level should indicate between MAX and MIN when the fluid is at normal ambient temperature. Adjust the fluid level as necessary. 2. Tightly insert Power Steering Cap Adapter (4), Special Tool 9688, into the mouth of the reservoir (3). CAUTION: Failure to use a the vacuum pump reservoir (1) may allow power steering fluid to be sucked into the hand vacuum pump. 3. Attach Hand Vacuum Pump (2), Special Tool C-4207 or equivalent, with reservoir (1) attached, to the Power Steering Cap Adapter (4). CAUTION: Do not run the engine while vacuum is applied to the power steering system. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. NOTE: When performing the following step make sure the vacuum level is maintained during the entire time period. 4. Using Hand Vacuum Pump (2), apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in. Hg) of vacuum to the system for a minimum of three minutes. 5. Slowly release the vacuum and remove the special tools. 6. Adjust the fluid level as necessary. Refer to STEP 1. 7. Repeat STEP 1 through STEP 6 until the fluid no longer drops when vacuum is applied. 8. Start the engine and cycle the steering wheel lock-to-lock three times. NOTE: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops. 9. Stop the engine and check for leaks at all connections. 10. Check for any signs of air in the reservoir and check the fluid level. If air is present, repeat the procedure as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the hose clamps (1). 4. Disconnect the hoses (2) at the cooler. 5. Remove the cooler mounting bolts (2). 6. Remove the cooler. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7951 Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the cooler to the vehicle. 2. Install the cooler mounting nut and bolt (2). 3. Reconnect the hoses (2) at the cooler. 4. Reconnect the hose clamps (1). 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the power steering pump. 2. With the pump on the bench drain the rest of the fluid out into a container. 3. Remove the two bolts and separate the reservoir from the pump body. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7956 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Lubricate O-ring with power steering fluid prior to installation and ensure that the reservoir port and pump port are free of contaminants. 1. Install a new O-ring on the port of the reservoir. 2. Install the reservoir on the pump body. 3. Install the two bolts securing the reservoir to the body and tighten. 4. Install the power steering pump. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Removal Return Hose RETURN HOSE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7961 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7962 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Installation Return Hose RETURN HOSE 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the cooler (5). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the gear (2). Tighten the hose to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the return hose to the crossmember and secure. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system. Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Install the pressure hose (3) to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (3) at the pump (1). Tighten the hose to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) to the gear (2). Tighten the hose to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 4. Reconnect the pressure hose (3) at the gear (2). Tighten the hose to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 5. Connect the pressure hose (3) to the crossmember retainer. 6. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 7. Refill the power steering system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Pump: Specifications TORQUE Torque Specifications Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The pump (1) is connected to the steering gear (2) via the pressure hose (3) and the return hoses (4). The pump shaft has a pressed-on pulley (6) that is belt driven by the crankshaft pulley. The power steering oil cooler (5) is mounted to the front lower part of the radiator (7). NOTE: Power steering pumps are not interchangeable with pumps installed on other vehicles. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7968 Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation Pump OPERATION Hydraulic pressure is provided for the power steering gear by the belt driven power steering pump. The power steering pumps are constant flow rate and displacement, vane-type pumps. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis And Testing - Pump Leakage Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis And Testing - Pump Leakage PUMP LEAKAGE The pump is serviced as an assembly and should not be disassembled. Plastic pump reservoirs can be replace and the reservoir O-ring. Check for leaks in the following areas: - Pump shaft seal behind the pulley - Pump to reservoir O-ring - Reservoir cap - Pressure and return lines - Flow control valve fitting Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis And Testing - Pump Leakage > Page 7971 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Power Steering Pump and Hoses POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES NOTE: This information is designed to be used in conjunction with the diagnostic charts. CHECKING FOR WEAR OF POWER STEERING PUMP INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1. Place gear selector in PARK (or NEUTRAL) with wheels chalked. 2. With the engine idling, have a helper turn the steering wheel. 3. Using an electronic listening tool, determine if noise is coming from the pump. 4. Increase the engine speed and have a helper turn the steering wheel. Does the noise change with load? 5. Replace the power steering pump if excessive noise is present. CHECKING FOR POWER STEERING HOSES TOUCHING BODY OR FRAME OF VEHICLE Check hoses and hose tubes as following: - Inspect hoses and hose tubes for witness marks. If witness marks are present, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. - Check fastener torque of hose mounting brackets and tube nuts. - Have a helper bump the steering gear off of the stops to induce pressure fluctuations which may move the hose. If hose contact is made, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Pump Removal REMOVAL 1. Drain and siphon the power steering fluid from the pump. 2. Remove the serpentine drive belt. 3. Remove the reservoir return hose at the reservoir. 4. Remove the pressure hose from the pump. 5. Remove 3 pump mounting bolts through pulley access holes. 6. Remove the pump from the engine. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the pump with the mounting holes on the engine. 2. Install 3 pump mounting bolts through the pulley access holes. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the pressure hose to the pump. Tighten the pressure line to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Install reservoir return hose to the reservoir. 5. Install the serpentine drive belt. 6. Fill the power steering pump. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pump > Page 7974 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Pulley Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not reuse the old power steering pump pulley it is not intended for reuse. A new pulley must be installed if removed. 1. Remove the power steering pump assembly. 2. Remove the pulley (2) from the pump (1) using (OTC(R) 7185) power steering pulley removal tool (3) or equivalent. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not reuse the old power steering pump pulley it is not intended for reuse. A new pulley must be installed if removed. 1. Replace the pulley if it's bent, cracked, or loose. 2. Install the pulley (2) on the pump (1) using (OTC(R) 7771) power steering pulley installation tool (3) or equivalent making sure it is flush with the end of the shaft. Ensure the tool and pulley remain aligned with the pump shaft. 3. Install the power steering pump assembly. 4. Run engine until warm (5 min.) and note any belt chirp. If chirp exists, move pulley outward approximately 0.5 mm (0.020 in.). If noise increases, press on 1.0 mm (0.040 in.). Be careful that pulley does not contact mounting bolts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 7980 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 7981 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Column Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Remove the two screws (1) and remove the opening cover (2). 3. Remove the four screws (2) and remove the steering column opening reinforcement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7986 Steering Column Cover: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Install the opening reinforcement (1) and install the four screws (2). 3. Install the opening cover (2) and seat fully. 4. Install the two screws (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tilt Wheel Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the tilt lever handle. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover. 3. Remove the lower shroud. NOTE: Use special care not to pry on the clockspring electrical connector when removing or installing the mounting screw located next to the clockspring. 4. Remove the two mounting screws (3) from the tilt lever knob release bracket (1). 5. Disconnect the electrical harness plastic mounting tab (2) from the the bracket (1). 6. Unsnap the cable (2) from the bracket (1). 7. Remove the end of the cable (2) from the tilt lever knob release bracket (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7991 Tilt Wheel Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the cable (2) into the tilt lever release knob bracket (1). 2. Snap the cable end (2) into the bracket (1). NOTE: Use special care not to pry on the clockspring electrical connector when removing or installing the mounting screw located next to the clockspring. NOTE: New screws should be used when installing the tilt lever release knob bracket to the column. 3. Install the tilt lever release knob bracket (1) to the column and install the two new mounting screws (3). Tighten the two new screws to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 4. Install the electrical harness plastic mounting tab (2) to the bracket (1). 5. Install the lower shroud. 6. Install the steering column opening cover. 7. Install the tilt lever handle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications TORQUE Torque Specifications Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Steering Gear: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A rack and pinion steering gears is made up of two main components, the pinon shaft and the rack. Other components are the outer tie rod ends (3&5), inner tie rods (1&2), Mounting Bushings and the boots (4). The gear cannot be adjusted or internally serviced. If a malfunction or a fluid leak occurs, the gear must be replaced as an assembly. The only serviceable component on the steering gear is the outer tie rod ends (3&5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7997 Steering Gear: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The steering column shaft is attached to the gear pinion. The rotation of the pinion moves the gear rack from side-to-side. This lateral action of the rack pushes and pulls the tie rods to change the direction of the front wheels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Siphon out as much power steering fluid as possible from the pump. 2. Lock the steering wheel. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the front tires. 5. Remove the nuts (1) from the tie rod ends (3). 6. Separate tie rod ends (2) from the knuckles with Puller 8677 (1). 7. Remove the steering gear pinch bolt (2). 8. Remove the lower steering coupling (1) from the steering gear (3). 9. Turn the steering gear to the full right position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8000 10. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe (3) 3.7L & 4.7L engines only. 11. Remove the power steering lines from the gear. 12. Remove the front crossmember (2). 13. Remove the steering gear mounting bolts (4), washers (5) and nuts (6). 14. Tip the gear (7) forward to allow clearance and move to the right then tip the gear downward on the left side to remove from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8001 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before installing gear inspect the bushings and replace if worn or damaged, also use new gear mounting bolts and nuts. 1. Install gear (7) to the vehicle and tighten mounting nuts and bolts (4 & 6) to 258 Nm (190 ft. lbs.). 2. Install power steering lines to steering gear and tighten the pressure hose to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.) and tighten the return hose to 65 Nm (48 ft. lbs.). 3. Slide the shaft coupler (1) onto gear (3). Install new bolt (2) and tighten to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 4. Clean tie rod end studs and knuckle tapers (5). 5. Install tie rod ends (2) into the steering knuckles (5) and tighten the nuts (1) to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8002 6. Install the Y-pipe (3) 3.7L & 4.7L engines only. 7. Install the front crossmember (2). 8. Install the front tires. 9. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 10. Unlock the steering wheel. 11. Fill system with fluid. 12. Adjust the toe position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Steering Coupling Shaft Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lock the steering wheel with the tire in the straight position. 3. Remove and discard the upper pinch bolt (2) from the upper coupling at the column (1). 4. Lower the steering coupler shaft (3) from the column (1). 5. Remove the toe plate (5) nuts (4). 6. Remove and discard the lower coupler pinch bolt (3) from the lower steering coupling shaft (1) at the steering gear. 7. Remove the steering coupling shaft from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft > Page 8007 1. Install the upper steering coupling shaft (3) to the vehicle. NOTE: A new steering coupling shaft pinch bolt for the upper and lower shafts must be used. 2. Install the upper coupling to the column. 3. Install the upper pinch bolt (2) use a new bolt and tighten to 38 Nm (28 ft.lbs). 4. Install the toe plate (5) nuts (4) and tighten to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs). 5. Install the shaft (1) to the lower coupling (2). 6. Install the lower pinch bolt (3) use new bolt and tighten to 38 Nm (28 ft.lbs). 7. Unlock the steering wheel. 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft > Page 8008 Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Lower Steering Coupling Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Lock the steering wheel with the tire in the straight position. 4. Remove and discard the upper coupling (1) pinch bolt (2). 5. Remove and discard the lower coupling (2) pinch bolt (3). 6. Remove the lower steering shaft coupling (1) from the steering gear (3). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft > Page 8009 1. Install the coupling (1) to the steering gear (3). 2. Install the other end of the coupling (2) to the steering shaft (1). NOTE: New pinch bolts must be used for reinstallation. 3. Install the upper pinch bolt (3) and tighten to 38 Nm (28 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the lower pinch bolt (2) and tighten to 38 Nm (28 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Unlock the steering wheel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disable and remove the driver's side airbag. 2. Partially remove the steering wheel bolt (2) and leave the bolt in the column. 3. Install puller CJ98-1(2) or equivalent using the top of the bolt to push on. 4. Remove and discard the steering wheel bolt (2). 5. Remove the steering wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8014 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not reuse the old steering wheel bolt (2) (a new bolt must be used) NOTE: Make sure to align the spline on the steering wheel hub to the column shaft. 1. Install steering wheel (1) to the column (4). NOTE: Be certain that the steering wheel mounting bolt is tightened to the proper torque specification to ensure proper clockspring operation. 2. Install the new steering wheel bolt (2). Tighten the bolt to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the driver's side air bag to the steering wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tie Rod End: Testing and Inspection OUTER TIE ROD END NOTE: If the outer tie rod end is equipped with a lubrication fitting, grease the joint then road test the vehicle before performing test. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the vehicle steering knuckle and then zero the dial indicator. 4. Position indicator plunger on the top side of the outer tie rod end. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the outer tie rod end. 5. Position a pry bar in order to pry downwards on the outer tie rod end. 6. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the outer tie rod end. 7. If the outer tie rod end is within specs reinstall the front tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Outer Tie Rod End Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Removal - Outer Tie Rod End REMOVAL - OUTER TIE ROD END NOTE: Do not twist the boot anytime during removal or installation. 1. Loosen the jam nut (3). 2. Remove the outer tie rod end (2) nut (1) from the ball stud. 3. Separate the outer tie rod end (2) from the knuckle with Remover 8677 (1). 4. Unthread the outer tie rod end from the inner tie rod. Count the number of turns when removing the tie rod end, This will give a good starting point when reassembling and toe adjustment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Outer Tie Rod End > Page 8021 Tie Rod End: Service and Repair Installation - Outer Tie Rod End INSTALLATION - OUTER TIE ROD END NOTE: Do not twist the boot at anytime during removal or installation. 1. Thread the outer tie rod end (2) onto the inner tie rod (4), to it's original position. 2. Install the outer tie rod end into the steering knuckle (5). 3. Tighten the ball stud nut (1) on the ball stud to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 4. Set wheel toe pattern. 5. Tighten jam nut (3) to 109 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Wear limit If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) replace the lower ball joint. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8026 Ball Joint: Description and Operation UPPER BALL JOINT 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Mount a dial indicator (1) solidly to the frame and then zero the dial indicator. 4. Position dial indicator plunger on the top side of the upper ball joint (5). NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the ball joint. NOTE: Use care not to pry or tear the ball joint boot, when checking the free play. 5. Position a pry bar (3) between the steering knuckle (4) and the upper control arm (2). Pry upwards on the upper control arm. 6. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the upper control arm since the upper ball joint is integral to the arm. 7. If the upper ball joint is within specs reinstall the front tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 8027 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection LOWER BALL JOINT NOTE: If the ball joint is equipped with a lubrication fitting, grease the joint then road test the vehicle before performing test. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the top side of the lower control arm and then zero the dial indicator. 3. Position the indicator plunger against the bottom surface of the steering knuckle. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the steering knuckle. 4. Position a pry bar under the tire assembly. Pry upwards on the tire assembly. 5. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the lower ball joint. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ball Joint: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper and rotor. 3. Disconnect the tie rod (2) from the steering knuckle using puller 8677 (1). 4. Separate the lower ball joint from the steering knuckle (1) using puller 8677 (2). 5. Remove the steering knuckle. 6. Move the half shaft to the side and support the half shaft out of the way 4X4 only. 7. Chisel out the ball joint stakes. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 8. Press the ball joint from the lower control arm (3) using special tools C-4212-F (PRESS) (1), 9333-1 (Driver) (2) and 9333-2 (Receiver) (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8030 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the ball joint (3) into the control arm and press in using special tools C-4212-F (press) (1), 9333-1 (Receiver) (2) and 9333-3 (Driver) (4). 2. Stake the ball joint flange in four evenly spaced places around the ball joint flange, using a chisel and hammer. 3. Remove the support for the halfshaft and install into position 4X4 only. 4. Install the steering knuckle. 5. Install the tie rod end into the steering knuckle. 6. Install and tighten the halfshaft nut to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). (If Equipped). 7. Install the brake caliper and rotor. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 9. Check the vehicle ride height. 10. Perform a wheel alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Removal LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS 1. Remove the lower control arm. 2. Secure the control arm in a vise. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. LARGE BUSHING FRONT PART OF THE CONTROL ARM 1. Install the bushing tools C4212-F (Press)(1), (9334-4 (Driver)(2), 9334-6 (Spacer)(4) and 9334-5 (Receiver)(5) as shown for the replacement of the large bushing (3). SMALL BUSHING TORSION BAR SIDE 1. Install bushing remover tools C4212-F (Press)(1), 9334-4 (Driver)(2), 9334-6 (Spacer)(5) and 9334-5 (Receiver)(6) as shown for the small bushing (3) removal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8036 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Installation LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHINGS LARGE BUSHING FRONT PART OF THE CONTROL ARM NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the new bushing (4) into the control arm (3) using special tools C4212-F (Press)(1), 9334-3 (Bushing installation depth spacer)(2), 9334-1 (driver)(5) as shown. SMALL BUSHING TORSION BAR SIDE 1. Install the new bushing (4) into the lower control arm (3) using tools C4212-F (Press)(1), 9334-3 (Bushing installation depth spacer), 9334-2 (Driver) as shown. 2. Remove the control arm from the vise. 3. Install the lower control arm. 4. Reset the vehicle ride height. 5. Perform a wheel alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair CROSSMEMBER-UNDERBODY REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts (1) and nuts (3) and remove the crossmember (2). INSTALLATION 1. Install the crossmember (2). 2. Install the bolts (1) and nuts (3). 3. Tighten the bolts and nuts to 102 N.m (75 ft.lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # F48 Date: 061101 Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement November 2006 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall F48 - Right Steering Knuckle Models 2007 (HB) Dodge Durango 2007 (HG) Chrysler Aspen NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from July 24, 2006 through September 1, 2006 (MDH 072406 through 090110). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. In addition, a small number of 2004 (HB) through 2006 (HB) model year vehicles that have had a suspect replacement right steering knuckle installed between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006 according to our records, have been added to this recall. Every effort should be made by dealers to review their records and contact owners who have purchased a right steering knuckle shipped to dealers between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The right steering knuckle on about 5,000 of the above vehicles may have been improperly manufactured and could break. This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. Repair The right steering knuckle must be inspected and replaced if necessary. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that right knuckle replacement is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Parts Information Essential Tools The essential tool shown is required to perform this repair. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8049 submitted will be used by DaimlerChrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive three copies of this dealer recall notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to DaimlerChrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations DaimlerChrysler Corporation A. Inspect the Right Steering Knuckle Date Code 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8050 2. Look on the inboard side of the right steering knuckle. Read the cavity number to right of the letter "J" (Figure 1). > If the mold cavity number is NOT # 63, no further action is needed. Return the vehicle to the customer. > If the mold cavity number IS # 63, read the 15 digit date code (Figure 1). If the first 5 digits of the date code is either 06199XX_XXXXXXXX or 06200XX_XXXXXXXX, continue to Section B Replace the Right Steering Knuckle. If the first five digits of the date code are NOT 06199... or 06200..., return the vehicle to the customer. B. Replace the Right Steering Knuckle 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper assembly and adaptor from the steering knuckle. Suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor away from the work area. CAUTION: Do not suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor by the brake hose. 3. Mark the brake rotor and the corresponding hub wheel stud. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8051 4. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the brake rotor and ABS wheel speed sensor (Figure 2). 5. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer from the knuckle. 6. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: remove the front half shaft hub nut. 7. Remove the tie-rod end nut and separate the tie-rod from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod seal when using essential tool # 8677. 8. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 9. Loosen the lower ball joint nut and leave the nut on the ball joint only finger tight. 10. Separate the lower ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 11. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle. 12. Transfer the hub/bearing and splash shield from the old steering knuckle to the new steering knuckle and tighten the three bolts to 120 ft. lbs. (163 N.m). 13. Discard the old steering knuckle. 14. Using mineral spirits, clean and dry the ball joint and tie rod end stud tapers. 15. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: Position the half-shaft into the new steering knuckle. 16. Install the upper and lower ball joint tapers to the steering knuckle and hand start the nuts. 17. Tighten the upper ball joint nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 18. Tighten the lower ball joint nut to 70 ft. lbs. (95 N.m). 19. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 20. For 4 x 4 equipped vehicles: Install the half shaft nut and tighten to 185 ft. lbs. (251 N.m) 21. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Attach the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer to the knuckle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8052 22. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Install the ABS wheel speed sensor into the hub and tighten the bolt to 190 in. lbs. (21 N.m). 23. Install the brake rotor aligning the brake rotor to the hub wheel stud marks made in Step 3. 24. Install the brake caliper assembly and adaptor to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts to 130 ft. lbs. (176 N.m). 25. Install the wheel and tire assembly. Tighten the wheel lug nuts to 135 ft. lbs. (183 N.m). 26. Apply the service brakes several times to seat the brake caliper pistons. 27. Transfer the vehicle onto an alignment rack and adjust the toe-in to 0.10° +/- 0.05°. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Front Steering Knuckle: > NHTSA06V386000 > Oct > 06 > Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect Front Steering Knuckle: Recalls Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Chrysler/Aspen 2007 Dodge/Durango 2007 MANUFACTURER: DaimlerChrysler Corporation NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V386000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: October 03, 2006 COMPONENT: Steering POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 6644 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the right front steering knuckle may have been improperly manufactured and could break. CONSEQUENCE: This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect and replace the right steering knuckle. The recall is expected to begin during October 2006. Owners may contact DaimlerChrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: DaimlerChrysler recall No. F48. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # F48 Date: 061101 Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement November 2006 Dealer Service Instructions for: Safety Recall F48 - Right Steering Knuckle Models 2007 (HB) Dodge Durango 2007 (HG) Chrysler Aspen NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles built from July 24, 2006 through September 1, 2006 (MDH 072406 through 090110). IMPORTANT: Many of the vehicles within the above build period have already been inspected or repaired and, therefore, have been excluded from this recall. In addition, a small number of 2004 (HB) through 2006 (HB) model year vehicles that have had a suspect replacement right steering knuckle installed between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006 according to our records, have been added to this recall. Every effort should be made by dealers to review their records and contact owners who have purchased a right steering knuckle shipped to dealers between July 21, 2006 through October 19, 2006. IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer new vehicle inventory. Federal law requires you to complete this recall service on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also consider this requirement to apply to used vehicle inventory and should perform this recall on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The right steering knuckle on about 5,000 of the above vehicles may have been improperly manufactured and could break. This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. Repair The right steering knuckle must be inspected and replaced if necessary. Alternate Transportation Dealers should attempt to minimize customer inconvenience by placing the owner in a loaner vehicle if inspection determines that right knuckle replacement is required and the vehicle must be held overnight. Parts Information Essential Tools The essential tool shown is required to perform this repair. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8062 submitted will be used by DaimlerChrysler to record recall service completions and provide dealer payments. Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive three copies of this dealer recall notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to DaimlerChrysler are being notified of the service requirement by first class mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers must perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. Recall VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this recall only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations DaimlerChrysler Corporation A. Inspect the Right Steering Knuckle Date Code 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8063 2. Look on the inboard side of the right steering knuckle. Read the cavity number to right of the letter "J" (Figure 1). > If the mold cavity number is NOT # 63, no further action is needed. Return the vehicle to the customer. > If the mold cavity number IS # 63, read the 15 digit date code (Figure 1). If the first 5 digits of the date code is either 06199XX_XXXXXXXX or 06200XX_XXXXXXXX, continue to Section B Replace the Right Steering Knuckle. If the first five digits of the date code are NOT 06199... or 06200..., return the vehicle to the customer. B. Replace the Right Steering Knuckle 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper assembly and adaptor from the steering knuckle. Suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor away from the work area. CAUTION: Do not suspend the brake caliper assembly and adaptor by the brake hose. 3. Mark the brake rotor and the corresponding hub wheel stud. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8064 4. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the brake rotor and ABS wheel speed sensor (Figure 2). 5. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer from the knuckle. 6. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: remove the front half shaft hub nut. 7. Remove the tie-rod end nut and separate the tie-rod from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod seal when using essential tool # 8677. 8. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 9. Loosen the lower ball joint nut and leave the nut on the ball joint only finger tight. 10. Separate the lower ball joint from the knuckle using essential tool # 8677. CAUTION: Do not damage the ball joint seal when using essential tool # 8677. 11. Remove the knuckle from the vehicle. 12. Transfer the hub/bearing and splash shield from the old steering knuckle to the new steering knuckle and tighten the three bolts to 120 ft. lbs. (163 N.m). 13. Discard the old steering knuckle. 14. Using mineral spirits, clean and dry the ball joint and tie rod end stud tapers. 15. FOR 4 X 4 EQUIPPED VEHICLES: Position the half-shaft into the new steering knuckle. 16. Install the upper and lower ball joint tapers to the steering knuckle and hand start the nuts. 17. Tighten the upper ball joint nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 18. Tighten the lower ball joint nut to 70 ft. lbs. (95 N.m). 19. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 55 ft. lbs. (75 N.m). 20. For 4 x 4 equipped vehicles: Install the half shaft nut and tighten to 185 ft. lbs. (251 N.m) 21. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Attach the ABS wheel speed sensor wire retainer to the knuckle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > F48 > Nov > 06 > Recall - Right Steering Knuckle Inspection/Replacement > Page 8065 22. FOR VEHICLES WITH ABS: Install the ABS wheel speed sensor into the hub and tighten the bolt to 190 in. lbs. (21 N.m). 23. Install the brake rotor aligning the brake rotor to the hub wheel stud marks made in Step 3. 24. Install the brake caliper assembly and adaptor to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts to 130 ft. lbs. (176 N.m). 25. Install the wheel and tire assembly. Tighten the wheel lug nuts to 135 ft. lbs. (183 N.m). 26. Apply the service brakes several times to seat the brake caliper pistons. 27. Transfer the vehicle onto an alignment rack and adjust the toe-in to 0.10° +/- 0.05°. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Steering Knuckle: > NHTSA06V386000 > Oct > 06 > Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect Front Steering Knuckle: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V386000: R/H Front Steering Knuckle Defect MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Chrysler/Aspen 2007 Dodge/Durango 2007 MANUFACTURER: DaimlerChrysler Corporation NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V386000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: October 03, 2006 COMPONENT: Steering POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 6644 SUMMARY: On certain vehicles, the right front steering knuckle may have been improperly manufactured and could break. CONSEQUENCE: This may cause a loss of steering control and result in a crash without warning. REMEDY: Dealers will inspect and replace the right steering knuckle. The recall is expected to begin during October 2006. Owners may contact DaimlerChrysler at 1-800-853-1403. NOTES: DaimlerChrysler recall No. F48. Customers can also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The knuckle is a single casting with legs machined for the upper and lower ball joints. The knuckle also has machined mounting locations for the front brake calipers and hub bearing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8072 Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The steering knuckle pivot between the upper and lower ball joint. Steering linkage attached to the knuckle allows the vehicle to be steered. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, rotor, shield and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 4. Remove the front half shaft nut 4X4 only. 5. Remove the tie rod end nut. Separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle with puller 8677 (1). CAUTION: When installing puller 8677 to separate the ball joint, be careful not to damage the ball joint seal. 6. Remove the upper ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) with Remover 8677 (2). 7. Install an hydraulic jack to support the lower control arm. 8. Remove the lower ball joint nut. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle (1) with Remover 8677 (2) and remove the knuckle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8075 9. Remove the hub/bearing bolts (1) from the knuckle. 10. Remove the hub/bearing (4) from the steering knuckle (1). 11. Remove the steering knuckle (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8076 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The ball joint stud tapers must be CLEAN and DRY before installing the knuckle. Clean the stud tapers with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease. 1. Install the hub/bearing to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts (1) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the knuckle (1) onto the upper and lower ball joints. 3. Install the upper ball joint nut. Tighten the nut to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the lower ball joint nut (3). Tighten the nut to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove the hydraulic jack from the lower suspension arm (2). 6. Install the tie rod end and tighten the nut to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the front halfshaft (2) into the hub/bearing 4X4 only. 8. Install the the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 9. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped and brake shield, rotor and caliper. 10. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8077 12. Perform a wheel alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Lateral Stabilizer Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bell Crank Lateral Stabilizer Rod: Service and Repair Bell Crank Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the watts link nuts (3) at the bell crank (5). 3. Remove both watts links (1) from the bell crank (5). 4. Remove the bell crank bolt (4) from the differential cover and remove the bell crank (5). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the bell crank (5) and bolt (4) to the differential cover and tighten 251 Nm (185 ft.lbs). 2. Install the watts links (1) and nuts (3) to the bell crank (5) and tighten 108 Nm (80 ft.lbs). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Lateral Stabilizer Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bell Crank > Page 8082 Lateral Stabilizer Rod: Service and Repair Watts Link Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the upper nut (2) and bolt (2) to the watts link at the frame. 3. Remove the lower nut (3) to the watts link at the bell crank (5) and remove the watts link. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the watts link in position at the bell crank. 2. Install the watts links nuts (3) to the bell crank (5) and tighten 108 Nm (80 ft.lbs). 3. Install the watts link nut and bolt (2) at the frame and tighten 169 Nm (125 ft.lbs). 4. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the lower nut (9). 3. Remove the upper nut, retainers and grommets from the stabilizer bar. 4. Remove the stabilizer link (7) from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the stabilizer link (7) to the vehicle. 2. Install the retainers, grommets and upper nut to the stabilizer bar (6) and Tighten to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the lower nut and Tighten to 169 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8088 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the rear tire. 3. Support the rear axle with a jack. 4. Remove the fuel tank skid plate. This step must be done for replacement of the left side stabilizer link. 5. Remove the rear fuel tank strap bolt and let the strap (4) hang. This step must be done for replacement of the left side stabilizer link. 6. Push the fuel tank (2) over towards the drive shaft (3) and install a block of wood (5) between the frame (6) and the fuel tank (2) to allow for clearance of the upper stabilizer link bolt (1). This step must be done for replacement of the left side stabilizer link. 7. Remove the upper link nut (2) and bolt (3) at the frame. 8. Remove the lower link nut (4) at the stabilizer bar (5). 9. Remove stabilizer link (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 8089 1. Install the upper bolt (1) and nut (1) for the stabilizer link to the frame and tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 2. Remove the block of wood (5) between the frame (6) and fuel tank (2). If replacement of left stabilizer link was performed. 3. Install the rear fuel tank strap (4). If replacement of left stabilizer link was performed. 4. Install the fuel tank skid plate. If replacement of left stabilizer link was performed. 5. Install the stabilizer link (3) to the stabilizer bar (4). 6. Install the nut (5) and tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 7. Remove the jack and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Support the axle with a suitable holding fixture. 3. Remove the lower shock bolt. 4. Remove the bell crank bolt (4) to the rear axle. 5. Lower the jack to remove the spring and isolator from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8094 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: All torques should be made with the full vehicle weight on the ground being supported by the tires. 1. Position spring (3) to the vehicle on top of the isolator (2). 2. Align the springs (3) to the spring pockets. 3. Raise the rear axle into place. 4. Install the bell crank bolt (4) to the rear axle. Tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the lower shock bolts to the rear axle. Tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the holding fixture for the rear axle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Description and Operation Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Description and Operation DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - SHOCK A knocking or rattling noise from a shock absorber may be caused by movement between mounting bushings and metal brackets or attaching components. These noises can usually be stopped by tightening the attaching nuts. If the noise persists, inspect for damaged and worn bushings, and attaching components. Repair as necessary if any of these conditions exist. A squeaking noise from the shock absorber may be caused by the hydraulic valving and may be intermittent. This condition is not repairable and the shock absorber must be replaced. The shock absorbers are not refillable or adjustable. If a malfunction occurs, the shock absorber must be replaced. To test a shock absorber, hold it in an upright position and force the piston in and out of the cylinder four or five times. The action throughout each stroke should be smooth and even. The shock absorber bushings do not require any type of lubrication. Do not attempt to stop bushing noise by lubricating them. Grease and mineral oil-base lubricants will deteriorate the bushing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Strut / Shock Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Support the lower control arm outboard end. 4. Remove the upper shock bolt (11) and nut (3). 5. Remove the stabilizer link (7) lower nut and then separate the stabilizer link from the lower control arm to gain access to the lower shock bolt (2). 6. Remove the lower shock bolt (2). 7. Remove the shock (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the upper part of the shock (1) into the frame bracket. 2. Install the nut (3) and bolt (11). Tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the lower part of the shock (1) into the lower control arm and Tighten the bolt (2) to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the stabilizer link (7) lower nut to the lower control arm. 5. Remove the support from the lower control arm outboard end. 6. Install the tire and wheel assembly. 7. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 8100 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Shock Absorber Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and support the axle. 2. Lower the spare tire This step must be done if replacing the left side shock. 3. Remove the upper shock bolt and flag nut. 4. Remove the lower shock bolt and nut. 5. Remove the rear shock absorber from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the shock absorber in the brackets. 2. Install the bolts through the brackets and the shock. Install the flag nut on the top bolt and nut on lower bolt. 3. Tighten the upper and lower bolt/nuts Tighten to 102 N.m (75 ft. lbs.) 4. Raise the spare tire back in place if lowered for the left shock. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. NOTE: Rocking motion may be required while pulling the jounce bumper from the seating bracket 2. Twist and pull out the jounce bumper to remove the jounce bumper from the seating bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8105 Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the jounce bumper and twist to seat in the bracket. 2. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torsion Bar: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The front of the bar connects to the back side of the lower suspension arm. The rear end of the bar is mounted in a anchor that rests in the frame crossmember. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8110 Torsion Bar: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The torsion bars are used to control ride height and ride quality. The vehicle height is adjusted through an anchor adjustment bolt that increases or decreases the wind up of the torsion bar. Increasing or decreasing the bar angle changes the wind up of the suspension arms. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bushings Torsion Bar: Service and Repair Bushings Removal TORSION BAR CROSSMEMBER BUSHING 1. Remove the torsion bar cross member. 2. Secure the cross member in a vise. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 3. Install special tools C4212-F (Press)(1), 9335-2 (Receiver)(4), 9335-3 (Driver)(2) and 9335-4 (Spacer)(3) as shown in the graphic. 4. Press out the bushing. Installation TORSION BAR CROSS MEMBER BUSHING NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the new bushing (3) into the cross member using special tools C4212-F (Press)(1), 9335-3(Driver)(2), 9335-4 (Spacer)(4) and 9335-1 (Depth setting cup)(5) making sure to properly orient the bushing. 2. Remove the cross member from the vise. 3. Install the torsion bar cross member. 4. Reset the vehicle ride height. 5. Perform a wheel alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bushings > Page 8113 Torsion Bar: Service and Repair Bar-Torsion Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: The left and right side torsion bars are NOT interchangeable. The bars are identified and stamped R or L, for right or left. The bars do not have a front or rear end and can be installed with either end facing forward. 1. Raise and support the vehicle with the front suspension hanging. 2. Remove the transfer case skid plate. NOTE: Count and record the number of turns for installation reference. 3. Mark the adjustment bolt setting. 4. Install loader/unloader tool 8686 (1) to the anchor arm (2) and the cross member (3). 5. Increase the tension on the anchor arm loader/unloader tool 8686 (1) until the load is removed from the adjustment bolt and the adjuster nut. 6. Turn the adjustment bolt counterclockwise to remove the bolt and the adjuster nut. 7. Remove the loader/unloader tool 8686 (1), allowing the torsion bar to unload. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The left and right side torsion bars are NOT interchangeable. The bars are identified and stamped R or L, for right or left. The bars do not have a front or rear end and can be installed with either end facing forward. 1. Insert torsion bar ends into anchor and suspension arm. 2. Position the anchor (2) in the crossmember frame (3). 3. Install loader/unloader tool 8686 (1) to the anchor (2) and the crossmember (3). 4. Increase the tension on the anchor in order to load the torsion bar. 5. Install the adjustment bolt and the adjuster nut. 6. Turn adjustment bolt clockwise the recorded amount of turns. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Torsion Bar > Component Information > Service and Repair > Bushings > Page 8114 7. Remove the loader/unloader tool 8686 (1) from the torsion bar crossmember (3). 8. Install the transfer case skid plate. 9. Lower vehicle and adjust the front suspension height. 10. Perform a wheel alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle using puller 8677 (1). 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) using puller 8677 (2). 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the half shaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8120 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts (5) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (4) if equipped. 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Half Shaft Nut Tighten to ..................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 251Nm (185 Ft.Lbs) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description - Premium System DESCRIPTION - PREMIUM SYSTEM A transponder is located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System > Page 8131 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation - Premium System OPERATION - PREMIUM SYSTEM Transponders located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle provide the Wireless Control Module (WCM) commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Removal Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover (2). 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8134 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8135 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Installation Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Relays and Modules - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8136 1. Install the transponder (4) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4) 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the "WCM/Wireless Control Module" menu item as appropriate.Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a black sensor body, with (an oval insignia) (1) and a grey valve cap (2). The Export TPM system operates on a 433 MHz radio frequency. The 433 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a gray sensor body (with an oval insignia) and a black valve cap (2). CAUTION: Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct sensor is being used. NOTE: Sensors may be identified by valve stem cap color. From the factory, 315 MHz sensors have a gray valve stem cap while 433 MHz sensors have a black valve stem cap. Otherwise, once mounted inside a tire and wheel assembly you are not able to visually tell the difference between a 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensor. The tire must be dismounted allowing visual inspection of the sensor body. NOTE: If aftermarket wheels are installed and do not contain tire pressure sensors, the system will not function properly and the driver will be continuously notified of a system malfunction. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8143 The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: NOTE: Any time a sensor is installed on a wheel, a new Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) must be installed to ensure proper sealing. - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8144 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the wireless control module (WCM), commonly referred to as the sentry key remote entry module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor's operating mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: - Sleep Mode - This is the operating mode of a new TPM sensor. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 1 PSI. Driving the vehicle continuously at this speed for more then 4 minutes, and then stopping the vehicle will change the sensor state into Park Mode. If the vehicle is equipped with a full size matching spare tire and the spare tire sensor has been replaced, The sensor must be changed to Park Mode to conserve battery life. Either use a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or swap the spare tire with a road tire. - Park Mode - This is the correct operating mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 1 PSI delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure - 0ff / 30 Block - If the vehicle has been stopped for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's operating mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from Park Mode to 30 Block Mode once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After about 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensor's mode will change to Drive Mode - Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph, the sensor will revert back to Park Mode. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h), unless the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced, The vehicle must be stationary for more than 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8145 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 14 to 41 kPa (2 to 6 psi) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. Check the tire pressure yellow telltale in the instrument cluster. If the yellow telltale is illuminating continuously, proceed as listed below. If the yellow telltale is flashing on/off for 60 seconds, once every ten minutes, there is a system fault detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire, allow approximately two minutes for the message or yellow telltale to go out. If air pressure in any tire is low, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for a leak around the tire assembly and sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8148 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacing the spare tire pressure sensor, take the time now to write down the tire pressure sensor ID. NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8149 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Rotating Wheel Tire Changers - Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8150 Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. SPARE TIRE SENSOR REPLACEMENT NOTE: When the spare tire sensor is replaced on vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and a full-sized matching spare tire and wheel assembly, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the (WCM) Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is available, put the new spare tire pressure sensor into "Park" mode. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is not available, rotate the spare tire with one of the road tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description - Premium System DESCRIPTION - PREMIUM SYSTEM A transponder is located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System > Page 8156 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation - Premium System OPERATION - PREMIUM SYSTEM Transponders located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle provide the Wireless Control Module (WCM) commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Removal Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover (2). 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8159 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8160 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Installation Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8161 1. Install the transponder (4) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4) 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the "WCM/Wireless Control Module" menu item as appropriate.Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a black sensor body, with (an oval insignia) (1) and a grey valve cap (2). The Export TPM system operates on a 433 MHz radio frequency. The 433 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a gray sensor body (with an oval insignia) and a black valve cap (2). CAUTION: Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct sensor is being used. NOTE: Sensors may be identified by valve stem cap color. From the factory, 315 MHz sensors have a gray valve stem cap while 433 MHz sensors have a black valve stem cap. Otherwise, once mounted inside a tire and wheel assembly you are not able to visually tell the difference between a 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensor. The tire must be dismounted allowing visual inspection of the sensor body. NOTE: If aftermarket wheels are installed and do not contain tire pressure sensors, the system will not function properly and the driver will be continuously notified of a system malfunction. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8167 The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: NOTE: Any time a sensor is installed on a wheel, a new Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) must be installed to ensure proper sealing. - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8168 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the wireless control module (WCM), commonly referred to as the sentry key remote entry module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor's operating mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: - Sleep Mode - This is the operating mode of a new TPM sensor. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 1 PSI. Driving the vehicle continuously at this speed for more then 4 minutes, and then stopping the vehicle will change the sensor state into Park Mode. If the vehicle is equipped with a full size matching spare tire and the spare tire sensor has been replaced, The sensor must be changed to Park Mode to conserve battery life. Either use a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or swap the spare tire with a road tire. - Park Mode - This is the correct operating mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 1 PSI delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure - 0ff / 30 Block - If the vehicle has been stopped for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's operating mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from Park Mode to 30 Block Mode once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After about 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensor's mode will change to Drive Mode - Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph, the sensor will revert back to Park Mode. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h), unless the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced, The vehicle must be stationary for more than 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8169 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 14 to 41 kPa (2 to 6 psi) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. Check the tire pressure yellow telltale in the instrument cluster. If the yellow telltale is illuminating continuously, proceed as listed below. If the yellow telltale is flashing on/off for 60 seconds, once every ten minutes, there is a system fault detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire, allow approximately two minutes for the message or yellow telltale to go out. If air pressure in any tire is low, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for a leak around the tire assembly and sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8172 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacing the spare tire pressure sensor, take the time now to write down the tire pressure sensor ID. NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8173 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Rotating Wheel Tire Changers - Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8174 Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. SPARE TIRE SENSOR REPLACEMENT NOTE: When the spare tire sensor is replaced on vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and a full-sized matching spare tire and wheel assembly, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the (WCM) Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is available, put the new spare tire pressure sensor into "Park" mode. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is not available, rotate the spare tire with one of the road tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires Tires: Description and Operation Tires Tires TIRES Tires are designed and engineered for each specific vehicle. They provide the best overall performance for normal operation. The ride and handling characteristics match the vehicle's requirements. With proper care they will give excellent reliability, traction, skid resistance, and tread life. Driving habits have more effect on tire life than any other factor. Careful drivers will obtain in most cases, much greater mileage than severe use or careless drivers. A few of the driving habits which will shorten the life of any tire are: - Rapid acceleration - Severe brake applications - High speed driving - Excessive speeds on turns - Striking curbs and other obstacles Radial-ply tires are more prone to irregular tread wear. It is important to follow the tire rotation interval. This will help to achieve a greater tread life. TIRE IDENTIFICATION Tire type, size, aspect ratio and speed rating are encoded in the letters and numbers imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Refer to the chart to decipher the tire identification code. Performance tires have a speed rating letter after the aspect ratio number. The speed rating is not always printed on the tire sidewall. These ratings are: - Q up to 100 mph - S up to 112 mph - T up to 118 mph - U up to 124 mph - H up to 130 mph - V up to 149 mph - W (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) - Z more than 149 mph (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) An All Season type tire will have either M + S, M & S or M-S (indicating mud and snow traction) imprinted on the side wall. TIRE CHAINS Tire snow chains may be used on certain models. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information. Radial-Ply Tires RADIAL-PLY TIRES Radial-ply tires improve handling, tread life and ride quality, and decrease rolling resistance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires > Page 8179 Radial-ply tires must always be used in sets of four. Under no circumstances should they be used on the front only. They may be mixed with temporary spare tires when necessary. A maximum speed of 80 KPH (50 MPH) is recommended while a temporary spare is in use. Radial-ply tires have the same load-carrying capacity as other types of tires of the same size. They also use the same recommended inflation pressures. The use of oversized tires, either in the front or rear of the vehicle, can cause vehicle drive train failure. This could also cause inaccurate wheel speed signals when the vehicle is equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. The use of tires from different manufactures on the same vehicle is NOT recommended. The proper tire pressure should be maintained on all four tires. Tire Inflation Pressures TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES WARNING: Over or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and tread wear. This may cause the tire to fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Under inflation will cause rapid shoulder wear (1), tire flexing, and possible tire failure. Over inflation will cause rapid center wear (1) reduction in the tire's ability to cushion shocks. Improper inflation can cause: - Uneven wear patterns Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires > Page 8180 - Reduced tread life - Reduced fuel economy - Unsatisfactory ride - Vehicle drift For proper tire pressure specification refer to the vehicles Owners Manual. Tire Pressure For High Speed TIRE PRESSURE FOR HIGH SPEED Refer to the Vehicles Owners Manual package. Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KPH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Refer to Owner's Manual for complete details. Full Size, Spare Wheel With Matching Tire FULL SIZE, SPARE WHEEL WITH MATCHING TIRE The spare is a full usage wheel with a matching tire. It can be used within the (posted legal) speed limits or distance limitations as of the rest of the vehicles four tires. Refer to Owner's Manual for complete details. Replacement Tires REPLACEMENT TIRES The original equipment tires provide a proper balance of many characteristics such as: - Ride - Noise - Handling - Durability - Tread life - Traction - Rolling resistance - Speed capability It is recommended that tires equivalent to the original equipment tires be used when replacement is needed. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. The use of oversize tires may cause interference with vehicle components. Under extremes of suspension and steering travel, interference with vehicle components may cause tire damage. WARNING: Failure to equip the vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Tires > Page 8181 Tires: Description and Operation Pressure Gauges PRESSURE GAUGES A quality air pressure gauge is recommended to check tire pressure. After checking the air pressure, replace valve cap finger tight. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire / Vehicle Lead TIRE/VEHICLE LEAD Use the following Vehicle Lead Diagnosis And Correction Chart to diagnose and correct a vehicle lead or drift problem. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead > Page 8184 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Noise Or Vibration TIRE NOISE OR VIBRATION Radial-ply tires are sensitive to force impulses caused by improper mounting, vibration, wheel defects, or possibly tire imbalance. To find out if tires are causing the noise or vibration, drive the vehicle over a smooth road at varying speeds. Note the noise level during acceleration and deceleration. The engine, differential and exhaust noises will change as speed varies, while the tire noise will usually remain constant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead > Page 8185 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Tread wear indicators (3) are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. When tread depth is 1.6 mm (1/16 in.), the tread wear indicators (3) will appear as a 13 mm (1/2 in.) band. Tire replacement is necessary when indicators appear in two or more grooves or if localized balding occurs. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire / Vehicle Lead > Page 8186 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Wear Patterns TIRE WEAR PATTERNS Under inflation will cause wear on the shoulders of tire. Over inflation will cause wear at the center of tire. Excessive camber causes the tire to run at an angle to the road. One side of tread is then worn more than the other. Excessive toe-in or toe-out causes wear on the tread edges and a feathered effect across the tread. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures TIRES Remove the protective coating on the tires before delivery of a vehicle. This coating may cause deterioration of the tires. To remove the protective coating, apply warm water and let it soak for a few minutes. Afterwards, scrub the coating away with a soft bristle brush. Steam cleaning may also be used to remove the coating. NOTE: DO NOT use gasoline, mineral oil, oil-based solvent or a wire brush for cleaning. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8189 Tires: Removal and Replacement TIRE REPAIR AREA For proper repairing, a radial tire must be removed from the wheel. Repairs should only be made if the defect, or puncture, is in the tread area (1). The tire should be replaced if the puncture is located in the sidewall. Deflate tire completely before removing the tire from the wheel. Use lubrication such as a mild soap solution when dismounting or mounting tire. Use tools free of burrs or sharp edges which could damage the tire or wheel rim. Before mounting tire on wheel, make sure all rust is removed from the rim bead and repaint if necessary. Install wheel on vehicle, and tighten to proper torque specification. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information NUMBER: 22-002-09 GROUP: Wheels/Tires DATE: July 29, 2009 SUBJECT: Chrome Clad Wheel Adapters For Proper Balancing OVERVIEW: This bulletin describes the use of proper wheel adapters when mounting Chrome Clad wheels to wheel balancing equipment. MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2007 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2004 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2009-2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2008 - 2010 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2010 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2007-2010 (KA) Nitro 2002-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005-2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2001 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information > Page 8194 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander NOTE: This information applies to any model equipped with Chrome Clad Wheels. DISCUSSION: Models equipped with Chrome Clad wheels require specific piloting on balance equipment to properly center the wheel and prevent damage to the chrome clad surface. The chrome cladding is not removable or replaceable and has cladding tabs that extend into the wheel bore. Traditional high-taper cones will come into contact with the cladding tabs rather than properly seat on the hub bore chamfer. Many modern aluminum wheel designs cannot be mounted with traditional cones. Direct-Fit Collets should be used to properly mount clad wheels on balance equipment (Fig 1). SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: NOTE: This kit includes the adapters for all Dodge, Chrysler & Jeep models with clad wheels. Individual adapters for specific wheel sizes can be ordered separately. To order a kit or individual adapters, contact Pentastar Service Equipment @ 1-800-223-5623. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8195 Wheels: Description and Operation WHEEL DESIGN The rim size is on the vehicle safety certification label located on the drivers door shut face. Original equipment wheels/rims are designed for operation up to the specified maximum vehicle capacity. All models use stamped steel, cast aluminum or forged aluminum wheels. Every wheel has raised sections between the rim flanges (1) and rim drop well (3) called safety humps. Initial inflation of the tire forces the bead over these raised sections. In case of rapid loss of air pressure, the raised sections help hold the tire on the wheel. The wheel studs and nuts are designed for specific applications. All aluminum and some steel wheels have wheel stud nuts with an enlarged nose. This enlarged nose is necessary to ensure proper retention of the wheels. Do not use replacement studs or nuts with a different design or lesser quality. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8196 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL INSPECTION Inspect wheels for: - Excessive runout - Dents, cracks or irregular bends - Damaged wheel stud (lug) holes - Air Leaks NOTE: Do not attempt to repair a wheel by hammering, heating or welding. If a wheel is damaged, an original equipment replacement wheel should be used. When obtaining replacement wheels, they must be equivalent in load carrying capacity. The diameter, width, offset, pilot hole and bolt circle of the wheel should be the same as the original wheel. WARNING: Failure to use equivalent replacement wheels may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. WARNING: Replacement with used wheels is not recommended. The service history of the wheel may have included severe treatment or very high mileage. The rim could fail without warning. WARNING: DaimlerChrysler Corporation does not recommend that customers use "reconditioned" wheels (wheels that have been damaged and repaired) because they can result in a sudden catastrophic wheel failure which could cause loss of control and result in injury or death. For clarification: - Cosmetic refinishing for the purpose of repairing a superficial flaw is an acceptable procedure providing it is limited to paint or clear coat only, the wheel is not modified in any way, and there is no exposure to paint curing heat over 200 degrees Fahrenheit. - Damaged wheels are those which have been bent, broken, cracked or sustained some other physical damage which may have compromised the wheel structure. - Repaired indicates that the wheel has been modified through bending, welding, heating, straightening, or material removal to rectify damage. - Re-plating of chrome plated wheels is not an acceptable procedure nor is chrome plating of original equipment painted or polished wheels, as this may alter mechanical properties and affect fatigue life. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Remove the tie rod end nut and separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle using puller 8677 (1). 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the upper ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) using puller 8677 (2). 8. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the half shaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 9. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (1) from the steering knuckle. 10. Slide the hub/bearing out of the steering knuckle. 11. Remove the brake dust shield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8202 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (2). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (3) and tighten the bolts (5) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (4) if equipped. 5. Install the upper ball joint nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the tie rod end nut to the steering knuckle and tighten to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 8. Install the wheel and tire assembly. 9. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications Half Shaft Nut Tighten to ..................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 251Nm (185 Ft.Lbs) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHROME PLATED LUG NUTS WITH CHROME PLATED WHEELS. Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Wheel Lug Nut All wheel nuts should then be tightened just snug. Gradually tighten them in sequence to the proper torque specification. Tighten to ...................................................................... ...................................................................................................... 183 ± 10 Nm (135 ± 10 Ft. lbs.) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, caliper adapter and rotor. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the hub. 5. Press the stud from the hub using remover C-4150A (1). 6. Remove the stud (2) from the hub (1) through the backing plate access hole (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8212 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new stud (2) into the hub flange (1). 2. Install three proper sized washers onto the stud, then install lug nut with the flat side of the nut against the washers. 3. Tighten the lug nut until the stud is pulled into the hub flange. Verify that the stud is properly seated into the flange. 4. Remove the lug nut and washers. 5. Install the brake rotor, caliper adapter, and caliper. 6. Install the wheel speed sensor. 7. Install the wheel and tire assembly, use new lug nut on the stud or studs that were replaced. 8. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Blend Door-Front Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/LB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8219 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8220 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Blend Door-Rear Component ID: 3 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 2 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20LB/YL Component Location - 48 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8221 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8222 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Defrost-Front Component ID: 4 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 3 C808 20DB/DG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20DB/OR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8223 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8224 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Panel-Front Component ID: 5 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C807 20DB/LG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8225 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8226 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Blend Door-Front Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/LB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8227 Actuator-Blend Door-Rear Component ID: 3 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8228 1 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 2 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20LB/YL Component Location - 48 Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Defrost-Front Component ID: 4 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8229 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 3 C808 20DB/DG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20DB/OR Component Location - 27 Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Panel-Front Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8230 Component ID: 5 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C807 20DB/LG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8231 Actuator-Mode Door-Rear Component ID: 6 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-REAR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8232 1 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 2 REAR MODE DOOR DRIVER C53 20LB Component Location - 48 Actuator-Recirculation Door Component ID: 7 Component : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8233 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER C32 20DB/TN Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Blend Door-Front Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/LB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8236 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8237 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Blend Door-Rear Component ID: 3 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 2 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20LB/YL Component Location - 48 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8238 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8239 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Defrost-Front Component ID: 4 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 3 C808 20DB/DG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20DB/OR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8240 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8241 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Panel-Front Component ID: 5 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C807 20DB/LG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8242 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8243 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Blend Door-Front Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/LB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8244 Actuator-Blend Door-Rear Component ID: 3 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8245 1 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 2 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20LB/YL Component Location - 48 Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Defrost-Front Component ID: 4 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8246 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 3 C808 20DB/DG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20DB/OR Component Location - 27 Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Panel-Front Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8247 Component ID: 5 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL-FRONT Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C807 20DB/LG Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8248 Actuator-Mode Door-Rear Component ID: 6 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-REAR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8249 1 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 2 REAR MODE DOOR DRIVER C53 20LB Component Location - 48 Actuator-Recirculation Door Component ID: 7 Component : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door-Front > Page 8250 Pin Description Circuit 1 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 2 RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER C32 20DB/TN Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Controls - Front Description DESCRIPTION Models with the single zone heating-A/C system have a single blend-air door, which is controlled by a single blend door actuator (1). Models with the dual zone system have two blend-air doors, which are controlled by two blend door actuators. The blend door actuators are reversible, 12-volt direct current (DC), servo motors. The blend door actuator for the single zone heating-A/C system is located on top of the HVAC housing, behind the dash panel. For the dual zone heating-A/C system, the same blend door actuator used for the single zone system becomes the driver side blend door actuator, which is mechanically connected to only the driver side blend-air door. A second separate blend door actuator located on the bottom of the HVAC housing is mechanically connected to the passenger side blend-air door. The blend door actuators are interchangeable with the actuators for both mode-air doors and the recirculation-air door. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle. Three integral mounting tabs allow the actuator to be secured to the HVAC housing. Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines that connects it to a blend-air door. The blend door actuators do not require mechanical indexing to the blend-air doors, as they are electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION The blend door actuators are connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The blend door actuator(s) can move the blend-air door(s) in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the blend-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the blend-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the blend-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the blend door actuator(s) and the blend-air door(s). The A/C-heater control learns the blend-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the blend door actuator circuits. The blend door actuators are diagnosed using a scan tool. The blend door actuators cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8253 The two mode door actuators (floor/defrost and panel door) (1) are reversible, 12-volt direct current (DC), servo motors. Both mode door actuators are located near the drivers side end of the HVAC housing. The mode door actuators are mechanically connected to the floor/defrost and the panel-air door. Both mode door actuators are interchangeable with each other and with the actuators for the blend-air door and the recirculation-air door. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle. Three integral mounting tabs allow the actuator to be secured to the top of the HVAC housing. Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines that connects it to the mode-air doors. The mode door actuators do not require mechanical indexing to the mode-air doors, as they are electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION The floor/defrost and panel (mode) door actuators are connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The mode door actuators can move the floor/defrost and the panel-air doors in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the mode-air door(s) will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the mode-air door(s) moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the mode-air door(s) stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the floor/defrost and panel door actuators and the mode-air doors. The A/C-heater control learns the mode-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the mode door actuator circuits. The mode door actuators are diagnosed using a scan tool. The mode door actuators cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Description DESCRIPTION The recirculation door actuator (1) is a reversible, 12 volt direct current (DC), servo motor. The recirculation door actuator is located on the left side of Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8254 the HVAC air inlet housing. The recirculation door actuator is interchangeable with the actuators for the blend-air door and the mode-air doors. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle. Three integral mounting tabs allow the actuator to be secured to the air inlet housing. Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines that connects it to the recirculation-air door. The recirculation door actuator does not require mechanical indexing to the recirculation-air door, as it is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION The recirculation door actuator is connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The recirculation door actuator can move the recirculation-air door in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the recirculation-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the recirculation-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the recirculation-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the recirculation door actuator and the recirculation-air door. The A/C-heater control learns the recirculation-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the recirculation door actuator circuits. The recirculation door actuator is diagnosed using a scan tool. The recirculation door actuator cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8255 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Controls - Rear Description DESCRIPTION The rear blend door actuator (1) is a reversible, 12 volt direct current (DC), servo motor. The rear blend door actuator is located on the side of the rear HVAC housing. The rear blend door actuator is interchangeable with the actuator for the mode-air door. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle. Three integral mounting tabs allow the actuator to be secured to the rear HVAC housing. Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines that connects it to the rear blend-air door. The rear blend door actuator does require mechanical indexing to the rear blend-air door, as it is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION The rear blend door actuator is connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the rear HVAC wire harness. The rear blend door actuator can move the rear blend-air door in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the rear blend-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the rear blend-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the rear blend-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the rear blend door actuator and the rear blend-air door. The A/C-heater control learns the rear blend-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the rear blend door actuator circuit. The rear blend door actuator is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear blend door actuator cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8256 The rear mode door actuator (1) is a reversible, 12-volt direct current (DC), servo motor. The rear mode door actuator is located near the front end of the rear HVAC housing. The rear mode door actuator is mechanically connected to the rear mode-air door. The rear mode door actuator is interchangeable with the actuator for the rear blend-air door. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle. Three integral mounting tabs allow the actuator to be secured to the side of the rear HVAC housing. The rear mode door actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines that connects it to the mode-air door. The rear mode door actuator does not require mechanical indexing to the mode-air door, as it is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. Operation OPERATION The rear mode door actuator is connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the rear HVAC wire harness. The rear mode door actuator can move the rear model-air door in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the rear mode-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the rear mode-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the rear mode-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the rear mode door actuator and the rear mode-air door. The A/C-heater control learns the rear mode-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the rear mode door actuator circuit. The rear mode door actuators are diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear mode door actuator cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Controls - Front Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The single zone heating-A/C system is equipped with a single blend door actuator. The dual zone system has two blend door actuators, one for the driver side blend-air door and one for the passenger side blend-air door. SINGLE ZONE/DUAL ZONE DRIVER SIDE 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel assembly. 3. Remove the three screws (4) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the blend door actuator from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the actuator. DUAL ZONE PASSENGER SIDE 5. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator and cover (2) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3) below the glove box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8259 7. Remove the blend door actuator and cover from the HVAC housing and disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the actuator. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The single zone heating-A/C system is equipped with a single blend door actuator. The dual zone system has two blend door actuators, one for the driver side blend-air door and one for the passenger side blend-air door. SINGLE ZONE/DUAL ZONE DRIVER SIDE 1. Position the blend door actuator (1) to the top of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the blend-air door linkage (4). 2. Install the three screws (4) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the blend door actuator. 4. Install the instrument panel assembly. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. DUAL ZONE PASSENGER SIDE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8260 7. Position the blend door actuator (1) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the blend-air door linkage (4). 8. Install the three screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator and cover (2) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 9. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the blend door actuator. Make sure the wire harness is properly secured to the bottom of the HVAC housing. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8261 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the screws (5) that secure the panel door actuator (2) and the floor/defrost door actuator (3) located on the driver side end of the HVAC housing (4) as required. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the panel door actuator and the floor/defrost door actuator as required. 4. Remove the mode door actuator(s) from the HVAC housing. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the mode door actuator(s) (1) onto the driver side end of the HVAC housing as required. If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft with those in the mode-air door linkage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8262 2. Install the screws (5) that secure the panel door actuator (2) and the floor/defrost door actuator (3) to the HVAC housing (4) as required. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the mode door actuator(s) as required. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 5. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the HVAC assembly. 3. Remove the air inlet housing (1) from the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench. 4. Remove the screws (2) that secure the recirculation door actuator (3) to the HVAC air inlet housing. 5. Remove the recirculation door actuator from the HVAC air inlet housing. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8263 1. Position the recirculation door actuator (1) to the HVAC air inlet housing. If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft with those in the recirculation-air door linkage. 2. Install the screws (2) that secure the recirculation door actuator (3) to the HVAC air inlet housing (1). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the air inlet housing to the HVAC housing. 4. Install the HVAC housing. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8264 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Controls - Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove right rear quarter panel trim. 3. Remove the screws (4) that secure the rear blend door actuator (2) to the side of the rear HVAC housing (3). 4. Disconnect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the rear blend door actuator. 5. Remove the rear blend door actuator from the rear HVAC housing. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the rear blend door actuator (1) onto the side of the rear HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the rear actuator coupler (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8265 2. Install the screws (4) that secure the rear blend door actuator (2) to the rear HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the rear blend door actuator. 4. Install the right rear quarter panel trim. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 6. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove right rear quarter panel trim. 3. Disconnect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the rear mode door actuator (2) located on the side of the rear HVAC housing (3). 4. Remove the screws (4) that secure the rear mode door actuator to the rear HVAC housing. 5. Remove the rear mode door actuator from the rear HVAC housing. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8266 1. Position the rear mode door actuator (1) onto the side of the rear HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those in the actuator coupler (4). 2. Install the screws (4) that secure the rear mode door actuator (2) to the rear HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the rear mode door actuator. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 5. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Description and Operation > Distribution - Front Air Duct: Description and Operation Distribution - Front DESCRIPTION NOTE: Dodge model shown. Chrysler model similar. There are two side window demister air outlets (1). One located on each end of the instrument panel top pad. The airflow from the side window demister air outlets is directed by fixed vanes in the demister outlet grilles and cannot be adjusted. The side window demister air outlets are serviceable from the instrument panel top pad. There are six instrument panel air outlets (2). One air outlet is located near each outboard end of the instrument panel facing the rear of the vehicle, one air outlet is located on each side of the instrument panel center bezel, and two air outlets are located on the top of the instrument panel center bezel. Each of the instrument panel air outlets contain a grille with movable vanes that are used to direct or shut off the flow of the conditioned air leaving the instrument panel outlets. The instrument panel air outlets and grilles cannot be serviced separately. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Description and Operation > Distribution - Front > Page 8271 Air Duct: Description and Operation Distribution - Rear DESCRIPTION There are four rear ceiling air outlets (1) located in the headliner (2). One air outlet is located at each outboard side of the intermediate seat position facing the center of the vehicle, and one located in front of each rear seat position facing the rear of the vehicle. Each of the rear ceiling air outlets contain a grille with movable vanes (3) that are used to direct or shut off the flow of the conditioned air leaving the rear ceiling air outlets. The rear ceiling air outlets and grilles can each be serviced separately. There is one rear floor air outlet (1) located behind the right rear door area in the right quarter interior trim panel (2). The airflow from the rear floor air outlet is directed by fixed vanes in the right quarter interior trim panel and cannot be adjusted. The rear floor air outlet is not serviceable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front Air Duct: Service and Repair Distribution - Front Removal - Demister Outlets REMOVAL - DEMISTER OUTLETS NOTE: The instrument panel demister outlets are retained into the instrument panel top pad by a light snap fit. 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, gently pry the instrument panel demister outlet(s) (1) out of the instrument panel top pad (2) as required. Installation - Demister Outlets INSTALLATION - DEMISTER OUTLETS 1. Position the instrument panel demister outlet(s) (1) onto the instrument panel top pad (2). 2. Gently push the demister outlet(s) into the top pad until it snaps into place. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8274 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench. 2. Remove the defroster duct. 3. Remove the demister ducts. 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel support. 5. Disconnect the center distribution duct from the instrument panel duct (3) and remove the center duct. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel duct (3). 2. Install the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct to the instrument panel support. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the demister ducts. 4. Install the defroster duct. 5. Install the instrument panel. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8275 airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench. 2. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the defroster duct (2) to the top of the instrument panel (3). 3. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the defroster duct (2) to the instrument panel wire harness support (3). 4. Remove the defroster duct from the instrument panel (4). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8276 1. Position the defroster duct (2) into the instrument panel (4). 2. Install the two screws (1) that secure the defroster duct to the instrument panel wire harness support (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure the defroster duct (2) to the top of the instrument panel (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 4. Install the instrument panel. Removal REMOVAL FRONT FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8277 1. Remove the HVAC Housing. 2. Remove the six screws (1) that secure the front floor distribution duct (2) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 3. Remove the front floor distribution duct from the HVAC housing. INTERMEDIATE FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCTS 4. Remove the center floor console. 5. Remove the front seats. 6. Roll back the front floor carpet from under the instrument panel toward the rear of the vehicle. 7. Remove the two push pin fasteners (1) that secure the right intermediate floor distribution duct (2) and the left intermediate floor distribution duct (3) to the floor support (4). 8. Disconnect the left intermediate floor distribution duct from the front floor distribution duct (5). 9. If required, disconnect the right intermediate floor distribution duct from the left intermediate floor distribution duct. Installation INSTALLATION FRONT FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8278 1. Position the front floor distribution duct (2) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 2. Install the six screws (1) that secure the front floor distribution duct to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the HVAC housing. INTERMEDIATE FLOOR DISTRIBUTION DUCTS 4. If removed, connect the right intermediate floor distribution duct (2) to the left intermediate floor distribution duct (3). 5. Connect the left intermediate floor distribution duct to the front floor distribution duct (5). 6. Install the two push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the intermediate floor distribution ducts to the floor support (4). 7. Install the carpet onto the front floor panel and under the instrument panel. 8. Install the front seats. 9. Install the center floor console. Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8279 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench. 2. Remove the instrument panel top cover. 3. Remove the defroster duct (1). 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the instrument panel wire harness (4) to the instrument panel support (5). 5. Remove the demister ducts (2 and 6). 6. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel support. 7. Disconnect the center distribution duct from the instrument panel duct (3) and remove the center duct. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8280 8. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the driver side/center instrument panel duct (7) to the rear of the instrument panel support (2). 9. Remove the four screws (4) that secure the passenger instrument panel duct (3) to the instrument panel front cover (5). 10. Remove the two screws (6) that secure the driver side/center instrument panel duct to the instrument panel front cover. 11. Remove the instrument panel ducts from the instrument panel as an assembly. Tilt and rotate the ducts as necessary. 12. Separate the passenger side instrument panel duct from the driver side/center instrument panel duct. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the passenger side instrument panel duct (3) onto the driver/center instrument panel duct (7). Make sure the ducts are fully engaged to each other. 2. Install the instrument panel ducts onto the instrument panel as an assembly. Make sure the center duct outlets are fully engaged into the instrument panel front cover (5). 3. Install the two screws (6) that secure the driver side/center instrument panel duct to the instrument panel front cover. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 4. Install the four screws (4) that secure the passenger instrument panel duct to the instrument panel front cover. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Install the two screws (1) that secure the driver side/center instrument panel duct to the rear of the instrument panel support (2). Tighten the screws Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8281 to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 6. Connect the center distribution duct (2) to the instrument panel duct (3). 7. Install the two screws (1) that secure the center distribution duct to the instrument panel support. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 8. Install the demister ducts (2 and 6). 9. Install the two screws (3) that secure the instrument panel wire harness (4) to the instrument panel support (5). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 10. Install the defroster duct (1). 11. Install the instrument panel top cover. 12. Install the instrument panel. Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. DRIVER SIDE 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench. 2. Remove the instrument panel top cover. 3. Remove the defroster duct. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8282 4. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the driver side demister duct (2) to the back of the instrument panel. 5. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the instrument panel wire harness (3) to top of the instrument panel and carefully position the wire harness out of the way. 6. Remove the one screw (2) that secures the driver side demister duct (1) to the top of the instrument panel and remove the duct. Tilt and rotate the duct as necessary. PASSENGER SIDE INNER 7. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench. 8. Remove the defroster duct. 9. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the passenger side inner demister duct (1) to the back of the instrument panel. 10. Disconnect the passenger side inner demister duct from the passenger side outer demister duct (3) and remove the inner duct. Tilt and rotate the duct as necessary. PASSENGER SIDE OUTER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8283 11. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench. 12. Remove the instrument panel top cover. 13. Remove the defroster duct. 14. Remove the passenger side inner demister duct. 15. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the passenger side outer demister duct (1) to the top of the instrument panel. 16. Remove the passenger side outer demister duct from the instrument panel. Tilt and rotate the duct as necessary. Installation INSTALLATION DRIVER SIDE 1. Position the driver side demister duct (1) to the instrument panel. Tilt and rotate the duct as necessary. 2. Install the one screw (2) that secures the driver side demister duct to the top of the instrument panel. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8284 3. Install the two screws (1) that secure the driver side demister duct (2) to the back of the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 4. Reposition the instrument panel wire harness (3) to the instrument panel and install the two screws (4). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Install the defroster duct. 6. Install the instrument panel top cover. 7. Install the instrument panel. PASSENGER SIDE INNER 8. Position the passenger side inner demister duct (1) to the back of the instrument panel and connect it to the passenger side outer demister duct (3). Tilt and rotate the duct as necessary. 9. Install the two screws (2) that secure the passenger side inner demister duct to the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 10. Install the defroster duct. 11. Install the instrument panel. PASSENGER SIDE OUTER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8285 12. Position the passenger side outer demister duct (1) to the instrument panel. Tilt and rotate the duct as necessary. 13. Install the two screws (2) that secure the passenger side outer demister duct to the top of the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 14. Install the passenger side inner demister duct. 15. Install the defroster duct. 16. Install the instrument panel top cover. 17. Install the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8286 Air Duct: Service and Repair Distribution - Rear Rear Ceiling Air Outlet REAR CEILING AIR OUTLET 1. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-blade tool (1), gently pry between both bottom ends of the rear ceiling air outlet bezel (2) and the headliner (3) to release the snap clip retainers that secure the air outlet bezel to the headliner. 2. Remove the rear ceiling air outlet(s) from the headliner. Rear Ceiling Air Outlet Grille REAR CEILING AIR OUTLET GRILLE 1. Using a pick or another suitable tool (1), gently pry between the right end of the rear ceiling air outlet bezel (2) and the air outlet grille (3) to release the snap clip retainer that secures the grille to the pivot on the right side of the bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8287 2. Remove the rear ceiling air outlet grille (1) from the pivot on the left side of the air outlet bezel (2) by moving the grille out and to the right of the bezel. Rear Ceiling Air Outlet REAR CEILING AIR OUTLET 1. Position the rear ceiling air outlet(s) (1) into the headliner (2). 2. Gently push the air outlet bezel (3) into the headliner until the snap clips in the headliner duct fully engage the slots in the bezel. Rear Ceiling Air Outlet Grille REAR CEILING AIR OUTLET GRILLE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8288 1. Install the rear ceiling air outlet grille (1) onto the pivot shaft (2) on the left side of the air outlet bezel (3). 2. Gently push the air outlet grille (1) onto the pivot shaft (2) on the right side of the air outlet bezel (3). Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the right interior quarter panel trim. 2. Remove the push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the rear ceiling distribution duct (2) and the rear floor distribution duct (3) to the right interior quarter panel (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Distribution - Front > Page 8289 3. Disconnect the rear ceiling distribution duct from the rear HVAC housing (5) by sliding the lower half of the ceiling distribution duct into the upper half of the ceiling distribution duct. 4. Disconnect the rear ceiling distribution duct from the headliner duct and remove the ceiling distribution duct from the vehicle. 5. Disconnect the rear floor distribution duct from the rear HVAC housing and remove the floor distribution duct from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the rear floor distribution duct (3) to the rear HVAC housing (5). 2. Connect the rear ceiling distribution duct (2) to the headliner duct and the rear HVAC housing. Make sure that the rear ceiling distribution duct is fully installed to ensure a good seal. 3. Install the push-pin fasteners (1) that secure the rear ceiling distribution duct and the rear floor distribution duct to the right interior quarter panel (4). 4. Install the right interior quarter panel trim. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID: 354 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 2 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8293 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8294 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 354 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 2 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8295 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heating and Air Conditioning Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Heating and Air Conditioning Description DESCRIPTION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that monitors the air temperature outside of the vehicle. The ambient air temperature sensor is mounted onto the inside of the front bumper beam and its data is used by the heating-A/C system to maintain optimum cabin temperature levels. Operation OPERATION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit sent by the front control module (FCM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The ambient air temperature sensor changes its internal resistance in response to changes in the outside air temperature, which either increases or decreases the reference signal voltage read by the FCM. The FCM converts and broadcasts the sensor data over the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the A/C-heater control and other various vehicle control modules. The ambient air temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The ambient air temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 8298 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Overhead Module Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the right side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. For complete circuit diagrams refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent to it by the A/C-heater control. The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the A/C-heater control. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the A/C-heater control senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit, which it is programmed to correspond to a specific temperature. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Heating and Air Conditioning Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the push pin (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor (1) to the inside of the front bumper beam. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the ambient air temperature sensor and remove the sensor from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the ambient air temperature sensor (1). 2. Position the ambient air temperature sensor to the inside of the front bumper beam. 3. Install the push pin (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 8301 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Overhead Module Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the ambient temperature sensor (1), on the right side of the radiator yoke (2) behind the grille. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the ambient temperature sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the one screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor bracket to the radiator yoke. 5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the radiator yoke. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient temperature sensor (1) onto the radiator yoke (2). 2. Install the screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor to the radiator yoke. Tighten the screw to 5.6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 8302 3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the ambient temperature sensor (1). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Water Pump: Locations Component ID: 207 Component : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Connector: Name : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 2 GROUND Z931 18BK Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 8306 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 8307 Auxiliary Water Pump: Diagrams Component ID: 207 Component : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Connector: Name : PUMP-AUXILIARY COOLANT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 20WT/DB 2 GROUND Z931 18BK Component Location - 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 8308 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Blower Motor: Locations Front Blower Motor Component ID: 186 Component : MOTOR-BLOWER-FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-BLOWER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 10DB/GY 2 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor > Page 8313 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor > Page 8314 Blower Motor: Locations Rear Blower Motor Component ID: 187 Component : MOTOR-BLOWER-REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-BLOWER-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14LB/BR 2 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14DB/BR Component Location - 48 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor > Page 8315 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8318 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8319 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8320 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8321 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8322 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8323 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8324 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8325 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8326 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8327 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8328 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8329 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8330 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8331 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8332 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8333 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8334 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8335 Blower Motor: Connector Views Motor-Blower-Front Component ID: 186 Component : MOTOR-BLOWER-FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-BLOWER-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 10DB/GY 2 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8336 Motor-Blower-Rear Component ID: 187 Component : MOTOR-BLOWER-REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-BLOWER-REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8337 1 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14LB/BR 2 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14DB/BR Component Location - 48 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front Blower Motor: Description and Operation Description - Front DESCRIPTION The blower motor (1) is a 12-volt, direct current (DC) motor with a squirrel cage-type blower wheel (2) that is secured to the blower motor shaft (3). The blower motor and wheel are located near the passenger side end of the HVAC housing in the passenger compartment below the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front > Page 8340 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Description - Rear DESCRIPTION The rear blower motor (1) and blower wheel (2) is located in the rear HVAC housing behind the right interior quarter panel trim and is connected to rear HVAC wire harness by a integral wire harness connector (3). The rear blower motor controls the velocity of air flowing through the rear HVAC housing by spinning the wide squirrel cage-type blower wheel within the HVAC housing at the selected speed. Rear blower motor speed is controlled by regulating the ground path through the rear blower motor switch and the rear blower motor resistor block. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front > Page 8341 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Operation - Front OPERATION The blower motor is used to control the velocity of air moving through the HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel within the housing at the selected speed whenever the ignition switch is in RUN and the blower control switch is in any position except OFF. Blower motor speed is controlled by regulating the path to ground through the blower motor control switch and the blower motor resistor. The blower motor receives battery current whenever the blower motor relay is energized. The blower motor relay output circuit is protected by a fuse in the integrated power module (IPM) located in the engine compartment. The blower motor and blower wheel are factory balanced and cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced as an assembly if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front > Page 8342 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Operation - Rear OPERATION The rear blower motor is used to control the velocity of air moving through the rear HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel within the HVAC housing at the selected speed. The rear blower motor will only operate when the ignition switch is in RUN and the front A/C-heater control is set to either front control of rear heating-A/C system or to the rear control of the rear heating-A/C system. The rear blower motor receives a battery feed through the rear blower motor relay located in the power distribution center (PDC) whenever the ignition switch is in RUN. The rear blower motor and blower wheel are factory balanced and cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced as an assembly if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8343 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection BLOWER MOTOR WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to Air Conditioning/Heater in Wiring Diagrams. Possible causes of an inoperative front or rear blower motor include: - Open fuse (the rear blower motor fuse is located in the relay and fuse block located on the back of the junction block) - Inoperative blower motor resistor block or power module (depending on application) - Inoperative blower motor relay (Voltage Reduction Relay or VRR) (front only) - Inoperative blower motor - Inoperative blower motor switch - Inoperative heater-A/C mode control switch (front only) - Blower motor circuit wiring or wire harness connectors Possible causes of the front or rear blower motor not operating in all speeds include: - Inoperative blower motor resistor block or power module (depending on application) - Inoperative blower motor switch - Inoperative blower motor circuit wiring or wire harness connectors VIBRATION Possible causes of front or rear blower motor vibration include: - Improper blower motor mounting - Blower wheel out of balance or deformed - Foreign material in blower wheel causing out of balance condition - Worn blower motor NOISE To determine if the front or rear blower motor is the source of the noise, simply switch the front or rear blower motor from Off to On. To verify that the blower motor is the source of the noise, unplug the blower motor wire harness connector and operate the heater-A/C system. If the noise goes away, possible causes include: - Improper blower motor mounting - Foreign material in blower wheel - Foreign material in HVAC housing - Worn blower motor Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal - Front REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the right front door scuff plate. 3. Remove the right cowl side trim panel. 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the blower motor (2). 5. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the blower motor and blower wheel assembly to the HVAC housing (4). 6. Remove the blower motor and blower wheel assembly from the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front > Page 8346 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal - Rear REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear HVAC housing. 3. Disconnect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the rear blower motor (2). 4. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the rear blower motor to the rear air inlet housing (4). 5. Remove the rear blower motor from the rear air inlet housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front > Page 8347 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Installation - Front INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor and blower wheel assembly (2) into the HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the three screws (3) that secure the blower motor and blower wheel assembly to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the blower motor. 4. Install the right cowl side trim panel. 5. Install the right front door scuff plate. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front > Page 8348 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Installation - Rear INSTALLATION 1. Position the rear blower motor (2) into the rear air inlet housing (4). 2. Install the three screws (3) that secure the rear blower motor to the rear air inlet housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the rear blower motor. 4. Install the rear HVAC housing. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Relay Blower Motor Relay: Locations Front Blower Motor Relay Front Blower Motor Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Relay > Page 8353 Blower Motor Relay: Locations Rear Blower Motor Relay Accessory Delay Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Blower Motor-Front Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Blower Motor-Front Component ID: 215 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A927 12RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A927 12RD/BR 87 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Blower Motor-Front > Page 8356 Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Blower Motor-Rear Component ID: 216 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 85 GROUND Z911 20BK 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 87 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Controls - Front Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the standard front heating-A/C system is a International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The front blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) directly to the front blower motor when equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) system, or the blower motor power module when equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) system. The front blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground circuit through the integrated power module. The front blower motor relay is located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Refer to the PDC label for front blower motor relay identification and location. Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard front blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the battery to control the high current output to the front blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the front blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The front blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the front blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives battery current through a fuse in the PDC at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground circuit through the integrated power module. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current through a fuse in the PDC at all times. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the front blower motor when equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) system, or the blower motor power module when equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) system only when the front blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the front blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The front blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8359 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Controls - Rear Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the rear heating-A/C system is a International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The rear blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the junction block directly to the rear blower motor. The rear blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a voltage signal by the ignition switch. The rear blower motor relay is located in the junction block (JB) in the passenger compartment. Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard rear blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the ignition switch to control the high current output to the rear blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The rear blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the junction block (JB). The inputs and outputs of the rear blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a ground at all times. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current from a fuse in the junction block (JB) through an ignition switch output (run) circuit only when the ignition switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the rear blower motor through the rear blower motor relay output circuit only when the rear blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the rear blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The rear blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Controls - Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the power distribution center (PDC) (1). 3. Open the PDC cover (2). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the inner surface of the PDC cover for rear blower motor relay identification and location. 4. Remove the rear blower motor relay (3) from the PDC. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the inner surface of the PDC cover for rear blower motor relay identification and location. 1. Position the rear blower motor relay (3) into the proper receptacle of the PDC (1). 2. Align the rear blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the PDC cover (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8362 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8363 Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Controls - Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the junction block (JB) (1) on the left side of the passenger compartment behind the cowl side trim panel. 3. Remove the rear blower motor relay (2) from the JB. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the rear blower motor relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the junction block (JB) (1). 2. Align the rear blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the JB receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Reinstall the cowl side trim panel. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Resistor Blower Motor Resistor: Locations Front Blower Motor Resistor Component ID: 234 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 10DB/GY 2 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 12DB/GY 3 FRONT BLOWER M2 SPEED C73 14DB/VT 4 FRONT BLOWER M1 SPEED C72 14DB/OR 5 FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED C71 16DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Resistor > Page 8368 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Resistor > Page 8369 Blower Motor Resistor: Locations Rear Blower Motor Resistor Component ID: 235 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14DB/BR 2 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM SPEED C152 14LB/LG 3 REAR BLOWER LOW SPEED C151 16LB/DG Component Location - 48 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Resistor > Page 8370 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams > Resistor-Blower Motor-Front Blower Motor Resistor: Diagrams Resistor-Blower Motor-Front Component ID: 234 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 10DB/GY 2 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 12DB/GY 3 FRONT BLOWER M2 SPEED C73 14DB/VT 4 FRONT BLOWER M1 SPEED C72 14DB/OR 5 FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED C71 16DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams > Resistor-Blower Motor-Front > Page 8373 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams > Resistor-Blower Motor-Front > Page 8374 Blower Motor Resistor: Diagrams Resistor-Blower Motor-Rear Component ID: 235 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14DB/BR 2 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM SPEED C152 14LB/LG 3 REAR BLOWER LOW SPEED C151 16LB/DG Component Location - 48 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams > Resistor-Blower Motor-Front > Page 8375 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Description - Front DESCRIPTION A blower motor resistor is used on vehicles equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) heating-A/C system. Vehicles equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) heating-A/C system use a blower motor power module, instead of the blower motor resistor. The front blower motor resistor is mounted to the rear of the HVAC housing, directly behind the glove box. The blower motor resistor consists of a molded plastic mounting plate (1) with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Concealed behind the mounting plate are coiled resistor wires contained within a ceramic heat sink (3). The front blower motor resistor is accessed for service from beneath the right side of the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front > Page 8378 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Description - Rear DESCRIPTION A rear blower motor resistor is used on this model when it is equipped with the rear heater-A/C system. The rear blower motor resistor is mounted to the rear HVAC housing, directly below the rear blower motor. The rear blower motor resistor consists of a molded plastic mounting plate (1) with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Concealed behind the mounting plate are coiled resistor wires contained within a ceramic heat sink (3). The rear blower motor resistor is accessed for service by removing the rear quarter interior trim panel from the right side of the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front > Page 8379 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Operation - Front OPERATION The blower motor resistor is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The blower motor resistor has multiple resistor wires, each of which will reduce the current flow through the blower motor to change the blower motor speed. The blower motor switch in the MTC heating-A/C system directs the ground path for the blower motor through the correct resistor wire to obtain the selected speed. With the blower motor control in the lowest speed position, the ground path for the blower motor is applied through all of the resistor wires. Each higher speed selected with the blower motor control applies the blower motor ground path through fewer of the resistor wires, increasing the blower motor speed. The blower motor resistor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Front > Page 8380 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Operation - Rear OPERATION The blower motor resistor for the rear heating-A/C system is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated wire lead and connector of the rear HVAC wire harness. The rear blower motor resistor has multiple resistor wires, each of which will reduce the current flow through the blower motor to change the blower motor speed. The blower motor switch in the rear heater-A/C system directs the ground path for the rear blower motor through the correct resistor wire to obtain the selected speed. With the rear blower motor control in the lowest speed position, the ground path for the rear blower motor is applied through all of the resistor wires. Each higher speed selected with the rear blower motor control applies the blower motor ground path through fewer of the resistor wires, increasing the rear blower motor speed. The rear blower motor resistor cannot be adjusted or repaired and it must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Blower Motor Resistor Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection Front Blower Motor Resistor FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions may result in accidental airbag deployment and possible serious or fatal injury. NOTE: For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the blower motor resistor. 3. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between all of the blower motor resistor terminals. In each case there should be continuity. If OK, repair the wire harness circuits between the blower motor switch and the blower motor resistor or blower motor as required. If not OK, replace the inoperative blower motor resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Blower Motor Resistor > Page 8383 Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection Rear Blower Motor Resistor REAR BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR NOTE: For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the blower motor resistor. 3. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between all of the blower motor resistor terminals. In each case there should be continuity. If OK, repair the wire harness circuits between the blower motor switch and the blower motor resistor or the blower motor as required. If not OK, replace the inoperative blower motor resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Removal - Front REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The blower motor resistor may get very hot during normal operation. If the blower motor was turned on prior to servicing the blower motor resistor, wait five minutes to allow the blower motor resistors to cool before performing diagnosis or service. Failure to take this precaution can result in possible personal injury. CAUTION: Do not operate the blower motor with the blower motor resistor removed from the circuit. Failure to take this precaution can result in vehicle damage. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. If equipped with a trim cover (2) remove the two screws (1) that secure the trim cover over the blower motor resistor (3) located below the right side of the instrument panel and remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the blower motor resistor (2). 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor resistor to the front HVAC housing. 5. Remove the blower motor resistor from the front HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front > Page 8386 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Removal - Rear REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the right rear quarter interior trim panel. 3. Disconnect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the rear blower motor resistor (2). 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the rear blower motor resistor to the rear HVAC housing (4). 5. Remove the rear blower motor resistor from the rear HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front > Page 8387 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Installation - Front INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor resistor (2) into the front HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor resistor to the front HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the blower motor resistor. 4. If equipped with a trim cover (2), install the trim cover over the blower motor resistor (3) and install the two retaining screws (1). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Front > Page 8388 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Installation - Rear INSTALLATION 1. Position the rear blower motor resistor (2) into the rear HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the screw (3) that secures the rear blower motor resistor to the rear HVAC housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the rear HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the rear blower motor resistor. 4. Install the right rear quarter interior trim panel. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8397 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8398 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8404 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8405 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch: Locations Component ID: 56 Component : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Connector: Name : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT C3 20DB/GY 2 GROUND Z153 20BK/GY Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8410 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8411 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8412 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8413 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8414 Compressor Clutch: Diagrams Component ID: 56 Component : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Connector: Name : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT C3 20DB/GY 2 GROUND Z153 20BK/GY Component Location - 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8415 Component Location - 16 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8416 Fig. 16 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8417 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8418 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Typical A/C clutch assembly shown. The A/C compressor clutch assembly consists of a stationary electromagnetic A/C clutch field coil (4), pulley bearing and pulley assembly (3), clutch plate (2) and shims (7). These components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. The A/C clutch field coil and the pulley bearing and pulley assembly are both retained on the nose of the A/C compressor with snap rings (5 and 6). The clutch plate is splined to the compressor shaft and secured with a bolt (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8421 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C compressor clutch components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. When the electromagnetic A/C clutch field coil is energized, it magnetically draws the clutch plate into contact with the clutch pulley and drives the compressor shaft. When the coil is not energized, the pulley freewheels on the clutch hub bearing, which is part of the pulley assembly. The A/C compressor clutch engagement is controlled by the following components: - A/C-heater control in the passenger compartment - A/C pressure transducer on the A/C discharge line - Powertrain control module (PCM) in the engine compartment - A/C clutch relay in the power distribution center (PDC) The A/C compressor clutch components cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8422 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH COIL The A/C compressor clutch coil electrical circuit is controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) through the A/C compressor clutch relay, which is located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Begin testing of a suspected compressor clutch coil problem by performing the preliminary checks. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. If the compressor clutch will not engage, refer to HVAC Electrical Diagnostics to perform the A/C System Performance Test, which is found within the HVAC System Test. If no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are found in the A/C-heater control or the powertrain control module (PCM), go to STEP 2. If any DTCs are found, repair as required. 2. If the compressor clutch still will not engage, verify the refrigerant charge level. If the refrigerant charge level is OK, go to TESTS. If the refrigerant charge level is not OK, adjust the refrigerant charge as required. TESTS 3. Verify the battery state of charge. 4. Connect an ammeter (0 to 10 ampere scale selected) in series with the clutch coil feed terminal. Connect a voltmeter (0 to 20 volt scale selected) to measure voltage across the battery and the clutch coil. 5. With the heater-A/C control in the A/C mode and the blower at low speed, start the engine and allow it to run at a normal idle speed. 6. The compressor clutch should engage immediately, and the clutch coil supply voltage should be within two volts of the battery voltage. If the coil supply voltage is OK, go to STEP 5. If the coil supply voltage is not within two volts of battery voltage, test the clutch coil feed circuit for excessive voltage drop and repair as necessary. 7. Refer to the A/C Clutch Coil Current Draw chart for the acceptable A/C clutch coil current draw specifications. Specifications apply for a work area temperature of 21° C (70° F). If voltage is more than 12.5 volts, add electrical loads by turning on electrical accessories until voltage reads below 12.5 volts. a. If the compressor clutch coil current reading is zero, the coil is open and must be replaced. b. If the compressor clutch coil current reading is above specifications, the coil is shorted and must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair A/C Clutch Plate Inspection A/C CLUTCH PLATE INSPECTION NOTE: The A/C clutch can be serviced in the vehicle. The refrigerant system can remain fully-charged during compressor clutch, pulley and bearing assembly, or coil replacement. Examine the friction surfaces of the pulley and the clutch plate (2) for wear. The pulley and clutch plate should be replaced if there is excessive wear or scoring. If the friction surfaces are oily, inspect the shaft and nose area of the A/C compressor (1) for refrigerant oil. If refrigerant oil is found, the compressor shaft seal is leaking and the A/C compressor must be replaced. Check the pulley bearing for roughness or excessive leakage of grease. Replace the pulley and bearing assembly, if required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection > Page 8425 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair A/C Clutch Break-In A/C CLUTCH BREAK-IN After a new A/C compressor clutch has been installed, cycle the compressor clutch approximately 20 times (5 seconds on, then 5 seconds off). During this procedure, set the A/C-heater controls to the A/C Recirculation Mode, the blower motor in the highest speed position, and the engine speed at 1500 to 2000 rpm. This procedure (burnishing) will seat the opposing friction surfaces and provide a higher compressor clutch torque capability. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection > Page 8426 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The compressor clutch assembly can be serviced with the refrigerant system fully-charged. NOTE: Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the air intake hose from the air filter housing and the resonator. 3. Partially drain the engine cooling system and disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator and position the hose out of the way. 4. Remove the radiator fan and shroud. 5. Remove the accessory drive belt. 6. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the compressor clutch field coil connector (1) located on the top of the A/C compressor (5). 7. Carefully remove the compressor clutch field coil connector and wire lead from the connector bracket (2). 8. Remove the compressor shaft bolt (3). A band-type oil filter wrench or a strap wrench may be used to hold the clutch plate (4) from rotating during bolt removal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection > Page 8427 CAUTION: Do not pry between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly to remove the clutch plate from the compressor shaft as this may damage the clutch plate. NOTE: Use care not to lose any clutch shim(s) during removal of the clutch plate, as they may be reused during the clutch plate installation process. 9. Tap the clutch plate (2) lightly with a plastic mallet to release it from the splines on the compressor shaft (1) and remove the clutch plate and shim(s) (3). 10. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), remove the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor and remove the pulley and bearing assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection > Page 8428 11. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), remove the snap ring (4) that secures the compressor clutch field coil (2) to the front of the A/C compressor (3) and remove the field coil. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection > Page 8429 Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations. 1. Align the dowel pin on the back of the compressor clutch field coil (2) with the hole in the front of the A/C compressor (3) and position the field coil onto the compressor. Be certain that the compressor clutch field coil wire lead is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the field coil. CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE: A new snap ring must be used to secure the compressor clutch field coil to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward and both snap ring eyelets must be oriented to the right or to the left of the field coil dowel pin location on the A/C compressor. 2. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), install the snap ring (4) that secures the compressor clutch field coil to the front of the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove and oriented correctly. CAUTION: Be certain to position the compressor clutch field coil wire lead so that it is not damaged during A/C compressor pulley and bearing installation. CAUTION: When installing the pulley and bearing assembly, DO NOT mar the friction surfaces of the pulley or premature failure of the clutch will result. 3. Install the pulley and bearing assembly (1) onto the front of the A/C compressor. If necessary, tap the pulley gently with a block of wood (2) placed on the pulley friction surface. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection > Page 8430 CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE: A new snap ring must be used to secure the pulley and bearing assembly to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward. 4. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), install the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove. 5. If the original clutch plate (2) and pulley and bearing assembly are to be reused, reinstall the original shim(s) (3) onto the compressor shaft (1). If a new clutch plate and pulley and bearing assembly are being used, install a trial stack of shims 2.54 mm (0.010 in.) thick onto the compressor shaft. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Clutch Plate Inspection > Page 8431 6. Install the clutch plate (4) onto the front of the A/C compressor (5). 7. Install the compressor shaft bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 19 Nm (168 in. lbs.). NOTE: The shims may compress after tightening the shaft bolt. Check the air gap in four or more places to verify the air gap is correct. Spin the pulley before performing a final check of the air gap. NOTE: On models with the clutch plate recessed into the pulley, use a 90° wire gap gauge to measure the clutch air gap. On other models, use a blade type feeler gauge to measure the air gap. 8. With the clutch plate assembled tight against the shim(s), measure the air gap between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly. The air gap should be between 0.35 - 0.60 mm (0.014 - 0.024 in.). If the air gap is not between specifications, add or subtract shims as needed until the correct air gap is obtained. CAUTION: Be certain that the compressor clutch field coil wire harness is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the field coil connector bracket. 9. Carefully route the compressor clutch field coil wire lead behind the connector bracket (2). 10. Install the compressor clutch field coil connector (1) onto the connector bracket. 11. Connect the engine wire harness to the compressor clutch field coil connector. 12. Install the accessory drive belt. 13. Install the radiator fan and shroud. 14. Connect the upper radiator hose to the radiator and securely install the hose clamp. 15. Install the air intake hose. 16. Refill the engine cooling system. 17. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations A/C Clutch Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8435 Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 211 Component : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Connector: Name : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A916 20OR/WT 85 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 87 A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT C3 20DB/GY 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C clutch relay (1) is a International Standards Organization (ISO) micro-relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The ISO micro-relay terminal functions are the same as a conventional ISO relay. However, the ISO micro-relay terminal pattern (or footprint) is different, the current capacity is lower, and the physical dimensions are smaller than those of the conventional ISO relay. The A/C clutch relay is located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8438 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard A/C clutch micro-relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) to control the high current output to the A/C clutch field coil. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the A/C clutch field coil. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The A/C clutch relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the A/C clutch relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground input from the PCM through the A/C clutch relay control circuit only when the PCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through a ignition switch output (run-start) circuit only when the ignition switch is in the On or Start positions. - The normally open terminal (87) provides a battery current output to the A/C clutch coil through the A/C clutch relay output circuit only when the compressor clutch relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the A/C clutch relay coil is de-energized. The A/C clutch relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the power distribution center (PDC) (1). 3. Open the PDC cover (2). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the PDC cover for A/C clutch relay location. 4. Remove the A/C clutch relay (3) from the PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8441 Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the PDC cover for A/C clutch relay location. 1. Position the A/C clutch relay (3) into the proper receptacle of the PDC (1). 2. Align the A/C clutch relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the PDC cover (2). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C condenser (2) is located in the front of the engine compartment inside of the condenser fan shroud (3). The A/C condenser is a heat exchanger that allows the high-pressure refrigerant gas being discharged by the A/C compressor to give up its heat to the air passing over the condenser fins, which causes the refrigerant to change to a liquid state. The A/C condenser is retained within the condenser fan shroud by two bolts (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8446 Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When air passes through the fins of the A/C condenser, the high-pressure refrigerant gas within the A/C condenser gives up its heat. The refrigerant then condenses as it leaves the A/C condenser and becomes a high-pressure liquid. The volume of air flowing over the condenser fins is critical to the proper cooling performance of the A/C system. Therefore, it is important that there are no objects placed in front of the radiator grille openings at the front of the vehicle or foreign material on the condenser fins that might obstruct proper air flow. Also, any factory-installed air seals or shrouds must be properly reinstalled following radiator or A/C condenser service. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C condenser has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever a refrigerant line is removed from the A/C condenser. The A/C condenser cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Remove the push-pin retainers (1) and the upper condenser/radiator seal (2). 4. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the condenser cooling fan motor (9) and the A/C pressure transducer (10). 5. Remove the two wire harness retainers (2) from the condenser fan shroud (4) and position the wire harness out of the way. 6. Remove the nuts (1 and 8) that secure the A/C discharge line (5) and A/C liquid line (7) to the A/C condenser (6). 7. Disconnect the A/C discharge and liquid lines from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seals and gaskets. 8. Remove the A/C discharge line from the retainer (3) located on the condenser fan shroud (4). 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened discharge and liquid line fitting and condenser ports. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8449 10. Remove the three bolts (1) that secure the upper radiator support (2) to the upper front crossmember (5). 11. Remove the upper radiator support and position the radiator overflow hose (3) out of the way. 12. Remove the bolt that secures the condenser/cooling fan assembly (4) to the upper left fender rail. 13. Carefully push back the radiator (6) for clearance and remove the condenser/cooling fan assembly from the engine compartment. 14. Place the condenser/cooling fan assembly on a workbench and remove the two screws (1) that secure the A/C condenser (2) to the condenser fan shroud (3). 15. Remove the A/C condenser from the condenser fan shroud. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8450 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: If only the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: Be certain that each of the radiator and condenser air seals are installed in their proper locations. These air seals are required for the A/C and engine cooling systems to perform as designed. 1. Position the A/C condenser (2) into the condenser fan shroud (3). 2. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the A/C condenser to the condenser fan shroud. Tighten the bolts to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 3. Carefully push back the radiator (6) for clearance and install the condenser/cooling fan assembly (4). Insert the two lower condenser fan shroud mounting tabs into the holes in the lower front crossmember. 4. Install the bolt that secures the condenser/cooling fan assembly to the upper left fender rail. Tighten the bolt to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Position the radiator overflow hose (3) to it's installed location Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8451 6. Align the upper mounting tab of the condenser/cooling fan assembly to the hole in the upper radiator support (2) and install the upper radiator support. 7. Install the three bolts (1) that secure the upper radiator support to the upper front crossmember (5). Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 8. Remove the tape or plugs from the discharge and liquid line fittings and condenser ports. 9. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and new gaskets onto the discharge and liquid line fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 10. Connect the A/C discharge line (5) and the A/C liquid line (7) to the A/C condenser (6). 11. Install the nuts (1 and 8) that secure the A/C discharge and liquid lines to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nuts to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 12. Install the A/C discharge line into the retainer (3) located on the condenser fan shroud. 13. Install the wire harness and the two wire harness retainers (2) to the condenser fan shroud (4). 14. Connect the wire harness connectors to the condenser cooling fan motor (9) and the A/C pressure transducer (10). 15. Position the upper condenser/radiator seal (2) and install the push-pin retainers (1). 16. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 17. Evacuate the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8452 18. If the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 19. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations Condenser Fan Motor: Locations Component ID: 69 Component : FAN MODULE-CONDENSER COOLING Connector: Name : FAN MODULE-CONDENSER COOLING Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 2 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N24 12DG/DB 3 GROUND Z823 12BK/DG Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8457 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8458 Condenser Fan Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 69 Component : FAN MODULE-CONDENSER COOLING Connector: Name : FAN MODULE-CONDENSER COOLING Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N23 12DB/DG 2 LOW SPEED RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT N24 12DG/DB 3 GROUND Z823 12BK/DG Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser Fan > Condenser Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8459 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater Control Assembly: Locations Control-A/C-Heater Component ID: 65 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 2 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20YL/LB 3 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 3 C808 20DB/RD 4 RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER C32 20TN/DB 5 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB 6 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 7 GROUND Z24 20BK/OR 8 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 9 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 10 REAR MODE DOOR DRIVER C53 20LB 11 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20LB/RD 12 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C807 20DB/LG 13 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB 14 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/GY 15 PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER C33 18LB/BR 16 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8464 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 2 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/YL 3 REAR BLEND SENSE SUPPLY C800 20DB/GY 4 REAR BLEND SENSE C22 20LB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8465 5 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 6 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/GY 7 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB 8 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20LB/RD 9 RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER C32 20TN/DB 10 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 11 GROUND Z24 20BK/OR 12 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 13 REAR BLEND SENSE RETURN C931 20DB/WT 14 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HVAC E12 20OR/GY 15 - - 16 REAR MODE DOOR DRIVER C53 20LB 17 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20YL/LB 18 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 19 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 20 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (ATC) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8466 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR BLEND SENSE SUPPLY C800 20DB/GY 2 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 3 REAR BLOWER HIGH C802 20LB/RD 4 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM C803 20OR/LB 5 REAR BLEND SENSE C22 20LB/WT 6 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 7 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HVAC E12 20OR/GY 8 REAR BLOWER LOW C804 20DB/VT 9 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 10 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/YL 11 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 12 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8467 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z928 14BK 3-4 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14BR/DB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8468 5-6 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM SPEED C152 14LG/PK 7 REAR BLOWER LOW SPEED C151 16DB/PK 8 REAR BLOWER CONTROL FEED C50 14DB/OR Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (ATC) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8469 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z928 14BK 2 REAR BLOWER LOW SPEED C151 16DB/PK 3-4 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM SPEED C152 14LG/PK 5 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14BR/DB Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C3 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8470 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 12DB/GY 2-3 FRONT BLOWER M2 SPEED C73 14DB/VT 4 GROUND Z961 12BK 5-6-7-8-9 FRONT BLOWER M1 SPEED C72 14DB/OR 10 FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED C71 16DB/BR Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8471 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8472 Control Assembly: Locations Control-A/C-Heater-Rear Component ID: 66 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER-REAR Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-REAR HVAC E10 20OR/DG 2 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM C803 14OR/LB 3 REAR BLOWER LOW C804 16DB/VT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 14GY/PK 5 REAR BLOWER HIGH C802 14LB/RD 6 REAR BLEND SENSE RETURN C931 20DB/WT 7 REAR BLEND SENSE SUPPLY C800 20DB/GY 8 REAR BLEND SENSE C22 20LB/WT Component Location - 38 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Control-A/C-Heater > Page 8473 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8476 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8477 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8478 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8479 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8480 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8481 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8482 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8483 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8484 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8485 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8486 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8487 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8488 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8489 Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8490 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8491 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8492 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8493 Control Assembly: Connector Views Control-A/C-Heater Component ID: 65 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 2 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20YL/LB 3 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 3 C808 20DB/RD 4 RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER C32 20TN/DB 5 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 1 C34 20DB/LB 6 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 7 GROUND Z24 20BK/OR 8 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 9 FUSED B(+) A925 18RD/BK 10 REAR MODE DOOR DRIVER C53 20LB 11 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20LB/RD 12 COMMON DOOR DRIVER 2 C807 20DB/LG 13 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB 14 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/GY 15 PASSENGER BLEND DOOR DRIVER C33 18LB/BR 16 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8494 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 2 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/YL 3 REAR BLEND SENSE SUPPLY C800 20DB/GY 4 REAR BLEND SENSE C22 20LB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8495 5 AUXILIARY COOLANT PUMP DRIVER C43 18WT/DB 6 FRONT BLEND DOOR DRIVER C61 20DB/GY 7 MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER C29 20DB 8 MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER C801 20LB/RD 9 RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER C32 20TN/DB 10 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 11 GROUND Z24 20BK/OR 12 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 13 REAR BLEND SENSE RETURN C931 20DB/WT 14 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HVAC E12 20OR/GY 15 - - 16 REAR MODE DOOR DRIVER C53 20LB 17 REAR BLEND DOOR DRIVER C54 20YL/LB 18 FRONT COMMON DOOR DRIVER C34 20DB/LB 19 REAR COMMON DOOR DRIVER C154 20LB/OR 20 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (ATC) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8496 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR BLEND SENSE SUPPLY C800 20DB/GY 2 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 3 REAR BLOWER HIGH C802 20LB/RD 4 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM C803 20OR/LB 5 REAR BLEND SENSE C22 20LB/WT 6 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 7 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HVAC E12 20OR/GY 8 REAR BLOWER LOW C804 20DB/VT 9 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 10 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/YL 11 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 12 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8497 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z928 14BK 3-4 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14BR/DB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8498 5-6 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM SPEED C152 14LG/PK 7 REAR BLOWER LOW SPEED C151 16DB/PK 8 REAR BLOWER CONTROL FEED C50 14DB/OR Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 5 Qualifier : (ATC) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8499 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z928 14BK 2 REAR BLOWER LOW SPEED C151 16DB/PK 3-4 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM SPEED C152 14LG/PK 5 REAR BLOWER HIGH SPEED C153 14BR/DB Component Location - 31 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C3 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8500 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (MTC) Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT BLOWER HIGH SPEED C75 12DB/GY 2-3 FRONT BLOWER M2 SPEED C73 14DB/VT 4 GROUND Z961 12BK 5-6-7-8-9 FRONT BLOWER M1 SPEED C72 14DB/OR 10 FRONT BLOWER LOW SPEED C71 16DB/BR Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8501 Control-A/C-Heater-Rear Component ID: 66 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER-REAR Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8502 1 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-REAR HVAC E10 20OR/DG 2 REAR BLOWER MEDIUM C803 14OR/LB 3 REAR BLOWER LOW C804 16DB/VT 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 14GY/PK 5 REAR BLOWER HIGH C802 14LB/RD 6 REAR BLEND SENSE RETURN C931 20DB/WT 7 REAR BLEND SENSE SUPPLY C800 20DB/GY 8 REAR BLEND SENSE C22 20LB/WT Component Location - 38 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front Control Assembly: Description and Operation Controls - Front Manual Single Zone MANUAL SINGLE ZONE The A/C-heater control (1) for the manual temperature control (MTC) single zone heating-A/C system allows one temperature setting for the entire vehicle. All controls are identified by ISO graphic symbols. The A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: - a rotary control knob for rear window washer operation and rear window wiper speed selection (2). - a slider control knob for temperature control of the discharged air (3). - a rotary control knob for fan speed selection and turning the heater-A/C system off (4). - a rotary control knob for mode control of the discharged air (5). - a push button A/C on/off control (6). The Snowflake button contains an LED that illuminates when the A/C system is in operation. - a push button rear window defogger on/off control (7). The button contains an LED that illuminates when the rear window defogger system is in operation. The A/C-heater control for the manual single zone heating and A/C system is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C-heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamps (8) and control knobs are available for service replacement. The A/C-heater control utilizes integrated circuitry and information carried on the controller area network (CAN) B bus to monitor many sensors and switch inputs throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the internal circuitry and programming of the A/C-heater control allows it to control electronic functions and features of the MTC heating-A/C system. The inputs received by the A/C-heater control of the MTC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - Dimming - Refrigerant Pressure - Vehicle Identification Number - Vehicle Odometer - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient Air Temperature - Vehicle Speed The messages broadcasted by the A/C-heater control of the MTC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - A/C Request - A/C Select - Rear Window Defogger (EBL) Request - Rear Washer Request - Rear Wiper Request Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8505 Manual Single Zone With Rear Heat And A/C MANUAL SINGLE ZONE WITH REAR HEAT AND A/C The A/C-heater control (1) for the manual temperature control (MTC) single zone front and rear heating-A/C system allows both the front and intermediate seat passengers the ability to regulate air temperature as well as fan speed and provides floor outlets near the right rear door and overhead outlets at each intermediate outboard seating position. Primary control for the rear blower motor is on the front A/C-heater control. All controls are identified by ISO graphic symbols. FRONT CONTROL PANEL The front A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: - a rotary control knob for rear window washer operation and rear window wiper speed selection (2). - a slider control knob for temperature control of the discharged air (3). - a rotary control knob for fan speed selection and turning the heater-A/C system off (4). - a rotary control knob for rear fan speed selection and turning the rear heater-A/C system off (5). - a rotary control knob for mode control of the discharged air (6). - a push button A/C on/off control (7). The Snowflake button contains an LED that illuminates when the A/C system is in operation. - a push button rear window defogger on/off control (8). The button contains an LED that illuminates when the rear window defogger system is in operation. The A/C-heater control for the MTC single zone heating-A/C system is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C-heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamps (9) and control knobs are available for service replacement. The A/C-heater control utilizes integrated circuitry and information carried on the controller area network (CAN) B bus to monitor many sensors and switch inputs throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the internal circuitry and programming of the A/C-heater control allows it to control electronic functions and features of the MTC heating-A/C system. The inputs received by the A/C-heater control of the MTC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - Dimming - Refrigerant Pressure - Vehicle Identification Number - Vehicle Odometer - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient Air Temperature - Vehicle Speed The messages broadcasted by the A/C-heater control of the MTC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - A/C Request - A/C Select - Rear Window Defogger (EBL) Request - Rear Washer Request - Rear Wiper Request Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8506 REAR CONTROL PANEL The rear A/C-heater control (1) is located at the rear of the center floor console (2) and allows intermediate seat passengers to adjust rear air distribution, temperature and blower motor speed when the center control knob on the front A/C-heater control (3) is set to the Rear position. Automatic Single Zone With Rear Heat And A/C AUTOMATIC SINGLE ZONE WITH REAR HEAT AND A/C The A/C-heater control (1) for the automatic temperature control (ATC) single zone front and rear heating-A/C system allows both the front and intermediate seat passengers the ability to automatically or manually regulate air temperature as well as fan speed and provides floor outlets near the right rear door and overhead outlets at each rear intermediate outboard seating position. Primary control for the rear blower motor is on the front A/C-heater control. All controls are identified by ISO graphic symbols. FRONT CONTROL PANEL The front A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: - a push button Auto mode control (2). - a rocker switch control that selects comfort temperatures from 15° to 29° C (60° to 85° F) (3). Comfort temperatures are shown in the vacuum-fluorescent (VF) digital display (4). If the set temperature is 15° C (60° F) and down (-) is pressed, the A/C-heater control will attempt to achieve the lowest temperature possible, but the display will show LO. If the set temperature is 29° C (85° F) and up (+) is pressed, the A/C-heater control will attempt to achieve the highest temperature possible, but the display will show HIGH. Temperatures can be displayed in either Metric or Fahrenheit, which is selected from the overhead console. - a push button on/off control which allows the system to be completely turned off (5). The display is blank when the heater-A/C system is off, except for the electric backlight (EBL) symbol, if EBL is on. - a push button A/C on/off control (6). An ISO Snowflake symbol appears in the display when the A/C system is in operation, whether under manual or automatic control. - a push button air recirculation control (7). A ISO Recirculation symbol appears in the display when the button is pressed, or when the system exceeds 80 percent circulated air under automatic control due to high A/C demand. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8507 - five push button mode controls (8). An ISO mode symbol appears in the display to show the current mode setting when each button is manually pressed or selected by Auto mode. - a push button rear window defogger on/off control (9). An ISO symbol appears in the display when the rear window defogger system is in operation. The ISO symbol will appear on the display even with the heating-A/C system turned off. - a rotary control knob for rear window washer operation and rear window wiper speed selection (10). - a rocker switch control for front fan speed selection that can override the automatic controls (11). - a push button control for the rear heating-A/C system (12). - computer logic that remembers the settings of the controls when the ignition is turned off and retains those settings after a restart. If the system is off when the ignition is turned off it will be off when the engine is restarted, etc. - computer logic that provides variable air recirculation under high temperature and humidity conditions. Because recirculation is generally accompanied by increased fan noise, the proportion of recirculated to outside air gradually approaches full recirculation over a broad temperature range. The A/C-heater control for the ATC single zone front and rear heating-A/C system is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C-heater control cannot be repaired or adjusted and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamps (13) and the wiper/wash control knob are available for service replacement. The A/C-heater control utilizes integrated circuitry and information carried on the controller area network (CAN) B bus to monitor many sensors and switch inputs throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the internal circuitry and programming of the A/C-heater control allows it to control electronic functions and features of the ATC heating-A/C system. The inputs received by the A/C-heater control of the ATC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - Dimming - Refrigerant Pressure - Vehicle Identification Number - Vehicle Odometer - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient Air Temperature - Infrared Temperature Sensor - Ignition Voltage - Vehicle Speed The messages broadcasted by the A/C-heater control of the ATC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - A/C Request - A/C Select - Rear Window Defogger (EBL) Request - Rear Washer Request - Rear Wiper Request REAR CONTROL PANEL The rear A/C-heater control (1) is located at the rear of the center floor console (2) and allows intermediate seat passengers to adjust rear temperature and blower motor speed when the center control knob on the front A/C-heater control (3) is set to the Rear position. Automatic Dual Zone With Rear Heat And A/C Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8508 AUTOMATIC DUAL ZONE WITH REAR HEAT AND A/C The A/C-heater control (1) for the automatic temperature control (ATC) dual zone front heating-A/C system allows both the driver and the front seat passenger the ability to individually regulate air temperature for their side of the vehicle. Primary control for the rear heater-A/C system is also on the front A/C-heater control. An infrared sensor located in the overhead console detects thermal radiation emitted by the front seat occupants and their surroundings. All controls are identified by ISO graphic symbols. FRONT CONTROL PANEL The front A/C-heater control (1) and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: - a push button Auto mode control (2). - Two rocker switch controls (3 and 11) to select both of the front and the rear comfort temperatures from 15° to 29° C (60° to 85° F). Comfort temperatures for each zone are shown in the vacuum-flourescent (VF) digital display (4). If the set temperatures are 15° C (60° F) and down (-) is pressed, the A/C-heater control will attempt to achieve the lowest temperature possible, but the display will show LO. If the set temperatures are 29° C (85° F) and up (+) is pressed, the A/C-heater control will attempt to achieve the highest temperature possible, but the display will show HIGH. Temperatures can be displayed in either Metric or Fahrenheit, which is selected from the overhead console. - a rotary control knob with integral push button control for front fan speed selection that can override the automatic controls and on/off control which allows the heating-A/C system to be completely turned off (5). The display is blank when the heater-A/C system is off, except for the ISO rear window defogger symbol when the rear window defogger system is on. - a push button A/C on/off control (6). An ISO Snowflake symbol appears in the display when the A/C system is in operation, whether under manual or automatic control. - a push button air recirculation control (7). A ISO Recirculation symbol appears in the display when the button is pressed, or when the system exceeds 80 percent circulated air under automatic control due to high A/C demand. - five push button mode controls (8). An ISO mode symbol appears in the display to show the current mode setting when each button is manually pressed or selected by Auto mode. - a push button rear window defogger on/off control (9). An ISO symbol appears in the display when the rear window defogger system is in operation. The ISO symbol will appear on the display even with the heating-A/C system turned off. - a rotary control knob for rear window washer operation and rear window wiper speed selection (10). - a push button control for rear heating-A/C system operation (12). - two illumination lamps for backlighting of the controls (13). - computer logic that remembers the settings of the controls when the ignition is turned off and retains those settings after a restart. If the system is off when the ignition is turned off it will be off when the engine is restarted, etc. - computer logic that provides variable air recirculation under high temperature and humidity conditions. Because recirculation is generally accompanied by increased fan noise, the proportion of recirculated to outside air gradually approaches full recirculation over a broad temperature range. The A/C-heater control for the ATC front dual zone heating-A/C system is diagnosed using a scan tool. Always run the calibration procedure to verify that the concern is not a system issue prior to replacing an A/C-heater control. The front A/C-heater control cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamps, rear wiper/wash control knob and the front fan speed/on/off control knob are available for service replacement. The A/C-heater control utilizes integrated circuitry and information carried on the controller area network (CAN) B bus to monitor many sensors and switch inputs throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the internal circuitry and programming of the A/C-heater control allows it to control electronic functions and features of the ATC heating-A/C system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8509 The inputs received by the A/C-heater control of the ATC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - Dimming - Refrigerant Pressure - Vehicle Identification Number - Vehicle Odometer - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient Air Temperature - Infrared Temperature Sensor - Ignition Voltage - Vehicle Speed The messages broadcasted by the A/C-heater control of the ATC heating-A/C system on the CAN B bus are as follows: - A/C Request - A/C Select - Rear Window Defogger (EBL) Request - Rear Washer Request - Rear Wiper Request REAR CONTROL PANEL The rear A/C-heater control (1) is located at the rear of the center floor console (2) and allows intermediate seat passengers to adjust rear temperature and blower motor speed when the control knob on the front A/C-heater control (3) is set to the Rear Manual position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8510 Control Assembly: Description and Operation Controls - Rear DESCRIPTION The rear A/C-heater control (1) for the rear heater-A/C system is located at the rear of the center floor console and allows intermediate seat passengers to adjust rear temperature and blower motor speed when the front A/C-heater control is set to the Rear position, otherwise the front A/C-heater control operates both the front and the rear heater-A/C systems. The rear A/C-heater control contains: - a rotary control knob (2) for rear fan speed selection and turning the rear heater-A/C system off. - a rotary control knob (3) for rear temperature control. With the rear A/C-heater control active, temperature selection dictates the air distribution mode (floor or overhead air) of the rear heater-A/C system. A cool temperature setting directs flow to the overhead outlets and a warm temperature setting to the floor. The rear A/C-heater control is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear A/C-heater control cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamp (4) and the control knobs are available for service replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front Control Assembly: Service and Repair Controls - Front Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel, disconnect the wire harness connector(s) (2) from the A/C-heater control (3) and place the center bezel on a workbench. 3. Remove the four screws (1) that secure the A/C-heater control (2) to the instrument panel center bezel (3). 4. Remove the A/C-heater control from the instrument panel center bezel. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8513 1. Position the A/C-heater control (2) into the instrument panel center bezel (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the A/C-heater control to the instrument panel center bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector(s) (2) to the A/C-heater control (3) and install the instrument panel center bezel (1). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8514 Control Assembly: Service and Repair Controls - Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Using a small screwdriver or similar flat blade tool (1), gently push down on the clip retainer (2) located at each top corner of the rear A/C-heater control (3). Rotate the top of rear A/C-heater control downwards to release the two bottom retaining tabs from the slots in the center floor console. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the rear A/C-heater control (2). 4. Remove the rear A/C-heater control from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8515 1. Position the rear A/C-heater control (2) near the center floor console. 2. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the back of the rear A/C-heater control. 3. Insert the two locator tabs on the bottom of the rear A/C-heater control (1) into the two slots on the bottom edge of the floor console opening (2). 4. Rotate the rear A/C-heater control (3) forward far enough to align the two snap clips on the top of the rear A/C-heater control (4) with the receptacles in the top edge of the floor console opening (5). 5. Using hand pressure, press the top edge of the rear A/C-heater control forward until the two snap clips are fully seated in into the receptacles. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Using a scan tool, calibrate the Rear Temperature Selector potentiometer calibration values. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8516 8. Verify that the Actuator Calibration of the front A/C-heater control has passed. If an Actuator Calibration has not passed correct any errors before proceeding. 9. Rotate the Rear Temperature Selector counter (1) clockwise to the Cold Position, allow the Selector to remain in the Cold Position for 5 seconds. 10. Rotate the Rear Temperature Selector Clockwise to the Hot Position, allow the Selector to remain in the Cold Position for 5 seconds. 11. Calibration is now complete. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Control Module HVAC: Locations Component ID: 181 Component : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C1 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z961 10BK 3 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 4 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8520 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C2 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8521 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8522 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 181 Component : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C1 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z961 10BK 3 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 4 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8523 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C2 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8524 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description DESCRIPTION A blower motor power module is used on this model when it is equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) heating-A/C system. Models equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) heating-A/C system use a blower motor resistor block, instead of the blower motor power module. The blower motor power module is mounted to the rear of the HVAC housing, directly behind the glove box. The blower motor power module consists of a molded plastic mounting plate with two integral connector receptacles (1). Concealed behind the mounting plate is the power module electronic circuitry and a large finned heat sink (2). The blower motor power module is accessed for service from beneath the right side of the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description > Page 8527 Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Front Blower Motor Power Module - Operation OPERATION The blower motor power module is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. A second connector receptacle receives the wire harness connector from the blower motor. The blower motor power module allows the microprocessor-based automatic temperature control (ATC) A/C-heater control to calculate and provide infinitely variable blower motor speeds based upon either manual blower switch input or the ATC programming using a pulse width modulated (PWM) circuit strategy. The PWM voltage is applied to a comparator circuit which compares the PWM signal voltage to the blower motor feedback voltage. The resulting output drives the power module circuitry, which provides a linear output voltage to change or maintain the desired blower speed. The blower motor power module is diagnosed using a scan tool. The blower motor power module cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The heat sink for the blower motor power module may get very hot during normal operation. If the blower motor was turned on prior to servicing the blower motor power module, wait five minutes to allow the heat sink to cool before performing diagnosis or service. Failure to take this precaution can result in possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. If equipped with a trim cover (2), remove the two screws (1) that secure the trim cover over the blower motor power module (3) located below the right side of the instrument panel and remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the two wire harness connectors (1) from the blower motor power module (2). 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor power module to the front HVAC housing (4). 5. Remove the blower motor power module from the front HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal > Page 8530 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Front Blower Motor Power Module - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor power module (2) into the front HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor power module to the front HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the two wire harness connectors (1) to the blower motor power module. 4. If equipped with a trim cover (2), install the trim cover over the blower motor power module (3) and install the two retaining screws (1). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 8539 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid Technical Service Bulletin # 24-006-06 Date: 060810 A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid NUMBER: 24-006-06 GROUP: Heating & A/C DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 24-013-05, DATED AUGUST 4, 2005, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE AN ADDITIONAL MODEL, YEAR AND REVISED AB/CS/LX/RS/WK/XK REPAIR PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: A/C Cooling Coil Odor OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves inspecting for leaves and other foreign material, cleaning, and treating the cooling coil and housing. MODELS: 1995-2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1995-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - **2007** (CS) Pacifica 1998 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - **2007** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Pickup 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2002 - **2007** (KJ) Liberty 1993 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/LHS/New Yorker/Intrepid/Vision 2005 - **2007** (LX) 300/**Charger**/Magnum 2005 - **2007** (ND) Dakota 2002 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX 2.0 2001 - **2007** (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - **2007** (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - **2007** (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe 1997 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2002 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 - 2004 (WJ/WG) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2007** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2007** (XK**/XH)** Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8544 Some vehicle operators may experience a musty odor from the A/C system, primarily at start up in hot and humid climates. This odor may be the result of microbial growth on the cooling coil. During normal A/C system operation, condensation forms in and around the NC cooling coil. When airborne pollutants mix with this condensation, bacteria and fungi growth begins and odor results. DIAGNOSIS: If the operator describes, or the technician experiences a musty odor when operating the A/C system, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure based on the vehicle model. PARTS REQUIRED: A/C COOLING COIL CLEANER REQUIREMENTS BY VEHICLE MODEL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8545 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. AB/CS/LX/RS/WK/XK Vehicle Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. On LX/RS/**2005 WK/WH (2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK vehicles skip to step 8) (AB/CS** vehicles proceed to next step), raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 3. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 4. On **2005 WK/WH** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), fabricate the cooling coil drain plug as follows (Fig. 1): a. Gather a 457.2 mm (18 in.) long, 9.8 mm (3/8 in.) drive socket extension; a deep 12 mm, 9.8 mm (3/8 in.) drive socket, and a 152.4 mm (6 in.) piece of 15.9 mm (5/8 in.) ID heater hose, p/n HHR00058AA b. Place the socket on the end of the extension. Slide approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.) of the heater hose over the socket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8546 c. Slip the heater hose over the cooling coil drain tube, located above the right side of the transmission using the socket and extension to reach up between the frame and the exhaust. Leave the hose socket and extension in place (Fig. 2). Proceed to Step # 7. 5. Cap/clamp off the drain tube using a suitable cap/clamp. 6. AB vehicles proceed to Step # 12, other vehicles proceed to next step. 7. On LX/RS/**2005 WK/WH** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. 8. Remove passenger side floor mat. 9. Place a protective cover over the carpet and the passenger front seat. 10. On LX/RS/**WH/WK/XH**XK vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), remove the glove box to gain access to the blower motor resistor /power module. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 23 - Body, Instrument Panel, Glove Box 11. On LX/**WH/WK/XH/XK vehicles, remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 23 - Body, Instrument Panel, Instrument Panel Silencer. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK vehicles remove the blower motor and use a shop vacuum to clean the evaporator coil, reinstall the blower motor and skip to step 18. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** 12. Remove the 2 screws securing the blower motor resistor/power module in the NC housing and remove the blower motor resistor/power module. Do not disconnect the electrical connector. 13. On LX/**2005 WK/WH** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), proceed to Step # 18 14. If the vehicle is not equipped with an A/C air filter, proceed to next step. If equipped with an A/C air filter, remove the A/C air filter. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning, Distribution, Air Filter. 15. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 16. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. 17. If not equipped with an A/C air filter, proceed to next step. If equipped with an A/C air filter, install the air filter door (do not install the air filter at this time). 18. Open all the windows in the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8547 19. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (p/n 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 20. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 21. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor/power module opening. 22. Spray all of the cooling coil cleaner onto the cooling coil continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered until the required number of bottles are empty (See table for required number of bottles). 23. Allow the vehicle sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 24. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 27. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 25. Remove the cap/clamp from the drain tube. 26. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. 27. Fill each empty cleaner bottle with normal tap water. 28. One at a time, screw each bottle of water onto the applicator tool. 29. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor opening. 30. Spray the full contents of the water onto the evaporator continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered with water. 31. Install the blower motor resistor/power module. 32. Start the engine. 33. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 34. Set the blower to HIGH. 35. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 36. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 37. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 38. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 39. Allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 40. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 41. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 44. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** 42. Cap/clamp off the drain tube using a suitable cap. 43. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK/** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 44. Open all windows in the vehicle. 45. Remove the blower motor resistor/power module. 46. Shake a 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8548 47. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor opening. Spray the full contents of the bottle onto the evaporator while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly coated. 48. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. 49. Install the blower motor resistor/power module. 50. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 53. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 51. Remove the drain tube cap/clamp. 52. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. 53. Start the engine. 54. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 55. Set the blower to HIGH. 56. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 57. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 58. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 59. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 60. Allow the engine to run for 20 minutes. 61. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 62. Fill an 8 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 63. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 67. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** CAUTION: In the following step be careful not to damage the A/C cooling coil. 64. Using a suitable object (a wire coat hanger for example), probe the drain tube 3.8 - 5.1 cm (1.5 - 2 in.) to ensure that the dried coil coating is not restricting the flow from the drain tube. 65. AB vehicles proceed to Step # 72, CS vehicles proceed to Step # 68, LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK** vehicles proceed to Step # 66. 66. Lower the vehicle. 67. On **LX/WH/WK/XH/XK** vehicles (RS vehicles proceed to next step), install the right silencer pad. 68. Install the glove box. 69. If the vehicle is not equipped with an A/C air filter, proceed to the next step. If equipped with an A/C filter, remove the air filter door and install the A/C air filter. Replace with a new filter, if necessary. See the parts table for the appropriate part number filter. 70. Remove the carpet and seat protector. 71. Install the floor mat. 72. Close the hood. AN/DN/DR/HB/JR/KJ/LH/ND/PL/PT/TJ/WG/WJ Vehicles Procedure Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8549 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 3. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 4. On AN/DN/ND - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), remove the exhaust heat shield covering the cooling coil housing drain. 5. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 6. On AN/DN/DR/HB/KJ vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), cap off the drain tube using a suitable cap. When the drain tube is capped off, proceed to Step # 9. 7. On ND vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), plug the cooling coil drain using a piece of plastic or a shop towel. When the drain tube is plugged, proceed to Step #9. 8. Clamp off the drain tube. 9. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 10. Remove passenger side floor mat. 11. Place a protective cover over the carpet and the passenger front seat. 12. If applicable, remove the silencer pad from under the instrument panel on the right side to gain access to the blower motor. 13. On LH vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), remove the lower right under panel duct and blower motor cover. 14. Disconnect the blower motor wire harness connector and remove the blower motor. 15. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 16. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. 17. Open all the windows in the vehicle. NOTE: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, and protective clothing. NOTE: No occupants should be in the vehicle during material application. 18. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (p/n 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 19. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 20. Insert the applicator tool into the blower motor opening. Spray all of the cooling coil cleaner onto the cooling coil until the required number of bottles are empty (See table for required number of bottles). 21. Allow the vehicle to sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 22. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 23. Remove the drain tube clamp/cap/plug. 24. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 25. Fill each empty cleaner bottle with normal tap water. 26. One at a time, screw each bottle of normal tap water onto the applicator tool. 27. Spray all of the normal tap water onto the cooling coil until each bottle is empty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8550 28. Install the blower motor and connect the blower motor wire harness connector. 29. Connect the negative battery cable. 30. Start the engine. 31. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 32. Set the blower to HIGH - A/C OFF. 33. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 34. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 35. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 36. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 37. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 38. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. 39. Install the drain tube clamp/cap/plug. 40. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 41. Open all the windows in the vehicle. 42. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 43. Disconnect the blower motor wire harness connector and remove the blower motor. 44. Shake an 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. 45. Insert the applicator tool into the blower motor opening. Spray the full contents of the bottle on the cooling coil being carefully to cover the entire surface of the cooling coil. 46. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. 47. Install the blower motor and connect the blower motor wire harness connector. 48. Connect the negative battery cable. 49. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 50. Remove the drain tube clamp/cap. 51. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 52. Start the engine. 53. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 54. Set the blower to HIGH - A/C OFF. 55. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 56. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8551 57. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 58. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 59. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 60. Fill the 4 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 61. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. CAUTION: In the following step be careful not to damage the A/C cooling coil. 62. Using a suitable object (a wire coat hanger for example), probe the drain tube 3.8 - 5.1 cm (1.5 - 2 in.) to ensure that the dried coil coating is not restricting the flow from the drain tube. 63. On AN/DN/ND - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), install the exhaust heat shield covering the cooling coil housing drain. 64. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 65. On LH vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), install the blower motor cover and lower right under panel duct. 66. Remove the carpet and seat protector. 67. If applicable, install the silencer pad under the right side of the instrument panel. 68. Install floor mat. 69. Close the hood. ST Vehicle Procedure 1. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 2. Remove passenger side floor mat. 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet and the passenger front seat. 4. Remove the joint duct. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning, Blower Assembly and Resistor, Joint Duct. 5. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 6. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. NOTE: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 7. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (p/n 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 8. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 9. Insert the applicator tool into the opening created by the joint duct removal. 10. Spray the full contents of 2 bottles of cooling coil cleaner onto the evaporator, moving the tool so that the evaporator is completely covered, until both bottles are empty (16 oz. total). 11. Allow the vehicle to sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 12. Fill both of the empty cooling coil cleaner bottles with normal tap water. 13. Screw one bottle of water onto the applicator tool. 14. Insert the applicator tool into the opening of the heater/cooler unit at the evaporator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8552 15. Spray the full contents of water until the bottle is empty. 16. Repeat Step #13 through Step #15 using the second bottle of water. When both bottles of water are empty, proceed to the next step. 17. Install the joint duct. 18. Disconnect the A/C clutch electrical connector at the A/C compressor. 19. Start the engine. 20. Set the blower to HIGH - A/C OFF. 21. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 22. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 23. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 24. Open windows slightly (about 1/2 inch opening). 25. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 26. Turn the engine off. 27. Turn the ignition switch ON, do not start the engine, to allow blower motor operation. 28. Fully open all windows. 29. Remove the outer glove box and the inner glove box. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 23 - Body, 23C Body Interior, Instrument Panel CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 30. Shake the 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. 31. Insert the applicator tool into the recirculation inlet (behind glove box opening). Spray the full contents of the bottle in the airstream until the bottle is empty. 32. Start the engine. 33. Set the blower to HIGH. 34. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 35. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 36. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 37. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 38. Open windows slightly (about 1/2 inch opening). 39. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 40. Turn the ignition switch to the off position. 41. Fill the 4 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 42. Connect the A/C compressor clutch electrical connector at the compressor. 43. Open the right side panel outlet vent. 44. Install inner glove box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8553 45. Install outer glove box. 46. Remove the carpet and seat protector. 47. Install floor mat. VA Vehicle Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 3. Clamp off the drain tube using a suitable clamp. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the HVAC filter cover and HVAC filter. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning, Distribution, Air Filter. 6. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 7. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. 8. Open all the windows in the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 9. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (pin 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 10. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 11. Insert the applicator tool into the HVAC filter opening. 12. Spray all of the cooling coil cleaner onto the cooling coil continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered until the required number of bottles are empty (See table for required number of bottles). 13. Allow the vehicle sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 14. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 15. Remove the clamp from the drain tube. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Fill each empty cleaner bottle with normal tap water. 18. One at a time, screw each bottle of water onto the applicator tool. 19. Insert the applicator tool into the HVAC filter opening. 20. Spray the full contents of the water onto the evaporator continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered with water. 21. Install the HVAC filter cover (do not install the HVAC filter at this time). 22. Start the engine. 23. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 24. Set the blower to HIGH. 25. Set the A/C switch to NC OFF. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8554 26. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 27. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 28. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 29. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 30. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 31. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 32. Clamp off the drain tube using a suitable clamp. 33. Lower the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 34. Open all windows in the vehicle. 35. Remove the HVAC filter cover. 36. Shake a 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. 37. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor opening. Spray the full contents of the bottle onto the evaporator while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly coated. 38. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. 39. Install the HVAC filter. Replace with a new filter, p/n 05103600AA, if necessary. 40. Install the HVAC filter cover. 41. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 42. Remove the drain tube clamp. 43. Lower the vehicle. 44. Start the engine. 45. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 46. Set the blower to HIGH. 47. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 48. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 49. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 50. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 51. With the engine running, allow the blower motor to operate for 20 minutes. 52. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 53. Fill an 8 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 54. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8555 CAUTION: In the following step be careful not to damage the A/C cooling coil. 55. Using a suitable object (a wire coat hanger for example), probe the drain tube 3.8 - 5.1 cm (1.5 - 2 in.) to ensure that the dried coil coating is not restricting the flow from the drain tube. 56. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 8561 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid Technical Service Bulletin # 24-006-06 Date: 060810 A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid NUMBER: 24-006-06 GROUP: Heating & A/C DATE: Approval Pending THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 24-013-05, DATED AUGUST 4, 2005, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE AN ADDITIONAL MODEL, YEAR AND REVISED AB/CS/LX/RS/WK/XK REPAIR PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: A/C Cooling Coil Odor OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves inspecting for leaves and other foreign material, cleaning, and treating the cooling coil and housing. MODELS: 1995-2003 (AB) Ram Van/Wagon 1995-2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - **2007** (CS) Pacifica 1998 - 2003 (DN) Durango 2002 - **2007** (DR/DH/D1) Ram Pickup 2004 - **2007** (HB) Durango 2001 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2002 - **2007** (KJ) Liberty 1993 - 2004 (LH) 300M/Concorde/LHS/New Yorker/Intrepid/Vision 2005 - **2007** (LX) 300/**Charger**/Magnum 2005 - **2007** (ND) Dakota 2002 (PG) PT Cruiser (International Markets) 1995 - 2005 (PL) Neon/SX 2.0 2001 - **2007** (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - **2007** (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - **2007** (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2001 - 2005 (ST) Sebring Coupe/Stratus Coupe 1997 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2002 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 1999 - 2004 (WJ/WG) Grand Cherokee 2005 - **2007** (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - **2007** (XK**/XH)** Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8566 Some vehicle operators may experience a musty odor from the A/C system, primarily at start up in hot and humid climates. This odor may be the result of microbial growth on the cooling coil. During normal A/C system operation, condensation forms in and around the NC cooling coil. When airborne pollutants mix with this condensation, bacteria and fungi growth begins and odor results. DIAGNOSIS: If the operator describes, or the technician experiences a musty odor when operating the A/C system, perform the appropriate Repair Procedure based on the vehicle model. PARTS REQUIRED: A/C COOLING COIL CLEANER REQUIREMENTS BY VEHICLE MODEL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8567 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. AB/CS/LX/RS/WK/XK Vehicle Procedure 1. Open the hood. 2. On LX/RS/**2005 WK/WH (2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK vehicles skip to step 8) (AB/CS** vehicles proceed to next step), raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 3. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 4. On **2005 WK/WH** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), fabricate the cooling coil drain plug as follows (Fig. 1): a. Gather a 457.2 mm (18 in.) long, 9.8 mm (3/8 in.) drive socket extension; a deep 12 mm, 9.8 mm (3/8 in.) drive socket, and a 152.4 mm (6 in.) piece of 15.9 mm (5/8 in.) ID heater hose, p/n HHR00058AA b. Place the socket on the end of the extension. Slide approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.) of the heater hose over the socket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8568 c. Slip the heater hose over the cooling coil drain tube, located above the right side of the transmission using the socket and extension to reach up between the frame and the exhaust. Leave the hose socket and extension in place (Fig. 2). Proceed to Step # 7. 5. Cap/clamp off the drain tube using a suitable cap/clamp. 6. AB vehicles proceed to Step # 12, other vehicles proceed to next step. 7. On LX/RS/**2005 WK/WH** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. 8. Remove passenger side floor mat. 9. Place a protective cover over the carpet and the passenger front seat. 10. On LX/RS/**WH/WK/XH**XK vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), remove the glove box to gain access to the blower motor resistor /power module. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 23 - Body, Instrument Panel, Glove Box 11. On LX/**WH/WK/XH/XK vehicles, remove the passenger side instrument panel silencer. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 23 - Body, Instrument Panel, Instrument Panel Silencer. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK vehicles remove the blower motor and use a shop vacuum to clean the evaporator coil, reinstall the blower motor and skip to step 18. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** 12. Remove the 2 screws securing the blower motor resistor/power module in the NC housing and remove the blower motor resistor/power module. Do not disconnect the electrical connector. 13. On LX/**2005 WK/WH** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), proceed to Step # 18 14. If the vehicle is not equipped with an A/C air filter, proceed to next step. If equipped with an A/C air filter, remove the A/C air filter. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning, Distribution, Air Filter. 15. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 16. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. 17. If not equipped with an A/C air filter, proceed to next step. If equipped with an A/C air filter, install the air filter door (do not install the air filter at this time). 18. Open all the windows in the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8569 19. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (p/n 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 20. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 21. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor/power module opening. 22. Spray all of the cooling coil cleaner onto the cooling coil continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered until the required number of bottles are empty (See table for required number of bottles). 23. Allow the vehicle sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 24. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 27. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 25. Remove the cap/clamp from the drain tube. 26. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. 27. Fill each empty cleaner bottle with normal tap water. 28. One at a time, screw each bottle of water onto the applicator tool. 29. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor opening. 30. Spray the full contents of the water onto the evaporator continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered with water. 31. Install the blower motor resistor/power module. 32. Start the engine. 33. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 34. Set the blower to HIGH. 35. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 36. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 37. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 38. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 39. Allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 40. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 41. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 44. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** 42. Cap/clamp off the drain tube using a suitable cap. 43. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK/** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 44. Open all windows in the vehicle. 45. Remove the blower motor resistor/power module. 46. Shake a 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8570 47. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor opening. Spray the full contents of the bottle onto the evaporator while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly coated. 48. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. 49. Install the blower motor resistor/power module. 50. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 53. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 51. Remove the drain tube cap/clamp. 52. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK** vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), lower the vehicle. 53. Start the engine. 54. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 55. Set the blower to HIGH. 56. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 57. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 58. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 59. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 60. Allow the engine to run for 20 minutes. 61. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 62. Fill an 8 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 63. On LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK vehicles, raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. On 2006 - 2007 WH/WK/XH/XK skip to step 67. Other vehicles proceed to next step.** CAUTION: In the following step be careful not to damage the A/C cooling coil. 64. Using a suitable object (a wire coat hanger for example), probe the drain tube 3.8 - 5.1 cm (1.5 - 2 in.) to ensure that the dried coil coating is not restricting the flow from the drain tube. 65. AB vehicles proceed to Step # 72, CS vehicles proceed to Step # 68, LX/RS/**2005 WH/WK** vehicles proceed to Step # 66. 66. Lower the vehicle. 67. On **LX/WH/WK/XH/XK** vehicles (RS vehicles proceed to next step), install the right silencer pad. 68. Install the glove box. 69. If the vehicle is not equipped with an A/C air filter, proceed to the next step. If equipped with an A/C filter, remove the air filter door and install the A/C air filter. Replace with a new filter, if necessary. See the parts table for the appropriate part number filter. 70. Remove the carpet and seat protector. 71. Install the floor mat. 72. Close the hood. AN/DN/DR/HB/JR/KJ/LH/ND/PL/PT/TJ/WG/WJ Vehicles Procedure Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8571 1. Open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 3. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 4. On AN/DN/ND - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), remove the exhaust heat shield covering the cooling coil housing drain. 5. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 6. On AN/DN/DR/HB/KJ vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), cap off the drain tube using a suitable cap. When the drain tube is capped off, proceed to Step # 9. 7. On ND vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), plug the cooling coil drain using a piece of plastic or a shop towel. When the drain tube is plugged, proceed to Step #9. 8. Clamp off the drain tube. 9. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 10. Remove passenger side floor mat. 11. Place a protective cover over the carpet and the passenger front seat. 12. If applicable, remove the silencer pad from under the instrument panel on the right side to gain access to the blower motor. 13. On LH vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), remove the lower right under panel duct and blower motor cover. 14. Disconnect the blower motor wire harness connector and remove the blower motor. 15. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 16. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. 17. Open all the windows in the vehicle. NOTE: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, and protective clothing. NOTE: No occupants should be in the vehicle during material application. 18. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (p/n 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 19. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 20. Insert the applicator tool into the blower motor opening. Spray all of the cooling coil cleaner onto the cooling coil until the required number of bottles are empty (See table for required number of bottles). 21. Allow the vehicle to sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 22. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 23. Remove the drain tube clamp/cap/plug. 24. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 25. Fill each empty cleaner bottle with normal tap water. 26. One at a time, screw each bottle of normal tap water onto the applicator tool. 27. Spray all of the normal tap water onto the cooling coil until each bottle is empty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8572 28. Install the blower motor and connect the blower motor wire harness connector. 29. Connect the negative battery cable. 30. Start the engine. 31. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 32. Set the blower to HIGH - A/C OFF. 33. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 34. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 35. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 36. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 37. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 38. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. 39. Install the drain tube clamp/cap/plug. 40. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 41. Open all the windows in the vehicle. 42. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 43. Disconnect the blower motor wire harness connector and remove the blower motor. 44. Shake an 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. 45. Insert the applicator tool into the blower motor opening. Spray the full contents of the bottle on the cooling coil being carefully to cover the entire surface of the cooling coil. 46. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. 47. Install the blower motor and connect the blower motor wire harness connector. 48. Connect the negative battery cable. 49. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 50. Remove the drain tube clamp/cap. 51. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 52. Start the engine. 53. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 54. Set the blower to HIGH - A/C OFF. 55. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 56. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8573 57. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 58. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 59. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 60. Fill the 4 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 61. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), raise the vehicle. CAUTION: In the following step be careful not to damage the A/C cooling coil. 62. Using a suitable object (a wire coat hanger for example), probe the drain tube 3.8 - 5.1 cm (1.5 - 2 in.) to ensure that the dried coil coating is not restricting the flow from the drain tube. 63. On AN/DN/ND - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), install the exhaust heat shield covering the cooling coil housing drain. 64. On AN/DN/HB/JR/LH/ND/PT/WG/WJ - vehicles (other vehicles proceed to the next step), lower the vehicle. 65. On LH vehicles (other vehicles proceed to next step), install the blower motor cover and lower right under panel duct. 66. Remove the carpet and seat protector. 67. If applicable, install the silencer pad under the right side of the instrument panel. 68. Install floor mat. 69. Close the hood. ST Vehicle Procedure 1. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 2. Remove passenger side floor mat. 3. Place a protective cover over the carpet and the passenger front seat. 4. Remove the joint duct. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning, Blower Assembly and Resistor, Joint Duct. 5. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 6. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. NOTE: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 7. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (p/n 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 8. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 9. Insert the applicator tool into the opening created by the joint duct removal. 10. Spray the full contents of 2 bottles of cooling coil cleaner onto the evaporator, moving the tool so that the evaporator is completely covered, until both bottles are empty (16 oz. total). 11. Allow the vehicle to sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 12. Fill both of the empty cooling coil cleaner bottles with normal tap water. 13. Screw one bottle of water onto the applicator tool. 14. Insert the applicator tool into the opening of the heater/cooler unit at the evaporator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8574 15. Spray the full contents of water until the bottle is empty. 16. Repeat Step #13 through Step #15 using the second bottle of water. When both bottles of water are empty, proceed to the next step. 17. Install the joint duct. 18. Disconnect the A/C clutch electrical connector at the A/C compressor. 19. Start the engine. 20. Set the blower to HIGH - A/C OFF. 21. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 22. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 23. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 24. Open windows slightly (about 1/2 inch opening). 25. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 26. Turn the engine off. 27. Turn the ignition switch ON, do not start the engine, to allow blower motor operation. 28. Fully open all windows. 29. Remove the outer glove box and the inner glove box. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 23 - Body, 23C Body Interior, Instrument Panel CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 30. Shake the 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. 31. Insert the applicator tool into the recirculation inlet (behind glove box opening). Spray the full contents of the bottle in the airstream until the bottle is empty. 32. Start the engine. 33. Set the blower to HIGH. 34. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 35. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 36. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 37. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 38. Open windows slightly (about 1/2 inch opening). 39. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 40. Turn the ignition switch to the off position. 41. Fill the 4 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 42. Connect the A/C compressor clutch electrical connector at the compressor. 43. Open the right side panel outlet vent. 44. Install inner glove box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8575 45. Install outer glove box. 46. Remove the carpet and seat protector. 47. Install floor mat. VA Vehicle Procedure 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Inspect the cooling coil housing drain for leaves or other foreign material that may be blocking the drain. 3. Clamp off the drain tube using a suitable clamp. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Remove the HVAC filter cover and HVAC filter. Refer to the detailed service information available in TechCONNECT, under: Service Info, 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning, Distribution, Air Filter. 6. Inspect and remove any leaves and debris. 7. If necessary, use a shop vacuum to clean the cooling coil. 8. Open all the windows in the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 9. Screw the bottle of cooling coil cleaner (pin 05170022AA) onto the applicator tool. 10. Connect the assembled applicator tool to the shop compressed air supply line. 11. Insert the applicator tool into the HVAC filter opening. 12. Spray all of the cooling coil cleaner onto the cooling coil continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered until the required number of bottles are empty (See table for required number of bottles). 13. Allow the vehicle sit for a minimum of 30 minutes. 14. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 15. Remove the clamp from the drain tube. 16. Lower the vehicle. 17. Fill each empty cleaner bottle with normal tap water. 18. One at a time, screw each bottle of water onto the applicator tool. 19. Insert the applicator tool into the HVAC filter opening. 20. Spray the full contents of the water onto the evaporator continuously while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly covered with water. 21. Install the HVAC filter cover (do not install the HVAC filter at this time). 22. Start the engine. 23. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 24. Set the blower to HIGH. 25. Set the A/C switch to NC OFF. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8576 26. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 27. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 28. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 29. With the engine running, allow the blower to operate for 20 minutes. 30. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 31. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 32. Clamp off the drain tube using a suitable clamp. 33. Lower the vehicle. CAUTION: Technician must use eye protection, rubber gloves, protective clothing, and avoid breathing vapors. 34. Open all windows in the vehicle. 35. Remove the HVAC filter cover. 36. Shake a 8 ounce bottle of Cooling Coil Coating (p/n 04728942AB), and screw the bottle onto the applicator tool. 37. Insert the applicator tool into the blower resistor opening. Spray the full contents of the bottle onto the evaporator while moving the applicator tool up and down and back and forth so that the evaporator is evenly coated. 38. Allow the vehicle to sit for 30 minutes. 39. Install the HVAC filter. Replace with a new filter, p/n 05103600AA, if necessary. 40. Install the HVAC filter cover. 41. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. CAUTION: The excess cooling coil coating will drain when the cap/clamp/plug is removed in the next step. 42. Remove the drain tube clamp. 43. Lower the vehicle. 44. Start the engine. 45. Raise all the windows to a slightly open position (about 1/2 inch opening). 46. Set the blower to HIGH. 47. Set the A/C switch to A/C OFF. 48. Set mode switch to PANEL OUTLETS. 49. Set temperature switch to FULL HEAT. 50. Set recirculation switch to RECIRCULATE. 51. With the engine running, allow the blower motor to operate for 20 minutes. 52. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 53. Fill an 8 ounce plastic bottle with warm water and screw onto applicator tool. Clean tool by spraying warm water under pressure into the shop sink. Wipe the tool and store for next use. 54. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 24-006-06 > Aug > 06 > A/C - Musty Odors When Hot/Humid > Page 8577 CAUTION: In the following step be careful not to damage the A/C cooling coil. 55. Using a suitable object (a wire coat hanger for example), probe the drain tube 3.8 - 5.1 cm (1.5 - 2 in.) to ensure that the dried coil coating is not restricting the flow from the drain tube. 56. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front A/C Evaporator - Description Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Front A/C Evaporator - Description DESCRIPTION The A/C evaporator (1) for the front heating-A/C system is located within the front HVAC housing (2), behind the instrument panel. The A/C evaporator and insulator (3) are positioned in the HVAC housing so that all air entering the housing must pass over the evaporator fins before it is distributed through the heating-A/C system ducts and outlets. However, air passing over the evaporator fins will only be conditioned when the A/C compressor is engaged and circulating refrigerant through the A/C evaporator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front A/C Evaporator - Description > Page 8580 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Front A/C Evaporator - Operation OPERATION Refrigerant enters the A/C evaporator from the A/C expansion valve as a low-temperature, low-pressure mixture of liquid and gas. As air flows over the fins of the A/C evaporator, the humidity in the air condenses on the fins, and the heat from the air is absorbed by the refrigerant. Heat absorption causes the refrigerant to boil and vaporize. The refrigerant becomes a low-pressure gas when it leaves the A/C evaporator. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line or expansion valve is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C evaporator has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C expansion valve is removed from the A/C evaporator. The A/C evaporator cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front A/C Evaporator - Description > Page 8581 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Rear A/C Evaporator - Description DESCRIPTION The rear A/C evaporator (1) is located within the rear HVAC housing (2), behind the right interior quarter panel trim. The rear A/C evaporator is positioned in the rear HVAC housing so that all air entering the housing must pass over the evaporator fins before it is distributed through the rear heating-A/C system ducts and outlets. However, air passing over the rear evaporator fins will only be conditioned when the A/C compressor is engaged and circulating refrigerant through the A/C evaporator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front A/C Evaporator - Description > Page 8582 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Rear A/C Evaporator - Operation OPERATION Refrigerant enters the rear A/C evaporator from the rear A/C expansion valve as a low-temperature, low-pressure mixture of liquid and gas. As air flows over the fins of the rear A/C evaporator, the humidity in the air condenses on the fins, and the heat from the air is absorbed by the refrigerant. Heat absorption causes the refrigerant to boil and vaporize. The refrigerant becomes a low-pressure gas when it leaves the rear A/C evaporator. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line or expansion valve is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C evaporator has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the rear A/C expansion valve is removed from the rear A/C evaporator. The rear A/C evaporator cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front A/C Evaporator - Removal Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Front A/C Evaporator - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the HVAC housing. 2. Disassemble the HVAC housing. 3. Remove the probe of the evaporator temperature sensor from the fins of the A/C evaporator. 4. Carefully lift the A/C evaporator (1) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). 5. If required, remove the evaporator insulator (3) from around the A/C evaporator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front A/C Evaporator - Removal > Page 8585 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Front A/C Evaporator - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: If only the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line or expansion valve is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Install the A/C evaporator (1) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). Make sure that the evaporator drain is clean and unrestricted and that the evaporator insulator (3) is properly installed. 2. Install the probe for the evaporator temperature sensor into the fins of the A/C evaporator. 3. Assemble the HVAC housing. 4. Install the HVAC housing. 5. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front A/C Evaporator - Removal > Page 8586 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Rear A/C Evaporator - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear HVAC housing (1) and place it on a workbench. 2. Disconnect the rear HVAC wire harness (2) from the rear blower motor (3) and the rear blower motor resistor (4). 3. Remove the screws (5) that secure the rear air inlet housing (6) to the rear HVAC housing. 4. Remove the rear air inlet housing from the rear HVAC housing. 5. Remove the insulator (1) from around the rear A/C evaporator tubes (2) to gain access the two rear A/C expansion valve bolts (3). 6. Remove the two bolts that secure the rear A/C evaporator tubes to the rear A/C expansion valve (4) and the rear evaporator extension tube tapping block (5). 7. Carefully lift the rear A/C evaporator (6) out of the top of the rear HVAC housing (7). 8. Remove the rear A/C expansion valve from the rear evaporator extension tube tapping block and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened rear evaporator and extension tube fittings and all rear expansion valve ports. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front A/C Evaporator - Removal > Page 8587 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Rear A/C Evaporator - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: If only the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Carefully position the rear A/C evaporator (6) into the top of the rear HVAC housing (7). 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened rear evaporator and extension tube fittings and all rear expansion valve ports. 3. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them on the evaporator tube and extension tube fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the rear A/C expansion valve (4) between the rear A/C evaporator tubes (2) and the rear extension tube tapping block (5). 5. Install the two bolts (3) that secure the rear A/C expansion valve between the rear A/C evaporator tubes and the rear extension tube tapping block. Tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.). 6. Install a new insulator (1) around the rear A/C evaporator tubes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front A/C Evaporator - Removal > Page 8588 7. Position the rear air inlet housing (6) onto the rear HVAC housing (1). 8. Install the screws (5) that secure the rear air inlet housing to the rear HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 9. Connect the rear HVAC wire harness (2) to the rear blower motor (3) and the rear blower motor resistor (4). 10. Install the rear HVAC housing. 11. If the rear A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 8597 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 8603 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8604 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 361 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/LG 2 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8605 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8606 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 361 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/LG 2 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8607 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. NOTE: Cutaway of typical HVAC housing shown for clarity in illustration. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8610 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the surface temperature of A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the resistance reading as an indication that conditions are correct to broadcast an A/C request message on the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the front control module (FCM). The FCM then requests the powertrain control module (PCM) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary over the CAN C bus. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel assembly. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8613 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front Expansion Valve: Description and Operation Plumbing - Front Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Typical A/C expansion valve shown. The A/C expansion valve controls the amount of refrigerant entering the A/C evaporator and is of a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) design. The A/C expansion valve consists of an aluminum H-valve type body (1) with an integral thermal sensor (2) and is located at the dash panel between the A/C refrigerant lines and the A/C evaporator. Operation OPERATION The A/C expansion valve controls the flow of high-pressure, low temperature liquid refrigerant entering the expansion valve and converts it into a low-pressure, low-temperature mixture of liquid and gas before it enters the A/C evaporator. To meet the vehicles A/C cooling requirements, a mechanical sensor is used in the A/C expansion valve to monitor the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the A/C evaporator and then adjust the inlet port orifice size to allow only the proper amount of refrigerant to enter the evaporator. Controlling the refrigerant flow through the A/C evaporator ensures that none of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is still in a liquid state, which could damage the A/C compressor. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line or expansion valve is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets may result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C expansion valve is factory calibrated and cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 8618 Expansion Valve: Description and Operation Plumbing - Rear Description DESCRIPTION The rear A/C expansion valve is of a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) design and controls the amount of refrigerant entering the rear A/C evaporator. The rear A/C expansion valve consists of an aluminum H-valve type body (1) with an integral thermal sensor (2) and is located on the rear HVAC housing between the rear evaporator extension tubes and the rear evaporator. Operation OPERATION The rear A/C expansion valve controls the flow of high-pressure, low temperature liquid refrigerant entering the expansion valve and converts it into a low-pressure, low-temperature mixture of liquid and gas before it enters the rear A/C evaporator. To meet the vehicles A/C cooling requirements, a mechanical sensor is used in the rear A/C expansion valve to monitor the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the rear A/C evaporator and then adjust the inlet port orifice size to allow only the proper amount of refrigerant to enter the evaporator. Controlling the refrigerant flow through the rear A/C evaporator ensures that none of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator is still in a liquid state, which could damage the A/C compressor. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line or expansion valve is disconnected. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets may result in a refrigerant system leak. The rear A/C expansion valve is factory calibrated and cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Plumbing - Front Expansion Valve: Testing and Inspection Plumbing - Front A/C EXPANSION VALVE WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: Liquid CO2 is required to test the A/C expansion valve. This material is available from most welding supply facilities. Liquid CO2 is also available from companies which service and sell fire extinguishers. DO NOT use R-134a or R-12 refrigerant for this test. When testing the A/C expansion valve, the work area and the vehicle temperature must be 21° to 27° C (70° to 85° F). To test the expansion valve: NOTE: The A/C expansion valve should only be tested following testing of the A/C compressor. 1. Verify the A/C compressor is operating to design standards. 2. Connect a charging station or manifold gauge set to the refrigerant system service ports. Verify the refrigerant charge level. 3. Close all doors and windows. 4. Set the A/C-heater controls to the following positions: - temperature control to full warm - mode control to floor - blower motor control to high speed 5. Start the engine and allow it to idle. After the engine has reached normal operating temperature, allow the passenger compartment to heat up. This will create the need for maximum refrigerant flow into the A/C evaporator. 6. With passenger compartment heated up, set the A/C-heater controls to the following positions: - A/C compressor engaged - temperature control to full cold - mode control to panel - blower motor control to high speed 7. With the correct refrigerant charge level, the high pressure gauge should read approximately 930 kPa to 1725 kPa (135 psi to 250 psi) and the low pressure gauge should read approximately 175 kPa to 380 kPa (25 psi to 55 psi). If OK, go to STEP 8. If not OK, replace the faulty A/C expansion valve. WARNING: Protect the skin and eyes from exposure to liquid CO2 or personal injury can result. 8. If the low pressure gauge reads within the specified range, freeze the A/C expansion valve for 30 seconds using liquid CO2 or another suitable super-cold material. Do not spray R-134a or R-12 refrigerant on the A/C expansion valve for this test. The low pressure gauge reading should drop by 70 kPa (10 psi). If OK, go to STEP 9 If not OK, replace the faulty A/C expansion valve. 9. Allow the expansion valve control head to thaw. The low pressure gauge reading should stabilize at approximately 175 kPa to 380 kPa (25 psi to 55 psi). If not OK, replace the faulty A/C expansion valve. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Plumbing - Front > Page 8621 Expansion Valve: Testing and Inspection Plumbing - Rear A/C EXPANSION VALVE - REAR WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury. NOTE: The rear A/C expansion valve should only be tested following testing of the A/C compressor. NOTE: Liquid CO2 is required to test the rear A/C expansion valve. This material is available from most welding supply facilities. Liquid CO2 is also available from companies which service and sell fire extinguishers. When testing the rear A/C expansion valve, the work area and the vehicle temperature must be 21° to 27° C (70° to 85° F). To test the expansion valve: 1. Connect a charging station or manifold gauge set to the refrigerant system service ports. Verify the refrigerant charge level. 2. Close all doors, windows and vents to the passenger compartment. 3. Set the A/C-heater controls for the rear heating-A/C system so that the A/C compressor is operating, the rear temperature control is in the highest temperature position, and the blower motor is operating at the highest speed. 4. Start the engine and allow it to idle. After the engine has reached normal operating temperature, allow the passenger compartment to heat up. This will create the need for maximum refrigerant flow into the rear A/C evaporator. 5. If the refrigerant charge is sufficient, the discharge (high pressure) gauge should read 827 kPa to 1655 kPa (120 psi to 240 psi). The suction (low pressure) gauge should read 207 kPa to 345 kPa (30 psi to 50 psi). If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK, replace the inoperative rear A/C expansion valve. WARNING: Protect the skin and eyes from exposure to liquid CO2 or personal injury can result. 6. If the suction (low pressure) gauge reads within the specified range, freeze the rear A/C expansion valve for 30 seconds using liquid CO2 or another suitable super-cold material. Do not spray R-134a or R-12 refrigerant on the rear A/C expansion valve for this test. The suction (low pressure) gauge reading should drop by 69 kPa (10 psi). If OK, go to STEP 7 If not OK, replace the inoperative rear A/C expansion valve. 7. Allow the rear expansion valve control head to thaw. The suction (low pressure) gauge reading should stabilize at 207 kPa to 345 kPa (30 psi to 50 psi). If not OK, replace the inoperative rear A/C expansion valve. 8. When expansion valve testing is complete, test the overall A/C system performance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Plumbing - Front Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Plumbing - Front Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the front A/C liquid line from the receiver drier when removing the A/C lines from the A/C expansion valve. If care is used, the liquid line can be flexed to gain access to the expansion valve. This also applies to the rear A/C lines, if equipped. 5. Carefully remove the A/C suction line (1) and the A/C liquid line (2) from the A/C expansion valve (3). 6. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the A/C expansion valve (2) to the evaporator tube tapping block (3). 7. Remove the A/C expansion valve from the evaporator tube tapping block and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened evaporator tube fittings and all expansion valve ports. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Plumbing - Front > Page 8624 oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Remove the tape or plugs from the evaporator tube fittings and all of the expansion valve ports. 2. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them on the evaporator tube fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 3. Install the A/C expansion valve (2) onto the evaporator tube tapping block (3). 4. Install the two bolts (1) that secure the A/C expansion valve to the evaporator tube tapping block. Tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Use care when installing the A/C lines to the A/C expansion valve. Carefully align the tube ends with the valve prior to tightening the A/C line retaining nut or damage to the sealing rings and tube ends may occur. 5. Install the A/C suction line (1) and the A/C liquid line (2) to the A/C expansion valve (3). 6. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 10. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 11. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Plumbing - Front > Page 8625 Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Plumbing - Rear Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. Remove right rear quarter panel trim. 3. Remove the insulator (1) from around the rear A/C evaporator tubes (2) to gain access the two rear A/C expansion valve bolts (3). 4. Remove the two bolts that secure the rear A/C expansion valve (4) between the rear A/C evaporator tubes and the rear evaporator extension tube tapping block (5). 5. Remove the rear A/C expansion valve from between the rear A/C evaporator tubes and the rear evaporator extension tube tapping block and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened evaporator tubes and extension tube fittings and all rear expansion valve ports. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Plumbing - Front > Page 8626 1. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened evaporator tube and extension tube fittings and all rear expansion valve ports. 2. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them on the evaporator tube and extension tube fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 3. Install the rear A/C expansion valve (4) between the rear A/C evaporator tubes (2) and the rear extension tube tapping block (5). 4. Install the two bolts (3) that secure the rear A/C expansion valve between the rear A/C evaporator tubes and the rear extension tube tapping block. Tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.). 5. Install a new insulator (1) around the rear A/C evaporator tubes. 6. Install the right rear quarter panel trim. 7. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 8. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 9. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description Heater Core: Description and Operation Front Heater Core - Description DESCRIPTION The heater core (1) for the front heating-A/C system is located in the front HVAC housing, behind the instrument panel. It is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes and fins. The heater core is secured to the HVAC housing by a plastic retaining bracket and screws. The heater core tubes (2) are attached to the top of the heater core by metal retaining clips (3) and O-ring seals. The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle to service the heater core. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description > Page 8631 Heater Core: Description and Operation Front Heater Core - Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through the heater hoses to the heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat is removed from the engine and is transferred to the heater core tubes and fins. Air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the heater core fins. The blend-air door(s) allows control of the heater output air temperature by regulating the amount of air flowing through the heater core. The blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the HVAC housing. The heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if restricted, leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description > Page 8632 Heater Core: Description and Operation Rear Heater Core - Description DESCRIPTION The rear heater core (1) is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes and fins. The rear heater core is located in the rear HVAC housing behind the right interior quarter trim panel and is retained in the housing by a plastic mounting bracket and a screw. The heater core tubes (3) are attached to the heater core by metal retaining clamps (2) and rubber O-ring seals and are secured to the rear HVAC housing by a plastic flange. The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the rear heater core. The rear HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle to service the rear heater core. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Heater Core - Description > Page 8633 Heater Core: Description and Operation Rear Heater Core - Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through heater hoses and tubes to the rear heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat removed from the engine is transferred to the heater core fins and the air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the fins. The rear blend air door allows control of the rear heater output air temperature by controlling the amount of air flowing through or around the rear heater core. The rear blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the rear heater-A/C housing. The rear heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be inoperative, leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal Heater Core: Service and Repair Front Heater Core - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Remove the front HVAC housing (1) and place it on a workbench. 2. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (2) from the recirculation door actuator (3). 3. Remove the screws (4) that secure the air inlet housing (5) to the HVAC housing. 4. Remove the air inlet housing from the HVAC housing. 5. Carefully remove the foam seal (1) from the flange on the HVAC housing (2). If the seal is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 6. Remove the screw (3) that secures the heater core tube retaining bracket (4) to the top of the HVAC housing. 7. Remove the heater core tube retaining bracket from the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 8636 8. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the HVAC housing retaining bracket (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the bracket. 9. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the heater core retaining bracket (5) to the top of the HVAC housing and remove the bracket. 10. Carefully remove the heater core (6) and heater core tubes as an assembly from the top of the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 8637 Heater Core: Service and Repair Front Heater Core - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Carefully install the heater core (6) into the top of the HVAC housing (3). Make sure that the heater core insulator is properly positioned. 2. Install the two screws (4) that secure the heater core retaining bracket (5) to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the HVAC housing bracket (2) to the top of HVAC housing. 4. Install the two screws (1) that secure the HVAC housing bracket to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. Install the heater core tube retaining bracket (4) to the top of the HVAC housing (2). 6. Install the screw (3) that secures the heater core tube retaining bracket to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screw to 2.2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Install the foam seal (1) to the flange on the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 8638 8. Install the air inlet housing (5) onto the top of the HVAC housing (1). 9. Install the screws (4) that secure the air inlet housing to the HVAC housing. Make sure the HVAC wire harness retainer is properly installed. 10. Connect the HVAC wire harness (2) to the recirculation door actuator (3). 11. Install the front HVAC housing. 12. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 13. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. 14. Refill the engine cooling system. 15. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 16. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 8639 Heater Core: Service and Repair Rear Heater Core - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the rear heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the rear heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the rear HVAC housing. 3. Remove the rear blend door actuator. 4. Carefully remove the foam seal (1) from the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange (3). If the seal is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 5. Remove the screws (2) that secure the two halves of the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange together and remove the outer half of the flange. 6. Remove the screw (1) that secures the rear heater core tube retaining bracket (2) to the rear HVAC housing (3) and remove the bracket. 7. Carefully pull the rear heater core (4) out of the side of the rear HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 8640 Heater Core: Service and Repair Rear Heater Core - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the rear heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the rear heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Install the rear heater core (4) into the side of the rear HVAC housing (3). Make sure that the insulator is properly installed. 2. Install the rear heater core retaining bracket (2). 3. Install the screw (1) that secures the rear heater core retaining bracket to the rear HVAC housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 4. Install the outer half of the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange (3). 5. Install the screws (2) that secure the two halves of the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange together. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 6. Install the foam seal (1) to the rear heater core and evaporator extension line flange. 7. Install the rear blend door actuator. 8. Install the rear HVAC housing. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. If the rear heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Heater Core - Removal > Page 8641 11. Refill the engine cooling system. 12. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 13. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Warning Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions Warning WARNING WARNING: The A/C system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Repairs should only be performed by qualified service personnel. Serious or fatal injury may result from improper service procedures. WARNING: Avoid breathing the refrigerant and refrigerant oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate the eyes, nose, and/or throat. Wear eye protection when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Serious eye injury can result from direct contact with the refrigerant. If eye contact occurs, seek medical attention immediately. WARNING: Do not expose the refrigerant to open flame. Poisonous gas is created when refrigerant is burned. An electronic leak detector is recommended. Serious or fatal injury may result from improper service procedures. WARNING: If accidental A/C system discharge occurs, ventilate the work area before resuming service. Large amounts of refrigerant released in a closed work area will displace the oxygen and cause suffocation and serious or fatal injury. WARNING: The evaporation rate of R-134a refrigerant at average temperature and altitude is extremely high. As a result, anything that comes in contact with the refrigerant will freeze. Always protect the skin or delicate objects from direct contact with the refrigerant. WARNING: The R-134a service equipment or the vehicle refrigerant system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Some mixtures of air and R-134a have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous, and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage and serious or fatal injury. WARNING: The engine cooling system is designed to develop internal pressures up to 145 kilopascals (21 pounds per square inch). Do not remove or loosen the coolant pressure cap, cylinder block drain plugs, radiator drain, radiator hoses, heater hoses, or hose clamps while the engine cooling system is hot and under pressure. Allow the vehicle to cool for a minimum of 15 minutes before opening the cooling system for service. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious burns from the heated engine coolant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service Precautions > Warning > Page 8646 Hose/Line HVAC: Service Precautions Caution CAUTION CAUTION: Never add R-12 to a refrigerant system designed to use R-134a. Do not use R-12 equipment or parts on an R-134a A/C system. These refrigerants are not compatible and damage to the A/C system will result. CAUTION: Never use R-12 refrigerant oil in an A/C system designed to use R-134a refrigerant oil. These refrigerant oils are not compatible and damage to the A/C system will result. CAUTION: The use of A/C system sealers may result in damage to A/C refrigerant recovery/evacuation/recharging equipment and/or A/C system. Many federal, state/provincial and local regulations prohibit the recharge of A/C systems with known leaks. DaimlerChrysler recommends the detection of A/C system leaks through the use of approved leak detectors and fluorescent leak detection dyes. Vehicles found with A/C system sealers should be treated as contaminated and replacement of the entire A/C refrigerant system is recommended. A/C systems found to be contaminated with A/C system sealers, A/C stop-leak products or seal conditioners voids the warranty for the A/C system. CAUTION: Recover the refrigerant before opening any fitting or connection. Open the fittings with caution, even after the system has been discharged. Never open or loosen a connection before recovering the refrigerant. CAUTION: If equipped, do not remove the secondary retention clip from any spring-lock coupler connection while the refrigerant system is under pressure. Recover the refrigerant before removing the secondary retention clip. Open the fittings with caution, even after the system has been discharged. Never open or loosen a connection before recovering the refrigerant. CAUTION: The internal parts of the A/C system will remain stable as long as moisture-free refrigerant and refrigerant oil is used. Abnormal amounts of dirt, moisture or air can upset the chemical stability. This may cause operational troubles or even serious damage if present in more than very small quantities. Before disconnecting a component, clean the outside of the fittings thoroughly to prevent contamination from entering the refrigerant system. Keep service tools and the work area clean. Do not open the refrigerant system or uncap a replacement component until you are ready to service the system. Immediately after disconnecting a component from the refrigerant system, seal the open fittings with a cap or plug. This will prevent contamination from entering the A/C system. CAUTION: Refrigerant oil will absorb moisture from the atmosphere if left uncapped. Do not open a container of refrigerant oil until you are ready to use it. Replace the cap on the oil container immediately after using. Store refrigerant oil only in a clean, airtight, and moisture-free container. CAUTION: Do not overcharge the refrigerant system. Overcharging will cause excessive compressor head pressure and can cause compressor noise and A/C system failure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Plumbing - Front Description DESCRIPTION The A/C refrigerant lines and hoses are used to carry the refrigerant between the various A/C system components. The refrigerant lines and hoses for the R-134a A/C system consist of a barrier-hose design with a nylon tube sandwiched between rubber layers. The nylon tube helps to contain the R-134a refrigerant, which has a small molecular structure. The ends of the refrigerant lines are made from lightweight aluminum and braze-less fittings. Any kinks or sharp bends in the refrigerant lines and hoses will reduce the capacity of the entire A/C system and can reduce the flow of refrigerant within the system. Operation OPERATION High pressures are produced in the refrigerant system when the A/C compressor is operating. Extreme care must be exercised to make sure that each of the refrigerant system connections is pressure-tight and leak free. It is a good practice to inspect all flexible hose refrigerant lines at least once a year to make sure they are in good condition and properly routed. Depending on vehicle, model and market application, refrigerant lines are connected to each other or other A/C system components with block-type or quick-connect type fittings. To ensure the integrity of the refrigerant system, flat gaskets and O-rings are used to seal the refrigerant system connections. The refrigerant lines and hoses cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Discharge DESCRIPTION The A/C discharge line (1) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C compressor to the A/C condenser (2) and is secured to the condenser fan shroud (4) by a plastic retainer (3). The A/C discharge line has an integral fitting for the A/C pressure transducer (5). NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is disconnected. The A/C discharge line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Liquid DESCRIPTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 8649 The A/C liquid line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the A/C evaporator. The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section of the liquid line (1) connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier (2). The rear section of the liquid line (3) connects between the A/C receiver/drier and the A/C expansion valve (7) and includes the high side service port (5) and a tapping plate (8) that secures the suction line (9) to the A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals, high-side service port valve, cap and retainer clip (4). The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the liquid line is disconnected. The A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Suction DESCRIPTION The A/C suction line (9) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C evaporator to the A/C compressor. The A/C suction line includes the low side service port (6) and is secured to the A/C expansion valve (7) by the liquid line tapping plate (8). On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the A/C suction line also includes an extension tube that connects the suction line to the underbody lines. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals, low-side service port valve and cap. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is disconnected. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 8650 The A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 8651 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Plumbing - Rear Description DESCRIPTION Spring-lock type refrigerant line couplers (6) are used to connect the liquid line (1) and the suction line (3) to the underbody refrigerant lines for the rear heating-A/C system. Secondary retaining clips (2 and 7) are installed over the connected couplers for added protection. The spring-lock refrigerant line couplers require special disconnect tools for disengaging the two coupler halves. Operation OPERATION The spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler is held together by a garter spring (6) inside a circular cage (7) on the male half of the fitting (1). When the two coupler halves are connected, the flared end of the female fitting (2) slips behind the garter spring inside the cage on the male fitting. The garter spring and cage prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the cage. Some applications use a connection indicator ring (4) to help indicate when the two coupler halves are fully connected. O-rings (8) are used to seal the coupler connections. These O-rings are compatible with R-134a refrigerant and must be replaced with O-rings made of the same material. A secondary retaining clip (3) is installed over the connected coupler (5) for added protection. Line-A/C Liquid DESCRIPTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 8652 The rear A/C liquid line (1) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the rear A/C evaporator. The rear A/C liquid line serviced in two sections and includes a tapping plate (4) that retains the A/C suction line (3). Models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system include an extension tube (8) that connects the liquid line to the underbody line by use of a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler (6) and a secondary retaining clip (7). NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The rear A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C liquid line is disconnected. The rear A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Line-A/C Suction DESCRIPTION The rear A/C suction line (3) is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the rear A/C evaporator to the A/C compressor. The rear A/c suction line is retained into the liquid line tapping block (4) by a plastic retainer. Models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system include an extension tube (5) that connects the suction line to the underbody line by use of a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler (6) and a secondary retaining clip (2). NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The rear A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the rubber O-ring seals. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is disconnected. The rear A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Lines-Underbody Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plumbing - Front > Page 8653 DESCRIPTION Models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system use metal lines (1) attached to the vehicle underbody (2) to carry refrigerant and engine coolant to/and from the rear A/C evaporator and heater core. The underbody A/C lines are connected to the front A/C suction and liquid lines by spring-lock type couplers and secondary retaining clips and to the rear HVAC housing (3) by a tapping plate (4) and nut (5). The metal underbody heater lines have rubber hose ends that are connected to the front heater hoses and the rear HVAC housing by use of spring-clamp type heater hose clamps. The underbody lines are retained by plastic mounting brackets (6) and screws (7) and can be repaired (depending on the amount of damage) by using A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A or equivalent. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The underbody lines can only be removed by lifting the body off of the frame and have no serviceable parts except for the refrigerant line rubber O-ring seals and the mounting brackets. The O-ring seals used on the refrigerant line connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever the underbody refrigerant lines are disconnected. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Hose/Line HVAC: Procedures UNDERBODY LINE REPAIR WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. WARNING: This procedure is intended for underbody line repair only. Use of the connector fittings and A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A on any other type of vehicle tubing could cause tube failure resulting in possible personal injury or death. 1. If repairing an underbody refrigerant line, recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. If repairing an underbody coolant line, drain the engine cooling system. 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. 5. Remove the underbody mounting brackets as necessary to gain access to the underbody line(s) needing repair. 6. Mark the cut location(s) on the underbody line(s) needing repair. Check the Tube Length chart for the minimum amount of straight tube required (dimension A) for proper connector fitting installation. 7. Using a small pipe cutter or another suitable tool, carefully cut the underbody line(s) needing repair at the location(s) previously marked. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8656 8. Size a replacement line, same size diameter and length as the portion of the line(s) removed. NOTE: A minimum of 28.5 mm (3/4 in) of the line end must be cleaned in order for the connector fitting to properly seal the repair area. 9. Clean the ends of the line(s) a minimum of 28.5 mm (3/4 in) (dimension A) using the Scotch-Bright pad provided with A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A. Clean the line end(s) with a rotational motion around the line to avoid longitudinal scratches in the line. 10. Select the proper connector fitting (1) for the size of the underbody line being repaired. Refer to the Connector Fitting chart. 11. Apply one drop of Lokprep sealing compound provided with A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A onto each line end (2). 12. Insert the line ends into the selected connector fitting and rotate the connector fitting a complete turn to evenly distribute the sealing compound. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8657 13. Select the proper size jaws (1) for the line being repaired from the A/C Line Repair Tool Kit 8456-A. Refer to the Jaw Size chart. 14. Assemble the jaws into the tool body (Special Tool 8456-3 in Kit 8456-A) (2). a. For standard installation, install the jaws with the rubber gripping pads (3) facing outward. Refer to Tube Length chart. b. For reversed installation, remove the rubber gripping pads and install the jaws with the rubber gripping pad area facing inward. Refer to Tube Length chart. NOTE: The connector fitting ends must be positioned into the counterbore of the jaws in order for the connector fitting to properly seal the repair area. 15. Install the connector fitting (1) and the line ends (4) into the counterbore of the jaws (5). 16. Hold the tool body (Special Tool 8456-3 in Kit 8456-A) (2) with a 3/8 inch breaker bar and turn the forcing screw (3) clockwise. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8658 NOTE: The lines must be kept fully inserted into the connector fitting to obtain a leak free joint. 17. Turn the forcing screw (1) clockwise until both connector fitting collars (2) have bottomed out on the center shoulder of the connector (3). 18. Loosen the forcing screw and remove the tool body (Special Tool 8456-3 in Kit 8456-A) (4) and the jaws (5) from the repaired line(s). 19. Install the underbody mounting brackets as necessary. 20. Lower the vehicle. 21. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 22. If repairing an underbody coolant line, refill the engine cooling system. 23. If repairing an underbody refrigerant line, evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8659 Hose/Line HVAC: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (6) from the A/C pressure transducer (5). 4. If required, remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C discharge line (1). 5. Remove the nut (7) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser (2). 6. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C condenser and the retainer (3) located on the condenser fan shroud (4). 7. Remove the O-ring seal and gasket from the discharge line fitting and discard. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the discharge line fitting and condenser port. 9. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line (3) to the A/C compressor (4). 10. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 11. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fitting and the compressor port. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8660 12. Remove the A/C discharge line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Position the A/C discharge line into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fitting and the compressor port. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C discharge (3) line onto the A/C compressor (4). 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fitting (1) and the condenser port (2). 7. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the discharge line fitting. Use only the specified Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8661 O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Install the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser and the retainer (3) located on the condenser fan shroud. 9. Install the nut (7) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 10. If removed, install the A/C pressure transducer (5) onto the A/C discharge line. 11. Connect the wire harness connector (6) to the A/C pressure transducer. 12. Connect the negative battery cable. 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 14. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 15. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. FRONT SECTION 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing (1) from the right side of the engine compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8662 4. Remove the bolt (1) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier (3). 5. Disconnect the front section of the A/C liquid line from the receiver/drier and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fitting and receiver/drier port. 7. Remove the nut (1) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the A/C condenser (3). 8. Disconnect the A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 9. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fitting and condenser port. 10. Remove the front section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. REAR SECTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8663 11. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 12. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 13. Remove the air cleaner housing (1) from the right side of the engine compartment. 14. Remove the rear section of the A/C liquid line (2) from the plastic retainer (3) located on the right inner fender (4). 15. Remove the bolt (1) that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier (3). 16. Disconnect the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the receiver/drier and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 17. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fitting and the receiver/drier port. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8664 18. Raise and support the vehicle. 19. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 20. Remove the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line (2) to the liquid line tapping block (4). 21. Remove the nut (3) that secures the liquid line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve (5). 22. Disconnect the A/C suction line and the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the A/C expansion valve and remove and discard the O-ring seals and gaskets. 23. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fittings and the expansion valve ports. 24. Separate the A/C suction line from the liquid line tapping block. 25. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, disconnect the underbody liquid line from the liquid line tapping block. 26. Remove the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. FRONT SECTION 1. Position the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the liquid line fitting and the condenser port. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8665 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C liquid line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 22 Nm (16 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove the tape or plugs from the liquid line fitting and the receiver/drier (3). 7. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 8. Connect the front section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier. 9. Install the bolt (1) that secures the front section of the A/C liquid line to the receiver/drier. Tighten the bolt to 13.5 Nm (120 in. lbs.). 10. Install the air cleaner housing (1) to the right side of the engine compartment. 11. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 12. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 13. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 14. Charge the refrigerant system. REAR SECTION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8666 15. Position the rear section of the A/C liquid line into the engine compartment. 16. Install the A/C suction line (2) into the liquid line tapping block (4). 17. Install the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the liquid line tapping block. 18. Remove the tape or plugs from the suction and liquid line fittings and the A/C expansion valve (5). 19. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and a new gasket onto the A/C expansion valve. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 20. Connect the A/C suction line and the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the A/C expansion valve. 21. Install the nut (3) that secures the refrigerant line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 22. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, connect the underbody liquid line to the liquid line tapping block. 23. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 24. Lower the vehicle. 25. Remove the tape or plugs from the liquid line fitting and the receiver/drier (3). 26. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 27. Connect the rear section of the A/C liquid line (2) to the receiver/drier. 28. Install the bolt (1) that secures the rear section of the A/C liquid line to the receiver/drier. Tighten the bolt to 11 Nm (97 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8667 29. Install the rear section of the liquid line (2) into the plastic retainer (3) located on the right inner fender (4). 30. Install the air cleaner housing (1) to the right side of the engine compartment. 31. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 32. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 33. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 34. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Remove the nut (1) that secure the A/C suction line (2) to the A/C compressor (4). 4. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 5. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened suction line fitting and the compressor port. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8668 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 8. Remove the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line (2) to the liquid line tapping block (4). 9. Remove the nut (3) that secures the liquid line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve (5). 10. Disconnect the A/C suction line and the rear section of the A/C liquid line from the A/C expansion valve and remove and discard the O-ring seals and gaskets. 11. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant line fittings and the expansion valve ports. 12. Separate the A/C suction line from the liquid line tapping block. 13. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, disconnect the underbody refrigerant line from the A/C suction line. 14. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8669 1. Position the A/C suction line (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Install the A/C suction line into the liquid line tapping block (4). 3. Install the plastic retainer (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the liquid line tapping block. 4. Remove the tape or plugs from the suction and liquid line fittings and the A/C expansion valve (5). 5. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and a new gasket onto the suction and liquid line fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 6. Connect the A/C suction line and A/C liquid line to the A/C expansion valve. 7. Install the nut (3) that secures the refrigerant line tapping block to the A/C expansion valve. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 8. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, connect the underbody refrigerant line to the A/C suction line. 9. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fitting and the compressor port. 12. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the suction line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 13. Install the A/C suction line (2) onto the A/C compressor (4). 14. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8670 15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 16. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 17. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 18. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. Remove the secondary retaining clip from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 3. Fit the proper size A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) over the coupler cage (1). 4. Close the two halves of the A/C line disconnect tool around the coupler (2). NOTE: The garter spring may not release if the A/C line disconnect tool is cocked while pushing it into the coupler cage opening. 5. Push the A/C line disconnect tool into the open side of the coupler cage to expand the garter spring (3). Once the garter spring is expanded, pull on the refrigerant line attached to the female half of the coupler until the flange on the female fitting is separated from the garter spring and cage on the male fitting. 6. Open and remove the A/C line disconnect tool from the refrigerant line coupler (4). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8671 1. Clean any dirt or foreign material from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 2. Check to make sure that the garter spring (6) is located within the cage (7) of the male half of the refrigerant line coupler (1), and that the garter spring is not damaged. a. If the garter spring is missing, install a new spring by pushing it into the coupler cage opening. b. If the garter spring is damaged, remove it from the coupler cage with a small hook (DO NOT use a screwdriver) and install a new garter spring. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals is required anytime a refrigerant coupler is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals could result in a refrigerant system leak. 3. Install new O-rings (8) on the male half of the refrigerant line coupler. 4. Lubricate the O-rings, and the inside of the female half of the refrigerant line coupler (2) with clean R-134a refrigerant oil. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Position the female half of the coupler over the male half of the coupler. 6. Push together firmly on the two halves of the refrigerant line coupler until the garter spring in the cage on the male half of the coupler snaps over the flanged end on the female half of the coupler. 7. Make sure that the refrigerant line coupler is fully engaged by firmly pulling the refrigerant lines away from each other on both sides of the coupler. 8. Install the secondary retaining clip (3) over connected coupler cage (5). 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 10. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8672 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Disconnect the A/C liquid line (1) from the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. 4. Remove the secondary retaining clip (7) from the refrigerant line coupler (6) on the liquid line extension tube (8) 5. Disconnect the underbody liquid line from the liquid line extension tube using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the refrigerant line coupler and the underbody liquid line. 7. Remove the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C liquid line is serviced in two sections. The front section connects between the A/C condenser and the receiver/drier. The rear section connects between the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the rear section of the A/C liquid line also includes an extension tube that connects the liquid line to the underbody lines. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8673 1. Install the A/C liquid line (1) to the receiver/drier and the front A/C expansion valve. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the refrigerant line coupler (6) and the underbody liquid line. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the refrigerant line coupler. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the underbody liquid line to liquid line extension tube (8). 5. Install the secondary retaining clip (7) onto the refrigerant line coupler. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 8. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 9. Charge the refrigerant system. Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The A/C suction line connects between the A/C evaporator and the A/C compressor. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the A/C suction line also includes an extension tube that connects the suction line to the underbody lines. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8674 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Disconnect the A/C suction line (3) from the A/C compressor and the front A/C expansion valve. 4. Remove the secondary retaining clip (2) from the refrigerant line coupler (6) on the suction line extension tube (5) 5. Disconnect the underbody suction line from the suction line extension tube using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) and remove and discard the O-ring seal. 6. Install plugs in, or tape over the refrigerant line coupler and the underbody suction line. 7. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. NOTE: The A/C suction line connects between the A/C evaporator and the A/C compressor. On models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, the A/C suction line also includes an extension tube that connects the suction line to the underbody lines. 1. Install the A/C suction line (3) to the A/C compressor and the front A/C expansion valve. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the refrigerant line coupler (6) and the underbody suction line. 3. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the refrigerant line coupler. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Connect the underbody suction line to the suction line extension tube (5). 5. Install the secondary retaining clip (2) onto the refrigerant line coupler. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 8. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 9. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8675 Underbody Line Assembly UNDERBODY LINE ASSEMBLY WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Drain the engine cooling system. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. 5. Remove the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 6. Remove the secondary retaining clips (2 and 7) from the refrigerant line couplers (6) located on the suction line extension tube (5) and the liquid line extension tube (8). 7. Disconnect the underbody liquid and suction lines from the liquid line extension tube and the suction line extension tube using the proper A/C line disconnect tools (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the refrigerant line couplers and the underbody refrigerant lines. 9. Disconnect the underbody heater hoses from the front heater hoses. 10. Remove the nut (1) that secures the rear suction line (2) and the rear liquid line (3) to the rear evaporator line tapping plate that extends through the rear floor panel (4) behind the right rear wheel housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8676 11. Disconnect the rear suction line and liquid line from the rear evaporator line tapping plate and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 12. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant lines and tapping plate ports. 13. Disconnect the rear heater hoses (5) from the rear heater core tubes that extend through the rear floor panel behind the right rear wheel housing. 14. Remove all body mount bolts on the passenger side of the vehicle and loosen the body mount bolts on the drivers side. 15. Place a jackstand at the front and rear of the vehicle on the passenger side so that the stands will safely support the body. 16. Remove the five screws (7) that secure the underbody lines (1) to the vehicle underbody (2). 17. Carefully lower the hoist until the right side of the body (supported by the stands) is approximately 76-101 mm (3-4 in.) above the frame. This will gain access to remove the underbody line assembly. 18. Remove the underbody line assembly from the underneath of the vehicle body. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8677 1. Position the underbody line assembly underneath the vehicle body. 2. Carefully raise the hoist until the frame and body mounts line up together. 3. Install the five screws that secure the underbody lines (1) to the vehicle underbody (2). 4. Install all body mount bolts to the passenger side of the vehicle. Tighten all passenger and driver side mount bolts securely. 5. Raise the hoist and remove the jack stands from under the vehicle. 6. Connect the rear heater hoses (5) to the rear heater core tubes that extend through the rear floor panel (4) behind the right rear wheel housing and install the heater hose clamps. 7. Remove the tape or plugs from fittings on the rear suction line (2) and the rear liquid line (3) and the rear evaporator extension line tapping plate ports. 8. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the rear suction and liquid line fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Connect the rear suction and liquid line fittings to the rear evaporator line tapping plate. 10. Install the nut (1) that secures the rear refrigerant lines to the rear evaporator line tapping plate. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8678 11. Connect the underbody heater hoses to the front heater hoses and install the heater hose clamps. 12. Remove the tape or plugs from the refrigerant line couplers (6) and the underbody refrigerant lines. 13. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the refrigerant line couplers. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 14. Connect the underbody liquid and suction lines to the liquid line extension tube (8) and the suction line extension tube (5). 15. Install the secondary retaining clips (2 and 7) onto the refrigerant line couplers. 16. Install passenger side tires. 17. Install the right front wheelhouse splash shield. 18. Lower the vehicle. 19. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 20. Fill the engine cooling system. 21. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 22. Adjust the refrigerant oil level. 23. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Housing Assembly HVAC: Description and Operation Front DESCRIPTION NOTE: Front single zone system shown. Front dual zone system similar. All models are equipped with a common HVAC housing (9) that combines A/C and heating capabilities into a single unit mounted within the passenger compartment. The heating-A/C system is a blend-air type system. In a blend-air system, blend-air doors (11) are used to control the amount of conditioned air that is allowed to flow through, or around the heater core (14). The temperature of the discharge air is varied by operating the blend door actuator (4), which moves the blend-air doors. In the available dual zone system, two blend door actuators and four blend-air doors are used to provide independent side-to-side temperature control of the discharge air. This design allows an almost immediate control of the output air temperature of the system. The electric actuators are connected to the vehicle electrical system by the HVAC wire harness (1). The mode door actuators (12) operate the mode-air doors (10 and 13), which direct the flow of the conditioned air out the various air outlets (depending on the mode selected). The recirculation door actuator (3), operates the recirculation-air door (2), which closes off the fresh air intake and recirculates the air already inside the vehicle. The blower motor (8) controls the velocity of air flowing through the HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel (6) within the HVAC housing at the selected speed by use of the blower motor resistor block or power module (7) (depending on application). The A/C system is designed for the use of a non-CFC, R-134a refrigerant and uses an A/C evaporator (5) to cool and dehumidify the incoming air prior to blending it with the heated air. The front HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator, recirculation-air door, mode-air doors, blend-air doors and linkage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front > Page 8683 Housing Assembly HVAC: Description and Operation Rear DESCRIPTION Models equipped with the rear heating-A/C system are equipped with a common rear heater and A/C housing (7) that combines A/C and heating capabilities into a single unit mounted within the passenger compartment. The rear heating-A/C system is a blend-air type system. A blend-air door (6) controls the amount of conditioned air that is allowed to flow through, or around, the heater core (3). The rear A/C system is designed for the use of a non-CFC, R-134a refrigerant and uses an A/C evaporator (2) to cool and dehumidify the incoming air prior to blending it with the heated air. A temperature control determines the discharge air temperature by operating the blend door actuator (5), which moves the blend-air door. This allows an almost immediate control of the output air temperature of the system. The mode door actuator (8) operates the mode-air door (9) which directs the flow of the conditioned air out the upper or lower air outlets, depending on the discharge air temperature selected. Both electric actuators are connected to the vehicle electrical system by the HVAC wire harness (10). The rear blower motor (11) controls the velocity of air flowing through the rear HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel within the rear blower motor housing (1) at the selected speed by use of the rear blower motor resistor block (4). The rear HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator, heater core, mode-air door, blend-air door and blower motor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Removal and Replacement Front HVAC Housing Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The front HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator, recirculation-air door, mode-air doors, blend-air doors and linkage. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. Drain the engine cooling system. 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the liquid line and suction line from the expansion valve and install plugs or caps over the fittings and expansion valve ports. 5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core tubes and install plugs or caps over the heater core tube openings. 6. Remove the four nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing (2) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (3). 7. Remove the instrument panel from the passenger compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8686 8. Disconnect the intermediate floor distribution duct from the front floor distribution duct. 9. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the HVAC housing (2) to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel (3). 10. Pull the HVAC housing rearward so that the mounting studs and condensate drain tube clear the dash panel and remove the front HVAC housing from the passenger compartment. Front HVAC Housing Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the HVAC housing (2) into the passenger compartment with the mounting studs and the condensate drain tube in their proper mounting locations in the dash panel (3). 2. Loosely install the two bolts (1) that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel. 3. Install the four nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing (2) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (3). Tighten the nuts to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the two bolts that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel. Tighten the bolt(s) to 3 Nm (26 in. lbs.) . 5. Connect the intermediate floor distribution duct to front floor distribution duct. 6. Install the instrument panel. 7. Remove previously installed plugs or caps and reconnect the heater hoses to the heater core tubes. 8. Remove previously installed plugs or caps and reconnect the suction line and liquid line to the expansion valve. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8687 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. 11. Refill the engine cooling system. 12. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 13. Charge the refrigerant system. Rear HVAC Housing Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The rear HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator, heater core, mode-air door, blend-air door and blower motor. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Drain the engine cooling system. 4. Raise and support the vehicle. 5. Remove the nut (1) that secures the rear suction line (2) and the rear liquid line (3) to the rear evaporator extension line tapping plate that extends through the rear floor panel (4) behind the right rear wheel housing. 6. Disconnect the rear suction line and liquid line from the rear evaporator extension line tapping plate. 7. Remove the O-ring seals from the rear suction line and liquid line fittings and discard. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant lines and tapping plate ports. 9. Disconnect the rear heater hoses (5) from the rear heater core tubes that extend through the rear floor panel behind the right rear wheel housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8688 10. Lower the vehicle. 11. Remove right rear quarter panel trim. 12. Remove the rear distribution ducts from the rear HVAC housing (1). 13. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the rear HVAC wire harness connector (3). 14. Remove the three bolts (1) that secure the rear HVAC housing (2) to the rear interior quarter panel (3). 15. Remove the rear HVAC housing from the vehicle. Rear HVAC Housing Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8689 1. Position the rear HVAC housing (2) into the vehicle. 2. Install the three bolts (1) that secure the rear HVAC housing to the rear interior quarter panel (3). Tighten the bolts to 3 Nm (26 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the body wire harness connector (2) to the rear HVAC wire harness connector (3). 4. Install the rear distribution ducts to the rear HVAC housing (1). 5. Install the right rear quarter panel trim. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. 7. Connect the rear heater hoses (5) to the rear heater core tubes that extend through the rear floor panel (4) behind the right rear wheel housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8690 8. Remove the tape or plugs from fittings on the rear suction line (2) and the rear liquid line (3) and the rear evaporator extension line tapping plate ports. 9. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the rear suction and liquid line fittings. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 10. Connect the rear suction and liquid line fittings to the rear evaporator extension line tapping plate. 11. Install the nut (1) that secures the rear suction and liquid lines to the rear evaporator extension line tapping plate. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system. 15. Fill the engine cooling system. 16. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 17. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8691 Housing Assembly HVAC: Overhaul Front HVAC Housing DISASSEMBLY NOTE: The front HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the A/C evaporator, recirculation-air door, mode-air doors, blend-air doors and linkage. 1. Remove the front HVAC housing (1) and place it on a workbench. 2. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (2) from the recirculation door actuator (3). 3. Remove the screws (4) that secure the air inlet housing (5) to the HVAC housing. 4. Remove the air inlet housing from the HVAC housing. 5. If required, remove the recirculation door actuator from the air inlet housing. 6. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2), blend door actuator (3) and the two mode door actuators (4). 7. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the top of the HVAC housing (5). 8. Remove the screws that secure the blend door actuator and the mode door actuators to the HVAC housing and remove the actuators. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8692 9. Remove the two actuator couplers (1) from the left end of the HVAC housing (2). 10. If equipped with front dual zone automatic temperature control (ATC) system, disconnect the HVAC wire harness (4) from passenger side blend door actuator (2), remove the screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator and cover to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the actuator. 11. Carefully remove the foam seal (1) from the flange on the HVAC housing (2). If the seal is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 12. Remove the screw (3) that secures the heater core tube retaining bracket (4) to the top of the HVAC housing. 13. Remove the heater core tube retaining bracket from the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8693 14. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the HVAC housing retaining bracket (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3). 15. Remove the HVAC housing retaining bracket from the HVAC housing. 16. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the heater core retaining bracket (5) to the top of the HVAC housing. 17. Carefully remove the heater core (6) from the HVAC housing. 18. Disconnect the HVAC wiring harness (1) from the blower motor (2). 19. Remove the blower motor from the HVAC housing (3). 20. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8694 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The receiver/drier (1) is mounted in a bracket (2) secured to the right front frame rail (4) in the engine compartment. The receiver/drier is connected between the front section of the liquid line (3) and the rear section of the liquid line (5) between the condenser outlet and the evaporator inlet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8699 Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C receiver/drier performs a filtering action to prevent foreign material in the refrigerant from contaminating the A/C expansion valve. Refrigerant enters the A/C receiver/drier as a high-pressure, low temperature liquid. Desiccant inside the A/C receiver/drier absorbs any moisture which may have entered and become trapped within the refrigerant system. In addition, during periods of high demand operation of the A/C system, the A/C receiver/drier acts as a reservoir to store surplus refrigerant. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C receiver/drier has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals, gaskets and the high side service port valve and cap. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C receiver/drier is removed. The A/C receiver/drier cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged, or if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 2. Remove the front and the rear sections of the liquid line (1 and 4) from the receiver/drier (2). 3. Remove the bolt (3) that secures the receiver/drier and bracket to the right front frame rail (5). 4. Remove the receiver/drier from the engine compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8702 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. CAUTION: The A/C receiver/drier must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Failure to replace the A/C receiver/drier can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. NOTE: If only the A/C receiver/drier is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only the refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Position the receiver/drier and bracket (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Install the bolt (3) that secures the receiver/drier to the right front frame rail (5). Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 3. Install the front and rear sections of the liquid line (1 and 4) to the receiver/drier. 4. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 5. If the A/C receiver/drier is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 6. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications Refrigerant: Specifications REFRIGERANT CHARGE LEVEL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear, and colorless liquefied gas. Even though R-134a does not contain chlorine, it must be reclaimed and recycled just like CFC-type refrigerants. This is because R-134a is a greenhouse gas and can contribute to global warming. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8708 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge or poor A/C system performance. In addition, the polyalkylene glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oils used in an R-134a refrigerant system are not compatible with the mineral-based refrigerant oils used in an R-12 refrigerant system. R-134a refrigerant system service ports, service tool couplers and refrigerant dispensing bottles have all been designed with unique fittings to ensure that an R-134a refrigerant system is not accidentally contaminated with the wrong refrigerant (R-12). There are also labels posted in the engine compartment of the vehicle and on the A/C compressor to identify that the A/C system is equipped with R-134a refrigerant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Recovery REFRIGERANT SYSTEM RECOVERY WARNING: Review safety precautions and warnings before performing this procedure. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: If equipped with the rear heating-A/C system, use a heat gun to heat the underbody lines to help remove any trapped refrigerant from the rear A/C system. An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used to recover the refrigerant from the R-134a refrigerant system. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for the proper care and use of this equipment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 8711 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Evacuate REFRIGERANT SYSTEM EVACUATE NOTE: Special effort must be used to prevent moisture from entering the A/C system oil. Moisture in the oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the compressor. If a compressor designed to use R-134a refrigerant is left open to the atmosphere for an extended period of time. It is recommended that the refrigerant oil be drained and replaced with new oil or a new A/C compressor be used. This will eliminate the possibility of contaminating the refrigerant system. If the refrigerant system has been open to the atmosphere, it must be evacuated before the system can be filled. Moisture and air mixed with the refrigerant will raise the compressor head pressure above acceptable operating levels. This will reduce the performance of the A/C system and damage the A/C compressor. Moisture will boil at near room temperature when exposed to vacuum. To evacuate the refrigerant system: NOTE: When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection. 1. Recover the refrigerant system. 2. Connect a suitable charging station, refrigerant recovery machine or a manifold gauge set with vacuum pump and refrigerant recovery equipment. 3. Open the suction and discharge valves and start the vacuum pump. The vacuum pump should run a minimum of 45 minutes prior to charge to eliminate all moisture in system. When the suction gauge reads -88 kPa (-26 in. Hg) vacuum or greater for 30 minutes, close all valves and turn off vacuum pump. If the system fails to reach specified vacuum, the refrigerant system likely has a leak that must be corrected. If the refrigerant system maintains specified vacuum for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump, open the suction and discharge valves. Then allow the system to evacuate an additional 10 minutes. 4. Close all valves. Turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump. 5. Charge the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 8712 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Charge REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE WARNING: Review safety precautions and warnings before performing this procedure. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: The Underhood HVAC Specification Label contains the refrigerant fill specification of the vehicle being serviced. After all refrigerant system leaks have been repaired and the refrigerant system has been evacuated, a refrigerant charge can be injected into the system. A R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE Standard J2210 must be used to charge the refrigerant system with R-134a refrigerant. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. CHARGING PROCEDURE CAUTION: A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the A/C system each time the refrigerant system is recovered and evacuated. Before charging the A/C system, you MUST replenish any oil lost during the recovery process. Refer the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 2. A manifold gauge set and an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 should be connected to the refrigerant system. 3. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52° C (125° F) with the charging station. See the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper use of this equipment. 4. Open both the suction and discharge valves, then open the charge valve to allow the heated refrigerant to flow into the system. 5. When the transfer of refrigerant has stopped, close both the suction and discharge valves. 6. If all of the refrigerant charge did not transfer from the dispensing device, open all of the windows in the vehicle and set the heating-A/C system controls so that the A/C compressor is engaged and the blower motor is operating at its lowest speed setting. Run the engine at a steady high idle (about 1400 rpm). If the A/C compressor does not engage, test the compressor clutch control circuit and repair as required. 7. Open the low-side valve to allow the remaining refrigerant to transfer to the refrigerant system. WARNING: Take care not to open the discharge (high pressure) valve at this time. Failure to follow this warning could result in possible personal injury or death. 8. Disconnect the charging station and manifold gauge set from the refrigerant system service ports. 9. Reinstall the caps onto the refrigerant system service ports. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8713 Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE EQUIPMENT WARNING: Eye protection must be worn when servicing an A/C refrigerant system. Turn all valves off (rotate clockwise) on the equipment being used before connecting or disconnecting service equipment from the refrigerant system. Failure to observe these warnings may result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. When servicing the A/C system, a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used (1). Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging equipment. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. A manifold gauge set (1) may be needed with some recovery/recycling/charging equipment. The manifold gauge set should have manual shut-off valves (2 and 6), or automatic back-flow valves located at the service port connector end of the manifold gauge set hoses (4 and 5). This will prevent refrigerant from being released into the atmosphere. MANIFOLD GAUGE SET CONNECTIONS CAUTION: Do not use an R-12 manifold gauge set on an R-134a system. The refrigerants are not compatible and system damage will result. RECOVERY/RECYCLING/EVACUATION/CHARGING HOSE The center manifold hose (Yellow, or White, with Black stripe) (3) is used to Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8714 recover, evacuate, and charge the refrigerant system. When the low or high pressure valves on the manifold gauge set are opened, the refrigerant in the system will escape through this hose. HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE The high pressure hose (Red with Black stripe) (4) attaches to the high side service port. This service port is located on the liquid line near the receiver/drier outlet. On this model, an A/C pressure transducer is installed on the discharge line. A/C high-side pressures can be read using a scan tool. LOW PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE The low pressure hose (Blue with Black stripe) (5) attaches to the low side service port. This service port is located on the suction line near the A/C compressor inlet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant oil used in R-134a refrigerant systems is a synthetic-based, polyalkylene glycol (PAG), wax-free lubricant. Mineral-based R-12 refrigerant oils are not compatible with PAG oils, and should never be introduced to an R-134a refrigerant system. There are different PAG oils available, and each contains a different additive package. The Denso 10S20 A/C compressor used in this vehicle is designed to use ND-8 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil in the refrigerant system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8720 Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION After performing any refrigerant recovery or recycling operation, always replenish the refrigerant system with the same amount of the recommended refrigerant oil as was removed. Too little refrigerant oil can cause A/C compressor damage, and too much can reduce A/C system performance. PAG refrigerant oil is more hygroscopic than mineral oil, and will absorb any moisture it comes into contact with, even moisture in the air. The PAG oil container should always be kept tightly capped until it is ready to be used. After use, recap the oil container immediately to prevent moisture contamination. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8721 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The A/C receiver/drier, A/C evaporator, A/C condenser and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The oil used in the Denso 10S20 A/C compressor is ND-8 PAG R-134a refrigerant oil. Only refrigerant oil of the same type should be used to service the A/C system. Do not use any other refrigerant oil. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. Refer to the reclaim/recycling equipment manufacturers instructions. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C condenser, A/C receiver/drier or A/C evaporator is replaced (refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart). The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation. COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8722 the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 456 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 3 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 4-Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8726 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8727 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 456 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 3 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 4-Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8728 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C discharge line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C discharge line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the discharge line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8731 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the discharge line. The A/C pressure transducer will change its internal resistance in response to the pressures it monitors. A Schrader-type valve in the discharge line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The front control module (FCM) provides a five volt reference signal to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the A/C pressure transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The FCM broadcasts a refrigerant pressure message to the PCM, which is programmed to respond to the A/C pressure transducer and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch and the radiator cooling fan to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3275 kPa (475 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). If the refrigerant pressure rises above 1655 kPa (240 psi), the PCM will actuate the cooling fan. The A/C pressure transducer message to the PCM will also prevent the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 4.5° C (40° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. Refer to the Electric A/C Condenser Cooling Fan Switch Point chart for condenser cooling fan on/off pressures. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C discharge line (3). 4. Remove the O-ring seal (4) from the discharge line fitting and discard. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8734 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the discharge line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the discharge line fitting. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Relay Blower Motor Relay: Locations Front Blower Motor Relay Front Blower Motor Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Front Blower Motor Relay > Page 8740 Blower Motor Relay: Locations Rear Blower Motor Relay Accessory Delay Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Blower Motor-Front Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Blower Motor-Front Component ID: 215 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A927 12RD/BR 85 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C229 20DB 86 FUSED B(+) A927 12RD/BR 87 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 12DB 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Blower Motor-Front > Page 8743 Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Relay-Blower Motor-Rear Component ID: 216 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR-REAR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A222 14RD/LB 85 GROUND Z911 20BK 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 87 FUSED REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C51 14BR/RD 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Controls - Front Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the standard front heating-A/C system is a International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The front blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) directly to the front blower motor when equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) system, or the blower motor power module when equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) system. The front blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground circuit through the integrated power module. The front blower motor relay is located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Refer to the PDC label for front blower motor relay identification and location. Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard front blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the battery to control the high current output to the front blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the front blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The front blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the front blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives battery current through a fuse in the PDC at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground circuit through the integrated power module. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current through a fuse in the PDC at all times. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the front blower motor when equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) system, or the blower motor power module when equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) system only when the front blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the front blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The front blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Controls - Front > Page 8746 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Controls - Rear Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the rear heating-A/C system is a International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The rear blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the junction block directly to the rear blower motor. The rear blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a voltage signal by the ignition switch. The rear blower motor relay is located in the junction block (JB) in the passenger compartment. Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard rear blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the ignition switch to control the high current output to the rear blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The rear blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the junction block (JB). The inputs and outputs of the rear blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a ground at all times. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current from a fuse in the junction block (JB) through an ignition switch output (run) circuit only when the ignition switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the rear blower motor through the rear blower motor relay output circuit only when the rear blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the rear blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The rear blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Controls - Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the power distribution center (PDC) (1). 3. Open the PDC cover (2). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the inner surface of the PDC cover for rear blower motor relay identification and location. 4. Remove the rear blower motor relay (3) from the PDC. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the inner surface of the PDC cover for rear blower motor relay identification and location. 1. Position the rear blower motor relay (3) into the proper receptacle of the PDC (1). 2. Align the rear blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the PDC cover (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8749 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Controls - Front > Page 8750 Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Controls - Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the junction block (JB) (1) on the left side of the passenger compartment behind the cowl side trim panel. 3. Remove the rear blower motor relay (2) from the JB. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the rear blower motor relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the junction block (JB) (1). 2. Align the rear blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the JB receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Reinstall the cowl side trim panel. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations A/C Clutch Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8754 Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 211 Component : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Connector: Name : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A916 20OR/WT 85 A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL C13 20LB/OR 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F202 20PK/GY 87 A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT C3 20DB/GY 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C clutch relay (1) is a International Standards Organization (ISO) micro-relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The ISO micro-relay terminal functions are the same as a conventional ISO relay. However, the ISO micro-relay terminal pattern (or footprint) is different, the current capacity is lower, and the physical dimensions are smaller than those of the conventional ISO relay. The A/C clutch relay is located in the power distribution center (PDC) in the engine compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8757 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard A/C clutch micro-relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) to control the high current output to the A/C clutch field coil. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the A/C clutch field coil. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The A/C clutch relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the power distribution center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the A/C clutch relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground input from the PCM through the A/C clutch relay control circuit only when the PCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through a ignition switch output (run-start) circuit only when the ignition switch is in the On or Start positions. - The normally open terminal (87) provides a battery current output to the A/C clutch coil through the A/C clutch relay output circuit only when the compressor clutch relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the A/C clutch relay coil is de-energized. The A/C clutch relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Locate the power distribution center (PDC) (1). 3. Open the PDC cover (2). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the PDC cover for A/C clutch relay location. 4. Remove the A/C clutch relay (3) from the PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8760 Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the PDC cover for A/C clutch relay location. 1. Position the A/C clutch relay (3) into the proper receptacle of the PDC (1). 2. Align the A/C clutch relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the PDC receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the PDC cover (2). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations Control Module HVAC: Locations Component ID: 181 Component : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C1 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z961 10BK 3 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 4 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8764 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C2 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8765 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8766 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 181 Component : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C1 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1-2 GROUND Z961 10BK 3 FRONT BLOWER CONTROL C56 20DB/LB 4 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT C7 10DB Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8767 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER-BLOWER MOTOR-FRONT C2 Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (ATC) Pin Description Circuit 1 BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY C805 12DB/WT 2 GROUND C806 12DB/BR Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8768 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description DESCRIPTION A blower motor power module is used on this model when it is equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) heating-A/C system. Models equipped with the manual temperature control (MTC) heating-A/C system use a blower motor resistor block, instead of the blower motor power module. The blower motor power module is mounted to the rear of the HVAC housing, directly behind the glove box. The blower motor power module consists of a molded plastic mounting plate with two integral connector receptacles (1). Concealed behind the mounting plate is the power module electronic circuitry and a large finned heat sink (2). The blower motor power module is accessed for service from beneath the right side of the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Description > Page 8771 Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Front Blower Motor Power Module - Operation OPERATION The blower motor power module is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. A second connector receptacle receives the wire harness connector from the blower motor. The blower motor power module allows the microprocessor-based automatic temperature control (ATC) A/C-heater control to calculate and provide infinitely variable blower motor speeds based upon either manual blower switch input or the ATC programming using a pulse width modulated (PWM) circuit strategy. The PWM voltage is applied to a comparator circuit which compares the PWM signal voltage to the blower motor feedback voltage. The resulting output drives the power module circuitry, which provides a linear output voltage to change or maintain the desired blower speed. The blower motor power module is diagnosed using a scan tool. The blower motor power module cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The heat sink for the blower motor power module may get very hot during normal operation. If the blower motor was turned on prior to servicing the blower motor power module, wait five minutes to allow the heat sink to cool before performing diagnosis or service. Failure to take this precaution can result in possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. If equipped with a trim cover (2), remove the two screws (1) that secure the trim cover over the blower motor power module (3) located below the right side of the instrument panel and remove the cover. 3. Disconnect the two wire harness connectors (1) from the blower motor power module (2). 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor power module to the front HVAC housing (4). 5. Remove the blower motor power module from the front HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Blower Motor Power Module - Removal > Page 8774 Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair Front Blower Motor Power Module - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor power module (2) into the front HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor power module to the front HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the two wire harness connectors (1) to the blower motor power module. 4. If equipped with a trim cover (2), install the trim cover over the blower motor power module (3) and install the two retaining screws (1). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID: 354 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 2 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8779 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8780 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 354 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 AAT SIGNAL G31 20VT/OR 2 SENSOR GROUND G931 20VT/BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8781 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heating and Air Conditioning Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Heating and Air Conditioning Description DESCRIPTION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that monitors the air temperature outside of the vehicle. The ambient air temperature sensor is mounted onto the inside of the front bumper beam and its data is used by the heating-A/C system to maintain optimum cabin temperature levels. Operation OPERATION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit sent by the front control module (FCM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The ambient air temperature sensor changes its internal resistance in response to changes in the outside air temperature, which either increases or decreases the reference signal voltage read by the FCM. The FCM converts and broadcasts the sensor data over the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the A/C-heater control and other various vehicle control modules. The ambient air temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The ambient air temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 8784 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Overhead Module Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the right side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. For complete circuit diagrams refer to Diagrams/Electrical. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent to it by the A/C-heater control. The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the A/C-heater control. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the A/C-heater control senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit, which it is programmed to correspond to a specific temperature. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Heating and Air Conditioning Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the push pin (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor (1) to the inside of the front bumper beam. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the ambient air temperature sensor and remove the sensor from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the ambient air temperature sensor (1). 2. Position the ambient air temperature sensor to the inside of the front bumper beam. 3. Install the push pin (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 8787 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Overhead Module Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the ambient temperature sensor (1), on the right side of the radiator yoke (2) behind the grille. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the ambient temperature sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the one screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor bracket to the radiator yoke. 5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the radiator yoke. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient temperature sensor (1) onto the radiator yoke (2). 2. Install the screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor to the radiator yoke. Tighten the screw to 5.6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heating and Air Conditioning > Page 8788 3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the ambient temperature sensor (1). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8797 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8798 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8804 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 8805 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 8814 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed NUMBER: 24-004-10 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: April 7, 2010 SUBJECT: No A/C Or Evaporator Freeze Up On Long Trips With Blower In Low Speed Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves adding a resistor 470 ohm resistor in the evaporator temperature sensor signal circuit. MODELS: 2004-2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen NOTE: This bulletin applies to all HB/HG vehicles with A/C (sales code HAA or HAB or HAF). This bulletin does not cover the 2009 HG HEV vehicle. SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customers may experience poor A/C, little to no A/C operation or reduced airflow from the instrument panel vents. This condition often occurs after a extended drive cycle (greater that 2 hours) with the A/C on and the blower speed is set to the low position. Once the vehicle is shut off or the A/C is turned off for approximately 2 hours the A/C will operate normally. Adding the resistor to the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire allows the A/C Compressor to cycle at a higher temperature more frequently to avoid this condition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all A/C systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Remove and disconnect the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 - Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Removal Procedures. 2. Using the wiring diagrams available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT locate the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. Cavity 10 of the C2 black 12 - way connector for ATC systems. Cavity 2 of 20 - way black C1 connector for MTC systems. 3. Measure 76mm (3 inches) down from end of ATC/MTC connector and cut the evaporator temperature sensor signal wire. 4. Using the 2 splice crimps and 2 wire shrink wraps from resistor kit p/n 68064996AA splice in the 470 ohm resistor. Follow the detailed wiring procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To the Wiring Tab > 8W-01 Wiring Diagram Information > Wire > Standard Procedure. NOTE: Be sure to use the splice crimps and shrink wrap on wires and resistor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: > 24-004-10 > Apr > 10 > A/C - No A/C After Long Trip With Blower On Low Speed > Page 8820 5. Install the ATC or MTC control head. Follow the detailed service procedures available in DealerCONNECT/TechCONNECT, Refer To Group 24 Heating & Air Conditioning > Controls, Front > Controls, A/C & Heater Installation Procedures. 6. Using the wiTECH(TM) or StarSCAN(R) erase all DTC. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8821 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 361 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/LG 2 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8822 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8823 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 361 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL C21 20DB/LG 2 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG Component Location - 27 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 8824 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. NOTE: Cutaway of typical HVAC housing shown for clarity in illustration. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8827 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the surface temperature of A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the resistance reading as an indication that conditions are correct to broadcast an A/C request message on the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the front control module (FCM). The FCM then requests the powertrain control module (PCM) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary over the CAN C bus. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel assembly. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8830 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 456 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 3 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 4-Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8834 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8835 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 456 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 5 VOLT SUPPLY T103 20YL/OR 3 A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL C18 20LB/BR 4-Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 8836 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C discharge line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C discharge line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the discharge line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8839 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the discharge line. The A/C pressure transducer will change its internal resistance in response to the pressures it monitors. A Schrader-type valve in the discharge line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The front control module (FCM) provides a five volt reference signal to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the A/C pressure transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The FCM broadcasts a refrigerant pressure message to the PCM, which is programmed to respond to the A/C pressure transducer and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch and the radiator cooling fan to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3275 kPa (475 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). If the refrigerant pressure rises above 1655 kPa (240 psi), the PCM will actuate the cooling fan. The A/C pressure transducer message to the PCM will also prevent the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 4.5° C (40° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. Refer to the Electric A/C Condenser Cooling Fan Switch Point chart for condenser cooling fan on/off pressures. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C discharge line (3). 4. Remove the O-ring seal (4) from the discharge line fitting and discard. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8842 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the discharge line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the discharge line fitting. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared Solar Sensor: Locations Sensor-Infrared Component ID: 364 Component : SENSOR-INFRARED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INFRARED Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 2-3 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG 4 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8847 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8848 Solar Sensor: Locations Sensor-Sun Component ID: 392 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 2 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 3 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 4 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 4 SUN SENSOR RETURN G939 20VT/DB Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8849 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared Solar Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Infrared Component ID: 364 Component : SENSOR-INFRARED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INFRARED Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 2-3 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG 4 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8852 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8853 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Sun Component ID: 392 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 2 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 3 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 4 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 4 SUN SENSOR RETURN G939 20VT/DB Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8854 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Solar Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The infrared sensor consists of an infrared transducer (1) located in the overhead console. The infrared sensor is used only on models equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) heater-A/C system. The infrared transducer is contained within a black molded plastic housing (2) with an integral wire connector receptacle (3). The integral mounting tab (4) allows the infrared sensor to be secured with one screw to the overhead console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8857 Solar Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The infrared sensor detects thermal radiation emitted by the front seat occupants and surroundings and converts its data into a linear pulse width modulated (PWM) output signal, which is sent to the compass temperature module (EOM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The EOM sends a message over the controller area network (CAN) B bus where it is read by the automatic temperature control (ATC) A/C-heater control. The ATC A/C-heater control uses the infrared sensor data as one of the inputs necessary to automatically control the interior cabin temperature level. By using thermal radiation (surface temperature) measurement, rather than an air temperature measurement, the ATC heating-A/C system is able to adjust itself to the comfort level as perceived by the occupants. This allows the ATC system to compensate for other ambient conditions affecting comfort levels, such as solar heat gain or evaporative heat loss. The ATC system logic responds to the infrared sensor message from the EOM by calculating and adjusting the air flow temperature and air flow rate needed to properly obtain and maintain the selected comfort level temperature of the occupants. The EOM continually monitors the infrared sensor circuits, and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problem it detects. The infrared sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The infrared sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Typical overhead console shown. Infrared sensor location may vary. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (2) and place it on a workbench. 3. Remove the screw (3) that secures the infrared sensor (1) to the overhead console. 4. Remove the infrared sensor from the overhead console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8860 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical overhead console shown. Infrared sensor location may vary. 1. Position the infrared sensor (1) onto the overhead console (2). 2. Install the screw (3) that secures the infrared sensor to the overhead console. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs). 3. Install the overhead console. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Two refrigerant system service ports are used to recover/recycle/evacuate/charge and test the A/C refrigerant system. Unique sizes are used on the service ports for the R-134a refrigerant system to ensure the system is not accidentally contaminated with R-12 refrigerant or service equipment used for R-12 refrigerant. The high side service port (5) is located on the liquid line (3) above the receiver/drier (2). The low side service port (6) is located on the suction line (9) at the top of the engine. Both the high side and low side A/C service port valve cores are serviceable. Each of the service ports has a threaded plastic protective cap installed over it from the factory. After servicing the refrigerant system, always reinstall both of the service port caps. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Review safety precautions and warnings before performing this procedure. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: Typical A/C system service port and refrigerant line shown. 1. Remove the protective cap (1) from the service port (2). 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system. 3. Using a Schrader-type valve core tool, remove the valve core (3) from the service port. 4. Install a plug in or tape over the opened service port(s). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8866 Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical A/C system service port and refrigerant line shown. 1. Lubricate the valve core (3) with clean refrigerant oil prior to installation. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 2. Remove the tape or plug from the service port (2). CAUTION: A valve core that is not fully seated in the A/C service port can result in damage to the valve during refrigerant system evacuation and charge. Such damage may result in a loss of system refrigerant while uncoupling the charge adapters. 3. Using a Schrader-type valve core tool, install and tighten the valve core into the service port(s). 4. Evacuate the refrigerant system. 5. Charge the refrigerant system. NOTE: The protective cap helps aid in service port sealing and helps protects the refrigerant system from contamination. Remember to always reinstall the protective cap onto the service port when refrigerant system service is complete. 6. Install the protective cap (1) onto the service port. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared Solar Sensor: Locations Sensor-Infrared Component ID: 364 Component : SENSOR-INFRARED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INFRARED Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 2-3 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG 4 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8871 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8872 Solar Sensor: Locations Sensor-Sun Component ID: 392 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 2 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 3 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 4 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 4 SUN SENSOR RETURN G939 20VT/DB Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8873 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared Solar Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Infrared Component ID: 364 Component : SENSOR-INFRARED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INFRARED Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 2-3 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG 4 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8876 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8877 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Sun Component ID: 392 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 AUTO HEADLAMPS SIGNAL L24 20WT/VT 2 SUN SENSOR SIGNAL G39 20VT/OR 3 SUN SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL G139 20VT/OR 4 SENSOR GROUND C121 20DB/DG 4 SUN SENSOR RETURN G939 20VT/DB Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Infrared > Page 8878 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Solar Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The infrared sensor consists of an infrared transducer (1) located in the overhead console. The infrared sensor is used only on models equipped with the automatic temperature control (ATC) heater-A/C system. The infrared transducer is contained within a black molded plastic housing (2) with an integral wire connector receptacle (3). The integral mounting tab (4) allows the infrared sensor to be secured with one screw to the overhead console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8881 Solar Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The infrared sensor detects thermal radiation emitted by the front seat occupants and surroundings and converts its data into a linear pulse width modulated (PWM) output signal, which is sent to the compass temperature module (EOM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The EOM sends a message over the controller area network (CAN) B bus where it is read by the automatic temperature control (ATC) A/C-heater control. The ATC A/C-heater control uses the infrared sensor data as one of the inputs necessary to automatically control the interior cabin temperature level. By using thermal radiation (surface temperature) measurement, rather than an air temperature measurement, the ATC heating-A/C system is able to adjust itself to the comfort level as perceived by the occupants. This allows the ATC system to compensate for other ambient conditions affecting comfort levels, such as solar heat gain or evaporative heat loss. The ATC system logic responds to the infrared sensor message from the EOM by calculating and adjusting the air flow temperature and air flow rate needed to properly obtain and maintain the selected comfort level temperature of the occupants. The EOM continually monitors the infrared sensor circuits, and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problem it detects. The infrared sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The infrared sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Typical overhead console shown. Infrared sensor location may vary. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (2) and place it on a workbench. 3. Remove the screw (3) that secures the infrared sensor (1) to the overhead console. 4. Remove the infrared sensor from the overhead console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8884 Solar Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical overhead console shown. Infrared sensor location may vary. 1. Position the infrared sensor (1) onto the overhead console (2). 2. Install the screw (3) that secures the infrared sensor to the overhead console. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs). 3. Install the overhead console. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair SERVICE AFTER A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT DEPLOYMENT Any vehicle which is to be returned to use following a supplemental restraint deployment, must have the deployed restraints replaced. In addition, if the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. If the passenger airbag is deployed, the passenger airbag door must be replaced. The seat belt tensioners are deployed by the same signal that deploys the driver and passenger airbags and must also be replaced if either front airbag has been deployed. If a side curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag unit, the headliner, as well as the upper A, B, C and D-pillar trim must be replaced. These components are not intended for reuse and will be damaged or weakened as a result of a supplemental restraint deployment, which may or may not be obvious during a visual inspection. On vehicles with an optional sunroof, the sunroof drain tubes and hoses must be closely inspected following a side curtain airbag deployment. It is also critical that the mounting surfaces and mounting brackets for the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), side impact sensors, and front impact sensors be closely inspected and restored to their original conditions following any vehicle impact damage. Because the ORC and each front and side impact sensor are used by the supplemental restraint system to monitor or confirm the direction and severity of a vehicle impact, improper orientation or insecure fastening of these components may cause airbags not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required. All other vehicle components should be closely inspected following any supplemental restraint deployment, but are to be replaced only as required by the extent of the visible damage incurred. AIRBAG SQUIB STATUS Multistage airbags with multiple initiators (squibs) must be checked to determine that all squibs were used during the deployment event. The driver and passenger airbags in this vehicle are deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflators. Typically, both initiators are used and all potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is always necessary to confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper handling or disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic or hazardous materials. The following procedure should be performed using a diagnostic scan tool to verify the status of both airbag squibs before either deployed airbag is removed from the vehicle for disposal. CAUTION: Deployed front airbags having two initiators (squibs) in the airbag inflator may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the inflator. Do not dispose of these airbags unless you are certain of complete deployment. Refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for proper disposal procedures. Dispose of all non-deployed and deployed airbags and seat belt tensioners in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local, and federal regulations. 1. Be certain that the diagnostic scan tool contains the latest version of the proper diagnostic software. Connect the scan tool to the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC). The DLC is located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel, outboard of the steering column. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Using the scan tool, read and record the active (current) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data. Using the active DTC information, refer to the Airbag Squib Status table to determine the status of both driver and passenger airbag squibs. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8889 NOTE: If none of the Driver or Passenger Squib 1 or 2 open are active codes, the status of the airbag squibs is unknown. In this case the airbag should be handled and disposed of as if the squibs were both live. CLEANUP PROCEDURE Following a supplemental restraint deployment, the vehicle interior will contain a powdery residue. This residue consists primarily of harmless particulate by-products of the small pyrotechnic charge that initiates the propellant used to deploy a supplemental restraint. However, this residue may also contain traces of sodium hydroxide powder, a chemical by-product of the propellant material that is used to generate the inert gas that inflates the airbag. Since sodium hydroxide powder can irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat, be certain to wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and a long-sleeved shirt during cleanup. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, if you experience skin irritation during cleanup, run cool water over the affected area. Also, if you experience irritation of the nose or throat, exit the vehicle for fresh air until the irritation ceases. If irritation continues, see a physician. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 8890 1. Begin the cleanup by using a vacuum cleaner to remove any residual powder from the vehicle interior. Clean from outside the vehicle and work your way inside, so that you avoid kneeling or sitting on a non-cleaned area. 2. Be certain to vacuum the heater and air conditioning outlets as well. Run the heater and air conditioner blower on the lowest speed setting and vacuum any powder expelled from the outlets. CAUTION: Deployed front airbags having two initiators (squibs) in the airbag inflator may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the inflator. Do not dispose of these airbags unless you are certain of complete deployment. Refer to AIRBAG SQUIB STATUS. All damaged, ineffective, or non-deployed supplemental restraints which are replaced on vehicles are to be handled and disposed of properly. If an airbag or seat belt tensioner unit is ineffective or damaged and non-deployed, refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for proper disposal. Be certain to dispose of all non-deployed and deployed supplemental restraints in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local and federal regulations. 3. Next, remove the deployed supplemental restraints from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service removal procedures. 4. You may need to vacuum the interior of the vehicle a second time to recover all of the powder. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 8896 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 8897 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 8902 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 8903 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Component ID: 12 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8906 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8907 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Driver Squib 1 Component ID: 8 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Color : BROWN # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20BK/BL 2 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20OR/BL Component Location - 33 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8908 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8909 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Driver Squib 2 Component ID: 9 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20OR/BL 2 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20BR/BL Component Location - 33 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8910 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8911 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Passenger Squib Component ID: 10 Component : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Connector: Name : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 2 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 3 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 4 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8912 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8913 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Side Curtain-Left Component ID: 11 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 2 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8914 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Component ID: 12 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8917 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8918 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Driver Squib 1 Component ID: 8 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Color : BROWN # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20BK/BL 2 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20OR/BL Component Location - 33 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8919 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8920 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Driver Squib 2 Component ID: 9 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20OR/BL 2 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20BR/BL Component Location - 33 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8921 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8922 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Passenger Squib Component ID: 10 Component : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Connector: Name : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 2 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 3 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 4 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8923 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8924 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Side Curtain-Left Component ID: 11 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 2 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 8925 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Bag-Side Curtain Air Bag: Description and Operation Air Bag-Side Curtain Description DESCRIPTION Optional side curtain airbags are available for this vehicle when it is also equipped with dual front airbags. These airbags are passive, inflatable, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components, and vehicles with this equipment can be readily identified by a molded identification trim button with the SRS - AIRBAG logo located near the top of each upper B-pillar trim panel. This system is designed to reduce injuries to the vehicle occupants in the event of a side impact collision or a vehicle rollover incident. Vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags have two individually controlled curtain airbag units. These airbag units are concealed and mounted above the headliner where they are each secured to one of the roof side rails. Each folded airbag cushion is contained within a long extruded plastic channel (5) that extends along the roof rail from the A-pillar at the front of the vehicle to the D-pillar at the rear of the vehicle. The channel is initially secured during installation with plastic push-in fasteners to the roof rail. A long tether (3) extends down the A-pillar from the front of the airbag cushion, where it is retained to the pillar with plastic push-in routing clips and it is secured to the base of the A-pillar near the belt line with a screw and a rivet nut. A short tether (6) at the rear of the cushion is secured by a screw to a U-nut located near the top of the D-pillar. The hybrid-type inflator (1) for each airbag is secured to the roof rail at the front of the airbag unit between the A-pillar and the B-pillar, and is connected to the airbag cushion by a long tubular manifold (2). The entire assembly is secured to U-nuts spaced along the inside of the roof rail with screws. A two-wire pigtail harness (4) is routed from the rear of the airbag inflator and down the B-pillar, where it is retained by routing clips. The pigtail harness is connected to a take out and connector of the body wire harness on the B-pillar, which connects the airbag unit to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Bag-Side Curtain > Page 8928 The side curtain airbag unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective, or in any way damaged. Once a side curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag unit, the headliner, the upper A, B, C and D-pillar trim, and all other visibly damaged components must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Each side curtain airbag is deployed individually by an electrical signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) to which it is connected through left or right curtain airbag line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits. The hybrid-type inflator assembly for each airbag contains a small canister of highly compressed inert gas. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the airbag inflator, the electrical energy creates enough heat to ignite chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemicals burn rapidly and produce the pressure necessary to rupture a containment disk in the inert gas canister. The inflator and inert gas canister are sealed and connected to a tubular manifold so that all of the released gas is directed into the folded curtain airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the airbag cushion inflates it will drop down from the roof rail between the edge of the headliner and the side glass/body pillars to form a curtain-like cushion to protect the vehicle occupants during a side impact collision or a vehicle rollover incident. The front and rear tethers keep the side airbag cushion taut to the side of the vehicle, thus ensuring that the bag will deploy in the proper position. Following the airbag deployment, the airbag cushion slowly deflates by venting the inert gas through the loose weave of the cushion fabric, and the deflated cushion hangs down loosely from the roof rail. Proper diagnosis of the side curtain airbag inflator and squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Bag-Side Curtain > Page 8929 Air Bag: Description and Operation Air Bag-Driver Description DESCRIPTION The color-keyed, injection molded, thermoplastic driver airbag protective trim cover (2) is the most visible part of the driver airbag. The driver airbag is located in the center of the steering wheel (1), where it is secured with two screws to the armature of the four-spoke steering wheel. All vehicles have either a chrome Dodge Ram or Chrysler emblem in the center of the trim cover. Concealed beneath the driver airbag trim cover are the horn switch, the folded airbag cushion, the airbag cushion retainer, the airbag housing, the airbag inflator, and the retainers that secure the inflator to the airbag housing. The airbag cushion, housing (5), and inflator (3) are secured within an integral receptacle molded into the back of the trim cover (4). The four vertical walls of this receptacle have a total of 12 small windows with blocking tabs that are engaged by 12 hook formations around the perimeter of the airbag housing. Each hook is inserted through one of the windows and the blocking tab in each window keeps the hook properly engaged with the trim cover, locking the trim cover securely into place on the airbag housing. The resistive membrane-type horn switch is secured with heat stakes to the inside surface of the driver airbag trim cover, between the trim cover and the folded airbag cushion. The horn switch ground pigtail wire (2) has an eyelet terminal connector that is captured beneath a flanged nut on the upper right inflator mounting stud on the back of the housing. The horn switch feed pigtail wire has a black, molded plastic insulator (1) that is secured by an integral retainer in a locator hole near the upper right corner of the airbag housing and is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the steering wheel wire harness. Both horn switch wires are routed through an integral notch in the center of the upper edge of the airbag housing stamping. The airbag used in this vehicle is a multistage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than those used in some prior vehicles. A 71 centimeter (28 inch) diameter, radial deploying fabric cushion with internal tethers is used. The airbag inflator is a dual-initiator, non-azide, pyrotechnic-type unit with four mounting studs and is secured to the stamped metal airbag housing by four flanged hex nuts. Two keyed and color-coded connector receptacles on the driver airbag inflator connect the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through two yellow-jacketed, two-wire pigtail harnesses of the clockspring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Bag-Side Curtain > Page 8930 The driver airbag unit cannot be repaired, and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective or in any way damaged. The driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit may be disassembled from the driver airbag unit, and is available for separate service replacement. Operation OPERATION The multistage driver airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the back of the airbag housing and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the driver airbag trim cover will split at predetermined breakout lines, then fold back out of the way along with the horn switch unit. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas towards the instrument panel through vent holes within the fabric used to construct the back (steering wheel side) panel of the airbag cushion. Some of the chemicals used to create the inert gas may be considered hazardous while in their solid state before they are burned, but they are securely sealed within the airbag inflator. Typically, both initiators are used and all potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used during a deployment due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is necessary to always confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic or hazardous materials. The inert gas that is produced when the chemicals are burned is harmless. However, a small amount of residue from the burned chemicals may cause some temporary discomfort if it contacts the skin, eyes, or breathing passages. If skin or eye irritation is noted, rinse the affected area with plenty of cool, clean water. If breathing passages are irritated, move to another area where there is plenty of clean, fresh air to breath. If the irritation is not alleviated by these actions, contact a physician. Proper diagnosis of the driver airbag inflator and squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Bag-Side Curtain > Page 8931 Air Bag: Description and Operation Air Bag-Passenger Description DESCRIPTION The horizontal surface of the injection molded, thermoplastic passenger airbag door (1) is the most visible part of the passenger airbag. The passenger airbag door is located above the glove box opening on the top of the instrument panel (2) in front of the front seat passenger seating position. The outboard edges of the airbag door are secured with integral snap features (3) to the instrument panel base trim. Located below the passenger airbag door (2) within the instrument panel is the passenger airbag unit. The passenger airbag housing fits into a molded receptacle on the back of the airbag door, where twelve stamped hook formations on the forward and rearward edges of the airbag housing are engaged in mating small window openings on the forward and rearward flanges of the receptacle to secure the airbag door to the airbag housing. These airbag door fasteners and mounting provisions are all concealed beneath the instrument panel base trim. The passenger airbag unit is secured by two screws through a stamped mounting bracket (5) to the instrument panel structural support. The passenger airbag unit used in this vehicle is a multistage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than those used in some prior vehicles. The passenger airbag unit consists of a stamped and welded metal housing, the airbag cushion, the airbag inflator, and a stamped metal airbag cushion retainer plate that is secured to the airbag housing with four studs and nuts. The airbag housing contains the airbag inflator and the folded airbag cushion. An approximately 80 centimeter (31.5 inch) wide by 90 centimeter (35.5 inch) high rectangular fabric cushion is used. The airbag inflator (4) is a non-azide, pyrotechnic-type unit that is secured to and sealed within the airbag housing. A short four-wire pigtail harness with a keyed, yellow connector insulator (1) connects the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The passenger airbag includes the airbag door. This unit cannot be repaired, and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective, or in any way damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Bag-Side Curtain > Page 8932 Operation OPERATION The multistage passenger airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the passenger airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the airbag cushion and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the passenger airbag door will split at predetermined tear seam lines concealed on the inside surface of the door, then the door will pivot up over the top of the instrument panel and out of the way. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas through a vent hole in each fabric side panel of the airbag cushion. Typically, both initiators are used during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used during a deployment due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is necessary to always confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic materials. Proper diagnosis of the passenger airbag inflator and the passenger airbag squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Air Bag: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the side curtain airbag, or becoming entrapped between the side curtain airbag cushion and the headliner. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged side curtain airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the headliner from the vehicle. 3. Remove the lower trim from the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Disconnect the side curtain airbag pigtail wire connector (6) from the body wire harness connector on the lower inner B-pillar. 5. Disengage the pigtail wire plastic retainers from the inner B-pillar. 6. Remove the screw (7) that secures the side curtain airbag (3) to the U-nut near the top of the inner D-pillar. 7. Remove the screw (4) that secures the side curtain airbag front tether to the inner A-pillar near the belt line. 8. Remove the remaining screws (1) that secure the side curtain airbag to the U-nuts in the inner roof rail and D-pillar. 9. Disengage the three front tether plastic retainers (5) from the inner A-pillar. 10. Disengage the four airbag plastic retainers (2) from the inner roof rail. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8935 11. Remove the side curtain airbag from the vehicle through the liftgate opening as a unit. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the side curtain airbag, or becoming entrapped between the side curtain airbag cushion and the headliner. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged side curtain airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut (2) is properly installed in the inner A-pillar, and that it is in good condition. 2. Check to be certain that the eight U-nuts (3) are properly installed in the inner roof rail (1) and inner D-pillar, and that they are in good condition. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8936 3. Position the side curtain airbag (3) into the vehicle as a unit through the liftgate opening. 4. Working from front to back, align each of the four plastic push-in fasteners (2) on the airbag channel with their holes in the inner roof side rail and push them straight in until they are fully seated. 5. Working from back to front, align each of the three front tether plastic retainers (5) with their holes in the inner A-pillar and push them in until they are fully seated. 6. Loosely install the eight screws (1) that secure the side curtain airbag to the U-nuts in the inner roof rail and D-pillar. 7. Working from front to back, tighten each of the eight screws. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 8. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the side curtain airbag front tether to the rivet nut in the inner A-pillar near the belt line. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 9. Install and tighten the screw (7) that secures the side curtain airbag to the U-nut near the top of the inner D-pillar. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 10. Reconnect the side curtain airbag pigtail wire connector (6) to the body wire harness connector on the lower inner B-pillar. Be certain the connector latches are fully engaged. 11. Engage the pigtail wire plastic retainers with their holes in the inner B-pillar. 12. Reinstall the lower trim onto the inside of the B-pillar. 13. Reinstall the headliner into the vehicle. WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag cushion and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8937 NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged driver airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the driver airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. From the underside of the steering wheel, remove the two screws (3) that secure the driver airbag (1) to the steering wheel armature (2). CAUTION: Do not pull on the horn switch feed pigtail wire to disengage the connector from the driver airbag housing or to disconnect the horn switch to steering wheel wire harness connection. Improper pulling on this pigtail wire or connection can result in damage to the horn switch membrane or feed circuit. 3. Pull the driver airbag (1) away from the steering wheel far enough to access the three electrical connections on the back of the airbag housing. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector for the horn switch (2) from the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (4), which is located on the back of the driver airbag housing. CAUTION: Do not pull on the clockspring pigtail wires or pry on the connector insulator to disengage the connector from the driver airbag inflator connector receptacle. Improper removal of these pigtail wires and their connector insulators can result in damage to the airbag circuits or connector insulators. 5. The clockspring driver airbag pigtail wire connectors (3) are secured by integral latches to the airbag inflator connector receptacles, which are located on the back of the driver airbag housing. Depress the latches on each side of the connector insulator and pull the insulators straight out from the airbag inflator to disconnect them from the connector receptacles. 6. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 7. If the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8938 WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement airbags are serviced with trim covers in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged driver airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the driver airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. 1. Position the driver airbag (1) close enough to the steering wheel to reconnect the three electrical connections on the back of the airbag housing. 2. When installing the driver airbag, reconnect the two clockspring driver airbag pigtail wire connectors (3) to the airbag inflator connector receptacles by pressing straight in on the connector. Be certain to engage each keyed and color-coded connector to the matching connector receptacle. You can be certain that each connector is fully engaged in its receptacle by listening carefully for a distinct, audible click as the connector latches snap into place. 3. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector (2) for the horn switch to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (4), which is located on the back of the driver airbag housing. 4. Carefully position the driver airbag (1) in the steering wheel (2). Be certain that the clockspring pigtail wires and the steering wheel wire harness in the steering wheel hub area are not pinched between the driver airbag and the steering wheel armature. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8939 5. From the underside of the steering wheel, install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the driver airbag to the steering wheel armature. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged passenger airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the passenger airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. CAUTION: Be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the instrument panel top pad from receiving cosmetic damage from the passenger airbag housing during the following procedures. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the defroster grille from the top of the instrument panel. 3. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel. 4. Reach up into the instrument panel glove box opening (2) and through the access holes (1) to remove the two screws (4) that secure the passenger airbag bracket (3) to the instrument panel support structure. 5. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the forward and side edges of the passenger airbag door away from the top of the instrument panel far enough to disengage the snap features on the door from the receptacles in the instrument panel top pad. 6. Pull the passenger airbag out of the instrument panel far enough to access and disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector from the airbag inflator pigtail wire connector on the right side of the airbag mounting bracket. To disconnect the connector: a. Slide the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock on the top of the connector toward the side of the connector. b. Depress the connector latch tab and pull the two halves of the connector straight away from each other. 7. Remove the passenger airbag from the instrument panel as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8940 Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the passenger airbag, or becoming entrapped between the passenger airbag cushion and the passenger airbag door. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the passenger airbag door must never be painted. Replacement passenger airbags are serviced with doors in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the airbag door responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged passenger airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the passenger airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. CAUTION: Be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the instrument panel top pad from receiving cosmetic damage from the passenger airbag housing during the following procedures. 1. Position the passenger airbag unit onto the instrument panel. 2. Reconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector for the airbag to the passenger airbag inflator pigtail wire connector on the right side of the airbag mounting bracket. Be certain that the latch on the connector and the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock are each fully engaged. 3. Carefully lower the passenger airbag unit into the instrument panel, being certain that the airbag mounting bracket (3) is properly positioned to the instrument panel support structure. 4. Reach into the glove box opening (2) to install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the passenger airbag mounting bracket to the instrument panel support structure through the access holes (1). Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 5. Align and insert the rearward tabs of the passenger airbag door into the slots in the instrument panel top pad. 6. Using hand pressure, push down on the forward and side edges of the passenger airbag door over each snap feature until it snaps into its receptacle in the instrument panel top pad. 7. Reinstall the glove box into the instrument panel. 8. Reinstall the defroster grille onto the top of the instrument panel. WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8941 Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8942 Air Bag: Overhaul Disassembly DISASSEMBLY WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, service of this unit should be performed only by DaimlerChrysler-trained and authorized dealer service technicians. Failure to take the proper precautions or to follow the proper procedures could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper airbag deployment and possible occupant injuries. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement trim covers are serviced in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedures can be used to replace the driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit for service. If the driver airbag is ineffective or deployed, the entire driver airbag, trim cover and horn switch must be replaced as a unit. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 3. Place the driver airbag on a suitable clean and dry work surface with the trim cover facing down. If the trim cover will be reused, be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the trim cover from receiving cosmetic damage during the following procedures. 4. Carefully pry the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (1) away from the back of the driver airbag housing (3) far enough to disengage the integral connector retainer from the locator hole just above the upper right inflator mounting stud. 5. Remove the nut that secures the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal (2) to the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. 6. Remove the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal from the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. 7. Disengage each of the twelve hooks (5 and 6) of the airbag housing from the twelve windows in the vertical walls of the trim cover (4), one wall at a time. Start by disengaging the upper wall, then do each of the two side walls, and finish with the lower wall. To disengage the hooks, use hand pressure to push the adjacent edge of the airbag housing firmly and evenly downward into the trim cover receptacle, while at the same time pushing outward on the upper edge of the receptacle wall. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8943 8. With all of the hooks disengaged, lift the housing, inflator, and cushion as a unit from the receptacle on the back of the driver airbag trim cover. Assembly ASSEMBLY WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, service of this unit should be performed only by DaimlerChrysler-trained and authorized dealer service technicians. Failure to take the proper precautions or to follow the proper procedures could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper airbag deployment and possible occupant injuries. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement trim covers are serviced in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedures can be used to replace the driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit for service. If the driver airbag is ineffective or deployed, the entire driver airbag, trim cover and horn switch must be replaced as a unit. 1. Place the driver airbag on a suitable work surface with the airbag cushion facing up. 2. Fold the two flaps (1) of cushion material up around the sides and over the top of the airbag cushion retainer strap (2). 3. Position the new driver airbag trim cover over the airbag cushion, then push the receptacle of the trim cover down evenly over the cushion. Be certain that the cushion material flaps remain oriented over the cushion retainer strap as they were in STEP 2. 4. Turn the driver airbag and the new driver airbag trim cover over as a unit, and place the unit on a suitable clean and dry work surface with the airbag cushion facing down. Be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the trim cover from receiving cosmetic damage during the following procedures. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 8944 5. Be certain that the horn switch feed and ground pigtail wires are routed through the clearance notch at the top of the airbag housing (3), between the housing and the upper vertical wall of the trim cover receptacle. 6. Work around the perimeter of the unit engaging each of the twelve hooks (5 and 6) on the driver airbag housing through the windows in the walls of the trim cover receptacle. 7. Install the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal (2) over the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. 8. Install and tighten the nut that secures the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal to the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (65 in. lbs.). 9. Using hand pressure, push the integral retainer of the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (1) into the locator hole just above the upper right inflator mounting stud on the back of the airbag housing. 10. After the driver airbag has been assembled, try pulling the trim cover and the airbag housing away from each other. This action will fully seat the edges of the windows into the cradles of the hooks. 11. Before reinstalling the airbag onto the steering wheel, check that the blocking tab (1) in each of the trim cover windows is oriented over the airbag housing hook (4) as shown. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 178 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54B 20WT 5-6-7-- 8-9 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 10 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT 11 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 12 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 18 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG 19 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 20 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 21 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 22 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 23 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 24 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8948 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8949 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB 3 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR 4 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8950 6-7-8-9 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL 10 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 11 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 12 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 18 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 19 - 20 GROUND Z104 20BK/LG 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 26 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE R263 20LB/VT 27 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 28 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 29 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 30 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 31 - 32 - Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8951 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8952 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 178 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54B 20WT 5-6-7-- 8-9 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 10 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT 11 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 12 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 18 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG 19 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 20 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 21 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 22 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 23 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 24 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8953 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8954 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB 3 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR 4 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8955 6-7-8-9 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL 10 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 11 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 12 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 18 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 19 - 20 GROUND Z104 20BK/LG 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 26 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE R263 20LB/VT 27 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 28 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 29 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 30 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 31 - 32 - Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8956 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is secured with three screws to a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel just behind the front seat crossmember and beneath the center floor console in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with four screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (3) printed on the label (2) on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges on three corners. The mounting flange to the right of the connector receptacle has an integral locating pin on its lower surface. Both right side flanges have round mounting holes, while the flange on the left side has a slotted mounting hole. A molded plastic electrical connector (4) with 2 receptacles, one containing 24 terminal pins and the other containing 32 terminal pins, exits the forward facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors of the body wire harness. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8959 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the supplemental restraint system logic circuits and controls all of the supplemental restraint system components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for supplemental restraint system diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the supplemental restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the JB. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw near the center of the instrument panel structural support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the supplemental restraint components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup supplemental restraint system protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. The ORC also monitors inputs from an internal rollover sensor and six additional remote impact sensors located on the left and right front door beams, the inner C-pillars and inner D-pillars to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a supplemental restraint deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. A second safing sensor within the ORC provides confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require supplemental restraint system protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the front seat belt tensioners and either side curtain airbag unit. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any occupant restraint controller diagnosis or service. The occupant restraint controller contains a rollover sensor, which enables the system to deploy the side curtains in the event of a vehicle rollover event. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally rolled during service while still connected to battery power, the side curtain airbags will deploy. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the occupant restraint controller, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The occupant restraint controller contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the supplemental restraints. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the center console from the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 3. Disconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) connector receptacles located on the forward facing side of the module. To disconnect the wire harness connectors from the ORC, depress the release tab and lift the lever arm on each connector. 4. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the ORC to the ORC bracket (4) that is welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Remove the ORC from the floor panel transmission tunnel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8962 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any occupant restraint controller diagnosis or service. The occupant restraint controller contains a rollover sensor, which enables the system to deploy the side curtains in the event of a vehicle rollover event. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally rolled during service while still connected to battery power, the side curtain airbags will deploy. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the occupant restraint controller, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The occupant restraint controller contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the supplemental restraints. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Carefully position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) to the ORC bracket (4) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle and the locating pin on the bottom of the right ORC mounting flange will be engaged into the locating hole in the ORC bracket. 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the ORC to the ORC bracket that is welded onto the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the screws to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). CAUTION: The lever arms of the wire harness connectors for the ORC MUST be in the unlatched position before they are inserted into their connector receptacles on the ORC or they may become damaged. 3. Reconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) to the ORC connector receptacles located on the forward facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches on both connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the center console onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Locations Component ID: 54 Component : CLOCKSPRING Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 4 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 5 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 5 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 6 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8966 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8967 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 2 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 3 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 4 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8968 Component Location - 32 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8969 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 22DB/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT 4 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8970 Component Location - 32 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8971 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C4 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Pin Description Circuit 1 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR 2 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8972 2 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT Component Location - 32 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8973 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8974 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams Component ID: 54 Component : CLOCKSPRING Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 20VT/OR 4 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 20VT 5 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20DB/DG 5 SENSOR GROUND K900 20DB/DG 6 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8975 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8976 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 2 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 3 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 4 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8977 Component Location - 32 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8978 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2 S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 22DB/DG 2 SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG 3 S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT 4 S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8979 Component Location - 32 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8980 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C4 Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Pin Description Circuit 1 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR 2 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8981 2 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT Component Location - 32 Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 8982 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The clockspring assembly is located near the top of the steering column behind the steering wheel. Two mounting tabs (6) with round holes integral to the sides of the case are secured by two screws onto the multi-function switch mounting housing. The clockspring for this vehicle also includes an integral, internal Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) for the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) that is serviced as a unit with the clockspring. The clockspring consists of a flat, round molded plastic case (4) with a stubby tail that hangs below the steering column. Within the plastic case is a spool-like molded plastic rotor with a large exposed hub. The upper surface of the rotor hub has a large center hole, an engagement dowel (5), two short pigtail wires with connectors (1), and two connector receptacles (3) that face toward the steering wheel. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a molded plastic locking pin (2) that snaps into a receptacle on the rotor and is engaged with tabs on the upper surface of the clockspring case. The locking pin secures the centered clockspring rotor to the clockspring case during shipment and handling, but must be removed from the clockspring after it is installed on the steering column. The lower surface of the case (1) facing toward the instrument panel includes a locating tab (2) that is engaged by a locating pin on the multi-function switch mounting housing, two integral connector receptacles (5) and an additional applied connector (4) with a short pigtail wire on the lower end, outboard of the two integral connector receptacles. The lower surface of the rotor hub also has a molded plastic turn signal cancel cam with two lobes (3) that is integral to the rotor. Within the plastic case and wound around the rotor spool is a long ribbon-like tape that consists of several thin copper wire leads sandwiched between two thin plastic membranes. The outer end of the tape terminates at the connector receptacles that face the instrument panel, while the inner end of the tape terminates at the pigtail wires and connector receptacles on the hub of the clockspring rotor that face the steering wheel. The clockspring cannot be repaired. If damaged, ineffective or if the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8985 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The clockspring is a mechanical electrical circuit component that is used to provide continuous electrical continuity between the fixed instrument panel wire harness and the electrical components mounted on or in the rotating steering wheel. On this vehicle the rotating electrical components include the driver airbag, the horn switch, the speed control switches, and the remote radio switches, if the vehicle is so equipped. The clockspring case is positioned and secured to the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column. The connector receptacles on the tail of the fixed clockspring case connect the clockspring to the vehicle electrical system through two take outs with connectors from the instrument panel wire harness. The clockspring rotor is movable and is keyed by an engagement dowel that is molded onto the rotor hub between two fins that are cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature. A yellow rubber boot is installed over the engagement dowel to eliminate contact noise between the dowel and the steering wheel. The two lobes on the turn signal cancel cam on the lower surface of the clockspring rotor hub contact a turn signal cancel actuator of the multi-function switch to provide automatic turn signal cancellation. Two short, yellow-sleeved pigtail wires on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor connect the clockspring to the multistage driver airbag, while a steering wheel wire harness connects the two connector receptacles on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector and, if the vehicle is so equipped, to the optional speed control and remote radio switches on the steering wheel. Like the clockspring in a timepiece, the clockspring tape has travel limits and can be damaged by being wound too tightly during full stop-to-stop steering wheel rotation. To prevent this from occurring, the clockspring is centered when it is installed on the steering column. Centering the clockspring indexes the clockspring tape to the movable steering components so that the tape can operate within its designed travel limits. However, if the clockspring is removed from the steering column or if the steering shaft is disconnected from the steering gear, the clockspring spool can change position relative to the movable steering components. The clockspring must be re-centered following completion of this service or the tape may be damaged. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a plastic locking pin installed. This locking pin should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the steering column. If the locking pin is removed before the clockspring is installed on a steering column, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed. The clockspring as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the clockspring may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, on vehicles equipped with Electronic Stability Program (ESP) conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) within the clockspring or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the ESP. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SAS or the electronic controls and communication related to ESP operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8986 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Adjustments CLOCKSPRING CENTERING WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 1. Place the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the clockspring from the steering column. 3. Rotate the clockspring rotor (7) clockwise to the end of its travel. Do not apply excessive torque. 4. From the end of the clockwise travel, rotate the rotor about two and one-half turns counterclockwise. The engagement dowel (5) should end up at the bottom, and the airbag pigtail wires (1) and connector receptacles (3) should be at the top. Turn the rotor slightly clockwise or counterclockwise as necessary so that the slots for the clockspring locking pin (2) are in alignment. 5. The clockspring is now centered. Secure the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering until it is reinstalled on the steering column. 6. The front wheels should still be in the straight-ahead position. Reinstall the clockspring onto the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 1. Place the front wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 5. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. 6. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 7. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 8. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8989 that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 9. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 10. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 11. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. 12. Disconnect the two instrument panel wire harness connectors from the two connector receptacles located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 13. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector from the applied connector for the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 14. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the clockspring (4) to the multi-function switch mounting housing on the steering column (3). 15. Remove the clockspring from the multi-function switch mounting housing. The clockspring cannot be repaired. It must be replaced if ineffective or damaged, or if the driver airbag has been deployed. 16. If the removed clockspring is to be reused, be certain to secure the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering until it is reinstalled on the steering column. If clockspring centering is not maintained, the clockspring must be centered again before it is reinstalled. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8990 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: If the clockspring is not properly centered in relation to the steering wheel, steering shaft and steering gear, it may be damaged. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a locking pin installed. This locking pin should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the steering column. If the locking pin is removed before the clockspring is installed on a steering column, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain that the front wheels are still in the straight-ahead position. 1. While holding the centered clockspring rotor and case stationary in relation to each other, or with the plastic locking pin (1) installed, carefully slide the clockspring (4) down over the steering column (3) upper shaft. 2. Align and seat the hole in the locating tab on the clockspring case over the locating pin on the multi-function switch mounting housing. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the clockspring to the multi-function switch mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 4. Reconnect the two instrument panel wire harness connectors to the two connector receptacles located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 5. Reconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the applied connector for the Steering Angle Sensor (SAS) located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8991 6. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 7. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 8. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. Be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 9. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 10. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 12. If a new clockspring has been installed, remove the plastic locking pin that is securing the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering. NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 13. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. 14. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 15. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. 16. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 8996 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 8997 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 8998 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 8999 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9000 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9001 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9002 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9003 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9004 Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9005 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9006 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9007 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9008 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 3 Component ID: 387 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9009 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 3-4-Component Location - 44 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 388 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9010 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9011 Component ID: 389 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9012 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 3 Component ID: 390 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9013 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 3-4-Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9016 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9017 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9018 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9019 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9020 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9021 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9022 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9023 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9024 Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9025 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9026 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9027 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9028 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 3 Component ID: 387 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9029 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 3-4-Component Location - 44 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 388 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9030 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9031 Component ID: 389 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9032 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 3 Component ID: 390 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9033 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 3-4-Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with a screw to the backs of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Six side impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle to support the standard side curtain airbags, three each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9036 These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with a screw to the right or left front door beam, C-pillar or D-pillar within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9037 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through the same left or right sensor plus and minus circuits in a series arrangement from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the right or left front impact sensor (1) to the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (2). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side - Front Door SIDE - FRONT DOOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9040 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the trim from the inside of the right or left front door. 3. Reach through the large access hole in the inner door panel to access and remove the screw (3) that secures the side impact sensor (4) to the door beam (1). 4. Disconnect the door wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from within the front door. Side - C-Pillar SIDE - C-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower C-pillar. 3. Remove the screw (2) that secures the side impact sensor (3) to the C-pillar (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9041 4. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from the C-pillar. Side - D-Pillar SIDE - D-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower D-pillar. 3. Remove the screw (5) that secures the side impact sensor (4) to the inner quarter panel forward of the D-pillar (3). 4. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from the inner quarter panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9042 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Position the sensor onto the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (2). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the lower clearance hole of the radiator support. 4. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the sensor to the back of the support vertical member. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - Front Door SIDE - FRONT DOOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9043 1. Reach through the large access hole in the inner door panel to position the side impact sensor (4) within the door. 2. Reconnect the door wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Position the sensor onto the door beam (1) within the door. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole of the door beam. 4. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the sensor to the door beam. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the trim onto the inside of the front door. 6. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - C-Pillar SIDE - C-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut used to secure the side impact sensor (3) is properly installed in the inner C-pillar (5), and that it is in good condition. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9044 2. Position the side impact sensor near the inner C-pillar. 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Position the sensor onto the inner C-pillar. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole (4) of the C-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the sensor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower C-pillar. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - D-Pillar SIDE - D-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut used to secure the side impact sensor (4) is properly installed in the inner quarter panel forward of the C-pillar (3), and that it is in good condition. 2. Position the side impact sensor near the inner quarter panel. 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Position the sensor onto the inner quarter panel. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole (1) of the quarter panel. 5. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the sensor to the inner quarter panel. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower D-pillar. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sensor housing has two integral snap features (3) and snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the inboard side of one of the seat adjuster tracks on each front seat. A molded connector receptacle (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector and take out of the driver or passenger seat wire harness beneath the front seat cushion frame. The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire sensor must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9049 Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) indicating whether the driver side front seat is in a full forward or a not full forward position. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to be used when deploying the multistage driver side front airbag. The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the ORC. The sensor communicates the seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the ORC on a sensor data circuit. The ORC also monitors the condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected, and sends messages over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to illuminate the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired circuits between the seat track position sensor and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication related to seat track position sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Reach under the front seat cushion to access the seat track position sensor (4) in a bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 3. Disconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. 4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap feature (2) and pull the connector end of the sensor out of the bracket. 5. Remove the sensor from under the front seat. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9052 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the front seat cushion to position the seat track position sensor (4) to the open end of the bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the snap feature (2) locks into place. 3. Reconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. Be certain that the latch on the connector is fully engaged. 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An airbag indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, the instrument cluster can be programmed to disable this indicator on vehicles that are not equipped with the airbag system, which is not available in some markets. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and left of the speedometer needle hub. The airbag indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Airbag in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The airbag indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9057 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The airbag indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the airbag system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The airbag indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The airbag indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the airbag indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the airbag indicator is illuminated for about six to eight seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the ORC. - Airbag Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic airbag indicator lamp-ON message from the ORC, the airbag indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated for about twelve seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the ORC, whichever is longer. This indicator will also be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the ORC for 10 consecutive message cycles, the airbag indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the ORC. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the airbag indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the airbag indicator is a function of the instrument cluster. The ORC continually monitors the airbag system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The ORC then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the ORC sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the ORC has detected a system malfunction or that the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not deploy when required, or may deploy when not required. The ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the airbag indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster airbag indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the ORC of the condition, the instrument cluster and the ORC will each store a DTC, and the cluster will flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF as a backup to notify the vehicle operator. For proper diagnosis of the airbag system, the ORC, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to airbag indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 178 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54B 20WT 5-6-7-- 8-9 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 10 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT 11 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 12 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 18 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG 19 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 20 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 21 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 22 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 23 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 24 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9062 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9063 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB 3 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR 4 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9064 6-7-8-9 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL 10 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 11 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 12 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 18 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 19 - 20 GROUND Z104 20BK/LG 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 26 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE R263 20LB/VT 27 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 28 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 29 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 30 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 31 - 32 - Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9065 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9066 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 178 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 24 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54B 20WT 5-6-7-- 8-9 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 10 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT 11 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 12 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R43 20BR/LG 18 DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R45 20OR/LG 19 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R44 20LB/PK 20 PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R42 20LB/BR 21 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R61 20VT/LG 22 DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R63 20VT/RD 23 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 R64 20LB/WT 24 PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 R62 20LB/DG Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9067 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9068 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R2 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R4 20OR/LB 3 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 R3 20LB/OR 4 LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 R1 20LB/BR 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9069 6-7-8-9 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL 10 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 11 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 12 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F201 20PK/OR 18 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F100 20PK/VT 19 - 20 GROUND Z104 20BK/LG 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 26 LEFT SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE R263 20LB/VT 27 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 28 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 29 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 30 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 31 - 32 - Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9070 Component Location - 43 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is secured with three screws to a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel just behind the front seat crossmember and beneath the center floor console in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with four screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (3) printed on the label (2) on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has integral mounting flanges on three corners. The mounting flange to the right of the connector receptacle has an integral locating pin on its lower surface. Both right side flanges have round mounting holes, while the flange on the left side has a slotted mounting hole. A molded plastic electrical connector (4) with 2 receptacles, one containing 24 terminal pins and the other containing 32 terminal pins, exits the forward facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors of the body wire harness. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9073 Air Bag Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the supplemental restraint system logic circuits and controls all of the supplemental restraint system components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for supplemental restraint system diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the supplemental restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the JB. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw near the center of the instrument panel structural support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the supplemental restraint components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup supplemental restraint system protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. The ORC also monitors inputs from an internal rollover sensor and six additional remote impact sensors located on the left and right front door beams, the inner C-pillars and inner D-pillars to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a supplemental restraint deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. A second safing sensor within the ORC provides confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require supplemental restraint system protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the front seat belt tensioners and either side curtain airbag unit. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any occupant restraint controller diagnosis or service. The occupant restraint controller contains a rollover sensor, which enables the system to deploy the side curtains in the event of a vehicle rollover event. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally rolled during service while still connected to battery power, the side curtain airbags will deploy. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the occupant restraint controller, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The occupant restraint controller contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the supplemental restraints. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the center console from the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 3. Disconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) connector receptacles located on the forward facing side of the module. To disconnect the wire harness connectors from the ORC, depress the release tab and lift the lever arm on each connector. 4. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the ORC to the ORC bracket (4) that is welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Remove the ORC from the floor panel transmission tunnel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9076 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any occupant restraint controller diagnosis or service. The occupant restraint controller contains a rollover sensor, which enables the system to deploy the side curtains in the event of a vehicle rollover event. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally rolled during service while still connected to battery power, the side curtain airbags will deploy. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the occupant restraint controller, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The occupant restraint controller contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the supplemental restraints. If an occupant restraint controller is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Carefully position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) to the ORC bracket (4) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle and the locating pin on the bottom of the right ORC mounting flange will be engaged into the locating hole in the ORC bracket. 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the ORC to the ORC bracket that is welded onto the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the screws to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). CAUTION: The lever arms of the wire harness connectors for the ORC MUST be in the unlatched position before they are inserted into their connector receptacles on the ORC or they may become damaged. 3. Reconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) to the ORC connector receptacles located on the forward facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches on both connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the center console onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel. 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 9082 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 9083 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle is equipped with a Lower Anchors and Tether for Children, or LATCH child restraint anchorage system. The LATCH system provides for the installation of suitable child restraints in certain seating positions without using the standard equipment seat belt provided for that seating position. The second row seats in this vehicle are equipped with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor (2) for both outboard seating positions as well as the center position of vehicles so equipped, and child restraint lower anchors (1) for the two outboard seating positions only. On vehicles equipped with a split bench third row seat there is also an upper tether anchor provided for the center seating position of that seat, but no lower anchors. The upper tether anchors (3) are integral to the second row seat cushion frames. One anchor is integral to the cushion frame of the center seat section (2), and one is integral to cushion frames of each outboard seat section (1). These anchors are each constructed from a heavy-gauge steel wire loop that is securely welded to the seat cushion frame. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9089 The upper tether anchor (3) for the third row split bench seat is integral to the left seat back panel (1). This anchor is also constructed of a heavy gauge steel wire loop that is welded to the seat back panel and surrounded by a molded plastic bezel (3). The child restraint upper tether anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit with their respective second row seat cushion frame unit or third row seat back panel. The lower anchors (2) for this vehicle are also integral to their respective second row outboard seat cushion frame. These anchors are also constructed from a heavy-gauge steel wire loop that is securely welded to the seat cushion frame. They are each accessed from the front of their respective seats, at each side where the seat back (1) meets the seat cushion (3). These lower anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit with the second row seat cushion frame unit. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9090 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All vehicles manufactured for sale in the United States and Canada are required to be equipped with a Lower Anchors and Tether for Children, or LATCH child restraint anchorage system. The second row seats in this vehicle have two pairs of anchor provisions for installing a LATCH-compatible child seat. A single seat may be mounted in the second row center seating position of vehicles so equipped, or one in each outboard seating position. With LATCH, child seats are secured by direct attachment to the vehicle seat structure, rather than by the seat belts. With LATCH-compatible child seats, lower anchors attach to the seat structure through heavy-gauge wire loops located at the intersection between the seat cushion and the seat back surfaces. Upper tether anchors are integral to the second row seat cushion frames and the third row split bench seat back panel to secure the top tether strap of child seats equipped with this feature. These upper tether anchors work with both LATCH-compatible and other child seats equipped with a top tether strap. The owner's information packet in the vehicle glove box contains details and suggestions on the proper use of all of the factory-installed child restraint anchors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt retractors used in all seating positions include an inertia-type, emergency locking mechanism as standard equipment. However, the retractor locking mechanism for all first and second row seating positions except the driver side front are mechanically switchable from an emergency locking retractor to an automatic locking retractor. The primary function of this feature is to securely accommodate a child seat in the first or second row seating positions of the vehicle without the need for a self-cinching seat belt tip half latch plate unit or another supplemental device that would be required to prevent the seat belt webbing from unwinding freely from the retractor spool of an inertia-type emergency locking retractor mechanism. The automatic locking mechanism is integral to the seat belt retractor unit and is concealed beneath a molded plastic cover located on the side of the retractor spool. The automatic locking mechanism cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9095 Seat Belt: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The locked mode of the retractor is engaged and the automatic locking retractor is switched from operating as a standard inertia-type emergency locking retractor by first buckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle. Then grasp the shoulder belt and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor. Once all of the belt webbing is extracted from the spool, the retractor will automatically become engaged in the pre-locked automatic locking mode and will make an audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the shoulder belt is allowed to retract to confirm that the automatic locking mode is now engaged. Once the automatic locking mode is engaged, the retractor will remain locked and the belt will remain tight around whatever it is restraining. The retractor is returned to standard emergency locking (inertia) mode by unbuckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle and allowing the belt webbing to be almost fully retracted onto the retractor spool. The emergency locking mode is confirmed by the absence of the audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the belt webbing retracts. This mode will allow the belt to unwind from and wind onto the retractor spool freely unless and until a predetermined inertia load is sensed, or until the retractor is again switched to the automatic locking mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Belt: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt lower anchor and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the seat belt anchor cover (2) to remove it from the rear of the outboard seat side shield (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9098 4. Remove the screw (2) that secures the lower anchor (3) to the bracket on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. 5. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (1) and disengage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 6. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop (5) to the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 7. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 8. Remove the upper trim (1) from the inside of the B-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9099 9. Remove the lower trim (2) from the inside of the B-pillar (4). 10. Remove the screw (3) that secures the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 11. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (5) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). 12. Disconnect the second body wire harness connector from the seat belt switch connector receptacle on the retractor. 13. Remove the screw (8) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 14. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 15. Disengage the engagement tab on the upper retractor bracket from the engagement slot in the B-pillar. 16. Remove the front seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Second Row - Center SECOND ROW - CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Fold and tumble the left outboard second row seat for easiest access to the center seat back left hinge bracket cover (1). 2. Remove the three screws (2) that secure the cover to the center seat back left hinge bracket (3) and remove the cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9100 3. Remove the screw (2) that secures the second row center seat belt lower anchor (1) to the hinge bracket (3) and remove the anchor. 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the belt web guide bezel (2) to the top of the center seat back panel and remove the bezel from the seat back and the belt. 5. Remove the trim cover (1) from the center seat back. 6. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the retractor (2) to the seat back frame (1). 7. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the two tabs (4) on the retractor bracket from the keyed slots in the seat back frame. 8. Remove the second row seat belt and retractor from between the seat back foam and frame as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9101 Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (3) from the second row outboard seat belt turning loop (1) and disengage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar (5). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9102 5. Remove the screw (4) that secures the lower seat belt anchor (3) to the rear floor panel. 6. Remove the quarter trim panel (2) from the lower C-pillar. 7. Route the seat belt lower anchor and turning loop through the access hole in the quarter trim panel. 8. Remove the screw (5) that secures the retractor bracket (1) to the lower C-pillar. 9. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the retractor tab from the engagement hole in the C-pillar. 10. Remove the second row outboard seat belt and retractor from the C-pillar as a unit. Third Row Center THIRD ROW CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Remove the upper liftgate opening trim from the inside of the rear header (1) in the upper liftgate opening. 2. Route the seat belt (2) and lower anchor latch plates through the clearance hole in the upper liftgate opening trim panel. 3. Pull the top of the left upper D-pillar trim away from the D-pillar far enough to access the retractor mounting provisions. 4. Remove the screw (4) that secures the retractor bracket to the inside of the rear header near the left D-pillar (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9103 5. Remove the third row center seat belt and retractor from the rear header as a unit. Third Row Outboard THIRD ROW OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Move the third row seat cushion to its storage position, but leave the third row seat back in its upright position for easiest access to the seat belt lower anchor (2) on the quarter inner panel (3). 2. Remove the screw (1) that secures the lower anchor to the tapping plate on the quarter inner panel. 3. Remove the D-pillar trim panel (1) from the inside of the upper D-pillar. 4. Route the seat belt (2) and lower anchor through the access hole in the D-pillar trim panel. 5. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop (3) to the inside of the upper D-pillar. 6. Remove the turning loop from the D-pillar. 7. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower D-pillar. 8. Remove the screw (6) that secures the retractor bracket (5) to the lower D-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9104 9. Remove the third row seat belt and retractor from the D-pillar as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9105 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. 1. Position the front seat belt and retractor (7) to the B-pillar (4) as a unit. Be certain to engage the engagement tab on the upper retractor bracket into the engagement slot in the lower B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (8) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (5) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 6. Reconnect the second body wire harness connector to the seat belt switch connector receptacle on the retractor. 7. Position the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 8. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the belt web guide to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 9. Reinstall the lower trim onto the inside of the B-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9106 10. Reinstall the upper trim (1) onto the inside of the B-pillar. 11. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 12. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 13. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. 14. Position the front seat belt lower anchor (3) to the bracket on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. 15. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the lower anchor to the bracket on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9107 16. Align the seat belt anchor cover (2) to the opening near the rear of the outboard seat side shield (3). Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the cover until it snaps into place. 17. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Second Row - Center SECOND ROW - CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the second row seat belt and retractor (2) between the seat back foam pad and frame (1) as a unit. 2. Engage the two tabs (4) on the retractor bracket into the keyed slots in the seat back frame. 3. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the retractor to the seat back frame. Tighten the screws to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9108 4. Reinstall the trim cover (1) onto the center seat back. 5. Install the seat belt lower anchor through the belt web guide bezel (2) and position the bezel onto the top of the center seat back panel. 6. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the bezel to the top of the seat back. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the second row center seat belt lower anchor (1) to the hinge bracket (3). Be certain the anti-rotation tab on the anchor is engaged in the clearance hole of the bracket. 8. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the lower anchor to the bracket. Tighten the screw to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 9. Position the center seat back left hinge bracket cover (1) onto the bracket (3). 10. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the cover to the bracket. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9109 11. Unfold and restore the left outboard second row seat to its upright position. Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Check to be certain that the molded plastic retractor cup is properly installed in the retractor mounting hole of the inner C-pillar, and that it is in good condition. 2. Position the second row outboard seat belt and retractor (1) to the C-pillar as a unit. 3. Engage the tab on the retractor bracket into the engagement hole in the C-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the retractor to the lower C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Route the seat belt lower anchor and turning loop through the access hole in the quarter trim panel. 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower C-pillar. 7. Position the lower seat belt anchor (3) to the rear floor panel. 8. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the lower seat belt anchor to the floor. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9110 9. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar (5). 10. Position the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 11. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 12. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Third Row Center THIRD ROW CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9111 1. Position the third row center seat belt and retractor (2) to the rear header (1) near the left D-pillar (3) as a unit. 2. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the retractor bracket to the inside of the rear header. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Restore the top of the left upper D-pillar trim to its mountings on the D-pillar. 4. Route the seat belt and lower anchor latch plates through the clearance hole in the upper liftgate opening trim panel. 5. Reinstall the upper liftgate opening trim onto the inside of the rear header in the upper liftgate opening. Third Row Outboard THIRD ROW OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Check to be certain that the molded plastic retractor cup (2) is properly installed in the retractor mounting hole (1) of the inner D-pillar, and that it is in good condition. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9112 2. Position the third row outboard seat belt and retractor (5) to the D-pillar as a unit. 3. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the retractor bracket to the lower D-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Position the seat belt turning loop (3) to the inside of the upper D-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the D-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel to the lower D-pillar. 7. Route the seat belt (2) and lower anchor through the access hole in the D-pillar trim panel (1). 8. Reinstall the D-pillar trim panel to the inside of the upper D-pillar. 9. Position the seat belt lower anchor (2) to the tapping plate (3) on the quarter inner panel. 10. Install and tighten the screw (1) that secures the lower anchor to the tapping plate. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Restore the third row seat cushion to its seating position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the front seat and seat track from the floor panel as a unit. 3. Remove the screws that secure the seat cushion side shield to the inboard side of the seat cushion frame (3) and remove the shield. 4. Remove the nut (2) that secures the front seat belt buckle anchor to the stud near the back of the inboard seat cushion frame. 5. Remove the buckle from the seat. Second Row - Center SECOND ROW - CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9117 1. Fold and tumble the right outboard second row seat for easiest access to the center seat back right hinge bracket cover (1). 2. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the cover to the center seat back right hinge bracket (2) and remove the cover. 3. Remove the screw (3) that secures the second row center seat belt buckle anchor (1) to the hinge bracket (2) and remove the buckle. Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9118 1. Fold and tumble the outboard second row seat for easiest access to the latch bracket cover (1) on the inboard side of the seat. 2. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the cover to the seat latch bracket (2) and remove the cover. 3. Remove the nut (2) that secures the second row outboard seat belt buckle anchor (1) to the latch bracket (3) and remove the buckle. Third Row Bench Seat THIRD ROW BENCH SEAT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9119 1. Move the third row seat cushion to its storage position, but leave the third row seat back in its upright position for easiest access to the seat belt buckle and bracket unit (1) on the rear floor panel. 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the bracket to the floor and remove the bracket and buckles from the floor panel as a unit. Third Row Split Bench Seat THIRD ROW SPLIT BENCH SEAT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: Before you begin the removal procedures, with the third row seat backs folded down, look closely between the rear edge of the seat back panel and the front edge of the rear floor storage bin cover to determine whether the two blind rivets securing either the left anchor bracket (4) (for the left outboard and center anchor buckles) or the right anchor bracket (6) (for the right outboard and center buckles) have been previously removed. These blind rivets are used as an assembly aid during the manufacturing process and, once removed, they do not require reinstallation. BLIND RIVETS PRESENT 1. If the blind rivets are present, remove the third row split bench seat (3) from the rear floor panel (5) and the vehicle. 2. Using an appropriate drill or chisel, remove the two blind rivets that secure the buckle anchor bracket (4 or 6) to the back of the seat cushion frame. 3. Remove the buckles and anchor bracket from the seat cushion frame as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9120 BLIND RIVETS ABSENT 1. If the blind rivets are absent, remove the two pivot screws that secure the front of the left seat cushion frame to the brackets on the rear floor panel (5). 2. Fold the left seat cushion up against the left seat back (3) for access to the two buckle anchor brackets (4 or 6). 3. Remove the plastic plug (2) from the buckle anchor bracket to be removed. 4. Remove the screw (1) that secures the buckle anchor bracket to the rear floor panel. 5. Remove the buckles and anchor bracket from the seat cushion frame as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9121 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the front seat belt buckle lower anchor (1) onto the stud near the rear of the inboard seat cushion frame (3). Be certain the anti-rotation tab on the anchor is engaged in the clearance hole of the frame. 2. Install and tighten the nut (2) that secures the anchor to the frame. Tighten the nut to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the seat cushion side shield to the inboard seat cushion frame. 4. Install and tighten the screws that secure the shield to the frame. Tighten the screws to 1 Nm (9 in. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the front seat and seat track to the floor panel as a unit. 6. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Second Row - Center SECOND ROW - CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9122 1. Position the second row center seat belt buckle anchor (1) to the right seat back hinge bracket (2). Be certain the anti-rotation tab on the anchor is engaged in the clearance hole of the bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the anchor to the bracket. Tighten the screw to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the center seat back right hinge bracket cover (1) onto the bracket (2). 4. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the cover to the bracket. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. Unfold and restore the right outboard second row seat to its upright position. Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9123 1. Position the second row outboard seat belt buckle anchor (1) to the seat latch bracket (3). Be certain the anti-rotation tab on the anchor is engaged in the clearance notch of the bracket. 2. Install and tighten the nut (2) that secures the anchor to the bracket. Tighten the nut to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the outboard seat latch bracket cover (1) onto the bracket (2). 4. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the cover to the bracket. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 5. Unfold and restore the outboard second row seat to its upright position. Third Row Bench THIRD ROW BENCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9124 1. Position the third row seat belt buckle and anchor bracket unit (1) to the rear floor panel. Be certain the anti-rotation tab on the anchor bracket is engaged in the clearance hole (2) in the floor. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the anchor bracket to the floor. Tighten the screw to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 3. Restore the third row seat cushion to its seating position. Third Row Split Bench Seat THIRD ROW SPLIT BENCH SEAT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The blind rivets that secure the buckle anchor brackets (4 and 6) to the seat cushion frame are used as an assembly aid during the manufacturing process and, once removed, they do not require reinstallation. 1. If the third row seat (3) was removed from the vehicle for blind rivet removal, reinstall the seat to the rear floor panel (5), but do not reinstall the two front pivot screws for the left seat cushion. 2. The left seat cushion must be folded up against the left seat back for access to the two buckle anchor bracket (4 or 6) locations at the back of the seat cushion frame. 3. Position the buckle anchor bracket (4 or 6) to the back of the seat cushion frame. 4. Install and tighten the screw (1) that secures the buckle anchor bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 49 Nm (36 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9125 5. Reinstall the plastic plug (2) onto the buckle anchor bracket. 6. Fold the left seat cushion down. 7. Install and tighten the two pivot screws that secure the front of the left seat cushion frame to the brackets on the rear floor panel. Tighten the screws to 35 Nm (26 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 442 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND R59 20LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z930 20BK/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE R57 20LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9129 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9130 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 442 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND R59 20LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z930 20BK/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE R57 20LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9131 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt switch (4) is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, plunger (3) actuated, momentary switch. One seat belt switch is installed on the seat belt retractor frame (2) over the retractor spool (1) for the driver side front seat. The seat belt switch includes an integral connector that is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the body wire harness. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9134 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The seat belt switch plunger is actuated by the seat belt webbing wound onto the seat belt retractor spool. When the seat belt tip-half webbing is pulled out of the retractor far enough to engage the seat belt buckle-half, the switch plunger is extended and closes the seat belt switch sense circuit to ground. Conversely, when the seat belt tip-half webbing is wound onto the retractor spool the switch plunger is depressed, opening the ground path. The EMIC monitors the seat belt switch status, then controls the illumination of the seatbelt indicator and the generation of audible electronic chime tones based upon that input. The seat belt switch receives ground through its connection to the body wire harness from another take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on that ground take out is secured under a ground screw. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the EMIC. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (1) and disengage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop (5) to the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 4. Remove the upper trim (1) from the inside of the B-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9139 5. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the height adjuster (3) to the B-pillar (2). 6. Remove the adjuster from the B-pillar. Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (3) from the second row outboard seat belt turning loop (1) and disengage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9140 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar (5). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. 5. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the height adjuster (3) to the C-pillar (1). 6. Remove the adjuster from the C-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9141 Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the seat belt turning loop adjuster (3) to the B-pillar (2). 2. Install and tighten the two screws (1) that secure the adjuster to the B-pillar. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the upper trim (1) onto the inside of the B-pillar. 4. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9142 6. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the seat belt turning loop adjuster (3) to the C-pillar (1). 2. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the adjuster to the C-pillar. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9143 3. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar (5). 4. Position the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 6. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A seatbelt indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The seatbelt indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Seat Belt in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The seatbelt indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9148 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seatbelt indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the driver side front seatbelt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input from the seatbelt switch in the driver side front seatbelt retractor through the seat belt indicator driver circuit. The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or BELTMINDER feature that is enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This BELTMINDER feature can be disabled and enabled by the customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. The seatbelt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the seatbelt indicator for the following reasons: - Seatbelt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seatbelt reminder for about six seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur regardless of the status of the seatbelt switch input to the cluster. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about 60 seconds after the conclusion of the seatbelt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour), the seatbelt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing ON and OFF for 3 seconds, then lighting solid for 2 seconds. The seatbelt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for 13 complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The seatbelt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send an electronic message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF. The cluster will continue to flash the indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seatbelt indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The seatbelt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the instrument cluster. The hard wired seatbelt switch input to the instrument cluster may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt retractors used in all seating positions include an inertia-type, emergency locking mechanism as standard equipment. However, the retractor locking mechanism for all first and second row seating positions except the driver side front are mechanically switchable from an emergency locking retractor to an automatic locking retractor. The primary function of this feature is to securely accommodate a child seat in the first or second row seating positions of the vehicle without the need for a self-cinching seat belt tip half latch plate unit or another supplemental device that would be required to prevent the seat belt webbing from unwinding freely from the retractor spool of an inertia-type emergency locking retractor mechanism. The automatic locking mechanism is integral to the seat belt retractor unit and is concealed beneath a molded plastic cover located on the side of the retractor spool. The automatic locking mechanism cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9153 Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The locked mode of the retractor is engaged and the automatic locking retractor is switched from operating as a standard inertia-type emergency locking retractor by first buckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle. Then grasp the shoulder belt and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor. Once all of the belt webbing is extracted from the spool, the retractor will automatically become engaged in the pre-locked automatic locking mode and will make an audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the shoulder belt is allowed to retract to confirm that the automatic locking mode is now engaged. Once the automatic locking mode is engaged, the retractor will remain locked and the belt will remain tight around whatever it is restraining. The retractor is returned to standard emergency locking (inertia) mode by unbuckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle and allowing the belt webbing to be almost fully retracted onto the retractor spool. The emergency locking mode is confirmed by the absence of the audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the belt webbing retracts. This mode will allow the belt to unwind from and wind onto the retractor spool freely unless and until a predetermined inertia load is sensed, or until the retractor is again switched to the automatic locking mode. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt lower anchor and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the seat belt anchor cover (2) to remove it from the rear of the outboard seat side shield (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9156 4. Remove the screw (2) that secures the lower anchor (3) to the bracket on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. 5. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (3) from the front seat belt turning loop (1) and disengage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 6. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop (5) to the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 7. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 8. Remove the upper trim (1) from the inside of the B-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9157 9. Remove the lower trim (2) from the inside of the B-pillar (4) 10. Remove the screw (3) that secures the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 11. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (5) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). 12. Disconnect the second body wire harness connector from the seat belt switch connector receptacle on the retractor. 13. Remove the screw (8) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 14. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 15. Disengage the engagement tab on the upper retractor bracket from the engagement slot in the B-pillar. 16. Remove the front seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Second Row - Center SECOND ROW - CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Fold and tumble the left outboard second row seat for easiest access to the center seat back left hinge bracket cover (1). 2. Remove the three screws (2) that secure the cover to the center seat back left hinge bracket (3) and remove the cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9158 3. Remove the screw (2) that secures the second row center seat belt lower anchor (1) to the hinge bracket (3) and remove the anchor. 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the belt web guide bezel (2) to the top of the center seat back panel and remove the bezel from the seat back and the belt. 5. Remove the trim cover (1) from the center seat back. 6. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the retractor (2) to the seat back frame (1). 7. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the two tabs (4) on the retractor bracket from the keyed slots in the seat back frame. 8. Remove the second row seat belt and retractor from between the seat back foam and frame as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9159 Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (3) from the second row outboard seat belt turning loop (1) and disengage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar (5). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9160 5. Remove the screw (4) that secures the lower seat belt anchor (3) to the rear floor panel. 6. Remove the quarter trim panel (2) from the lower C-pillar. 7. Route the seat belt lower anchor and turning loop through the access hole in the quarter trim panel. 8. Remove the screw (5) that secures the retractor bracket (1) to the lower C-pillar. 9. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the retractor tab from the engagement hole in the C-pillar. 10. Remove the second row outboard seat belt and retractor from the C-pillar as a unit. Third Row Center THIRD ROW CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Remove the upper liftgate opening trim from the inside of the rear header (1) in the upper liftgate opening. 2. Route the seat belt (2) and lower anchor latch plates through the clearance hole in the upper liftgate opening trim panel. 3. Pull the top of the left upper D-pillar trim away from the D-pillar far enough to access the retractor mounting provisions. 4. Remove the screw (4) that secures the retractor bracket to the inside of the rear header near the left D-pillar (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9161 5. Remove the third row center seat belt and retractor from the rear header as a unit. Third Row Outboard THIRD ROW OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Move the third row seat cushion to its storage position, but leave the third row seat back in its upright position for easiest access to the seat belt lower anchor (2) on the quarter inner panel (3). 2. Remove the screw (1) that secures the lower anchor to the tapping plate on the quarter inner panel. 3. Remove the D-pillar trim panel (1) from the inside of the upper D-pillar. 4. Route the seat belt (2) and lower anchor through the access hole in the D-pillar trim panel. 5. Remove the screw (4) that secures the seat belt turning loop (3) to the inside of the upper D-pillar. 6. Remove the turning loop from the D-pillar. 7. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower D-pillar. 8. Remove the screw (6) that secures the retractor bracket (5) to the lower D-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9162 9. Remove the third row seat belt and retractor from the D-pillar as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9163 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. 1. Position the front seat belt and retractor (7) to the B-pillar (4) as a unit. Be certain to engage the engagement tab on the upper retractor bracket into the engagement slot in the lower B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (8) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw (6) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (5) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 6. Reconnect the second body wire harness connector to the seat belt switch connector receptacle on the retractor. 7. Position the belt web guide (1) to the B-pillar. 8. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the belt web guide to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 9. Reinstall the lower trim onto the inside of the B-pillar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9164 10. Reinstall the upper trim (1) onto the inside of the B-pillar. 11. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 12. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 13. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. 14. Position the front seat belt lower anchor (3) to the bracket on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. 15. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the lower anchor to the bracket on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9165 16. Align the seat belt anchor cover (2) to the opening near the rear of the outboard seat side shield (3). Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the cover until it snaps into place. 17. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Second Row - Center SECOND ROW - CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the second row seat belt and retractor (2) between the seat back foam pad and frame (1) as a unit. 2. Engage the two tabs (4) on the retractor bracket into the keyed slots in the seat back frame. 3. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the retractor to the seat back frame. Tighten the screws to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9166 4. Reinstall the trim cover (1) onto the center seat back. 5. Install the seat belt lower anchor through the belt web guide bezel (2) and position the bezel onto the top of the center seat back panel. 6. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the bezel to the top of the seat back. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the second row center seat belt lower anchor (1) to the hinge bracket (3). Be certain the anti-rotation tab on the anchor is engaged in the clearance hole of the bracket. 8. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the lower anchor to the bracket. Tighten the screw to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 9. Position the center seat back left hinge bracket cover (1) onto the bracket (3). 10. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the cover to the bracket. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9167 11. Unfold and restore the left outboard second row seat to its upright position. Second Row - Outboard SECOND ROW - OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Check to be certain that the molded plastic retractor cup is properly installed in the retractor mounting hole of the inner C-pillar, and that it is in good condition. 2. Position the second row outboard seat belt and retractor (1) to the C-pillar as a unit. 3. Engage the tab on the retractor bracket into the engagement hole in the C-pillar. 4. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the retractor to the lower C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Route the seat belt lower anchor and turning loop through the access hole in the quarter trim panel. 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower C-pillar. 7. Position the lower seat belt anchor (3) to the rear floor panel. 8. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the lower seat belt anchor to the floor. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9168 9. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar (5). 10. Position the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar. 11. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 12. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Third Row Center THIRD ROW CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9169 1. Position the third row center seat belt and retractor (2) to the rear header (1) near the left D-pillar (3) as a unit. 2. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the retractor bracket to the inside of the rear header. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Restore the top of the left upper D-pillar trim to its mountings on the D-pillar. 4. Route the seat belt and lower anchor latch plates through the clearance hole in the upper liftgate opening trim panel. 5. Reinstall the upper liftgate opening trim onto the inside of the rear header in the upper liftgate opening. Third Row Outboard THIRD ROW OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Check to be certain that the molded plastic retractor cup (2) is properly installed in the retractor mounting hole (1) of the inner D-pillar, and that it is in good condition. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9170 2. Position the third row outboard seat belt and retractor (5) to the D-pillar as a unit. 3. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the retractor bracket to the lower D-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Position the seat belt turning loop (3) to the inside of the upper D-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the turning loop to the D-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel to the lower D-pillar. 7. Route the seat belt (2) and lower anchor through the access hole in the D-pillar trim panel (1). 8. Reinstall the D-pillar trim panel to the inside of the upper D-pillar. 9. Position the seat belt lower anchor (2) to the tapping plate (3) on the quarter inner panel. 10. Install and tighten the screw (1) that secures the lower anchor to the tapping plate. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Restore the third row seat cushion to its seating position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Seat Belt Tensioner: Locations Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Component ID: 350 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 9175 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 9176 Seat Belt Tensioner: Locations Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger Component ID: 351 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 2 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 9177 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Component ID: 350 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 R55 20LG/DG 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 R53 20LG/YL Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 9180 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 9181 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger Component ID: 351 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1R56 20LB/DG 2 PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2R54 20LB/YL Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 9182 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Seat belt tensioners supplement the dual front airbags for this vehicle. The seat belt tensioners are integral to the front seat belt retractor units, which are secured to the inner B-pillar on the right and left sides of the vehicle. The retractor is concealed beneath the molded plastic inner B-pillar trim. The seat belt tensioner consists primarily of a sprocket/pinion, a steel tube, a cast metal housing, numerous steel balls, a stamped metal ball trap, a torsion bar and a small pyrotechnically activated gas generator with a connector receptacle. All of these components are located on one side of the retractor spool on the outside of the retractor housing except for the torsion bar, which serves as the spindle upon which the retractor spool rides. The seat belt tensioners are controlled by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the body wire harness by a keyed and latching yellow molded plastic connector insulator to ensure a secure connection. The seat belt tensioners cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. If the front airbags have been deployed, the seat belt tensioners have also been deployed. The seat belt tensioners are not intended for reuse and must be replaced following any front airbag deployment. A growling or grinding sound while attempting to operate the seat belt retractor is a sure indication that the seat belt tensioner has been deployed and requires replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9185 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt tensioners are deployed in conjunction with the dual front airbags by a signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger seat belt tensioner line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the tensioners, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic gas generator. The gas generator is installed in one end of a steel tube that contains numerous steel balls. As the gas expands, it pushes the steel balls through the tube into a cast metal housing, where a ball guide directs the balls into engagement with the teeth of a sprocket that is geared to one end of the retractor spool. As the balls drive past the sprocket, the sprocket turns and drives the seat belt retractor spool causing the slack to be removed from the front seat belts. The ball trap captures the balls as they leave the sprocket and are expelled from the housing. Removing excess slack from the front seat belts not only keeps the occupants properly positioned for an airbag deployment following a frontal impact of the vehicle, but also helps to reduce injuries that the occupant might experience in these situations as a result of harmful contact with the steering wheel, steering column, instrument panel or windshield. Also, the seat belt tensioner torsion bar that the retractor spool rides upon is designed to deform in order to control the loading being applied to the occupants by the seat belts during a frontal impact, further reducing the potential for occupant injuries. The ORC monitors the condition of the seat belt tensioners through circuit resistance, and will illuminate the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. Proper diagnosis of the seat belt tensioner gas generator and the seat belt tensioner squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 384 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGER263 20LB/VT Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9189 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9190 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 384 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGER263 20LB/VT Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9191 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9197 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9198 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9199 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9200 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9201 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9202 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9203 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9204 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9205 Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9206 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9207 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9208 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9209 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 3 Component ID: 387 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9210 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 3-4-Component Location - 44 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 388 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9211 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9212 Component ID: 389 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9213 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 3 Component ID: 390 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9214 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 3-4-Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9217 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9218 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9219 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9220 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9221 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9222 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9223 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9224 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 362 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R81 20LB/WT 2 LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R79 20LB/VT Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9225 Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 363 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9226 1 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND R82 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL R80 20VT/LB Component Location - 2 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 385 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9227 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R13 20LG/BR 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R15 20BR/GY 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9228 Component ID: 386 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R17 20LG 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R19 20LG/WT 3 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 4 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9229 Sensor-Side Impact-Left 3 Component ID: 387 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9230 1 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R21 20LB/WT 2 LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R23 20LB/DB 3-4-Component Location - 44 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 388 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9231 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL R14 20TN/LG 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND R16 20BR/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB Component Location - 50 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9232 Component ID: 389 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 2 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 SIGNAL R18 20LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 2 GROUND R20 20WT/LG 3 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 4 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9233 Sensor-Side Impact-Right 3 Component ID: 390 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 3 Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 9234 1 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 SIGNAL R22 20WT/LB 2 RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 3 GROUND R24 20YL/LB 3-4-Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with a screw to the backs of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Six side impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle to support the standard side curtain airbags, three each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9237 These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with a screw to the right or left front door beam, C-pillar or D-pillar within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (4), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and an integral mounting hole (2) with a metal sleeve to provide crush protection. The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded black plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9238 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through the same left or right sensor plus and minus circuits in a series arrangement from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the right or left front impact sensor (1) to the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (2). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side - Front Door SIDE - FRONT DOOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9241 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the trim from the inside of the right or left front door. 3. Reach through the large access hole in the inner door panel to access and remove the screw (3) that secures the side impact sensor (4) to the door beam (1). 4. Disconnect the door wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from within the front door. Side - C-Pillar SIDE - C-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower C-pillar. 3. Remove the screw (2) that secures the side impact sensor (3) to the C-pillar (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9242 4. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from the C-pillar. Side - D-Pillar SIDE - D-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the quarter trim panel from the lower D-pillar. 3. Remove the screw (5) that secures the side impact sensor (4) to the inner quarter panel forward of the D-pillar (3). 4. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the sensor connector receptacle. 5. Remove the sensor from the inner quarter panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9243 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Position the sensor onto the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (2). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the lower clearance hole of the radiator support. 4. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the sensor to the back of the support vertical member. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - Front Door SIDE - FRONT DOOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9244 1. Reach through the large access hole in the inner door panel to position the side impact sensor (4) within the door. 2. Reconnect the door wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Position the sensor onto the door beam (1) within the door. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole of the door beam. 4. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the sensor to the door beam. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 5. Reinstall the trim onto the inside of the front door. 6. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - C-Pillar SIDE - C-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut used to secure the side impact sensor (3) is properly installed in the inner C-pillar (5), and that it is in good condition. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9245 2. Position the side impact sensor near the inner C-pillar. 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Position the sensor onto the inner C-pillar. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole (4) of the C-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the sensor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower C-pillar. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Side - D-Pillar SIDE - D-PILLAR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut used to secure the side impact sensor (4) is properly installed in the inner quarter panel forward of the C-pillar (3), and that it is in good condition. 2. Position the side impact sensor near the inner quarter panel. 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Position the sensor onto the inner quarter panel. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the clearance hole (1) of the quarter panel. 5. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the sensor to the inner quarter panel. Tighten the screw to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the quarter trim panel onto the lower D-pillar. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 442 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND R59 20LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z930 20BK/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE R57 20LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9249 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9250 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 442 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND R59 20LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z930 20BK/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE R57 20LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9251 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt switch (4) is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, plunger (3) actuated, momentary switch. One seat belt switch is installed on the seat belt retractor frame (2) over the retractor spool (1) for the driver side front seat. The seat belt switch includes an integral connector that is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the body wire harness. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9254 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The seat belt switch plunger is actuated by the seat belt webbing wound onto the seat belt retractor spool. When the seat belt tip-half webbing is pulled out of the retractor far enough to engage the seat belt buckle-half, the switch plunger is extended and closes the seat belt switch sense circuit to ground. Conversely, when the seat belt tip-half webbing is wound onto the retractor spool the switch plunger is depressed, opening the ground path. The EMIC monitors the seat belt switch status, then controls the illumination of the seatbelt indicator and the generation of audible electronic chime tones based upon that input. The seat belt switch receives ground through its connection to the body wire harness from another take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on that ground take out is secured under a ground screw. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the EMIC. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sensor housing has two integral snap features (3) and snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the inboard side of one of the seat adjuster tracks on each front seat. A molded connector receptacle (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector and take out of the driver or passenger seat wire harness beneath the front seat cushion frame. The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire sensor must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9259 Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) indicating whether the driver side front seat is in a full forward or a not full forward position. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to be used when deploying the multistage driver side front airbag. The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the ORC. The sensor communicates the seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the ORC on a sensor data circuit. The ORC also monitors the condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected, and sends messages over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to illuminate the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired circuits between the seat track position sensor and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication related to seat track position sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Reach under the front seat cushion to access the seat track position sensor (4) in a bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 3. Disconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. 4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap feature (2) and pull the connector end of the sensor out of the bracket. 5. Remove the sensor from under the front seat. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9262 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the front seat cushion to position the seat track position sensor (4) to the open end of the bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the snap feature (2) locks into place. 3. Reconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. Be certain that the latch on the connector is fully engaged. 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 384 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGER263 20LB/VT Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9266 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9267 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 384 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA R261 20LB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGER263 20LB/VT Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9268 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Accessory Delay Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9274 Accessory Delay Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 212 Component : RELAY-ACCESSORY DELAY Connector: Name : RELAY-ACCESSORY DELAY Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 85 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 86 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 87 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT INTERNAL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Antenna, Navigation: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the radio. 3. Remove the instrument panel defroster grille. 4. Remove the passenger airbag. 5. Remove the antenna mounting fasteners. 6. Remove the navigation radio antenna. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Navigation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9280 Antenna, Navigation: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position antenna to instrument panel. 2. Connect antenna to radio. 3. Install radio. 4. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 5. Install instrument panel defroster grille. 6. Install passenger airbag. 7. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart Keyless Start Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart NUMBER: 08-003-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: January 27, 2007 SUBJECT: Remote Start System - Diagnostic Chart For Antenna OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves a diagnostic chart that may be used to aid the technician with the diagnosis of the antenna on an originally equipped (factory installed) remote start system. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2006-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2007 (KA) Nitro 2007 (ND) Dakota 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles with an original equipment Remote Start system (sales code XBM). DISCUSSION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart > Page 9285 The customer may notice that the signal range of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system is reduced. The RKE key fob may need to be closer than 3 meters (10 feet) before the functions available on the key fob will operate. This condition may be due to the RKE antenna. The diagnostic flow chart is provide as a diagnostic aid for dealer technician (Fig. 1). POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the right side cowl trim. 3. Reach under the instrument panel outboard of the glove box to access and disconnect the antenna coaxial cable connector (1) and (2). Disconnect the connector by pulling it apart while twisting the metal connector halves. Do not pull on the cable. 4. Disengage the instrument panel antenna cable from the retainer clips on the glove box opening and instrument panel support. 5. Remove the radio (1). CAUTION: Pulling the antenna cable straight out of the radio without pulling on the locking antenna connector could damage the cable or radio. 6. Disconnect the antenna cable by pulling the locking antenna connector (2) away from the radio. 7. Pull the antenna cable out through the radio opening in the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9291 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert cable through radio opening. Route behind glove box and attach to retainers. 2. Install the radio. 3. Reach under the instrument panel outboard of the glove box to access and connect the antenna coaxial cable connector (1) and (2). 4. Install cowl trim. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9296 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9297 Alarm Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9298 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Alarm System Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Each ignition key (2) used in the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) has a transponder chip included on the circuit board (4) beneath the cover (1) of the integral Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (3). In addition to having to be cut to match the mechanical coding of the ignition lock cylinder and programmed for operation of the RKE system, each new Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code that is permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer, and which must be programmed into the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) to be recognized by the SKIS as a valid key. The Sentry Key transponder cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire key and RKE transmitter unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9303 Alarm System Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) communicates through its antenna with the Sentry Key transponder using a Radio Frequency (RF) signal. The SKREEM then listens for a RF response from the transponder through the same antenna. The Sentry Key transponder chip is within the range of the SKREEM transceiver antenna ring when it is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM determines whether a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder based upon the response from the transponder. If a valid key is detected, that fact is communicated by the SKREEM to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and the PCM allows the engine to continue running. If the PCM receives an invalid key message, or receives no message from the SKREEM over the CAN data bus, the engine will be disabled after about two seconds of operation. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) will also respond to the invalid key message on the CAN data bus by flashing the security indicator ON and OFF. Each Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer. Likewise, the SKREEM has a unique Secret Key code programmed into it by the manufacturer. When a Sentry Key is programmed into the memory of the SKREEM, the SKREEM stores the transponder identification code from the Sentry Key, and the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code from the SKREEM. Once the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code of the SKREEM, it is permanently stored in the memory of the transponder. Therefore, once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a particular vehicle, it cannot be used on any other vehicle. The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store key-related fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a Sentry Key transponder problem is detected. The Sentry Key transponder chip can be diagnosed, and any stored DTC can be retrieved using a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9307 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9308 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9309 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9310 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9311 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped metal inner left fender mounting flange within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9314 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting hole, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Removal Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the hood ajar switch striker (2) toward the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage it. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Switch SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left front fender inner shield, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (1) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (2). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9317 receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9318 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Installation Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) into the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the striker upward into the small end of the mounting hole in the inner hood panel reinforcement until it is fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Switch SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (1) near the mounting hole (2) in the left front fender inner shield. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9319 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 9324 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9327 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9332 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9333 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9334 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9337 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9338 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9341 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9342 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9343 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart Keyless Start Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart NUMBER: 08-003-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: January 27, 2007 SUBJECT: Remote Start System - Diagnostic Chart For Antenna OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves a diagnostic chart that may be used to aid the technician with the diagnosis of the antenna on an originally equipped (factory installed) remote start system. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2006-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2007 (KA) Nitro 2007 (ND) Dakota 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles with an original equipment Remote Start system (sales code XBM). DISCUSSION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart > Page 9349 The customer may notice that the signal range of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system is reduced. The RKE key fob may need to be closer than 3 meters (10 feet) before the functions available on the key fob will operate. This condition may be due to the RKE antenna. The diagnostic flow chart is provide as a diagnostic aid for dealer technician (Fig. 1). POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER BATTERIES The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE transmitter batteries: 1. Using a trim stick or a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves located near the key ring until the two halves unsnap. 2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter. 3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter. 4. Replace the battery with a new CR2032. Be certain that the battery is installed with the polarity correctly oriented. 5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together using hand pressure until they snap back into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Security Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A security indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS), this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The security indicator consists of a small round cutout in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The security indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9358 Security Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The security indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is arming or is armed. On vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), the security indicator also gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the SKIS. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, hard wired inputs to the cluster from the various security system components, and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The security indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. Depending upon the programmed condition the indicator can be illuminated solid, flashed at a slow rate (0.5 Hertz, 12.5 percent duty cycle), or flashed at a fast rate (1 Hertz, 50 percent duty cycle). The instrument cluster will turn ON the security indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the security indicator illuminates for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the SKREEM. VTSS Indication - During the 16 second VTSS arming function, the cluster will flash the security indicator ON and OFF repeatedly at a steady, fast rate to indicate that the VTSS is in the process of arming. Following successful VTSS arming, the cluster flashes the security indicator ON and OFF continuously at a slower rate to indicate that the VTSS is armed. The security indicator continues flashing at the slower rate until the VTSS is disarmed or triggered. If the VTSS has alarmed and rearmed, the cluster will flash the security indicator at a steady, slow rate for about 30 seconds after the VTSS is disarmed. - SKIS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic SKIS indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the security indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the security indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the security indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the security indicator whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the VTSS is arming, armed, or alarming. Whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions, the SKREEM performs a self-test to decide whether the SKIS is in good operating condition and whether a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the cluster flashes the security indicator upon ignition ON, or turns ON the security indicator solid after the bulb test, it indicates that a SKIS malfunction has occurred or that the SKIS is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the VTSS, the SKIS, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to security indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Audio System - Cell Phone Induced Clicking From Speakers Cellular Phone: Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - Cell Phone Induced Clicking From Speakers NUMBER: 08-046-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: October 25, 2006 SUBJECT: Cell Phone Induced Buzz Or Clicking-Like Sound In Radio Speakers OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves a discussion regarding cell phone generated signal interference with the vehicle radio system. MODELS: 2004 (AN) Dakota 2004 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck 2004 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (JK) Wrangler 2007 (KA) Nitro 2004 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (ND) Dakota 2004 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2007 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XK/XH) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A customer may experience a buzzing or clicking-like sound coming from the vehicle radio speaker(s). The sound may be heard when the radio is in AM or FM mode. The clicking-like sound may sound like Morse code. DISCUSSION: The hardware construction of certain cell phones may generate frequencies that can interfere with the vehicle radio system. These frequencies may result in buzzing and/or clicking-like sounds in the vehicle radio. GSM type cell phones are more prone to cause this possible interference condition, though other type cell phones may cause similar buzzing and/or clicking-like sounds. This condition can be easily corrected by instructing the customer to move their cell phone away from the immediate area around vehicle radio system (radio, radio amplifier, antenna, antenna lead). DO NOT replace any radio system component in an attempt to address this condition. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cellular Phone: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9365 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9366 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9367 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9368 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9369 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9370 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9371 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9372 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9373 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9374 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9375 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9376 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9377 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9378 Cellular Phone: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9379 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9380 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9381 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cellular Phone: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION TELECOMMUNICATIONS The hands-free cellular system uses Bluetooth(TM) technology to provide wireless communication between the operator's compatible cellular telephone and the vehicle's on-board receiver. The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the vehicle's radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free system is in use. A microphone in the rear view mirror picks up vehicle occupant's voices. If a call is in progress when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone. The center console front storage compartment includes a cellular telephone holder, but the system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English. Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9384 Cellular Phone: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION TELECOMMUNICATION Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. The system includes the following features: - Phonebook - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice tag, and memory location. - Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations. - Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location. - Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken. - Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the call without manual intervention. - Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using the "voice recognition" (or "voice command") button and a voice command, if desired. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cellular Phone: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel end cap (3). 3. Remove the glove box. 4. Remove the door scuff plate. 5. Remove the cowl trim panel. 6. Remove the mounting fasteners. 7. Disconnect the electrical harness connector and remove the module (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9387 Cellular Phone: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position module. 2. Install mounting fasteners. 3. Install the cowl trim panel. 4. Install the door scuff plate. 5. Install the glove box. 6. Install instrument panel end cap. 7. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Component ID: 179 Component : MODULE-PARK ASSIST Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 2 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY X777 20LG/GY 3-4 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL D777 20WT/GY 5-6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7-8-9-10 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND X772 20LB/TN 11 GROUND Z177 20DG/BK 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9392 Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C2 Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB 4 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9393 5 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY 6 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 7-8-Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9394 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 179 Component : MODULE-PARK ASSIST Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 2 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY X777 20LG/GY 3-4 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL D777 20WT/GY 5-6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7-8-9-10 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND X772 20LB/TN 11 GROUND Z177 20DG/BK 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9395 Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C2 Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB 4 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9396 5 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY 6 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 7-8-Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Park Assist Module (3) is secured with three push-in plastic fasteners through three mounting tabs (2) integral to the module housing to the left inner quarter panel above the left rear wheel housing. The module is concealed beneath the quarter inner trim panel. Concealed within the molded plastic park assist module housing is a microprocessor and the other electronic circuitry of the module. The module housing is sealed to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry. The module software is flash programmable. Two connector receptacles (1) containing terminal pins are integral to the rearward-facing side of the housing. The module is connected to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors of the body wire harness. The park assist module cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9399 Parking Assist Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the park assist module contains the park assist system logic circuits. The module uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is also used for park assist system diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. The module provides voltage to the four park assist sensors located behind the rear bumper fascia and to the park assist display located in the headliner just forward of the liftgate opening header. The module then monitors return inputs from each of the sensors and the display on dedicated hard wired data communication circuits. The sensor inputs allow the module to determine when an obstacle is in the rear path of the vehicle and enables the module to calculate the relative location of the obstacle, and whether the distance to that obstacle is increasing or decreasing. Pre-programmed decision algorithms and calibrations allow the module microprocessor to determine the appropriate park assist system outputs based upon the inputs received from the park assist sensors and electronic messages received from other modules in the vehicle over the CAN data bus. When the programmed conditions are met the module sends electronic messages to the park assist displays over a dedicated serial bus to obtain the proper park assist system visual and audible outputs. The module also broadcasts electronic messages over the CAN data bus to enable the other electronic features of the park assist system. The park assist module microprocessor continuously monitors all of the park assist system electrical circuits and components to determine the system readiness. If the module detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends the appropriate electronic messages to the instrument cluster over the CAN data bus to control operation of certain park assist system audible warnings and textual messages displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). The park assist module receives battery current on a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB). The module receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the body wire harness. These connections allow the module to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist module may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist module or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist module or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist module operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the trim from the left quarter inner panel to access the park assist module (5), which is located behind the power liftgate module (3) to the rear of the C-pillar (2) and above the left rear wheel housing. 3. Disconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) from the park assist module connector receptacles. 4. Remove the three plastic push-in fasteners (4) that secure the module to the left quarter inner panel. 5. Remove the module from the left quarter inner panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9402 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the park assist module (5) to the left quarter inner panel, behind the power liftgate module (3) to the rear of the C-pillar (2) and above the left rear wheel housing. 2. Secure the module to the left quarter inner panel using three plastic push-in fasteners (4). 3. Reconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) to the module connector receptacles. 4. Reinstall the trim onto the left quarter inner panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Component ID: 380 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9407 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9408 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 11 Component ID: 381 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9409 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9410 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 9 Component ID: 383 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9411 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Component ID: 380 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9414 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9415 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 11 Component ID: 381 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9416 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9417 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 8 Component ID: 382 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 8 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 8 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9418 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 9 Component ID: 383 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9419 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the park assist system have four park assist sensors (1) installed on the rear bumper fascia. Only the membrane (3) of each sensor is visible through a hole in the outer vertical surface of the fascia. The remainder of each sensor including the sensor mounting bracket, the sensor spacer and the sensor wiring connection is concealed behind the fascia. A sensor wire harness behind the fascia connects the sensors to the vehicle electrical system. Each of the four sensors is identical in construction and is interchangeable. The electronic circuitry and a communication chip for each sensor is enclosed and protected within the molded black plastic sensor housing. The housing includes an integral connector receptacle (4) and two integral latch tabs (2). The sensor membrane extends from the surface of the sensor housing, and is finished to match or contrast with the outer surface of the fascia. A resilient O-ring spacer around the circumference of each of the four sensor membranes (2) isolates the membrane from the openings in the fascia (1). Each sensor is snapped into its own dedicated molded plastic mounting bracket. Each mounting bracket is heat-staked to the back side of the rear fascia. The park assist sensors cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged they must be replaced. The sensors and the spacers are each available for individual service replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9422 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park assist sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the park assist module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. The sensors each receive battery current and ground in parallel from the module, but are each connected to individual dedicated serial bus communication circuits to the module. Each sensor membrane is oscillated, then quieted by the module in a pulsing fashion. While the sensor membrane oscillates, it emits an ultrasonic signal. This signal will bounce or echo off of objects in the path of the vehicle. While quieted, each membrane receives the echoes of the ultrasonic signals it and the other sensors have transmitted. The sensors then communicate this echo data over the serial bus lines back to the module. The microprocessor in the module uses the intervals between the ultrasonic transmission and reception data from the sensors to calculate the distance to any obstacles identified by the ultrasonic echoes. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist sensors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist sensors or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The park assist sensors (3) and the sensor spacers (O-rings) are each available for separate service replacement. The sensor brackets (5) are bonded to and integral to the back side of the rear bumper fascia (2). 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. NOTE: The two outboard rear park assist sensors can be accessed for service with the rear bumper fascia installed on the vehicle. 2. For the two inboard rear park assist sensors only, remove the bumper fascia from the rear of the vehicle. 3. From the back of the fascia (2), disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the park assist sensor (3) connector receptacle. 4. Carefully pry the sensor bracket (5) latch features (1) away from the top and bottom latch tabs of the sensor far enough to disengage the sensor from the bracket. 5. Disengage the O-ring spacer from around the circumference of the sensor membrane protrusion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9425 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The park assist sensors (3) and the sensor spacers (O-rings) are each available for separate service replacement. The sensor brackets (5) are bonded to and integral to the back side of the rear bumper fascia (2). 1. Engage the O-ring spacer around the circumference of the sensor membrane protrusion. NOTE: Production and all service replacement O-ring spacers are tapered. The wide side (base) of the O-ring should be seated against the sensor housing and the narrow side should be oriented toward the outer surface of the sensor membrane and the rear fascia. 2. Align and insert the sensor (3) into the sensor bracket (5) on the back of the rear bumper fascia (2) until the bracket latch features (1) are fully engaged over the top and bottom latch tabs of the sensor. Be certain that the sensor membrane is flush with the outer surface of the fascia. NOTE: Be certain that each sensor membrane is properly centered in the openings of the rear fascia and that the O-ring spacers are not pinched. Improper centering or pinched O-rings can be detrimental to proper park assist sensor operation. 3. From the back of the fascia, reconnect the wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. For the two inboard rear park assist sensors only, reinstall the bumper fascia onto the rear of the vehicle. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park assist display (1) is located in the headliner at the rear of the vehicle, just forward of the upper liftgate opening header. Only the smoked clear plastic display lens (3) is visible on the headliner. The lens prevents the 4 red Light Emitting Diode (LED) units and 12 amber LED units from being clearly visible unless they are illuminated by the electronic circuitry of the display. The remainder of the display including the mounting provisions and the electrical connection are concealed above the headliner. A molded plastic housing with an integral connector receptacle (2) at one end contains and protects the electronic circuitry of the display, including an audible tone transducer and an electronic communication chip. A molded plastic retainer (1) with three integral tabs (2) engages three slots integral to the display housing above the lens. The retainer is installed over the display housing above the headliner substrate to engage and securely lock the display into the opening in the headliner. An arrow and the text REAR are molded into an integral installation tab (3) to ensure correct retainer orientation. The park assist display is serviced only as a complete unit. It cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire display unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9430 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park assist display provides the vehicle operator with visual feedback by illuminating amber or red Light Emitting Diode (LED) units individually or in unison, and audible feedback by energizing an audible tone transducer on the display electronic circuit board to emit either an intermittent or a continuous tone. While the park assist system is active, the number, position and color of the illuminated LED units as well as the audible signal frequency indicate the relative position and distance of obstacles detected at the rear of the vehicle. The park assist display receives battery current and ground from and is completely controlled by the park assist module. The display also contains an electronic communication chip that allows bi-directional communication to occur with the park assist module over a dedicated serial bus line. The microprocessor in the park assist module completely controls the display outputs, continually monitors the display status, and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in memory for any monitored fault it detects in the park assist display. The illumination intensity of the LED units is also controlled by the park assist module based upon internal programming and electronic panel lamps dimming messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, all 16 of the LED units in the display will illuminate in unison for approximately 1 second as a bulb test. This output will be interrupted if the system is active and senses an obstacle. Following the conclusion of the bulb test, when the system is active but no obstacle is detected, the display will indicate system readiness by illuminating the two outermost amber LED units (1) at a reduced intensity. As an obstacle is detected, the outermost amber LED unit (5) on the side of the vehicle where the obstacle was detected will be illuminated at normal intensity. Then additional amber LED units (6) will begin illuminating inward (2 or 4) as the obstacle gets closer until, finally, the two red LED units (7) are illuminated. When the final red LED unit (3) is illuminated, the obstacle is approximately 40 centimeters (16 inches) from the rear bumper and an intermittent audible tone will be generated. The frequency of the audible tone will increase as the obstacle continues to become closer until the tone is continuous when the obstacle is about 30 centimeters (12 inches) from the rear bumper. Whenever a park assist audible tone is being generated, the park assist module sends electronic messages to the radio over the CAN data bus to mute the audio system. The audible tone will be cancelled after about two seconds if the detected distance to the obstacle remains constant. See the Park Assist Display Outputs table for additional details. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist display may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist display or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist display or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist display operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9431 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the trim from the upper liftgate opening. 3. Remove the trim from both upper D-pillars. 4. Carefully pull down the rear edge of the headliner (5) from the upper liftgate opening header (2) far enough to access the rear park assist display housing (3) and the display retainer (4). 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the connector receptacle on the left end of the display housing. 6. Carefully spread the front and rear edges of the molded plastic retainer far enough to disengage the three retainer tabs from the slots in the display housing, then lift the retainer off of the display housing. 7. Push the right end of the display out through the lower surface of the headliner, then slide the display toward the right side of the vehicle far enough to disengage the connector receptacle from the headliner opening. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9434 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Carefully position the connector receptacle on the left end of the park assist display housing (3) through the left end of the display opening in the lower surface of the headliner (5). 2. Slide the display toward the left side of the vehicle far enough to engage the right end of the display housing into the right end of the display opening in the headliner. 3. Carefully pull down the rear edge of the headliner from the upper liftgate opening header (2) far enough to access the rear park assist display housing. 4. With the display lens held flush against the lower surface of the headliner, position the molded plastic retainer (4) over the display housing with the installation tab oriented towards the rear of the vehicle. 5. Slide the retainer down over the display housing until it is flash with the headliner substrate and the three tabs of the retainer are engaged in the three slots of the display housing. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the connector receptacle on the left end of the display housing. 7. Reinstall the trim onto both upper D-pillars. 8. Reinstall the trim onto the upper liftgate opening. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Component ID: 172 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 GROUND Z957 18BK 6 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 9438 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9441 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9442 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9443 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9444 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9445 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9446 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9447 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9448 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9449 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9450 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9451 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9452 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9453 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9454 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9455 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9456 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9457 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9458 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Component ID: 172 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 GROUND Z957 18BK 6 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9459 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9460 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-49-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9461 8w-49-03 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9462 8w-49-04 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9463 8w-49-05 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the EVIC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the function buttons. The EVIC displays information related to the following: - System Status - Vehicle information warning message displays - Tire Pressure Monitor System - If Equipped - Personal Settings (customer programmable features) - Compass display - Outside temperature display - Trip computer functions The EVIC system is comprised of several different components. Those components are: - Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) - Ambient Temperature Sensor - EVIC Module - Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit The only serviceable components of the EVIC module are the push button illumination bulbs. All other components of the EVIC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9466 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) uses both non-switched and ignition switched sources of battery current so that some of its features remain operational at any time, while others may only operate with the ignition switch in the On position. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the EVIC display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. The EVIC system is comprised of several different components that communicate over the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus. If the system is inoperative a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information must be used to diagnose the system. The EVIC push buttons are used to operate the different functions of the EVIC system. Pressing and releasing the MENU button (1) will change the mode displayed to one of the Personal Settings. The STEP button (2) is used to make a selection from the Personal Settings displayed at that time. Pressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) button (5) will cause the EVIC to return to the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode from any other mode. From the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode the STEP button (2) is used to scroll through and make selections in the Trip Functions. Pressing and releasing the RESET button (4) resets the trip computer screen displayed at that time. EVIC DISPLAY MODES SYSTEM STATUS MODE Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Critical text warnings will be displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can scroll to view multiple messages by using the STEP button. When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: - TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning chime) - RKE BATTERY LOW (with a single chime) - PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE - Vehicle Not in Park - LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion) - LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime) - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM (with a single chime) - OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with single chime) - LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM - COOLANT LOW - ESP SYSTEM DEACTIVATED - LIFTGATE OPEN PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE (CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES) Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK by pressing and releasing the MENU button until Personal Settings is Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9467 displayed in the EVIC. If the transmission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK. The following personal settings can be set and recalled by pressing the STEP button: - "LANGUAGE" - When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Press the RESET button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. - "AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st" - When DRV DR 1st is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "DRV DR 1st " appears. - "RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST" - When All ALL DR 1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "All DR 1st" appears. - "MEM RECALL WITH RKE > YES" - When ON is selected, pressing the unlock button on the RKE will recall the memory settings for the seat, mirror and radio. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry "Lock" button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "FLASH LAMPS w/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC" - When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "0", "30", "60" or "90" appears. NOTE: The head lamp switch must be in the "A" auto mode for this feature to work. - HEADLAMPS W /WIPERS > YES - When ON is selected, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the wiper switch is activated. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - EASY EXIT SEAT > YES - When ON is selected, and the key is removed from the ignition, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward to allow easy exit. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - TILT MIRRORS IN "R" > YES - When On is selected, and the transmission is put in reverse, the outside mirrors will tilt downward. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped) and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "Off", "45 sec.", "5 min.", "10 min." appears. - "ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "OFF", "30 sec.", "60 sec." or "90 sec." appears. - PARK ASST. SYSTEM > YES - When YES is selected, the Park Assist System is activated when the vehicle is in Reverse. When No is selected, the Rear Park System is turned off. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON or "OFF" appears. - "UNIT IN > US/METRIC" he EVIC, odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "US" or "METRIC" appears. - "COMPASS VARIANCE > 1" - Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting. - "COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES" - Press the RESET button to calibrate the compass. COMPASS/TEMPERATURE/TRIP COMPUTER MODE This display provides the outside temperature, one of the eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing, and vehicle trip information. The compass and temperature display is the normal display. When the C/T button is pressed the EVIC returns to the compass/temperature display from all other functions. The trip computer function will be displayed if the STEP button is pressed from the Compass/Temperature display mode. The trip computer displays the following information: - TRIP - Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the RESET button. - ELAPSED TIME - Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START positions. - UNIT IN US/METRIC - Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC. - AVG. MPG - Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and the RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging history will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits. - MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) - Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9468 distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. Distance MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of "LOW FUEL." This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW FUEL" text and a new DTE value will display. UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR (HOMELINK(R)) TRANSCEIVER The EVIC features a driver-interactive display which includes HomeLink(R) system messages. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Component Tests and General Diagnostics ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) data is obtained from several components on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. The EVIC will not function properly if the bus messages from any of these components is not received. If no EVIC data is displayed, check the CAN Data Bus circuit communications, the Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) functions and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the problem with the EVIC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST. If the problem with the EVIC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the CCN or TIPM over the CAN data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner. 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the TIPM. If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the TIPM, repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST for further diagnosis of the EVIC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The EVIC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the EVIC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the EVIC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the EVIC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the EVIC performs the following checks: - Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the EVIC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the EVIC will display one of two messages: "Self Test: FAIL" or "Self Test: PASS" n addition to the FAIL/PASS message the EVIC will display the current software version (SW V xx.xx.xxx) below the FAIL/PASS info. Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: - If no test result message is displayed, but EVIC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "Self Test: FAIL " message is displayed, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "Self Test: PASS" message is displayed, the EVIC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the EVIC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9471 present on the CAN bus, the EVIC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The EVIC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP, C/T, RESET or US/M buttons. NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the EVIC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the EVIC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9472 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Programming and Relearning Manual Compass Calibration MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "CAL", perform the following manual calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Setting " s displayed. 2. Press the STEP push button (2) until "Calibrate Compass YES" is displayed. 3. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (4) to initiate the calibration procedure. The message "CAL will appear in the Compass/Temperature display. 4. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the EVIC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing EVIC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the manual calibration procedure in another location. Compass Variance Adjustment COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Variance Settings Map Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9473 Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 3. Press the STEP push button (2) until "Compass Variance" is displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (4) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Procedures COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows: 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9476 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass and adjust the compass variance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9477 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner. 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2) to the overhead console housing (3). 4. Remove the EVIC from the overhead console housing. Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9478 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER NOTE: If a new Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. 1. Position the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2) onto the overhead console housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the EVIC (2) to the overhead console housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console onto the headliner. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 9479 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations Television / Monitor: Locations Component ID: 161 Component : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Connector: Name : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 VDO-AUX AUDIO RT X510 20DG/RD 2 SDARS AUDIO RETURN X916 20LB/PK 3 VDO-AUX AUDIO LT 2 X521 20GY/LB 4-5-6 FUSED B(+) A300 20GY/LG 7 VDO-AUX AUDIO LT X511 20DB/RD 8 VDO-AUX AUDIO RTN/COMMON X910 20GY/DG 9 VDO-AUX AUDIO RT 2 X522 20LG/RD 10 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 11 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 12 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9484 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9485 Television / Monitor: Diagrams Component ID: 161 Component : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Connector: Name : MEDIA SYSTEM-MONITOR/DVD Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 VDO-AUX AUDIO RT X510 20DG/RD 2 SDARS AUDIO RETURN X916 20LB/PK 3 VDO-AUX AUDIO LT 2 X521 20GY/LB 4-5-6 FUSED B(+) A300 20GY/LG 7 VDO-AUX AUDIO LT X511 20DB/RD 8 VDO-AUX AUDIO RTN/COMMON X910 20GY/DG 9 VDO-AUX AUDIO RT 2 X522 20LG/RD 10 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 11 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 12 GROUND Z957 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9486 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Television / Monitor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The video entertainment system, consist of a DVD player (3), battery powered remote control, and two headsets. The DVD player is located on the headliner (2) behind the driver and front seat passenger seat. In addition to video DVDs, the system will play audio DVDs, audio CDs, MP3 audio disc, and video CDs. There are plug-in jacks on the housing to show video directly from a video camera, connect video games for display on the screen, and play music directly from a MP3 player. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9489 Television / Monitor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The DVD player is self contained. The DVD disc are loaded and ejected through a slot in the faceplate. A seven inch (diagonal measurement) liquid crystal display (LCD) screen supports both 3 X 4 and 6 X 9 video formats. The hinged screen latches in the closed position and swings down for viewing. A lock-out switch on the front of the housing enables front seat occupants to disable the DVD player. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Television / Monitor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the two mounting fasteners. 3. Using a trim stick, press the retaining clip at the rear of the DVD player. Move the DVD player from side to side to release from roof panel (2). 4. Disconnect electrical harness connector (1) and remove DVD player. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Television / Monitor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9492 Television / Monitor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connector (1) to DVD player (3). 2. Position DVD player and press into place. 3. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) module is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the EVIC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is integral to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) module located in the overhead console. The only visible component of the HomeLink(R) transceiver are the three transmitter push buttons (3). The buttons are marked with one, two or three dots, respectively, for identification of each channel. Each of the three HomeLink(R) transceiver push buttons controls an independent radio transceiver channel. Each of these three channels can be trained to transmit a different radio frequency signal for the remote operation of garage door openers, motorized gate openers, home or office lighting, security systems or just about any other device that can be equipped with a radio receiver in the 286 to 399 MegaHertz (MHz) frequency range for remote operation. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is capable of operating systems using either rolling code or non-rolling code technology. The HomeLink(R) transceiver cannot be repaired, and is available for service only as part of the EVIC module. This unit includes the push button switches for both the transceiver (3) and EVIC (1, 2, 4 and 5) as well as the vacuum-fluorescent display (6) and the plastic module case. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9497 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The HomeLink(R) transceiver receives battery feed through the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse circuit of the vehicle. It operates on a non-switched source of battery current so the unit will remain functional, regardless of the ignition switch position. It can learn and store three separate transceiver radio frequency codes to operate garage door openers, security gates and security lighting. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display provides visual feedback to the driver, showing which transceiver button is pressed. The system will not send operating signals if the vehicle theft security alarm is armed. This prevents a perpetrator from breaking into a vehicle parked outside a home and using the HomeLink(R) transceiver system to enter the home. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Component Tests and General Diagnostics HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER RADIO FREQUENCY DETECTOR #9001 If the HomeLink(R) transceiver is inoperative, but the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) is operating normally. Retrain the HomeLink(R) transceiver with a known good hand held transmitter as instructed and test the HomeLink(R) transceiver operation again. If the unit is still inoperative, test it with the Radio Frequency Detector special tool 9001 as described below: 1. Turn the Radio Frequency (RF) Detector ON. A "chirp" will sound and the green power Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator will light. If the green LED does not light, replace the battery. 2. Hold the RF detector within one inch of the TRAINED HomeLink(R) transceiver and press any of the transceiver buttons. 3. The red signal detection LEDs will light and the tool will beep if a radio signal is detected. Repeat this test for each button. If any button is inoperative, replace the EVIC module. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9500 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Programming and Relearning Programming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes PROGRAMMING HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER CODES Programming Common HomeLink(R) Transmitter Codes WARNING: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle's exhaust while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: Your motorized door or gate may open and close while you are training the HomeLink(R) Transceiver if the vehicle is in range of the motorized device. Do not train the HomeLink(R) transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects. NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink(R) for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. NOTE: If programing the HomeLink(R) transceiver is unsuccessful using the following procedure, refer to the Owner's Manual for the current customer assistance phone number. - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons, the EVIC will display "CLEARING CHANNELS" do not release the buttons until "CHANNELS CLEARED" is displayed on the EVIC (after approximately 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is now in the train (or learning) mode - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) transceiver button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING", once the HomeLink(R) transceiver is programmed the EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINED". X refers to the desired channel being trained (1,2 or 3). NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - Once "CHANNEL X TRAINED" s displayed on the EVIC, release both buttons. Programming is now complete. When the HomeLink(R) transceiver button is subsequently pressed, "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT " s displayed on the EVIC and your device should be activated, (garage door should open). NOTE: To program the remaining two buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. If the EVIC display shows "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" (where X is channel 1,2 or 3) but your device does not activate, the device may be equipped with a "rolling code" system. Continue with the following steps five through seven to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener manufactured after 1995). The assistance of a second person may make the following programming steps quicker and easier. - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 8. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink(R) transceiver button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. The HomeLink(R) transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device. NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the HomeLink(R) transceiver to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the "Programming" procedures (regardless of where you live), replace "Programming Common HomeLink(R) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9501 Transceiver Codes" step 3 with the following: NOTE: When programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device or move the vehicle out of range during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating. - 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while you press and release every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING" and then "CHANNEL X TRAINED". Proceed with "Programming" step 4 to complete. Reprogramming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes REPROGRAMMING HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER CODES Reprogramming Basic HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes WARNING: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle's exhaust while training the HomeLink(R) transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: Your motorized door or gate may open and close while you are training the HomeLink(R) Transceiver if the vehicle is in range of the motorized device. Do not train the HomeLink(R) transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects. NOTE: If programing the HomeLink(R) transceiver is unsuccessful using the following procedure, refer to the Owner's Manual for the current customer assistance phone number. To program a device to the HomeLink(R) transceiver using a button previously trained, follow these steps: - Press and hold the desired HomeLink(R) transceiver button. DO NOT release the button. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" for 20 seconds and then change to "CHANNEL X TRAINING". Without releasing the HomeLink(R) transceiver button, proceed to step 2. - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while keeping the EVIC display in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) transceiver button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING", once the HomeLink(R) transceiver is programmed the EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINED". X refers to the desired channel being trained (1,2 or 3). NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Reprogramming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - Once "CHANNEL X TRAINED" is displayed on the EVIC, release both buttons. Programming is now complete. When the HomeLink(R) transceiver button is subsequently pressed, "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" is displayed on the EVIC and your device should be activated, (garage door should open). NOTE: If the EVIC display shows "CHANNEL X TRANSMIT" (where X is channel 1,2 or 3) but your device does not activate, the device may be equipped with a "rolling code" system. Continue with the following steps 5 through 7 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener manufactured after 1995). The assistance of a second person may make the following programming steps quicker and easier. - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 7. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the reprogrammed HomeLink(R) transceiver button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the reprogramming. The HomeLink(R) transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device. Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the HomeLink(R) transceiver to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the "Programming" procedures (regardless of where you live), replace "Programming Common HomeLink(R) Transceiver Codes" step 3 with the following: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 9502 NOTE: When programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device or move the vehicle out of range during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating. - 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while you press and release every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted. The EVIC will display "CHANNEL X TRAINING" and then "CHANNEL X TRAINED". Proceed with "Programming" step 4 to complete. Erasing Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes ERASING HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER CODES NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased. Erasing the HomeLink(R) transceiver codes will erase ALL programmed codes. To erase programming from all three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed"), follow the step noted: - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) transceiver buttons until the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "CLEARING CHANNELS", do not release the buttons until "CHANNELS CLEARED" is displayed on the EVIC (after approximately 20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink(R) is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 9512 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 9513 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 9519 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 9520 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 9526 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 9527 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 9533 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 9534 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9535 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9536 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9537 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9538 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9539 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9540 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9541 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9542 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9543 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9544 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9545 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9546 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9547 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9548 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Memory Mirror Description DESCRIPTION There are two Memory Mirror Modules (these are sometimes referred to as Driver Door Modules (DDM) and Passenger Door Modules (PDM) within the memory system. One located in the driver door and one in the passenger door, just behind the door trim panel. The modules send a bus message to the power mirrors to adjust them to a preset position when a memory recall request has been made. The memory mirror modules also act as an interface in each door for electrical functions (door lock switches and door ajar switches). The Memory System makes available for immediate recall personalized preferences of the following: - Automatic temperature control settings. - Outside mirror positions. - Power adjustable brake and accelerator pedal position. - Power seat horizontal, vertical, recliner, and easy entry positions. - Radio push button station selections. The major components of the Memory System are: - Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel. - Driver Memory Mirror Module (DMMM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel. - Passenger Memory Mirror Module (PMMM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel. - Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder. - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key. - Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals. - Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack. - Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack. The memory recall is available at the press of a button on the drivers door trim panel or, by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter if it is programmed to trigger the recall. Radio settings include up to 20 push button presets (10 AM and 10 FM), and the last station selection, even if it is not one of the 20 preset selections. Operation OPERATION The memory mirror module receives input from the door lock switches and sends that message to the cluster for door lock operation (vehicles equipped with memory system only). It also controls the mirror adjustment by receiving input from the mirror switch on the door trim panel. Sensors in the mirrors act as inputs to the memory mirror module in order to position the mirrors to presets by the driver(s). The power supply to the mirrors is supplied by the mirror memory modules. On vehicles equipped with a memory system, the front door ajar switches are inputs to the memory mirror module. The modules use this information for door lock inhibit etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 9551 A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linke" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the seat belt is latched. Both driver and passenger modules provide active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) to aid in diagnosis. Both modules are identical in appearance with the exception of an extra ground wire on the driver side memory mirror module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 9552 Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Seat Memory Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The scan tool standardization process must be performed on the Memory Seat Module (MSM) any time a new module is installed or the existing module is reflashed. The Memory Seat Module (MSM) is located underneath the driver seat, towards the front and on the outboard side. It is used in conjunction with the other modules in the memory system to recall the seat to one of two preset seat functional adjustments (horizontal, vertical, and recliner). The switch for the memory seat programming and selection mounts on the driver door trim panel. The MSM also controls the adjustable pedals, both for the memory and manual functionality. The adjustable accelerator and brake pedals are available on SLT and Limited models. On Limited, their positioning can be stored for recall by the memory system, allowing for two drivers to have unique, pre-programmed settings. Operation OPERATION POWER/MEMORY SEAT The memory seat module receives input from the 8-way power seat switch, the driver seat position sensors, adjustable pedal control circuits (switch, sensor, and motor), and the data bus circuit. The memory switch, is wired to the memory mirror module which sends the message over the data bus. The memory seat module performs the following functions: - Positions the driver seat (vertical, horizontal, and recliner positions) and adjustable pedals. - Sends the memory save or recall (#1 or #2) command over the data bus circuit to the memory mirror modules, HVAC, and radio. - Provides for "linking" the key FOBs to memory. - Provides for the easy entry/exit feature. - Provides the tilt mirrors in reverse feature When a memory button is pressed (#1 or #2) on the memory switch, the driver door memory mirror module sends a recall message to the memory seat module (MSM). Then the MSM will position the driver seat and adjustable pedals to its preprogrammed location/setting. When the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter button is pressed, depending on which transmitter (#1 or #2), the SKREEM (RKE Receiver) sends the recall request and FOB number (#1 or #2) data message. This RKE transmitter function depends on if the MSM is programmed to trigger the recall (linked FOBs). A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linked" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in any position other than park or the seat belt is latched. A key FOB is "linked" to a memory setting by pressing the "set" button and then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the set button, then by pressing the "lock" button on the selected key FOB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 9553 The memory system "Easy Entry and /Exit" feature provides the driver with more room to enter or exit the vehicle. The Easy Entry and Exit feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. The seat will return to the memory position when the driver turns the vehicle's ignition switch out of the LOCK position. The memory system "learns" the seat and adjustable pedal motor maximum end positions when the motor reaches the limit of travel in any direction and stalls. Subsequently, movement will stop just short of that position to avoid extra stress on the motors and mechanisms. If the system learned a maximum position as a result of an obstruction, as for instance if a large object was placed on the floor behind the seat, the system can relearn the "true" maximum position through manually operating the power seat after the obstruction is removed. NOTE: It is normal for the power accessories contained in the memory system to stop at the maximum "learned" position and then continue to the "true" maximum position when the control switch is released and then applied in the same direction a second time. Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information are needed. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature provides for tilting the sideview (outside) mirrors down a predetermined angle, providing a better view of the ground next to the rear portion of the vehicle. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. Operation of the tilt mirrors is as follows: - Sideview mirrors will tilt down when the vehicle transmission is shifted into Reverse. - Sideview mirrors will return to the original position when the vehicle transmission is shifted out of Reverse. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The pedals swing on a large arc, the radius and angle of which were selected on the basis of ergonomic studies, that puts them in the proper position for use by the smaller driver - higher and angled upward as well as rearward. Powered by the small electric motor driving a gear train at each pedal, adjustment is precise, quiet, and smooth throughout the range. A paddle-type switch on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column actuates the electric motor-driven mechanism through the memory seat module (MSM). Pushing up the paddle brings the pedals closer and vice versa. Movement stops when the switch is released. MSM logic prevents pedal adjustment when the automatic speed control (cruise control) is set (controlling speed), and when the transmission is in reverse. This feature protects against a loss of reference position when neither foot is on the pedal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Memory Mirror MEMORY MIRROR MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory mirror module should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 9556 Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Seat Memory MEMORY SEAT MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory seat system/module should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Memory Mirror Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from module (1). 4. Remove fasteners (2) and module (1) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position module (1) on door and install fasteners (2). 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to module (1). 3. Install the door trim panel. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 9559 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Seat Memory Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 3. Unsnap the memory seat module (4) from the side brackets. 4. Pivot the module upward and disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 5. Pull the module rearward to remove it from the front of the seat frame (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place the module (4) into position making sure the front snaps into the seat frame (3). 2. Connect the memory seat module harness connectors (1). 3. Pivot the module (4) downward and snap it into place in the side brackets. 4. Install the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Using an appropriate scan tool go to the MSM miscellaneous functions and perform the standardization routine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 9560 7. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9564 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9565 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9566 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Navigation System: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION TELECOMMUNICATIONS The hands-free cellular system uses Bluetooth(TM) technology to provide wireless communication between the operator's compatible cellular telephone and the vehicle's on-board receiver. The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the vehicle's radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free system is in use. A microphone in the rear view mirror picks up vehicle occupant's voices. If a call is in progress when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone. The center console front storage compartment includes a cellular telephone holder, but the system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English. Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9571 Navigation System: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION TELECOMMUNICATION Two buttons on the rearview mirror, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. The system includes the following features: - Phonebook - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice tag, and memory location. - Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations. - Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location. - Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken. - Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the call without manual intervention. - Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using the "voice recognition" (or "voice command") button and a voice command, if desired. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Motor: Locations Component ID: 185 Component : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 3-4-5-6-Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9576 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9577 Pedal Positioning Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 185 Component : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : MOTOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 3-4-5-6-Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9578 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9579 Pedal Positioning Motor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Adjustable Pedal Motor (4) is not serviced separately. The Adjustable Pedal Motor (4) comes as an assembly which includes the aluminum pedals bracket (2), pedals (3), cables (1) and motor (4). The Adjustable Pedals System (APS) is designed to enable the fore and aft repositioning of the brake and accelerator pedals. This results in improved ergonomics in relation to the steering wheel for taller and shorter drivers. Being able to adjust the pedal positions also allows the driver to set steering wheel tilt and seat position to the most comfortable position. The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals. Change of pedal position is accomplished by means of a motor driven screw. Operating the adjustable pedal switch activates the pedal drive motor. The pedal drive motor turns a screw that changes the position of the brake and accelerator pedals. The pedal can be moved rearward (closer to the driver) or forward (away from driver). The brake pedal is moved on its drive screw to a position where the driver feels most comfortable. The accelerator pedal is moved at the same time and the same distance as the brake pedal. Neither the pedal drive motor nor drive mechanism are subject to the mechanical stress of brake or accelerator application. - SYSTEM FEATURES: - Range of Adjustment: The pedals may be adjusted up to 3 in. (75 mm) - Pedal Adjustment Speed: 0.5 in./sec (12.5 mm/sec) - Pedal Adjustment Inhibitors: Pedal adjustment is inhibited when the vehicle is in reverse or when cruise control is activated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9580 Pedal Positioning Motor: Service and Repair REMOVAL The Adjustable Pedal Motor is not serviced separately, It is service as an assembly. For service refer to the brake pedal replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Relay > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Relay: Locations Adjustable Pedals Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9584 Pedal Positioning Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : RELAY-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : RELAY-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A902 18RD 85 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 86 FUSED B(+) A902 18RD 87 - 87A ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Sensor: Locations Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9588 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9589 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9590 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9594 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9595 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9596 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Remove the switch from the lower drivers side bezel by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning System > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9599 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (1) to the lower drivers side bezel by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (2) to the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations Amplifier: Locations Component ID: 13 Component : AMPLIFIER-RADIO Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X201 18GY/VT 2 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X202 20DG/VT 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 16LG/PK 4 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 5 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) X300 18GY/BR 6 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) X301 18GY/WT 7 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)X291 18GY/YL 8 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) X292 20DG/YL 9 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 16GY/DG 10 - 11 - 12 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY 13 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) X390 18DG/BR 14 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) X391 18DG/WT Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9604 Component Location - 46 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9605 Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 Color : WHITE # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) X209 20GY/OR 2 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) X208 20GY/DG 3-4 FUSED B(+) A116 16YL/RD 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9606 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (+) X51 18DG/DB 8 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (+) X52 18GY/DB 9 GROUND Z513 16BK 10 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) X299 20GY/YL 11 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) X298 20VT/RD 12 - 13 FUSED B(+) A116 16YL/RD 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (-) X57 18DG/OR 19 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (-) X58 18GY/OR 20 GROUND Z980 16BK Component Location - 36 Component Location - 46 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9607 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9608 Amplifier: Diagrams Component ID: 13 Component : AMPLIFIER-RADIO Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X201 18GY/VT 2 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X202 20DG/VT 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 16LG/PK 4 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 5 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) X300 18GY/BR 6 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) X301 18GY/WT 7 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)X291 18GY/YL 8 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) X292 20DG/YL 9 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 16GY/DG 10 - 11 - 12 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY 13 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) X390 18DG/BR 14 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) X391 18DG/WT Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9609 Component Location - 46 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9610 Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 Color : WHITE # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) X209 20GY/OR 2 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) X208 20GY/DG 3-4 FUSED B(+) A116 16YL/RD 5-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9611 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (+) X51 18DG/DB 8 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (+) X52 18GY/DB 9 GROUND Z513 16BK 10 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) X299 20GY/YL 11 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) X298 20VT/RD 12 - 13 FUSED B(+) A116 16YL/RD 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (-) X57 18DG/OR 19 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (-) X58 18GY/OR 20 GROUND Z980 16BK Component Location - 36 Component Location - 46 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Page 9612 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Amplifier: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The amplifier can have two ratings: 288 watt (RD7), and 384 watt (RD6). The amplifier is mounted to the right cowl side panel under the passenger side of the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9615 Amplifier: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The amplifier receives fused battery current from a fuse in the Junction Block (JB) at all times. The internal circuitry of the amplifier switches the amplifier on based upon a CAN bus message that is received from the radio receiver whenever the radio is turned on. The amplifier receives the sound signal inputs from the left and right rear outputs of the radio, then sends the amplified speaker outputs for each of those channels to the speakers. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9616 Amplifier: Testing and Inspection AMPLIFIER Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The amplifier unit should be checked if there is no sound output noted from the speakers. For diagnosis of the power amplifier, refer to Audio/Speaker testing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Amplifier: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the right side cowl trim. 3. Remove mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect electrical harness connectors and remove amplifier. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9619 Amplifier: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect wire harness connectors to amplifier. Position amplifier into place. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install right side cowl trim cover. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radio Receiver: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The satellite receiver module is located above the headliner near the rear liftgate opening. It is mounted to the roof panel with three mounting fasteners. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9625 Radio Receiver: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The satellite receiver module receives signals from the roof mounted antenna and processes this information before it is sent to the radio. The module operates on both battery feed circuits and CAN bus messages. It will operate with the ignition key in the run or accessory position only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Radio Receiver: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Lower the headliner as necessary. 3. Remove the mounting bracket fasteners. 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical harness connectors. 5. Remove the module from the mounting bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9628 Radio Receiver: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Connect antenna and electrical harness connector to module. 2. Install module to mounting bracket. Tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Position module and bracket. Install new mounting fasteners. 4. Install headliner. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Radio noise suppression devices are installed on this vehicle. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) can be produced by any on-board or external source of electromagnetic energy. These electromagnetic energy sources can radiate electromagnetic signals through the air, or conduct them through the vehicle electrical system. When the audio system converts RFI or EMI to an audible acoustic wave form, it is referred to as radio noise. This undesirable radio noise is generally manifested in the form of "buzzing," "hissing" "popping","clicking", "crackling", and/or "whirring" sounds. In most cases, RFI and EMI radio noise can be suppressed using a combination of vehicle and component grounding, filtering and shielding techniques. This vehicle is equipped with radio noise suppression devices that were designed to minimize exposure to typical sources of RFI and EMI; thereby, minimizing radio noise complaints. Radio noise suppression is accomplished primarily through circuitry or devices that are integral to the radios, audio power amplifiers and other on-board electrical components such as generators, wiper motors, blower motors, and fuel pumps that have been found to be potential sources of RFI or EMI. External radio noise suppression devices that are used on this vehicle to control RFI or EMI, and can be serviced, include the following: - Engine-to-frame ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector crimped to each end. One end is secured to the engine cylinder heads. The other is secured to the frame. - Resistor-type spark plugs - This type of spark plug has an internal resistor connected in series between the spark plug terminal and the center electrode to help reduce the production of electromagnetic radiation that can result in radio noise. - Exhaust-to-frame ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector crimped to each end. One end is secured to the exhaust pipe. The other is secured to the frame. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9633 Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION There are two common strategies that can be used to suppress Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) radio noise. The first suppression strategy involves preventing the production of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals at their sources. The second suppression strategy involves preventing the reception of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals by the audio system components. The use of braided ground straps in key locations is part of the RFI and EMI prevention strategy. These ground straps ensure adequate ground paths, particularly for high current components such as many of those found in the starting, charging, ignition, engine control and transmission control systems. An insufficient ground path for any of these high current components may result in radio noise caused by induced voltages created as the high current seeks alternative ground paths through components or circuits intended for use by, or in close proximity to the audio system components or circuits. Preventing the reception of RFI and EMI is accomplished by ensuring that the audio system components are correctly installed in the vehicle. Loose, corroded or improperly soldered wire harness connections, improperly routed wiring and inadequate audio system component grounding can all contribute to the reception of RFI and EMI. A properly grounded antenna body and radio chassis, as well as a shielded antenna coaxial cable with clean and tight connections will each help reduce the potential for reception of RFI and EMI. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL ENGINE TO FRAME 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the mounting fasteners from the engine cylinder heads. 3. Remove mounting fastener from frame and remove strap. EXHAUST TO FRAME GROUND STRAP Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9636 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove mounting fastener from exhaust pipe. 3. Remove mounting fastener from frame and remove ground strap. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9637 Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION ENGINE TO BODY 1. Position ground strap to engine and install mounting fasteners. 2. Tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Position ground strap and install mounting fastener. 4. Tighten mounting fastener. EXHAUST TO FRAME GROUND STRAP Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9638 1. Position ground strap to exhaust pipe and install mounting fastener. 2. Tighten mounting fastener. 3. Position ground strap to frame and install mounting fastener. 4. Tighten mounting fastener. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 440 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9643 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9644 Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 441 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9645 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 440 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9648 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9649 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 441 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9650 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches are mounted in the sides of the rear (instrument panel side) steering wheel trim cover. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player or CD player. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9653 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Instrument cluster through the clockspring. The instrument cluster sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the instrument cluster senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the radio. The electronic circuitry within the radio is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9654 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Remove the remote radio switch(es) (1) and (2) from the steering wheel. 2. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch test table. If the remote radio switch resistances are not as indicated, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver side airbag (5) from the steering wheel (1). 3. Remove the speed control switch (3) or (6) located on the same side of the steering wheel as the remote radio switch that is being serviced. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector from the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 5. Disengage the four remote radio switch latches that secure the switch to the inside of the mounting hole in the steering wheel rear trim cover. 6. From the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover, remove the remote radio switch (2) from the trim cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9657 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the remote radio switch to the mounting hole on the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover. Be certain that the connector receptacle is oriented toward the bottom of the switch and pointed toward the center of the steering wheel. 2. Press firmly and evenly on the remote radio switch until each of the switch latches is fully engaged in the mounting hole of the steering wheel rear trim cover. 3. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector to the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 4. Install the speed control switch onto the steering wheel. 5. Install the driver side airbag to the steering wheel. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 409 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X53 20DG Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X201 18GY/VT 2-3 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X55 20DG/BR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)X291 18GY/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9662 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9663 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 410 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (+) X51 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (-) X57 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9664 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9665 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 411 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X54 18GY Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X202 20DG/VT 2-3 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X56 18GY/BR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) X292 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9666 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9667 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Right Rear Door Component ID: 412 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (+) X52 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (-) X58 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9668 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9669 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 409 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X53 20DG Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X201 18GY/VT 2-3 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X55 20DG/BR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)X291 18GY/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9670 Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 410 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9671 1 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (+) X51 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (-) X57 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 411 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9672 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X54 18GY Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X202 20DG/VT 2-3 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X56 18GY/BR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) X292 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9673 Speaker-Right Rear Door Component ID: 412 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (+) X52 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (-) X58 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9674 Speaker-Subwoofer Component ID: 413 Component : SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER Connector: Name : SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER Color : WHITE # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9675 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) X300 18GY/BR 2 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) X390 18DG/BR 3 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) X301 18GY/WT 4 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) X391 18DG/WT Component Location - 44 Speaker-Tweeter-Left Front Component ID: 414 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9676 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) X209 20GY/OR 2 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) X299 20GY/YL Component Location - 29 Speaker-Tweeter-Left Rear Component ID: 415 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT REAR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9677 Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 18DG/LG 2-3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9678 Speaker-Tweeter-Right Front Component ID: 416 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9679 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) X208 20GY/DG 2 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) X298 20VT/RD Component Location - 29 Speaker-Tweeter-Right Rear Component ID: 417 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9680 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 2-3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 409 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X53 20DG Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X201 18GY/VT 2-3 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X55 20DG/BR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)X291 18GY/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9683 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9684 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 410 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (+) X51 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (-) X57 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9685 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9686 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 411 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X54 18GY Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X202 20DG/VT 2-3 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X56 18GY/BR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) X292 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9687 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9688 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Right Rear Door Component ID: 412 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (+) X52 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (-) X58 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9689 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9690 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 409 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X53 20DG Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X201 18GY/VT 2-3 LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X55 20DG/BR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)X291 18GY/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9691 Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 410 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9692 1 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (+) X51 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-LEFT AUDIO (-) X57 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 411 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9693 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+) X54 18GY Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) X202 20DG/VT 2-3 RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-) X56 18GY/BR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) X292 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9694 Speaker-Right Rear Door Component ID: 412 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (+) X52 18GY/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 2-3 RADIO-RIGHT AUDIO (-) X58 18GY/OR 3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9695 Speaker-Subwoofer Component ID: 413 Component : SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER Connector: Name : SPEAKER-SUBWOOFER Color : WHITE # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9696 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) X300 18GY/BR 2 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) X390 18DG/BR 3 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) X301 18GY/WT 4 AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) X391 18DG/WT Component Location - 44 Speaker-Tweeter-Left Front Component ID: 414 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9697 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) X209 20GY/OR 2 AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) X299 20GY/YL Component Location - 29 Speaker-Tweeter-Left Rear Component ID: 415 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT REAR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9698 Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+)X205 18DG/LG 2-3 AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) X295 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9699 Speaker-Tweeter-Right Front Component ID: 416 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9700 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) X208 20GY/DG 2 AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) X298 20VT/RD Component Location - 29 Speaker-Tweeter-Right Rear Component ID: 417 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 9701 Pin Description Circuit 1 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) X206 18DG/LG 2-3 AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-)X296 18LG/GY Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9702 Speaker: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION STANDARD The standard equipment speaker system includes speakers in four locations. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each front door. There is also one 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker located in each rear door. MIDLEVEL The midlevel speaker system features eight speakers in eight locations. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each front door. There is also one 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker located in each rear door. A 1.9 centimeter tweeter is mounted high in each rear door trim panel. Two tweeters (8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch)) are also located on the top portion of the instrument panel. The midlevel speaker system includes an amplifier. The total available power of the premium speaker system is 288 watts. PREMIUM The premium speaker system features nine speakers in nine locations. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each front door. There is also one 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker located in each rear door. A 1.9 centimeter tweeter is mounted high in each rear door trim panel. Two tweeters (8.9 centimeter (3.5 inch)) are also located on the top portion of the instrument panel. Included with the premium speaker package is a subwoofer located in the left rear quarter panel. The premium speaker system also includes an amplifier. The total available power of the premium speaker system is 384 watts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9703 Speaker: Testing and Inspection SPEAKER Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. CAUTION: The speaker output of the radio is a "floating ground" system. Do not allow any speaker lead to short to ground, as damage to the radio may result. 1. If all speakers are inoperative, check the radio fuses in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 2. Check the amplifier fuse (if equipped) in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Turn the radio receiver ON. Adjust the balance and fader control controls to check the performance of each individual speaker. Note the speaker locations that are not performing correctly. Go to Step 4. 4. Turn the radio OFF. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. If vehicle is not equipped with a amplifier, remove the radio receiver. If the vehicle is equipped with an amplifier, disconnect the wire harness connectors. There are two connectors. The one on the body harness has body speakers only. The other on the instrument panel harness has the instrument panel speakers, battery, ground, and CAN. Go to Step 5. 5. Check both the speaker feed (+) circuit and return (-) circuit cavities for the inoperative speaker at the wire harness connector for continuity to ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the shorted speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) to the speaker as required. 6. Disconnect wire harness connector at the inoperative speaker. Check for continuity between the speaker feed (+) circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector or if equipped, the amplifier wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. Repeat the check between the speaker return (-) circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. In each case, there should be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty speaker. If not OK, repair the open speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Speaker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL FRONT DOOR 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front door trim panel. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove instrument panel defroster grille. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. REAR DOOR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9706 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. REAR DOOR TWEETER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (1) and remove tweeter (2). SUBWOOFER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the quarter panel trim. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9707 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connectors. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9708 Speaker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DOOR 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install door trim panel. 4. Connect battery negative cable. INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to instrument panel. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install instrument panel top cover. 4. Connect battery negative cable. REAR DOOR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9709 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install door trim panel. 4. Connect battery negative cable. REAR DOOR TWEETER 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door trim panel. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install door trim panel. 4. Connect battery negative cable. SUBWOOFER 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9710 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install quarter panel trim. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Accessory Delay Relay: Locations Accessory Delay Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9716 Accessory Delay Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 212 Component : RELAY-ACCESSORY DELAY Connector: Name : RELAY-ACCESSORY DELAY Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 85 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY CONTROL P305 20LG/LB 86 FUSED B(+) A901 12RD/PK 87 ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT INTERNAL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations Alarm Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9720 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9721 Alarm Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Alarm Module, (Vehicle Antitheft) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9722 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description PCM Output > Page 9727 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - The ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - There is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9730 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9734 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9735 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9736 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9739 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9740 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9743 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9744 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9745 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations Parking Assist Control Module: Locations Component ID: 179 Component : MODULE-PARK ASSIST Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 2 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY X777 20LG/GY 3-4 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL D777 20WT/GY 5-6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7-8-9-10 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND X772 20LB/TN 11 GROUND Z177 20DG/BK 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9749 Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C2 Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB 4 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9750 5 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY 6 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 7-8-Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9751 Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 179 Component : MODULE-PARK ASSIST Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 18PK/YL 2 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SUPPLY X777 20LG/GY 3-4 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY SIGNAL D777 20WT/GY 5-6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7-8-9-10 PARK ASSIST DISPLAY GROUND X772 20LB/TN 11 GROUND Z177 20DG/BK 12 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9752 Connector: Name : MODULE-PARK ASSIST C2 Color : # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (PARKTRONICS) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB 4 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9753 5 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY 6 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 7-8-Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Park Assist Module (3) is secured with three push-in plastic fasteners through three mounting tabs (2) integral to the module housing to the left inner quarter panel above the left rear wheel housing. The module is concealed beneath the quarter inner trim panel. Concealed within the molded plastic park assist module housing is a microprocessor and the other electronic circuitry of the module. The module housing is sealed to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry. The module software is flash programmable. Two connector receptacles (1) containing terminal pins are integral to the rearward-facing side of the housing. The module is connected to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors of the body wire harness. The park assist module cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9756 Parking Assist Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the park assist module contains the park assist system logic circuits. The module uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is also used for park assist system diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. The module provides voltage to the four park assist sensors located behind the rear bumper fascia and to the park assist display located in the headliner just forward of the liftgate opening header. The module then monitors return inputs from each of the sensors and the display on dedicated hard wired data communication circuits. The sensor inputs allow the module to determine when an obstacle is in the rear path of the vehicle and enables the module to calculate the relative location of the obstacle, and whether the distance to that obstacle is increasing or decreasing. Pre-programmed decision algorithms and calibrations allow the module microprocessor to determine the appropriate park assist system outputs based upon the inputs received from the park assist sensors and electronic messages received from other modules in the vehicle over the CAN data bus. When the programmed conditions are met the module sends electronic messages to the park assist displays over a dedicated serial bus to obtain the proper park assist system visual and audible outputs. The module also broadcasts electronic messages over the CAN data bus to enable the other electronic features of the park assist system. The park assist module microprocessor continuously monitors all of the park assist system electrical circuits and components to determine the system readiness. If the module detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends the appropriate electronic messages to the instrument cluster over the CAN data bus to control operation of certain park assist system audible warnings and textual messages displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). The park assist module receives battery current on a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB). The module receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the body wire harness. These connections allow the module to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist module may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist module or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist module or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist module operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the trim from the left quarter inner panel to access the park assist module (5), which is located behind the power liftgate module (3) to the rear of the C-pillar (2) and above the left rear wheel housing. 3. Disconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) from the park assist module connector receptacles. 4. Remove the three plastic push-in fasteners (4) that secure the module to the left quarter inner panel. 5. Remove the module from the left quarter inner panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9759 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the park assist module (5) to the left quarter inner panel, behind the power liftgate module (3) to the rear of the C-pillar (2) and above the left rear wheel housing. 2. Secure the module to the left quarter inner panel using three plastic push-in fasteners (4). 3. Reconnect the two body wire harness connectors (1) to the module connector receptacles. 4. Reinstall the trim onto the left quarter inner panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations Voice Activation Module: Locations Component ID: 175 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 2-3-4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) X722 20LB/TN 6-7-- 8 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (+) X716 20GY/TN 9 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (-) X776 20TN/GY 10 COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT X795 20DG 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 15 VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL X730 20GY/YL 16 MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) X712 20DB/RD 17 MICROPHONE IN (-) X792 20DB/YL 18 HANDS FREE MICROPHONE SHIELD X735 20BK/YL 19 - 20 MICROPHONE FEED X793 20TN/YL 21 SENSOR GROUND X835 20OR/GY 22 GROUND Z939 18BK Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9763 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9764 Voice Activation Module: Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 2-3-4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) X722 20LB/TN 6-7-- 8 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (+) X716 20GY/TN 9 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (-) X776 20TN/GY 10 COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT X795 20DG 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 15 VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL X730 20GY/YL 16 MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) X712 20DB/RD 17 MICROPHONE IN (-) X792 20DB/YL 18 HANDS FREE MICROPHONE SHIELD X735 20BK/YL 19 - 20 MICROPHONE FEED X793 20TN/YL 21 SENSOR GROUND X835 20OR/GY 22 GROUND Z939 18BK Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9765 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9770 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9771 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9772 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9773 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 9774 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped metal inner left fender mounting flange within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9777 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting hole, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Removal Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the hood ajar switch striker (2) toward the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage it. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Switch SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left front fender inner shield, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (1) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (2). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9780 receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9781 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Installation Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) into the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the striker upward into the small end of the mounting hole in the inner hood panel reinforcement until it is fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Switch SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (1) near the mounting hole (2) in the left front fender inner shield. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9782 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Component ID: 380 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9787 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9788 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 11 Component ID: 381 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9789 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9790 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Sensor-Park Assist No. 9 Component ID: 383 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9791 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 Component ID: 380 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 10 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 10 SIGNAL D704 20WT/DB Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9794 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9795 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 11 Component ID: 381 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 11 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 11 SIGNAL D710 20WT/GY Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9796 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9797 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 8 Component ID: 382 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 8 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 8 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 8 SIGNAL D701 20WT/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9798 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Park Assist No. 9 Component ID: 383 Component : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Connector: Name : SENSOR-PARK ASSIST NO. 9 Color : # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PARK ASSIST) Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK ASSIST SENSOR SUPPLY X700 20GY/OR 2 PARK ASSIST SENSOR GROUND X750 20GY/LB 3 PARK ASSIST SENSOR NO. 9 SIGNAL D703 20WT/OR Component Location - 58 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Park Assist No. 10 > Page 9799 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the park assist system have four park assist sensors (1) installed on the rear bumper fascia. Only the membrane (3) of each sensor is visible through a hole in the outer vertical surface of the fascia. The remainder of each sensor including the sensor mounting bracket, the sensor spacer and the sensor wiring connection is concealed behind the fascia. A sensor wire harness behind the fascia connects the sensors to the vehicle electrical system. Each of the four sensors is identical in construction and is interchangeable. The electronic circuitry and a communication chip for each sensor is enclosed and protected within the molded black plastic sensor housing. The housing includes an integral connector receptacle (4) and two integral latch tabs (2). The sensor membrane extends from the surface of the sensor housing, and is finished to match or contrast with the outer surface of the fascia. A resilient O-ring spacer around the circumference of each of the four sensor membranes (2) isolates the membrane from the openings in the fascia (1). Each sensor is snapped into its own dedicated molded plastic mounting bracket. Each mounting bracket is heat-staked to the back side of the rear fascia. The park assist sensors cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged they must be replaced. The sensors and the spacers are each available for individual service replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9802 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park assist sensors are ultrasonic transceivers that are completely controlled by the park assist module. The sensors transmit and receive ultrasonic signals. The sensors each receive battery current and ground in parallel from the module, but are each connected to individual dedicated serial bus communication circuits to the module. Each sensor membrane is oscillated, then quieted by the module in a pulsing fashion. While the sensor membrane oscillates, it emits an ultrasonic signal. This signal will bounce or echo off of objects in the path of the vehicle. While quieted, each membrane receives the echoes of the ultrasonic signals it and the other sensors have transmitted. The sensors then communicate this echo data over the serial bus lines back to the module. The microprocessor in the module uses the intervals between the ultrasonic transmission and reception data from the sensors to calculate the distance to any obstacles identified by the ultrasonic echoes. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist sensors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist sensors or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The park assist sensors (3) and the sensor spacers (O-rings) are each available for separate service replacement. The sensor brackets (5) are bonded to and integral to the back side of the rear bumper fascia (2). 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. NOTE: The two outboard rear park assist sensors can be accessed for service with the rear bumper fascia installed on the vehicle. 2. For the two inboard rear park assist sensors only, remove the bumper fascia from the rear of the vehicle. 3. From the back of the fascia (2), disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the park assist sensor (3) connector receptacle. 4. Carefully pry the sensor bracket (5) latch features (1) away from the top and bottom latch tabs of the sensor far enough to disengage the sensor from the bracket. 5. Disengage the O-ring spacer from around the circumference of the sensor membrane protrusion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9805 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The park assist sensors (3) and the sensor spacers (O-rings) are each available for separate service replacement. The sensor brackets (5) are bonded to and integral to the back side of the rear bumper fascia (2). 1. Engage the O-ring spacer around the circumference of the sensor membrane protrusion. NOTE: Production and all service replacement O-ring spacers are tapered. The wide side (base) of the O-ring should be seated against the sensor housing and the narrow side should be oriented toward the outer surface of the sensor membrane and the rear fascia. 2. Align and insert the sensor (3) into the sensor bracket (5) on the back of the rear bumper fascia (2) until the bracket latch features (1) are fully engaged over the top and bottom latch tabs of the sensor. Be certain that the sensor membrane is flush with the outer surface of the fascia. NOTE: Be certain that each sensor membrane is properly centered in the openings of the rear fascia and that the O-ring spacers are not pinched. Improper centering or pinched O-rings can be detrimental to proper park assist sensor operation. 3. From the back of the fascia, reconnect the wire harness connector (4) to the sensor connector receptacle. 4. For the two inboard rear park assist sensors only, reinstall the bumper fascia onto the rear of the vehicle. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Sensor: Locations Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9809 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9810 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9811 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9815 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9816 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9817 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Remove the switch from the lower drivers side bezel by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9820 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (1) to the lower drivers side bezel by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (2) to the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 440 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9825 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9826 Remote Switch: Locations Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 441 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9827 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 440 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9830 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9831 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 441 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RADIO CONTROL MUX X20 22GY/WT 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 22VT/BR Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 9832 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches are mounted in the sides of the rear (instrument panel side) steering wheel trim cover. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player or CD player. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9835 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Instrument cluster through the clockspring. The instrument cluster sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the instrument cluster senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the radio. The electronic circuitry within the radio is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9836 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic Service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Remove the remote radio switch(es) (1) and (2) from the steering wheel. 2. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch test table. If the remote radio switch resistances are not as indicated, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver side airbag (5) from the steering wheel (1). 3. Remove the speed control switch (3) or (6) located on the same side of the steering wheel as the remote radio switch that is being serviced. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector from the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 5. Disengage the four remote radio switch latches that secure the switch to the inside of the mounting hole in the steering wheel rear trim cover. 6. From the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover, remove the remote radio switch (2) from the trim cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9839 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the remote radio switch to the mounting hole on the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover. Be certain that the connector receptacle is oriented toward the bottom of the switch and pointed toward the center of the steering wheel. 2. Press firmly and evenly on the remote radio switch until each of the switch latches is fully engaged in the mounting hole of the steering wheel rear trim cover. 3. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector to the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 4. Install the speed control switch onto the steering wheel. 5. Install the driver side airbag to the steering wheel. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front body mount bolt (1). 2. Remove the nuts (3) and remove the tow hook. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9845 Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the support brackets and install the bumper support nuts (3). 2. Tighten the nuts (3) to 109 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the front body mount bolt (1) and tighten to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the support bracket (2) nuts (3) and tighten to 109 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9849 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9850 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 168 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A400 12TN/RD 2 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 3 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 20WT/TN 4 GROUND Z910 12BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9851 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations Trailer Connector: Locations Component ID: 457 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : # of pins : 7 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 2 GROUND Z976 10BK 3 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 4 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 5 FUSED B(+) A100 18RD/VT 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD Component Location - 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 9855 Fig. 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9858 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9859 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9860 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9861 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9862 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9863 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9864 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9865 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9866 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9867 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9868 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9869 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9870 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9871 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9872 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9873 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9874 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9875 Trailer Connector: Connector Views Component ID: 457 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : # of pins : 7 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 2 GROUND Z976 10BK 3 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 4 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 5 FUSED B(+) A100 18RD/VT 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD Component Location - 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9876 Fig. 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9877 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-54-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9878 8w-54-03 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9879 8w-54-04 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Connector: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach behind the bracket (1) on the trailer hitch receiver to access and disconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness from the connector receptacle on the back of the trailer tow connector housing (2). 3. Reach behind the bracket (2) on the trailer hitch receiver to compress each of the two spring clips (1) on the trailer tow connector housing (3) far enough to push the housing out through the face of the bracket. 4. Remove the trailer tow connector from the bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9882 Trailer Connector: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the trailer tow connector (3) into the bracket (2) on the trailer hitch receiver with the 7-pin connector oriented toward the outboard side of the bracket. 2. Using hand pressure, press the connector firmly and evenly into the bracket until both spring clips (1) on the connector housing snap into place on the back side of the bracket. 3. Reach behind the bracket (1) to access and reconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness from to the connector receptacle on the back of the trailer tow connector housing (2). 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Remove the rear cab to frame bolts (3) and rebound cushions (2) to remove the front hitch bolt. 3. Support trailer hitch on a suitable lifting device. 4. Disconnect the trailer electrical wiring electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolts (3 and 5) and nuts (2) attaching trailer hitch (4) to frame rails (1). 6. Separate trailer hitch (4) from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9887 Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position trailer hitch on vehicle. 2. Install the bolts and nuts (2, 3 and 5) attaching trailer hitch to frame rail and tighten to 183 Nm (135 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the trailer wiring electrical connector. 4. Install the rear body rebound cushions (2) and cab mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the rear bumper. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9892 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9893 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9894 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9895 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9896 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9897 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9898 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9899 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9900 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9901 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9902 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9903 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9904 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9905 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9906 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9907 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9908 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a factory-installed trailer tow package include an electric trailer brake wiring provision that terminates at a connector located on top of the large body harness connection under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal, as well as an electric trailer brake pigtail harness and an instruction card (2) that are stored in the glove box (1) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9911 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION If an aftermarket electric brake controller is used, the electric brake pigtail harness supplied will make installation easier. The connection (blue 4-way connector) for the harness is located under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal on top of the large body harness connection. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The battery line of this harness may be used to charge the trailer battery. However, a battery isolation unit is not supplied and the trailer battery may discharge the truck battery when the engine is not running. The battery line is protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker. Refer to the owner's manual in the vehicle glove box for type, location, and ampere rating. The trailer tow connectors as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the connectors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 9917 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have two trailer tow relays, one for the trailer right turn and brake lamps and the other for the trailer left turn and brake lamps. The trailer tow relays are conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relays. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. Each relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The trailer tow relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. A trailer tow relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9920 Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The trailer tow relays are electromechanical switches that use a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to trailer brake and turn signal lamps. Within each relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the trailer tow relays include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a right or left trailer tow turn relay control circuit. The FCM controls trailer brake and turn lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the trailer lamps through a right or left trailer tow turn relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the right or left trailer brake and turn lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The trailer tow relays as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relays may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 9926 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations Trailer Connector: Locations Component ID: 457 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : # of pins : 7 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 2 GROUND Z976 10BK 3 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 4 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 5 FUSED B(+) A100 18RD/VT 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD Component Location - 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 9930 Fig. 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9933 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9934 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9935 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9936 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9937 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9938 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9939 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9940 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9941 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9942 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9943 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9944 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9945 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9946 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9947 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9948 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9949 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9950 Trailer Connector: Connector Views Component ID: 457 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : # of pins : 7 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 2 GROUND Z976 10BK 3 TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT B400 14DG 4 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 5 FUSED B(+) A100 18RD/VT 6 FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L76 20PK/RD 7 BACKUP LAMP FEED L1 18WT/RD Component Location - 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9951 Fig. 55 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9952 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-54-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9953 8w-54-03 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9954 8w-54-04 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Connector: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach behind the bracket (1) on the trailer hitch receiver to access and disconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness from the connector receptacle on the back of the trailer tow connector housing (2). 3. Reach behind the bracket (2) on the trailer hitch receiver to compress each of the two spring clips (1) on the trailer tow connector housing (3) far enough to push the housing out through the face of the bracket. 4. Remove the trailer tow connector from the bracket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9957 Trailer Connector: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the trailer tow connector (3) into the bracket (2) on the trailer hitch receiver with the 7-pin connector oriented toward the outboard side of the bracket. 2. Using hand pressure, press the connector firmly and evenly into the bracket until both spring clips (1) on the connector housing snap into place on the back side of the bracket. 3. Reach behind the bracket (1) to access and reconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness from to the connector receptacle on the back of the trailer tow connector housing (2). 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations Voice Activation Module: Locations Component ID: 175 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 2-3-4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) X722 20LB/TN 6-7-- 8 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (+) X716 20GY/TN 9 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (-) X776 20TN/GY 10 COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT X795 20DG 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 15 VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL X730 20GY/YL 16 MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) X712 20DB/RD 17 MICROPHONE IN (-) X792 20DB/YL 18 HANDS FREE MICROPHONE SHIELD X735 20BK/YL 19 - 20 MICROPHONE FEED X793 20TN/YL 21 SENSOR GROUND X835 20OR/GY 22 GROUND Z939 18BK Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9962 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9963 Voice Activation Module: Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : MODULE-HANDS FREE Connector: Name : MODULE-HANDS FREE Color : BLACK # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 2-3-4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 MICROPHONE 2 IN (+) X722 20LB/TN 6-7-- 8 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (+) X716 20GY/TN 9 CNV-HANDS FREE VOICE (-) X776 20TN/GY 10 COMMON AUDIO OUTPUT X795 20DG 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 15 VOICE RECOGNITION/PHONE SWITCH SIGNAL X730 20GY/YL 16 MICROPHONE 1 IN (+) X712 20DB/RD 17 MICROPHONE IN (-) X792 20DB/YL 18 HANDS FREE MICROPHONE SHIELD X735 20BK/YL 19 - 20 MICROPHONE FEED X793 20TN/YL 21 SENSOR GROUND X835 20OR/GY 22 GROUND Z939 18BK Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > Voice Activation Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 9964 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 9971 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 9972 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 9973 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 9974 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 9975 Body Control Module: Locations Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 9976 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Module-Door-Driver > Page 9977 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9980 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9981 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9982 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9983 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9984 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9985 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9986 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9987 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9988 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9989 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9990 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9991 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9992 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9993 Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9994 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9995 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9996 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9997 Body Control Module: Connector Views Module-Door-Driver Component ID: 170 Component : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 2 DRIVER WINDOW SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 3 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C910 20DB/GY 6 DRIVER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C110 20DB/LB 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z940 14BK/LG 9 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 10 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9998 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 18OR/LB 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR 5 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 9999 6 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 8 DRIVER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P73 20VT/RD 9-10 - 11 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 12 GROUND-DRIVER MODULE I.D. Z940 20BK/LG 13 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 14 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 15 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 16 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 17 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P669 20OR/LG 18 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P67 20TN/OR 19 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P65 20TN/VT 20 DRIVER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P69 20GY/DG Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-DRIVER C3 Color : # of pins : 12 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10000 Pin Description Circuit 1 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 2 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 3 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 4 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6-7-8 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 9-10 - 11 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL 12 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10001 Module-Door-Passenger Component ID: 171 Component : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C1 Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10002 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 4 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 5 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER RETURN C917 20DB/YL 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HEATER DRIVER C17 20LB/WT 7 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 8 GROUND Z944 14BK 9 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 10 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Connector: Name : MODULE-DOOR-PASSENGER C2 Color : # of pins : 20 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10003 Pin Description Circuit 1 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 2 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 3-4 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 5 RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 6 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P74 20TN/OR 7 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 8 PASSENGER MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P70 20LG/DB 9-10 - 11 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 12 - 13 - 14 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 15 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 16 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 17 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR SUPPLY P666 20LG/OR 18 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL POSITION SIGNAL P64 20TN 19 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL POSITION SIGNAL P68 20DG/RD 20 PASSENGER MIRROR SENSOR GROUND P66 20DG/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 10004 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Description and Operation Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION RUNNING BOARD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 10008 Running Board Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the grille. Refer to Grille. 2. Remove the headlamps. 3. Remove the wheel well screws (1) and (2). 4. Release the upper tabs (1) and remove the fascia. 5. Remove the screws (4) and remove the air dam (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10015 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the air dam (3) and install the screws (4). 2. Position fascia on bumper. 3. Seat the tabs (1) fully. 4. Install the screws (1) and (2) attaching the fascia to the bumper. 5. Install the headlamps. 6. Install the grille. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front fascia. 2. Remove the front bolts next to the fog lights. 3. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors, if equipped. 4. Release the tabs and remove the bumper. 5. Remove the fog lamps from the bumper as necessary. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10020 Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the fog lamps into the bumper, if necessary. 2. Position the bumper onto the bumper support and seat the tabs fully. 3. Connect the fog lamp electrical connectors, if equipped. 4. Install the front bolts next to the fog lamps. 5. Install the fascia. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia - Removal Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the screws (1) securing the fascia to the support brackets (2). 3. Remove the lower push pin fasteners (5). 4. Open the liftgate and remove the upper push pin fasteners (2). 5. Remove the fascia (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Bumper Fascia - Removal > Page 10026 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Rear Bumper Fascia - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the fascia (3) and install the push pin fasteners (2). 2. Install the lower push pin fasteners (5). 3. Install the screws (1) securing the fascia to the support brackets (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bracket-Rear Fascia Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Bracket-Rear Fascia Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the fascia. 2. Remove the bolts (1), (2) and (5) and remove the brackets (3) and (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brackets (3) and (4) and install the bolts (1), (2) and (5). 2. Install the fascia. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair PANEL-COWL TOP REMOVAL 1. Open the hood and remove the wiper arm nuts (3) and wiper arms (2). 2. Remove the two rear screws (1) and the five front screws (5). 3. Remove the cowl grille (4). INSTALLATION 1. Install the grille (4) and install the front and rear screws (1 & 5). 2. Install the wiper arms (2) and install the nuts (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Front Door Trim Panel. 2. Remove the bolt (3) and nut (2) and position aside the rear glass run channel (1). 3. Disconnect the links (1 & 3) from the latch (4). 4. Remove the nut (4), the handle (2) and disconnect the electrical connector (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10043 5. Separate the links (3 & 5) from the clips (1 & 4) and remove the lock cylinder (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10044 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the links (3 & 5) into the clips (1 & 4) and install the lock cylinder (2) into the exterior handle. 2. Connect the electrical connector (1), and position the handle (2) onto the door. 3. Install the nuts (4) and tighten to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the links (1 & 3) to the latch (4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10045 5. Position the rear glass run channel back and install the nut and bolt. 6. Tighten the fasteners to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 8. Adjust the latch as needed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Front Door Hinge: Customer Interest Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10054 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10055 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Front Door Hinge: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10061 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10062 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 10063 Front Door Hinge: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 10064 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 10065 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 10066 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 10067 CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door. 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the outline of the door hinges on A-pillar end to aid installation. 3. Remove the bolts (5) and remove the hinges (2 & 4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10070 Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If necessary, paint replacement door hinge before installation. 2. Position door hinge (2 & 4) on hinge pillar using alignment marks and install the bolts (5). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) using the sequence shown. NOTE: Right hand door shown, left hand door opposite. 4. Install the door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Latch: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Locate access hole (3) and remove the trim plug covering it. 2. Insert a 5/32-inch hex-wrench through hole and into adjustment screw. Loosen screw. 3. Operate outside handle several times to release any restriction because of misalignment. 4. Tighten adjustment screw to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). 5. Test handle for proper operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Front Door Panel. 2. Remove the bolt (3) and nut (2) and position aside the rear glass run channel (1). 3. Remove the latch screws (5). 4. Disconnect the actuator rods (3). 5. Disconnect the electrical connectors (6) and remove the latch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10076 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the latch into the door. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (6). 3. Connect the actuator rods (3). 4. Install the screws and tighten to 10 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Adjust the latch as needed. 6. Position the rear glass run channel back and install the nut and bolt. 7. Tighten the fasteners to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 8. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Panel-Trim Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screws (5 & 7). CAUTION: Trim panel is attached to the door using hooks molded into the panel. Do not pull the trim panel straight off or damage to the panel and/or power switch assembly may occur. 2. Lift the trim panel up off the lock rod (4) and attachment hooks and separate the panel from the door slightly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 4. Disconnect the inside handle actuator rod (3) and remove the trim panel (6). 5. Remove the switch panel (1) if necessary. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim > Page 10081 1. Install the switch assembly (1). 2. Position the trim panel (6) and connect the inside handle actuator rod (3). 3. Connect the electrical connectors (1). 4. Lift the trim panel up and onto the lock rod (4) and attachment hooks. 5. Install the screws (5 & 7). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim > Page 10082 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Watershield Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 1. Remove the speaker. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Separate the watershield (1) from the inner door panel (2) and off of the latch linkages. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim > Page 10083 1. Position the wire harness and actuator rods through the holes in the watershield. 2. Secure the watershield to the inner door panel. 3. Install the speaker. 4. Install the trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2) to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the striker bolts (1). 3. Change the striker position to adjust the rear gap and flush measurement. Refer to Body and Frame / Specifications. 4. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2). 2. Remove the bolts (1) and remove the striker. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10089 Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the striker and install the bolts. 2. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Adjust the striker if needed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove glass. 2. Pull the glass run weatherstrip and run channels from the window opening. 3. Pull the glass run weatherstrip from the run channels. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass run weatherstrip into the window opening and the run channels. 2. Install glass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run > Page 10095 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Belt Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove trim panel. 2. Peel seal from door pinch weld. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Slide seal into position on door. 2. Install the trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run > Page 10096 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Belt Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Insert special tool #9093 (2) between the outer belt molding (1) and glass at the rear. 2. Push down on outer belt molding (1) and rotate upper part of tool (2) outward from vehicle then lift up on molding (1) to disengage from locking tabs (3) working from back to front. NOTE: Typical outer belt molding design shown. 3. Slide molding out from under the side view mirror and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the outer belt molding onto the door and position forward under the side view mirror. Seat the molding fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Rear Door Panel. 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the regulator nuts (4). 3. Remove the nuts (4). 4. Secure the glass in the up position using a wood wedge or equivalent. 5. Remove the bolts (2) and loosen the remaining regulator bolts. 6. Separate the regulator (2) from the door panel (1) and disconnect the electrical connector (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10101 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the regulator (2) into the door (1) and connect the electrical connector (3). 2. Position the regulator bolts into the keyhole slots and slide into place. 3. Install the remaining regulator bolts (2). 4. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 5. Position the glass (1) onto the door regulator (3). 6. Install the nuts (4) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10102 7. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Rear Door Trim Panel. 2. Disconnect the link from the latch. 3. Remove the nut (4) and the handle (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10109 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the handle (1) into the door and install the nuts (4). 2. Tighten the nuts to 5 Nm (45 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the link. 4. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Rear Door Hinge: Customer Interest Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10118 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10119 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Rear Door Hinge: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10125 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 10126 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 10127 Rear Door Hinge: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 10128 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 10129 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 10130 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 10131 CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the door to replace the hinges if they are replaced one at a time. NOTE: The welded washers should not be separated from the hinge. If the washers are removed the door may have to be re-adjusted. NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Open the front door. UPPER HINGE 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the hinge on the door and B-pillar. 2. Remove the nuts (2) attaching the hinge to the door (3). 3. Remove the three bolts (6) attaching the hinge (1) to the B-pillar (2) and remove the hinge. LOWER HINGE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10134 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the hinge on the door and B-pillar. 2. Remove the lower B-pillar trim. 3. Remove the nuts (2) attaching the hinge to the door (3). 4. Remove the two bolts (5) attaching the hinge (4) to the B-pillar (2). 5. From the inside of the vehicle remove the remaining bolt (3) attaching the hinge (4) to the B-pillar (2) and remove the hinge. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10135 Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION UPPER HINGE NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Install the hinge to door washers, if there were removed previously, and nuts (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the three hinge to B-pillar bolts (6). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) using the sequence shown. NOTE: Right hand door shown, left hand door opposite. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10136 4. Adjust the door if needed. LOWER HINGE NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Install the hinge (4) and install the B-pillar bolts (5 & 3). 2. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) using the sequence shown. NOTE: Right hand door shown, left hand door opposite. 3. Install the hinge to door washers, if there were removed previously, and nuts (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Adjust the door if needed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10137 5. Install the lower B-pillar trim. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Rear Door Panel. 2. Disconnect the latch actuator rods (3 & 4). 3. Remove the screws (5) and remove the latch (1). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10142 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the latch (1) into the door and connect the electrical connector (2). 2. Install the latch and install the screws (5). 3. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the actuator rods (3 & 4). 5. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Panel-Trim Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screws (3 & 5). CAUTION: Trim panel is attached to the door using hooks molded into the panel. Do not pull the trim panel straight off or damage to the panel and/or power switch assembly may occur. 2. Lift the trim panel up off the lock rod (2) and attachment hooks and separate the panel from the door slightly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (6). 4. Disconnect the inside handle actuator rod (1). 5. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the tweeter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim > Page 10147 6. Remove the switch panel if necessary. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch assembly. 2. Install the tweeter and connect the electrical connector. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim > Page 10148 3. Position the trim panel (4) and connect the inside handle actuator rod (1). 4. Connect the electrical connectors (6). 5. Lift the trim panel up and onto the lock rod (2) and attachment hooks. 6. Install the screws (3 & 5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim > Page 10149 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Watershield Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 1. Remove the speaker. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Separate the watershield from the inner door panel and off of the latch linkages. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Panel-Trim > Page 10150 1. Position the wire harness and actuator rods through the holes in the watershield. 2. Secure the watershield to the inner door panel. 3. Install the speaker. 4. Install the trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Rear Door Striker: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2) to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the striker bolts (1). 3. Change the striker position to adjust the rear gap and flush measurement. 4. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2). 2. Remove the bolts (1) and remove the striker. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10156 Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the striker and install the bolts. 2. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Adjust the striker if needed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the glass run channels. Refer to Window Track. 2. Separate the quarter glass from the weatherstrip. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the quarter glass into the weatherstrip and rear run channel. 2. Install the run channels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run > Page 10162 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Belt Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel. 2. Pull weatherstrip from inner door panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position weatherstrip on inner door panel. 2. Press into place. 3. Install trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run > Page 10163 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Belt Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Insert special tool #9093 (2) between the outer belt molding (1) and glass at the rear. 2. Push down on outer belt molding (1) and rotate upper part of tool (2) outward from vehicle then lift up on molding (1) to disengage from locking tabs (3) working from back to front. NOTE: Typical outer belt molding design shown. 3. Slide molding out from under the side view mirror and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the outer belt molding onto the door and seat the molding fully starting at the back of the door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Rear Door Panel. 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the regulator nuts (4). 3. Remove the nuts (4). 4. Secure the glass in the up position using a wood wedge or equivalent. 5. Remove the bolts (2) and loosen the remaining regulator bolts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10168 6. Separate the regulator (3) from the door panel (1) and disconnect the electrical connector (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10169 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the regulator (3) into the door (1) and connect the electrical connector (2). 2. Position the regulator bolts into the keyhole slots and slide into place. 3. Install the remaining regulator bolts (2). 4. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10170 5. Position the glass (1) onto the door regulator (3). 6. Install the nuts (4) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 7. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the hood to replace one or both hinges. The hinges can be replaced one at a time. 1. Open hood and support the side that requires hinge replacement. 2. Remove the cowl grille. 3. Mark all bolt and hinge attachment locations using a grease pencil or equivalent, to provide reference marks for installation. 4. Remove the fender support bolt. 5. Remove the plastic rivets and remove the wheelhouse splash shield. Refer to Front Fender Liner. 6. Remove the nuts attaching the hinge to the hood. 7. From inside the fender, remove the two hinge bolts (1). 8. Slide the hinge (2) forward and remove from the fender rail. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10176 Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the hinge (2), slide back into position on the fender rail and align all marks. 2. From inside the fender, install the two hinge bolts (1). 3. Tighten the rear bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) 4. Tighten the front bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) 5. Install the nuts attaching the hinge to the hood and tighten the nuts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) 6. Install the fender support bolt and tighten to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 7. Install the cowl grille. 8. Install the wheelhouse splash shield and install the rivets. 9. Check hood fit and adjust if required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Adjustments Hood Latch: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 1. Check and adjust the hood if required. 2. Remove the push pin fasteners and remove the upper radiator shroud. 3. Loosen the hood latch bolts (3). 4. Move the latch to the correct location and lightly tighten the bolts. 5. Close the hood slowly and observe the latching operation. 6. If necessary, adjust the latch position and tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Latch Hood Latch: Service and Repair Latch Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the push pin fasteners and remove the upper radiator shroud. 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark latch position for installation alignment. 3. Remove bolts (3) attaching hood latch (4) to upper radiator crossmember (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Latch > Page 10182 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Latch > Page 10183 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Release-Hood Latch Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the grille. 2. Remove hood latch (4). 3. Remove the left headlamp unit. 4. Remove the plastic rivets and remove the left front wheelhouse splash shield. Refer to Front Fender Liner. 5. Detach the release cable and the retainer clips (2) in the engine compartment. 6. Separate the release cable grommet from the dash panel hole. 7. Detach the release cable and the retainer clips (4). 8. From the inside of the vehicle, remove the screws (5) attaching the hood release handle (2) to the bottom of the instrument panel (1). 9. Pull/route the hood release cable through the dash panel hole and remove it from the inside of the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Latch > Page 10184 NOTE: If replacement hood latch is also being installed, ensure that it is thoroughly lubricated. 1. From inside the vehicle, pull/route the hood release cable through the dash panel hole and into the engine compartment. 2. Install the hood release handle (2) and install the screws (5). 3. Install the cable grommet in the dash panel hole. 4. Attach the retainer clip (4) to the release cable and install. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Latch > Page 10185 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair RELEASE-HOOD LATCH REMOVAL 1. Remove the grille. 2. Remove hood latch (4). 3. Remove the left headlamp unit. 4. Remove the plastic rivets and remove the left front wheelhouse splash shield. 5. Detach the release cable and the retainer clips (2) in the engine compartment. 6. Separate the release cable grommet from the dash panel hole. 7. Detach the release cable and the retainer clips (4). 8. From the inside of the vehicle, remove the screws (5) attaching the hood release handle (2) to the bottom of the instrument panel (1). 9. Pull/route the hood release cable through the dash panel hole and remove it from the inside of the vehicle. INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacement hood latch is also being installed, ensure that it is thoroughly lubricated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10189 1. From inside the vehicle, pull/route the hood release cable through the dash panel hole and into the engine compartment. 2. Install the hood release handle (2) and install the screws (5). 3. Install the cable grommet in the dash panel hole. 4. Attach the retainer clip (4) to the release cable and install. 5. Attach the retainer clips (2) to the release cable and install them into the holes in the engine compartment. 6. Install hood latch. 7. Install the wheelhouse splash shield and install the rivets. 8. Install the left headlamp unit. 9. Install the grille. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10194 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10195 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10196 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10197 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 10198 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped metal inner left fender mounting flange within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10201 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting hole, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Removal Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the hood ajar switch striker (2) toward the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage it. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Switch SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left front fender inner shield, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (1) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (2). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10204 receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10205 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Installation Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) into the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the striker upward into the small end of the mounting hole in the inner hood panel reinforcement until it is fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Switch SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (1) near the mounting hole (2) in the left front fender inner shield. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10206 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Windshield removal shown, backlite similar. 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Remove liftgate trim panels. Refer to Trim Panel. 3. Remove the center stop light. 4. Remove rear window wiper arm, if equipped. 5. Disconnect the heated backlite electrical connectors, if equipped. 6. Using a windshield cut-out wire or other suitable tool, separate the adhesive. 7. Carefully remove backlite. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10212 Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Allow the urethane at least 24 hours to cure before returning the vehicle to use. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing backlite to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. NOTE: The backlite fence should be cleaned of most of its old urethane bonding material. A small amount of old urethane, approximately 1-2 mm in height, should remain on the fence. Do not grind off or completely remove all old urethane from the fence, the paint finish and bonding strength will be adversely affected. Support spacers should be replaced with new parts. Replace any missing or damaged spacers around the perimeter of the liftgate opening. Glass Preparation - Installing A Previously Installed Backlite 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Level old bead of backlite adhesive (3) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. 3. Apply four new spacers (1) to the liftgate frame and place them 55 mm in from the window opening; 70 mm from the upper edge and 150 mm from the lower edge. 4. Install the lower spacers (2) to the backlite approximately 36 cm (1.0 in) from each side of the glass. NOTE: Remove the lower spacers 2 hours after installation of the glass. 5. Position backlite in center of liftgate opening and resting on the side and lower spacers. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10213 6. Apply adhesive tape strips (1) around the perimeter of the liftgate opening to aid in installation. NOTE: Windshield installation shown, backlite similar. 7. Verify the backlite gap is parallel to with the liftgate opening. 8. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove backlite. NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 9. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 10. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. 11. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 12. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 13. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10214 14. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Glass Preparation - Installing A New Backlite 1. Apply four new spacers (1) to the liftgate frame and place them 55 mm in from the window opening; 70 mm from the upper edge and 150 mm from the lower edge. 2. Install the lower spacers (2) to the backlite approximately 36 cm (1.0 in) from each side of the glass. NOTE: Remove the lower spacers 2 hours after installation of the glass. 3. Position backlite in center of liftgate opening and resting on the side and lower spacers. 4. Apply adhesive tape strips (1) around the perimeter of the liftgate opening to aid in installation. NOTE: Windshield installation shown, backlite similar. 5. Verify the backlite gap is parallel to with the liftgate opening. 6. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove backlite. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10215 NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 7. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 8. Apply primer to gluing surface at backlite seal. 9. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 10. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. 11. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Liftgate Opening Preparation NOTE: Windshield opening shown, liftgate opening similar. 1. Clean and vacuum liftgate opening. 2. Level old bead of liftgate opening adhesive (1) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10216 NOTE: Windshield opening shown, liftgate opening similar. 3. Clean and dry area of liftgate opening to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 4. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 5. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Backlite Installation 1. Apply bead of adhesive (1) with a triangular nozzle directly to the backlite seal starting at bottom in center of the backlite. CAUTION: Always apply bead of adhesive to the backlite. Always install the backlite within 5 minutes after applying adhesive. 2. Bead dimensions should be approximately 9.5 mm wide (1) by 12.7 mm in height (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10217 3. Allow end of adhesive bead (1) to run out parallel to the start of the bead and smooth ends flush. 4. Lift backlite into place in the center of the liftgate opening and use the tape as a guide to aid installation of the backlite into the center of the cutout. 5. Carefully lay down the backlite and press on. CAUTION: It is no longer possible to move the backlite after installation. The backlite should never be pressed into place by more than one person, because the backlite can break if pressed simultaneously on both sides. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing backlite to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. 6. Install the rear wiper arm, if equipped. 7. Install the liftgate trim panels. 8. Install the center stop light. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations Component ID: 180 Component : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 2 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 3-4 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 5 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 6 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 7 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10221 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C2 Color : # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 5 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10222 6 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 7 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL 8-9-10 - 11 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 12 - 13 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 14 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN 15 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 19 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG 20 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 21 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 22 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY Component Location - 44 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C3 Color : # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10223 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z125 12BK/OR 2 FUSED B(+) A115 12YL/RD Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10224 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 180 Component : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 2 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 3-4 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 5 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 6 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 7 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10225 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C2 Color : # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 5 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10226 6 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 7 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL 8-9-10 - 11 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 12 - 13 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 14 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN 15 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 19 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG 20 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 21 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 22 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY Component Location - 44 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C3 Color : # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10227 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z125 12BK/OR 2 FUSED B(+) A115 12YL/RD Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate system utilize a power liftgate control module (4). This module is located on the left side of the vehicle behind the C-pillar below the quarter glass The power liftgate control module receives and monitors logic inputs from all the power liftgate system switches. This module also contains the software technology to detect liftgate obstructions and stop or reverse the door accordingly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10230 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power liftgate control module contains the electronic circuitry and software used to control the sequence of events for the power liftgate system. This module communicates on the Controller Area Network (CAN) to monitor many different inputs and outputs such as door lock status, transmission gear selector position and vehicle speed. The power liftgate open/close command can be initiated by either one press of the power liftgate overhead console switch or two presses of the key fob power liftgate switch. The overhead switch is hardwired to the power liftgate control module. The key fob, sends a signal out on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. This signal is detected at the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met before applying power to the power liftgate drive unit to start a power cycle. During a power liftgate open or close cycle, if the power liftgate control module detects sufficient resistance to liftgate travel, such as an obstruction in the liftgate's path. The control module will immediately stop liftgate movement and reverse the direction of travel to the full open or closed position. The power liftgate control module has the ability to relearn. After 8 miles have been recorded on the odometer, anytime the liftgate is fully opened and fully closed using the automatic system, the module will learn from its cycle. If a replacement power liftgate component is installed or a liftgate adjustment is made, the module will relearn the effort and time required to open or close the liftgate. This learn cycle can be performed with a Diagnostic Scan Tool or with a complete cycle of the liftgate, using either one of the command switches. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10231 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Testing and Inspection POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL MODULE Any diagnosis of the Power Liftgate System should begin with the use of a diagnostic scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures Information. Inspect the related wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information. Before any testing of the power liftgate system is attempted, the battery should be fully-charged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the left quarter trim panel from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connectors (2) from the power liftgate control module (4). 4. Using molding remover C-4829-A gently pry the clip (1) out of the retaining hole holding the power liftgate control module (4) to the quarter panel. 5. Tilt the top of the module (4) away from the quarter panel and lift upward to disengage the mounting tab from the locating slot (3). 6. Remove the power liftgate control module (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10234 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power liftgate control module (4) into the vehicle. 2. Insert the mounting tab into the locating slot (3) on the quarter panel. 3. Tilt the top of the module (4) toward the quarter panel and firmly press the clip (1) into the retaining hole on the quarter panel. 4. Connect the wire harness connectors (2) to the power liftgate control module (4). 5. Install the left quarter trim panel. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 8. Perform the power liftgate learn cycle. 9. Verify power liftgate system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Component ID: 370 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 10239 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 10240 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Sensor-Liftgate Pinch-Left Component ID: 371 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 10241 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Component ID: 370 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 10244 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 10245 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Liftgate Pinch-Left Component ID: 371 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 10246 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Pinch sensors (2) are located on each side of the liftgate (1). These sensors look like weather-strips, however they consist of pieces of electrically conductive rubber (tapeswitch), wires, resistor, double sided tape, and a plastic carrier. They are used to indicate an obstruction during a power liftgate close cycle. The right side pinch sensor contains a thermistor that is integral to the pinch sensor assembly. The thermistor is a temperature sensor used by the power liftgate control module to enable proper liftgate operation in extreme climate conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10249 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION During a power liftgate "close" cycle, if either of the two conductive rubber strips (tapeswitch) of the pinch sensor come in contact with an obstacle, the pinch sensor circuit is completed. This tells the power liftgate control module that a obstruction is felt. The control module will stop the liftgate immediately and return it to the full open position. The thermistor portion of the right pinch sensor provides the temperature signal to the power liftgate control module (temperature is provided when the pinch sensor is in an unpinched condition; when pinched, temperature is unavailable because the thermistor is shorted). As the outside temperature increases, the resistance reading decreases. As temperature decreases, the resistance reading increases. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10250 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Testing and Inspection RIGHT PINCH SENSOR/THERMISTOR The thermistor portion of the right pinch sensor provides the temperature signal to the power liftgate control module (temperature is provided when the pinch sensor is in an unpinched condition; when pinched, temperature is unavailable because the thermistor is shorted). Refer to the RIGHT PINCH SENSOR/THERMISTOR DIAGNOSTIC TABLE to test the thermistor resistance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove trim panel from liftgate. 3. Disconnect the pinch sensor wire harness connector (4). 4. Remove the clips/assembly holding the pinch sensor (2) to liftgate (1). 5. Feed the pinch sensor wire harness (5) out of the liftgate (1) and remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10253 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Use extreme caution when testing pinch sensor operation. 1. Route the pinch sensor wire harness (5) through the hole in the liftgate (1). Push the wire harness grommet into place until fully seated. 2. Position the pinch sensor (2) to the liftgate (1) and align the holes to the fastening clips. 3. Install the four clips holding the sensor to the liftgate. 4. Connect the pinch sensor wire harness connector (4). 5. Install the trim panel on the liftgate. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes related to the pinch sensor. 8. Verify power liftgate system and pinch sensor operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, during the final close cycle press the pinch sensor to verify the power liftgate detects an obstruction and returns to the full open position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Tone Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Tone Speaker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Using a trim stick C-4829-A or equivalent, separate the pushpin fasteners and remove the upper trim panel (2). 4. Disconnect the chime electrical connector (2). 5. Unsnap the chime (3) from the liftgate (1) and remove from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Tone Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10258 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Tone Speaker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Snap the chime assembly (3) onto the liftgate (1). 2. Connect the wire connector (2). 3. Position the upper trim (2) into place and seat the push pin fasteners fully. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Customer Interest Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 10267 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 10273 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk / Liftgate Hinge: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the liftgate to replace one or both hinges. The hinges can be replaced one at a time. NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Support liftgate on a suitable lifting device. 2. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, remove the upper rear headliner trim. 3. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the hinge to aid installation. 4. Remove the liftgate bolts (2). 5. Remove the body bolts (1) and remove the hinge. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10278 Trunk / Liftgate Hinge: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. If necessary, paint replacement hinge before installation. 2. Install the hinge (2) and install the body bolts (1). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the liftgate bolts (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 5. Adjust liftgate if necessary. 6. Position the upper rear headliner trim and seat fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the trim panels. Refer to Trim Panel. 2. Disconnect the latch actuator rod (2). 3. Remove the screws (2 & 3) and remove the handle. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10283 Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the electrical connector (1) and install the handle (4). 2. Install the screws (2 & 3). 3. Connect the latch actuator rod (2) to the handle (1). 4. Install the trim panels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair PANEL-TRIM REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4829-A or equivalent, separate the pushpin fasteners and remove the upper trim panel (2). 2. Remove the two upper screws (3) and the four lower screws (5). 3. Remove the lower trim panel (4) and disconnect the electrical connector. INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10287 1. Connect the electrical connector and install the lower trim panel (4) onto the guide pins (2). 2. Install the four lower screws (5) and two upper screws (3). 3. Position the upper trim (2) into place and seat the push pin fasteners fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate, utilize a power cinch/release latch. This power liftgate latch performs the same function as a manual liftgate latch as well as the power cinch/release capability. The power cinch/release latch function is made possible by a latch actuator attached to the top of the liftgate latch assembly. This latch actuator contains a small drive gear that meshes with the latch assemblies internal gears to perform the power cinch/release function. The latch actuator is controlled by the power liftgate control module, which controls the cinch function and limits actuator current draw to protect the assembly. The latch is located in the lower center of the liftgate assembly and contains integral switches. These switches include, liftgate ajar, secondary, pawl, sector and power liftgate exterior handle. The power latch cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged or inoperative must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10292 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Power latch "Cinching" will become disabled if the pinch sensors are inoperable or damaged. Operating on hardwired inputs from the power liftgate control module, the power liftgate latch mounted actuator (cinch/release motor) provides the torque required to close the liftgate from the secondary to the primary closed and latched position. The actuator also releases the liftgate from the primary closed and latched position to the fully unlatched and movable position. Following every cinch or release sequence, the power liftgate latch will return to a "home" or neutral position. If for some reason the latch is unable to return to the "home" position, the power liftgate control module will recognize this and prevent the latch from releasing. If this condition exists, activation of the power liftgate feature or exterior handle will result in a short beep from the power liftgate chime. In this situation, perform the Power Liftgate Latch Homing Procedure. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Latch Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Power Liftgate Latch Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove liftgate trim panels. 2. Disconnect the exterior handle actuator rod (2) from the latch assembly (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (1). 4. Remove the screws (3) and remove the latch (2). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Latch > Page 10295 1. Position the latch (2) into the liftgate and install the screws (3). 2. Tighten the screws to 11 Nm (95 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the electrical connector (1). Connect the latch actuator rod (2) to the exterior handle (1) and the latch (4). 4. Install the trim panels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Latch > Page 10296 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Latch Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove liftgate trim panels. Refer to Trim Panels. 2. Disconnect the exterior handle actuator rod (2). 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 4. Remove the screws (3) and remove the latch (2). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Latch > Page 10297 1. Position the latch (2) into the liftgate and install the screws (3). 2. Tighten the screws to 11 Nm (95 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the electrical connectors (1). Connect the latch actuator rod (2) to the exterior handle (1) and the latch (4). 4. Install the trim panels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Locations Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Locations Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 2 GROUND Z918 20BK 3 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 4 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 5-6 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 7 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 8 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 9 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 10 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10301 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10302 Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-POWER LIFTGATE DRIVE UNIT Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 2 GROUND Z918 20BK 3 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 4 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 5-6 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 7 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 8 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 9 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 10 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10303 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Link Rod Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Description and Operation Link Rod Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: Never attempt to operate the power liftgate system when the link rod is removed or disconnected. Damage to the power liftgate system will result. Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate utilize a link rod (1) assembly. This link rod is located in the left rear of the vehicle and is visible without removing the D-pillar trim. The link rod attaches to the liftgate pivot bracket (2) at one end and the power liftgate drive unit assembly at the other. The link rod consists of a steel shaft, equipped with two spherical rod end receptacles at each end. The weight of the liftgate is not supported by the link rod, the liftgate prop rods are designed to support the liftgate. The link rod cannot be adjusted or repaired and if inoperative, must be replaced. Operation OPERATION One end of the link rod assembly is attached to the liftgate pivot bracket, the other end is attached to the power liftgate drive unit. When the drive unit is driven by the liftgate motor assembly the liftgate is moved to the open or closed position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Link Rod > Page 10306 Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Description and Operation Power Liftgate Drive Unit Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate system, utilize a power liftgate drive unit (3). The drive unit assembly consists of a DC motor, gear position sensor, clutch, full-open switch, housing/bracket assembly and wire harness. The clutch and motor portion of the assembly provides the power and torque required to open or close the liftgate (5) under most conditions. The Hall Effect position sensor is used to provide the liftgate control module with a clutch/motor speed signal. This speed signal is used to monitor any resistance of liftgate travel and allows the liftgate control module to detect obstructions and control the liftgate accordingly. The clutch assembly is used to allow automatic power open/close mode and full manual operation, if desired. The full-open switch is used to let the liftgate control module know when the liftgate is approaching the full open position. The drive unit (3) is secured to the D-pillar (1) with three retaining bolts (4). The drive unit (3) is connected the liftgate (5) with the link rod (6). The drive unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged or inoperative must be replaced. Operation OPERATION LIFTGATE IS CLOSED The power liftgate open command can be initiated by either one press of the power liftgate overhead console switch or two presses of the key fob power liftgate button. The overhead console switch is hardwired to the power liftgate control module, where as the key fob signal is sent out on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. This signal is detected by the power liftgate control module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met. The control module will then signal the liftgate mounted latch assembly to release the liftgate from its primary closed and latched position to the ajar and movable position. The power liftgate drive unit then takes over to move the liftgate into the full open position. LIFTGATE IS OPEN The power liftgate close command can be initiated by either one press of the power liftgate overhead console switch or two presses of the key fob power liftgate button. The overhead console switch is hardwired to the power liftgate control module, where as the key fob signal is sent out on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. This signal is detected by the power liftgate control module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met. The control module will then signal the power liftgate drive unit to move the liftgate into the closed position. Once the liftgate mounted latch reaches the body mounted striker assembly, the power latch takes over to cinch the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position. If a obstacle is encountered during a power open or close cycle, the power liftgate control module will automatically reverse direction of the liftgate to prevent vehicle damage or personal injury. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Drive Unit Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Service and Repair Power Liftgate Drive Unit Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Remove the link rod assembly (6) from the liftgate attachment point (7). 4. Remove the left rear D-pillar (1) trim panel from the vehicle. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the power liftgate drive unit assembly (3). 6. Remove the drive unit assembly retaining bolts (4). 7. Unhook the drive unit assembly (3) from the D-pillar (1) and remove the unit from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the power liftgate drive unit assembly (3) onto the D-pillar (1). 2. Install the drive unit retaining bolts (4). Torque the bolts to 39 Nm (28.5 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Drive Unit > Page 10309 3. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to drive unit assembly (3). 4. Install the link rod assembly (6) onto the drive unit attachment point. 5. Install the left rear D-pillar (1) trim panel on the vehicle. 6. Install the link rod assembly (6) onto the liftgate attachment point (7). 7. Connect the battery negative cable. 8. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 9. Perform the power liftgate learn cycle. 10. Verify power liftgate system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Drive Unit > Page 10310 Trunk / Liftgate Motor: Service and Repair Link Rod Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Using an appropriate flat-bladed tool, pry the plastic retainer (1) up to release the locking mechanism from the mounting sphere (2). Do not try to remove the retainer, it is not designed to be removed. 3. Remove the link rod (1) from the liftgate pivot bracket (2) by gently pulling the link rod away from the liftgate. 4. Remove the D-pillar trim from the vehicle. 5. Remove the link rod from the drive unit mounting sphere by gently pulling the link rod away from the drive unit. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Liftgate Drive Unit > Page 10311 1. Install the drive unit end of the link rod (1) onto the mounting sphere by gently pushing straight on. 2. Install the liftgate end of the link rod (1) onto the liftgate (3) pivot bracket (2) by gently pushing straight on. 3. Push the plastic retainer (1) down to lock the link rod mounting sphere (2) into position for both ends of the link rod. 4. Install the D-pillar trim on the vehicle. 5. Perform the power liftgate learn cycle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Do not remove the liftgate support rods with the liftgate closed. The support rod pistons are operated by high pressure gas and could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage if they are removed with the pistons compressed (liftgate closed). Once removed, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the support rods. 1. Open the liftgate and support. 2. Using a small flat bladed tool (3), or equivalent, release the retaining clips (2) while pulling the ball socket (1) away from the ball stud (4). NOTE: Lift the clips (1) only enough to release the ball studs (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10316 3. Remove the support cylinder (2) from the upper (1) and lower (3) ball studs. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10317 Trunk / Liftgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Do not remove the liftgate support rods with the liftgate closed. The support rod pistons are operated by high pressure gas and could cause personal injury and/or vehicle damage if they are removed with the pistons compressed (liftgate closed). Once removed, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the support rods. 1. Make sure the retaining clips (1) are seated into the ball socket (2) fully. 2. Install the support cylinder (2) over the ball studs (1 & 3) with the thin end connected to the body and the retaining clips snapping into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Adjustments Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2) to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the striker bolts (1). 3. Change the striker position to adjust the lower liftgate gap and flush measurement. Refer to Body and Frame / Specifications. 4. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the load floor, remove the scuff plate screws and remove liftgate trim scuff plate. 2. Remove screws attaching liftgate striker to floor pan (1) and remove the striker. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10323 Trunk / Liftgate Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the striker (2) and install the bolts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Adjust the striker if needed. 4. Install the liftgate trim scuff plate and install the screws. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Overhead Console Liftgate Switch Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Description and Operation Overhead Console Liftgate Switch Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The overhead console shown contains a combination power liftgate/power sunroof switch. Vehicles equipped with the power liftgate and no sunroof contain a single power liftgate switch only. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with both a power sunroof and power liftgate the overhead console switches are serviced together as one assembly. NOTE: Durango overhead console with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) shown. Aspen overhead console similar. The power liftgate switch (3) is mounted in the overhead console assembly (1) between the reading lamps (2). The switch is snapped into mounting slots in the overhead console assembly. The momentary, push button-type power liftgate switch, provides a hardwired signal to the Power Liftgate Control Module. If the switch is inoperative or damaged the power liftgate/power sunroof switch assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Battery voltage is supplied to the power liftgate system through a fuse, located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) assembly. When the power liftgate switch is pushed, a hardwired signal is sent to the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met before applying power to the power liftgate drive unit to start a power cycle. During a power liftgate open or close cycle, if the power liftgate control module detects sufficient resistance to liftgate travel, such as an obstruction in the liftgate's path. The control module will immediately stop liftgate movement and reverse the direction of travel to the full open or closed position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Overhead Console Liftgate Switch > Page 10328 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Description and Operation Exterior Handle Switch Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with a power liftgate exterior handle switch. The switch is integral to the power liftgate latch assembly. It is activated by the exterior handle, located in the license plate light bar, through a mechanical link rod attaching the two together. The power liftgate exterior handle switch is primarily used for manual opening of the liftgate. Activation of the switch during a automatic power "close" cycle will cause the liftgate to reverse direction. Activation of the switch during a power "open" cycle will cause the power liftgate to disengage, allowing full manual operation. The exterior handle cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged it must be replaced. The power liftgate exterior handle switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged or inoperative the complete power liftgate latch assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION When the exterior liftgate handle is pulled, a mechanical linkage inside the liftgate depresses the power liftgate exterior handle switch in the power liftgate latch assembly. A hard-wired signal is then detected by the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then looks at the vehicle lock status on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the vehicle is not locked and the operating conditions are met, the power liftgate control module then applies power to the latch mounted motor, which moves the liftgate from the primary closed and latched position to the open and movable position. If the liftgate is not pulled open within seven seconds, once the latch releases, the latch will automatically cinch closed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10329 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection OVERHEAD CONSOLE LIFTGATE SWITCH Diagnostic resistors are present inside the overhead console liftgate switch. These resistors are used by the power liftgate control module to determine if the switch is stuck, disconnected, shorted or otherwise damaged. Refer to the OVERHEAD CONSOLE LIFTGATE SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TABLE to test the switch resistance. NOTE: Test table readings are ±2%. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL DURANGO 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console assembly (3). 3. Using trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, pry the back edge of the power liftgate switch (1) up until the two retaining tabs (2) are fully released. 4. Tilt the power liftgate switch (1) up away from the overhead console assembly (3) until the mounting tab on the opposite side of the switch releases. 5. Remove the switch from the vehicle. ASPEN 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console assembly (3). 3. Using trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, pry the side edges (4) of the overhead console assembly out until the two retaining tabs on the power liftgate switch (5) are fully released. 4. Push the switch (5) out through the back of the overhead console (3). 5. Remove the switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10332 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION DURANGO 1. Position the power liftgate switch into the overhead console assembly so that the large retaining tab (2) is aligned with the large slot between the reading lamps. 2. Gently press the power liftgate switch (1) into the overhead console assembly (3) until the two small mounting tabs (2) have snapped securely into place. 3. Install the overhead console assembly (3). 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 6. Verify power liftgate system operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, this will allow the power liftgate control module to relearn its cycle with the new components. ASPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10333 1. Position the power liftgate switch (5) into the overhead console assembly (3). 2. Gently press the power liftgate switch (5) into the overhead console assembly (3) until the mounting tabs have snapped securely into place (4). 3. Install the overhead console assembly (3). 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 6. Verify power liftgate system operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, this will allow the power liftgate control module to relearn its cycle with the new components. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Emblem: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Exterior nameplates are attached to body panels with adhesive tape. 1. Apply a length of masking tape on the body, parallel to the top edge of the nameplate to use as a guide, if necessary. 2. If temperature is below 21°C (70°F) warm emblem with a heat lamp or gun. Do not exceed 52°C (120°F) when heating emblem. 3. Insert a plastic trim stick or a hard wood wedge behind the emblem to separate the adhesive backing from the body. 4. Clean adhesive residue from body with MOPAR(R) Super Kleen solvent or equivalent. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10339 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove carrier from adhesive tape on back of emblem. 2. Position emblem properly on body. 3. Press emblem firmly to body with palm of hand. 4. If temperature is below 21°C (70°F) warm emblem with a heat lamp or gun to assure adhesion. Do not exceed 52°C (120°F) when heating emblem. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair PANEL-COWL TOP REMOVAL 1. Open the hood and remove the wiper arm nuts (3) and wiper arms (2). 2. Remove the two rear screws (1) and the five front screws (5). 3. Remove the cowl grille (4). INSTALLATION 1. Install the grille (4) and install the front and rear screws (1 & 5). 2. Install the wiper arms (2) and install the nuts (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Apply a length of masking tape on the body, parallel to the top edge of the molding to use as a guide, if necessary. 2. Warm the affected adhesive type molding and body metal to approximately 38°C (100°F) using a suitable heat lamp or heat gun. 3. Pull stick-on molding from painted surface. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10347 Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean body surface with MOPAR(R) Super Kleen solvent or equivalent. Wipe surface dry with lint free cloth. 2. Remove protective cover from tape on back of molding. Apply molding to body below the masking tape guide. 3. Remove masking tape guide and firmly press molding to body surface to assure adhesion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Rear Fender > Rear Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Quarter-Panel-Liner Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-001-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle / coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 10366 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-002-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle I coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 10371 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH Body / Frame Mount Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-001-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle / coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-001-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Axle Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 10377 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH Body / Frame Mount Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH NUMBER: 03-002-08 GROUP: Axle DATE: March 14, 2008 SUBJECT: Rear Axle Whine-Like Sound - Only At Vehicle Speeds Greater Than 55 MPH OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the installation of a body/frame damper at the C-Pillar. MODELS: 2004-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen SYMPTOM/CONDITION: While driving, the customer may experience an axle whine-like sound coming from the rear of the vehicle (rear axle). The specific axle whine-like sound will occur when the rear axle is fully warm and only at vehicle speeds that are greater than 88 Km/h (55 MPH). The rear axle whine-like sound will occur more frequently during light acceleration (drive side), or while maintaining vehicle speed (off throttle I coast) driving maneuvers. This condition may be due to the axle sound being transmitted into the vehicle body through the C-Pillar body/frame mount. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present perform the Repair Procedure. NOTE: The Repair Procedure will REDUCE the axle whine-like sound intensity, and only if the condition occurs when the axle is fully warm and at speeds GREATER THAN 88 km/h (55 MPH). PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable lift. 2. In front of the left rear wheel, locate the left side C-Pillar body mount consisting of: the upper body-to-frame isolator and the lower rebound isolator. 3. Leaving the original upper and lower C-Pillar body mount isolators in place (these isolators will not be replaced), remove and discard the C-Pillar body mount isolator fastener (bolt). 4. With the original lower rebound isolator held in its correct position on the vehicle, install the new damper parts in the following order: a. Place the two spacers (washers) against the lower side of the lower rebound isolator. b. Place the mass damper (oriented correctly) against the spacers. The recessed side of the donut shaped damper will face towards the ground and towards the head of new fastener (bolt head). c. Place the new longer fastener (bolt) through the mass damper, both spacers, lower rebound isolator, vehicle frame, upper body-to-frame isolator, and into the body. 5. Verify at all components are installed correctly. If installed correctly the new mount component order should be from top to bottom: the vehicle Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Body / Frame Mount Bushing: > 03-002-08 > Mar > 08 > Drivetrain - Rear Differential Whine at 55 Plus MPH > Page 10382 body, body-to-frame isolator, vehicle frame, lower rebound isolator, two new spacers, the new mass damper (oriented correctly with recessed side towards the ground), and the new fastener (bolt). 6. Tighten the new left side C-Pillar body mount fastener to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 7. Perform the above procedure to the right side C-Pillar body mount. 8. Lower vehicle. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Isolator - Removal Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Body Isolator - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove all cab to frame mounting bolts (3) and rebound cushions (2). 2. Remove the front end sheet metal mounting bolt (2). 3. Using a floor jack and block of wood under the cab sill, lift the body to gain access to the isolators. 4. Remove the cab isolators (1) and the front end sheet metal mounting isolator (3). 5. Install new isolators and repeat Steps 1 through 4, for the opposite side. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Body Isolator - Removal > Page 10385 Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Body Isolator - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever a body isolator bolt requires servicing or tightening, it is necessary to remove the bolt and install new thread locker compound to the threads. 1. Install the isolators (1) rebound cushions (2), and bolts (3). 2. Install the front end sheet metal mounting isolators 1 and 3 and install the bolt (2). 3. Tighten the bolts to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Front Cross-Member > System Information > Service and Repair Front Cross-Member: Service and Repair CROSSMEMBER-UNDERBODY REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts (1) and nuts (3) and remove the crossmember (2). INSTALLATION 1. Install the crossmember (2). 2. Install the bolts (1) and nuts (3). 3. Tighten the bolts and nuts to 102 N.m (75 ft.lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Skid Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Skid Plate: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Support the skid plate with a suitable lifting device. 3. Remove inboard bolts (4). 4. Remove bolts (3) that attach skid plate to frame side rail and remove the skid plate. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Skid Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10394 Skid Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position and support skid plate under fuel tank. 2. Install inboard bolts and tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Install bolts attaching skid plate to frame side rail and tighten to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear bumper. 2. Remove the rear cab to frame bolts (3) and rebound cushions (2) to remove the front hitch bolt. 3. Support trailer hitch on a suitable lifting device. 4. Disconnect the trailer electrical wiring electrical connector. 5. Remove the bolts (3 and 5) and nuts (2) attaching trailer hitch (4) to frame rails (1). 6. Separate trailer hitch (4) from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10399 Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position trailer hitch on vehicle. 2. Install the bolts and nuts (2, 3 and 5) attaching trailer hitch to frame rail and tighten to 183 Nm (135 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the trailer wiring electrical connector. 4. Install the rear body rebound cushions (2) and cab mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the rear bumper. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 10405 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Grille: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Durango 1. Remove the push pin fasteners and remove the upper radiator shroud. 2. Remove the upper screws (1) and separate the four side clips. 3. From underneath, remove the push pins (3) and remove the grille. Aspen 1. Remove the push pin fasteners and remove the upper radiator shroud. 2. Remove the four upper screws (1). 3. From underneath, remove the four screws (2) and remove the grille. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10410 Grille: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Durango CAUTION: Do not use a hammer or mallet to install the upper radiator shroud push pins, due to potential damage to the grille. 1. Install the grille (2) and seat the side clips fully. 2. From underneath install the push pin fasteners (3). 3. Install the upper screws (1) and tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the upper radiator shroud and install the push pin fasteners. Aspen CAUTION: Do not use a hammer or mallet to install the upper radiator shroud push pins, due to potential damage to the grille. 1. Install the grille (3). 2. From underneath install the four screws (2) and tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.).. 3. Install the upper four screws (1) and tighten to 13 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the upper radiator shroud and install the push pin fasteners. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Carpet: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front seats. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, remove the door sill scuff plates. Refer to Trim Panel. 4. Remove the cowl trim panels. Refer to Trim Panel. 5. Fold the second row seats forward and remove the right and left side bolts (1 & 2). 6. Remove the second row seat assembly. 7. Remove the third row seat assembly, if equipped. 8. Remove the bolts (1 & 2) and remove storage bin, if equipped. 9. Remove the carpet from under the side trim panels. 10. Remove the carpet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10416 Carpet: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the carpet in vehicle and tuck up under the side trim panels. 2. Install the third row seat assembly, if equipped. 3. Install the storage bin, if equipped, and screws and tighten the rear screws to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 4. Install the second row seat assembly and install the bolts (1 & 2). 5. Tighten the front bolts (2) to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten the rear bolts (1) to 47 Nm (35 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the cowl trim panels. 8. Position the door sill scuff plates and seat the clips fully. 9. Install the floor console. 10. Install the front seats. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console Bracket Console: Service and Repair Overhead Console Bracket Removal OVERHEAD CONSOLE BRACKET 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the overhead console bracket. 3. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the front of the overhead console bracket (2) to the roof front header. 4. Remove the overhead console bracket (2) from the headliner (1) by moving it back and forth to free it from it's seat. Installation OVERHEAD CONSOLE BRACKET 1. Install the overhead console bracket (2) to the headliner (1) and roof front header. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the front of the overhead console bracket (2) to the roof front header. Tighten the screws to 1.9 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console Bracket > Page 10421 Console: Service and Repair Console-Floor Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rubber cup holder liners. 2. Remove the front (1), center (2) and rear screws (3). 3. Lift the floor console up and disconnect the electrical connector (4). 4. Slide the floor console back and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the floor console in the vehicle and connect the electrical connector (4). 2. Slide the console forward and engage the front with the instrument panel. 3. install the screws (3, 2 & 1). 4. Install the rubber cup holder liners. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console Bracket > Page 10422 Console: Service and Repair Console-Floor Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the cup holder insert from the console. 2. Remove the two screws from the front of the console. 3. Using a small flat bladed tool or equivalent remove the console trim panel (1) from the console (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console Bracket > Page 10423 4. Disconnect all electrical connectors (2). 5. Open the console lid and remove the two screws. 6. Remove the side screws from both the left and right sides of the console and remove the console from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the console to the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console Bracket > Page 10424 2. Install the side screws to both the left and right sides of the console. 3. Install the two screws to the read of the console. 4. Connect all electrical connectors (2) to the console trim panel (1).. 5. Install the console trim panel (1) to the console (3). 6. Install the two screws to the front of the console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console Bracket > Page 10425 7. Install the cup holder insert to the console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 10426 Console: Tools and Equipment ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER Degaussing Tool 6029 Radio Frequency Detector 9001 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 10432 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 10433 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the glove box and squeeze the stop tabs inward. 2. Lower the glove box and release the hinges (1) using a twisting motion and remove the glove box. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal > Page 10438 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the glove box and twist the tabs (2) onto the hinges (1) using a twisting motion as indicated. 2. Close the box and squeeze the stop tabs inward and engage into the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable. 2. Remove the sun visors (5) and disconnect the electrical connectors, if equipped. 3. Remove the A-pillar trim panels. Refer to Trim Panel. 4. Remove the overhead console (4). 5. Remove the left upper B-pillar trim. Refer to Trim Panel. 6. Remove the left C-pillar trim. Refer to Trim Panel. 7. Remove the screws and remove the coat hooks (2). 8. Remove the front seat headrests. 9. Fold both second row seats forward. 10. Place the third row seat into the storage position, if equipped. 11. Remove the dome lamps. 12. Remove the DVD player. 13. Remove the push pin fastener at the rear of the headliner. 14. Remove the sunroof opening trim lace (3). 15. Drop the headliner down and disconnect the electrical connectors. 16. Disconnect the front and rear washer hoses and remove the headliner through the liftgate opening. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 10443 Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place headliner into the vehicle through the liftgate opening and connect the front and rear washer hoses (1). 2. Connect the electrical connectors. 3. Install the sunroof opening trim lace (3), if equipped. 4. Install the push pin fastener at the rear of the headliner. 5. Install the DVD player. 6. Install the dome lamps. 7. Install the front seat headrests. 8. Install the screws and install the coat hooks (2). 9. Install the C-pillar trim. 10. Install the upper B-pillar trim. 11. Install the overhead console. 12. Install the A-pillar trim panels. 13. Connect the electrical connectors and install the sun visors (5). 14. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plate-Door Scuff Scuff Plate: Description and Operation Plate-Door Scuff DESCRIPTION SCUFF PLATES Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Description and Operation > Plate-Door Scuff > Page 10448 Scuff Plate: Description and Operation Plate-Liftgate Scuff DESCRIPTION LIFTGATE SCUFF PLATE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Panel-Cowl Side Trim Trim Panel: Description and Operation Panel-Cowl Side Trim DESCRIPTION COWL TRIM PANEL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Panel-Cowl Side Trim > Page 10453 Trim Panel: Description and Operation Panel-Rear Header Trim DESCRIPTION REAR HEADER TRIM Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel Trim Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Trim Panel Front Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screws (5 & 7). CAUTION: Trim panel is attached to the door using hooks molded into the panel. Do not pull the trim panel straight off or damage to the panel and/or power switch assembly may occur. 2. Lift the trim panel up off the lock rod (4) and attachment hooks and separate the panel from the door slightly. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 4. Disconnect the inside handle actuator rod (3) and remove the trim panel (6). 5. Remove the switch panel (1) if necessary. Front Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10456 1. Install the switch assembly (1). 2. Position the trim panel (6) and connect the inside handle actuator rod (3). 3. Connect the electrical connectors (1). 4. Lift the trim panel up and onto the lock rod (4) and attachment hooks. 5. Install the screws (5 & 7). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10457 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Pillar Trim A-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a small flat bladed tool or equivalent open the trim plugs (2) in the A-pillar grab handle and remove the bolts (3). 2. Remove the A-pillar trim panel (1). A-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the A-pillar trim (1) into place and seat the retaining clips fully. 2. Install the bolts and tighten to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). B-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10458 1. Position the shoulder belt through the upper slot in the trim. 2. Install the trim panel and install the bolts. 3. Position the door sill scuff plates and seat the clips fully. 4. Position the upper trim panel tab (1) into the B-pillar and seat the lower side of the trim fully. 5. Install the shoulder belt anchor bolt (3) and tighten to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 6. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10459 7. Install the grab handle bolts (2) and tighten to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). B-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a small flat bladed tool or equivalent open the trim plugs (1) in the grab handle and remove the bolts (2). 2. Remove the shoulder belt anchor bolt (3) and separate the upper trim panel (2) at the bottom and off the hook (1) at the top. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10460 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, remove the door sill scuff plates. 4. Remove the bolts and remove the lower B-pillar trim. C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the quarter glass trim panel. 2. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (3) from the second row outboard seat belt turning loop (1) and disengage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10461 3. Remove the screw (3) that secures the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1) on the upper C-pillar (5). 4. Remove the screw (3). 5. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, separate the bottom edge of the trim (2) from the pillar and remove off of the upper locating tab (1). C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the upper trim panel tab (1) into the C-pillar and seat the lower side of the trim fully. 2. Install the screw (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10462 3. Position the seat belt turning loop (4) to the height adjuster (1). 4. Install the screw (3) and tighten the to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Engage the tab (2) on the lower edge of the trim cover (3) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (1). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Removal REMOVAL 1. Move the third row seat cushion to its storage position, but leave the third row seat back in its upright position for easiest access to the seat belt lower anchor (2) on the quarter inner panel (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10463 2. Remove the screw (1) that secures the lower anchor to the tapping plate on the quarter inner panel. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, remove the upper rear headliner trim. 4. Remove the screw (1). 5. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, separate the trim (2) and retaining clips and anchor (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the shoulder belt through the slot in the trim. 2. Position the trim (2) in place on the D-pillar and anchor (3). 3. Seat the retaining clips fully and install the screw (1). 4. Position the rear header trim in place and seat the retaining clips fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10464 5. Position the seat belt lower anchor (2) to the tapping plate (3) on the quarter inner panel. 6. Install the screw (1) that secures the lower anchor to the tapping plate and tighten the to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10465 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Quarter Panel Trim Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the D-pillar trim. 2. Remove the screws (3). 3. Slide the trim panel (2) off the retaining tabs (1) and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the trim panel (2) over the retaining tabs (1) and slide into place fully. 2. Install the screws (3). 3. Install the D-pillar trim. Quarter Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10466 1. Remove the C-pillar trim. Refer to Trim Panel. 2. Remove the rear screw (1). 3. Remove the tie down anchor bolt (2) and tie down (3). 4. Remove the three front screws (4) and separate the trim panel. 5. Disconnect the power outlet electrical connector, if equipped. Quarter Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the power outlet electrical connector, if equipped. 2. Position the trim panel onto the quarter panel and seat the retaining clips fully. 3. Install the three forward screws (4). 4. Install the rear screw (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10467 5. Install the tie down (3) and tie down anchor bolt (2). 6. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.) 7. Install the C-pillar trim. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10468 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Trim Panel Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4829-A or equivalent, separate the pushpin fasteners and remove the upper trim panel (2). 2. Remove the two upper screws (3) and the four lower screws (5). 3. Remove the lower trim panel (4) and disconnect the electrical connector. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Trim Panel > Page 10469 1. Connect the electrical connector and install the lower trim panel (4) onto the guide pins (2). 2. Install the four lower screws (5) and two upper screws (3). 3. Position the upper trim (2) into place and seat the push pin fasteners fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the exterior handle. 2. Remove the screw and remove the lock cylinder (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10476 Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the lock cylinder (2) and install the screw. 2. Install the exterior handle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10481 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10482 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10483 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10486 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10487 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10490 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10491 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10492 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart Keyless Start Antenna: Technical Service Bulletins Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart NUMBER: 08-003-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: January 27, 2007 SUBJECT: Remote Start System - Diagnostic Chart For Antenna OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves a diagnostic chart that may be used to aid the technician with the diagnosis of the antenna on an originally equipped (factory installed) remote start system. MODELS: 2007 (DR/DH/D1/DC) Ram Truck (1500/2500/3500) 2006-2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2007 (KA) Nitro 2007 (ND) Dakota 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles with an original equipment Remote Start system (sales code XBM). DISCUSSION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Remote Start System - Antenna Diagnostic Chart > Page 10498 The customer may notice that the signal range of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system is reduced. The RKE key fob may need to be closer than 3 meters (10 feet) before the functions available on the key fob will operate. This condition may be due to the RKE antenna. The diagnostic flow chart is provide as a diagnostic aid for dealer technician (Fig. 1). POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER BATTERIES The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE transmitter batteries: 1. Using a trim stick or a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves located near the key ring until the two halves unsnap. 2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter. 3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter. 4. Replace the battery with a new CR2032. Be certain that the battery is installed with the polarity correctly oriented. 5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together using hand pressure until they snap back into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Left Front Component ID: 155 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT 2 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT P1 16DG/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10508 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10509 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 156 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G77 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z941 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR/LIFTGATE P5 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10510 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10511 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Right Front Component ID: 157 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 2 GROUND Z944 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 18OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10512 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10513 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Right Rear Component ID: 158 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G76 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z927 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10514 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10515 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Left Front Component ID: 155 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT 2 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT P1 16DG/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10516 Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 156 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10517 1 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G77 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z941 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR/LIFTGATE P5 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Latch-Door-Right Front Component ID: 157 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10518 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 2 GROUND Z944 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 18OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 50 Latch-Door-Right Rear Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10519 Component ID: 158 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G76 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z927 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10520 Latch-Liftgate-Manual Release Component ID: 159 Component : LATCH-LIFTGATE-MANUAL RELEASE Connector: Name : LATCH-LIFTGATE-MANUAL RELEASE Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10521 1 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG 2-3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR/LIFTGATE P5 16TN/OR Component Location - 52 Latch-Power Liftgate Component ID: 160 Component : LATCH-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : LATCH-POWER LIFTGATE Color : # of pins : 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10522 Pin Description Circuit 1 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 2 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR 3 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 4 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY 5 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 6 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 7 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 8 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10523 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Left Front Component ID: 155 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT 2 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT P1 16DG/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10526 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10527 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 156 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G77 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z941 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR/LIFTGATE P5 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10528 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10529 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Right Front Component ID: 157 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 2 GROUND Z944 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 18OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10530 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10531 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Right Rear Component ID: 158 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G76 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z927 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10532 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10533 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Left Front Component ID: 155 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G75 20VT 2 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT P1 16DG/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10534 Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 156 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10535 1 LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G77 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z941 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR/LIFTGATE P5 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Latch-Door-Right Front Component ID: 157 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10536 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G74 20VT/WT 2 GROUND Z944 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 18OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 50 Latch-Door-Right Rear Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10537 Component ID: 158 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE G76 20VT/YL 2 GROUND Z927 20BK 3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS G778 16OR/RD 4 DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS P392 16LG/DB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10538 Latch-Liftgate-Manual Release Component ID: 159 Component : LATCH-LIFTGATE-MANUAL RELEASE Connector: Name : LATCH-LIFTGATE-MANUAL RELEASE Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10539 1 DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS P393 16LG 2-3 DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR/LIFTGATE P5 16TN/OR Component Location - 52 Latch-Power Liftgate Component ID: 160 Component : LATCH-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : LATCH-POWER LIFTGATE Color : # of pins : 8 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10540 Pin Description Circuit 1 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 2 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR 3 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 4 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY 5 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 6 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 7 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 8 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 10541 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Actuator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The lock mechanisms are actuated by a reversible electric motor mounted within each door. The power lock motors are integral to the door latch units. The power lock motors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10544 Power Door Lock Actuator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door lock motors are controlled by the instrument cluster. A positive and negative battery connection to the two motor terminals will cause the motor to move in one direction. Reversing the current will cause the motor to move in the opposite direction. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10545 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection POWER LOCK MOTOR The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 10550 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 10551 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 10552 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 10553 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 10554 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 10555 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Liftgate Release PLG Component ID: 432 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE PLG Color : # of pins : 4 A-B LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN C GROUND Z957 20BK D-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 10558 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 10559 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 10560 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 10561 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 10562 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 10563 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 10564 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10567 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10568 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch power window and power lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the door module is inoperative, replace the faulty door module. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty window/lock switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty window/lock switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10569 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10572 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10583 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10584 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10590 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10591 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10592 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10593 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10594 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10595 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10596 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10597 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10598 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10599 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10600 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10601 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10602 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10603 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10604 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10605 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Memory Mirror Description DESCRIPTION There are two Memory Mirror Modules (these are sometimes referred to as Driver Door Modules (DDM) and Passenger Door Modules (PDM) within the memory system. One located in the driver door and one in the passenger door, just behind the door trim panel. The modules send a bus message to the power mirrors to adjust them to a preset position when a memory recall request has been made. The memory mirror modules also act as an interface in each door for electrical functions (door lock switches and door ajar switches). The Memory System makes available for immediate recall personalized preferences of the following: - Automatic temperature control settings. - Outside mirror positions. - Power adjustable brake and accelerator pedal position. - Power seat horizontal, vertical, recliner, and easy entry positions. - Radio push button station selections. The major components of the Memory System are: - Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel. - Driver Memory Mirror Module (DMMM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel. - Passenger Memory Mirror Module (PMMM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel. - Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder. - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key. - Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals. - Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack. - Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack. The memory recall is available at the press of a button on the drivers door trim panel or, by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter if it is programmed to trigger the recall. Radio settings include up to 20 push button presets (10 AM and 10 FM), and the last station selection, even if it is not one of the 20 preset selections. Operation OPERATION The memory mirror module receives input from the door lock switches and sends that message to the cluster for door lock operation (vehicles equipped with memory system only). It also controls the mirror adjustment by receiving input from the mirror switch on the door trim panel. Sensors in the mirrors act as inputs to the memory mirror module in order to position the mirrors to presets by the driver(s). The power supply to the mirrors is supplied by the mirror memory modules. On vehicles equipped with a memory system, the front door ajar switches are inputs to the memory mirror module. The modules use this information for door lock inhibit etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10608 A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linke" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the seat belt is latched. Both driver and passenger modules provide active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) to aid in diagnosis. Both modules are identical in appearance with the exception of an extra ground wire on the driver side memory mirror module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10609 Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Seat Memory Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The scan tool standardization process must be performed on the Memory Seat Module (MSM) any time a new module is installed or the existing module is reflashed. The Memory Seat Module (MSM) is located underneath the driver seat, towards the front and on the outboard side. It is used in conjunction with the other modules in the memory system to recall the seat to one of two preset seat functional adjustments (horizontal, vertical, and recliner). The switch for the memory seat programming and selection mounts on the driver door trim panel. The MSM also controls the adjustable pedals, both for the memory and manual functionality. The adjustable accelerator and brake pedals are available on SLT and Limited models. On Limited, their positioning can be stored for recall by the memory system, allowing for two drivers to have unique, pre-programmed settings. Operation OPERATION POWER/MEMORY SEAT The memory seat module receives input from the 8-way power seat switch, the driver seat position sensors, adjustable pedal control circuits (switch, sensor, and motor), and the data bus circuit. The memory switch, is wired to the memory mirror module which sends the message over the data bus. The memory seat module performs the following functions: - Positions the driver seat (vertical, horizontal, and recliner positions) and adjustable pedals. - Sends the memory save or recall (#1 or #2) command over the data bus circuit to the memory mirror modules, HVAC, and radio. - Provides for "linking" the key FOBs to memory. - Provides for the easy entry/exit feature. - Provides the tilt mirrors in reverse feature When a memory button is pressed (#1 or #2) on the memory switch, the driver door memory mirror module sends a recall message to the memory seat module (MSM). Then the MSM will position the driver seat and adjustable pedals to its preprogrammed location/setting. When the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter button is pressed, depending on which transmitter (#1 or #2), the SKREEM (RKE Receiver) sends the recall request and FOB number (#1 or #2) data message. This RKE transmitter function depends on if the MSM is programmed to trigger the recall (linked FOBs). A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linked" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in any position other than park or the seat belt is latched. A key FOB is "linked" to a memory setting by pressing the "set" button and then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the set button, then by pressing the "lock" button on the selected key FOB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10610 The memory system "Easy Entry and /Exit" feature provides the driver with more room to enter or exit the vehicle. The Easy Entry and Exit feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. The seat will return to the memory position when the driver turns the vehicle's ignition switch out of the LOCK position. The memory system "learns" the seat and adjustable pedal motor maximum end positions when the motor reaches the limit of travel in any direction and stalls. Subsequently, movement will stop just short of that position to avoid extra stress on the motors and mechanisms. If the system learned a maximum position as a result of an obstruction, as for instance if a large object was placed on the floor behind the seat, the system can relearn the "true" maximum position through manually operating the power seat after the obstruction is removed. NOTE: It is normal for the power accessories contained in the memory system to stop at the maximum "learned" position and then continue to the "true" maximum position when the control switch is released and then applied in the same direction a second time. Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information are needed. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature provides for tilting the sideview (outside) mirrors down a predetermined angle, providing a better view of the ground next to the rear portion of the vehicle. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. Operation of the tilt mirrors is as follows: - Sideview mirrors will tilt down when the vehicle transmission is shifted into Reverse. - Sideview mirrors will return to the original position when the vehicle transmission is shifted out of Reverse. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The pedals swing on a large arc, the radius and angle of which were selected on the basis of ergonomic studies, that puts them in the proper position for use by the smaller driver - higher and angled upward as well as rearward. Powered by the small electric motor driving a gear train at each pedal, adjustment is precise, quiet, and smooth throughout the range. A paddle-type switch on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column actuates the electric motor-driven mechanism through the memory seat module (MSM). Pushing up the paddle brings the pedals closer and vice versa. Movement stops when the switch is released. MSM logic prevents pedal adjustment when the automatic speed control (cruise control) is set (controlling speed), and when the transmission is in reverse. This feature protects against a loss of reference position when neither foot is on the pedal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Memory Mirror MEMORY MIRROR MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory mirror module should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10613 Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Seat Memory MEMORY SEAT MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory seat system/module should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Memory Mirror Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from module (1). 4. Remove fasteners (2) and module (1) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position module (1) on door and install fasteners (2). 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to module (1). 3. Install the door trim panel. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10616 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Seat Memory Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 3. Unsnap the memory seat module (4) from the side brackets. 4. Pivot the module upward and disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 5. Pull the module rearward to remove it from the front of the seat frame (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place the module (4) into position making sure the front snaps into the seat frame (3). 2. Connect the memory seat module harness connectors (1). 3. Pivot the module (4) downward and snap it into place in the side brackets. 4. Install the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Using an appropriate scan tool go to the MSM miscellaneous functions and perform the standardization routine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10617 7. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10621 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10622 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10623 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component ID: 434 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : GRAY # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P76 20TN/LB 3 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 4 GROUND Z13 20BK/WT 4 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 5 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 6 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 6 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 7 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 8 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVERP74 20TN/OR 8 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 9 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 9 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 10 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10627 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10628 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 434 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : GRAY # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P76 20TN/LB 3 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 4 GROUND Z13 20BK/WT 4 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 5 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 6 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 6 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 7 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 8 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVERP74 20TN/OR 8 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 9 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 9 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 10 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10629 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power mirror switch includes the following: - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10632 Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. In vehicles without Memory Mirrors the power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. In vehicles with Memory Mirrors the mirror switch connects to the driver power mirror module. The driver memory mirror module uses the mirror switch inputs to control the battery current and ground feeds to driver mirror motor and sends a CAN Bus message to the passenger mirror module. The passenger mirror module controls the battery current and ground feeds to passenger mirror motors based on the CAN bus message from the driver memory module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10633 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER MIRROR SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power mirror switch. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch. 3. Remove the power mirror switch from the window/lock switch assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10636 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install power mirror switch to window/lock switch assembly. 2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches. 3. Install window/lock switch assembly. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching Paint: Customer Interest Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 10646 **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 10647 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 10648 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 10654 **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 10655 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 10656 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents NUMBER: 24-003-07 GROUP: Heating & Air Conditioning DATE: May 01, 2007 SUBJECT: Only Warm Cabin Air Output From HVAC System OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves the infrared (IR) temperature sensor used on automatic temperature control (A/C). MODELS: 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 (JS41) Sebring 2008 (JS41) Avenger NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with an Automatic Temperature Control system (sales code HAB for JS or HAF for HB/HG) and built on or before March 27, 2007 (MDH 0327XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may notice, while in automatic temperature control mode, that the driver and front passenger cabin air output from the HVAC system remains warm. Adjusting the HVAC temperature settings, while in the automatic temperature control mode, to a cooler temperature will not change the warm cabin air output. The warm cabin air output can also occur when operating in manual temperature control mode, with the exception of the full cold (LO) temperature selection. When in automatic or manual temperature control, all HVAC modes (defrost, floor, bi-level, etc.) operate as designed. This condition may be due to the HVAC system infrared (IR) temperature sensor that "locks" at one temperature and fails to change. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Connect the StarSCAN(R) to the vehicle Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC). 2. Turn the ignition switch to the "ON" position. Power up the StarSCAN(R). 3. If the vehicle is a HB/HG: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". d. Scroll down to "Bussed Inputs". e. Scroll down to "I/R Sensor On Time". f. Monitor the current reading for the "I/R Sensor On Time" (displayed in milliseconds). 4. If the vehicle is a JS: a. From the StarSCAN(R) Main Menu select "ECU View". b. Select "HVAC Heat, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning". c. Select "Data Display". Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 10662 d. Scroll down to "I/R Temp". e. Monitor the current temperature reading for the "I/R Temp". 5. While monitoring "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading, place a finger over the face of the infrared sensor (located in the overhead console or windshield header). The "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp" reading should change rapidly as a finger is placed on and off of the infrared sensor. A suspect I/R sensor will not change reading. 6. Did the "I/R Sensor On Time" or "I/R Temp reading change? a. If YES >>>> then STOP. This bulletin does not apply. Further diagnosis is required. b. If NO >>>> then perform the Repair Procedure. 7. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Replace the infrared sensor. For detailed repair procedures refer to TechCONNECT. Select the SERVICE INFO tab, then: 24 - Heating and Air Conditioning / 24 - HVAC - Service Information / Controls - Front / Sensor - Infrared / Removal and Installation. 2. Verify that the infrared sensor face is centered to the hole in the overhead console. 3. Verify that the "I/R Sensor On Time" reading changes when a finger is placed over the face of the sensor. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > 24-003-07 > May > 07 > A/C - Produces Only Warm Air From Vents > Page 10663 Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10664 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-046-07 Date: 071030 Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10665 **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10666 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10667 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-046-07 Date: 071030 Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10668 SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10669 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10670 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 10671 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10672 Paint: Application and ID SPECIFICATIONS - PAINT CODES Exterior Colors Interior Colors Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10673 Paint: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The original equipment paint finish is a multi step process that involves cleaning, applying electro de-position (E-coat), anti-chip primer, basecoat, and clearcoat steps. CAUTION: Do not use abrasive chemicals, abrasive compounds or harsh alkaline based cleaning solvents on the painted surfaces of a vehicle. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to vehicle finish. On most vehicles a two-part paint application (basecoat/clearcoat) is used. Color paint that is applied to primer is called basecoat. A clear coat paint is then applied to protect the basecoat from ultraviolet light and to provide a durable high-gloss finish. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Paint Touch-Up Paint: Service and Repair Paint Touch-Up PAINT TOUCH-UP DESCRIPTION When a painted metal surface has been scratched or chipped, it should be touched-up as soon as possible to avoid corrosion. For best results, use MOPAR(R) Scratch Filler/Primer, Touch-Up Paints and Clear Top Coat. WARNING: Use an OSHA approved respirator and safety glasses when spraying paint or solvents in a confined area. Personal injury can result. STANDARD PROCEDURE 1. Scrape loose paint and corrosion from inside scratch or chip. 2. Clean affected area with MOPAR(R) Tar/Road Oil Remover or equivalent, and allow to dry. 3. Fill the inside of the scratch or chip with a coat of filler/primer. Do not overlap primer onto good surface finish. The applicator brush should be wet enough to puddle-fill the scratch or chip without running. Do not stroke brush applicator on body surface. Allow the filler/primer to dry hard. 4. Cover the filler/primer with color touch-up paint. Do not overlap touch-up color onto the original color coat around the scratch or chip. Butt the new color to the original color, if possible. Do not stroke applicator brush on body surface. Allow touch-up paint to dry hard. 5. On vehicles without clearcoat, the touch-up color can be lightly finesse sanded (1500 grit) and polished with rubbing compound. 6. On vehicles with clearcoat, apply clear top coat to touch-up paint with the same technique as described in Step 4. Allow clear top coat to dry hard. If desired, Step 5 can be performed on clear top coat. WARNING: Avoid prolonged skin contact with petroleum or alcohol - based cleaning solvents. Personal injury can result. Avoid prolonged skin contact with petroleum or alcohol - based cleaning solvents. Personal injury can result. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Paint Touch-Up > Page 10676 Paint: Service and Repair Finesse Sanding, Buffing, And Polishing - Description FINESSE SANDING/BUFFING & POLISHING DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not remove more than 0.5 mils of clearcoat finish when sanding, hand buffing or polishing. Basecoat paint must retain clearcoat for durability. CAUTION: If the finish has been finesse sanded in the past, it cannot be repeated. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to vehicle finish. NOTE: Finesse sanding should only be performed by a trained automotive paint technician. Minor acid etching, orange peel, or smudging in a clearcoat or single-stage finish can be reduced with light finesse sanding, hand buffing and polishing. Use a Paint Thickness Gauge #PR-ETG-2X or equivalent to determine clearcoat or single-stage paint thickness before and after the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation Radiator Support: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install upper crossmember. 2. Install outer mounting bolts and tighten. 3. Install nuts attaching latch to radiator crossmember support. Tighten nuts to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.) torque. 4. Check hood fit and adjust if required. 5. Install hood seal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation > Page 10681 Radiator Support: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Crossmember - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise hood. 2. Remove the front hood seal. 3. Remove the center brace mounting nuts and remove hood latch. 4. Remove the crossmember mounting bolts. 5. Remove crossmember. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10686 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10687 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 184 Component : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-WIRELESS CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 IGNITION SWITCH SENSE G20 20VT/BR 2-3 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F20 18PK/GY 4 GROUND Z109 20BK/GY 5 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 7 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 8-Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10688 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10691 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10692 Keyless Entry Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, or an Engine Control Module (ECM) for a diesel engine and the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new PCM/ECM. 2. Program the new SKREEM/WCM. 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them into the new SKREEM/WCM. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED, ECM REPLACED, WCM REPLACED, or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Be certain to enter the correct country code for the SKREEM/WCM. If the incorrect country code is programmed into the SKREEM, it cannot be changed and the SKREEM must be replaced. NOTE: In addition, the SKREEM/WCM must be configured for certain optional equipment in the vehicle, including Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and Remote Start. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE menu item as appropriate. NOTE: A replacement SKREEM/WCM is supplied with TPM enabled by default; therefore, if the vehicle is not equipped with TPM, the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) will incorrectly learn that the vehicle has TPM after the replacement SKREEM is installed. The TPM indicator in the EMIC will illuminate to show a TPM fault condition after TPM has been disabled in the SKREEM. The EMIC must unlearn TPM to correct this false TPM indication. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for CLEAR LEARNED FEATURES under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu item as appropriate. NOTE: If the PCM/ECM and the SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle ignition keys will need to be replaced and new keys programmed into the new SKREEM/WCM. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10695 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10696 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10697 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) if the SKREEM is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10706 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10707 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10713 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10714 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10715 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10716 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10717 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10718 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10719 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10720 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10721 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10722 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10723 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10724 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10725 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10726 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10727 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10728 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Memory Mirror Description DESCRIPTION There are two Memory Mirror Modules (these are sometimes referred to as Driver Door Modules (DDM) and Passenger Door Modules (PDM) within the memory system. One located in the driver door and one in the passenger door, just behind the door trim panel. The modules send a bus message to the power mirrors to adjust them to a preset position when a memory recall request has been made. The memory mirror modules also act as an interface in each door for electrical functions (door lock switches and door ajar switches). The Memory System makes available for immediate recall personalized preferences of the following: - Automatic temperature control settings. - Outside mirror positions. - Power adjustable brake and accelerator pedal position. - Power seat horizontal, vertical, recliner, and easy entry positions. - Radio push button station selections. The major components of the Memory System are: - Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel. - Driver Memory Mirror Module (DMMM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel. - Passenger Memory Mirror Module (PMMM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel. - Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder. - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key. - Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals. - Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack. - Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack. The memory recall is available at the press of a button on the drivers door trim panel or, by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter if it is programmed to trigger the recall. Radio settings include up to 20 push button presets (10 AM and 10 FM), and the last station selection, even if it is not one of the 20 preset selections. Operation OPERATION The memory mirror module receives input from the door lock switches and sends that message to the cluster for door lock operation (vehicles equipped with memory system only). It also controls the mirror adjustment by receiving input from the mirror switch on the door trim panel. Sensors in the mirrors act as inputs to the memory mirror module in order to position the mirrors to presets by the driver(s). The power supply to the mirrors is supplied by the mirror memory modules. On vehicles equipped with a memory system, the front door ajar switches are inputs to the memory mirror module. The modules use this information for door lock inhibit etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10731 A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linke" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the seat belt is latched. Both driver and passenger modules provide active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) to aid in diagnosis. Both modules are identical in appearance with the exception of an extra ground wire on the driver side memory mirror module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10732 Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Seat Memory Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The scan tool standardization process must be performed on the Memory Seat Module (MSM) any time a new module is installed or the existing module is reflashed. The Memory Seat Module (MSM) is located underneath the driver seat, towards the front and on the outboard side. It is used in conjunction with the other modules in the memory system to recall the seat to one of two preset seat functional adjustments (horizontal, vertical, and recliner). The switch for the memory seat programming and selection mounts on the driver door trim panel. The MSM also controls the adjustable pedals, both for the memory and manual functionality. The adjustable accelerator and brake pedals are available on SLT and Limited models. On Limited, their positioning can be stored for recall by the memory system, allowing for two drivers to have unique, pre-programmed settings. Operation OPERATION POWER/MEMORY SEAT The memory seat module receives input from the 8-way power seat switch, the driver seat position sensors, adjustable pedal control circuits (switch, sensor, and motor), and the data bus circuit. The memory switch, is wired to the memory mirror module which sends the message over the data bus. The memory seat module performs the following functions: - Positions the driver seat (vertical, horizontal, and recliner positions) and adjustable pedals. - Sends the memory save or recall (#1 or #2) command over the data bus circuit to the memory mirror modules, HVAC, and radio. - Provides for "linking" the key FOBs to memory. - Provides for the easy entry/exit feature. - Provides the tilt mirrors in reverse feature When a memory button is pressed (#1 or #2) on the memory switch, the driver door memory mirror module sends a recall message to the memory seat module (MSM). Then the MSM will position the driver seat and adjustable pedals to its preprogrammed location/setting. When the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter button is pressed, depending on which transmitter (#1 or #2), the SKREEM (RKE Receiver) sends the recall request and FOB number (#1 or #2) data message. This RKE transmitter function depends on if the MSM is programmed to trigger the recall (linked FOBs). A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linked" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in any position other than park or the seat belt is latched. A key FOB is "linked" to a memory setting by pressing the "set" button and then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the set button, then by pressing the "lock" button on the selected key FOB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10733 The memory system "Easy Entry and /Exit" feature provides the driver with more room to enter or exit the vehicle. The Easy Entry and Exit feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. The seat will return to the memory position when the driver turns the vehicle's ignition switch out of the LOCK position. The memory system "learns" the seat and adjustable pedal motor maximum end positions when the motor reaches the limit of travel in any direction and stalls. Subsequently, movement will stop just short of that position to avoid extra stress on the motors and mechanisms. If the system learned a maximum position as a result of an obstruction, as for instance if a large object was placed on the floor behind the seat, the system can relearn the "true" maximum position through manually operating the power seat after the obstruction is removed. NOTE: It is normal for the power accessories contained in the memory system to stop at the maximum "learned" position and then continue to the "true" maximum position when the control switch is released and then applied in the same direction a second time. Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information are needed. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature provides for tilting the sideview (outside) mirrors down a predetermined angle, providing a better view of the ground next to the rear portion of the vehicle. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. Operation of the tilt mirrors is as follows: - Sideview mirrors will tilt down when the vehicle transmission is shifted into Reverse. - Sideview mirrors will return to the original position when the vehicle transmission is shifted out of Reverse. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The pedals swing on a large arc, the radius and angle of which were selected on the basis of ergonomic studies, that puts them in the proper position for use by the smaller driver - higher and angled upward as well as rearward. Powered by the small electric motor driving a gear train at each pedal, adjustment is precise, quiet, and smooth throughout the range. A paddle-type switch on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column actuates the electric motor-driven mechanism through the memory seat module (MSM). Pushing up the paddle brings the pedals closer and vice versa. Movement stops when the switch is released. MSM logic prevents pedal adjustment when the automatic speed control (cruise control) is set (controlling speed), and when the transmission is in reverse. This feature protects against a loss of reference position when neither foot is on the pedal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Memory Mirror MEMORY MIRROR MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory mirror module should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10736 Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Seat Memory MEMORY SEAT MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory seat system/module should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Memory Mirror Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from module (1). 4. Remove fasteners (2) and module (1) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position module (1) on door and install fasteners (2). 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to module (1). 3. Install the door trim panel. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10739 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Seat Memory Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 3. Unsnap the memory seat module (4) from the side brackets. 4. Pivot the module upward and disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 5. Pull the module rearward to remove it from the front of the seat frame (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place the module (4) into position making sure the front snaps into the seat frame (3). 2. Connect the memory seat module harness connectors (1). 3. Pivot the module (4) downward and snap it into place in the side brackets. 4. Install the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Using an appropriate scan tool go to the MSM miscellaneous functions and perform the standardization routine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10740 7. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Relay > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Relay: Locations Adjustable Pedals Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 10744 Pedal Positioning Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 213 Component : RELAY-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : RELAY-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A902 18RD 85 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY CONTROL P201 20LG/DB 86 FUSED B(+) A902 18RD 87 - 87A ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Locations Component ID: 180 Component : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 2 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 3-4 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 5 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 6 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 7 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10748 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C2 Color : # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 5 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10749 6 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 7 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL 8-9-10 - 11 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 12 - 13 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 14 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN 15 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 19 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG 20 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 21 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 22 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY Component Location - 44 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C3 Color : # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10750 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z125 12BK/OR 2 FUSED B(+) A115 12YL/RD Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10751 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 180 Component : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C1 Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 1 Q204 20OR/DG 2 POSITION SENSOR SUPPLY Q203 20OR/TN 3-4 LIFTGATE CLUTCH DRIVER Q201 20OR/LG 5 LIFTGATE OPEN DRIVER Q88 14TN/BR 6 LIFTGATE CLOSE DRIVER Q89 14TN/OR 7 POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL 2 Q205 20OR/DB 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 LIFTGATE FULL OPEN SWITCH SENSE Q51 20OR Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10752 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C2 Color : # of pins : 22 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 5 SECTOR SWITCH SENSE Q79 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10753 6 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 7 LIFTGATE PAWL SWITCH SENSE Q60 20OR/YL 8-9-10 - 11 LIFTGATE LATCH RELEASE DRIVER Q85 18TN/WT 12 - 13 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR 14 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN 15 LIFTGATE HANDLE SWITCH SENSE P30 20TN/DG 16 - - 17 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 18 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 19 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG 20 LATCH SECONDARY POSITION SENSE Q76 20OR/BK 21 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR 22 LIFTGATE LATCH CINCH DRIVER Q84 18TN/GY Component Location - 44 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWER LIFTGATE C3 Color : # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10754 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z125 12BK/OR 2 FUSED B(+) A115 12YL/RD Component Location - 44 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate system utilize a power liftgate control module (4). This module is located on the left side of the vehicle behind the C-pillar below the quarter glass The power liftgate control module receives and monitors logic inputs from all the power liftgate system switches. This module also contains the software technology to detect liftgate obstructions and stop or reverse the door accordingly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10757 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power liftgate control module contains the electronic circuitry and software used to control the sequence of events for the power liftgate system. This module communicates on the Controller Area Network (CAN) to monitor many different inputs and outputs such as door lock status, transmission gear selector position and vehicle speed. The power liftgate open/close command can be initiated by either one press of the power liftgate overhead console switch or two presses of the key fob power liftgate switch. The overhead switch is hardwired to the power liftgate control module. The key fob, sends a signal out on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. This signal is detected at the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met before applying power to the power liftgate drive unit to start a power cycle. During a power liftgate open or close cycle, if the power liftgate control module detects sufficient resistance to liftgate travel, such as an obstruction in the liftgate's path. The control module will immediately stop liftgate movement and reverse the direction of travel to the full open or closed position. The power liftgate control module has the ability to relearn. After 8 miles have been recorded on the odometer, anytime the liftgate is fully opened and fully closed using the automatic system, the module will learn from its cycle. If a replacement power liftgate component is installed or a liftgate adjustment is made, the module will relearn the effort and time required to open or close the liftgate. This learn cycle can be performed with a Diagnostic Scan Tool or with a complete cycle of the liftgate, using either one of the command switches. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10758 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Testing and Inspection POWER LIFTGATE CONTROL MODULE Any diagnosis of the Power Liftgate System should begin with the use of a diagnostic scan tool. For information on the use of the scan tool, refer to the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures Information. Inspect the related wiring harness connectors for broken, bent, pushed out, or corroded terminals. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information. Before any testing of the power liftgate system is attempted, the battery should be fully-charged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the left quarter trim panel from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connectors (2) from the power liftgate control module (4). 4. Using molding remover C-4829-A gently pry the clip (1) out of the retaining hole holding the power liftgate control module (4) to the quarter panel. 5. Tilt the top of the module (4) away from the quarter panel and lift upward to disengage the mounting tab from the locating slot (3). 6. Remove the power liftgate control module (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10761 Power Trunk / Liftgate Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power liftgate control module (4) into the vehicle. 2. Insert the mounting tab into the locating slot (3) on the quarter panel. 3. Tilt the top of the module (4) toward the quarter panel and firmly press the clip (1) into the retaining hole on the quarter panel. 4. Connect the wire harness connectors (2) to the power liftgate control module (4). 5. Install the left quarter trim panel. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 8. Perform the power liftgate learn cycle. 9. Verify power liftgate system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Component ID: 176 Component : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Connector: Name : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z387 20BK 2 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 3 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 4 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18BR/VT 5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10765 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10766 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 176 Component : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Connector: Name : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z387 20BK 2 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 3 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 4 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18BR/VT 5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 10767 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Heated Seat Seat Heater Control Module: Description and Operation Module-Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION The heated seat module (2) is located behind the right rear D-pillar trim (1). The heated seat module has a single electrical connector (3). The heated seat module is an microprocessor designed to use CAN bus messages from the cluster Cabin Compartment Node (CCN) to operate the heated seat elements in both front seats. Operation OPERATION The heated seat module operates on fused battery current received from the ignition switch. The module is grounded at all times through a ground lug on the right rear D-pillar. Inputs to the module include CAN bus messages and standard hardwired 12volt power and ground. In response to those inputs the heated seat module controls the battery current to the heated seat elements. When a heated seat switch CAN bus signal is received by the heated seat module, the module energizes the selected heated seat element. The Low heat set point is about 38° C (100.4° F), and the High heat set point is about 42° C (107.6° F). If the heated seat module detects a heated seat element OPEN or SHORT circuit, it will record and store an diagnostic trouble code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Heated Seat > Page 10770 Seat Heater Control Module: Description and Operation Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules (2) mounted in the front face of the second row center floor console (3) operate the heated second row seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated second row seat system. If any of the heated second row seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated second row seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after thirty minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue for another thirty minutes and the system will then be automatically turned off. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10771 Seat Heater Control Module: Testing and Inspection HEATED SEAT MODULE 1. Test the appropriate heated seat element. 2. Test the appropriate heated seat switch. 3. Using a voltmeter, backprobe the heated seat module connector, do not disconnect. Check for voltage at the appropriate pin cavities. 12v should be present. If OK go to STEP 4, if Not, repair the open or shorted voltage supply circuit as required. 4. Using a ohmmeter, backprobe the appropriate heated seat module connector, do not disconnect. Check for proper continuity to ground on the ground pin cavities. Continuity should be present. If OK test the Cabin compartment Node (CCN) cluster using a scan tool for proper heated seat system function. If Not OK, Repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Module-Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the liftgate and remove the upper D-pillar trim from the vehicle. 3. Remove the lower D-pillar trim from the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the heated seat module (2). 5. Unsnap the heated seat module (2) from the D-pillar (1). 6. Remove the heated seat module (2) from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the heated seat module on the D-pillar (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 10774 2. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the heated seat module (2). 3. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Check for proper heated seat system operation. 5. Install the upper and lower D-pillar trim to the vehicle. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 10775 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules (2) from the rear center floor console (3) by gently prying up from the edge of the switch/module bezel (1). Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 10776 1. Align the tabs (1) of the switch/module (2) to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel (1) into the mounting hole in the center console (3) until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 10782 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Description and Operation Luggage Rack: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION LUGGAGE RACK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Luggage Rack > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10787 Luggage Rack Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sun Shade: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the water channel. 2. Cycle sunroof motor to the open position. 3. Move sunshade towards the closed position stopping three to four inches from the closed position. 4. Depress the spring feet clips (1) in the cross car direction on one side of the sunshade by applying a side-load to the shade while pulling up at the front centerline of the sunshade. This will cause one spring feet clip (1) to pop out of the track. 5. Remove the other front foot by rotating the shade (1) out and the foot resting on the top of the sunroof frame (2). 6. Pull the shade farther forward in the vehicle and repeat the previous step to remove the rear spring feet. 7. Remove the sunshade (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10793 Sun Shade: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place one side of the sunshade (1) spring feet clips into the top track U-frame (2). 2. Depress the both releasing clips (1) on the other side to allow them to go into the top track of the U-frame (2). 3. Move sunshade to the open position. 4. Verify that the sunshade moves back and forth properly. 5. Cycle sunroof towards the closed position. 6. Position the sunshade so that the handle is in the center of the opening. 7. Install the water channel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Locations Component ID: 196 Component : MOTOR-SUNROOF Connector: Name : MOTOR-SUNROOF Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 2 SUNROOF MOTOR B(+) Q5 20OR/LB 3 SUNROOF CLOSE Q4 20OR/YL 4 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 5 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 6 GROUND Z955 14BK 7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - Component Location - 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10797 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10798 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 196 Component : MOTOR-SUNROOF Connector: Name : MOTOR-SUNROOF Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 2 SUNROOF MOTOR B(+) Q5 20OR/LB 3 SUNROOF CLOSE Q4 20OR/YL 4 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 5 FUSED B(+) A904 14RD/GY 6 GROUND Z955 14BK 7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - Component Location - 49 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10799 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10800 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection STANDARD PROCEDURE - INITIALIZATION 1. To initialize the motor, connect power to the sunroof. 2. Press the close-button until the glass panel has reached the full closed position. There will be a slight "kick" of the glass panel when initialization occurs if the glass panel starts in the full closed position. The "kick" is accompanied by a soft tick noise. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10801 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT CAUTION: There is no adjustment available for a normally operating sunroof. This procedure is used to set sunroof motor to sunroof assembly timing before the motor is installed in the assembly. 1. Manually push the sunroof guide assembly (4) to the full forward position until it is locked into position. This is verified by attempting to push the guide assembly rearward. NOTE: The guide rail (2) will be raised above the U-frame assembly (4) when in the lock position. 2. Remove the sunroof glass. 3. Manually move the guide pivot (3) inside the guide cam slot until it is centered between the etched timing marks (1) on both rails on both the left hand and right hand side rails. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 10802 4. Verify that the white marking is visible in the new motor window (1). If the mark is not visible, connect a power source to the motor and cycle the 'close' button until the motor is in the closed position (indicated by the white mark in the window). 5. Install the sunroof motor and verify proper sunroof operation. 6. Install the sunroof glass, leaving the retaining bolts loose. 7. Install the sunroof assembly into the vehicle. 8. Flush the sunroof glass into the vehicle roof opening and check sunroof glass alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Motor - Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Sunroof Motor - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Motor - Removal > Page 10805 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sunroof Motor - Removal > Page 10806 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Sunroof Motor - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The sunroof motor must be timed with the sunroof assembly. Failure to do so will result in improper sunroof operation and possible leakage or damage to the assembly. 1. Assure proper sunroof motor timing before installation. 2. Position the sunroof motor (9) to the sunroof assembly, install the retaining screws (10) and tighten to 4 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the timed sunroof assembly to a power source and initialize. 4. Assure proper operation before installing the sunroof assembly into the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof Component ID: 448 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL B GROUND Z957 20BK C SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN D SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 10811 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 10812 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 10813 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof Component ID: 448 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL B GROUND Z957 20BK C SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN D SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 10816 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 10817 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 10818 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Separate the overhead console from the headliner, by carefully pulling down on the front portion, toward the windshield, to release the retaining clips. 3. Release the sunroof switch retaining tab (2), disconnect the electrical connector (1) and remove the switch from the console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10821 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the switch (2) against the overhead console (1) and push the switch to seat properly in retaining clip (3). 2. Install the overhead console and seat the retaining clips (4) fully. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Including front hinges: 1. Fully open sunroof glass panel. 2. Remove sunroof assembly (1). 3. Depress the front deflector retaining tabs (2). 4. Using a small flat bladed tool (2) or equivalent, release the both hinges (1) from the U-frame track. *Right side hinge shown, left similar. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10826 5. Rotate the hinge feet (1) up and out of the U-frame (2) and remove wind deflector. *Right side hinge shown, left similar. Without front hinges: 1. Using a small flat bladed tool (2) or equivalent, release the both hinges (1) from the U-frame track. *Right side hinge shown, left similar. 2. Using a small flat bladed tool or equivalent, release the inner locking tab (2) portion of the hinges from the U-frame tracks (3) and separate the hinges (1) from the track. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10827 NOTE: Placing a small rolled up piece of paper or equivalent, between the hinge and the sunroof opening may aid installation of the wind deflector. 3. Using needle-nose pliers (3) squeeze the retaining tabs on the forward hinges (2) and separate the wind deflector (1) from the hinges. 4. Slide the wind deflector assembly (1) rearward to the back of the roof opening (2) and remove. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10828 Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Including front hinges: 1. Position the spring arms down into the trough. 2. Place wind deflector arms in upward position engage the wind deflector blade into the U-frame. 3. Seat the retaining clips (2) fully. 4. Position the wind deflector hinges (1) into the U-frame at the notch (2) and secure down into the channel fully. *Right side hinge shown, left side similar. 5. Verify wind deflector operation. 6. Install the sun roof assembly. Without front hinges: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10829 1. Position wind deflector assembly (1) into the roof opening (2) and slide forward to the mounting point in the U-frame. 2. Position the wind deflector hinges (1) into the U-frame at the notch (2) and secure down into the channel fully. *Right side hinge shown, left side similar. NOTE: Placing a small rolled up piece of paper or equivalent, between the hinge and the sunroof opening may aid installation of the wind deflector. 3. Position the front of the wind deflector over the front hinges and seat down onto the retaining clips fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Channel-Drain Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove glass panel (2). 2. Remove the retaining screws (4). 3. Carefully slide water channel (1) forward to release tabs from U-frame (12) and remove from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 10834 1. Carefully place water channel (1) onto U-frame (12) and slide it rearward to lock tabs. 2. Install the water channel attaching screws (4) driver's side first then passenger side. 3. Tighten the screws to 1.5 Nm (12 in. lbs.). 4. Position glass panel (1) on to mechanism lift arms. 5. Start the glass attaching screws (3), and hand tighten. 6. Adjust sunroof glass. 7. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 10835 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Hose Removal REMOVAL FRONT HOSES 1. Move glass panel to the fully closed position. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Remove headliner. 4. Disconnect the drain hose from the sunroof housing (1). 5. Drain any liquid from hose connection. 6. Remove tube (2), as necessary. REAR HOUSING HOSE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 10836 1. Move glass panel to the fully closed position. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Remove headliner. 4. Disconnect the drain hose from the sunroof housing (1). 5. Drain any liquid from hose connection, if necessary. 6. Release the push pin fasteners (1) and remove the tube (2). Installation INSTALLATION FRONT HOSES Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 10837 1. Connect the new drain hose (2) to the sunroof housing (1) and test drainage. 2. Install headliner. 3. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. REAR HOUSING HOSE 1. Install the rear hose (2) and seat the push pin fasteners (1) fully. 2. Connect the new drain hose (1) to the sunroof housing and test drainage. 3. Install the quarter trim panels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Channel-Drain > Page 10838 4. Install headliner. 5. Connect the control switch wire connector and install control switch. 6. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove trim lace (13) by holding one end of the trim lace at the butt joint and pulling horizontally into the opening until lace is completely loose from the headliner/sunroof joint. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10843 Sunroof / Moonroof Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place butt joint of trim lace into position starting at the rear of the opening at the butt joint notch (14) in the U-frame. 2. Push lace into position. 3. Ensure that the corner radii is fully engage. 4. Once the original trim lace is attached to sunroof module using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, begin tucking the headliner under the lip on the trim lace working all the way around the opening. When installing a new trim lace, begin tucking the headliner under the lip as the tear cord is removed working all the way around the opening. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Adjustments Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Adjustments SUNROOF GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT 1. Move the sunshade (5) rearward to the open position. 2. Move the sunroof glass panel (2) to the fully closed position. 3. Loosen all glass attachment screws on both sides of the module such that the glass panel is adjustable in the vertical and fore-aft directions. 4. Cycle the sunroof open, closed, vent and closed again. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 10847 5. Standing outside the vehicle (one side at a time with one hand supporting the front corner of the glass panel) lift the front glass panel corner (3) until it is between flush and slightly under flush (0.00 to - 1.75 mm) with the front roof corner (2). User your free hand to snug up the glass bolt with sufficient force (finger tight) that the weight of the glass panel corner is supported. Repeat this process on the other side of the vehicle. 6. Move to the rear of the sunroof glass panel. Standing outside of the vehicle (one side at a time with one hand supporting the rear corner of the glass panel) lift the rear glass panel corner (3) until it is between flush and slightly over flush (0.00 to +1.75mm) with the rear roof corner (2). Use your free hand to snug up the glass bolt with sufficient force (finger tight) that the weight of the glass panel corner is supported. Repeat this process on the other side of the vehicle. 7. Check the flushness of the glass panel in the corners with a business card (1) (or other straight edged tool that won't scratch the glass or roof) held at a 45 degree angle to the vehicle's for/aft centerline. The preferred glass panel placement for blockage of wirer/air leaks is flush at all the corners. If this is not possible, adjust the glass panel's vertical placement within the tolerance ranges described above towards the flush position. 8. If the glass panel's vertical position needs to be adjusted, loosen the bolt at the corner and make the necessary adjustments. Tighten the bolt before moving onto the next corner. 9. Once the proper glass position has been achieved, tighten the six glass panel attaching screws to 3.5 Nm (31 in. lbs.). 10. Check for proper fit. If not OK, repeat glass panel adjustment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Move the glass panel (2) to the vent position. 2. Slide sunshade (5) rearward to the open position. 3. Remove the glass panel screws (3). 4. Lift off glass panel (2) and remove from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10850 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position glass panel (2) on to mechanism lift arms. 2. Start the attaching screws (3). 3. Connect a 12v power supply and move the sunroof to the vent position then to the closed position. 4. Adjust sunroof glass (2) to fit flush with roof line. 5. Tighten the screws (3). 6. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent NUMBER: 23-034-06 GROUP: Body DATE: August 24, 2006 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING PROVIDED IN ADVANCE. DO NOT ORDER PARTS OR PERFORM ANY ACTIONS RELATED TO THIS BULLETIN UNTIL AUGUST 31, 2006. SUBJECT: Moonroof (Sunroof) Makes A Pop-Thump Sound When Moving To The Vent Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves applying a liquid coating to the Moonroof seal. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2006 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a Power Moonroof (sales code GWA). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A pop/thump sound coming from the Moonroof when cycling from the "Closed" to the "Open" position. DIAGNOSIS: If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open the Moonroof to the 'Vent" position. 2. Clean the exposed Moonroof seal bulb with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 10859 3. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the rear Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work forward along the seal bulb (Fig. 1) and (Fig. 2). NOTE: Slower is better. A good application will have the appearance of being wet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 10860 4. Continue forward with the applicator until contact with the seal bulb can no longer be made (Fig. 3). 5. Repeat Step # 3 and Step # 4 on the other side of the glass panel. 6. After coating both sides and the rear, allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 7. Cycle the glass panel open by: a. Press and hold the "Open" button on the switch until the Moonroof is approximately half open. 8. Clean as much of the seal bulb as possible with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. 9. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the front Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work rearward along the seal bulb (Fig. 4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 10861 NOTE: Turning the applicator around can aid in getting the coating as far into the corner as possible (Fig. 5). NOTE: This area is important because it has been determined that from both front corners to about 3 inches inboard is where most of the sound originates. 10. Repeat Step # 8 and Step # 9 on the other side of the glass panel. 11. Allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 12. Close the Moonroof. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent NUMBER: 23-034-06 GROUP: Body DATE: August 24, 2006 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING PROVIDED IN ADVANCE. DO NOT ORDER PARTS OR PERFORM ANY ACTIONS RELATED TO THIS BULLETIN UNTIL AUGUST 31, 2006. SUBJECT: Moonroof (Sunroof) Makes A Pop-Thump Sound When Moving To The Vent Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves applying a liquid coating to the Moonroof seal. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2006 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a Power Moonroof (sales code GWA). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A pop/thump sound coming from the Moonroof when cycling from the "Closed" to the "Open" position. DIAGNOSIS: If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open the Moonroof to the 'Vent" position. 2. Clean the exposed Moonroof seal bulb with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 10867 3. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the rear Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work forward along the seal bulb (Fig. 1) and (Fig. 2). NOTE: Slower is better. A good application will have the appearance of being wet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 10868 4. Continue forward with the applicator until contact with the seal bulb can no longer be made (Fig. 3). 5. Repeat Step # 3 and Step # 4 on the other side of the glass panel. 6. After coating both sides and the rear, allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 7. Cycle the glass panel open by: a. Press and hold the "Open" button on the switch until the Moonroof is approximately half open. 8. Clean as much of the seal bulb as possible with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. 9. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the front Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work rearward along the seal bulb (Fig. 4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 10869 NOTE: Turning the applicator around can aid in getting the coating as far into the corner as possible (Fig. 5). NOTE: This area is important because it has been determined that from both front corners to about 3 inches inboard is where most of the sound originates. 10. Repeat Step # 8 and Step # 9 on the other side of the glass panel. 11. Allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 12. Close the Moonroof. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: Customer Interest Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10880 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10881 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start Memory Positioning Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start NUMBER: 08-036-06 GROUP: Electrical DATE: August 24, 2006 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET ON OR AFTER OCTOBER 6, 2006. StarSCAN(R) UPDATE CD 6.05 WAS THE LAST CD TO CONTAIN FLASH FILES. SUBJECT: FLASH: Wrong Driver Seat Position May Occur After A Remote Start Event OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Memory Seat Module (MSMD) with new software. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2007 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with Remote Start (sales code XBM). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The MSMD interprets the remote start event as an OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition instead of a remote start, resulting in either the movement of the driver seat to the memory driving position prior to driver entry or, no movement from the Easy Exit position following the actual OFF-to-RUN ignition key transition. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all systems are functioning as designed. If DTCs are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10887 REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 7.01 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN® for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404 StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Select "ECU View" 6. Touch the screen to highlight the MSMD in the list of modules. 7. Select "More Options" 8. Select "ECU Flash" 9. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash MSMD" screen for later reference. 10. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 11. Highlight the appropriate calibration then select "Download to Scantool". 12. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". 13. Highlight the listed calibration. 14. Select "Update Controller". Follow on screen instructions. NOTE: It take about 1 minute to show the flash update is successful. 15. When the update is complete, select "OK". 16. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash MS MD" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the MSMD programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, BCM, MIC, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Memory Positioning Module: > 08-036-06 > Aug > 06 > Memory Systems - Wrong Seat Position After Remote Start > Page 10888 Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10889 Memory Positioning Module: Locations Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10890 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10891 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10892 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10893 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10894 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10895 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10896 Memory Positioning Module: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARD P206 18LG/TN 3-4-5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6-7 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 8 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 9 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN 10 GROUND Z930 14BK/LB 11 - 12 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 13 - 14 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10897 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3-4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 5 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10898 6-Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C3 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10899 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 5 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 6 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 7-8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 9 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 11 - 12 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 13 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 14 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C4 Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10900 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR 4-5-6 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT Component Location - 39 Connector: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10901 Name : MODULE-SEAT MEMORY C5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (ADJUSTABLE PEDALS) Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARD Q100 20OR/WT 5 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 18OR/BK 6-Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 10902 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Memory Mirror Description DESCRIPTION There are two Memory Mirror Modules (these are sometimes referred to as Driver Door Modules (DDM) and Passenger Door Modules (PDM) within the memory system. One located in the driver door and one in the passenger door, just behind the door trim panel. The modules send a bus message to the power mirrors to adjust them to a preset position when a memory recall request has been made. The memory mirror modules also act as an interface in each door for electrical functions (door lock switches and door ajar switches). The Memory System makes available for immediate recall personalized preferences of the following: - Automatic temperature control settings. - Outside mirror positions. - Power adjustable brake and accelerator pedal position. - Power seat horizontal, vertical, recliner, and easy entry positions. - Radio push button station selections. The major components of the Memory System are: - Memory Selector Switch - located in the driver door trim panel. - Driver Memory Mirror Module (DMMM) - located in the driver door, behind the trim panel. - Passenger Memory Mirror Module (PMMM) - located in the passenger door, behind the trim panel. - Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) - located at ignition key cylinder. - Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter - located with ignition key. - Memory Seat Module (MSM) - located underneath the driver seat and also controls the Adjustable Pedals. - Radio - located in the instrument panel center stack. - Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) - located in the instrument panel center stack. The memory recall is available at the press of a button on the drivers door trim panel or, by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter if it is programmed to trigger the recall. Radio settings include up to 20 push button presets (10 AM and 10 FM), and the last station selection, even if it is not one of the 20 preset selections. Operation OPERATION The memory mirror module receives input from the door lock switches and sends that message to the cluster for door lock operation (vehicles equipped with memory system only). It also controls the mirror adjustment by receiving input from the mirror switch on the door trim panel. Sensors in the mirrors act as inputs to the memory mirror module in order to position the mirrors to presets by the driver(s). The power supply to the mirrors is supplied by the mirror memory modules. On vehicles equipped with a memory system, the front door ajar switches are inputs to the memory mirror module. The modules use this information for door lock inhibit etc. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10905 A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linke" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in a position other than Park or the seat belt is latched. Both driver and passenger modules provide active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) to aid in diagnosis. Both modules are identical in appearance with the exception of an extra ground wire on the driver side memory mirror module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10906 Memory Positioning Module: Description and Operation Module-Seat Memory Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The scan tool standardization process must be performed on the Memory Seat Module (MSM) any time a new module is installed or the existing module is reflashed. The Memory Seat Module (MSM) is located underneath the driver seat, towards the front and on the outboard side. It is used in conjunction with the other modules in the memory system to recall the seat to one of two preset seat functional adjustments (horizontal, vertical, and recliner). The switch for the memory seat programming and selection mounts on the driver door trim panel. The MSM also controls the adjustable pedals, both for the memory and manual functionality. The adjustable accelerator and brake pedals are available on SLT and Limited models. On Limited, their positioning can be stored for recall by the memory system, allowing for two drivers to have unique, pre-programmed settings. Operation OPERATION POWER/MEMORY SEAT The memory seat module receives input from the 8-way power seat switch, the driver seat position sensors, adjustable pedal control circuits (switch, sensor, and motor), and the data bus circuit. The memory switch, is wired to the memory mirror module which sends the message over the data bus. The memory seat module performs the following functions: - Positions the driver seat (vertical, horizontal, and recliner positions) and adjustable pedals. - Sends the memory save or recall (#1 or #2) command over the data bus circuit to the memory mirror modules, HVAC, and radio. - Provides for "linking" the key FOBs to memory. - Provides for the easy entry/exit feature. - Provides the tilt mirrors in reverse feature When a memory button is pressed (#1 or #2) on the memory switch, the driver door memory mirror module sends a recall message to the memory seat module (MSM). Then the MSM will position the driver seat and adjustable pedals to its preprogrammed location/setting. When the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter button is pressed, depending on which transmitter (#1 or #2), the SKREEM (RKE Receiver) sends the recall request and FOB number (#1 or #2) data message. This RKE transmitter function depends on if the MSM is programmed to trigger the recall (linked FOBs). A memory setting is saved by pressing the "set" button, then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the "set" button. A memory setting is recalled by pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button, or by pressing the unlock button on a "linked" Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. For driver safety, memorized settings can not be recalled if the transmission is in any position other than park or the seat belt is latched. A key FOB is "linked" to a memory setting by pressing the "set" button and then pressing either the memory 1 inch or 2 inch button within 5 seconds of pressing the set button, then by pressing the "lock" button on the selected key FOB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10907 The memory system "Easy Entry and /Exit" feature provides the driver with more room to enter or exit the vehicle. The Easy Entry and Exit feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. When the seat is in a memorized position, it will move rearward 55 millimeters or to the end of its travel, whichever occurs first, when the key is removed from the ignition switch lock cylinder. The seat will return to the memory position when the driver turns the vehicle's ignition switch out of the LOCK position. The memory system "learns" the seat and adjustable pedal motor maximum end positions when the motor reaches the limit of travel in any direction and stalls. Subsequently, movement will stop just short of that position to avoid extra stress on the motors and mechanisms. If the system learned a maximum position as a result of an obstruction, as for instance if a large object was placed on the floor behind the seat, the system can relearn the "true" maximum position through manually operating the power seat after the obstruction is removed. NOTE: It is normal for the power accessories contained in the memory system to stop at the maximum "learned" position and then continue to the "true" maximum position when the control switch is released and then applied in the same direction a second time. Certain functions and features of the memory system rely upon resources shared with other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. The CAN bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, internal controller hardware, and component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. For diagnosis of these electronic modules or of the CAN bus, the use of a scan tool and the proper diagnostic information are needed. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature provides for tilting the sideview (outside) mirrors down a predetermined angle, providing a better view of the ground next to the rear portion of the vehicle. The tilt mirrors in reverse feature is disabled when the vehicle leaves the factory. An authorized dealer can enable this feature. Operation of the tilt mirrors is as follows: - Sideview mirrors will tilt down when the vehicle transmission is shifted into Reverse. - Sideview mirrors will return to the original position when the vehicle transmission is shifted out of Reverse. ADJUSTABLE PEDALS The pedals swing on a large arc, the radius and angle of which were selected on the basis of ergonomic studies, that puts them in the proper position for use by the smaller driver - higher and angled upward as well as rearward. Powered by the small electric motor driving a gear train at each pedal, adjustment is precise, quiet, and smooth throughout the range. A paddle-type switch on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column actuates the electric motor-driven mechanism through the memory seat module (MSM). Pushing up the paddle brings the pedals closer and vice versa. Movement stops when the switch is released. MSM logic prevents pedal adjustment when the automatic speed control (cruise control) is set (controlling speed), and when the transmission is in reverse. This feature protects against a loss of reference position when neither foot is on the pedal. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Memory Mirror MEMORY MIRROR MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory mirror module should begin with the use of a scan tool and the appropriate Diagnostic information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10910 Memory Positioning Module: Testing and Inspection Module-Seat Memory MEMORY SEAT MODULE Any diagnosis of the memory seat system/module should begin with, the use of a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic service information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Memory Mirror Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) from module (1). 4. Remove fasteners (2) and module (1) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position module (1) on door and install fasteners (2). 2. Connect the electrical connector (3) to module (1). 3. Install the door trim panel. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10913 Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Module-Seat Memory Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 3. Unsnap the memory seat module (4) from the side brackets. 4. Pivot the module upward and disconnect the electrical connectors (1). 5. Pull the module rearward to remove it from the front of the seat frame (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place the module (4) into position making sure the front snaps into the seat frame (3). 2. Connect the memory seat module harness connectors (1). 3. Pivot the module (4) downward and snap it into place in the side brackets. 4. Install the driver seat cushion/cover (2). 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Using an appropriate scan tool go to the MSM miscellaneous functions and perform the standardization routine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Memory Positioning Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Memory Mirror > Page 10914 7. Verify system and vehicle operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10918 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10919 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Memory Positioning Systems > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 10920 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Component ID: 190 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 2 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 2 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10925 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10926 Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner Component ID: 191 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10927 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10928 Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10929 Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver Vertical Component ID: 192 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG 3 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10930 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10931 Power Seat Motor: Locations Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Driver Vertical Component ID: 195 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal > Page 10932 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-LEFT Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P177 18LG/RD 2 GROUND Z964 16BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10935 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Right Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-RIGHT Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P178 18LG/BR 2 GROUND Z964 16BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10936 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Component ID: 190 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 2 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 2 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10937 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10938 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner Component ID: 191 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10939 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10940 Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10941 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-LEFT Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P177 18LG/RD 2 GROUND Z964 16BK Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Right Component ID: 18 Component : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-RIGHT Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SEAT-2ND ROW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10942 Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P178 18LG/BR 2 GROUND Z964 16BK Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Horizontal Component ID: 190 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P115 14LG 2 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 2 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P117 14LG/LB 3 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL SENSOR GROUND G491 20VT/GY 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL POSITION SENSE G401 20VT/LG Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10943 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Driver Recliner Component ID: 191 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (EXCEPT MEMORY) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10944 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Component Location - 39 Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-DRIVER RECLINER Color : # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10945 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P143 14LG/GY 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P141 14LG/BR 3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSOR GROUND G493 20OR/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER POSITION SENSE G403 20DB/WT Component Location - 39 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Front Driver Vertical Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10946 Component ID: 192 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-FRONT DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P121 14LG/DB 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 2 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL UP DRIVER P119 14LG/DG 3 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G494 20YL/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G404 20VT/YL Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10947 Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Horizontal Component ID: 193 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER HORIZONTAL Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10948 1 PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P16 14LG/BR 2 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P14 14VT 3-4-Motor-Seat Adjuster-Passenger Recliner Component ID: 194 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER RECLINER Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-PASSENGER RECLINER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH UP P44 16LG/DG 2 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH DOWN P42 16LG/GY Motor-Seat Adjuster-Rear Driver Vertical Component ID: 195 Component : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Connector: Name : MOTOR-SEAT ADJUSTER-REAR DRIVER VERTICAL Color : # of pins : 4 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10949 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL DOWN DRIVER P113 14LG/WT 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 2 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL UP DRIVER P111 14LG/YL 3 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL SENSOR GROUND G492 20LB/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL POSITION SENSE G402 20VT/DB Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Seat-2nd Row-Left > Page 10950 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Motor-Seat Adjuster Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Motor-Seat Adjuster Removal REMOVAL WARNING: A seat structure that has seen significant load may have the locking mechanism activated and may exhibit the following symptoms: - Locking pawl (2) loose - Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame sidemember (1) - Height adjuster only works on outboard side - Broken or missing shear pin (3) If any one or more of these symptoms exist replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or death. FRONT TILT MOTOR 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative motor (1). 3. Remove the seat cushion and pan. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Motor-Seat Adjuster > Page 10953 4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fasteners holding the motor to the seat adjuster (1). 6. Remove motor from seat adjuster (2). HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR WARNING: Use caution when removing the height adjust motor (3) if the motor is inoperative, and the power seat is not in the full up position. The seat adjuster assembly (2) is under load from the height adjust spring and may cause the motor to rotate under pressure when the fasteners are removed. The seat adjuster assembly also may spring upward when the motor is removed. If the height adjust motor is operative, move the power seat to the full up position prior to disconnecting the battery. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Motor-Seat Adjuster > Page 10954 2. Remove the affected seat with the inoperative motor (3). 3. Remove the seat cushion and pan. 4. Disconnect the motor electrical connector. 5. Remove the fasteners (1) holding the motor (3) to the seat adjuster (2). 6. Remove screw and washer from the motor shaft. 7. Remove motor (3) from seat adjuster (2). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Motor-Seat Adjuster > Page 10955 WARNING: A seat structure that has seen significant load may have the locking mechanism activated and may exhibit the following symptoms: - Locking pawl (2) loose - Locking pawl (2) engaged into the seat frame sidemember (1) - Height adjuster only works on outboard side - Broken or missing shear pin (3) If any one or more of these symptoms exist replace the height adjuster assembly. Do not attempt any repairs. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or death. FRONT TILT MOTOR 1. Position motor (1) on seat adjuster (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Motor-Seat Adjuster > Page 10956 2. Install the fasteners (1) holding the motor to the seat adjuster (2). Tighten the screws to 5 Nm (44 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the motor electrical connector. 4. Install the seat cushion. 5. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan. 6. Install the seat assembly. 7. Connect the battery negative cable. 8. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly. HEIGHT ADJUST MOTOR 1. Ensure the seat adjuster (2) is in the full up position by pulling upward on the upper adjuster assembly. 2. Position motor (3) on seat adjuster (2). 3. Install the motor shaft screw and washer and tighten until snug. Do not torque screw at this time. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Motor-Seat Adjuster > Page 10957 4. Install the screws (1) holding the motor (3) to the seat adjuster (2). It may be necessary to twist the motor slightly to align the fastener holes. 5. Starting with the bottom screw, tighten the motor screws (1) to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 6. Tighten the motor shaft screw and washer to 6.5 Nm (57.5 in. lbs.). 7. Connect the motor electrical connector. 8. Install the seat cushion. 9. Clip the wire harness to cushion pan. 10. Install the seat assembly. 11. Connect the battery negative cable. 12. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Motor-Seat Adjuster > Page 10958 Power Seat Motor: Service and Repair Power Seat Recliner Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The recliner motor is serviced as part of the seat back frame. Do not attempt to transfer the motor as the service part will come equipped with a new motor installed. 1. Remove the seat back frame assembly. 2. Remove any parts that will need to be installed on new seat back frame assembly. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install parts from old seat back assembly as necessary. 2. Install the seat back (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger Power Seat Switch: Locations Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID: 444 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH DOWN P42 16LG/GY 2-3 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH UP P44 16LG/DG 4 PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P16 14LG/BR 5-6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD 7 GROUND Z975 14BK 8 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P14 14VT 9-10 - 11 - Component Location - 41 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 10963 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 10964 Power Seat Switch: Locations Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID: 443 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2-3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 5 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN 6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 7 GROUND Z971 16BK 8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT 9 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR 10 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 10965 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID: 443 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2-3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 5 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN 6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 7 GROUND Z971 16BK 8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT 9 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR 10 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 10968 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 10969 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID: 444 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH DOWN P42 16LG/GY 2-3 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH UP P44 16LG/DG 4 PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P16 14LG/BR 5-6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD 7 GROUND Z975 14BK 8 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P14 14VT 9-10 - 11 - Component Location - 41 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 10970 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The driver power seat can be adjusted in eight different ways using the power seat switch. The passenger power seat can be adjusted in four different ways. The power seat switch is located on the lower outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield on all models. The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 10973 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat adjuster or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. On vehicles equipped with memory system, a resistance signal is sent to the Memory Seat Module (MSM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, when the driver memory seat switch control knob is actuated. The MSM is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster motor. The adjuster motor operates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker may result in motor damage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10974 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. PASSENGER SEAT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10975 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switch. Refer to PASSENGER POWER SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. DRIVER WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the resistance of the power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 10976 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the seat cushion side panel from the seat and disconnect the electrical harness connector. 3. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the four mounting tabs that secure the power seat switch and separate switch from trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 10979 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power seat switch on the seat cushion side panel. Gently apply pressure to the switch until the four mounting tabs that secure the switch snap into place. 2. Connect the power seat switch electrical connector. 3. Install the seat cushion side panel on the seat. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Fabric Cleaning/Care Seat Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Fabric Cleaning/Care NUMBER: 23-021-06 REV. A GROUP: Body DATE: August 9, 2006 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-021-06, DATED MAY 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDES ADDITIONAL MODELS AND AN ADDITIONAL PART NUMBER. SUBJECT: YES Essentials(R) Stain, Odor, & Static Resistant Fabric Care MODELS: 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (DR) Ram Truck **2007 (HB/HG) **2007 (JK) **2007 (JS) Avenger/Sebring ** **2007 (KA) Nitro** 2007 (MK) Compass **2007 (ND) Dakota** 2007 (PM) Caliber **2007 (PT) PT Cruiser** NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with YES Essentials(R) stain, odor, & static resistant fabric (sales code XGW). PARTS REQUIRED: The premium cloth upholstery in the vehicles listed is the new YES Essentials(R) stain, odor, & static resistant fabric. YES Essentials(R) fabric is an easy-care material that repels and releases soil to maintain the like-new appearance. Spills remain on the surface of the fabric to allow for easy clean up and to prevent stains and odors. The material is antimicrobial and static resistant. YES Essentials(R) fabric may be cleaned in the following manner: ^ Do NOT use any solvents or fabric protectants on Yes Essentials(R) fabric. ^ Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel. ^ Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Interior - Fabric Cleaning/Care > Page 10984 ^ For tough stains, apply Mopar(R) Total Clean, p/n 04897840AA, or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove the soap residue. ^ For grease stains, apply Mopar(R) Multi-purpose Cleaner, p/n 05127532AA, to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove the soap residue. CAUTION: YES Essentials(R) stain, odor, & static resistant fabric is NOT compatible with aftermarket fabric-protecting coatings. Any additional protection will damage the performance of the YES Essentials(R) stain, odor, & static resistant fabric. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Seat Heater: Locations Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Component ID: 119 Component : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER C1 Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 2 GROUND Z971 16BK Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10989 Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER C1 Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (COMPONENT SIDE) Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER 18YL 2 GROUND 18YL Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10990 Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (COMPONENT SIDE) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z971 18BK 2 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10991 Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10992 Seat Heater: Locations Heater-Seat Back-Driver Component ID: 121 Component : HEATER-SEAT BACK-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT BACK-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z971 18YL 2 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18YL Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10993 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Component ID: 119 Component : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER C1 Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 2 GROUND Z971 16BK Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10996 Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER C1 Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (COMPONENT SIDE) Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER 18YL 2 GROUND 18YL Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10997 Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (COMPONENT SIDE) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z971 18BK 2 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10998 Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 10999 Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Cushion Pad-Passenger Component ID: 120 Component : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER C1 Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18LG/VT 2 GROUND Z972 20BK/LG 2 GROUND Z972 20BK Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER C1 Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (COMPONENT SIDE) Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER 18YL 2 GROUND 18YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 11000 Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (COMPONENT SIDE) Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z972 18BK 2 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18LG/RD Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 11001 Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Seat Back-Driver Component ID: 121 Component : HEATER-SEAT BACK-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT BACK-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z971 18YL 2 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18YL Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 11002 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 11003 Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Seat Back-Passenger Component ID: 122 Component : HEATER-SEAT BACK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT BACK-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z972 18YL 2 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Front - Service Information Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats - Front - Service Information Description HEATED SEAT SYSTEM Vehicles with the heated seat option can be visually identified by the two heated seat switches located in the center stack of the instrument panel. The heated seat system allows the driver and front seat passenger to select from two different levels of electrical seat heating (HI/LO). The heated seat system for this vehicle includes the following major components, which are described in further detail later in this section: - Heated Seat Elements - Four heated seat elements are used per vehicle. Two heated seat elements are integral to each seat, one in the seat back and the other in the seat cushion. - Heated Seat Module - One heated seat module is used per vehicle. The Heated Seat Module is mounted behind the right rear D-pillar trim panel. This module contains the control logic and software for the front heated seat system. The module also communicates on the CAN data bus network. - Heated Seat Switches - Two heated seat switches are used per vehicle, one for each heated seat. Both switches are mounted in the instrument panel center stack. - Instrument Cluster (CCN) - A Cab Compartment Node (CCN) is part of the instrument cluster on this vehicle. The CCN utilizes integrated software and information carried on the CAN data bus network. The Cab Compartment Node (CCN) serves as the link between the heated seat switches and the heated seat module. Operation HEATED SEAT SYSTEM The heated seat system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuits are used, so that the heated seat system will only operate when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. The heated seat system will turn Off automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned to any position except On or Accessory. A Heated Seat Module is used to control the heated seat system. The module responds to heated seat switch messages and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switches are depressed a resistance signal is sent to the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) or instrument cluster. The Cab Compartment Node (CCN) then sends a CAN bus message to the heated seat module, signaling the module to energize the heating element for the selected seat. The Cab Compartment Node (CCN) also turns on the HI and LO LED indicators on each of the heated seat switches. The heated seat module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When the pre-programmed duty-cycle has been achieved (approx. 2 hours), the module de-energizes the solid-state relay. The module will continue to cycle the solid-state relay as needed to maintain the temperature set point. No heated seat sensors are used with the heated seat system option. The module will automatically turn off the heating elements if it detects an OPEN or LOW short in the heating element circuit. See the owner's manual in the vehicle glove box for more information on the features, use and operation of the heated seat system. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Front - Service Information > Page 11006 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Front Seats Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the optional heated seat system have two heated seat element located in each front seat. One heating element is used for each seat cushion and another for each seat back. Each of the heated seat element consists of a single length of resistor wire that is routed in a zigzag pattern and captured between the leather trim cover and the seat cushion assembly. Short pigtail wires with connectors are soldered to each end of each resistor wire element grid, which connect all of the element grids to each other in series with the heated seat module through the wire harness. The heated seat elements cannot be repaired. If found to be damaged or faulty, a new heating element assembly must be installed. Operation OPERATION One end of the heated seat element resistor wire is connected to ground at all times through a splice under the seat. Battery current is directed to the other end of the heated seat element resistor wire by the energized N-channel Field Effect Transistor located within the heated seat module. The heated seat module will energize the N-FET when the heated seat switch is depressed in the Low or High position. As electrical current passes through the heating element grid, the resistance of the wire used in the element disperses some of that electrical current in the form of heat. The heat produced by the heated seat element grid then radiates through the underside of the seat cushion and seat back trim covers, warming the seat cover and its occupant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Front - Service Information > Page 11007 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats - Second Row - Service Information Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles with the heated second row seat option can be visually identified by the two heated seat switches (2) located in the rear center floor console (3). The heated seat system allows the second row seat passengers to select from two different levels of electrical seat heating (HI/LO). The heated second row seat system for this vehicle includes the following major components: - Heated Seat Switch/Module - Two heated seat switch/modules are used per vehicle, including two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps for heat level indication. One switch/module for the left and one for the right second row seats. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated second row seat system. The switch/modules are mounted in the front of the rear center floor console. - Heated Seat Elements - Four heated seat elements are used per vehicle, one for each second row seat back and seat cushion. The elements are integral to the second row seat cushion and seat back foam and cannot be removed, once installed at the factory. Operation OPERATION The heated second row seat system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Fused ignition switch output (run) circuits are used, so that the heated second row seat system will only operate when the ignition switch is in the On position. The system will turn Off automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned to any position except On. A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated second row seat system. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the second row seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after thirty minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue for another thirty minutes and the system will then be automatically turned off. The system will automatically turn off the heating elements if it detects an OPEN or LOW short in the heating element circuit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Front - Service Information > Page 11008 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heating Element - Second Row Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the optional heated second row seat system have four, carbon fiber heated second row seat elements. One element for each second row seat back and seat cushion. The elements are integral to the second row seat cushion and seat back foam and cannot be removed, once installed at the factory. Each of the heated second row seat elements consists of multiple heating circuits operating in parallel throughout the carbon fiber element. The heated second row seat elements are permanently secured to the seat foam assembly. If a malfunction occurs in one or more of the individual carbon fiber circuits, the others will continue to provide heat. The heated second row seat elements cannot be repaired. If found to be damaged or inoperative, a new heating element assembly must be installed. Operation OPERATION One end of the heated second row seat element is connected to ground at all times through a splice and connector under the rear center floor console. Battery current is directed to the other end of the heated second row seat element by the heated seat switch/module. The heated seat switch/module will energize the heated second row seat element when the heated seat switch/module button is depressed in the Low or High position. As electrical current passes through the heated second row seat element, the resistance of the wire used in the element disperses some of the electrical current in the form of heat. The heat produced by the heated second row seat element then radiates through the underside of the seat cushion and seat back trim covers, warming the seat cover and its occupant. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Seats Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Front Seats Diagnosis And Testing HEATED SEAT SYSTEM In order to obtain conclusive testing of the heated seat system, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus system must be checked. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the heated seat system requires the use of a Scan Tool and the Service and Body Diagnostic Information. The Scan Tool can provide vital information to the technician trying to find a problem with the heated seat system. Diagnostic logic is built into the heated seat module and the instrument cluster (CCN) to help the person trying to locate the problem by the most efficient means possible. Anytime a problem is suspected, a Scan Tool should be obtained and used to retrieve any stored fault codes in the heated seat module and/or instrument cluster. If diagnostic fault codes are present in the module, record them on a piece of paper immediately before proceeding any further. Then, use these fault codes to identify the problem by verifying the fault code. Example, If the module records "DRIVER SEAT HEAT OUTPUT OPEN" fault code, locate the diagnostic procedure for this code in the appropriate Body Diagnostic information and follow the steps until the specific problem is located and resolved. Once the problem is thought to be corrected, erase the stored fault code using the Scan Tool and verify correct system operation. If the heated seat system is functioning correctly, verify that there are no other stored codes in the module and return the vehicle to service. If the fault code could not be verified, such as not finding anything wrong when following the diagnostic steps in the Body Diagnostic information. This is a good indication that a INTERMITTENT problem may be present. You must than attempt to find the intermittent problem, such as moving the heating element within the seat while testing continuity or wiggling the wire harness/electrical connectors under the seat while testing continuity. Always, eliminate all other potential problems before attempting to replace module. PRELIMINARY TEST Before testing the individual components in the heated seat system, check the following: - Using Scan Tool, check the heated seat module for any stored fault codes. Record these codes on paper for reference and resolve using the appropriate Body Diagnostic information. - Check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated seat system. - If the heated seat switch backlighting does not light with the ignition switch in the On position, check the fused ignition switch fuse in the integrated power module. If OK, Refer to Power Seat Switch testing. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse or repair the open ground circuit as required. - If the heated seat switch HI/LO LED indicators do not light with the ignition switch in the On position and the heated seat switch in the Low or High position, check the fused ignition switch fuse in the integrated power module. If OK, Refer to Power Seat Switch testing. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. Heater-Cushion Pad HEATED SEAT ELEMENT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Seats > Page 11011 The wire harness connectors (2&3) for the heating elements are located under the seat (1). NOTE: When checking heated seat elements for continuity, be certain to move the heating element being checked. Moving the element, such as sitting in the seat will eliminate the possibility of an intermittent open in the element which would only be evident if the element was in a certain position. Failure to check the element in various positions could result in an incomplete test. 1. Locate and disconnect the seat electrical connector. 2. Check for continuity between the circuit leading in and out of the appropriate heated seat element. There should be continuity (less than 6 ohms). If OK, Refer to Seat Heater Control Module. If not OK, replace the heated seat element. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Seats > Page 11012 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Heated Seats - Second Row - Service Information HEATED SECOND ROW SEAT SYSTEM There are two methods of diagnosing the heated second row seat system. The "HEATED SEAT SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSIS" is to be performed when the system is inoperative and one or more of the heated seat switch/module Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps are flashing. The "HEATED SEAT SYSTEM BASE DIAGNOSIS" is to be performed when the system is inoperative and no LEDs are flashing or lighting when the switch/module buttons are pressed. HEATED SEAT SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Before testing the individual components in the heated second row seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated second row seat system. The heated second row seat system is capable of performing some self-diagnostics. The following table depicts the various monitored failures which will be reported to the vehicle operator or technician by flashing the individual heated seat switch/module Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps. Heated Second Row Seat System Self-Diagnosis Table for failure identification. The left heated seat switch/module indicator lamps will flash if a failure occurs in the left heated second row seat, and the right heated seat switch/module indicator lamps will flash for a right heated second row seat failure. If a monitored heated second row seat system failure occurs, the switch/module indicator lamps will flash at a pulse rate of about one-half second on, followed by about one-half second off for a duration of about one minute after the switch/module for the inoperative heated second row seat is depressed in either the Low or High direction. This process will repeat every time the inoperative heated seat switch/module is actuated until the problem has been corrected. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Diagnostic logic is built into the heated seat switch/module to help locate the problem by the most efficient means possible. Anytime a problem is suspected, locate the diagnosis and testing procedure for the component in question and follow the steps until the specific problem is located and resolved. Once the problem is thought to be corrected, verify correct system operation. If the heated second row seat system is functioning correctly return the vehicle to service. If a problem could not be verified such as not finding anything wrong when following the diagnostic procedure, this is a good indication that an INTERMITTENT problem may be present. You must then attempt to find the intermittent problem by moving the heating element within the seat while testing continuity or wiggling the wire harness's/electrical connectors under the seat while testing continuity. Always, eliminate all other potential problems before attempting to replace the heated seat switch/module. HEATED SEAT SYSTEM BASE DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Before testing the individual components in the heated second row seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated second row seat system. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. PRELIMINARY TEST - If a single LED indicator lamp for one heated seat switch/module does not operate and the heated second row seat elements heat, replace the Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Seats > Page 11013 switch with the inoperative indicator lamp. - If both LED indicator lamps for a heated seat switch/module operate, but the heated second row seat elements do not heat, Heated Seat testing to check the suspect heated second row seat elements. If the elements test OK, proceed to STEP 1. - If both second row seats fail to heat and the indicator lamps on the heated seat switch/modules for both seats fail to operate, test the heated second row seat fuses in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If the heated second row seat fuses check OK, go to STEP 1. LEFT SECOND ROW HEATED SEAT SWITCH/MODULE 1. Remove the heated seat switch/modules from the second row center floor console. 2. Connect the battery negative cable. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Check for battery voltage on terminals 4 and 6 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat. Battery voltage should be present on both terminals. If OK go to STEP 5. If NOT OK repair the open or shorted fused B(+) circuit as required. 5. Check for continuity between ground terminal 1 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and a good ground. If OK go to STEP 6. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. 6. Check for continuity between the heated second row seat element supply circuit terminal 3 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and the heated second row seat element connector of the inoperative seat. If OK go to STEP 7. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted supply circuit as required. 7. Perform the heated second row seat element diagnosis for the inoperative seat. If the elements test OK, replace the inoperative heated seat switch/module. If NOT OK, replace the inoperative heated second row seat element. RIGHT SECOND ROW HEATED SEAT SWITCH/MODULE 8. Remove the heated seat switch/modules from the second row center floor console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Seats > Page 11014 9. Connect the battery negative cable. 10. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 11. Check for battery voltage on terminals 4 and 6 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat. Battery voltage should be present on both terminals. If OK go to STEP 5. If NOT OK repair the open or shorted fused B(+) circuit as required. 12. Check for continuity between ground terminal 1 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and a good ground. If OK go to STEP 6. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. 13. Check for continuity between the heated second row seat element supply circuit terminal 3 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and the heated second row seat element connector of the inoperative seat. If OK go to STEP 7. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted supply circuit as required. 14. Perform the heated second row seat element diagnosis for the inoperative seat. If the elements test OK, replace the inoperative heated seat switch/module. If NOT OK, replace the inoperative heated second row seat element. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Seats > Page 11015 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Heating Element - Second Row Heated Seat HEATED REAR SEAT ELEMENT Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information. The wire harness connectors (2) for the second row cushion heating elements are located under the rear center floor console on the console bracket (1). The harness connectors can be accessed by removing the rear center floor console. The wire harness connectors (3) for the second row seat back (1) heating elements are located on the inner second row seat cushion (2) to seat back bracket. The harness connector can be accessed by removing the bracket trim cover. NOTE: When checking heated second row seat elements for continuity, be certain to move the heating element being checked. Moving the element, such as sitting in the seat will eliminate the possibility of an intermittent open in the element which would only be evident if the element was in a certain position. Failure to check the element in various positions could result in an incomplete test. 1. Locate and disconnect the seat electrical connector. 2. Check the resistance between the circuit leading in and out of the suspect heated seat element. The resistance should be between 3.8 - 4.8 ohms for a seat cushion element and 4.3 - 5.4 ohms for a seat back element. If OK, Refer to Heated Seats testing for further heated second row seat system diagnosis. If not OK, replace the inoperative heated second row seat element. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats Seat Heater: Service and Repair Front Seats Removal REMOVAL Do not remove the OEM heating elements (3) from the seat or seat back cushions. The original element is permanently attached and cannot be removed without permanent damage. The replacement heating element is designed to be applied directly on the seat cushion. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the appropriate seat cushion or seat back trim cover. 3. Disconnect the inoperative heated seat cushion or seat back element electrical connectors (2). 4. Locate the wires leading from the inoperative heating element and cut them off flush with the edge of the original heating element. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Peel off the adhesive backing on the back of the replacement heating element and stick directly on the foam cushion or directly on top of the original heating element. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11018 CAUTION: During the installation of the replacement heating element, be careful not to fold or crease the element assembly. Folds or creases will cause premature failure. 2. Connect the new heating element electrical connectors (1&2). 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Verify heated seat system operation. 5. Install the appropriate seat cushion or seat back trim cover. Make certain the seat wire harness is correctly routed through the seat and seat back. The excess wire between the cushion and back elements should be securely tucked between the rear of the cushion foam and the rear carpet flap of the trim cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11019 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Heating Element - Second Row Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Do not remove the factory installed heating elements from the seat or seat back cushions. The original element is permanently attached and cannot be removed without permanent damage. The replacement heating element is designed to be applied directly on top of the inoperative factory installed heating element. SEAT CUSHION ELEMENT 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the appropriate seat cushion cover. 3. Remove the rear center floor console. 4. Disconnect the inoperative heated second row seat cushion element electrical connector (2) and remove the harness routing clip from the console bracket (1). 5. Locate the wires leading from the inoperative heating element and cut them off flush with the edge of the original heating element. SEAT BACK ELEMENT 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the appropriate seat back trim cover (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11020 3. Remove the inner second row seat cushion (2) to seat back (1) bracket trim cover. 4. Disconnect the inoperative heated second row seat back element electrical connector (3) and remove the harness routing clip. 5. Locate the wires leading from the inoperative heating element and cut them off flush with the edge of the original heating element. Installation INSTALLATION SEAT CUSHION ELEMENT CAUTION: During the installation of the replacement heating element, be careful not to fold or crease the element assembly. Folds or creases will cause premature failure. 1. Peel off the adhesive backing on the back of the replacement heating element (2) and stick directly on top of the factory installed heating element (1). 2. Connect the heated second row seat cushion element electrical connector (2) and install the harness routing clip to the rear center floor console bracket (1). 3. Install the rear center floor console. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated rear seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11021 6. Install the appropriate seat cushion cover. NOTE: Make certain the seat wire harness is correctly routed through the seat and seat back. The excess wire between the cushion and back elements should be securely tucked between the rear of the cushion foam and the rear carpet flap of the trim cover. SEAT BACK ELEMENT CAUTION: During the installation of the replacement heating element, be careful not to fold or crease the element assembly. Folds or creases will cause premature failure. NOTE: Second row heated seat cushion shown, second row heated seat back similar. 1. Peel off the adhesive backing on the back of the replacement heating element (2) and stick directly on top of the factory installed heating element (1). 2. Connect the heated second row seat back element electrical connector (3) and install the harness routing clip. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Verify heated rear seat system operation. 5. Install the appropriate seat back trim cover (1). NOTE: Make certain the seat wire harness is correctly routed through the seat and seat back. The excess wire between the cushion and back elements should be securely tucked between the rear of the cushion foam and the rear carpet flap of the trim cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations Seat Heater Control Module: Locations Component ID: 176 Component : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Connector: Name : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z387 20BK 2 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 3 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 4 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18BR/VT 5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11025 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11026 Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 176 Component : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Connector: Name : MODULE-HEATED SEAT Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z387 20BK 2 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 3 DRIVER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P187 18LG/BR 4 PASSENGER SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER P188 18BR/VT 5 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 6 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR Component Location - 47 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 11027 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Heated Seat Seat Heater Control Module: Description and Operation Module-Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION The heated seat module (2) is located behind the right rear D-pillar trim (1). The heated seat module has a single electrical connector (3). The heated seat module is an microprocessor designed to use CAN bus messages from the cluster Cabin Compartment Node (CCN) to operate the heated seat elements in both front seats. Operation OPERATION The heated seat module operates on fused battery current received from the ignition switch. The module is grounded at all times through a ground lug on the right rear D-pillar. Inputs to the module include CAN bus messages and standard hardwired 12volt power and ground. In response to those inputs the heated seat module controls the battery current to the heated seat elements. When a heated seat switch CAN bus signal is received by the heated seat module, the module energizes the selected heated seat element. The Low heat set point is about 38° C (100.4° F), and the High heat set point is about 42° C (107.6° F). If the heated seat module detects a heated seat element OPEN or SHORT circuit, it will record and store an diagnostic trouble code (DTC). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Module-Heated Seat > Page 11030 Seat Heater Control Module: Description and Operation Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules (2) mounted in the front face of the second row center floor console (3) operate the heated second row seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated second row seat system. If any of the heated second row seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated second row seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after thirty minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue for another thirty minutes and the system will then be automatically turned off. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11031 Seat Heater Control Module: Testing and Inspection HEATED SEAT MODULE 1. Test the appropriate heated seat element. 2. Test the appropriate heated seat switch. 3. Using a voltmeter, backprobe the heated seat module connector, do not disconnect. Check for voltage at the appropriate pin cavities. 12v should be present. If OK go to STEP 4, if Not, repair the open or shorted voltage supply circuit as required. 4. Using a ohmmeter, backprobe the appropriate heated seat module connector, do not disconnect. Check for proper continuity to ground on the ground pin cavities. Continuity should be present. If OK test the Cabin compartment Node (CCN) cluster using a scan tool for proper heated seat system function. If Not OK, Repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Module-Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Open the liftgate and remove the upper D-pillar trim from the vehicle. 3. Remove the lower D-pillar trim from the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the heated seat module (2). 5. Unsnap the heated seat module (2) from the D-pillar (1). 6. Remove the heated seat module (2) from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the heated seat module on the D-pillar (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 11034 2. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the heated seat module (2). 3. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 4. Check for proper heated seat system operation. 5. Install the upper and lower D-pillar trim to the vehicle. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 11035 Seat Heater Control Module: Service and Repair Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules (2) from the rear center floor console (3) by gently prying up from the edge of the switch/module bezel (1). Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Module-Heated Seat > Page 11036 1. Align the tabs (1) of the switch/module (2) to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel (1) into the mounting hole in the center console (3) until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 423 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : RED # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P81 20TN/OR 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z968 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 DRIVER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P83 20TN/WT 6 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P7 20LG/YL Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 11041 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 11042 Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 425 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P82 20TN/LB 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z978 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P84 20TN/DG 6 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P8 20LG/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 11043 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear Component ID: 424 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z964 16BK 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P177 18LG/RD 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 5-6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11046 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Right Rear Component ID: 426 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z964 16BK 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P178 18LG/BR 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 5-6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11047 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 423 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : RED # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P81 20TN/OR 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z968 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 DRIVER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P83 20TN/WT 6 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P7 20LG/YL Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11048 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11049 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 425 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P82 20TN/LB 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z978 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P84 20TN/DG 6 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P8 20LG/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11050 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Switch-Heated Seat Description HEATED SEAT SWITCH The heated seat switches are both mounted in the instrument panel. The two switches are snapped into mounting holes in the instrument panel center bezel (1). The two heated seat switches (2) and (3) are identical in appearance and construction, except for the location of a keyway in the connector receptacle on the back of each switch. The instrument panel wire harness connectors for the heated seat switches are keyed to match the connector receptacles so that the two heated seat switches can only be connected to the proper heated seat. Each momentary, bidirectional rocker-type heated seat switch provides a resistor-multiplexed signal to the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). Each switch has a center neutral position and momentary Low and High positions so that the driver and the front seat passenger can select a preferred seat heating level. Each heated seat switch has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Each switch also has one indicator lamp for back lighting of the switch when the ignition switch is in the Run position. The five LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch is faulty or damaged the individual heated seat switch assembly must be replaced. Operation HEATED SEAT SWITCH The heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. Depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary High or Low position provides a hard-wired resistor multiplexed signal to the Cabin Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat > Page 11053 Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN is responsible for supplying the CAN bus message to the heated seat module, signaling the module to power the heated seat element of the selected seat and maintain the temperature setting. If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position (Low or High) than the currently selected state, the CCN will go through the process again to change the temperature setting. If a heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state, the CCN and heated seat module interprets the second input as a request to turn the seat heater OFF. The CCN will then signal the heated seat module to turn the heated seat elements for that seat off. The backlighting LED's in each of the heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The ground side of the indicator lamp is divided by a separate lamp driver circuit in the CCN. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat > Page 11054 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules (2) mounted in the front face of the second row center floor console (3) operate the heated second row seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated second row seat system. If any of the heated second row seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated second row seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after thirty minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue for another thirty minutes and the system will then be automatically turned off. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11055 Seat Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection HEATED SEAT SWITCH Refer to the Wiring for complete heated seat system wiring diagrams. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. If the problem being diagnosed involves inoperative heated seat switch back lighting and the heated seat elements do heat, disconnect the inoperative switch and check for continuity between the ground pin at the heated seat switch connector and ground. If there is no continuity, repair an open wire between ground and the heated seat switch connector. If there is continuity, replace the inoperative heated seat switch. If the problem being diagnosed involves a heated seat switch indicator lamp that remains illuminated after the heated seat has been turned Off. Also refer to the Body Diagnostic Information for additional diagnosis and testing procedures. 2. Check the fused ignition switch output (run) fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run) fuse in the PDC. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition switch output (run) circuit to the ignition switch as required. 4. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the connector receptacle on the back of the heated seat switch to be tested. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run) circuit cavity of the heated seat switch. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition switch output (run) circuit to the PDC fuse as required. 5. Check the continuity and resistance values of the heated seat switch in the Neutral, Low and High positions as shown in the Heated Seat Switch Continuity chart below. If OK, refer to Heated Seats testing. If not OK, replace the faulty heated seat switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Front Seats Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the heated seat switch bezel and both switches from the center bezel as a unit. 4. From the back of the heated seat switch bezel (2), gently pry the switch free and push the heated seat switch out through the rear of the bezel. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11058 NOTE: When installing the heated seat switches, be certain they are installed in the proper mounting holes of the heated seat switch bezel (2). The heated seat switches are identified by a keyway in the connector receptacle on the back of each switch. 1. From the back of the heated seat switch bezel, gently push the heated seat switch in through the rear of the bezel. 2. Install the center bezel on the instrument panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11059 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules (2) from the rear center floor console (3) by gently prying up from the edge of the switch/module bezel (1). Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11060 1. Align the tabs (1) of the switch/module (2) to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel (1) into the mounting hole in the center console (3) until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11066 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11067 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11068 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 427 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE G70 20VT/LB 2 GROUND Z926 20BK Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11069 Component Location - 10 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 11070 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the stamped metal inner left fender mounting flange within the engine compartment. A molded plastic striker secured to the underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11073 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the striker on the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kilohm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting hole, the plunger is depressed by the striker on the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export vehicle theft or domestic remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Removal Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker is not intended for reuse. If the striker is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the hood ajar switch striker (2) toward the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) far enough to disengage it. 3. Remove the striker from the inner hood panel reinforcement and discard. Switch SWITCH 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left front fender inner shield, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (1) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (2). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11076 receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11077 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Installation Striker STRIKER NOTE: The hood ajar switch striker cap is not intended for reuse. If the striker cap is removed from the hood inner reinforcement for any reason, it must be replaced. 1. Position the new hood ajar switch striker (2) into the large end of the keyed mounting hole (3) in the inner hood panel reinforcement (1) over the hood ajar switch. 2. Using hand pressure, slide the striker upward into the small end of the mounting hole in the inner hood panel reinforcement until it is fully engaged. 3. Close and latch the hood. Switch SWITCH 1. Position the hood ajar switch (1) near the mounting hole (2) in the left front fender inner shield. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11078 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Sensor: Locations Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11082 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11083 Pedal Positioning Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 353 Component : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SENSOR-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR RETURN G912 20VT/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SIGNAL G12 20VT/BR 3 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SENSOR SUPPLY G11 20VT/TN Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 11084 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations Pedal Positioning Switch: Locations Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11088 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11089 Pedal Positioning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 420 Component : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Connector: Name : SWITCH-ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD P205 18LG/DB Pin Description Circuit 1 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS SWITCH REARWARDQ100 20OR/WT 2 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS RELAY OUTPUT A85 18RD/LB 2 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 3-4 GROUND Z146 20BK/LB 5-6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR REARWARDP206 18LG/TN 6 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS MOTOR FORWARD Q900 20OR/BK Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11090 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (2) from the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Remove the switch from the lower drivers side bezel by squeezing the retaining clips together and pushing the switch outwards Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Pedal Positioning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11093 Pedal Positioning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch (1) to the lower drivers side bezel by pushing the switch inwards seating the retaining clips to the lower drivers side bezel. 2. Reconnect the electrical connector (2) to the adjustable pedal switch (1). 3. Install the lower drivers side bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 11098 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 11099 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 11100 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 11101 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 11102 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG > Page 11103 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Liftgate Release PLG Component ID: 432 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE RELEASE PLG Color : # of pins : 4 A-B LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN C GROUND Z957 20BK D-- Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 11106 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 11107 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 11108 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 11109 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 11110 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 11111 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Liftgate Release PLG > Page 11112 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11115 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11116 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch power window and power lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the door module is inoperative, replace the faulty door module. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty window/lock switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty window/lock switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11117 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11120 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component ID: 434 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : GRAY # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P76 20TN/LB 3 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 4 GROUND Z13 20BK/WT 4 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 5 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 6 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 6 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 7 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 8 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVERP74 20TN/OR 8 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 9 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 9 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 10 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11124 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11125 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 434 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : GRAY # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3 MIRROR COMMON DRIVER P76 20TN/LB 3 MIRROR COMMON SWITCH SENSE P710 20LG 4 GROUND Z13 20BK/WT 4 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 5 FUSED B(+) A215 20RD/LG 6 PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P72 20TN/GY 6 MIRROR VERTICAL UP SWITCH SENSE P706 20LG/GY 7 DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER P71 20TN/DG 7 MIRROR VERTICAL DOWN SWITCH SENSE P705 20LG/OR 8 PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVERP74 20TN/OR 8 MIRROR HORIZONTAL RIGHT SWITCH SENSE P704 20LG/TN 9 DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER P75 20TN/LG 9 MIRROR HORIZONTAL LEFT SWITCH SENSE P703 20DB/LG 10 - Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11126 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power mirror switch includes the following: - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11129 Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. In vehicles without Memory Mirrors the power mirror switch circuitry controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. In vehicles with Memory Mirrors the mirror switch connects to the driver power mirror module. The driver memory mirror module uses the mirror switch inputs to control the battery current and ground feeds to driver mirror motor and sends a CAN Bus message to the passenger mirror module. The passenger mirror module controls the battery current and ground feeds to passenger mirror motors based on the CAN bus message from the driver memory module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11130 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER MIRROR SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power mirror switch. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch. 3. Remove the power mirror switch from the window/lock switch assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11133 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install power mirror switch to window/lock switch assembly. 2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches. 3. Install window/lock switch assembly. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger Power Seat Switch: Locations Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID: 444 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH DOWN P42 16LG/GY 2-3 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH UP P44 16LG/DG 4 PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P16 14LG/BR 5-6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD 7 GROUND Z975 14BK 8 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P14 14VT 9-10 - 11 - Component Location - 41 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 11138 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 11139 Power Seat Switch: Locations Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID: 443 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2-3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 5 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN 6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 7 GROUND Z971 16BK 8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT 9 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR 10 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Seat-Passenger > Page 11140 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Driver Component ID: 443 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P41 14LG/GY Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX RETURN P28 20DB/WT 2-3 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER UP DRIVER P43 14LG/VT 4 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P17 14LG/DG 4 DRIVER SEAT FRONT VERTICAL/RECLINER SWITCH MUX P311 20VT 5 DRIVER SEAT FRONT DOWN DRIVER P21 14LG/TN 6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD/GY 7 GROUND Z971 16BK 8 DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER P15 14LG/WT 9 DRIVER SEAT FRONT UP DRIVER P19 14LG/LB 10 DRIVER SEAT REAR DOWN DRIVER P13 14LG/OR 10 DRIVER SEAT SWITCH MUX SUPPLY P29 20LG/WT 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR UP P11 14LG/YL 11 DRIVER SEAT REAR VERTICAL/HORIZONTAL SWITCH MUXP309 20BR Component Location - 39 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 11143 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 11144 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat-Passenger Component ID: 444 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 11 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH DOWN P42 16LG/GY 2-3 PASSENGER SEAT RECLINER SWITCH UP P44 16LG/DG 4 PASSENGER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER P16 14LG/BR 5-6 FUSED B(+) A940 12RD 7 GROUND Z975 14BK 8 DRIVER SEAT RECLINER DOWN DRIVER P14 14VT 9-10 - 11 - Component Location - 41 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat-Driver > Page 11145 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The driver power seat can be adjusted in eight different ways using the power seat switch. The passenger power seat can be adjusted in four different ways. The power seat switch is located on the lower outboard side of the seat cushion on the seat cushion side shield on all models. The individual switches in the power seat switch assembly cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11148 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat adjuster or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. On vehicles equipped with memory system, a resistance signal is sent to the Memory Seat Module (MSM) via the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, when the driver memory seat switch control knob is actuated. The MSM is responsible for the 12v battery feed and ground path to the power seat adjuster motor. The adjuster motor operates to move the power seat adjuster mechanism through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker may result in motor damage. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11149 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH DRIVER WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITHOUT MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. PASSENGER SEAT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11150 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switch. Refer to PASSENGER POWER SEAT SWITCH CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. DRIVER WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. 3. Use an ohmmeter to test the resistance of the power seat switch. Refer to DRIVER POWER SEAT SWITCH WITH MEMORY SEAT SYSTEM CONTINUITY table. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch. If switch tests OK refer to Power Seat testing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11151 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the seat cushion side panel from the seat and disconnect the electrical harness connector. 3. Using a small flat bladed tool, gently release the four mounting tabs that secure the power seat switch and separate switch from trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11154 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power seat switch on the seat cushion side panel. Gently apply pressure to the switch until the four mounting tabs that secure the switch snap into place. 2. Connect the power seat switch electrical connector. 3. Install the seat cushion side panel on the seat. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify normal operation of the power seat assembly. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Component ID: 370 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 11159 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 11160 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Locations Sensor-Liftgate Pinch-Left Component ID: 371 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 11161 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right Component ID: 370 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH/TEMP-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 RIGHT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q78 20OR/DB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 11164 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 11165 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Liftgate Pinch-Left Component ID: 371 Component : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-LIFTGATE PINCH-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (POWER LIFTGATE) Pin Description Circuit 1 LEFT PINCH SENSOR SIGNAL Q75 20OR/LB 2 LOGIC GROUND Q901 20OR/BR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Liftgate Pinch/Temp-Right > Page 11166 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Pinch sensors (2) are located on each side of the liftgate (1). These sensors look like weather-strips, however they consist of pieces of electrically conductive rubber (tapeswitch), wires, resistor, double sided tape, and a plastic carrier. They are used to indicate an obstruction during a power liftgate close cycle. The right side pinch sensor contains a thermistor that is integral to the pinch sensor assembly. The thermistor is a temperature sensor used by the power liftgate control module to enable proper liftgate operation in extreme climate conditions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11169 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION During a power liftgate "close" cycle, if either of the two conductive rubber strips (tapeswitch) of the pinch sensor come in contact with an obstacle, the pinch sensor circuit is completed. This tells the power liftgate control module that a obstruction is felt. The control module will stop the liftgate immediately and return it to the full open position. The thermistor portion of the right pinch sensor provides the temperature signal to the power liftgate control module (temperature is provided when the pinch sensor is in an unpinched condition; when pinched, temperature is unavailable because the thermistor is shorted). As the outside temperature increases, the resistance reading decreases. As temperature decreases, the resistance reading increases. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11170 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Testing and Inspection RIGHT PINCH SENSOR/THERMISTOR The thermistor portion of the right pinch sensor provides the temperature signal to the power liftgate control module (temperature is provided when the pinch sensor is in an unpinched condition; when pinched, temperature is unavailable because the thermistor is shorted). Refer to the RIGHT PINCH SENSOR/THERMISTOR DIAGNOSTIC TABLE to test the thermistor resistance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove trim panel from liftgate. 3. Disconnect the pinch sensor wire harness connector (4). 4. Remove the clips/assembly holding the pinch sensor (2) to liftgate (1). 5. Feed the pinch sensor wire harness (5) out of the liftgate (1) and remove the sensor (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11173 Power Trunk / Liftgate Hazard Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Use extreme caution when testing pinch sensor operation. 1. Route the pinch sensor wire harness (5) through the hole in the liftgate (1). Push the wire harness grommet into place until fully seated. 2. Position the pinch sensor (2) to the liftgate (1) and align the holes to the fastening clips. 3. Install the four clips holding the sensor to the liftgate. 4. Connect the pinch sensor wire harness connector (4). 5. Install the trim panel on the liftgate. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. 7. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes related to the pinch sensor. 8. Verify power liftgate system and pinch sensor operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, during the final close cycle press the pinch sensor to verify the power liftgate detects an obstruction and returns to the full open position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 423 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : RED # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P81 20TN/OR 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z968 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 DRIVER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P83 20TN/WT 6 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P7 20LG/YL Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 11178 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 11179 Seat Heater Switch: Locations Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 425 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P82 20TN/LB 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z978 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P84 20TN/DG 6 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P8 20LG/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Heated Seat-Driver > Page 11180 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear Component ID: 424 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-LEFT REAR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z964 16BK 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 LEFT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P177 18LG/RD 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 5-6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11183 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Right Rear Component ID: 426 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-RIGHT REAR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z964 16BK 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 RIGHT REAR HEATED SEAT FEED P178 18LG/BR 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL 5-6 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F922 16PK/YL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11184 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Driver Component ID: 423 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-DRIVER Color : RED # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P81 20TN/OR 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z968 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 DRIVER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P83 20TN/WT 6 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P7 20LG/YL Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11185 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11186 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Heated Seat-Passenger Component ID: 425 Component : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEATED SEAT-PASSENGER Color : BLUE # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT LOW INDICATOR DRIVER P82 20TN/LB 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-CENTER BEZEL/HEATED SEAT SWITCHES E33 20OR 3 GROUND Z978 20BK 4 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) F21 20OR/LB 5 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT HIGH INDICATOR DRIVER P84 20TN/DG 6 PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH MUX P8 20LG/DG Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Heated Seat-Left Rear > Page 11187 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Switch-Heated Seat Description HEATED SEAT SWITCH The heated seat switches are both mounted in the instrument panel. The two switches are snapped into mounting holes in the instrument panel center bezel (1). The two heated seat switches (2) and (3) are identical in appearance and construction, except for the location of a keyway in the connector receptacle on the back of each switch. The instrument panel wire harness connectors for the heated seat switches are keyed to match the connector receptacles so that the two heated seat switches can only be connected to the proper heated seat. Each momentary, bidirectional rocker-type heated seat switch provides a resistor-multiplexed signal to the Cab Compartment Node (CCN). Each switch has a center neutral position and momentary Low and High positions so that the driver and the front seat passenger can select a preferred seat heating level. Each heated seat switch has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Each switch also has one indicator lamp for back lighting of the switch when the ignition switch is in the Run position. The five LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch is faulty or damaged the individual heated seat switch assembly must be replaced. Operation HEATED SEAT SWITCH The heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. Depressing the heated seat switch rocker to its momentary High or Low position provides a hard-wired resistor multiplexed signal to the Cabin Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat > Page 11190 Compartment Node (CCN). The CCN is responsible for supplying the CAN bus message to the heated seat module, signaling the module to power the heated seat element of the selected seat and maintain the temperature setting. If the heated seat switch is depressed to a different position (Low or High) than the currently selected state, the CCN will go through the process again to change the temperature setting. If a heated seat switch is depressed a second time to the same position as the currently selected state, the CCN and heated seat module interprets the second input as a request to turn the seat heater OFF. The CCN will then signal the heated seat module to turn the heated seat elements for that seat off. The backlighting LED's in each of the heated seat switches receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The ground side of the indicator lamp is divided by a separate lamp driver circuit in the CCN. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Switch-Heated Seat > Page 11191 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules (2) mounted in the front face of the second row center floor console (3) operate the heated second row seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated second row seat system. If any of the heated second row seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are inoperative or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated second row seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after thirty minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue for another thirty minutes and the system will then be automatically turned off. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11192 Seat Heater Switch: Testing and Inspection HEATED SEAT SWITCH Refer to the Wiring for complete heated seat system wiring diagrams. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. If the problem being diagnosed involves inoperative heated seat switch back lighting and the heated seat elements do heat, disconnect the inoperative switch and check for continuity between the ground pin at the heated seat switch connector and ground. If there is no continuity, repair an open wire between ground and the heated seat switch connector. If there is continuity, replace the inoperative heated seat switch. If the problem being diagnosed involves a heated seat switch indicator lamp that remains illuminated after the heated seat has been turned Off. Also refer to the Body Diagnostic Information for additional diagnosis and testing procedures. 2. Check the fused ignition switch output (run) fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run) fuse in the PDC. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition switch output (run) circuit to the ignition switch as required. 4. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the connector receptacle on the back of the heated seat switch to be tested. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Run position. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run) circuit cavity of the heated seat switch. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition switch output (run) circuit to the PDC fuse as required. 5. Check the continuity and resistance values of the heated seat switch in the Neutral, Low and High positions as shown in the Heated Seat Switch Continuity chart below. If OK, refer to Heated Seats testing. If not OK, replace the faulty heated seat switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Front Seats Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. 3. Remove the heated seat switch bezel and both switches from the center bezel as a unit. 4. From the back of the heated seat switch bezel (2), gently pry the switch free and push the heated seat switch out through the rear of the bezel. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11195 NOTE: When installing the heated seat switches, be certain they are installed in the proper mounting holes of the heated seat switch bezel (2). The heated seat switches are identified by a keyway in the connector receptacle on the back of each switch. 1. From the back of the heated seat switch bezel, gently push the heated seat switch in through the rear of the bezel. 2. Install the center bezel on the instrument panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11196 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Switch/Module - Second Row Heated Seat Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules (2) from the rear center floor console (3) by gently prying up from the edge of the switch/module bezel (1). Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Seats > Page 11197 1. Align the tabs (1) of the switch/module (2) to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel (1) into the mounting hole in the center console (3) until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Memory Switch: Locations Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11201 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11202 Seat Memory Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 433 Component : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MEMORY SELECTOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2-3-4-5 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH MUX P339 20LG/DB 6 MEMORY SELECT SWITCH RETURN G920 20VT/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Memory Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11203 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof Component ID: 448 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL B GROUND Z957 20BK C SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN D SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 11208 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 11209 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Sunroof > Page 11210 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof Component ID: 448 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 A SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL B GROUND Z957 20BK C SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN D SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 11213 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 11214 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Switch-Sunroof/Liftgate PLG Component ID: 449 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF/LIFTGATE PLG Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 SUNROOF VENT Q4 20OR/YL 2 GROUND Z957 20BK 3 SUNROOF OPEN Q3 20OR/TN 4 SUNROOF CLOSE Q5 20OR/LB 5 GROUND Z957 20BK 6 LIFTGATE SWITCH SENSE G25 20VT/TN Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Sunroof > Page 11215 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Separate the overhead console from the headliner, by carefully pulling down on the front portion, toward the windshield, to release the retaining clips. 3. Release the sunroof switch retaining tab (2), disconnect the electrical connector (1) and remove the switch from the console. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11218 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the switch (2) against the overhead console (1) and push the switch to seat properly in retaining clip (3). 2. Install the overhead console and seat the retaining clips (4) fully. 3. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Customer Interest Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 11227 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message NUMBER: 08-022-07 GROUP: Electrical DATE: September 15, 2007 SUBJECT: Intermittent Illumination Of The Courtesy Lamps And Liftgate Ajar Indicator With Chime Tone OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves switching the wires in the liftgate ajar switch connector. MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (KK) Cherokee (International) 2007 - 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2007 - 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2008 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2008 (XH) Commander (International markets) 2006-2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2008 (RT) Caravan/Town & Country NOTE: This bulletin applies to all KA/KK vehicles built before August 18, 2007 (MDH 0818XX) and WK/WH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX), NOTE: This bulletin applies to XK/XH vehicles built before September 11, 2007 (MDH 0911XX) and RT vehicles built before October 22, 2007 (MDH 1022XX) built without sales code JRC (powerlift gate). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may observe illumination of the courtesy lamps, a chime tone and the liftgate ajar indicator message illumination when the liftgate is not open. This is caused by intermittent contact of the liftgate open sensing wire closing the circuit to ground. Swapping the wires will make the intermittent contact with the body on the ground side wire eliminating the false illumination and indicator messages. DIAGNOSIS: If the above condition is present, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Gain Access to and disconnect the 2-way liftgate ajar connector. 2. Turn ignition key to the run position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: > 08-022-07 > Sep > 07 > Electrical - Courtesy Lamps ON/Liftgate Ajar Message > Page 11233 NOTE: Cavity numbers are stamped on the connector. 3. Measure the voltage at cavity 1 of the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. 4. Is the voltage above 10 volts? a. Yes >> Further diagnosis is required, this service bulletin does not apply. b. No >> Proceed to Step # 5 5. Turn ignition key off. 6. Swap wires in the 2-way liftgate ajar switch connector. Cavity 1 should contain the "G78 - liftgate ajar switch sense circuit and cavity 2 should contain the "Ground circuit. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Overhead Console Liftgate Switch Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Description and Operation Overhead Console Liftgate Switch Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The overhead console shown contains a combination power liftgate/power sunroof switch. Vehicles equipped with the power liftgate and no sunroof contain a single power liftgate switch only. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with both a power sunroof and power liftgate the overhead console switches are serviced together as one assembly. NOTE: Durango overhead console with Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) shown. Aspen overhead console similar. The power liftgate switch (3) is mounted in the overhead console assembly (1) between the reading lamps (2). The switch is snapped into mounting slots in the overhead console assembly. The momentary, push button-type power liftgate switch, provides a hardwired signal to the Power Liftgate Control Module. If the switch is inoperative or damaged the power liftgate/power sunroof switch assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Battery voltage is supplied to the power liftgate system through a fuse, located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) assembly. When the power liftgate switch is pushed, a hardwired signal is sent to the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then interprets the information to confirm safety requirements are met before applying power to the power liftgate drive unit to start a power cycle. During a power liftgate open or close cycle, if the power liftgate control module detects sufficient resistance to liftgate travel, such as an obstruction in the liftgate's path. The control module will immediately stop liftgate movement and reverse the direction of travel to the full open or closed position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Overhead Console Liftgate Switch > Page 11238 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Description and Operation Exterior Handle Switch Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with a power liftgate exterior handle switch. The switch is integral to the power liftgate latch assembly. It is activated by the exterior handle, located in the license plate light bar, through a mechanical link rod attaching the two together. The power liftgate exterior handle switch is primarily used for manual opening of the liftgate. Activation of the switch during a automatic power "close" cycle will cause the liftgate to reverse direction. Activation of the switch during a power "open" cycle will cause the power liftgate to disengage, allowing full manual operation. The exterior handle cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged it must be replaced. The power liftgate exterior handle switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and if damaged or inoperative the complete power liftgate latch assembly must be replaced. Operation OPERATION When the exterior liftgate handle is pulled, a mechanical linkage inside the liftgate depresses the power liftgate exterior handle switch in the power liftgate latch assembly. A hard-wired signal is then detected by the Power Liftgate Control Module. The power liftgate control module then looks at the vehicle lock status on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. If the vehicle is not locked and the operating conditions are met, the power liftgate control module then applies power to the latch mounted motor, which moves the liftgate from the primary closed and latched position to the open and movable position. If the liftgate is not pulled open within seven seconds, once the latch releases, the latch will automatically cinch closed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11239 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Testing and Inspection OVERHEAD CONSOLE LIFTGATE SWITCH Diagnostic resistors are present inside the overhead console liftgate switch. These resistors are used by the power liftgate control module to determine if the switch is stuck, disconnected, shorted or otherwise damaged. Refer to the OVERHEAD CONSOLE LIFTGATE SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TABLE to test the switch resistance. NOTE: Test table readings are ±2%. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL DURANGO 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console assembly (3). 3. Using trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, pry the back edge of the power liftgate switch (1) up until the two retaining tabs (2) are fully released. 4. Tilt the power liftgate switch (1) up away from the overhead console assembly (3) until the mounting tab on the opposite side of the switch releases. 5. Remove the switch from the vehicle. ASPEN 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console assembly (3). 3. Using trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, pry the side edges (4) of the overhead console assembly out until the two retaining tabs on the power liftgate switch (5) are fully released. 4. Push the switch (5) out through the back of the overhead console (3). 5. Remove the switch from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11242 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION DURANGO 1. Position the power liftgate switch into the overhead console assembly so that the large retaining tab (2) is aligned with the large slot between the reading lamps. 2. Gently press the power liftgate switch (1) into the overhead console assembly (3) until the two small mounting tabs (2) have snapped securely into place. 3. Install the overhead console assembly (3). 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 6. Verify power liftgate system operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, this will allow the power liftgate control module to relearn its cycle with the new components. ASPEN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11243 1. Position the power liftgate switch (5) into the overhead console assembly (3). 2. Gently press the power liftgate switch (5) into the overhead console assembly (3) until the mounting tabs have snapped securely into place (4). 3. Install the overhead console assembly (3). 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Using an appropriate scan tool, check and erase any power liftgate control module diagnostic trouble codes. 6. Verify power liftgate system operation. Cycle the power liftgate through one complete open and close cycle, this will allow the power liftgate control module to relearn its cycle with the new components. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations Sound Proofing / Insulation: Locations Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11247 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11248 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11249 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11250 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11251 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11252 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11253 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11254 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11255 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11256 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11257 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11258 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11259 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11260 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11261 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11262 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11263 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Locations > Page 11264 BODY SOUND DEADENER LOCATIONS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Spare Tire Carrier: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Pull up on the hole (1) cut in the carpet (2) to access the spare tire winch cover. 2. Remove the spare tire winch cover (1). 3. Install the jack handle (2) and lug wrench (1) to the spare tire winch (3) to loosen the spare tire to the ground. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11269 4. Remove spare tire. 5. Remove 4 bolts (1) attaching spare tire winch (2) to body (3). 6. Separate spare tire winch from vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11270 Spare Tire Carrier: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position spare tire winch (2) on the vehicle. 2. Install and tighten 4 bolts (1) attaching the spare tire winch to body (3). 3. Install spare tire. 4. Tighten the spare tire up to the vehicle. 5. Remove the jack handle (2) and lug wrench (1). 6. Install the spare tire winch cover (1) and reseat the carpet access hole. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front body mount bolt (1). 2. Remove the nuts (3) and remove the tow hook. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11275 Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the support brackets and install the bumper support nuts (3). 2. Tighten the nuts (3) to 109 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the front body mount bolt (1) and tighten to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the support bracket (2) nuts (3) and tighten to 109 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair PANEL-COWL TOP REMOVAL 1. Open the hood and remove the wiper arm nuts (3) and wiper arms (2). 2. Remove the two rear screws (1) and the five front screws (5). 3. Remove the cowl grille (4). INSTALLATION 1. Install the grille (4) and install the front and rear screws (1 & 5). 2. Install the wiper arms (2) and install the nuts (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove glass. 2. Pull the glass run weatherstrip and run channels from the window opening. 3. Pull the glass run weatherstrip from the run channels. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass run weatherstrip into the window opening and the run channels. 2. Install glass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run > Page 11286 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Belt Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove trim panel. 2. Peel seal from door pinch weld. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Slide seal into position on door. 2. Install the trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run > Page 11287 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Belt Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Insert special tool #9093 (2) between the outer belt molding (1) and glass at the rear. 2. Push down on outer belt molding (1) and rotate upper part of tool (2) outward from vehicle then lift up on molding (1) to disengage from locking tabs (3) working from back to front. NOTE: Typical outer belt molding design shown. 3. Slide molding out from under the side view mirror and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the outer belt molding onto the door and position forward under the side view mirror. Seat the molding fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the glass run channels. Refer to Window Track. 2. Separate the quarter glass from the weatherstrip. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the quarter glass into the weatherstrip and rear run channel. 2. Install the run channels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run > Page 11292 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Belt Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel. 2. Pull weatherstrip from inner door panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position weatherstrip on inner door panel. 2. Press into place. 3. Install trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run > Page 11293 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Belt Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Insert special tool #9093 (2) between the outer belt molding (1) and glass at the rear. 2. Push down on outer belt molding (1) and rotate upper part of tool (2) outward from vehicle then lift up on molding (1) to disengage from locking tabs (3) working from back to front. NOTE: Typical outer belt molding design shown. 3. Slide molding out from under the side view mirror and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the outer belt molding onto the door and seat the molding fully starting at the back of the door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent NUMBER: 23-034-06 GROUP: Body DATE: August 24, 2006 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING PROVIDED IN ADVANCE. DO NOT ORDER PARTS OR PERFORM ANY ACTIONS RELATED TO THIS BULLETIN UNTIL AUGUST 31, 2006. SUBJECT: Moonroof (Sunroof) Makes A Pop-Thump Sound When Moving To The Vent Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves applying a liquid coating to the Moonroof seal. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2006 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a Power Moonroof (sales code GWA). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A pop/thump sound coming from the Moonroof when cycling from the "Closed" to the "Open" position. DIAGNOSIS: If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open the Moonroof to the 'Vent" position. 2. Clean the exposed Moonroof seal bulb with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 11302 3. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the rear Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work forward along the seal bulb (Fig. 1) and (Fig. 2). NOTE: Slower is better. A good application will have the appearance of being wet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 11303 4. Continue forward with the applicator until contact with the seal bulb can no longer be made (Fig. 3). 5. Repeat Step # 3 and Step # 4 on the other side of the glass panel. 6. After coating both sides and the rear, allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 7. Cycle the glass panel open by: a. Press and hold the "Open" button on the switch until the Moonroof is approximately half open. 8. Clean as much of the seal bulb as possible with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. 9. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the front Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work rearward along the seal bulb (Fig. 4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 11304 NOTE: Turning the applicator around can aid in getting the coating as far into the corner as possible (Fig. 5). NOTE: This area is important because it has been determined that from both front corners to about 3 inches inboard is where most of the sound originates. 10. Repeat Step # 8 and Step # 9 on the other side of the glass panel. 11. Allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 12. Close the Moonroof. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent NUMBER: 23-034-06 GROUP: Body DATE: August 24, 2006 THIS BULLETIN IS BEING PROVIDED IN ADVANCE. DO NOT ORDER PARTS OR PERFORM ANY ACTIONS RELATED TO THIS BULLETIN UNTIL AUGUST 31, 2006. SUBJECT: Moonroof (Sunroof) Makes A Pop-Thump Sound When Moving To The Vent Position OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves applying a liquid coating to the Moonroof seal. MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2006 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a Power Moonroof (sales code GWA). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: A pop/thump sound coming from the Moonroof when cycling from the "Closed" to the "Open" position. DIAGNOSIS: If the vehicle operator describes the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open the Moonroof to the 'Vent" position. 2. Clean the exposed Moonroof seal bulb with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 11310 3. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the rear Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work forward along the seal bulb (Fig. 1) and (Fig. 2). NOTE: Slower is better. A good application will have the appearance of being wet. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 11311 4. Continue forward with the applicator until contact with the seal bulb can no longer be made (Fig. 3). 5. Repeat Step # 3 and Step # 4 on the other side of the glass panel. 6. After coating both sides and the rear, allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 7. Cycle the glass panel open by: a. Press and hold the "Open" button on the switch until the Moonroof is approximately half open. 8. Clean as much of the seal bulb as possible with an alcohol prep pad. NOTE: Allow the alcohol to dry before proceeding. 9. Start applying the lubricant, using the applicator, in the center of the front Moonroof seal bulb and working outward. Continue the application around the corner and work rearward along the seal bulb (Fig. 4). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: > 23-034-06 > Aug > 06 > Body - Moonroof Pop/Thump Sounds When Moving to Vent > Page 11312 NOTE: Turning the applicator around can aid in getting the coating as far into the corner as possible (Fig. 5). NOTE: This area is important because it has been determined that from both front corners to about 3 inches inboard is where most of the sound originates. 10. Repeat Step # 8 and Step # 9 on the other side of the glass panel. 11. Allow the lubricant to dry for at least 3 minutes. 12. Close the Moonroof. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations Cruise Control Servo: Locations Component ID: 401 Component : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Connector: Name : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 2 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 GROUND Z155 20BK/LG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 11317 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 11318 Cruise Control Servo: Diagrams Component ID: 401 Component : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Connector: Name : SERVO-SPEED CONTROL Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 S/C VACUUM SOL CONTROL V36 20VT/YL 2 S/C VENT SOL CONTROL V35 20VT/OR 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 GROUND Z155 20BK/LG Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 11319 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 445 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11324 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11325 Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 446 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11326 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 445 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11329 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11330 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 446 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11331 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two separate switch pods operate the speed control system. The steering-wheel-mounted switches use multiplexed circuits to provide inputs to the PCM for ON, OFF, RESUME, ACCELERATE, SET, DECEL and CANCEL modes. Refer to the Owner's Manual on speed control switch functions and setting procedures. The individual switches cannot be repaired. If one switch fails, the entire switch module must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11334 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When speed control is selected by depressing the ON, OFF switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between approximately 35 (56.2kph) and 85 mph (136.8kph). In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector be indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral. The speed control can be disengaged manually by: - Stepping on the brake pedal - Depressing the OFF switch - Depressing the CANCEL switch. The speed control can be disengaged also by any of the following conditions: - An indication of Park or Neutral (auto. trans.) - The VSS signal increases at a rate of 10 mph (16 kph) per second (indicates that the co-efficient of friction between the road surface and tires is extremely low) - Depressing the clutch pedal (manual trans.). - Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear) - The VSS signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph (16 kph) per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated at an extremely high rate) - If the actual speed is not within 20 mph (32.1 kph) of the set speed The previous disengagement conditions are programmed for added safety. Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the ACCEL switch restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM's RAM NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch will erase the set speed stored in the PCM's RAM. If, while the speed control is engaged, the driver wishes to increase vehicle speed, the PCM is programmed for an acceleration feature. With the ACCEL switch held closed, the vehicle accelerates slowly to the desired speed. The new target speed is stored in the PCM's RAM when the ACCEL switch is released. The PCM also has a "tap-up" feature in which vehicle speed increases at a rate of approximately 2 mph (3.2 kph) for each momentary switch activation of the ACCEL switch. The PCM also provides a means to decelerate without disengaging speed control. To decelerate from an existing recorded target speed, depress and hold the COAST switch until the desired speed is reached. Then release the switch. The ON, OFF switch operates two components: the PCM's ON, OFF input, and the battery voltage to the brake switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Before attempting to diagnose, remove or install any airbag system or related steering wheel and steering column components you must first disconnect and isolate the negative (ground) battery cable. Wait 2 minutes for system capacitor to discharge before further system service. Failure to do so could result in accidental deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable from battery. 2. Remove airbag module. 3. Unplug electrical connector. 4. Remove speed control switch mounting screw (1) and remove switch from steering wheel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11337 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position switch to steering wheel. 2. Install switch mounting screw and tighten to 15 in. lbs. (1.7 Nm). 3. Plug electrical connector into switch. 4. Install airbag module. 5. Connect negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The vacuum reservoir is a plastic storage tank connected to an engine vacuum source by vacuum lines. A vacuum reservoir is not used with diesel engines or the 5.7L gas powered engine. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11342 Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The vacuum reservoir is used to supply the vacuum needed to maintain proper speed control operation when engine vacuum drops, such as in climbing a grade while driving. A one-way check valve is used in the vacuum line between the reservoir and the vacuum source. This check valve is used to trap engine vacuum in the reservoir. On certain vehicle applications, this reservoir is shared with the heating/air-conditioning system. The vacuum reservoir cannot be repaired and must be replaced if faulty. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11343 Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - VACUUM RESERVOIR 1. Disconnect vacuum hose at speed control servo and install a vacuum gauge into the disconnected hose. 2. Start engine and observe gauge at idle. Vacuum gauge should read at least ten inches of mercury. 3. If vacuum is less than ten inches of mercury, determine source of leak. Check vacuum line to engine for leaks. Also check actual engine intake manifold vacuum. If manifold vacuum does not meet this requirement, check for poor engine performance and repair as necessary. 4. If vacuum line to engine is not leaking, check for leak at vacuum reservoir. To locate and gain access to reservoir, refer to Vacuum Reservoir Removal/Installation. Disconnect vacuum line at reservoir and connect a hand-operated vacuum pump to reservoir fitting. Apply vacuum. Reservoir vacuum should not bleed off. If vacuum is being lost, replace reservoir. 5. Verify operation of one-way check valve and check it for leaks. Certain models may be equipped with 2 check-valves. a. Locate one-way check valve. The valve is located in vacuum line between vacuum reservoir and engine vacuum source. Disconnect vacuum hoses (lines) at each end of valve. b. Connect a hand-operated vacuum pump to reservoir end of check valve. Apply vacuum. Vacuum should not bleed off. If vacuum is being lost, replace one-way check valve. c. Connect a hand-operated vacuum pump to vacuum source end of check valve. Apply vacuum. Vacuum should flow through valve. If vacuum is not flowing, replace one-way check valve. Seal the fitting at opposite end of valve with a finger and apply vacuum. If vacuum will not hold, diaphragm within check valve has ruptured. Replace valve. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The vacuum reservoir (1) is attached to the left-inner fender in the engine compartment. 1. Disconnect two vacuum lines (3) and (4) at reservoir. 2. The reservoir is attached using three clips (2). Pry out on clips for removal. 3. Remove reservoir. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11346 Cruise Control Vacuum Reservoir: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position reservoir (1) onto inner fender. 2. Install three clips (2) to reservoir. Attach reservoir to inner fender by pushing clips into fender. 3. Connect vacuum lines (3) and (4) to reservoir fittings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 445 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11352 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11353 Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 446 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11354 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 445 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11357 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11358 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 446 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL V38 22VT/OR B S/C SWITCH RETURN V937 20VT/BR B SENSOR GROUND K900 22DB/DG C S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL V37 22VT Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 11359 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two separate switch pods operate the speed control system. The steering-wheel-mounted switches use multiplexed circuits to provide inputs to the PCM for ON, OFF, RESUME, ACCELERATE, SET, DECEL and CANCEL modes. Refer to the Owner's Manual on speed control switch functions and setting procedures. The individual switches cannot be repaired. If one switch fails, the entire switch module must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11362 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When speed control is selected by depressing the ON, OFF switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between approximately 35 (56.2kph) and 85 mph (136.8kph). In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector be indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral. The speed control can be disengaged manually by: - Stepping on the brake pedal - Depressing the OFF switch - Depressing the CANCEL switch. The speed control can be disengaged also by any of the following conditions: - An indication of Park or Neutral (auto. trans.) - The VSS signal increases at a rate of 10 mph (16 kph) per second (indicates that the co-efficient of friction between the road surface and tires is extremely low) - Depressing the clutch pedal (manual trans.). - Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear) - The VSS signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph (16 kph) per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated at an extremely high rate) - If the actual speed is not within 20 mph (32.1 kph) of the set speed The previous disengagement conditions are programmed for added safety. Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the ACCEL switch restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM's RAM NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch will erase the set speed stored in the PCM's RAM. If, while the speed control is engaged, the driver wishes to increase vehicle speed, the PCM is programmed for an acceleration feature. With the ACCEL switch held closed, the vehicle accelerates slowly to the desired speed. The new target speed is stored in the PCM's RAM when the ACCEL switch is released. The PCM also has a "tap-up" feature in which vehicle speed increases at a rate of approximately 2 mph (3.2 kph) for each momentary switch activation of the ACCEL switch. The PCM also provides a means to decelerate without disengaging speed control. To decelerate from an existing recorded target speed, depress and hold the COAST switch until the desired speed is reached. Then release the switch. The ON, OFF switch operates two components: the PCM's ON, OFF input, and the battery voltage to the brake switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Before attempting to diagnose, remove or install any airbag system or related steering wheel and steering column components you must first disconnect and isolate the negative (ground) battery cable. Wait 2 minutes for system capacitor to discharge before further system service. Failure to do so could result in accidental deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable from battery. 2. Remove airbag module. 3. Unplug electrical connector. 4. Remove speed control switch mounting screw (1) and remove switch from steering wheel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11365 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position switch to steering wheel. 2. Install switch mounting screw and tighten to 15 in. lbs. (1.7 Nm). 3. Plug electrical connector into switch. 4. Install airbag module. 5. Connect negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description ABS Light: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator serves both the standard equipment Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) and optional equipment 4-Wheel Anti-Lock (4WAL) brake systems. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The ABS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Failure of Anti-lock Braking System in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ABS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11371 ABS Light: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ABS system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ABS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - ABS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ABS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the ABS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the CAB for five consecutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. - ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked ON and OFF by lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests. The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the antilock brake system, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ABS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Locations Audible Warning Device: Locations Component ID: 52 Component : CHIME-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : CHIME-POWER LIFTGATE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z945 20BK 2 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Locations > Page 11375 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Locations > Page 11376 Audible Warning Device: Diagrams Component ID: 52 Component : CHIME-POWER LIFTGATE Connector: Name : CHIME-POWER LIFTGATE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z945 20BK 2 LIFTGATE CHIME DRIVER Q94 20TN/LG Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Locations > Page 11377 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Description CHIME WARNING SYSTEM A chime warning system is standard factory-installed equipment. The chime warning system uses an electromechanical transducer and an electromechanical relay that are soldered onto the electronic circuit board inside of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (1) to provide audible indications of various vehicle conditions that may require the attention of the vehicle operator or occupants. The EMIC also includes the hardware and software necessary to serve as the electronic body control module and is sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node or CCN. The electromechanical transducer generates beep tones and chime tones, while the electromechanical relay generates click tones to emulate the sounds associated with conventional turn signal and hazard warning flasher operation. The microprocessor-based EMIC utilizes electronic chime request messages received from other modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus along with hard wired inputs to monitor many sensors and switches throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the circuitry and programming of the EMIC allow it to control the audible outputs that are produced through its on-board transducer and relay. The EMIC is capable of producing the following audible outputs: - Slow Rate Repetitive Click - Repeated click tones that are issued at a slow rate of about 50 clicks per minute. - Fast Rate Repetitive Click - Repeated click tones that are issued at a fast rate of more than about 100 clicks per minute. Fixed Duration Beep - A short, sharp, single tactile beep tone. Single Chime Tone - A single chime tone. - Slow Rate Repetitive Chime - Repeated chime tones that are issued at a slow rate of about 50 chimes per minute. - Fast Rate Repetitive Chime - Repeated chime tones that are issued at a fast rate of about 180 chimes per minute. Hard wired circuitry connects the EMIC and the various chime warning system switch and sensor inputs to their modules and to each other through the electrical system of the vehicle. These hard wired circuits are integral to several wire harnesses, which are routed throughout the vehicle and retained by many different methods. These circuits may be connected to each other, to the vehicle electrical system and to the EMIC through the use of a combination of soldered splices, splice block connectors, and many different types of wire harness terminal connectors and insulators. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. The EMIC chime warning system circuits and components cannot be adjusted or repaired. If the EMIC circuitry, the on-board transducer or the relay are damaged or ineffective, the EMIC unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11380 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Operation CHIME WARNING SYSTEM The chime warning system operates on battery voltage received through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB) on a non-switched fused B(+) circuit so that the system may operate regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime warning system also monitors the ignition switch position so that some chime features are functional only with the ignition switch in the ON position, while others are functional regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime warning system provides an audible indication to the vehicle operator or occupants under the following conditions: - Airbag Indicator Warning - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, and an electronic message is received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) requesting airbag indicator illumination. This warning will only occur following completion of the airbag indicator bulb test, and will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Door Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of any door ajar switch has changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving. - Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS) has been manually disabled by the vehicle operator using the ESP/BAS traction control switch on the instrument panel. - Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Fault Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime each time the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS) indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster. This warning indicates a failure condition has been monitored affecting the operation of the ESP/BAS related components or circuits. This warning will only occur following completion of the ESP/BAS indicator bulb test, and will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Electronic Vehicle Information Center Data Reset - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus from the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) requesting that the EVIC average fuel economy, trip odometer, distance to empty or customer programmable features data be reset. The EVIC monitors hard wired inputs from the EVIC control push button switches to determine the proper reset messages to send to the EMIC. - Fasten Seat Belt Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to announce that a hard wired input from the seat belt switch indicates that the driver side front seat belt is not fastened with the ignition switch in the ON position. The chime warning system also supports the enhanced seatbelt reminder (beltminder) when this feature is enabled. - Gate Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of the liftgate ajar switch has changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving. - Head/Park Lamps-On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the headlamp switch, and the ignition switch indicate that the exterior lamps are turned ON with the driver side front door opened and the ignition switch in the OFF position. The chimes will continue to sound until the exterior lamps are turned OFF, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, whichever occurs first. - Key-In-Ignition Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the ignition switch, and the key-in ignition switch circuitry of the ignition switch indicate that the key is in the ignition lock cylinder with the driver side front door open and the ignition switch in the OFF position. The chimes will continue to sound until the key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, whichever occurs first. - Low Fuel Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low fuel indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Low Wash Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low washer fluid indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Overspeed Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that the vehicle speed is over a pre-programmed speed value. The EMIC monitors electronic vehicle speed messages received over the CAN data bus. This feature is only enabled on an EMIC that has been programmed with a Middle East Gulf Coast Country (GCC) country code. - Park Brake Reminder - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to announce that the hard wired input from the park brake switch and an electronic vehicle speed message received over the CAN data bus indicate that the park brake is applied and the vehicle is moving. This chime will repeat each time the input conditions are met. - Sentry Key Customer Learn Mode Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to confirm that an electronic Customer Learn mode message has been received over the CAN data bus to indicate that the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) is prepared for programming additional Sentry Key transponders. This chime feature is only active on vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key system, and sold in a market where Customer Learn programming is an allowed feature. - Trans Overtemp Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate when the transmission overtemp indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry for a high or critical transmission fluid temperature condition. This chime will repeat each time the trans overtemp indicator is cycled from OFF to ON. - Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Flasher Emulation - The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a slow rate to emulate an electromechanical flasher when the turn signal or hazard warning system are operating. The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a fast rate to indicate that the right or left turn signal are operating with one or more bulbs ineffective. In either case, the clicks will continue until the turn signal and hazard warning systems are turned OFF. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11381 - Turn Signal On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that a turn signal has been active continuously for 1.6 kilometers (1 mile) with the vehicle speed greater than 22 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per hour). Vehicles built for markets other than the United States and Canada have a revised distance threshold of 4 kilometers (2.49 miles) for this feature. The chime will continue until the turn signal input becomes inactive or until the electronic vehicle speed message indicates that the speed is less than 22 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per-hour), whichever occurs first. The hazard warning flashers will not activate this chime feature. - Warning Indicator Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime each time the check gauges indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. The check gauges indicator may be illuminated when any critical engine or transmission systems are operating outside of their normal parameters. The instrument cluster monitors electronic messages received over the CAN data bus to determine when to illuminate the check gauges indicator. The EMIC provides chime service for all available features in the chime warning system. The EMIC relies upon its internal programming, numerous hard wired inputs, and electronic message inputs received from other modules over the CAN data bus network to provide the chime warning system features. The internal programming of the EMIC determines the priority of each chime request input that is received, as well as the rate and duration of each chime that is to be generated. The hard wired circuits between components related to the chime warning system may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the chime warning system or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the chime warning system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the chime warning system or the electronic controls and communication related to chime warning system operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11382 Audible Warning Device: Testing and Inspection CHIME WARNING SYSTEM WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired circuits between components related to the chime warning system may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the chime warning system or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the chime warning system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the chime warning system or the electronic controls and communication related to chime warning system operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11383 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A brake indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area below and right of the speedometer needle hub. The brake indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word BRAKE (all clusters with a miles-per-hour primary speedometer scale), or the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Brake Failure (all clusters with a kilometers-per-hour primary scale) in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The brake indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11388 Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the parking brake is applied, when there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level condition, or when the brake fluid level switch is disconnected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch. The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the brake indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the brake indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Brake Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic brake indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the brake indicator will be illuminated. The CAB may also send lamp-ON messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the brake indicator flashes ON and OFF. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released. The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. For further diagnosis of the brake indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. The hard wired park brake switch input to the instrument cluster may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. For proper diagnosis of the brake fluid level switch, the ABS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11389 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection BRAKE INDICATOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired park brake switch input to the EMIC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the EMIC, the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the electronic message inputs also used by the EMIC to provide brake indicator operation. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAB, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Charge Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A charging indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The charging indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Battery Charging Condition in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The charging indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11394 Charge Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The charging indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electrical system voltage is too low or too high. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The charging indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the charging indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the charging indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Voltage Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic system voltage message from the PCM indicating the voltage is low (less than about 1.5 volts is a charge fail condition), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the voltage is normal (greater than about 12.0 volts, but less than 16.0 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Voltage High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic system voltage message from the PCM indicating the voltage is high ( greater than about 16.0 volts), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the voltage is normal (less than about 15.5 volts, but greater than 1.5 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the charging indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the electrical system voltage to control the generator output. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the instrument cluster turns ON the charging indicator due to a charge fail or voltage high condition, it may indicate that the charging system requires service. For further diagnosis of the charging indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator. For proper diagnosis of the charging system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to charging indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11399 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11400 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11401 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11402 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11403 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11404 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11405 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11406 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11407 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11408 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11409 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11410 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11411 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11412 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11413 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11414 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11415 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11416 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11417 8w-41-03 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cigarette Lighter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED An instrument panel mounted cigar lighter/power outlet receptacle is optional equipment on this model. On models equipped with the optional Smoker's Package, the cigar lighter knob and heating element are included. On models without the Smoker's Package, the cigar lighter receptacle is equipped with a snap fit plastic cap and is treated as an auxiliary power outlet. The cigar lighter receptacle is installed in the instrument panel accessory switch bezel, which is located near the bottom of the instrument panel center stack area, below the radio. The cigar lighter base is secured by a snap fit within the center lower bezel. This power outlet has a constant 12 volt battery feed. The cigar lighter receptacle is serviced with the accessory switch bezel and if defective, the entire switch bezel must be replaced. The plastic cap and the knob and heating element unit are available for service replacement. These components cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, they must be replaced. FRONT CONSOLE AND REAR CARGO MOUNTED A front console mounted power outlet is standard equipment and a rear cargo area power outlet is optional equipment on this model. The front console mounted power outlet is mounted near the front of the console just in front of the cup holders. This outlet can be used as a cigar lighter or power outlet, but only has 12 volt battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. The rear power outlet is installed in the right rear quarter trim panel, near the spare tire jack. The power outlet base and mount are secured by a snap fit within the quarter trim panel. A plastic protective cap snaps into the power outlet base when the power outlet is not being used, and hangs from the power outlet base mount by an integral bail strap while the power outlet is in use. While the power outlet is very similar to a cigar lighter base unit, it does not include the two small spring-clip retainers inside the bottom of the receptacle shell that are used to secure the cigar lighter heating element to the insulated contact. It has 12 volt battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11420 Cigarette Lighter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET The cigar lighter consists of two major components: a knob and heating element unit, and the cigar lighter base or receptacle shell. The receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The cigar lighter knob and heating element are encased within a spring-loaded housing, which also features a sliding protective heat shield. When the knob and heating element are inserted in the receptacle shell, the heating element resistor coil is grounded through its housing to the receptacle shell. If the cigar lighter knob is pushed inward, the heat shield slides up toward the knob exposing the heating element, and the heating element extends from the housing toward the insulated contact in the bottom of the receptacle shell. Two small spring-clip retainers are located on either side of the insulated contact inside the bottom of the receptacle shell. These clips engage and hold the heating element against the insulated contact long enough for the resistor coil to heat up. When the heating element is engaged with the contact, battery current can flow through the resistor coil to ground, causing the resistor coil to heat. When the resistor coil becomes sufficiently heated, excess heat radiates from the heating element causing the spring-clips to expand. Once the spring-clips expand far enough to release the heating element, the spring-loaded housing forces the knob and heating element to pop back outward to their relaxed position. When the cigar lighter knob and element are pulled out of the receptacle shell, the protective heat shield slides downward on the housing so that the heating element is recessed and shielded around its circumference for safety. POWER OUTLET The power outlet base or receptacle shell is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in the bottom of the shell is connected to battery current. The power outlet receives battery voltage from a fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) through a fuse in the fuse block when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cigarette Lighter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Look inside and note position of the retaining bosses (1). 3. Using special tool 9857 Power Outlet Remover. Insert the tool forcing the bosses out of base. 4. Pull out the base through mounting ring by gently rocking the tool (3). 5. Disconnect the base wires. 6. Set base aside and remove base mount ring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11423 Cigarette Lighter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position mount ring to the instrument panel and feed the wires through ring. Index the cap and the mount ring with the index tab at 9 o'clock to the key in the instrument panel. Install the ring. 2. Connect wires to base. Orient base alignment rib at 11 o'clock to mate the groove in mount ring at the same location. 3. Push base into the bezel till it locks. 4. Install cigar lighter cap. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Locations Clock: Locations Component ID: 169 Component : MODULE-CLOCK-ANALOG Connector: Name : MODULE-CLOCK-ANALOG Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 2 GROUND Z925 20BK 3 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E12 20OR/GY 4-Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Locations > Page 11427 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Locations > Page 11428 Clock: Diagrams Component ID: 169 Component : MODULE-CLOCK-ANALOG Connector: Name : MODULE-CLOCK-ANALOG Color : # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A117 18RD/DG 2 GROUND Z925 20BK 3 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E12 20OR/GY 4-Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Locations > Page 11429 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Manual Compass Calibration Compass: Testing and Inspection Manual Compass Calibration MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "CAL", perform the following manual calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Setting " s displayed. 2. Press the STEP push button (2) until "Calibrate Compass YES" is displayed. 3. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (4) to initiate the calibration procedure. The message "CAL will appear in the Compass/Temperature display. 4. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the EVIC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing EVIC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the manual calibration procedure in another location. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Manual Compass Calibration > Page 11434 Compass: Testing and Inspection Compass Variance Adjustment COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Variance Settings Map Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 3. Press the STEP push button (2) until "Compass Variance" is displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (4) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Manual Compass Calibration > Page 11435 5. Momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 11436 Compass: Service and Repair COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows: 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 11437 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass and adjust the compass variance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cruise Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A cruise indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional speed control system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The cruise indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The cruise indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word CRUISE in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON the illumination intensity of the cruise indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The cruise indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cruise Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11442 Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The cruise indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the speed control system is ON, regardless of whether the speed control is engaged. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The cruise indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the cruise indicator for the following reasons: - Cruise Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic cruise indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating the speed control system is ON, the cruise indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the cruise indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the speed control switches to determine the proper outputs to the speed control servo. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the cruise indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED. For proper diagnosis of the speed control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to cruise indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 11448 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 11449 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Door Ajar Indicator Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation Door Ajar Indicator Description DESCRIPTION A door ajar indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. However, on vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) the door ajar indicator in the odometer VFD is electronically suppressed so as not to duplicate indications that are provided by the EVIC. The door ajar indicator consists of the text DOOR, which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the odometer VFD unit. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The door ajar indicator appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The door ajar indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The door ajar indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator that one or more of the passenger compartment doors may be open or not completely latched. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and hard wired inputs received by the cluster from the door ajar switches located in each door latch unit. The door ajar indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD door ajar indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the door ajar indicator for the following reasons: Door Ajar Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on any one of the door ajar switch sense circuits (door ajar switch closed = door is open or not completely latched) the door ajar indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until all of the door ajar switch sense inputs to the cluster are an open circuit (door ajar switch open = door fully closed), until the cluster has completed an interior lamps load shed ( about five minutes), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the door ajar switches to determine the status of the doors. For further diagnosis of the door ajar indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator. The hard wired door ajar switches and circuits related to door ajar indicator operation may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Door Ajar Indicator > Page 11454 Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation Gate Ajar Indicator Description DESCRIPTION A gate ajar indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. However, on vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) the gate ajar indicator in the odometer VFD is electronically suppressed so as not to duplicate indications that are provided by the EVIC. The gate ajar indicator consists of the text GATE, which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the odometer VFD unit. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gate ajar indicator appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The gate ajar indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The gate ajar indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator that the rear liftgate may be open or not completely latched. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the cluster from the liftgate ajar switch integral to the liftgate latch unit. The gate ajar indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD gate ajar indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the gate ajar indicator for the following reasons: Liftgate Ajar Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the liftgate ajar switch sense circuit (liftgate ajar switch closed = gate is open or not completely latched) the gate ajar indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the liftgate ajar switch sense input to the cluster is an open circuit (liftgate ajar switch open = liftgate fully closed), until the cluster has completed an interior lamps load shed ( about five minutes), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the liftgate ajar switch to determine the status of the liftgate. For further diagnosis of the liftgate ajar indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator. The hard wired liftgate ajar switch and circuits related to gate ajar indicator operation may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11458 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11459 Door Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11460 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description Door DOOR This vehicle has four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Liftgate LIFTGATE A liftgate ajar switch is standard equipment on this vehicle. The switch is concealed within and integral to the liftgate latch unit. The switch is a momentary leaf contact-type unit that is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanisms. An integral connector receptacle on the liftgate latch connects the liftgate ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through the liftgate wire harness. The liftgate ajar switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the liftgate latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11463 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation Door DOOR The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The rear door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles not equipped with the optional memory system, the front door ajar switches are also hard wired in series between ground and the EMIC. On vehicles equipped with the optional memory system each front door ajar switch is hard wired in series between ground and its respective driver or passenger Memory Mirror Module (MMM) located in the front door. The MMM then sends electronic door ajar switch status messages to the EMIC over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Both the EMIC and the MMM read the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then use these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Liftgate LIFTGATE The liftgate ajar switch is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanism. When the liftgate is closed and properly latched, its liftgate ajar switch is an open circuit. When the liftgate is open or only partially latched, the liftgate ajar switch is a closed circuit. The liftgate ajar switch is hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired liftgate ajar switch input through an internal pull-up, then uses this input to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The liftgate ajar switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations Component ID: 172 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 GROUND Z957 18BK 6 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 11467 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11470 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11471 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11472 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11473 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11474 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11475 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11476 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11477 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11478 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11479 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11480 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11481 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11482 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11483 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11484 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11485 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11486 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11487 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Component ID: 172 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1-2 FUSED B(+) A926 18RD 3 CAN B BUS (+) D55 20WT/OR 4 CAN B BUS (-) D54 20WT 5 GROUND Z957 18BK 6 INFRARED SENSOR SIGNAL C83 20DB/LG Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11488 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11489 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-49-02 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11490 8w-49-03 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11491 8w-49-04 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11492 8w-49-05 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the EVIC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the function buttons. The EVIC displays information related to the following: - System Status - Vehicle information warning message displays - Tire Pressure Monitor System - If Equipped - Personal Settings (customer programmable features) - Compass display - Outside temperature display - Trip computer functions The EVIC system is comprised of several different components. Those components are: - Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) - Ambient Temperature Sensor - EVIC Module - Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit The only serviceable components of the EVIC module are the push button illumination bulbs. All other components of the EVIC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11495 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) uses both non-switched and ignition switched sources of battery current so that some of its features remain operational at any time, while others may only operate with the ignition switch in the On position. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the EVIC display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. The EVIC system is comprised of several different components that communicate over the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus. If the system is inoperative a scan tool and the appropriate diagnostic information must be used to diagnose the system. The EVIC push buttons are used to operate the different functions of the EVIC system. Pressing and releasing the MENU button (1) will change the mode displayed to one of the Personal Settings. The STEP button (2) is used to make a selection from the Personal Settings displayed at that time. Pressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) button (5) will cause the EVIC to return to the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode from any other mode. From the compass/temperature/trip computer display mode the STEP button (2) is used to scroll through and make selections in the Trip Functions. Pressing and releasing the RESET button (4) resets the trip computer screen displayed at that time. EVIC DISPLAY MODES SYSTEM STATUS MODE Displays warnings and user interaction messages. Critical text warnings will be displayed until the failure is corrected. Non-critical text warnings will be displayed for 60 seconds. The driver can scroll to view multiple messages by using the STEP button. When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages: - TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning chime) - RKE BATTERY LOW (with a single chime) - PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE - Vehicle Not in Park - LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph) - DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in motion) - LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime) - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM (with a single chime) - OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with single chime) - LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT - LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT - SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM - COOLANT LOW - ESP SYSTEM DEACTIVATED - LIFTGATE OPEN PERSONAL SETTINGS MODE (CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES) Allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK by pressing and releasing the MENU button until Personal Settings is Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11496 displayed in the EVIC. If the transmission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK. The following personal settings can be set and recalled by pressing the STEP button: - "LANGUAGE" - When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Press the RESET button while in this display to select English, Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language. - "AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES" - When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the driver's door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st" - When DRV DR 1st is selected, only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the passenger's doors. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "DRV DR 1st " appears. - "RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST" - When All ALL DR 1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "All DR 1st" appears. - "MEM RECALL WITH RKE > YES" - When ON is selected, pressing the unlock button on the RKE will recall the memory settings for the seat, mirror and radio. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the remote keyless entry "Lock" button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "FLASH LAMPS w/LOCK > YES" - When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC" - When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "0", "30", "60" or "90" appears. NOTE: The head lamp switch must be in the "A" auto mode for this feature to work. - HEADLAMPS W /WIPERS > YES - When ON is selected, the headlamps will automatically turn on when the wiper switch is activated. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - EASY EXIT SEAT > YES - When ON is selected, and the key is removed from the ignition, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward to allow easy exit. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - TILT MIRRORS IN "R" > YES - When On is selected, and the transmission is put in reverse, the outside mirrors will tilt downward. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON" or "OFF" appears. - "KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped) and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "Off", "45 sec.", "5 min.", "10 min." appears. - "ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF" - When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "OFF", "30 sec.", "60 sec." or "90 sec." appears. - PARK ASST. SYSTEM > YES - When YES is selected, the Park Assist System is activated when the vehicle is in Reverse. When No is selected, the Rear Park System is turned off. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "ON or "OFF" appears. - "UNIT IN > US/METRIC" he EVIC, odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the RESET button until "US" or "METRIC" appears. - "COMPASS VARIANCE > 1" - Press the RESET button to change the compass variance setting. - "COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES" - Press the RESET button to calibrate the compass. COMPASS/TEMPERATURE/TRIP COMPUTER MODE This display provides the outside temperature, one of the eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing, and vehicle trip information. The compass and temperature display is the normal display. When the C/T button is pressed the EVIC returns to the compass/temperature display from all other functions. The trip computer function will be displayed if the STEP button is pressed from the Compass/Temperature display mode. The trip computer displays the following information: - TRIP - Shows the total distance traveled since the last reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the RESET button. - ELAPSED TIME - Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START positions. - UNIT IN US/METRIC - Press the RESET button to toggle between US and METRIC. - AVG. MPG - Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and the RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging history will be erased and the display will return to the 18 AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may take several miles for the value to change dependent upon driving habits. - MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) - Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11497 distance is determined by a weighted average of fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. Distance MI TO EMPTY cannot be reset through the RESET button. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of "LOW FUEL." This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW FUEL" text and a new DTE value will display. UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR (HOMELINK(R)) TRANSCEIVER The EVIC features a driver-interactive display which includes HomeLink(R) system messages. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Component Tests and General Diagnostics ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) data is obtained from several components on the Controller Area Network (CAN) Data Bus circuit. The EVIC will not function properly if the bus messages from any of these components is not received. If no EVIC data is displayed, check the CAN Data Bus circuit communications, the Instrument Cluster (also known as Cab Compartment Node (CCN)) functions and the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the problem with the EVIC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST. If the problem with the EVIC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the CCN or TIPM over the CAN data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner. 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the TIPM. If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the TIPM, repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST for further diagnosis of the EVIC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The EVIC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the EVIC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the EVIC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the EVIC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the EVIC performs the following checks: - Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the EVIC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the EVIC will display one of two messages: "Self Test: FAIL" or "Self Test: PASS" n addition to the FAIL/PASS message the EVIC will display the current software version (SW V xx.xx.xxx) below the FAIL/PASS info. Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: - If no test result message is displayed, but EVIC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "Self Test: FAIL " message is displayed, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "Self Test: PASS" message is displayed, the EVIC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the EVIC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the EVIC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 11500 present on the CAN bus, the EVIC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The EVIC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP, C/T, RESET or US/M buttons. NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the EVIC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the EVIC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 11501 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Programming and Relearning Manual Compass Calibration MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays "CAL", perform the following manual calibration procedure. Also, any time EVIC service replacement components are installed, they must be calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Setting " s displayed. 2. Press the STEP push button (2) until "Calibrate Compass YES" is displayed. 3. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (4) to initiate the calibration procedure. The message "CAL will appear in the Compass/Temperature display. 4. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the EVIC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing EVIC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the manual calibration procedure in another location. Compass Variance Adjustment COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Variance Settings Map Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 11502 Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. Press and release the MENU push button (1) until "Personal Settings" is displayed. 3. Press the STEP push button (2) until "Compass Variance" is displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (4) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Procedures COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. To demagnetize the roof panel proceed as follows: 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11505 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass and adjust the compass variance. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11506 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner. 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2) to the overhead console housing (3). 4. Remove the EVIC from the overhead console housing. Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11507 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Electronic Vehicle Information Center ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER NOTE: If a new Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. 1. Position the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2) onto the overhead console housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the EVIC (2) to the overhead console housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console onto the headliner. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 11508 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with ETC, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The ETC indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Electronic Throttle Control in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ETC indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11513 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The ETC indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ETC indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - ETC Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ETC indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM, the ETC indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about 12 seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service. The indicator will be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for three consecutive seconds, the ETC indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM. The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the PCM sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction or that the ETC system is ineffective. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the PCM will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the ETC system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ETC indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fog lamp indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with optional fog lamps, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The fog lamp indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The fog lamp indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11518 Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The fog lamp indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons: - Fog Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic fog indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM indicating the fog lamp relay is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors electronic exterior lighting switch status messages from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) to determine the appropriate outputs to the fog lamp relay. The FCM activates or deactivates the fog lamp relay then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message back to the EMIC. For proper diagnosis of the fog lamp system, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fog lamp indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11523 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11524 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11525 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11526 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11527 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11528 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11529 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11530 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11531 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11532 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11533 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11534 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11535 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11536 Fuel Gauge: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11537 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11538 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 11539 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fuel gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the engine coolant temperature gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. This gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from E (or Empty) to F (or Full). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Fuel is located on the cluster overlay, in the center of the gauge directly below the bottom end of the scale. An arrowhead pointed to the left side of the vehicle is imprinted on the cluster overlay next to the Fuel icon on the gauge to provide the driver with a reminder as to the location of the fuel filler access. The fuel gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the low end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The fuel gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11542 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fuel gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the level of fuel in the fuel tank. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Fuel Level Sending Unit Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the fuel level sense input voltage. The cluster programming applies an algorithm to calculate the proper fuel gauge needle position based upon the fuel level sense input, then moves the gauge needle to the proper relative position on the gauge scale. This algorithm is used to dampen gauge needle movement against the negative effect that fuel sloshing within the fuel tank can have on accurate inputs from the fuel tank sending unit to the cluster. - Less Than 12.5 Percent Tank Full Input - Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about 12.5 percent full or less for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the gauge needle is moved to about the one-sixteenth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank is greater than about 12.5 percent full for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit. - Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is less than the EMPTY gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit. - More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is more than the FULL gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fuel gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank. The EMIC then sends the proper electronic fuel level messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the fuel gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge. For proper diagnosis of the fuel tank sending unit, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fuel gauge operation or fuel level data processing a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11546 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11547 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Technical Service Bulletins Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation NUMBER: 08-001-07 REV. B GROUP: Electrical DATE: May 16, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-001-07 REV. A, DATED FEBRUARY 7, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO **ASTERISKS** HAVE BEEN INCLUDED. THIS INFORMATION IS PROVIDED FOR COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES, PLEASE FOLLOW LOCAL LAWS GOVERNING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. DUE TO U.S. FEDERAL LAW, IT IS ILLEGAL FOR A U.S. DEALER TO INSTALL THESE PARTS ON U.S. VEHICLES. FOR VEHICLES WITHIN THE UNITED STATES, CONTACT NHTSA'S AUTO SAFETY HOTLINE AT 1-800-424-9393 FOR GUIDELINES REGARDING AIRBAG DEACTIVATION. SUBJECT: Passenger Air Bag Deactivation MODELS: 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (LE) 0300/Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2001 - 2008 (PT/PG) Chrysler PT Cruiser/Chrysler PT Cruiser (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2004 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2005 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2007 (XK) Commander 2006 - 2007 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakoka 2006 - 2007 (DR) Ram Truck 2005 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2007 (PM) Caliber 2007 (MK49) Compass 2007 (MK74) Patriot 2007 (JS) Sebring Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 11553 2007 - 2008 (JS) Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible NOTE: THIS BULLETIN IS PROVIDED TO IDENTIFY THE PARTS AND PROCEDURES NECESSARY TO DEACTIVATE PASSENGER AIRBAGS IN COUNTRIES OUTSIDE OF THE UNITED STATES. THE COMPONENT PARTS ARE COVERED UNDER THE APPROPRIATE MOPAR PART WARRANTY. DISCUSSION: DaimlerChrysler Corporation is now offering a passenger airbag deactivation wiring package for the selected vehicles listed above operating outside of the United States. The wiring package is a kit containing all necessary parts and a detailed instruction sheet. NOTE: Due to U.S. law and the inability for U.S. dealers to legally install these parts on U.S. vehicles, orders for the following parts will only be accepted from dealers outside of the United States. PARTS REQUIRED: POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Air Bag System - Passenger Air Bag Deactivation > Page 11554 This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the universal transmitter push buttons. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Bulb - Front A/C-Heat Control BULB - FRONT A/C-HEAT CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11559 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the front A/C-heater control (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Bulb - Rear A/C-Heat Control BULB - REAR A/C-HEAT CONTROL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear A/C-heater control from the center floor console. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (2) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in rear A/C-heater control (1) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11560 Instrument Panel Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - EVIC Control BULB - EVIC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the EVIC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the universal transmitter push buttons. 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Front A/C-Heat Control BULB - FRONT A/C-HEAT CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11561 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the front A/C-heater control (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the center bezel (1) onto the instrument panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Rear A/C-Heat Control BULB - REAR A/C-HEAT CONTROL CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (2) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the rear A/C-heater control (1). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the rear A/C-heater control onto the center floor console. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low fuel indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The low fuel indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Fuel in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low fuel indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11566 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low fuel indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the level of fuel in the fuel tank becomes low. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The low fuel indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low fuel indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the low fuel indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Less Than 12.5 Percent Tank Full Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the sense input voltage. Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about 12.5 percent full or less for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the fuel gauge needle is moved to about the one-sixteenth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank is greater than about 12.5 percent full for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit. - Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is less than the E (or Empty) gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit. - More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is more than the F (or Full) gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low fuel indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank. The cluster then sends the proper electronic fuel level messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the low fuel indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED. For proper diagnosis of the fuel tank sending unit, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low fuel indicator operation or fuel level data processing a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Chrysler provides no information regarding a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11574 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED. If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Odometer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An odometer and trip odometer are standard factory-installed equipment in all instrument clusters. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information are displayed in a common electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information are not displayed simultaneously. The trip odometer reset switch on the instrument cluster circuit board toggles the display between odometer and trip odometer modes by depressing the odometer/trip odometer switch button that extends through the lower edge of the cluster lens, just left of the minor gauge set. When the trip odometer information is displayed, the word TRIP is also illuminated in the lower right corner of the odometer/trip odometer VFD in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the trip odometer information. The engine hours information replaces the selected odometer or trip odometer information whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position and the engine is not running. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information is stored in the instrument cluster memory. This information can be increased when the proper inputs are provided to the instrument cluster, but the information cannot be decreased. The odometer can display values up to 999,999 kilometers (999,999 miles). The odometer latches at these values, and will not roll over to zero. The trip odometer can display values up to 999.9 kilometers (999.9 miles) before it rolls over to zero. Engine hours are displayed in the format, hr9999. The cluster will accumulate values up to 9,999 hours before the display rolls over to zero. The odometer display does not have a decimal point and will not show values less than a full unit (kilometer or mile), while the trip odometer display does have a decimal point and will show tenths of a unit (kilometer or mile). The unit of measure (kilometers or miles) for the odometer and trip odometer display is not shown in the VFD. The unit of measure for the instrument cluster odometer/trip odometer is selected at the time that it is manufactured, and cannot be changed. The odometer also has a RENTAL CAR mode, which will illuminate the odometer information in the VFD whenever the driver side front door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACCESSORY positions. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the odometer VFD is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the VFD lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the VFD to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The odometer/trip odometer VFD, the trip odometer switch, and the trip odometer switch button are serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11579 Odometer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The odometer and trip odometer give an indication to the vehicle operator of the distance the vehicle has traveled. The engine hours give an indication of the cumulative engine-ON time. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The odometer, trip odometer and engine hours information is displayed by the instrument cluster odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD). The VFD will display the odometer information whenever any door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACCESSORY positions, and will display the last previously selected odometer or trip odometer information when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START positions. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the VFD and provides the following features: - Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Toggling - Actuating the trip odometer reset switch button momentarily with the VFD illuminated will toggle the display between the odometer and trip odometer information. Each time the VFD is illuminated with the ignition switch in the ON or START positions, the display will automatically return to the last mode previously selected (odometer or trip odometer). - Engine Hours Display Toggling - When the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed and held for longer than about six seconds with the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine speed message from the PCM is zero, the trip odometer information will be momentarily displayed, then the engine hours information will be displayed. The VFD must be displaying the odometer information when the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed in order to toggle to the engine hours display. The engine hours will remain displayed for about 30 seconds, until the engine speed message is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Trip Odometer Reset - When the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed and held for longer than about two seconds with the ignition switch in the ON or START positions, the trip odometer will be reset to 0.0 kilometers (miles). The VFD must be displaying the trip odometer information in order for the trip odometer information to be reset. - GASCAP Message Display - On vehicles manufactured with a United States country code, each time the cluster receives an electronic message from the PCM indicating a monitored leak in the evaporative emissions system, the cluster replaces the displayed odometer/trip odometer value with the textual message, GASCAP. This message serves as a reminder to the vehicle operator to check that the gas cap is properly installed and tightened, but could also indicate another source of air leakage in the on-board evaporative and vapor recovery emissions systems. Unless the leak is corrected, this message will latch and remain displayed during the current and each subsequent ignition cycle until the trip odometer reset button is pressed and released momentarily, which will revert the display to the odometer/trip odometer information that was last displayed for the remainder of that ignition cycle. Once the source of a leak has been corrected, either momentarily pressing the trip odometer reset button or cycling the ignition switch will unlatch the message and return the odometer/trip odometer to normal operation. - NO-FUSE Message Display - Each time the cluster receives an electronic message from the Front Control Module (FCM) indicating the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) feed for the cluster is an open circuit, the cluster replaces the displayed odometer/trip odometer value with the textual message, NO-FUSE. This message indicates that the IOD fuse is missing, blown or that the IOD feed circuit is ineffective. Unless the problem is corrected, this message will latch and remain displayed during the current and each subsequent ignition cycle until the trip odometer reset button is pressed and released momentarily, which will revert the display to the odometer/trip odometer information that was last displayed for the remainder of that ignition cycle. Once the problem has been corrected, either momentarily pressing the trip odometer reset button or cycling the ignition switch will unlatch the message and return the odometer/trip odometer to normal operation. - Ambient Temperature Display - On vehicles that are not equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), each time the cluster receives an electronic ambient temperature message from the FCM, the cluster replaces the displayed odometer/trip odometer value with the ambient temperature value. This value will be displayed and updated during the current ignition cycle until the trip odometer reset button is pressed and released momentarily, which will revert the display to the odometer/trip odometer information that was last displayed for the remainder of that ignition cycle. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an electronic distance message during normal operation, it will hold and display the last data received until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. If the cluster does not receive a distance message within one second after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, it will display the last distance value stored in the cluster memory. If the cluster is unable to display distance information due to an error internal to the cluster, the VFD will display Error. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer VFD will display all of its segments simultaneously, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the vehicle speed pulse information received from the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) and engine speed pulse information received from the crankshaft position sensor, then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the VSS, the crankshaft position sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to odometer/trip odometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Chrysler provides no information regarding a Oil Change Reminder Lamp Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11586 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11587 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11588 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11589 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 436 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL G6 16VT/GY 2-Component Location - 13 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11590 Component Location - 17 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11591 Component Location - 25 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11592 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11597 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electromechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit and the Integrated Power Module (IPM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 55° C (131° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below -40° C (-40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - -° C (- -° F) will be displayed on the EVIC. The ambient temperature sensor and circuit can also be diagnosed using the following Sensor Test, and Temperature System Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, further testing of the CAN data bus, IPM and base EVIC system is necessary. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read - -° C (- -° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read 60 ° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. NOTE: If the EVIC display does not show the ambient temperature in step 4, the vehicle may need to be driven several miles at a speed greater than 32 km/h (20 mph) for the temperature to update. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Remove the jumper wire. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and wait until the EVIC display again reads - -° C (- -° F). Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Reconnect the ambient temperature sensor. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read the ambient temperature. If OK, the problem is intermittent. Perform further diagnosis while manipulating the related wire harnesses and components. If not OK, go to STEP 5 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the CAN data bus circuit, the IPM and the ambient temperature sensor (refer to the SENSOR TEST). SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 kilohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) system. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient temperature sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tow/haul indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tow/haul indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The tow/haul indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text TOW/HAUL in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the tow/haul indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The tow/haul indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Overdrive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11606 Overdrive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tow/haul indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the tow/haul function of the tow/haul switch has been selected, revising the shift schedule of the electronically controlled automatic transmission. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tow/haul indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the tow/haul indicator for the following reasons: - Tow/Haul Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic tow/haul indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the tow/haul shift schedule has been selected, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tow/haul indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the tow/haul switch to determine the proper outputs to the automatic transmission. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the transmission control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tow/haul indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park assist display (1) is located in the headliner at the rear of the vehicle, just forward of the upper liftgate opening header. Only the smoked clear plastic display lens (3) is visible on the headliner. The lens prevents the 4 red Light Emitting Diode (LED) units and 12 amber LED units from being clearly visible unless they are illuminated by the electronic circuitry of the display. The remainder of the display including the mounting provisions and the electrical connection are concealed above the headliner. A molded plastic housing with an integral connector receptacle (2) at one end contains and protects the electronic circuitry of the display, including an audible tone transducer and an electronic communication chip. A molded plastic retainer (1) with three integral tabs (2) engages three slots integral to the display housing above the lens. The retainer is installed over the display housing above the headliner substrate to engage and securely lock the display into the opening in the headliner. An arrow and the text REAR are molded into an integral installation tab (3) to ensure correct retainer orientation. The park assist display is serviced only as a complete unit. It cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire display unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11611 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park assist display provides the vehicle operator with visual feedback by illuminating amber or red Light Emitting Diode (LED) units individually or in unison, and audible feedback by energizing an audible tone transducer on the display electronic circuit board to emit either an intermittent or a continuous tone. While the park assist system is active, the number, position and color of the illuminated LED units as well as the audible signal frequency indicate the relative position and distance of obstacles detected at the rear of the vehicle. The park assist display receives battery current and ground from and is completely controlled by the park assist module. The display also contains an electronic communication chip that allows bi-directional communication to occur with the park assist module over a dedicated serial bus line. The microprocessor in the park assist module completely controls the display outputs, continually monitors the display status, and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in memory for any monitored fault it detects in the park assist display. The illumination intensity of the LED units is also controlled by the park assist module based upon internal programming and electronic panel lamps dimming messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, all 16 of the LED units in the display will illuminate in unison for approximately 1 second as a bulb test. This output will be interrupted if the system is active and senses an obstacle. Following the conclusion of the bulb test, when the system is active but no obstacle is detected, the display will indicate system readiness by illuminating the two outermost amber LED units (1) at a reduced intensity. As an obstacle is detected, the outermost amber LED unit (5) on the side of the vehicle where the obstacle was detected will be illuminated at normal intensity. Then additional amber LED units (6) will begin illuminating inward (2 or 4) as the obstacle gets closer until, finally, the two red LED units (7) are illuminated. When the final red LED unit (3) is illuminated, the obstacle is approximately 40 centimeters (16 inches) from the rear bumper and an intermittent audible tone will be generated. The frequency of the audible tone will increase as the obstacle continues to become closer until the tone is continuous when the obstacle is about 30 centimeters (12 inches) from the rear bumper. Whenever a park assist audible tone is being generated, the park assist module sends electronic messages to the radio over the CAN data bus to mute the audio system. The audible tone will be cancelled after about two seconds if the detected distance to the obstacle remains constant. See the Park Assist Display Outputs table for additional details. The hard wired circuits between components related to the park assist display may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the park assist display or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the park assist system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the park assist display or the electronic controls and communication related to park assist display operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11612 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the trim from the upper liftgate opening. 3. Remove the trim from both upper D-pillars. 4. Carefully pull down the rear edge of the headliner (5) from the upper liftgate opening header (2) far enough to access the rear park assist display housing (3) and the display retainer (4). 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the connector receptacle on the left end of the display housing. 6. Carefully spread the front and rear edges of the molded plastic retainer far enough to disengage the three retainer tabs from the slots in the display housing, then lift the retainer off of the display housing. 7. Push the right end of the display out through the lower surface of the headliner, then slide the display toward the right side of the vehicle far enough to disengage the connector receptacle from the headliner opening. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11615 Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Carefully position the connector receptacle on the left end of the park assist display housing (3) through the left end of the display opening in the lower surface of the headliner (5). 2. Slide the display toward the left side of the vehicle far enough to engage the right end of the display housing into the right end of the display opening in the headliner. 3. Carefully pull down the rear edge of the headliner from the upper liftgate opening header (2) far enough to access the rear park assist display housing. 4. With the display lens held flush against the lower surface of the headliner, position the molded plastic retainer (4) over the display housing with the installation tab oriented towards the rear of the vehicle. 5. Slide the retainer down over the display housing until it is flash with the headliner substrate and the three tabs of the retainer are engaged in the three slots of the display housing. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the connector receptacle on the left end of the display housing. 7. Reinstall the trim onto both upper D-pillars. 8. Reinstall the trim onto the upper liftgate opening. 9. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11619 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11620 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11621 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11624 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11625 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11628 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A seatbelt indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The seatbelt indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Seat Belt in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The seatbelt indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11633 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seatbelt indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the driver side front seatbelt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input from the seatbelt switch in the driver side front seatbelt retractor through the seat belt indicator driver circuit. The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or BELTMINDER feature that is enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This BELTMINDER feature can be disabled and enabled by the customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. The seatbelt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the seatbelt indicator for the following reasons: - Seatbelt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seatbelt reminder for about six seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur regardless of the status of the seatbelt switch input to the cluster. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about 60 seconds after the conclusion of the seatbelt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour), the seatbelt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing ON and OFF for 3 seconds, then lighting solid for 2 seconds. The seatbelt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for 13 complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The seatbelt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send an electronic message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF. The cluster will continue to flash the indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seatbelt indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The seatbelt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the instrument cluster. The hard wired seatbelt switch input to the instrument cluster may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11638 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11639 Door Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11640 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description Door DOOR This vehicle has four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Liftgate LIFTGATE A liftgate ajar switch is standard equipment on this vehicle. The switch is concealed within and integral to the liftgate latch unit. The switch is a momentary leaf contact-type unit that is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanisms. An integral connector receptacle on the liftgate latch connects the liftgate ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through the liftgate wire harness. The liftgate ajar switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the liftgate latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11643 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation Door DOOR The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The rear door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles not equipped with the optional memory system, the front door ajar switches are also hard wired in series between ground and the EMIC. On vehicles equipped with the optional memory system each front door ajar switch is hard wired in series between ground and its respective driver or passenger Memory Mirror Module (MMM) located in the front door. The MMM then sends electronic door ajar switch status messages to the EMIC over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Both the EMIC and the MMM read the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then use these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Liftgate LIFTGATE The liftgate ajar switch is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanism. When the liftgate is closed and properly latched, its liftgate ajar switch is an open circuit. When the liftgate is open or only partially latched, the liftgate ajar switch is a closed circuit. The liftgate ajar switch is hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired liftgate ajar switch input through an internal pull-up, then uses this input to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The liftgate ajar switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11647 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 11648 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit and the Integrated Power Module (IPM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 55° C (131° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below -40° C (-40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - -° C (- -° F) will be displayed on the EVIC. The ambient temperature sensor and circuit can also be diagnosed using the following Sensor Test, and Temperature System Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, further testing of the CAN data bus, IPM and base EVIC system is necessary. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read - -° C (- -° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read 60 ° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. NOTE: If the EVIC display does not show the ambient temperature in step 4, the vehicle may need to be driven several miles at a speed greater than 32 km/h (20 mph) for the temperature to update. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Remove the jumper wire. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and wait until the EVIC display again reads - -° C (- -° F). Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Reconnect the ambient temperature sensor. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The EVIC display should now read the ambient temperature. If OK, the problem is intermittent. Perform further diagnosis while manipulating the related wire harnesses and components. If not OK, go to STEP 5 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the CAN data bus circuit, the IPM and the ambient temperature sensor (refer to the SENSOR TEST). SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 kilohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) system. If not OK, replace the inoperative ambient temperature sensor. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11655 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11656 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 437 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : BLACK # of pins : 1 Pin Description Circuit 1 PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE B25 20DG/WT Component Location - 35 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11657 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11660 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11661 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11664 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position the park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Speedometer Head: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A speedometer is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The speedometer is located in the center of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the minor gauge set. The speedometer consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 210 degree primary scale on the gauge dial face that reads left-to-right either from 0 to 120 mph, or from 0 to 200 km/h, depending upon the market for which the vehicle is manufactured. Each version also has a secondary inner scale on the gauge dial face that provides the equivalent opposite units from the primary scale. Text appearing on the cluster overlay above the hub of the speedometer needle abbreviates the unit of measure for the primary scale (either MPH or km/h), followed by the unit of measure for the secondary scale. The speedometer graphics are black (primary scale) and blue (secondary scale) against a white field, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black and blue graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red gauge needle still appears red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The speedometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11669 Speedometer Head: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The speedometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the vehicle road speed. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The speedometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Vehicle Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic vehicle speed message from the PCM it will calculate the correct vehicle speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be positioned at the relative vehicle speed position on the gauge scale until the vehicle stops moving, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a speed message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about three seconds , or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the speedometer needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) to determine the vehicle road speed. The PCM then sends the proper vehicle speed messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the VSS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to speedometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tachometer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tachometer is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tachometer is located to the right side of the instrument cluster, just right of the speedometer. The tachometer consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 210 degree scale on the gauge dial face that reads left-to-right from 0 to 7. The text RPM X 1000 imprinted on the cluster overlay directly above the hub of the tachometer needle identifies that each number on the tachometer scale is to be multiplied by 1000 rpm. The tachometer graphics are black against a white field, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red gauge needle still appears red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The tachometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11674 Tachometer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tachometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine speed. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tachometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine speed message from the PCM it will calculate the correct engine speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be repositioned at the relative engine speed position on the gauge scale until the engine stops running, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine speed message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tachometer needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the crankshaft position sensor to determine the engine speed. The PCM then sends the proper engine speed messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the crankshaft position sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tachometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the fuel gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the bottom end of the scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11679 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54° C (130° F)] and the high end of normal [about 122° C (252° F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. - Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54° C (130° F)], the gauge needle is held at the C increment at the low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is above about 54° C (130° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122° C (252° F), the gauge needle is moved to the red zone at the high end of the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 122° C (252° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electromechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11684 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135° C (275° F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine temperature indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The engine temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11689 Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the engine temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the engine temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122° C (252° F), the engine temperature indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 119° C (246° F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF, then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the Electro Mechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Description - Premium System DESCRIPTION - PREMIUM SYSTEM A transponder is located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle to provide the WCM/SKREEM with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Premium System > Page 11695 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Description and Operation Operation - Premium System OPERATION - PREMIUM SYSTEM Transponders located in three of the four wheel wells of the vehicle provide the Wireless Control Module (WCM) commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) with the location of the tire pressure sensors on the vehicle. The transponders are located in the left front, right front and right rear wheel wells. A fourth transponder is not necessary in the remaining wheel well due to the process-of-elimination theory. Once the system knows the location of the first three sensors it assumes the location of the fourth tire pressure sensor is in the left rear tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Removal Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel well housing cover (2). 3. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (2) from the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11698 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4). 3. Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and remove the transponder (4) from the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11699 Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Service and Repair Installation Front Transponder FRONT TRANSPONDER 1. Install the transponder (2) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (2) Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Install the wheel well housing cover (2). 4. Lower the vehicle. Rear Transponder REAR TRANSPONDER Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11700 1. Install the transponder (4) to the vehicle and reconnect the electrical connector (3). 2. Install the mounting screw (1) for the transponder (4) 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the "WCM/Wireless Control Module" menu item as appropriate.Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a black sensor body, with (an oval insignia) (1) and a grey valve cap (2). The Export TPM system operates on a 433 MHz radio frequency. The 433 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a gray sensor body (with an oval insignia) and a black valve cap (2). CAUTION: Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct sensor is being used. NOTE: Sensors may be identified by valve stem cap color. From the factory, 315 MHz sensors have a gray valve stem cap while 433 MHz sensors have a black valve stem cap. Otherwise, once mounted inside a tire and wheel assembly you are not able to visually tell the difference between a 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensor. The tire must be dismounted allowing visual inspection of the sensor body. NOTE: If aftermarket wheels are installed and do not contain tire pressure sensors, the system will not function properly and the driver will be continuously notified of a system malfunction. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11706 The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: NOTE: Any time a sensor is installed on a wheel, a new Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) must be installed to ensure proper sealing. - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11707 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), when the spare tire pressure sensor is replaced with a new pressure sensor, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the wireless control module (WCM), commonly referred to as the sentry key remote entry module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. Then install the spare tire with one of the active road tires. NOTE: If replacing the WCM, the spare tire must be dismounted from its wheel to access and note the spare tire pressure sensor ID. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module menu item as appropriate. In addition, the placard pressure thresholds must be updated in the new WCM. Go to "Update Pressure Thresholds" under Miscellaneous Functions for the WCM wireless control module and follow the procedure. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor's operating mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: - Sleep Mode - This is the operating mode of a new TPM sensor. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 1 PSI. Driving the vehicle continuously at this speed for more then 4 minutes, and then stopping the vehicle will change the sensor state into Park Mode. If the vehicle is equipped with a full size matching spare tire and the spare tire sensor has been replaced, The sensor must be changed to Park Mode to conserve battery life. Either use a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or swap the spare tire with a road tire. - Park Mode - This is the correct operating mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 1 PSI delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure - 0ff / 30 Block - If the vehicle has been stopped for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's operating mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from Park Mode to 30 Block Mode once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After about 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the sensor's mode will change to Drive Mode - Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time the vehicle speed drops below 15 mph, the sensor will revert back to Park Mode. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h), unless the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced, The vehicle must be stationary for more than 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11708 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR NOTE: Tire pressure may increase from 14 to 41 kPa (2 to 6 psi) during normal driving conditions. Do NOT reduce this normal pressure build up. Check the tire pressure yellow telltale in the instrument cluster. If the yellow telltale is illuminating continuously, proceed as listed below. If the yellow telltale is flashing on/off for 60 seconds, once every ten minutes, there is a system fault detected. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. When diagnosing a tire pressure issue, always check air pressure in the tires first with a known accurate air gauge. Adjust air pressure as necessary to that listed on the Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with the vehicle (usually applied to the driver's side B-pillar). After adjusting air pressure in a tire, allow approximately two minutes for the message or yellow telltale to go out. If air pressure in any tire is low, inspect all the tires for leaks. A water "dunk tank" or other water test may be used to check for a leak around the tire assembly and sensor as long as any water at the valve core is removed once the procedure is completed. The water can be easily expelled from the core area by pushing in on the core for several seconds, allowing escaping air to drive out any moisture. Reinflate the tire as necessary. Always make sure the original valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of the sensor. If the gauge-read pressure in the tires does not indicate a tire pressure issue, refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11711 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If replacing the spare tire pressure sensor, take the time now to write down the tire pressure sensor ID. NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11712 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 8 Nm (71 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Rotating Wheel Tire Changers - Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11713 Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. SPARE TIRE SENSOR REPLACEMENT NOTE: When the spare tire sensor is replaced on vehicles equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and a full-sized matching spare tire and wheel assembly, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to run a routine that will program the new pressure sensor ID into the Wireless Control Module (WCM), commonly referred to as the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM). Please copy the ID number off of the new pressure sensor before installing it into the spare tire. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for: "Learn Spare Tire Sensor ID" under Miscellaneous Functions for the (WCM) Wireless Control Module menu item as appropriate. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is available, put the new spare tire pressure sensor into "Park" mode. If a TPM-RKE Analyzer special tool is not available, rotate the spare tire with one of the road tires. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area below and to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The ESP/BAS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text ESP BAS in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ESP/BAS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The ESP/BAS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a problem has been detected in the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) and the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ESP/BAS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ESP/BAS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ESP/BAS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. - ESP/BAS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ESP/BAS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB or the FCM, the ESP/BAS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB or FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ESP/BAS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB and FCM continually monitor the ESP/BAS system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition and the proper outputs to the components of the system. The CAB or FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS system, the CAB, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ESP/BAS Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 11718 indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 11719 Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Traction Control Indicator Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System (ESP/BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) traction control indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The traction control indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Stability - Anti-Spin in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The traction control indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Operation OPERATION The traction control indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Brake Assist System (BAS)/Traction Control System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the traction control indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the traction control indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Traction Control Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic traction control indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB indicating that the ESP/BAS/TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB continually monitors the status of the inputs to the ESP/BAS/TCS systems to determine the proper outputs to the components of the Antilock Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Stability Program/Brake Assist System Indicator > Page 11720 diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier testing. For proper diagnosis of the ESP/BAS/TCS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to traction control indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P, R, N, D, 2, and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator also illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11725 Transmission Shift Position Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the gear selector indicator to provide the following features: - Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic selected gear message from the PCM, a box will be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the TRS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Vehicles with an electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. Refer to the service and diagnostic information for the automatic transmission type installed in the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - DODGE NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. 3. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate (2) to the back of the rear lamp unit housing. 4. Remove the socket plate from the rear lamp. 5. Pull the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb straight out of the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11735 Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - DODGE CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb with the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket plate (2) and bulbs with the openings on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket plate and bulbs straight into the housing until the plate is firmly seated. 5. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate to the housing. Tighten the screws to 1 Nm (12 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit Brake Lamp Relay: Diagrams Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit Component ID: 227 Component : RELAY-STOP LAMP INHIBIT Connector: Name : RELAY-STOP LAMP INHIBIT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY FEED L950 18WT/LG 85 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B45 20DG/LB 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 87 87A BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit > Page 11741 Brake Lamp Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper Rear Component ID: 233 Component : RELAY-WIPER REAR Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER REAR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 85 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A44 18RD/OR 87 FUSED B(+) A44 18RD/OR 87A GROUND Z901 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - DODGE NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. 3. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate (2) to the back of the rear lamp unit housing. 4. Remove the socket plate from the rear lamp. 5. Pull the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb straight out of the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11746 Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - DODGE CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb with the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket plate (2) and bulbs with the openings on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket plate and bulbs straight into the housing until the plate is firmly seated. 5. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate to the housing. Tighten the screws to 1 Nm (12 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID: 447 Component : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 2 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL L50 18WT/TN 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 5 GROUND Z429 20BK/OR 6 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11750 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11751 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11752 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 447 Component : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 2 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL L50 18WT/TN 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 5 GROUND Z429 20BK/OR 6 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11753 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11754 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11757 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11758 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (1) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (3). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4). 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11761 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4) on the lower steering column (3). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (1) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (2) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (5) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) (1) from the liftgate header panel. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the socket (3) on the back of the CHMSL housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11767 Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the CHMSL socket (3). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of CHMSL housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the CHMSL onto the liftgate header panel. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Cornering Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 11772 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel lamp unit (4) from the instrument panel. 3. Depress the latch tab (2) and slide the hood (1) off of the end of the lamp housing. 4. Pull the base of the bulb (3) straight out of the bulb holder within the lamp housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11778 Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the center bezel lamp bulb (3) with the bulb holder within the lamp housing (4). 2. Push the bulb straight into the bulb holder until the base is firmly seated. 3. Slide the hood (1) over the end of the lamp housing until the latch tab (2) snaps into place. 4. Reinstall the lamp unit into the instrument panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations Glove Box Lamp: Locations Component ID: 419 Component : SWITCH AND LAMP-GLOVE BOX Connector: Name : SWITCH AND LAMP-GLOVE BOX Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER M28 20YL/TN 2 GROUND Z328 20BK/TN Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11782 Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11783 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11784 Glove Box Lamp: Diagrams Component ID: 419 Component : SWITCH AND LAMP-GLOVE BOX Connector: Name : SWITCH AND LAMP-GLOVE BOX Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER M28 20YL/TN 2 GROUND Z328 20BK/TN Component Location - 29 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11785 Component Location - 36 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Page 11786 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair Removal Bulb BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel. 3. Reach through the window (3) in the instrument panel glove box opening (1) to access the bulb on the lower side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (2). 4. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the bulb holder. Lamp/Switch LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11789 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel. 3. Reach through the window (4) in the instrument panel (1) to access and depress the retaining latch on either side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (2). 4. While holding the retaining latch depressed, push the glove box lamp and switch unit out through the mounting hole in the face of the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the glove box lamp and switch. 6. Remove the lamp and switch unit from the instrument panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11790 Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair Installation Bulb BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Reach through the window (3) in the instrument panel glove box opening (1) to align the base of the bulb with the bulb holder on the lower side of the glove box lamp and switch unit (2). 2. Push the bulb straight into the bulb holder until the base is firmly seated. 3. Reinstall the glove box into the instrument panel. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Lamp/Switch LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11791 1. Position the glove box lamp and switch unit (2) to the instrument panel (1). 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector to the lamp and switch unit. 3. Feed the wire harness back through the switch mounting hole. 4. Align the lamp and switch unit with the mounting hole in the instrument panel. 5. Using hand pressure, push the lamp and switch unit firmly and evenly into the mounting hole until it is fully seated. 6. Reinstall the glove box into the instrument panel. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Daytime Running Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 11796 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 11797 Daytime Running Lamp: Description and Operation - Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles manufactured for sale in Canada illuminate the high beam filament of the headlamp bulb in each front lamp unit to serve as the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Fleet vehicles manufactured for sale in the United States illuminate the low beam filament of the headlamp bulb in each front lamp unit to serve as the DRL. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - Front BULB - FRONT 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front dome lamp unit (2) from the headliner. 3. With the lamp lens (1) in the open position, carefully unsnap the bulb (3) from the two bulb holders within the front dome lamp housing. Bulb - Rear Except With Overhead Console BULB - REAR EXCEPT WITH OVERHEAD CONSOLE 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Insert the tip of a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the notch on one side of the rear dome lamp between the lens (4) and the lamp housing (1). 3. Gently pry the notched edge of the lens downward until it unsnaps from the housing. 4. Swing the notched end of the lens downward far enough to access the bulb (3). 5. Carefully unsnap the bulb from the two bulb holders within the rear dome lamp housing. Bulb - Rear With Overhead Console BULB - REAR WITH OVERHEAD CONSOLE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11803 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear dome lamp unit (2) from the headliner. 3. With the lamp lens (1) in the open position, carefully unsnap the bulb (3) from the two bulb holders within the rear dome lamp housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11804 Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - Front BULB - FRONT CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. With the dome lamp lens (1) in the open position, align the ends of the bulb (3) with the two bulb holders within the front dome lamp housing (2). 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Reinstall the lamp into the headliner. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Rear Except With Overhead Console BULB - REAR EXCEPT WITH OVERHEAD CONSOLE CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the ends of the bulb (3) with the two bulb holders within the rear dome lamp housing (1). 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Swing the notched end of the lens (4) up into position against the housing, then press upward on the lens firmly and evenly until it snaps into the housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11805 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Rear With Overhead Console BULB - REAR WITH OVERHEAD CONSOLE CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. With the dome lamp lens (1) in the open position, align the ends of the bulb (3) with the two bulb holders within the rear dome lamp housing (2). 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Reinstall the rear dome lamp unit into the headliner. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11809 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11810 Door Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11811 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description Door DOOR This vehicle has four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Liftgate LIFTGATE A liftgate ajar switch is standard equipment on this vehicle. The switch is concealed within and integral to the liftgate latch unit. The switch is a momentary leaf contact-type unit that is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanisms. An integral connector receptacle on the liftgate latch connects the liftgate ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through the liftgate wire harness. The liftgate ajar switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the liftgate latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11814 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation Door DOOR The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The rear door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles not equipped with the optional memory system, the front door ajar switches are also hard wired in series between ground and the EMIC. On vehicles equipped with the optional memory system each front door ajar switch is hard wired in series between ground and its respective driver or passenger Memory Mirror Module (MMM) located in the front door. The MMM then sends electronic door ajar switch status messages to the EMIC over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Both the EMIC and the MMM read the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then use these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Liftgate LIFTGATE The liftgate ajar switch is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanism. When the liftgate is closed and properly latched, its liftgate ajar switch is an open circuit. When the liftgate is open or only partially latched, the liftgate ajar switch is a closed circuit. The liftgate ajar switch is hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired liftgate ajar switch input through an internal pull-up, then uses this input to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The liftgate ajar switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the fasteners that secure the front of the front fender wheel house liner to the bottom of the front fascia. 3. Pull the front of the front fender liner rearward far enough to access the back of the front fascia. 4. Reach under and behind the front fascia to access the front fog lamp housing on the back of the front fascia. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the fog lamp bulb connector receptacle. 6. Firmly grasp the bulb on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise (2) about 30 degrees to unlock it. 7. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11820 Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Align the base of the fog lamp bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing. 2. Insert the bulb into the housing until the base is firmly seated. 3. Rotate the bulb clockwise (2) about 30 degrees to lock it into place. The bulb connector receptacle should be oriented in a horizontal position. 4. Position the front of the front fender wheel house liner to the bottom of the front fascia. 5. Reinstall the fasteners that secure the front of the wheel house liner to the bottom of the front fascia. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the bulb. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fog lamp indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with optional fog lamps, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The fog lamp indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The fog lamp indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11825 Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The fog lamp indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons: - Fog Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic fog indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM indicating the fog lamp relay is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors electronic exterior lighting switch status messages from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) to determine the appropriate outputs to the fog lamp relay. The FCM activates or deactivates the fog lamp relay then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message back to the EMIC. For proper diagnosis of the fog lamp system, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fog lamp indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Fog Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11829 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 217 Component : RELAY-FOG LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FOG LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A39 18RD/LG 85 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 86 FUSED B(+) A39 18RD/LG 87 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The front fog lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The front fog lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The front fog lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11832 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The front fog lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the front fog lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the front fog lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a fog lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls front fog lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the front fog lamps through a fog lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the front fog lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The front fog lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID Please Note: The Flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Front Control Module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - HEADLAMP CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender, but do not disconnect the headlamp and dash wiring from the back of the lamp housing. 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the headlamp bulb (3) on the back of the front lamp unit housing. 4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11842 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - HEADLAMP CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Align the headlamp bulb (3) with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit (1) housing. 2. Insert the bulb into the housing until it is firmly seated. 3. Rotate the bulb clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the headlamp bulb. 5. Reinstall the front lamp unit into the front fender. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 422 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX L307 20PK/RD 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E2 20OR/BR 3 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN L900 20WT/YL 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z942 20BK 6-7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11846 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11847 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 422 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX L307 20PK/RD 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E2 20OR/BR 3 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN L900 20WT/YL 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z942 20BK 6-7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11848 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Three different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control and a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control. An optional switch has a momentary push button (3) added for front fog lamp control. A second optional switch has the same thumbwheel and momentary push button, but has a fourth position added to the rotary knob for selecting the optional automatic headlamps feature. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. The optional front fog lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11851 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, and on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the fog lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamp relay in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp relay in the PDC and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The FCM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected using the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. If the vehicle is equipped with optional automatic headlamps and the A (Automatic) position is selected, the EMIC also monitors an input from a sun load sensor on the instrument panel and, based upon the monitored ambient light levels, responds by automatically sending appropriate messages to the FCM to turn the exterior lighting ON or OFF while the ignition switch is in the ON position. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11852 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel and the headlamp switch from the instrument panel as a unit. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11853 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch (2). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11856 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (2) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A high beam indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The high beam indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for High Beam in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A blue Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in blue through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The high beam indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11861 Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The high beam indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the headlamp high beams are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired multiplex input received by the cluster from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux circuit. The high beam indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the high beam indicator for the following reasons: - High Beam Headlamps-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a high beam headlamps-ON input from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux circuit, the headlamp high beams and the high beam indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a high beam headlamps-OFF input from the multi-function switch, or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the high beam indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the headlamp switch and the multi-function switch to determine the proper headlamp low beam and high beam control. The EMIC then sends the proper electronic low beam and high beam lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus and controls the high beam indicator operation accordingly. The hard wired headlamp switch and multi-function switch inputs and circuits related to high beam indicator operation may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to high beam indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Horn Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11866 Horn Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 219 Component : RELAY-HORN Connector: Name : RELAY-HORN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A950 18RD 85 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 86 FUSED B(+) A950 18RD 87 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Component ID: 428 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2-Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11870 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11871 Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 428 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2-Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11872 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11873 Horn Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The horn switch is molded into the driver airbag cover. The horn switch can not be serviced separately. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11874 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection HORN SWITCH The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the license plate lamp (3) from the mounting hole in the underside of the exterior liftgate handle (2). 3. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11880 License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the license plate lamp socket (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Reinstall the lamp (3) into the mounting hole on the underside of the exterior liftgate handle (2). 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Removal - Bulb REMOVAL - BULB NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, gently pry the rear edge of the bezel (2) and the overhead console housing (4) to unsnap the bezel from the housing. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, gently pry between the outboard edge of the lens (1) being removed toward the center of the vehicle until it unsnaps from the housing. 4. Remove the lens from the housing. 5. Carefully unsnap the bulb (2) from the two bulb holders within the overhead console lamp housing. Pod - Front Light Emitting Diode POD - FRONT LIGHT EMITTING DIODE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11886 NOTE: The overhead console on vehicles with the Light Emitting Diode (LED) lighting package contains three LED units, each with its own dedicated printed circuit board. The two outboard articulating eyeball-type LED reading lamp pod units with their integral lens-actuated switches and printed circuit boards are available for separate service replacement. However, if the fixed center LED unit or printed circuit board is damaged or ineffective, the entire overhead console housing unit must be replaced. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console unit (4) from the headliner. 3. From the top of the overhead console housing, disconnect the pod pigtail wire connector (2) from the fixed dome lamp printed circuit board in the center of the console housing. 4. Pry gently and evenly on one of the pod mounting stanchions (1) far enough to disengage the pivot pin on one side of the pod (3). 5. Pry gently and evenly on the mounting stanchion on the opposite side of the pod far enough to disengage the opposite pivot pin. 6. Lift the pod out of its receptacle within the overhead console housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11887 Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Installation - Bulb INSTALLATION - BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. 1. Align the ends of the bulb (2) with the two bulb holders within the overhead console lamp housing. 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Position the lens (1) to the overhead console housing (4) and snap the outboard edge back into place. 4. Position the forward edge of the bezel (2) between the two lenses, then press the rear edge of the bezel firmly and evenly until it snaps back into the housing. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Pod - Front Light Emitting Diode POD - FRONT LIGHT EMITTING DIODE Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11888 NOTE: The overhead console on vehicles with the Light Emitting Diode (LED) lighting package contains three LED units, each with its own dedicated printed circuit board. The two outboard articulating eyeball-type LED reading lamp pod units with their integral lens-actuated switches and printed circuit boards are available for separate service replacement. However, if the fixed center LED unit or printed circuit board is damaged or ineffective, the entire overhead console housing unit must be replaced. 1. Position the Light Emitting Diode (LED) pod (3) into its receptacle within the overhead console housing (4). 2. Pry gently and evenly on one of the pod mounting stanchions (1) far enough to engage the pivot pin on one side of the pod. 3. Pry gently and evenly on the mounting stanchion on the opposite side of the pod far enough to engage the opposite pivot pin. 4. Reconnect the pod pigtail wire connector (2) to the fixed dome lamp printed circuit board in the center of the overhead console housing. 5. Reinstall the overhead console unit into the headliner. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL OR SIDE MARKER NOTE: The front lamp unit contains three bulbs: headlamp (3), park/turn signal (2), and side marker (4). Except for the headlamp bulb, the service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender, but do not disconnect the headlamp and dash wiring from the back of the lamp housing. 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the appropriate park/turn signal (2) or side marker (4) bulb socket on the back of the front lamp unit housing. 4. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal or side marker bulb socket and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11894 Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL OR SIDE MARKER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The front lamp unit contains three bulbs: headlamp (3), park/turn signal (2), and side marker (4). Except for the headlamp bulb, the service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the appropriate park/turn signal (2) or side marker (4) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit (1) housing. 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the appropriate park/turn signal or side marker bulb socket. 7. Reinstall the front lamp unit into the front fender. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Park Lamp Relay Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Park Lamp Relay Park Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Park Lamp Relay > Page 11900 Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Stop Lamp Inhibit Relay Stop Lamp Inhibit Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11901 Parking Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 220 Component : RELAY-PARK LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-PARK LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A913 6RD 85 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 86 PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT A914 6RD 87 PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT A914 6RD 87A GROUND Z385 20BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The park lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The park lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11904 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the park lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the park lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a park lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls park lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the park lamps through a park lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the park lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The park lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL OR SIDE MARKER NOTE: The front lamp unit contains three bulbs: headlamp (3), park/turn signal (2), and side marker (4). Except for the headlamp bulb, the service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender, but do not disconnect the headlamp and dash wiring from the back of the lamp housing. 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the appropriate park/turn signal (2) or side marker (4) bulb socket on the back of the front lamp unit housing. 4. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal or side marker bulb socket and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11909 Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL OR SIDE MARKER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The front lamp unit contains three bulbs: headlamp (3), park/turn signal (2), and side marker (4). Except for the headlamp bulb, the service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the appropriate park/turn signal (2) or side marker (4) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit (1) housing. 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the appropriate park/turn signal or side marker bulb socket. 7. Reinstall the front lamp unit into the front fender. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit Brake Lamp Relay: Diagrams Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit Component ID: 227 Component : RELAY-STOP LAMP INHIBIT Connector: Name : RELAY-STOP LAMP INHIBIT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY FEED L950 18WT/LG 85 STOP LAMP INHIBIT RELAY CONTROL B45 20DG/LB 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F500 20DG/PK 87 87A BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT L50 18WT/TN Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Stop Lamp Inhibit > Page 11915 Brake Lamp Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper Rear Component ID: 233 Component : RELAY-WIPER REAR Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER REAR Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 18LG/BR 85 REAR WIPER RELAY CONTROL W12 20BR/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A44 18RD/OR 87 FUSED B(+) A44 18RD/OR 87A GROUND Z901 18BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Fog Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11919 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 217 Component : RELAY-FOG LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FOG LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A39 18RD/LG 85 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL L139 20WT/YL 86 FUSED B(+) A39 18RD/LG 87 FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L89 18WT/YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The front fog lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The front fog lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The front fog lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11922 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The front fog lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the front fog lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the front fog lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a fog lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls front fog lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the front fog lamps through a fog lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the front fog lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The front fog lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations Horn Relay: Locations Horn Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11926 Horn Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 219 Component : RELAY-HORN Connector: Name : RELAY-HORN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A950 18RD 85 HORN RELAY CONTROL X4 20DG/WT 86 FUSED B(+) A950 18RD 87 HORN RELAY OUTPUT X2 18DG/OR 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Park Lamp Relay Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Park Lamp Relay Park Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Park Lamp Relay > Page 11931 Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Stop Lamp Inhibit Relay Stop Lamp Inhibit Relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Power Distribution Center (PDC) Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment, just behind the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 11932 Parking Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 220 Component : RELAY-PARK LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-PARK LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A913 6RD 85 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL L779 20WT/LB 86 PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT A914 6RD 87 PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT A914 6RD 87A GROUND Z385 20BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The park lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The park lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11935 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the park lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the park lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a park lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls park lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the park lamps through a park lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the park lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The park lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 11941 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have two trailer tow relays, one for the trailer right turn and brake lamps and the other for the trailer left turn and brake lamps. The trailer tow relays are conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relays. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. Each relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The trailer tow relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. A trailer tow relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11944 Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The trailer tow relays are electromechanical switches that use a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to trailer brake and turn signal lamps. Within each relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the trailer tow relays include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a right or left trailer tow turn relay control circuit. The FCM controls trailer brake and turn lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the trailer lamps through a right or left trailer tow turn relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the right or left trailer brake and turn lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The trailer tow relays as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relays may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Vehicles with an electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. Refer to the service and diagnostic information for the automatic transmission type installed in the vehicle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID: 447 Component : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 2 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL L50 18WT/TN 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 5 GROUND Z429 20BK/OR 6 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11952 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11953 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11954 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 447 Component : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED B(+) A103 18GY/RD 2 BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SIGNAL L50 18WT/TN 3 S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT V30 20VT/WT 4 S/C SUPPLY V32 20VT/YL 5 GROUND Z429 20BK/OR 6 BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL B29 20DG/WT Component Location - 28 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11955 Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11956 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11959 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11960 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (1) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (3). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4). 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11963 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4) on the lower steering column (3). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (1) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (2) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (5) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 435 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUXG194 20VT/RD 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX L12 20WT/DB 4 FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX W52 20BR/YL Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11967 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11968 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 435 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUXG194 20VT/RD 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX L12 20WT/DB 4 FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX W52 20BR/YL Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11969 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Front Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary front WASH position for front washer system operation. Front Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous front wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and an intermittent front wipe mode with five delay interval positions. - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11972 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control front washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control front wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Front Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the front WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the front washer mode until the control knob is released or for 10 continuous seconds, whichever occurs first. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic front washer switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the front washer mode. - Front Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous front wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the front wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic front wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) for front wiper system control. - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11973 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11974 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11977 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11978 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. Be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11979 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel (1) onto the steering column. 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations Door Switch: Locations Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11983 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11984 Door Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 431 Component : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-LIFTGATE AJAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 GROUND Z922 20BK/PK 2 LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE G78 20VT/OR Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11985 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description Door DOOR This vehicle has four door ajar switches, one for each door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Liftgate LIFTGATE A liftgate ajar switch is standard equipment on this vehicle. The switch is concealed within and integral to the liftgate latch unit. The switch is a momentary leaf contact-type unit that is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanisms. An integral connector receptacle on the liftgate latch connects the liftgate ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through the liftgate wire harness. The liftgate ajar switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the liftgate latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11988 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation Door DOOR The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The rear door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). On vehicles not equipped with the optional memory system, the front door ajar switches are also hard wired in series between ground and the EMIC. On vehicles equipped with the optional memory system each front door ajar switch is hard wired in series between ground and its respective driver or passenger Memory Mirror Module (MMM) located in the front door. The MMM then sends electronic door ajar switch status messages to the EMIC over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Both the EMIC and the MMM read the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then use these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Liftgate LIFTGATE The liftgate ajar switch is actuated by the liftgate latch mechanism. When the liftgate is closed and properly latched, its liftgate ajar switch is an open circuit. When the liftgate is open or only partially latched, the liftgate ajar switch is a closed circuit. The liftgate ajar switch is hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired liftgate ajar switch input through an internal pull-up, then uses this input to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The liftgate ajar switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 422 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX L307 20PK/RD 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E2 20OR/BR 3 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN L900 20WT/YL 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z942 20BK 6-7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11992 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11993 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 422 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Description Circuit 1 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX L307 20PK/RD 2 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER E2 20OR/BR 3 HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN L900 20WT/YL 4 PANEL LAMPS DRIVER-HEADLAMP SWITCH E19 20OR/BR 5 GROUND Z942 20BK 6-7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 31 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 11994 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Three different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control and a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control. An optional switch has a momentary push button (3) added for front fog lamp control. A second optional switch has the same thumbwheel and momentary push button, but has a fourth position added to the rotary knob for selecting the optional automatic headlamps feature. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. The optional front fog lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 11997 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, and on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the fog lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamp relay in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp relay in the PDC and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The FCM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected using the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. If the vehicle is equipped with optional automatic headlamps and the A (Automatic) position is selected, the EMIC also monitors an input from a sun load sensor on the instrument panel and, based upon the monitored ambient light levels, responds by automatically sending appropriate messages to the FCM to turn the exterior lighting ON or OFF while the ignition switch is in the ON position. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11998 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel and the headlamp switch from the instrument panel as a unit. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 11999 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch (2). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12002 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (2) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Component ID: 428 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2-Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12006 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12007 Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 428 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 HORN SWITCH SENSE X3 20DG/VT 2-Component Location - 34 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12008 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12009 Horn Switch: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The horn switch is molded into the driver airbag cover. The horn switch can not be serviced separately. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12010 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection HORN SWITCH The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - Chrysler BULB - CHRYSLER NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains three bulbs: tail/brake/rear side marker (4), tail/turn (2), and backup (3). The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. 3. Firmly grasp the appropriate bulb socket (2, 3, or 4) on the back of the rear lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Bulb - Dodge BULB - DODGE NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. 3. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate (2) to the back of the rear lamp unit housing. 4. Remove the socket plate from the rear lamp. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12016 5. Pull the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb straight out of the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12017 Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - Chrysler BULB - CHRYSLER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains three bulbs: tail/brake/rear side marker (4), tail/turn (2), and backup (3). The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the appropriate lamp socket (2, 3, or 4). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit (1) housing. 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Dodge BULB - DODGE CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12018 1. Align the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb with the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket plate (2) and bulbs with the openings on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket plate and bulbs straight into the housing until the plate is firmly seated. 5. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate to the housing. Tighten the screws to 1 Nm (12 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12023 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12024 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12025 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12026 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12027 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12028 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12029 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12030 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12031 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12032 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12033 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12034 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12035 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12036 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12037 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12038 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12039 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a factory-installed trailer tow package include an electric trailer brake wiring provision that terminates at a connector located on top of the large body harness connection under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal, as well as an electric trailer brake pigtail harness and an instruction card (2) that are stored in the glove box (1) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12042 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION If an aftermarket electric brake controller is used, the electric brake pigtail harness supplied will make installation easier. The connection (blue 4-way connector) for the harness is located under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal on top of the large body harness connection. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The battery line of this harness may be used to charge the trailer battery. However, a battery isolation unit is not supplied and the trailer battery may discharge the truck battery when the engine is not running. The battery line is protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker. Refer to the owner's manual in the vehicle glove box for type, location, and ampere rating. The trailer tow connectors as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the connectors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left and Right Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Left Component ID: 228 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 85 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L655 20WT/OR 86 FUSED B(+) A911 20RD 87 LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L673 18YL 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Trailer Tow-Left > Page 12048 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Relay-Trailer Tow-Right Component ID: 229 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 85 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL L656 20WT/DG 86 FUSED B(+) A910 20RD 87 RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT L674 18LG 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have two trailer tow relays, one for the trailer right turn and brake lamps and the other for the trailer left turn and brake lamps. The trailer tow relays are conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relays. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. Each relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The trailer tow relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. A trailer tow relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12051 Trailer Lighting Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The trailer tow relays are electromechanical switches that use a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to trailer brake and turn signal lamps. Within each relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the trailer tow relays include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a right or left trailer tow turn relay control circuit. The FCM controls trailer brake and turn lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the trailer lamps through a right or left trailer tow turn relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the right or left trailer brake and turn lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The trailer tow relays as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relays may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Trunk Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trunk Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB NOTE: Two versions of the liftgate lamp are available: one using an incandescent bulb for illumination, and one using a Light Emitting Diode (LED) unit for illumination. The external appearance of the two lamp units is the same as are the service procedures for removing and installing the lamp or the lamp lens. Only the light source is different. The incandescent bulb is serviceable using the following procedure; however, if an LED unit or the printed circuit board to which the LED is soldered is damaged or ineffective, the entire lamp unit must be replaced. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, gently pry between the lamp lens (2) and the lamp housing (1) at the two upper or lower snap features to remove the lens from the housing. 3. Disengage the ends of the bulb (3) from the two bulb holders within the lamp housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trunk Lamp > Trunk Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12057 Trunk Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: Two versions of the liftgate lamp are available: one using an incandescent bulb for illumination, and one using a Light Emitting Diode (LED) unit for illumination. The external appearance of the two lamp units is the same as are the service procedures for removing and installing the lamp or the lamp lens. Only the light source is different. The incandescent bulb is serviceable using the following procedure; however, if an LED unit or the printed circuit board to which the LED is soldered is damaged or ineffective, the entire lamp unit must be replaced. 1. Install the ends of the bulb (3) onto the two bulb holders within the liftgate lamp housing (1). 2. Align the lamp lens (2) with the lamp housing, then use firm and even hand pressure to snap the lens onto the housing. 3. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 435 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUXG194 20VT/RD 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX L12 20WT/DB 4 FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX W52 20BR/YL Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12062 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12063 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 435 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUXG194 20VT/RD 2 SWITCH MUX RETURN G902 20VT/BR 3 TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX L12 20WT/DB 4 FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX W52 20BR/YL Component Location - 32 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12064 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Front Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary front WASH position for front washer system operation. Front Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous front wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and an intermittent front wipe mode with five delay interval positions. - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12067 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control front washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control front wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Front Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the front WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the front washer mode until the control knob is released or for 10 continuous seconds, whichever occurs first. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic front washer switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the front washer mode. - Front Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous front wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the front wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic front wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) for front wiper system control. - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12068 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 12069 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12072 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12073 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. Be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12074 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel (1) onto the steering column. 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Cancel Cam > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Turn Signal Cancel Cam: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The turn signal cancel cam (3) is concealed within the steering column. The turn signal cancel cam consists of two lobes on a molded plastic ring that is snapped into the lower hub of the clockspring rotor. The clockspring mechanism provides turn signal cancellation as well as a constant electrical connection between the horn switch, driver airbag, speed control switches, and remote radio switches on the steering wheel and the instrument panel wire harness on the steering column. The housing of the clockspring (2) is secured to the multi-function switch mounting housing on the steering column and remains stationary. The rotor of the clockspring, including the turn signal cancel cam lobes rotate with the steering wheel. The turn signal cancel cam is serviced as a unit with the clockspring and cannot be repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire clockspring unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Cancel Cam > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12079 Turn Signal Cancel Cam: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the multi-function switch control stalk is moved to a latched turn signal position, a turn signal cancel actuator is extended from the inside surface of the switch housing toward the turn signal cancel cam. As the steering wheel is rotated to complete the turn, one of the two cam lobes will contact the actuator, automatically cancelling the turn signal event and releasing the latched multi-function switch control stalk to the neutral position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID Please Note: The Flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Front Control Module. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Turn Signal Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two turn signal indicators, one right and one left, are standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The turn signal indicators are located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, the right one is between the speedometer and the tachometer, and the left one is between the speedometer and the minor gauge set. Each turn signal indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Turn Warning in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents these indicators from being clearly visible when they are not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind each cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes each indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The turn signal indicators are serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12087 Turn Signal Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The turn signal indicators give an indication to the vehicle operator that a turn signal (left or right indicator flashing) or the hazard warning (both left and right indicators flashing) have been selected and are operating. These indicators are controlled by transistors on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board based upon cluster programming, a hard wired multiplex input received by the cluster from the turn signal and hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, and electronic messages received from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Each turn signal indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, each LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the turn signal indicators for the following reasons: - Turn Signal-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a turn signal-ON input from the turn signal switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for either the right or left turn signal lamps. The FCM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the cluster to control the flash rate of the turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional turn signal flasher. The turn signal indicators continue to flash ON and OFF until the cluster receives a turn signal-OFF input from the multi-function switch, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Hazard Warning-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a hazard warning-ON input from the hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic hazard switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for each of the right and left turn signal lamps. The FCM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the cluster to control the flash rate of the turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional hazard warning flasher. The turn signal indicators continue to flash ON and OFF until the cluster receives a hazard warning-OFF input from the multi-function switch. - Lamp Out Mode - If the FCM detects an ineffective turn signal lamp or circuit, it increases the flash rate for the remaining operative turn signals and sends an electronic message to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster then increases the flash rate of the turn signal indicators and the click rate of the electromechanical relay to provide an indication of the problem to the vehicle operator. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the turn signal indicators will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of each LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the multi-function switch and electronic messages from the FCM to determine the proper turn signal and hazard warning indicator operation. For proper diagnosis of the turn signal and hazard warning system, the multi-function switch, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to turn signal indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Front Lamp Unit Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL OR SIDE MARKER NOTE: The front lamp unit contains three bulbs: headlamp (3), park/turn signal (2), and side marker (4). Except for the headlamp bulb, the service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender, but do not disconnect the headlamp and dash wiring from the back of the lamp housing. 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector from the appropriate park/turn signal (2) or side marker (4) bulb socket on the back of the front lamp unit housing. 4. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal or side marker bulb socket and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL OR SIDE MARKER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 12093 NOTE: The front lamp unit contains three bulbs: headlamp (3), park/turn signal (2), and side marker (4). Except for the headlamp bulb, the service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the appropriate park/turn signal (2) or side marker (4) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit (1) housing. 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector to the appropriate park/turn signal or side marker bulb socket. 7. Reinstall the front lamp unit into the front fender. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 12094 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Rear Lamp Unit Bulb - Chrysler BULB - CHRYSLER NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains three bulbs: tail/brake/rear side marker (4), tail/turn (2), and backup (3). The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. 3. Firmly grasp the appropriate bulb socket (2, 3, or 4) on the back of the rear lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Bulb - Dodge BULB - DODGE NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. 3. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate (2) to the back of the rear lamp unit housing. 4. Remove the socket plate from the rear lamp. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 12095 5. Pull the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb straight out of the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). Bulb - Chrysler BULB - CHRYSLER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains three bulbs: tail/brake/rear side marker (4), tail/turn (2), and backup (3). The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the appropriate lamp socket (2, 3, or 4). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit (1) housing. 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Dodge BULB - DODGE CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains four bulbs: side marker, tail/brake, tail/turn, and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lamp Unit > Page 12096 1. Align the base of the backup (1), tail/turn (2), tail/brake (3), or side marker (4) lamp bulb with the appropriate socket in the socket plate (5). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket plate (2) and bulbs with the openings on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket plate and bulbs straight into the housing until the plate is firmly seated. 5. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the socket plate to the housing. Tighten the screws to 1 Nm (12 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left Vanity Lamp: Locations Lamp-Vanity-Left Component ID: 153 Component : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 A GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER M28 20YL/TN B GROUND Z955 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 12101 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 12102 Vanity Lamp: Locations Lamp-Vanity-Right Component ID: 154 Component : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 A GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER M28 20YL/TN B GROUND Z955 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Locations > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 12103 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Lamp-Vanity-Left Component ID: 153 Component : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-LEFT Color : # of pins : 2 A GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER M28 20YL/TN B GROUND Z955 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 12106 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 12107 Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Lamp-Vanity-Right Component ID: 154 Component : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Connector: Name : LAMP-VANITY-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 2 A GLOVE BOX LAMP DRIVER M28 20YL/TN B GROUND Z955 20BK Component Location - 42 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Lamp-Vanity-Left > Page 12108 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Bulb Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Removal - Bulb REMOVAL - BULB NOTE: Vehicles equipped with optional vanity lamps have a mirror with a single lamp that is integral to each sun visor. Each lamp is independently controlled by an integral switch that is automatically actuated by the mirror cover. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for each of these lamps. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver on either side near the top or the bottom between the vanity lamp lens (2) and the lamp housing of the sun visor (1). 3. Carefully pry the lens outward until it unsnaps from the lamp housing. 4. Using small needle-nose pliers, carefully grasp the bulb (2) and pull the base out of the lamp socket. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal - Bulb > Page 12111 Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair Installation - Bulb INSTALLATION - BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: Vehicles equipped with optional vanity lamps have a mirror with a single lamp that is integral to each sun visor. Each lamp is independently controlled by an integral switch that is automatically actuated by the mirror cover. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for each of these lamps. 1. Using small needle-nose pliers, carefully grasp the vanity lamp bulb (2) and align the base of the bulb with the socket in the lamp housing of the sun visor (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is fully seated. 3. Insert one tab on the top or the bottom of the lens (2) into the appropriate slot at the top or bottom of the lamp housing. 4. Flex the lens far enough to engage the loose tab into its slot in the lamp housing. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Window Defogger Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12117 Heated Glass Element Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 223 Component : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Connector: Name : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR 85 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 87 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is an International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current through a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) to the rear window defogger grid and to the outside mirror heating grids. The EBL relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the rear window defogger relay control in the front control module (FCM). The EBL relay is located in the junction block (JB) in the passenger compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12120 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard rear window defogger (EBL) relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the front control module (FCM) to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the junction block (JB). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground through the EBL relay control circuit only when the front control module (FCM) electronically pulls the circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through an ignition switch output circuit only when the ignition switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines through the EBL relay output circuit only when the EBL relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized. The EBL relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete rear window defogger (EBL) wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trim cover from the cowl (2) on the driver side of the vehicle. 3. Locate the junction block (JB) (1). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the JB cover for EBL relay location. 4. Remove the EBL relay from the JB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12123 Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the junction block (JB) cover for EBL relay location. 1. Position the EBL relay into the proper receptacle of the JB (1). 2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the JB receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Install the trim cover onto the driver side cowl (2). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (2) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (1) located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is activated, the timing circuit integral to the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. An amber indicator (3) in the rear window defogger switch will illuminate to indicate when the EBL system is turned on. When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to the rear window defogger grid lines and when equipped, to the heated outside rear view mirrors. The grid lines heat the window and mirror glass to help clear the surfaces of fog or frost. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12128 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator in the rear window defogger switch will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated, the A/C-heater control requests the front control module (FCM) to operated the rear window defogger (EBL) relay via the controller area network (CAN) B bus. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the heating grid of the rear window and when equipped, the heated outside rear view mirrors. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after approximately 15 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last approximately 10 minutes. The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about 15 minutes as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 10 minutes. The EBL system will also turn off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN or by manually pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch and indicator lamp cannot be adjusted or repaired and the A/C-heater control must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Window Defogger Relay is located in the Junction Block (JB). Junction Block Junction Block (JB) is concealed behind the left outboard end of the instrument panel cover. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 12133 Heated Glass Element Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 223 Component : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Connector: Name : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN JB) 30 FUSED B(+) A915 12OR/BR 85 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL C115 20DB 86 FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) F504 20GY/PK 87 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT C15 12DB/WT 87A - - Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is an International Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current through a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) to the rear window defogger grid and to the outside mirror heating grids. The EBL relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the rear window defogger relay control in the front control module (FCM). The EBL relay is located in the junction block (JB) in the passenger compartment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12136 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO-standard rear window defogger (EBL) relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the front control module (FCM) to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the junction block (JB). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground through the EBL relay control circuit only when the front control module (FCM) electronically pulls the circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through an ignition switch output circuit only when the ignition switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines through the EBL relay output circuit only when the EBL relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized. The EBL relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete rear window defogger (EBL) wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the trim cover from the cowl (2) on the driver side of the vehicle. 3. Locate the junction block (JB) (1). NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the JB cover for EBL relay location. 4. Remove the EBL relay from the JB. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12139 Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay map on the inside of the junction block (JB) cover for EBL relay location. 1. Position the EBL relay into the proper receptacle of the JB (1). 2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the JB receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Install the trim cover onto the driver side cowl (2). 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (2) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (1) located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is activated, the timing circuit integral to the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. An amber indicator (3) in the rear window defogger switch will illuminate to indicate when the EBL system is turned on. When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to the rear window defogger grid lines and when equipped, to the heated outside rear view mirrors. The grid lines heat the window and mirror glass to help clear the surfaces of fog or frost. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12145 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator in the rear window defogger switch will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated, the A/C-heater control requests the front control module (FCM) to operated the rear window defogger (EBL) relay via the controller area network (CAN) B bus. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the heating grid of the rear window and when equipped, the heated outside rear view mirrors. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after approximately 15 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last approximately 10 minutes. The EBL system will be automatically turned off after an initial programmed time interval of about 15 minutes as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 10 minutes. The EBL system will also turn off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN or by manually pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch and indicator lamp cannot be adjusted or repaired and the A/C-heater control must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 438 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/OR 2 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG 3 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12150 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12151 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 439 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 2 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG 3 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12152 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12153 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12154 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12155 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12156 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12157 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 438 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/OR 2 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG 3 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12160 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12161 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 439 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 2 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG 3 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12162 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12163 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12164 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12165 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12166 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12167 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Window Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12170 Power Window Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch-Power Window POWER WINDOW SWITCH The front door power window switches are included in the window/lock switch. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window switch knobs receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in the power window switch and the power windows are inoperative, refer to Power Window testing. See: Windows/Testing and Inspection If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) must be replaced. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Check the fuse and the circuit breaker. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch from the door trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity chart to determine if the continuity is correct in the Neutral, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, Power Window testing. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window > Page 12173 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch-Window/Door Lock WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch power window and power lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the door module is inoperative, replace the faulty door module. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty window/lock switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty window/lock switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window > Page 12174 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Switch-Power Window Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Switch-Power Window Removal REMOVAL The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove switch from door trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. 1. Install the switch to the door trim panel. 2. Install the door trim panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Switch-Power Window > Page 12177 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Switch-Window/Door Lock Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Driver Component ID: 197 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW- DRIVER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 2 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 3 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 4 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 5 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 6 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12183 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12184 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Left Rear Component ID: 198 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN B LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12185 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12186 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Passenger Component ID: 199 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 4 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 5 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 6 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVERQ312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12187 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12188 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Right Rear Component ID: 200 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN B RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12189 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Driver Component ID: 197 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-DRIVER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW- DRIVER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q991 20OR 2 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNALQ301 20OR/WT 3 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVERQ321 16OR/DB 4 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q305 20OR 5 DRIVER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNALQ303 20WT/OR 6 DRIVER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVER Q311 16OR/LB Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12192 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12193 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Left Rear Component ID: 198 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN B LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12194 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12195 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Passenger Component ID: 199 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR RETURN Q308 20OR/GY 2 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR A SIGNAL Q302 20OR/LG 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS DOWN DRIVER Q322 16LG/OR 4 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR SUPPLY Q306 20OR/DB 5 PASSENGER WINDOW HALL SENSOR B SIGNAL Q304 20LG/OR 6 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS UP DRIVERQ312 16DB/OR Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12196 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12197 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Right Rear Component ID: 200 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN B RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Driver > Page 12198 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12199 Power Window Motor: Testing and Inspection WINDOW MOTOR For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the trim panel from the door with the inoperative power window. 2. Unplug the power window motor wire harness connector. Apply 12 volts across the motor terminals to check its operation in one direction. Reverse the connections across the motor terminals to check the operation in the other direction. If the window is in the full up or full down position, the motor will not operate in that direction by design. If OK, repair the circuits from the power window motor to the power window switch as required. If not OK, replace the inoperative motor. 3. If the motor operates in both directions, check the operation of the window glass and lift mechanism through its complete up and down travel. There should be no binding or sticking of the window glass or lift mechanism through the entire travel range. If not OK, check the window glass, tracks, and regulator for sticking, binding, or improper adjustment. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 12200 Power Window Motor: Service and Repair REMOVAL The power window motor and mechanism is integral to the power window regulator unit. If the power window motor or mechanism is inoperative or damaged, the entire power window regulator unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 438 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/OR 2 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG 3 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12205 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12206 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 439 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 2 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG 3 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12207 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12208 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12209 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12210 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12211 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12212 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 438 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/OR 2 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q211 14TN/DG 3 LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q111 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12215 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12216 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 439 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 2 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) Q212 14TN/DG 3 RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Q112 14VT/TN 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT 5-6 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB Component Location - 51 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12217 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12218 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Component ID: 453 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C1 Color : GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Description Circuit 1 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 14PK/YL 2 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) Q611 14DB/PK 3 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP)Q411 14DB/LG 4 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) Q612 14DB/OR 5 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 14OR/LB 6 GROUND Z940 20BK/LG 7-- 8 MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) Q412 14TN/WT Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12219 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER C2 Color : # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (MEMORY) Pin Description Circuit 1 MASTER SWITCH LEFT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q221 20DB 2 MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MUX Q222 20OR/GY 3 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G161 20LB/OR 4 DRIVER EXPRESS WINDOW SWITCH RETURN Q994 20OR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12220 5 LEFT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G775 20OR/VT 6-Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12221 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 454 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Description Circuit 1 WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Q15 20OR/LB 2 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH MUX Q336 20OR/GY 3 PASSENGER WINDOW EXPRESS SWITCH RETURN Q936 20OR/LG 4 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH RETURN G776 20VT/OR 5 RIGHT DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX G160 20VT/LG 6 FUSED ACCESSORY DELAY RELAY OUTPUT F30 20PK/YL Component Location - 50 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 12222 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Window Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the power window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the master switches. - Power Window Switches - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door power window. In addition to the power window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual master switches for each passenger door power window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Power Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Power Window Switch - A two-way, momentary power window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12225 Power Window Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a power lock switch, a driver power window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door power window, a power window lockout switch, a power mirror selector switch, and four power mirror adjustment switches in a single assembly. The switches in the window/lock switch can be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and methods. Power Lock Switch The power lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster (without memory). If equipped with the memory system, the circuitry is connected to the memory mirror module. Each power lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster or memory mirror input, which allows the instrument cluster or memory module to sense the switch position. Based upon the power lock switch input, the instrument cluster or memory module controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual power lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the power lock switch is connected to battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Power Window Switches The power window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the power windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger power window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual power window switches on each passenger door so that the power window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective power window motor. The switch for the driver side front door power window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door power window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger power window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger power window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch-Power Window POWER WINDOW SWITCH The front door power window switches are included in the window/lock switch. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window switch knobs receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in the power window switch and the power windows are inoperative, refer to Power Window testing. See: Testing and Inspection If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) must be replaced. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Check the fuse and the circuit breaker. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch from the door trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity chart to determine if the continuity is correct in the Neutral, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, Power Window testing. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window > Page 12228 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Switch-Window/Door Lock WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch power window and power lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the door module is inoperative, replace the faulty door module. If the driver side front door power window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the faulty window/lock switch. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 2. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the faulty window/lock switch as required. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Switch-Power Window > Page 12229 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Switch-Power Window Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Switch-Power Window Removal REMOVAL The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel. 3. Remove switch from door trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. 1. Install the switch to the door trim panel. 2. Install the door trim panel. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Switch-Power Window > Page 12232 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Switch-Window/Door Lock Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Description and Operation Back Window Glass: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The rear door quarter glass is seated within the rear glass run channel and glass run weatherstrip. 1. To remove the quarter glass, remove the rear glass run channel and remove the glass from the channel. Refer to Window Track. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove glass. 2. Pull the glass run weatherstrip and run channels from the window opening. 3. Pull the glass run weatherstrip from the run channels. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass run weatherstrip into the window opening and the run channels. 2. Install glass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run > Page 12242 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Belt Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove trim panel. 2. Peel seal from door pinch weld. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Slide seal into position on door. 2. Install the trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Front Door Glass Run > Page 12243 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Front Door Belt Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Insert special tool #9093 (2) between the outer belt molding (1) and glass at the rear. 2. Push down on outer belt molding (1) and rotate upper part of tool (2) outward from vehicle then lift up on molding (1) to disengage from locking tabs (3) working from back to front. NOTE: Typical outer belt molding design shown. 3. Slide molding out from under the side view mirror and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the outer belt molding onto the door and position forward under the side view mirror. Seat the molding fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Windshield removal shown, backlite similar. 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Remove liftgate trim panels. Refer to Trim Panel. 3. Remove the center stop light. 4. Remove rear window wiper arm, if equipped. 5. Disconnect the heated backlite electrical connectors, if equipped. 6. Using a windshield cut-out wire or other suitable tool, separate the adhesive. 7. Carefully remove backlite. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12248 Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Allow the urethane at least 24 hours to cure before returning the vehicle to use. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing backlite to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. NOTE: The backlite fence should be cleaned of most of its old urethane bonding material. A small amount of old urethane, approximately 1-2 mm in height, should remain on the fence. Do not grind off or completely remove all old urethane from the fence, the paint finish and bonding strength will be adversely affected. Support spacers should be replaced with new parts. Replace any missing or damaged spacers around the perimeter of the liftgate opening. Glass Preparation - Installing A Previously Installed Backlite 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Level old bead of backlite adhesive (3) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. 3. Apply four new spacers (1) to the liftgate frame and place them 55 mm in from the window opening; 70 mm from the upper edge and 150 mm from the lower edge. 4. Install the lower spacers (2) to the backlite approximately 36 cm (1.0 in) from each side of the glass. NOTE: Remove the lower spacers 2 hours after installation of the glass. 5. Position backlite in center of liftgate opening and resting on the side and lower spacers. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12249 6. Apply adhesive tape strips (1) around the perimeter of the liftgate opening to aid in installation. NOTE: Windshield installation shown, backlite similar. 7. Verify the backlite gap is parallel to with the liftgate opening. 8. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove backlite. NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 9. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 10. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. 11. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 12. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 13. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12250 14. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Glass Preparation - Installing A New Backlite 1. Apply four new spacers (1) to the liftgate frame and place them 55 mm in from the window opening; 70 mm from the upper edge and 150 mm from the lower edge. 2. Install the lower spacers (2) to the backlite approximately 36 cm (1.0 in) from each side of the glass. NOTE: Remove the lower spacers 2 hours after installation of the glass. 3. Position backlite in center of liftgate opening and resting on the side and lower spacers. 4. Apply adhesive tape strips (1) around the perimeter of the liftgate opening to aid in installation. NOTE: Windshield installation shown, backlite similar. 5. Verify the backlite gap is parallel to with the liftgate opening. 6. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove backlite. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12251 NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 7. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 8. Apply primer to gluing surface at backlite seal. 9. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 10. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. 11. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Liftgate Opening Preparation NOTE: Windshield opening shown, liftgate opening similar. 1. Clean and vacuum liftgate opening. 2. Level old bead of liftgate opening adhesive (1) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12252 NOTE: Windshield opening shown, liftgate opening similar. 3. Clean and dry area of liftgate opening to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 4. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 5. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Backlite Installation 1. Apply bead of adhesive (1) with a triangular nozzle directly to the backlite seal starting at bottom in center of the backlite. CAUTION: Always apply bead of adhesive to the backlite. Always install the backlite within 5 minutes after applying adhesive. 2. Bead dimensions should be approximately 9.5 mm wide (1) by 12.7 mm in height (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12253 3. Allow end of adhesive bead (1) to run out parallel to the start of the bead and smooth ends flush. 4. Lift backlite into place in the center of the liftgate opening and use the tape as a guide to aid installation of the backlite into the center of the cutout. 5. Carefully lay down the backlite and press on. CAUTION: It is no longer possible to move the backlite after installation. The backlite should never be pressed into place by more than one person, because the backlite can break if pressed simultaneously on both sides. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing backlite to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. 6. Install the rear wiper arm, if equipped. 7. Install the liftgate trim panels. 8. Install the center stop light. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Remove quarter panel trim. Refer to Trim Panel. NOTE: Windshield removal shown, quarter glass similar. 3. Using a windshield cut-out wire (4) or other suitable tool, separate the adhesive (2). 4. Release the tabs (2) and the tabs on the alignment pin (4) and carefully remove the quarter glass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12258 Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Allow the urethane at least 24 hours to cure before returning the vehicle to use. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing quarter glass to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. NOTE: The quarter glass fence should be cleaned of most of its old urethane bonding material. A small amount of old urethane, approximately 1-2 mm in height, should remain on the fence. Do not grind off or completely remove all old urethane from the fence, the paint finish and bonding strength will be adversely affected. Glass Preparation - Installing A Previously Installed Quarter Glass 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Level old bead of quarter glass adhesive (3) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 3. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 4. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. 5. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12259 6. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (3). 7. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. 8. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Glass Preparation - Installing A New Quarter Glass NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 1. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 2. Apply primer to gluing surface at quarter glass seal. 3. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (3). 4. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12260 5. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Quarter Glass Opening Preparation NOTE: Windshield opening shown, quarter glass opening similar. 1. Clean and vacuum quarter glass opening. 2. Level old bead of quarter glass opening adhesive (1) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. NOTE: Windshield opening shown, quarter glass opening similar. 3. Clean and dry area of quarter glass opening to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 4. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 5. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Quarter Glass Installation Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12261 1. Apply bead of adhesive (1) with a triangular nozzle directly to the quarter glass seal starting at bottom in center of the quarter glass. CAUTION: Always apply bead of adhesive to the quarter glass. Always install the quarter glass within 5 minutes after applying adhesive. 2. Bead dimensions should be approximately 9.5 mm wide (1) by 12.7 mm in height (2). 3. Allow end of adhesive bead (1) to run out parallel to the start of the bead and smooth ends flush. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12262 4. Lift quarter glass into place in the center of the quarter glass opening and install over the alignment tabs and pin (2). 5. Carefully lay down the quarter glass and press on. CAUTION: It is no longer possible to move the quarter glass after installation. The quarter glass should never be pressed into place by more than one person, because the quarter glass can break if pressed simultaneously on both sides. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing quarter glass to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. 6. Install quarter panel trim. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the glass run channels. Refer to Window Track. 2. Separate the quarter glass from the weatherstrip. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the quarter glass into the weatherstrip and rear run channel. 2. Install the run channels. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run > Page 12268 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Belt Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove trim panel. Refer to Trim Panel. 2. Pull weatherstrip from inner door panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position weatherstrip on inner door panel. 2. Press into place. 3. Install trim panel. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Weatherstrip-Rear Door Glass Run > Page 12269 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Weatherstrip-Rear Door Belt Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Insert special tool #9093 (2) between the outer belt molding (1) and glass at the rear. 2. Push down on outer belt molding (1) and rotate upper part of tool (2) outward from vehicle then lift up on molding (1) to disengage from locking tabs (3) working from back to front. NOTE: Typical outer belt molding design shown. 3. Slide molding out from under the side view mirror and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the outer belt molding onto the door and seat the molding fully starting at the back of the door. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Rear Door Panel. 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the regulator nuts (4). 3. Remove the nuts (4). 4. Secure the glass in the up position using a wood wedge or equivalent. 5. Remove the bolts (2) and loosen the remaining regulator bolts. 6. Separate the regulator (2) from the door panel (1) and disconnect the electrical connector (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12275 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the regulator (2) into the door (1) and connect the electrical connector (3). 2. Position the regulator bolts into the keyhole slots and slide into place. 3. Install the remaining regulator bolts (2). 4. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 5. Position the glass (1) onto the door regulator (3). 6. Install the nuts (4) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12276 7. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. Refer to Rear Door Panel. 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the regulator nuts (4). 3. Remove the nuts (4). 4. Secure the glass in the up position using a wood wedge or equivalent. 5. Remove the bolts (2) and loosen the remaining regulator bolts. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12281 6. Separate the regulator (3) from the door panel (1) and disconnect the electrical connector (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12282 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the regulator (3) into the door (1) and connect the electrical connector (2). 2. Position the regulator bolts into the keyhole slots and slide into place. 3. Install the remaining regulator bolts (2). 4. Tighten the bolts to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12283 5. Position the glass (1) onto the door regulator (3). 6. Install the nuts (4) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 7. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door - Front Window Track: Service and Repair Door - Front Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise the glass to the full up position. 2. Remove the watershield. Refer to Front Door Panel. 3. Remove the nuts (2) and disconnect the electrical connector (3), if equipped. 4. Remove the side view mirror (1). 5. Separate the inner belt molding from the mounting flange from the rear to the front. 6. Insert special tool #9093 (2) between the outer belt molding (1) and glass at the rear. 7. Push down on outer belt molding (1) and rotate upper part of tool (2) outward from vehicle then lift up on molding (1) to disengage from locking tabs (3) working from back to front. NOTE: Typical outer belt molding design shown. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door - Front > Page 12288 8. Remove the nut (2) and bolt (3) and remove the rear glass run channel (1). 9. Remove the bolts (6 & 5) and remove the front glass run channel (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the front glass run channel (4) and install the bolts (6 & 5). Tighten the bolts to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 2. Install the rear glass run channel and install the nut and bolt. 3. Tighten the fasteners to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 4. Position the inner and outer belt molding onto the door and seat fully. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door - Front > Page 12289 5. Install the side view mirror. 6. Install the nuts and connect the electrical connector. 7. Install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door - Front > Page 12290 Window Track: Service and Repair Doors - Rear Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise glass to the up position and remove the watershield. Refer to Rear Door Panel. 2. Remove the inner belt molding. 3. Remove the bolt and nut (3) and remove the front channel. 4. Remove the door glass as necessary. 5. Remove the bolt (4) and remove the rear glass run channel and stationary glass (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear glass run channel and stationary glass (1) into the door and seat fully along the door frame. 2. Install the bolt (4) and tighten to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 3. Install the door glass as necessary except for the inner belt molding. 4. Install the front glass run channel and install the bolt and nut (3). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door - Front > Page 12291 5. Tighten the bolt and nut (3) to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 6. Install the inner belt molding and install the watershield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Windshield Crack Diagnosis Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Crack Diagnosis NUMBER: 23-047-06 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2006 SUBJECT: Cracked Windshield MODELS: 2006 - 2007 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2007 (DC) Ram Cab & Chassis 2006 - 2007 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck 2006 - 2007 (HB) Durango 2007 (HG) Aspen 2006 (TJ) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2007 (JK) Wrangler/Wrangler Unlimited 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan 2007 (JS) Sebring 2007 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Market) 2006 - 2007 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (MK49) Compass 2006 - 2007 (ND) Dakota 2007 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2007 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan 2006 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Market) 2006 - 2007 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2007 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Market) 2006 - 2007 (XK/XH) Commander 2006 (ZB) Viper 2006 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Body - Windshield Crack Diagnosis > Page 12296 Windshield cracks caused by an impact from a foreign object; (i.e. stone) are often difficult to identify. The following assessment should be used to verify the presence of an impact chip on the crack. If no obvious impact chip is present, run a ball point pen along the crack and feel for a slight drop or pit in the glass. If a slight drop or pit in the glass is present, this indicates a small impact caused the crack. If the molding contains a witness mark or dent from an impact, inspect under the molding for an impact chip in the same manner. POLICY: Cracks caused by an impact are not warrantable. Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 12297 Windshield: Service Precautions WINDSHIELD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not operate the vehicle within 24 hours of windshield installation. It takes at least 24 hours for urethane adhesive to cure. If it is not cured, the windshield may not perform properly in an accident. - Urethane adhesives are applied as a system. Use glass cleaner, glass prep solvent, glass primer, PVC (vinyl) primer and pinch weld (fence) primer provided by the adhesive manufacturer. If not, structural integrity could be compromised. - DaimlerChrysler does not recommend glass adhesive by brand. Technicians should review product labels and technical data sheets, and use only adhesives that their manufactures warrant will restore a vehicle to the requirements of FMVSS 212. Technicians should also insure that primers and cleaners are compatible with the particular adhesive used. - Be sure to refer to the urethane manufacturer's directions for curing time specifications, and do not use adhesive after its expiration date. - Vapors that are emitted from the urethane adhesive or primer could cause personal injury. Use them in a well-ventilated area. - Skin contact with urethane adhesive should be avoided. Personal injury may result. - Always wear eye and hand protection when working with glass. CAUTION: Protect all painted and trimmed surfaces from coming in contact with urethane or primers. Be careful not to damage painted surfaces when removing moldings or cutting urethane around windshield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Remove the screws (2) attaching the side windshield molding (1) to the a-pillars and remove the molding. 3. Remove rear view mirror. 4. Remove the cowl grille. 5. Using a windshield cut-out wire separate the adhesive. 6. Carefully remove windshield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12300 Windshield: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Allow the urethane at least 24 hours to cure before returning the vehicle to use. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing windshield to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. NOTE: The windshield fence should be cleaned of most of its old urethane bonding material. A small amount of old urethane, approximately 1-2 mm in height, should remain on the fence. Do not grind off or completely remove all old urethane from the fence, the paint finish and bonding strength will be adversely affected. Support spacers located on the cowl at the bottom of the windshield opening should be replaced with new parts. Replace any missing or damaged spacers around the perimeter of the windshield opening. Windshield Preparation - Installing A Previously Installed Windshield 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. 2. Level old bead of windshield adhesive (3) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. 3. Apply four new spacers (2) to the A-pillars and place them evenly apart at the top and bottom. 4. Install the lower spacer assemblies (1) into the slotted holes and verify proper installation by pulling to make sure they are locked on. NOTE: Lower spacers must be facing with the flat side upwards when installing into the slotted holes. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12301 5. Position windshield (1) in center of windshield opening and resting on the side and lower spacers (2 & 3). 6. Adjust the lower spacers (3) as required, to obtain the specified roof gap tolerance by pushing on the side of the wedge and raising or lowering the glass as necessary. For roof gap specifications, refer to the table Roof Gap Tolerances. ±±±± 7. Apply adhesive tape (1) to the locations shown to aid with final installation. 8. Verify windshield gap is parallel to with windshield. 9. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove windshield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12302 NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 10. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 11. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. 12. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 13. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 14. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. 15. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Windshield Preparation - Installing A New Windshield 1. Apply four new spacers (2) to the A-pillars and place them evenly apart at the top and bottom. 2. Install the lower spacer assemblies (1) into the slotted holes and verify proper installation by pulling to make sure they are locked on. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12303 NOTE: Lower spacers must be facing with the flat side upwards when installing into the slotted holes. 3. Position windshield (1) in center of windshield opening and resting on the side and lower spacers (2 & 3). 4. Adjust the lower spacers (3) as required, to obtain the specified roof gap tolerance by pushing on the side of the wedge and raising or lowering the glass as necessary. For roof gap specifications, refer to the table Roof Gap Tolerances. ±±±± 5. Clean and check windshield for damage. 6. Position windshield in center of windshield opening. 7. Apply adhesive tape to the locations shown to aid with final installation. 8. Verify windshield gap is parallel to with windshield. 9. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove windshield. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12304 10. Clean and dry area of glass to be glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 11. Apply primer to gluing surface at windshield seal. 12. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 13. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. 14. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Windshield Opening Preparation 1. Clean and vacuum windshield opening. 2. Level old bead of windshield opening adhesive (1) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12305 3. Clean and dry area of windshield opening to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 4. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 5. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Windshield Installation 1. Apply bead of adhesive (1) with a triangular nozzle directly to the windshield seal starting at bottom in center of windshield. CAUTION: Always apply bead of adhesive to the windshield. Always install the windshield within 5 minutes after applying adhesive. 2. Bead dimensions should be approximately 9.5 - 12.0 mm wide (1) by 12.7 - 14.0 mm in height (2). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12306 3. Allow end of adhesive bead to run out parallel to the start of the bead and smooth ends flush. 4. Lift windshield into place in the center of the windshield opening and use the tape as a guide to aid installation of the windshield into the center of the cutout. 5. Carefully lay down windshield and press on. CAUTION: It is no longer possible to move the windshield after installation. The windshield should never be pressed into place by more than one person, because the windshield can break if pressed simultaneously on both sides. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing windshield to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. 6. Install cowl grille. 7. Install rear view mirror. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Rear Wiper, High/Low, and On/Off Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper High/Low Component ID: 231 Component : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A951 14RD 85 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 87A FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 12314 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper On/Off Component ID: 232 Component : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A951 14RD 85 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87A GROUND Z902 14BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 12315 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper-Rear Rear Wiper Relay Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper High/Low Description DESCRIPTION The wiper high/low relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper high/low relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper high/low relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper high/low relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the front wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper high/low relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper high/low relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the output of the wiper on/off relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper high/low relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to the high speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay high speed output circuit, and is connected to the high speed brush whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to the low speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay low speed output circuit, and is connected to the low speed brush whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper high/low relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 12318 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper On/Off Description DESCRIPTION The wiper on/off relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper on/off relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper on/off relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper on/off relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper on/off relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper on/off relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the common feed terminal of the wiper high/low relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper on/off relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit, and provides battery current to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to ground at all times through a take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness with an eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a screw to the front end sheet metal, and is connected to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper on/off relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 12319 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper-Rear Description DESCRIPTION The rear wiper relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The rear wiper relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The rear wiper relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The rear wiper relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the rear wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The rear wiper relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the rear wiper relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the rear wiper motor through the rear wiper motor control circuit. When the rear wiper relay is de-energized, the common feed terminal is connected to ground. When the rear wiper relay is energized, the common feed terminal of the relay is connected to battery current from a fuse in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) through a fused B(+) circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to the relay control output of the FCM through the rear wiper relay control circuit. The FCM controls the ground path for this circuit internally to energize or de-energize the rear wiper relay based upon its programming, rear wiper and washer request messages received from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the rear wiper motor park switch. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) is connected to battery current from a fuse in the PDC through a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to battery current from a fuse in the PDC through a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to ground at all times. The rear wiper relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Component ID: 396 Component : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12324 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12325 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 396 Component : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12326 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer fluid level switch is a single pole, single throw reed-type switch mounted just above the sump area near the bottom of the washer reservoir. Only the molded plastic switch mounting flange and the integral connector receptacle are visible when the switch is installed in the reservoir. A short nipple formation extends from the inner surface of the switch mounting flange, and a barb on the nipple near the switch mounting flange is pressed through a rubber grommet seal installed in the mounting hole of the reservoir. A molded plastic float rides saddle-like over a molded plastic beam that extends axially from the switch mounting flange. A small permanent magnet is secured in a receptacle on the top of the float, and the reed switch is concealed within the beam. A diagnostic resistor is connected between the two switch terminals within the switch mounting flange. The washer fluid level switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12329 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid level switch uses a float to monitor the level of the washer fluid in the washer reservoir. The float contains a small magnet. When the float moves, the proximity of this magnet to a stationary reed switch within the beam formation of the switch changes. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir is at or above the float level, the float rises and the influence of the float magnetic field is removed from the reed switch causing the normally open reed switch contacts to open. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir falls below the level of the float, the float falls and the influence of the float magnetic field is applied to the reed switch, causing the contacts of the normally open reed switch to close. The washer fluid level switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The switch is connected in series between ground and the washer fluid switch sense input to the Front Control Module (FCM) located in the engine compartment near the battery. The FCM monitors the switch return signal and is programmed to respond to three consecutive open switch readings by sending an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC responds to this message by illuminating the washer fluid indicator and by sounding an audible chime tone warning. The washer fluid level switch and the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls and communication related to washer fluid level switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach between the front of the left front wheel house splash shield and the front bumper support to access the rearward facing lower surface of the washer reservoir (1). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the washer fluid level switch (5) connector receptacle. 4. Disconnect the front washer hose from the inboard outlet nipple (3) of the washer pump/motor unit (2) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 5. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. 6. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 7. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12332 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (1). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the washer fluid level switch (5) through the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be oriented downward. 4. Reconnect the wire harness connector to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the front washer hose to the inboard outlet nipple (3) of the washer pump/motor unit (2). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A washer fluid indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area below and to the left of the speedometer needle hub. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. However, on vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) the washer fluid indicator in the odometer VFD is electronically suppressed so as not to duplicate indications that are provided by the EVIC. The washer fluid indicator consists of the text LOWASH, which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the odometer VFD unit. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The washer fluid indicator appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The washer fluid indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12337 Washer Fluid Level Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator that the fluid level in the washer reservoir is low. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM or Power Distribution Center/PDC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The washer fluid indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD washer fluid indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the washer fluid indicator for the following reasons: - Washer Fluid Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM indicating that a low washer condition has been detected for 60 consecutive seconds, the washer fluid indicator is illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives lamp-OFF messages for 60 consecutive seconds from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the washer fluid indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the FCM. The FCM continually monitors the washer fluid level switch in the washer reservoir to determine the level of the washer fluid. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For proper diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to washer fluid indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations Washer Fluid Level Switch: Locations Component ID: 396 Component : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12341 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12342 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 396 Component : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WASHER FLUID LEVEL-FRONT REAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 FCM SENSOR RETURN G180 20VT/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W1 20BR/TN Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 12343 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer fluid level switch is a single pole, single throw reed-type switch mounted just above the sump area near the bottom of the washer reservoir. Only the molded plastic switch mounting flange and the integral connector receptacle are visible when the switch is installed in the reservoir. A short nipple formation extends from the inner surface of the switch mounting flange, and a barb on the nipple near the switch mounting flange is pressed through a rubber grommet seal installed in the mounting hole of the reservoir. A molded plastic float rides saddle-like over a molded plastic beam that extends axially from the switch mounting flange. A small permanent magnet is secured in a receptacle on the top of the float, and the reed switch is concealed within the beam. A diagnostic resistor is connected between the two switch terminals within the switch mounting flange. The washer fluid level switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12346 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid level switch uses a float to monitor the level of the washer fluid in the washer reservoir. The float contains a small magnet. When the float moves, the proximity of this magnet to a stationary reed switch within the beam formation of the switch changes. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir is at or above the float level, the float rises and the influence of the float magnetic field is removed from the reed switch causing the normally open reed switch contacts to open. When the fluid level in the washer reservoir falls below the level of the float, the float falls and the influence of the float magnetic field is applied to the reed switch, causing the contacts of the normally open reed switch to close. The washer fluid level switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The switch is connected in series between ground and the washer fluid switch sense input to the Front Control Module (FCM) located in the engine compartment near the battery. The FCM monitors the switch return signal and is programmed to respond to three consecutive open switch readings by sending an electronic washer fluid indicator lamp-ON message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC responds to this message by illuminating the washer fluid indicator and by sounding an audible chime tone warning. The washer fluid level switch and the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer fluid level switch or the electronic controls and communication related to washer fluid level switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The washer fluid level switch can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach between the front of the left front wheel house splash shield and the front bumper support to access the rearward facing lower surface of the washer reservoir (1). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the washer fluid level switch (5) connector receptacle. 4. Disconnect the front washer hose from the inboard outlet nipple (3) of the washer pump/motor unit (2) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 5. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed nipple of the washer fluid level switch out of the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. 6. Remove the switch from the reservoir. 7. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the mounting hole in the washer reservoir and discard. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Washer Fluid Level Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12349 Washer Fluid Level Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer fluid level switch mounting hole in the washer reservoir (1). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Insert the nipple formation of the washer fluid level switch (5) through the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the switch mounting flange until the barbed nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. The flat edge of the switch mounting flange should be oriented downward. 4. Reconnect the wire harness connector to the switch connector receptacle. 5. Reconnect the front washer hose to the inboard outlet nipple (3) of the washer pump/motor unit (2). 6. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Hose: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT The front washer plumbing consists of a small diameter rubber hose (4) that is routed along with the rear washer hose (3) from the washer reservoir (6) under the left front fender (2) ahead of the left front wheel to the engine compartment. Both hoses are attached to their respective front or rear outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (5) near the bottom of the reservoir. The hoses are then secured by a retainer to the underside of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) bracket (1) above the wheel house splash shield before entering the left side of the engine compartment behind the PDC. In the engine compartment, both hoses are secured by a retainer near the dash panel to the side support member for the left front fender (5). The two hoses are routed separately from this point. The front hose (4) is routed up toward the hood (3), while the rear hose (6) is routed through a grommet and a hole in the dash panel into the passenger compartment. The front hose is secured by molded plastic retainers near the right end of the cowl panel to the hood hinge bracket and to the underside of the hood panel reinforcement. A molded rubber tee fitting provides the take out for the left washer nozzle (2), and a molded rubber elbow terminate provides the connection to the right washer nozzle (1). Washer hose is available for service only as roll stock, which must then be cut to length. The molded plastic washer hose fittings cannot be repaired. If these fittings are ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced. Rear REAR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12354 The rear washer plumbing consists of a small diameter rubber hose that is routed along with the front washer hose from the washer reservoir under the left front fender ahead of the left front wheel to the engine compartment. Both hoses are attached to their respective front or rear outlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit near the bottom of the reservoir. The hoses are then secured by retainers to the back of the condenser shroud and the underside of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) bracket above the wheel house splash shield before entering the left side of the engine compartment behind the PDC. In the engine compartment, both hoses are secured by a retainer near the dash panel to the side support member for the left front fender. The two hoses are routed separately from this point. The front hose is routed up toward the hood, while the rear hose (2) is routed through a grommet and a hole in the dash panel (3) into the passenger compartment. The hose is then routed below the instrument panel to the left cowl side inner panel and up the left inner A-pillar (4). Midway up the A-pillar the hose is connected with a molded plastic in-line fitting to the headliner hose (1). The headliner hose (2) large rubber grommet is secured above the headliner (3) from the A-pillar to the upper liftgate opening inner panel (4). Near the center of the liftgate, the hose passes through a small rubber grommet in a clearance hole in the upper liftgate inner panel and through the washer nozzle mounting hole in the liftgate outer panel to the rear washer nozzle. Washer hose is available for service only as roll stock, which must then be cut to length. The molded plastic washer hose fittings and routing clips cannot be repaired. If these fittings or clips are ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12355 Windshield Washer Hose: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT Washer fluid in the washer reservoir is pressurized and fed by the washer pump/motor unit through the front washer system plumbing and fittings to the two front washer nozzles. Whenever routing the washer hose or a wire harness containing a washer hose, it must be routed away from hot, sharp, or moving parts; and, sharp bends that might pinch the hose must be avoided. Rear REAR Washer fluid in the washer reservoir is pressurized and fed by the washer pump/motor unit through the rear washer system plumbing and fittings to the rear washer nozzle located on the liftgate outer panel above the liftgate glass. Whenever routing the washer hose or a wire harness containing a washer hose, it must be routed away from hot, sharp, or moving parts; and, sharp bends that might pinch the hose must be avoided. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Pump: Locations Component ID: 208 Component : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Connector: Name : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 12359 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 12360 Windshield Washer Pump: Diagrams Component ID: 208 Component : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Connector: Name : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W20 18BR/YL 2 FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL W10 18BR Component Location - 2 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 12361 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Pump: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer pump/motor unit is located on the rearward facing side of the washer reservoir, in the left front fender wheel house ahead of the front wheel and the left front wheel house splash shield. A small permanently lubricated and sealed reversible electric motor (3) is coupled to the rotor-type washer pump (4). The use of an integral valve body (7) allows the washer pump/motor unit to provide washer fluid to either the front or the rear washer systems, depending upon the direction of the pump impeller rotation. An inlet nipple (6) on the pump housing passes through a rubber grommet seal/filter screen installed in a dedicated mounting hole of the washer reservoir sump. The filter screen prevents most debris from entering the pump housing. When the pump is installed in the reservoir the front barbed outlet nipple (5) on the pump valve body housing connects the unit to the front washer hose, and the rear barbed outlet nipple (8) connects the unit to the rear washer hose. The letters F and R molded into the valve body housing adjacent to each nipple provide further clarification of the nipple assignments. The washer pump/motor unit is retained on the reservoir by the interference fit between the pump inlet nipple and the grommet seal, and by a snap post (2) at the top of the pump motor housing that is engaged into a receptacle on the reservoir which is a light snap fit. An integral connector receptacle (1) on the top of the motor housing connects the unit to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The washer pump/motor unit cannot be repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire washer pump/motor unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12364 Windshield Washer Pump: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer pump/motor unit features a reversible electric motor. The direction of the motor is controlled by hard wired outputs from the Front Control Module (FCM). When battery current and ground are applied to the two pump motor terminals, the motor rotates in one direction. When the polarity of these connections is reversed, the motor rotates in the opposite direction. When the pump motor is energized, the rotor-type pump pressurizes the washer fluid and forces it through one of the two pump outlet nipples, and into the front or rear washer plumbing. The FCM controls the hard wired outputs to the pump motor based upon electronic washer request messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC monitors a resistor multiplexed input from the front washer switch circuitry contained within the multi-function switch, and electronic rear washer switch status messages received over the CAN data bus from the A/C-heater control on the instrument panel to determine the proper washer request message to send. Whenever the low washer fluid indicator is illuminated, the EMIC is programmed to suppress all rear washer requests in order to give priority to the need for forward visibility. Washer fluid is gravity-fed from the washer reservoir to the inlet port of the washer pump housing. An integral valve body is located in a housing on the outlet port side (2) of the pump housing. A diaphragm (4) in this valve body controls which washer system plumbing receives the washer fluid being pressurized by the pump. When the pump is not operating the diaphragm is biased to close all washer fluid flow in the rear washer system and, in this way it also performs the function of the rear washer system check valve. When the pump impeller (1) rotates in the counterclockwise direction (viewed from the bottom), the biased diaphragm is sealing off the rear washer system outlet and nipple so the pressurized washer fluid is pushed out through the pump front outlet port and the front washer outlet nipple (5). When the pump impeller rotates in the clockwise direction (viewed from the bottom), pressurized washer fluid is pushed out through the pump rear outlet port and moves the diaphragm to open the rear washer outlet nipple and seal off the front washer outlet nipple, then the pressurized washer fluid is pushed out through the rear washer outlet nipple (3). The washer pump/motor unit and the hard wired motor control circuits from the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer pump/motor unit or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the front and rear wiper and washer system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer pump/motor unit or the electronic controls and communication related to washer pump/motor unit operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The washer pump/motor unit can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach between the front of the left front wheel house splash shield and the front bumper support to access the rearward facing lower surface of the washer reservoir (1). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the top of the washer pump/motor unit (2). 4. Disconnect the front washer hose from the inboard pump outlet nipple (3) and allow the washer fluid to drain into a clean container for reuse. 5. Disconnect the rear washer hose from the outboard pump outlet nipple (4). 6. Grasp the top of the washer pump/motor housing and pull it firmly rearward far enough to disengage the snap post on the top of the motor from the receptacle in the reservoir. 7. Grasp the lower part of the washer pump/motor housing and, using a back and forth twisting action, pull the unit upward from the reservoir far enough to disengage the pump inlet nipple from the rubber grommet seal/filter screen in the reservoir. 8. Remove the rubber grommet seal/filter screen from the washer pump mounting hole in the reservoir and discard. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12367 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal/filter screen into the washer pump mounting hole of the washer reservoir (1). Always use a new rubber grommet seal/filter screen on the reservoir. 2. Position the inlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (2) to the rubber grommet seal/filter screen in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press downward on the lower part of the washer pump firmly and evenly until the inlet nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal/filter screen in the reservoir. 4. Align the snap post on the top of the motor housing with the snap post receptacle in the washer reservoir. 5. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the top of motor housing until the post snaps into the receptacle. 6. Reconnect the rear washer hose to the outboard pump outlet nipple (4). 7. Reconnect the front washer hose to the inboard pump outlet nipple (3). 8. Reconnect the wire harness connector to the top of the pump motor. 9. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid drained from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Reservoir: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The molded plastic washer fluid reservoir is integral to the engine coolant overflow bottle located on the left end of the air conditioning condenser module in the left front corner of the engine compartment. A single washer fluid reservoir is used for both the front and rear washer systems. A bright yellow plastic filler cap with a rubber seal and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Windshield Washer and the text WASHER FLUID ONLY molded into it snaps over the open end of the filler neck. The cap hinges on and is secured to a molded-in hook formation on the top of the reservoir just behind the filler neck when it is removed for inspecting or adjusting the fluid level in the reservoir. There are separate, dedicated holes on the lower rearward facing side of the reservoir provided for the mounting of the washer/pump motor unit and the washer fluid level switch. A snap post receptacle for the washer pump is molded into the reservoir to allow for mounting of the washer pump/motor unit without the use of fasteners. The washer reservoir is serviced only as a unit with the engine coolant reserve bottle. The washer reservoir cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the coolant reserve bottle/washer reservoir unit must be replaced. The grommet seals for the washer pump/motor unit and the washer fluid level switch, and the filler cap are each available for individual service replacement. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12372 Windshield Washer Reservoir: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid reservoir provides a secure, on-vehicle storage location for a large reserve of washer fluid for operation of the front and rear washer systems. The washer reservoir filler neck provides a clearly marked and readily accessible point from which to add washer fluid to the reservoir. The washer/pump motor unit is located in a sump area near the bottom of the reservoir to be certain that washer fluid will be available to the pump as the fluid level in the reservoir becomes depleted. The washer fluid level switch is mounted just above the sump area of the reservoir so that there will be adequate warning to the vehicle operator that the washer fluid level is low, before the front washer system will no longer operate. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) is programmed to suppress rear washer system operation upon illumination of the low washer fluid indicator so that the front washers can remain operational until the fluid level can be replenished. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT The fluidic front washer nozzles (2) are constructed of molded plastic. Each nozzle has two integral latches that secure them in dedicated holes in the hood panel near the base of the windshield. A check valve is integral to each front washer nozzle. The domed upper surface of the washer nozzle is visible on the outside of the hood panel, and the nozzle orifice (1) is oriented towards the windshield glass. The washer plumbing fittings (4) for the washer nozzles extend below the hood panel and are accessible from the engine compartment. The front washer nozzles cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced. Rear REAR The rear washer nozzle (3) is a fluidic-type unit constructed of molded plastic. The nozzle is secured by a snap fit in a dedicated mounting hole in the liftgate outer panel above the liftgate glass with the orifice (5) aimed downward. A rubber gasket (2) seals the nozzle to the outside of the liftgate panel. The back of the nozzle includes an integral alignment feature (4), an engagement tab (1), a latch feature (6) and the washer plumbing nipple (7) which are all concealed between the liftgate inner and outer panels when the nozzle is installed. The rear washer nozzle latch feature is a one time component, and will be damaged if the nozzle is removed from its mounting hole for service. The rear washer nozzle unit cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire nozzle unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12377 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The two front washer nozzles are designed to dispense washer fluid into the wiper pattern area on the outside of the windshield glass. Pressurized washer fluid is fed to each nozzle from the washer reservoir by the washer pump/motor unit through a single hose, which is attached to a barbed nipple on each washer nozzle below the hood panel. A fluidic matrix within the washer nozzle causes the pressurized washer fluid to be emitted from the nozzle orifice as an oscillating stream to more effectively cover a larger area of the glass to be cleaned. The integral check valve prevents washer fluid from draining out of the washer supply hoses back to the washer reservoir. This drain-back would result in a delay from when the washer pump is energized until washer fluid was dispensed through the nozzles. Such a drain-back condition could also result in water, dirt, or other outside contaminants being siphoned into the washer system through the washer nozzle orifice. This water could subsequently freeze and plug the nozzle, while other contaminants could interfere with proper nozzle operation and cause improper nozzle spray patterns. When the washer pump pressurizes and pumps washer fluid from the reservoir through the washer plumbing, the fluid pressure unseats a diaphragm from over a sump well within the nozzle. With the diaphragm unseated, washer fluid is allowed to flow through the washer nozzle. When the washer pump stops operating, the diaphragm seats over the sump well in the valve and fluid flow in either direction within the washer plumbing is prevented. Rear REAR The rear washer nozzle is designed to dispense washer fluid into the wiper pattern area on the outside of the liftgate glass. Pressurized washer fluid is fed to the nozzle from the washer reservoir by the washer pump/motor unit through a single hose, which is attached to a barbed nipple on the back of the rear washer nozzle. A fluidic matrix within the washer nozzle causes the pressurized washer fluid to be emitted from the nozzle orifice as an oscillating stream to more effectively cover a larger area of the glass to be cleaned. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT 1. Insert a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool between the front or rear edge of the washer nozzle (1) and the hood panel (2) to depress one of the nozzle latches. 2. Holding the latch depressed, lift upward on the same edge of the nozzle to disengage it from the hood. 3. Pull the nozzle away from the hood far enough to access and disconnect the hose from the barbed nipple of the nozzle. 4. Remove the nozzle from the top of the hood panel. Rear REAR NOTE: The rear washer nozzle latch feature is a one time component, and will be damaged if the nozzle is removed from its mounting hole for service. If removed from its mounting hole for any reason, the rear washer nozzle must be replaced with a new unit. 1. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry at the bottom of the rear washer nozzle (2) to release the latch feature that secures it in the mounting hole of the liftgate outer panel (3). 2. Pull the rear washer nozzle out from the liftgate outer panel far enough to access the washer hose (1). 3. Disconnect the hose from the barbed nipple on the back of the nozzle. 4. Cut 4 to 6 millimeters (0.15 to 0.23 inch) from the end of the hose to ensure a good fit to the replacement washer nozzle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12380 5. Discard the nozzle. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12381 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT 1. Position the front washer nozzle (1) near the mounting hole on the outside of the hood panel (2). 2. Reconnect the washer hose to the barbed nipple of the nozzle. 3. Insert the nozzle into the mounting hole. 4. Using hand pressure, push firmly and evenly on the top of the nozzle until the integral latches lock into place on the underside of the outer hood panel. Rear REAR NOTE: The rear washer nozzle latch feature is a one time component, and will be damaged if the nozzle is removed from its mounting hole for service. If removed from its mounting hole for any reason, the rear washer nozzle must be replaced with a new unit. 1. Position the new rear washer nozzle (2) to the mounting hole in the liftgate outer panel (3). Be certain that the rubber gasket is in position on the back of the nozzle. 2. Reconnect the washer hose (1) to the barbed nipple on the back of the nozzle. 3. Push the hose and nozzle nipple into the mounting hole in the liftgate outer panel and engage the tab located above the nipple with the upper edge of the hole. 4. Using hand pressure, push firmly and evenly on the lower edge of the nozzle until it snaps into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Arm: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT The front wiper arms are the rigid members located between the wiper pivots protruding from the cowl plenum cover/grille panel near the base of the windshield and the wiper blades on the windshield glass. Both wiper arms feature an over-center hinge (3) that allows easy access to the windshield glass for cleaning. The wiper arms each have a die cast metal pivot end. The left arm has a large tapered mounting hole on the pivot end that is secured by a nut to the left wiper pivot. The unique, articulated right wiper arm has two pivoting links attached to the arm pivot end. A drive link (5) is secured by a nut to the right wiper pivot and is the unit that drives the right wiper arm. The articulating link (6) is secured by a nut to a drone pivot located outboard of the right wiper pivot on the wiper module bracket. The right wiper arm pivot end and the connections of both links to the arm are concealed beneath a molded black plastic appearance cover (4). The wide end of a tapered, stamped steel channel (2) hinges on and is secured with a hinge pin to the blade end of both the right and left wiper arm pivot ends. One end of a long, rigid, stamped steel strap (1), with a small hole near its pivot end, is riveted and crimped within the narrow end of the stamped steel channel. The tip of the wiper blade end of this strap is bent back under itself to form a small hook. Concealed within the stamped steel channel, one end of a long spring is engaged with a wire hook on the underside of the die cast pivot end, while the other end of the spring is hooked through the small hole in the steel strap. The entire wiper arm has a satin black finish applied to all of its visible surfaces. A wiper arm cannot be adjusted or repaired. If damaged or ineffective, the entire wiper arm unit must be replaced. Rear REAR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12386 The rear wiper arm (1) is the rigid member located between the rear wiper motor output shaft that protrudes from the outer liftgate panel near the base of the liftgate glass opening and the rear wiper blade (2). The wiper arm is constructed of molded black plastic. A hinged pivot end is also molded plastic, except for a tapered metal sleeve that receives the wiper motor output shaft and a plate where the arm retaining nut is supported. A molded black plastic cap (4) with an engagement tab on one side and a snap feature on the other fits in the hole over the wiper arm retaining nut to conceal the nut and mounting hole following wiper arm installation. The wiper arm hinge, pivot block and tension spring are all concealed on the underside of the wide end of the arm. The matching wiper blade unit has two pivot pins that latch into a receptacle concealed within the narrow end of the arm. The rear wiper arm cannot be adjusted or repaired. If damaged or ineffective, the entire wiper arm unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12387 Wiper Arm: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front wiper arms are designed to mechanically transmit the motion from the wiper pivots to the wiper blades. The wiper arm must be properly indexed to the wiper pivot in order to maintain the proper wiper blade travel on the glass. The combination of the drive link, articulating link, wiper arm pivot end, the drone pivot and the wiper module bracket creates a four link system that articulates the wiping action of the right wiper arm to effectively clear a larger area of the windshield glass. The tapered mounting hole in the left wiper arm pivot end or in the right wiper arm links interlock with the serrations on the tapered outer circumference of the wiper pivot shafts and the drone pivot, allowing positive engagement and finite adjustment of these connections. The mounting nuts lock the wiper arms to the threaded studs of the pivot shafts. The spring-loaded wiper arm hinge controls the down-force applied through the tip of the wiper arm to the wiper blade on the glass. The hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm provides a cradle for securing and latching the wiper blade pivot block to the wiper arm. Rear REAR The rear wiper arm is designed to mechanically transmit the motion from the rear wiper motor output shaft to the rear wiper blade. The wiper arm must be properly indexed to the motor output shaft in order to maintain the proper wiper blade travel on the glass. The tapered hole in the wiper arm pivot end interlocks with the serrations on the outer circumference of the tapered motor output shaft, allowing positive engagement and finite adjustment of this connection. A hex nut secures the wiper arm pivot end to the threads on the rear wiper motor output shaft and the plastic nut cap snaps over this connection for a neat appearance. The spring-loaded wiper arm hinge controls the down-force applied through the tip of the wiper arm to the wiper blade on the glass. The receptacle formation on the tip of the wiper arm provides a cradle for securing and latching the wiper blade to the wiper arm. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT 1. Lift the front wiper arm to its over-center position to hold the wiper blade off of the glass and relieve the spring tension on the wiper arm to wiper pivot shaft connection. 2. Remove the nut or nuts (2) that secure the front wiper arm (1) or links to the pivot shaft or shafts (3 and 4). 3. If necessary, use a suitable battery terminal puller (3) to disengage the front wiper arm (1) or links from the pivot shaft (2) or shafts. 4. Remove the wiper arm pivot end or links from the pivot shaft or shafts. Rear REAR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12390 1. Insert the tip of a small screwdriver into the notch on the large end of the rear wiper arm (1) and carefully pry the plastic cap (6) until it unsnaps from the mounting hole on the pivot end of the arm. 2. Remove the nut (5) that secures the arm to the rear wiper motor output shaft (3). CAUTION: The use of a battery terminal puller when removing the rear wiper arm is NOT recommended as this may damage the rear wiper arm. 3. Use a slight rocking action to remove the rear wiper arm from the output shaft. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12391 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT NOTE: Be certain that the wiper motor is in the park position before attempting to install the front wiper arms. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and move the multi-function switch control knob to its Off position. If the wiper pivots move, wait until they stop moving, then turn the ignition switch back to the Off position. The front wiper motor is now in its park position. 1. The front wiper arms (1) must be indexed to the pivot shafts (3 and 4) with the front wiper motor in the park position to be properly installed. Position the wiper arm pivot end or links onto the pivot shafts so that the lower edge of the wiper blade is aligned with the wiper alignment lines (5) concealed in the upper margin of the lower windshield blackout area. 2. Once the wiper blade is aligned, lift the front wiper arm away from the windshield slightly to relieve the spring tension on the pivot end or links and push the arm or links down over the pivot shaft or shafts. 3. Install and tighten the nut or nuts (2) that secure the wiper arm or links to the pivot shaft or shafts. Tighten the nuts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 4. Wet the windshield glass, then operate the front wipers. Turn the wiper switch to the Off position, then check for the correct wiper arm position and readjust as required. Rear REAR NOTE: Be certain that the rear wiper motor is in the park position before attempting to install the wiper arm. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and move the rear wiper switch to its Off position. If the wiper motor output shaft moves, wait until it stops moving, then turn the ignition switch back to the Off position. The wiper motor is now in its park position. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 12392 1. The rear wiper arm (1) must be indexed to the motor output shaft (3) with the rear wiper motor in the park position to be properly installed. Position the rear wiper arm pivot end onto the motor output shaft so that the wiper blade is aligned with the alignment mark (4) located in the upper margin of the lower liftgate glass blackout area on the lower right corner of the liftgate glass. 2. With the wiper arm properly indexed, push the tapered mounting hole on the pivot end of the wiper arm down over the output shaft. 3. Install and tighten the nut (5) that secures the arm to the shaft. Tighten the nut to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.). 4. Wet the liftgate glass, then operate the rear wiper. Turn the rear wiper switch to the Off position, then check for the correct wiper arm position and adjust as required. 5. Insert the tab of the plastic cap (6) into the mounting hole on the side opposite the notch and press firmly on the notched side of the cap until it snaps into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Blade: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Each front wiper blade is secured by an integral latching pivot block (3) to the hook formation on the tip of each wiper arm, and rests on the glass near the base of the windshield when the wipers are not in operation. The wiper blade consists of the following components: - Superstructure (1) - The superstructure includes several stamped steel bridges and links with claw formations that grip the wiper blade element. Also included in this unit is the latching, molded plastic pivot block that secures the superstructure to the wiper arm. All of the metal components of the wiper blade have a satin black finish applied. - Element (2) - The wiper element or squeegee is the resilient rubber member of the wiper blade that contacts the glass. - Flexor (7) - The flexor is a rigid metal component running along the length of each side of the wiper element where it is gripped by the claws (6) of the superstructure. The flexor is also designed to provide a predetermined curvature that best fits the curvature of glass throughout the wipe pattern. The right wiper blade is 53.00 centimeters (20.87 inches) long, and the left blade is 65.09 centimeters (25.63 inches) long. Both have non-replaceable rubber elements (squeegees). The wiper blades cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective, worn, or damaged the entire wiper blade unit must be replaced. Rear REAR The rear wiper blade is secured by two integral latching pivot pins (1) to a receptacle in the small end at the tip of the rear wiper arm, and rests near the base of the liftgate glass when the wiper is not in operation. The rear wiper blade consists of the following components: - Superstructure (4) - The superstructure includes a molded black plastic bridge and plastic links with claw formations that grip the wiper blade element. Also included in this unit are the two latching pivot pins that secure the superstructure to the wiper arm. - Element (2) - The wiper element or squeegee is the resilient rubber member of the wiper blade that contacts the glass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12397 - Flexor (3) - The flexor is a rigid metal component running along the length of each side of the wiper element where it is gripped by the claws of the superstructure. The rear wiper blade is 30.10 centimeters (11.85 inches) long with a replaceable element (squeegee). The wiper blade superstructure cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective, worn, or damaged the entire wiper blade unit must be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 12398 Wiper Blade: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The wiper blades are moved back and forth across the glass by the wiper arms when the wipers are being operated. The wiper blade superstructure is the flexible frame that grips the wiper blade element and evenly distributes the force of the spring-loaded wiper arm along the length of the element. The combination of the wiper arm force and the flexibility of the superstructure makes the element conform to and maintain proper contact with the glass, even as the blade is moved over the varied curvature that may be encountered across the glass surface. The wiper element flexor provides the claws of the blade superstructure with a rigid, yet flexible component on the element which can be gripped. The rubber element is designed to be stiff enough to maintain an even cleaning edge as it is drawn across the glass, yet resilient enough to conform to the glass surface and flip from one cleaning edge to the other each time the wiper blade changes directions. Rear REAR The rear wiper blade is moved back and forth across the liftgate glass by the wiper arm when the rear wiper system is in operation. The wiper blade superstructure is the flexible frame that grips the wiper blade element and evenly distributes the force of the spring-loaded wiper arm along the length of the element. The combination of the wiper arm force and the flexibility of the superstructure makes the element conform to and maintain proper contact with the glass, even as the blade is moved over the varied curvature found across the glass surface. The wiper element flexor provides the claws of the blade superstructure with a rigid, yet flexible component on the element which can be gripped. The rubber element is designed to be stiff enough to maintain an even cleaning edge as it is drawn across the glass, but resilient enough to conform to the glass surface and flip from one cleaning edge to the other each time the wiper blade changes directions. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wiper Element Replacement Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Rear Wiper Element Replacement REAR WIPER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT 1. Remove the rear wiper blade (3) from the wiper arm. 2. Grasp one of the wiper blade links (4) firmly with one hand, and grasp the wiper element (1) and flexor (2) midway between the two sets of claws (5) for that link with the other hand. 3. Pull the element and flexor away from the link until they flex enough to disengage them from the end pair of claws. 4. Slide the element and flexor toward the loose end to disengage them from the remaining sets of claws. 5. Reverse this process to install a new element and flexors into the wiper blade. 6. Reinstall the wiper blade into the wiper arm. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wiper Element Replacement > Page 12401 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT CAUTION: Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. NOTE: The notched end of the wiper element flexor should always be oriented towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 1. Lift the wiper arm (2) to raise the wiper blade and element (6) off of the glass, until the wiper arm hinge is in its over-center position. 2. To remove the blade from the arm, depress the latch release tab (4) on the pivot block (3) under the tip of the arm and slide the blade away from the tip towards the pivot end of the arm far enough to disengage the pivot block from the hook formation (5) on the end of the arm. 3. Extract the hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade superstructure (1) just ahead of the pivot block. 4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. Rear REAR 1. Lift the rear wiper arm (3) to raise the wiper blade (1) and element off of the liftgate glass. 2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, squeeze the two latch release tabs (2) together while pulling the blade straight out from the receptacle in the end of the arm. CAUTION: Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass and the wiper arm may be damaged. 3. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wiper Element Replacement > Page 12402 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT CAUTION: Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. NOTE: The notched end of the wiper element flexor should always be oriented towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 1. Lift the wiper arm (2) off of the windshield glass, until the wiper arm hinge is in its over-center position. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook formation (5) on the tip of the arm with the notched end of the wiper element flexor oriented towards the end of the wiper arm that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 3. Insert the hook formation on the tip of the arm through the opening in the blade superstructure (1) ahead of the pivot block (3) far enough to engage the pivot block into the hook. 4. Slide the pivot block up into the hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm until the latch release tab (4) snaps into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade and element (6) onto the glass. Rear REAR 1. Lift the rear wiper arm (3) off of the liftgate glass. 2. Position the rear wiper blade (1) with the latching pivot pins aligned with the receptacle on the tip of the arm. 3. Slide the wiper blade pivot pins into the receptacle until they snap into place. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Wiper Element Replacement > Page 12403 4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Rear Window Wiper Wiper Motor: Locations Motor-Rear Window Wiper Component ID: 189 Component : MOTOR-REAR WINDOW WIPER Connector: Name : MOTOR-REAR WINDOW WIPER Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 2 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 3 GROUND Z945 18BK Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Rear Window Wiper > Page 12408 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Rear Window Wiper > Page 12409 Wiper Motor: Locations Motor-Windshield Wiper Component ID: 201 Component : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit 1 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 2 GROUND Z103 14BK/WT 3 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 4 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Rear Window Wiper > Page 12410 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Wiper Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS: provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12413 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12414 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12415 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD -Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD -Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX -Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12416 MTX -Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive AT -Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT -Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC -Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC -Double Over Head Cam Engine Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export -Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12417 Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12418 IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations. Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Spice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12419 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12420 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12421 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12422 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in the connector removal section. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure). 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12423 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12424 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL PROBING TOOL PACKAGE 6807 TERMINAL PICK TOOL SET 6680 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12425 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOLS 6932 AND 8638 TERMINAL REMOVING TOOL 6934 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12426 Wiper Motor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12427 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested. 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12428 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12429 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12430 Wiper Motor: Connector Views Motor-Rear Window Wiper Component ID: 189 Component : MOTOR-REAR WINDOW WIPER Connector: Name : MOTOR-REAR WINDOW WIPER Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Description Circuit 1 REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL W13 16LG/BR 2 REAR WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W17 18BR/LG 3 GROUND Z945 18BK Component Location - 52 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12431 Motor-Windshield Wiper Component ID: 201 Component : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Description Circuit Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 12432 1 FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE W7 20BR/GY 2 GROUND Z103 14BK/WT 3 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT 4 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR Component Location - 9 Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Wiper Motor Description REAR The rear wiper motor (2) is concealed within the liftgate, below the liftgate glass and behind the liftgate inner trim panel. The end of the motor output shaft (1) that extends through the liftgate outer panel to drive the rear wiper arm and blade is the only visible component of the rear wiper motor. A rubber bezel and grommet is engaged within the output shaft hole of the liftgate outer panel and seals the output shaft where it passes through the panel. An integral connector receptacle (4) connects the rear wiper motor to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the liftgate wire harness. The rear wiper motor consists of the following major components: - Bracket (5) - The rear wiper motor bracket consists of a molded plastic mounting plate for the wiper motor that is secured with screws to the wiper motor housing, and through three rubber isolators (3) to the liftgate inner panel. - Motor - The single-speed permanent magnet rear wiper motor is secured with screws to the rear wiper motor bracket. The wiper motor includes an integral transmission, a motor output shaft, an automatic resetting circuit breaker, and the rear wiper motor park switch. The rear wiper motor cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any component of the motor is ineffective or damaged, the entire rear wiper motor unit must be replaced. The motor output shaft bezel and grommet, nut, and nut cover are available for individual service replacement. Operation REAR The rear wiper motor operation is controlled by the rear wiper relay, which controls battery current flow to the rear wiper motor brushes based upon control outputs from the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses internal programming, hard wired outputs from the rear wiper motor park switch, and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) and from rear wiper and washer switches in the heater-A/C control to determine when to energize or de-energize the rear wiper relay. The rear wiper motor park switch is a single pole, single throw, momentary switch within the wiper motor that is mechanically actuated by the wiper motor transmission components. The park switch alternately closes and opens a path to ground for the rear wiper motor control circuit input to the FCM, depending upon the position of the rear wiper blade on the liftgate glass. This feature allows the FCM to monitor the number of rear wiper motor cycles, as well as to keep the rear wiper relay energized long enough for the motor to complete its current wipe cycle after the wiper system or the ignition has been turned OFF, and to park the wiper blade in the lowest portion of the wipe pattern. The rear wiper motor is grounded at all times through a take out with an eyelet terminal connector in the body wire harness that is secured to a ground location in the passenger compartment. The automatic resetting circuit breaker protects the motor from overloads. The rear wiper motor transmission converts the rotary output of the wiper motor to the back and forth wiping motion of the rear wiper arm and blade on the liftgate glass. The hard wired inputs and outputs of the rear wiper motor may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the rear wiper motor, the EMIC, the FCM, the heater-A/C control, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication between these modules. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the rear wiper motor, the EMIC, the FCM, the heater-A/C control, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to rear wiper motor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Wiper Motor > Page 12435 Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Module-Windshield Wiper Description DESCRIPTION The front wiper module is secured with screws through four rubber grommet-type insulators (4) to the cowl plenum panel and the left front fender ledge. The module is located in the rear of the engine compartment where it is concealed beneath the molded plastic cowl plenum cover/grille panel between the base of the windshield and the rear edge of the hood panel. The ends of the pivot shafts protruding through openings in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel are the only visible components of the wiper module. The wiper module consists of the following major components: - Bracket (5) - The wiper module bracket is a single die cast aluminum unit that includes provisions for mounting the wiper motor and wiper pivots as well as for the for rubber insulators used in mounting the bracket to the vehicle. - Crank Arm (6) - The wiper motor crank arm is a stamped steel unit with an internally splined hole on the driven end that is secured to the wiper motor output shaft with a nut, and has a long ball stud secured to the drive end to accept the wiper linkage. - Linkage (3) - The two wiper linkage members are each constructed of stamped steel. A driver side drive link with a plastic socket-type bushing in the left end, and a plastic sleeve-type bushing in the right end. The socket bushing is snap-fit over the pivot ball stud on the left pivot lever arm, while the sleeve bushing is fit over the longer pivot stud on the wiper motor crank arm. The passenger side drive link has a plastic socket-type bushing on each end. One end of this drive link is snap-fit over the ball stud on the right pivot lever arm, while the other end is snap-fit over the top of the driver side drive link on the ball stud of the wiper motor crank arm. Motor (7) - The wiper motor is secured on the underside of the module bracket near the center with three screws. The wiper motor output shaft passes through a hole in the module bracket, where a nut secures the wiper motor crank arm to the motor output shaft. The two-speed permanent magnet wiper motor features an integral transmission, an internal park switch, and an internal Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) circuit breaker. - Pivots (1 and 2) - This module features two driven pivots (2) and one drone pivot (1) for the articulating link of the right wiper arm. The two driven wiper pivot shafts have lever arms with ball studs at their base to accept the wiper linkage. The upper end of all three pivot shafts has a threaded stud with a tapered and serrated area just below the threads to accept the left wiper arm or the right wiper arm links. The front wiper module cannot be adjusted or repaired. The front wiper motor is available for separate service replacement. If any other component of the module is ineffective or damaged, the entire front wiper module unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The front wiper module operation is controlled by the battery current inputs received by the wiper motor through the wiper on/off and wiper high/low relays. The wiper motor speed is controlled by current flow to either the low speed or the high speed set of brushes. The park switch is a single pole, single throw, momentary switch within the wiper motor that is mechanically actuated by the wiper motor transmission components. The park switch alternately opens and closes the wiper park switch sense circuit to ground, depending upon the position of the wipers on the glass. This feature allows the motor to complete its current wipe cycle after the wiper system has been turned OFF, and to park the wiper blades in the lowest portion of the wipe pattern. The automatic resetting circuit breaker protects the motor from overloads. The wiper motor crank arm, the two wiper linkage members, and the two driven wiper pivots mechanically convert the rotary output of the wiper motor to the back and forth wiping motion of the wiper arms and blades on the glass. The drone pivot provides an anchor point for the articulating link of the right wiper arm. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Wiper Motor > Page 12436 The hard wired inputs and outputs of the front wiper motor may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the front wiper motor or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the front wiper and washer system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the front wiper motor or the electronic controls and communication related to front wiper motor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor Front FRONT CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to, or pry on, the plastic drive link bushing. When removing the drive link from, or installing the drive link to the ball stud on the wiper motor crank arm, apply pressure to, or pry on, only the metal portions of the drive link around the bushing. If the bushing is damaged, the entire front wiper module MUST be replaced. CAUTION: Do not remove the crank arm nut from the wiper motor output shaft. The crank arm is indexed to the output shaft with the motor in the park position during the manufacturing process, but there are no provisions made for correctly indexing this connection in the field. If the crank arm to output shaft indexing is incorrect, the entire front wiper module MUST be replaced. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove both front wiper arms from the wiper pivots. 3. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel from over the front wiper module. 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front wiper motor connector. 5. Disengage the socket bushing (3) of the right wiper drive link (2) from the ball stud on the wiper motor crank arm (5) using two large screwdrivers, one on each side of the ball stud. Pry between the crank arm and the metal portion of the drive link until the socket unsnaps from the ball. 6. Remove the sleeve bushing of the left wiper drive link (4) from the ball stud on the wiper motor crank arm. 7. While supporting the wiper motor (7) from the underside of the wiper module bracket (6), remove the three screws (1) that secure the motor to the bracket. 8. Remove the wiper motor and crank arm unit from the underside of the module bracket. Rear REAR Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor > Page 12439 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear wiper arm (1) from the rear wiper motor output shaft (3). NOTE: The output shaft bezel and grommet (2) does not have to be removed to remove the rear wiper motor from the liftgate. 3. Remove the trim panel from the liftgate inner panel (2). 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the rear wiper motor (3). 5. Remove the three screws (4) that secure the motor mounting bracket to the liftgate inner panel. 6. Remove the motor from the liftgate. 7. Remove the bezel and rubber grommet on the outer liftgate panel from the output shaft housing. Be certain to take proper precautions to protect the outer liftgate panel and its paint finish from damage during this procedure. Front FRONT CAUTION: Do not apply pressure to, or pry on, the plastic drive link bushing. When removing the drive link from, or installing the drive link to the ball stud on the wiper motor crank arm, apply pressure to, or pry on, only the metal portions of the drive link around the bushing. If the bushing is damaged, the entire front wiper module MUST be replaced. CAUTION: Do not remove the crank arm nut from the wiper motor output shaft. The crank arm is indexed to the output shaft with the motor in the park position during the manufacturing process, but there are no provisions made for correctly indexing this connection in the field. If the crank arm to output shaft indexing is incorrect, the entire front wiper module MUST be replaced. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor > Page 12440 1. Position the front wiper motor (7) and crank arm (5) unit from the underside of the front wiper module bracket (6). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (1) that secure the motor to the bracket. Tighten the screws to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.). 3. Position the left wiper drive link (4) sleeve bushing onto the ball stud on the end of the motor crank arm. 4. Position the socket bushing (3) of the right wiper drive link (2) over the ball stud on the crank arm. 5. Place a short 19 millimeter or 3/4 inch socket over the capped side of the bushing as an installation tool. Then use large channel-lock pliers to apply enough pressure to the underside of the crank arm and the top of the socket to snap the bushing onto the ball stud. Do not apply pressure directly to the plastic bushing. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector to the wiper motor connector. 7. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel over the front wiper module. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 9. Turn the ignition switch to the On position, then turn the front wiper switch On and Off again to cycle the wiper motor and linkage to their natural park positions before reinstalling the front wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. 10. Reinstall both front wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. Rear REAR 1. If the output shaft bezel and grommet were removed from the outside of the liftgate, install the rubber bezel and grommet into the mounting hole of the liftgate outer panel. 2. Check to be certain that the three rivet nuts (1) used to secure the rear wiper motor and bracket unit (3) are properly installed in the liftgate inner Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor > Page 12441 panel (2), and that they are in good condition. 3. Position the motor into the liftgate as a unit. 4. Install and tighten the three screws (4) that secure the mounting bracket to the liftgate. Tighten the screws to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the wire harness connector to the motor connector receptacle. 6. Reinstall the trim panel onto the liftgate inner panel. 7. Reinstall the rear wiper arm (1) onto the output shaft (3). 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor > Page 12442 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Module-Windshield Wiper Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The front wiper motor can be removed from the wiper module without removing the module from the vehicle, and is available as a separate service component for this vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove both front wiper arms from the wiper pivots. 3. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel from over the front wiper module. 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) from the front wiper motor connector. 5. Remove the screw (3) that secures the front wiper module bracket (6) and the center bracket of the cowl grille support (7) to the cowl plenum panel (1). 6. Remove the three screws (2) that secure the module bracket to the cowl plenum panel and the left front fender ledge. 7. Remove the wiper module from the engine compartment as a unit. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor > Page 12443 1. Check to be certain that the rivet nut (4) used to secure the front wiper module (6) is properly installed in the support at the left front fender ledge, and that it is in good condition. 2. Position the front wiper module to the cowl plenum panel (1) as a unit. 3. Install and tighten the three screws (2) that secure the module bracket to the cowl plenum panel and the left front fender ledge. Tighten the screws to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.). 4. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the module bracket and the center bracket of the cowl grille support (7) to the cowl plenum panel. Tighten the screw to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the wire harness connector (5) to the front wiper motor connector. 6. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel over the front wiper module. 7. Reinstall both front wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Rear Wiper, High/Low, and On/Off Relays are located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper High/Low Component ID: 231 Component : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN PDC) 30 FUSED B(+) A951 14RD 85 HIGH/LOW WIPER RELAY CONTROL W2 20BR/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87 FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT W4 14BR/OR 87A FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT W3 14BR/WT Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 12449 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper On/Off Component ID: 232 Component : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 FUSED B(+) A951 14RD 85 ON/OFF WIPER RELAY CONTROL W5 20BR/LG 86 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87 FUSED B(+) A5 14RD/VT 87A GROUND Z902 14BK Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 12450 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper-Rear Rear Wiper Relay Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper High/Low Description DESCRIPTION The wiper high/low relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper high/low relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper high/low relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper high/low relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the front wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper high/low relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper high/low relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the output of the wiper on/off relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper high/low relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to the high speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay high speed output circuit, and is connected to the high speed brush whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to the low speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay low speed output circuit, and is connected to the low speed brush whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper high/low relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Durango 2wd Workshop Manual (V8-5.7L VIN 2 (2007)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 12453 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper On/Off Description DESCRIPTION The wiper on/off relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper on/off relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper on/off relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper on/off relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper on/off relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper on/off relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the common feed terminal of the wiper high/low relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper on/off relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit, and provides battery current to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to ground at all times through a take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness with an eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a screw to the front end sheet metal, and is connected to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper on/off relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information.